project manual - aafes.com food court furniture... · project manual volume 1 of 2 exchange food...

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 of 2 EXCHANGE FOOD COURT/ FURNITURE STORE & MALL UPGRADES MACDILL AIR FORCE BASE, FLORIDA AAFES PN: 0926-16-000003

CONTRACTS: COMBINED WORK – ALL TRADES BY:

DATE: 18 MAY 2018 SOLICITATION SPECIFICATIONS

Illinois Design Firm License Number 184-002661 Post Office Box 820 600 West Main Street ▪ Suite 2 Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5709 Fax 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5638

A R C H I T E C T S

EXCHANGE FOOD COURT/ FURNITURE STORE & MALL UPGRADES

MACDILL AIR FORCE BASE, FLORIDA AAFES PN: 0926-16-000003

ARCHITECT

h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS 600 West Main Street Suite 2

Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618 457 5709 Fax 457 5638

E-mail [email protected]

PROFESSIONAL CONSULTANTS

ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING Greenfield Environmental

432 3rd Street North St. Petersburg, Florida 33701

727 896 1266 Fax 896 1566 E- mail [email protected]

LAND SURVEYING Stantec

777 South Harbour Island Boulevard Suite 600

Tampa, Florida 33602 813 223 9500 Fax 223 0009

E- mail [email protected]

CIVIL ENGINEERING Mark B. Tyl, P.E.

369 Tallahassee Drive NE St. Petersburg, Florida 33702

813 924 3169 Fax N/A E- mail [email protected]

FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERING SSC Engineering, Inc. 18207 Edison Avenue

Chesterfield, Missouri 63005-3715 636 530 7770 Fax 530 7877


MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

413 West Main Street Post Office Box 581

Mt. Vernon, Illinois 62864 618 242 0473 Fax 242 2330


hmb PROJECT NO. 1609.0

18 MAY 2018

© 2018 h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS



ARCHITECT: h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS

Project Manual: Section 00860

All Sections of Division 1

Section 02070

Section 02282









SIGNATURE All Sections of Division 11

Section 12690

CURRENT DATE 18 May 2018

LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2018

Drawing Sheets: T-Sheets, DCA-1.10, CA-Sheets, D-Sheets, SA-Sheets, A-Sheets, EQ-Sheets & FS-Sheets

ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEER: Greenfield Environmental

Project Manual: Section 02083 w/Attachments

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 28 Feb 2019

Drawing Sheets: Attached to Section 02083

CIVIL ENGINEER: Mark B. Tyl, P.E.

Project Manual: Section 02300

Section 02740

Section 02750

Section 02923

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 28 Feb 2019

Drawing Sheets: DC-1.00, C-1.01, C-1.02, C-1.03 & C-5.00

FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER: SSC Engineering, Inc.

Project Manual: All Sections of Division 13

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Sep 2019 Drawing Sheets: Sheet FAD-Sheets, All FA-Sheets, All FPD-Sheets, All FP-Sheets, All LS-Sheets

MECHANICAL ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Project Manual: All Section of Division 15

SIGNATURE



Drawing Sheets: MD-Sheets, M-Sheets, PD-Sheets & P-Sheets

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Project Manual: All Sections of Division 16

SIGNATURE



Drawing Sheets: CU-1.00, ED-Sheets & E-Sheets

PROJECT MANUAL TOC – Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1



BIDDING REQUIREMENTS PAGES CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS List of Drawings 00860-4 SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Requirements of MacDill AFB 01000-7 Summary of Work 01010-26 Option Proposals 01015-8 Exchange (AAFES) Furnished & Installed Equipment 01017-6 Exchange (AAFES) Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment 01018-5 Unit Prices 01026-2 Substitutions Procedures (with CSI Form Attached) 01030-3 Cutting & Patching 01045-2 Grades, Lines & Levels 01051-1 Exchange (AAFES) Safety Policies & Procedures 01060-4 Exchange (AAFES) Safety Regulations & Codes 01090-9 Phasing 01140-2 Schedule of Values 01210-2 Exchange (AAFES) Progress Meetings 01220-2 Progress Payments 01230-3 Project Management & Coordination 01310-3 Construction Progress Schedules 01320-3 Exchange (AAFES) Weather Table 01331-2 Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals 01340-14 Quality Control 01400-3 Testing Laboratory Services 01410-4 Exchange (AAFES) Environmental Protection 01420-10 Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls 01500-10 Temporary Utilities 01510-6 Project Identification & Signs 01580-2 Exchange (AAFES) Field Offices & Sheds 01590-3 Material & Equipment 01600-2 Storage & Protection 01620-2 Systems Start-up 01650-3 Project Closeout (with DoD Form 1354 Attached) 01700-29 Cleaning 01710- 2 Project Record Documents 01720-2


DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

Selective Demolition 02070-13 Asbestos Abatement (with Report) 02083-77 Hazardous Waste Stream Assessment (with Report) 02181-8 Termite Control 02282-4 Earthwork 02300-12 Asphalt Concrete Paving 02740-8 Site Concrete Work 02750-9 Turf & Grasses (SOD) 02923-8

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE WORK

Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300-12 Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement 03354-12 Polished Concrete Floor Finish 03356-11

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

Unit Masonry 04200-19

DIVISION 5 – METALS

Structural Steel 05120-7 Steel Deck 05310- 4 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05400-9 Metal Fabrications 05500-15

DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS

Rough Carpentry 06100-7 Finish Carpentry 06200-6 Slatwall Panel Systems 06253-5 Fire Retardant Wood Treatment 06300-4 Architectural Woodwork 06400-11

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

Building Insulation 07210-4 Exterior Insulation & Finish Systems-Class PB 07240-10 Firestopping 07270-5 Cementitious Reinforced Panels 07470-4 Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only) 07536-7 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO) 07540-9 Flashing & Sheet Metal 07600-8 Building & Paving Joint Sealers 07920-6

DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS

Metal Doors & Frames 08100-7 Flush Wood Doors 08211-5 Access Doors 08305-4 Overhead Rolling Grilles 08331-4 Double Acting Doors 08380-3 Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts 08410-12 Automatic Entrance Doors 08460-11 Finish Hardware 08710-16 Glass & Glazing 08800-9


DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

Gypsum Drywall Systems 09250-10 Tile 09300-9 Bonded Terrazzo 09400-6 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09510-4 Resilient Tile Flooring 09650-7 Carpet 09680-6 Painting 09900-8 Wall Coverings 09950-4 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels (FRP) 09986-3

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Toilet Compartments 10155-4 Wall Surface Protection Systems 10265-4 Specialty Signs 10440-5 Metal Lockers 10500-3 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets & Accessories 10522-4 Fixed Sunshades & Canopies 10711-6 Toilet Accessories 10800-5

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

Food Service Equipment 11400-7 Used Cooking Oil Equipment 11410-6

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

Floor Mats & Frames 12690-3

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Fire Alarm & Mass Notification Systems 13851-12 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System 13915-10

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

General Provisions - Mechanical 15010-5 Cleaning, Testing and Adjusting 15013-2 Basic Materials and Methods 15050-9 Testing Piping Systems 15067-2 Insulation 15250-5 Plumbing 15400-6 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 15450-2 Hydronic Piping 15510-4 Refrigerant Piping and Specialties 15535-5 Fuel Fired Heaters 15620-3 Split-System Air-Conditioners 15670-3 Packaged Central-Station Air-Handling Units 15781-4 Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units 15782-5 Metal Ductwork 15815-4 Duct Accessories 15820-2 Food Service Ventilation Systems 15825-3 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 15855-2 Fans 15872-3 Controls & Instrumentation 15950-5 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of HVAC Systems 15990-2


DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

Electrical Demolition for Remodeling 16060-2 Conduit 16111-5 Building Wire and Cable 16123-4 Boxes 16130-4 Wiring Devices 16141-4 Manufactured Wiring Systems 16150-2 Grounding and Bonding 16170-3 Supporting Devices 16190-2 Electrical Identification 16195-3 Distribution Switchboards 16426-4 Enclosed Switches 16441-2 Dry Type Transformers 16461-4 Panelboards 16470-4 Enclosed Contactors 16485- 3 Interior Luminaires 16510-4 Surge Protection Devices (SPDs) 16685-4 Lightning Protection for Structures 16686-3 Telephone Service, Raceways & Wiring 16741-2 Public Address System 16770-1 Occupancy Sensors 16904-2 Testing 16950-2

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Section 00860 – LIST OF DRAWINGS

LIST OF DRAWINGS 00860-1

SHEET NO. TITLE

T-1.00 Title Sheet/Index of Drawings T-1.01 Abbreviations & Codes T-1.02 Phasing Floor Plan DC-1.00 Demolition Site Plan C-1.01 Survey Site Plan C-1.02 Site Utility Plan C-1.03 Site Grading Plan C-5.00 Site Details DCA-1.10 Demolition Partial Site Plan – Options 1, 2 & 3 CA-1.00 Architectural Site Plan CA-1.10 Site Plan – Options 1, 2 & 3 CU-1.00 Site Plan – Electrical D-1.00 Overall Demolition Floor Plan D-1.01 Demolition Floor Plan – Area A D-1.02 Demolition Floor Plan – Area B D-1.03 Demolition Floor Plan – Area C D-1.04 Demolition Floor Plan – Area D D-1.05 Demolition Floor Slab & Finish Plan Area A D-1.06 Demolition Floor Slab & Finish Plan Area B D-1.07 Demolition Floor Slab & Finish Plan Area C D-1.08 Demolition Floor Slab & Finish Plan Area D D-1.10 Demolition Floor Plans, Elevations & Sections – Options 1 & 2 D-2.00 Demolition Exterior Elevations D-4.01 Partial Demolition Building Sections & Mezz Plans – Areas A & B D-4.10 Partial Building & Wall Demolition Sections – Options 1 & 2 D-5.00 Overall Demolition Roof Plan D-5.01 Demolition Roof Plan – Area A D-5.02 Demolition Roof Plan – Area B D-5.03 Demolition Roof Plan – Area C D-5.04 Demolition Roof Plan – Area D D-5.10 Demolition Roof Plan – Options 1 & 2 D-6.10 Demolition Interior Elevations D-6.11 Demolition Interior Elevations D-6.12 Demolition Interior Elevations D-7.01 Demolition Reflected Ceiling Plan – Area A D-7.02 Demolition Reflected Ceiling Plan – Area B D-7.03 Demolition Reflected Ceiling Plan – Area C D-7.04 Demolition Reflected Ceiling Plan – Area D D-7.10 Demolition Reflected Ceiling Plan – Options 1 & 2 SA-1.01 Mechanical Loft Plans & Partial Structural Sections SA-1.10 Footing/Foundation/Framing Plans & Details – Options 1 & 2 SA-1.11 Footing/Foundation & Framing Details – Options 1, 2 & 3 A-1.00 Overall Floor Plan A-1.01 Floor Plan – Area A A-1.02 Floor Plan – Area B


A-1.03 Floor Plan – Area C A-1.04 Floor Plan – Area D A-1.05 Floor Slab Plan – Area A A-1.06 Floor Slab Plan – Area B A-1.07 Floor Slab Plan – Area C A-1.08 Floor Slab Plan – Area D A-1.10 Floor Plans & Elevations – Options 1 & 2 A-2.00 Exterior Elevations A-4.00 Wall Sections & Column Details A-4.10 Partial Building & Wall Sections – Option 1 A-4.11 Partial Building & Wall Sections – Options 1 & 2 A-5.00 Overall Roof Plan A-5.01 Roof Plan – Area A A-5.02 Roof Plan – Area B A-5.03 Roof Plan – Area C A-5.04 Roof Plan – Area D A-5.10 Roof Plan – Options 1, 2 & 3 A-5.11 Large Scale Fascia Plans & Details A-6.01 Large Scale Toilet Plans A-6.10 Interior Elevations A-6.11 Interior Elevations A-6.20 Casework Details A-7.01 Reflected Ceiling Plan – Area A

A-7.02 Reflected Ceiling Plan – Area B A-7.03 Reflected Ceiling Plan – Area C A-7.04 Reflected Ceiling Plan – Area D A-7.10 Reflected Ceiling Plan – Options 1 & 2 A-8.00 Door Schedule & Door Details A-8.01 Door Details A-8.02 Door Details A-9.00 Interior Finish Material List A-9.01 Finish Floor Plan – Area A & Room Finish Schedule A-9.02 Finish Floor Plan – Area B A-9.03 Finish Floor Plan – Area C A-9.04 Finish Floor Plan – Area D A-9.05 Wall Finish Plan – Area A A-9.06 Wall Finish Plan – Area B A-9.07 Wall Finish Plan – Area C A-9.08 Wall Finish Plan – Area D A-9.10 Finish Floor & Wall Plans & Elevations – Option 2

EQ-1.00 Overall Equipment Plan EQ-1.10 Floor Plan & Elevations – Commodity MA-02 EQ-1.20 Floor Plan & Elevations – Starbucks EQ-1.30 Floor Plan & Elevations – Commodity MA-08 EQ-1.40 Floor Plan & Elevations – Barber Shop EQ-1.50 Floor Plan & Elevations – Tactical & Car Rental EQ-1.60 Floor Plan & Elevations – Optical & Optometry EQ-1.70 Floor Plan & Elevations – Laundry/Dry Cleaning EQ-1.80 Equipment Plan & Elevations – Furniture Store FS-1.00 Overall Food Service Plan FS-1.10 Food Service Plan & Schedule – Back of House (BOH)


FS-1.11 Food Service Plan – Administration & Cooler/Freezer FS-1.12 Food Service Elevations – Back of House (BOH) FS-1.20 Food Service Plans & Elevations – Boston Market FS-1.21 Food Service Schedule – Boston Market FS-1.30 Food Service Plans & Elevations – Arby's FS-1.31 Food Service Schedule – Arby's FS-1.40 Food Service Plans, Elevations & Schedule – Taco Bell FS-1.50 Food Service Plans, Elevations & Schedule – Subway FS-1.60 Food Service Plans, Elevations & Schedule – Charley's Steakery FS-1.70 Food Service Plan – Vanilla Space MD-1.01 Demolition Floor Plan – Area A-Mechanical MD-1.02 Demolition Floor Plan – Area B-Mechanical MD-1.03 Demolition Floor Plan – Area C-Mechanical M-1.01 Floor Plan – Area A-Mechanical M-1.02 Floor Plan – Area B-Mechanical M-1.03 Floor Plan – Area C-Mechanical M-1.04 Floor Plan – Area D-Mechanical M-1.10 Floor Plan – Mechanical Room-Mechanical M-2.01 Symbols, Schedules & Details-Mechanical PD-1.01 Demolition Floor Plan – Area A-Plumbing PD-1.02 Demolition Floor Plan – Area B-Plumbing PD-1.03 Demolition Floor Plan – Area C-Plumbing PD-1.04 Demolition Floor Plan – Area D Above Floor Plumbing P-1.01 Floor Plan – Area A Under Floor Plumbing P-1.02 Floor Plan – Area B-Plumbing P-1.03 Floor Plan – Area C-Under Floor Plumbing P-1.04 Floor Plan – Area D-Under Floor Plumbing P-2.01 Floor Plan – Area A-Above Floor Plumbing P-2.03 Floor Plan – Area C-Above Floor Plumbing P-2.04 Floor Plan – Area D-Above Floor Plumbing P-3.01 Notes, Symbols, Details & Schedules FAD-1.01 Demolition Floor Plan – Area A-Fire Alarm FAD-1.02 Demolition Floor Plan – Area B-Fire Alarm FAD-1.03 Demolition Floor Plan – Area C-Fire Alarm FAD-1.04 Demolition Floor Plan – Area D-Fire Alarm FA-1.00 Fire Alarm Symbols, Legend and Notes FA-1.01 Renovation Floor Plan – Area A-Fire Alarm FA-1.02 Renovation Floor Plan – Area B-Fire Alarm FA-1.03 Renovation Floor Plan – Area C-Fire Alarm FA-1.04 Renovation Floor Plan – Area D-Fire Alarm FPD-1.01 Demolition Floor Plan – Area A-Fire Protection FPD-1.02 Demolition Floor Plan – Area B-Fire Protection FPD-1.03 Demolition Floor Plan – Area C-Fire Protection FPD-1.04 Demolition Floor Plan – Area D-Fire Protection FP-1.00 Fire Protection Symbols, Notes and Legend FP-1.01 Renovation Floor Plan – Area A-Fire Protection FP-1.02 Renovation Floor Plan – Area B-Fire Protection FP-1.03 Renovation Floor Plan – Area C-Fire Protection


FP-1.04 Renovation Floor Plan – Area D-Fire Protection LS-1.00 Life Safety Plans LS-2.00 Life Safety Summary ED-1.01 Demolition Floor Plan – Area A-Lighting ED-1.02 Demolition Floor Plan – Area B-Lighting ED-1.03 Demolition Floor Plan – Area C-Lighting ED-1.04 Demolition Floor Plan – Area D-Lighting ED-1.10 Demolition Floor Plans – Option 1 & Option 2 – Lighting ED-2.01 Demolition Floor Plan – Area A-Power ED-2.02 Demolition Floor Plan – Area B-Power ED-2.03 Demolition Floor Plan – Area C-Power ED-2.04 Demolition Floor Plan – Area D-Power ED-3.01 Demolition Floor Plan – Area A-Special Systems ED-3.02 Demolition Floor Plan – Area B-Special Systems ED-3.03 Demolition Floor Plan – Area C-Special Systems ED-3.04 Demolition Floor Plan – Area D-Special Systems E-1.01 Floor Plan – Area A-Lighting E-1.02 Floor Plan – Area B-Lighting E-1.03 Floor Plan – Area C-Lighting E-1.04 Floor Plan – Area D-Lighting E-1.10 Floor Plans – Option 1 & Option 2 – Lighting E-2.01 Floor Plan – Area A-Power E-2.02 Floor Plan – Area B-Power E-2.03 Floor Plan – Area C-Power E-2.04 Floor Plan – Area D-Power E-2.05 Large Scale Floor Plan – Food Court Power E-2.06 Food Court Schedules – Power E-2.07 Food Court Schematics E-2.08 Overall Floor Plan – Power E-2.09 Overall Floor Plan – Lightning Protection E-2.10 Lightning Protection System Details & Notes E-3.01 Floor Plan – Area A-Special Systems E-3.02 Floor Plan – Area B-Special Systems E-3.03 Floor Plan – Area C-Special Systems E-3.04 Floor Plan – Area D-Special Systems E-4.01 Electrical Details E-5.01 Riser Diagram & Panel Schedule E-5.02 Panel Schedules Electrical E-5.03 Panel Schedules Electrical E-6.01 Symbols & Schedules Electrical All drawings dated: 18 May 2018 END 00860

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01000 – REQUIREMENTS OF MACDILL AFB

REQUIREMENTS OF MACDILL AFB 01000-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Primary Point of Contact.

B. Work Schedule.

C. Protection of Government Property and Personnel.

D. Covering of Debris.

E. Utility Line Marking.

F. Waste Recycling.

G. Environmental Protection.

H. Contractor Installation Identification Credentials.

I. Work Clearance and Excavation.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01010 – Summary of Work.

B. Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

C. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

D. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.

E. Section 01590 – AAFES Field Offices & Sheds.

F. Division 2 – Site Work.

G. Army & Air Force Exchange Service - General Provisions, a copy of which is included in the Solicitation Package.

1.3 EXCAVATION PERMIT

A. No excavation shall be done prior to receiving a MacDill AFB, AF 103 Excavation Permit.

1. Permits shall be obtained from Base Civil Engineering (BCE). 2. If excavation is started without obtaining a permit, the contractor shall be held liable

for repairs of any broken utility lines and other damage resulting from the broken lines.

B. The Contractor shall request a permit a minimum of 30 days prior to scheduled start of digging.


C. Hand digging shall be required to locate utilities shown on the contract drawings or 3 feet on either side of locations identified by MacDill AFB.

D. Excavation Permit information – MacDill AFB:

1. POC: Louis Lantner. 2. E-mail: [email protected]. 3. Phone: (813) 828-0463.

1.4 WORK SCHEDULE

A. All work at MacDill AFB shall be accomplished during normal working hours 0700 to 1600 hours exclusive of Saturdays, Sundays, and federal holidays unless other times are approved by the Contracting Officer, or otherwise stated in the contract.

1. Coordinate the work schedule with the Contracting Officer and MacDill AFB Civil Engineering (BCE).

2. Any deviation from this schedule will require 48 hours advance notice and approval by Contracting Officer and MacDill AFB BCE.

1.5 PROTECTION OF GOVERNMENT PROPERTY AND PERSONNEL

A. The Contractor shall furnish, place, and maintain all required barricades as directed by the Safety Office and the Contracting Officer.

B. Access drives and roadways shall remain clear at all times.

C. If road/lane closures or traffic interruption becomes necessary during the course of work:

1. Contractor shall submit for approval, 15 days prior to commencing work, a barricade and sign plan clearly showing work area, location, and type of sign to be placed for rerouting traffic.

2. Part VI, The Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices will be used for traffic signing and barricades.

D. The Contractor shall conduct his operations to offer the least possible obstruction and inconvenience to public traffic.

1. All traffic shall be permitted to pass adjacent to work with as little delay as possible. 2. Where the nature of construction operations in progress or equipment, and machinery

in use are of character to endanger passing traffic, the contractor shall provide lights and signs, erect fences or barriers and station flaggers necessary to give adequate warning to avoid damage or injury to passing traffic.

3. Signs, flags, lights, warning and safety devices shall conform to applicable installation, city, county, and state requirements.

1.6 SITE USE

A. Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain temporary construction fencing to separate construction areas from entry by unauthorized personnel including, but not limited to:

1. Building construction site. 2. Construction trailers. 3. Temporary storage trailers, sheds and lay-down areas. 4. Equipment parking areas. 5. Other areas subject to construction work under this Contract.


B. Contractor shall coordinate all site use areas with MacDill AFB BCE, Contracting Officer and designated representative.

1. Submit detailed Site Use Plan for approval, 15 days prior to commencing work, indicating all areas to be temporarily fenced and indicate specific use proposed for all areas within fencing.

a. Indicate proposed location of all temporary construction trailers, storage trailers and sheds.

b. Provide temporary utility needs and proposed source for each.

2. Obtain written approval of proposed Site Use Plan from MacDill AFB BCE and Contracting Officer prior to construction of temporary fencing or utilities.

1.7 DEBRIS DISPOSAL, DELIVERIES AND HAULING

A. Contractor shall use Haul Route as indicated on Drawing Sheet T-1.00.

B. Contractor and all subcontractors shall be required to cover all loads of debris before hauling them off from the Site.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup of all incidental debris that inadvertently falls onto pavements or other properties during hauling operations.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall abide by the environmental requirements of MacDill AFB, the State of Florida and Federal Government.

1. Detailed requirements are set forth in Section 01420, AAFES Environmental Protection.

B. Contractor shall refer to Section 01010, Summary of Work for information pertaining to Hazardous Materials.

C. Vehicles and other powered equipment shall meet local air quality regulations for emissions.

1. Vehicles and equipment shall be mechanically sound and have all seals, grease rings, and other containment systems in place to ensure against leakage.

2. Drip pans shall be maintained such that overflow and spills do not occur. 3. There shall be no activities for equipment maintenance including oil changes, filter

replacements, or hydraulic equipment repair performed on MacDill AFB Property.

D. Whenever a spill of oil or hazardous material is discovered, Contractor shall take immediate action to:

1. Stop the flow of product 2. Advise personnel of the incident. 3. Immediately shut down equipment and minimize sources of ignition. 4. Contain the spill. 5. Notify MacDill AFB BCE Environmental Division immediately.

E. Contractor shall also prepare a formal “Spill Report” chronicling the events leading to the spill and the efforts to contain it.

1. This Spill Report shall be submitted to the MacDill AFB BCE Environmental Division representative investigating the spill.


F. Contractor shall make submit monthly report of fuel consumption for each fuel burning unit, whether permitted or not, for all operational time throughout construction until Substantial Completion or when that unit is retired from service on this Project, whichever is longer.

1. Make monthly submittals to MacDill AFB BCE. 2. At Substantial Completion submit the total amount of fuel used for each unit to

MacDill AFB BCE substantiating monthly reports.

1.9 RECYCLING

A. MacDill AFB promotes recycling of demolished materials and construction waste removed from construction.

1. MacDill AFB encourages the Contractor to recycle as many materials as are feasible under this Contract.

2. Recycling will be at Contractors discretion and is suggested in an effort to reduce the amount of solid waste deposited in landfills.

B. Examples of demolished materials that Contractor may consider for recycling include, but are not limited to:

1. Concrete. 2. Steel studs. 3. Aluminum and/or steel, including trim work. 4. Cardboard. 5. Piping. 6. Fittings. 7. Cast iron. 8. HVAC diffusers, grilles and ductwork. 9. Light fixture housings

a. Ballasts shall be legally disposed of as potentially hazardous waste unless units have “NO PCB” designation.

b. Mercury containing lamps (fluorescent, mercury vapor, metal halide and high-pressure sodium) shall be legally disposed of as potentially hazardous waste.

10. Wiring. 11. Other materials as deemed appropriate by Contractor and acceptable to MacDill AFB.

1.10 DISPOSAL

A. Contractor shall refer to applicable paragraphs in Section 01420, Environmental Protection for details pertaining to waste disposal including:

1. Hazardous waste generation, handling and disposal. 2. Non-hazardous waste disposal. 3. Normal construction debris disposal.

B. All excess soils and organic matter shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of in approved landfill as directed by MacDill AFB BCE in conjunction with requirements set forth in Paragraph 1.12 below and in accordance with Section 01420.

C. Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, or hazardous waste, all other solid waste shall be collected and disposed of off MacDill AFB Property.

1. There shall be no accumulation of solid waste unless properly containerized or put within a fenced area to prevent wind blown pollution.

2. No materials shall be put into dumpsters owned or managed by MacDill AFB.


D. Only empty paint cans shall be allowed in Contractor furnished trash receptacles.

1. Paint cans are considered empty if paint comprises less than 1 inch or 3% by weight of the total capacity of the container, whichever is less.

2. If the residue in the container exceeds these limits, contact the Contracting Officer for disposal instructions.

E. Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, all asphalt and concrete scheduled for removal shall be removed from the site and disposed of in approved landfill off MacDill AFB property.

F. Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, all underground utilities scheduled for removal shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of in approved landfill off MacDill AFB property.

G. Unless recycled per Paragraph 1.9 above, all solid waste not specifically noted above shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of in approved landfill off MacDill AFB property.

1.11 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL INSTALLATION IDENTIFICATION CREDENTIALS

A. Contractor shall comply with the following procedures for obtaining Installation identification passes for the Contractor’s personnel and subcontractors.

1. Contractor shall submit a written request on company letterhead stationary to the MacDill AFB sponsoring entity (identified at the Pre-construction Meeting) specifying:

a. Contract number. b. Location of work site. c. Date entry to the Installation must begin and contemplated termination date of

entry. d. Names, date of birth (DOB) and social security numbers (SSN) of Contractor

and subcontractor employee requiring access to the Installation. e. The name of the individual who will submit the Request for Identification

Credentials for each employee for whom identification credentials are needed.

2. The MacDill AFB sponsoring entity will submit information to authority having jurisdiction and that authority may:

a. Endorse the request. b. Attach a copy of the contract cover page and any other pages that provide

performance information, such as the need for and duration of access to the work site.

c. Forward this request to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office of the installation where the work is to be performed.

d. Provide appropriate blank Form to the Contractor.

3. The Contractor shall be required to complete and submit Form and request for identification credentials, for each of the firm’s employees and for each subcontractor employee who must have access to the installation.

4. The Contractor shall also request appropriate Form for vehicle decals when the request for identification credentials is submitted.

5. To obtain the vehicle decal from the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office, the Contractor shall produce:


a. A valid driver's license. b. Proof of financial responsibility or insurance c. Current vehicle registration.

B. Contractor employees, at all times while on a military installation shall wear visible identification either as a part of, or attached to, their outer clothing.

C. The identification shall clearly identify the individual as being a Contractor employee.

D. During performance of the contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining required identification for newly assigned personnel, and for prompt return of credentials and vehicle registration decals to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office, for any employee who no longer requires access to the work site.

E. At the termination or completion of the contract, or upon expiration of credentials (if any such expirations are specified), the Contractor shall return all installation identification credentials and vehicle registration decals for all Contractor and subcontractor employees to the Security Police, Pass and Identification Office.

1.12 SPECIAL MACDILL AFB REQUIREMENTS

A. Construction Waivers:

1. The Base Exchange is located under the Inner Horizontal Surface of airfield imaginary surfaces.

2. Regulations require that the use of cranes be approved by MacDill AFB CES prior to use in construction.

a. Any equipment such as cranes exceeding the height of 30-feet AGL will require Contractor to submit an FAA obstruction evaluation request.

b. Submit request to Action Officer at least 45-days prior to use of equipment on MacDill AFB property.

3. Request shall include:

a. Detailed specification information for any crane brought onto the Installation for use on this Project.

b. Site plan showing specific areas of Base where crane will be used in order to evaluate obstructions to critical flight paths for military aircraft.

B. Contractor shall submit request and provide crane specification information to the following prior to commencement of construction:

1. POC: James Anthony Rodriguez. 2. E-mail: [email protected]. 3. Phone: 813.828.0836.

C. Upon evaluation by MacDill AFB BCE may issue a permit to allow the use of a crane in strict coordination and compliance with all requirements and restrictions set forth.

1. If height of equipment is below 150-feet AGL a temporary airfield Construction Waiver may not be required.

2. If height of equipment is 150-feet AGL or above, Contractor shall coordinate with 6 CES/CENPO two months before the equipment is needed.


a. An airfield Waiver Request will then need to be drafted and a Risk Management Assessment conducted.

b. Final approval will be made by Wing Commander signatory response to Risk Management Assessment prior to use of equipment at the site of construction.

D. Helicopters shall not be used to set roof mounted equipment at MacDill AFB.

2 PRODUCTS (Not Used).

3 EXECUTION (Not Used).

END 01000.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 STATEMENT OF WORK

A. Scope: The work covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all plant, supervision, labor, equipment, materials necessary to perform all operations required to renovate selected areas of the existing Exchange building, all in accordance with these specifications and the applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract.

B. Location: The work to be performed is located east of Kingfisher Street directly south of North Boundary Boulevard, MacDill AFB, Florida.

C. Principal Features:

1. Phased selective demolition of designated exterior elements indicated including but not limited to:

a. Roof elements:

1.) Roof mounted equipment including power, piping and ductwork disconnects and plumbing vents.

2.) Sheet metal counter flashings. 3.) Modified bitumen roofing and flashing at roof mounted equipment

curbs and supports for patching. 4.) Equipment curbs, supports, pipe/power portals and lightning

protection pitch pockets. 5.) Spud modified bitumen roofing and cut roof deck for new roof

mounted equipment curbs and supports.

b. Building elements:

1.) Canopy roof, awnings, supporting members and flashings. 2.) Ground mounted walk-in refrigeration equipment including power and

piping disconnects. 3.) Wood framed fence and CO2 tank screen wall. 4.) Brick masonry screen wall and related concrete substructure. 5.) Hollow metal entry doors, frames and hardware. 6.) Face brick and cold-formed metal stud wall construction. 7.) Non-load bearing concrete masonry and cold-formed metal stud wall

construction. 8.) Solarium and related mechanical room construction. 9.) Building mounted awnings, fly fans, brackets and fasteners.

c. Site elements:

1.) Concrete site paving, base course and related substructures:

a) Parking slabs. b) Sidewalk slabs. c) Stoop slabs and related substructure. d) Equipment pads.

2.) Concrete filled pipe bollards and steel protection structures including foundations.


3.) Strip planted areas, remove tree and root system in entirety. 4.) Dock leveler, related hydraulic piping, pump and fluid reservoir. 5.) Asphalt paving and base course.

d. Option Proposals 1, 2, and 3 as set forth in detail in Section 01015 if Options are awarded:

1.) Salvage and deliver lighted building mounted signage and power supply units to AAFES on-site storage facility.

2.) Additional roof elements including miscellaneous copings, flashing, roofing and other roof related items indicated.

3.) Asbestos containing modified bitumen canopy roofing identified as ACM at North Retail Vestibule in accordance with Section 02083, Asbestos Abatement.

4.) Additional site paving, base course, substructure and other site related items indicated.

2. Temporarily remove selected exterior elements and salvage for reinstallation in new construction:

a. Option Proposal 1:

1.) Salvage, protect and store lighted building mounted signage and power supply units for relocation on new construction.

2.) Salvage, protect and store sufficient lengths of existing sheet metal parapet coping and retainer system to infill between end of existing coping to remain and new entry construction.

3.) Include sufficient quantity of sheet metal to base flash end of infilled coping to new construction at intersection.

b. Option Proposal 2:

1.) Salvage, protect and store sufficient length of existing sheet metal gutter system to infill between end of existing gutter to remain and new construction.

2.) Salvage, protect and store sufficient length of existing sheet metal downspout to provide additional means of drainage for gutter near end of infill as indicated.

3. Phased selective demolition of designated interior building elements indicated including but not limited to:

a. Electrical work:

1.) Lighting fixtures and circuits. 2.) Power devices and circuits. 3.) Transformers. 4.) Power distribution panels and feeders. 5.) Hardwired Food Service equipment disconnects. 6.) Food concept signage disconnects. 7.) FA, MN and other special system devices and circuits. 8.) Other Electrical work commensurate with scope of demolition.

b. Mechanical work:

1.) HVAC equipment. 2.) Kitchen hoods and related fire suppression systems. 3.) Diffusers and grilles. 4.) Ductwork. 5.) Condensers.


6.) Other Mechanical work commensurate with scope of demolition.

c. Plumbing work:

1.) Hard piped Food Service equipment disconnects. 2.) Plumbing fixtures. 3.) Above and below slab supply, waste and vent piping. 4.) Grease trap. 5.) Natural gas piping. 6.) Refrigeration line sets. 7.) Other Plumbing work commensurate with scope of demolition.

d. Sprinkler work:

1.) Isolation and temporary shutdown of branch lines for demolition. 2.) Heads and drops. 3.) Piping.

e. General work:

1.) Wall graphics, vinyl base and corner guards. 2.) Wainscot panels and wall end caps. 3.) Metal lockers. 4.) Dry Cleaner fixtures, furnishings and equipment. 5.) Equipment, fixtures and accessories. 6.) Doors, frames, aluminum Mall storefronts and glazing. 7.) Serving counters, countertops and casework. 8.) Walk-in cooler/freezers. 9.) ACT ceiling, grid and suspension system. 10.) Suspended gypsum board ceiling and suspension system. 11.) Structural concrete Mechanical loft floor, framing and metal ladder. 12.) Stud and gypsum drywall partitions and soffits. 13.) Ceramic wall tile and gypsum drywall to face of studs or furring. 14.) Fiberglass reinforced panel and gypsum drywall to face of studs or

furring. 15.) Gypsum drywall to face of studs or furring. 16.) Brick masonry wall finish to top of thickened floor slab in Mall areas. 17.) Brick masonry partitions and related footing/foundation to 12"

minimum below floor slab in existing Food Court. 18.) Shoring and brick masonry/metal stud framing. 19.) Shoring and load bearing concrete masonry wall. 20.) Clay pavers, ceramic tile floor finishes and setting bed. 21.) Vinyl composition floor tile, base and mastic. 22.) Asbestos floor tile, base and mastic identified as ACM in accordance

with Section 02083, Asbestos Abatement. 23.) Sawcut and remove concrete slab-on-grade in designated areas for

new under-slab sanitary sewer piping. 24.) Sawcut and remove full thickness terrazzo and concrete floor slab in

designated areas. 25.) Sawcut and remove mortar bed and concrete floor slab in designated

areas. 26.) Grind mortar bed and prepare to receive new topping and floor

finishes in designated areas.

f. Option Proposals 1, 2, 4 and 5 as set forth in detail in Section 01015 if Options are awarded:


1.) Additional interior elements including stud and gypsum drywall partitions.

2.) Additional full thickness terrazzo and concrete floor slab. 3.) Additional floor slab demolition to uncover under slab sanitary sewer

piping. 4.) Additional under slab sanitary sewer piping demolition. 5.) Demolition of boiler located in main store MPA.

4. Temporary removal of selected interior elements for salvage and storage by others or for reinstallation in new construction:

a. AAFES will remove, or cause to be removed, all existing Food Service equipment, fixtures and furnishings within a time period of one week after Substantial Completion and use of new Food Court.

1.) Contractor shall phase and schedule construction activities in the following existing areas to coincide with this one week time frame:

a) Manchu Wok. b) Charley’s, closed Baskin Robbins and related BOH. c) Taco Bell, Anthony’s Pizza, Subway and related BOH.

b. Contractor shall remove, salvage and protect Services and Concessions equipment, fixtures and furnishings scheduled to be reinstalled in new spaces.

1.) Contractor shall phase and schedule construction activities in the following existing areas to coincide with Construction schedule:

a) Optometry/Optical. b) Audio. c) Souvenirs. d) Barber Shop. e) Tactical.

c. Contractor shall supervise and coordinate with AAFES personnel during these transitions to facilitate expedient removal of all equipment, fixtures and furnishings in these existing Food Court and Service and Concession areas.

1.) Ensure access to existing areas by others. 2.) Conduct Contractor assigned demolition responsibilities in these

areas to provide access and egress of equipment being removed by others.

3.) Assist with disconnects of hard wired and hard piped food service equipment, fixtures and furnishings.

4.) Protect existing construction to remain from damage due to removal operations by others or Contractor’s forces.

5. Phased new exterior construction indicated including but not limited to:

a. Roof elements:

1.) Steel and poured gypsum roof deck, roof insulation and modified bitumen roof system patching.

2.) Equipment curbs, equipment supports and pipe/power portals. 3.) Sheet metal related to flashing and counter flashing. 4.) Natural gas piping and supports. 5.) Option Proposals 1 and 2 as set forth in detail in Section 01015 if

Options are awarded:


a) Additional roof deck, roof insulation and modified bitumen roof system patching.

b) Modification fabrication and reinstallation and base flashing of parapet coping infill.

c) Modification fabrication and reinstallation of gutter infill. d) Modification fabrication and reinstallation of downspout. e) TPO membrane roofing. f) Flashing and sheet metal.


1.) Reinforced concrete footing and foundation at Solarium. 2.) Toothing, infilling and patching face brick masonry. 3.) Toothing, infilling and patching concrete masonry. 4.) Reinforced concrete lintels at new and existing openings in concrete

masonry. 5.) Structural steel and metal fabrications. 6.) Building insulation. 7.) Joint sealers. 8.) Hollow metal entry doors, frames and hardware. 9.) Aluminum entrance door, sidelites and glazing. 10.) Option Proposals 1 and 2 as set forth in detail in Section 01015 if

Options are awarded:

a) Additional toothing and patching concrete masonry. b) Additional toothing and patching face brick. c) Structural steel, steel roof deck and metal fabrications. d) Cold-formed metal framing and sheathing. e) Architectural concrete masonry veneer walls. f) Exterior insulation and finish system. g) Aluminum curtain wall sidelites and transom framing and glazing. h) Automatic entry door and glazing. i) Fixed sunshade fascia.

c. Site work:

1.) Import, placement and compaction of select granular base course under site paving.

2.) Geotextile fabric and placement. 3.) Reinforced concrete Receiving slabs. 4.) Concrete sidewalks. 5.) Reinforced concrete Dumpster Enclosure slab and curbs. 6.) Dumpster Enclosure fencing and gates. 7.) Asphalt driveway patching. 8.) Backfilling and compaction. 9.) Finish grading and sod. 10.) Option Proposals 3 and 4 as set forth in detail in Section 01015 if

Option is awarded:

a) Additional import, placement and compaction of select granular base course under site paving.

b) Additional geotextile fabric and placement. c) Additional sidewalk paving. d) Asphalt driveway and parking paving. e) Backfilling and compaction. f) Finish grading and sod.


6. Phased new and renovation of existing construction indicated including but not limited to:

a. Electrical work:

1.) Secondary service and transformers. 2.) Power distribution panels and feeders. 3.) Power disconnect switches. 4.) All Mechanical equipment rough-in work and connections. 5.) All Food Service and other equipment rough-in work and connections

to hardwired equipment. 6.) Power circuits, devices, trim and connections. 7.) Lighting circuits, fixtures, controls and connections. 8.) Signage circuits, controls and connections 9.) FA, MN and other special systems re-work and connections. 10.) Other Electrical work commensurate with new construction.

b. Mechanical work:

1.) HVAC equipment. 2.) Kitchen hoods and related fire suppression systems. 3.) Exhaust fans. 4.) HVAC controls. 5.) Diffusers and grilles. 6.) Ductwork. 7.) Other Mechanical work commensurate with new construction. 8.) Option Proposal 5 as set forth in detail in Section 01015 if Option is

awarded:

a) Replacement of boiler located in main store MPA.

c. Plumbing work:

1.) Hard piped Food Service equipment rough-ins and connections. 2.) Plumbing fixture rough-ins and connections. 3.) Above and below slab supply, waste and vent piping. 4.) Grease traps. 5.) Natural gas piping. 6.) Other Plumbing work commensurate with scope of demolition. 7.) Option Proposal 4 as set forth in detail in Section 01015 if Option is

awarded:

a) Replacement and bedding of under slab sanitary sewer piping to 5 feet beyond building line.

d. Sprinkler work:

1.) Restoration of temporarily shutdown branch lines. 2.) Sprinkler system design. 3.) Expansion of existing mains and branch piping. 4.) Drops. 5.) Heads.

e. Mall areas:

1.) Concrete floor slabs. 2.) Polished concrete floor finish. 3.) HM door frames. 4.) Structural steel header and column frames for overhead rolling grilles. 5.) Toothing and patching brick masonry to receive furring.


6.) Metal stud walls and wall furring. 7.) Metal stud ceiling cornice/soffit framing. 8.) Metal stud pilaster and column surround framing. 9.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 10.) Gypsum drywall cornice/soffit installation and taping. 11.) Gypsum drywall pilaster and column surround substrate, taping and

CT finish. 12.) Painting. 13.) Aluminum entrances, storefront systems and glazing. 14.) Commodity and service space entry portals. 15.) Overhead rolling grilles and hardware. 16.) Wood doors and hardware. 17.) Wall coverings and graphics. 18.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 19.) Rubber base trim. 20.) Corner guards and wall surface protection. 21.) Room identification signage. 22.) Installation of existing and new lighted Services and Commodities

identification signage above entries. 23.) Fire extinguishers and cabinets.

f. Public Toilets:

1.) Concrete footing. 2.) Toothing and patching brick and concrete masonry. 3.) Structural steel column. 4.) HM door frames. 5.) Metal stud walls and wall furring. 6.) Suspended gypsum drywall ceiling framing. 7.) Access doors. 8.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 9.) Gypsum drywall ceiling installation and taping. 10.) Painting. 11.) Ceramic tile floor, base and wall finishes. 12.) Wood doors and hardware. 13.) Toilet compartments. 14.) Toilet accessories. 15.) Room identification signage.

g. Commodity Spaces:

1.) Concrete floor repair, patching and leveling to Mall floor at entries. 2.) Polished concrete floor finish. 3.) Sealed concrete floor finish in Storage. 4.) HM frames. 5.) Heavy duty drywall stud partition walls and wall furring. 6.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 7.) Painting. 8.) Wood doors and hardware. 9.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 10.) Adjustable shelf standards and shelving. 11.) Slatwall overlay panels. 12.) Floor finishes. 13.) Rubber base trim. 14.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 15.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles.


16.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 17.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

h. Starbuck’s:

1.) Under slab piping and grease trap. 2.) Power panel and feeder. 3.) Roof top HVAC unit, power and control circuits. 4.) Fire alarm circuit rough-ins. 5.) Sprinkler system rough-ins. 6.) Structural steel columns and header sub-frame for blast resistant

exterior door. 7.) Revisions to exterior wall framing to receive new entry door. 8.) Concrete floor repair, patching and leveling to Mall floor at entries.

i. Barber Shop:

1.) Concrete floor repair, patching and leveling to Mall floor at entry. 2.) HM frames. 3.) Heavy duty drywall stud partition walls, wall furring and soffit. 4.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 5.) Painting. 6.) Wood doors and hardware. 7.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 8.) Floor finishes. 9.) Rubber base trim. 10.) Installation of salvaged fixtures, furnishings, equipment. 11.) Base, countertop, sink and wall cabinets. 12.) Corner guards and wall surface protection. 13.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 14.) Plumbing rough-ins and final connections to all sinks. 15.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 16.) Fire alarm circuits and devices. 17.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

j. Travel 2: (Communication Room)

1.) Concrete floor repair, patching and leveling between new Communication Room and existing Break Room.

2.) HM frame. 3.) Heavy duty drywall stud partition walls. 4.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 5.) Painting. 6.) Painted wood door and hardware. 7.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 8.) Floor finishes. 9.) Rubber base trim. 10.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 11.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 12.) Fire alarm circuits and devices. 13.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads 14.) Coordination with DoD and AAFES IT for installation of

communications equipment by others.

k. Tactical and Car Rental:

1.) Concrete floor repair, patching, topping slab and leveling to Mall floor at entries.


2.) HM frames. 3.) Heavy duty drywall stud partition walls and wall furring. 4.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 5.) Painting. 6.) Wood door and hardware. 7.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 8.) Adjustable shelf standards and shelving. 9.) Slatwall overlay panels. 10.) Floor finishes. 11.) Rubber base trim. 12.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 13.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 14.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 15.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

l. Furniture:

1.) Concrete floor repair, patching, topping slab and leveling to Mall floor at entries.

2.) HM frames. 3.) Traffic door frame. 4.) Heavy duty drywall stud partition walls and wall furring. 5.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 6.) Painting. 7.) Traffic door. 8.) HM and Wood doors and hardware. 9.) Glazing. 10.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 11.) Floor finishes. 12.) Rubber base trim. 13.) Room identification signage. 14.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 15.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 16.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 17.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

m. Optical:

1.) Concrete floor slab and leveling to Mall floor at entries. 2.) HM frame. 3.) Heavy duty drywall and cold-formed stud partition walls, wall furring

and soffits. 4.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 5.) Painting. 6.) Wood door and hardware. 7.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 8.) Floor finishes. 9.) Rubber base trim. 10.) Installation of salvaged fixtures, furnishings, equipment. 11.) Base, countertop, sink and wall cabinets. 12.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 13.) Plumbing rough-ins and final connections to sink. 14.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 15.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 16.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.


n. Optometry:

1.) Concrete floor repair, patching, concrete floor slab, concrete topping slab and leveling to Mall floor at entries leveling to Mall floor at entries.

2.) HM frames. 3.) Heavy duty drywall stud partition walls and wall furring. 4.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 5.) Painting. 6.) Wood doors and hardware. 7.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 8.) Floor finishes. 9.) Rubber base trim. 10.) Base, countertop, sink and wall cabinets. 11.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 12.) Plumbing rough-ins and final connections to all sinks. 13.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 14.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 15.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

o. Laundry/Dry Cleaning:

1.) Concrete floor repair, patching and leveling to Mall floor at entries. 2.) HM door and frame. 3.) Revisions to exterior wall framing to receive new door. 4.) Heavy duty drywall stud partition walls and wall furring. 5.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 6.) Painting. 7.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 8.) Floor finishes. 9.) Rubber base trim. 10.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 11.) Power rough-in and final connection to AF/AI garment conveyor. 12.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 13.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 14.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

p. Food Court Dining:

1.) Poured terrazzo floor finish. 2.) HM door frames. 3.) Metal stud walls and wall furring. 4.) Metal stud ceiling cornice/soffit framing. 5.) Metal stud column surround framing. 6.) Wood blocking for signage and television brackets. 7.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 8.) Gypsum drywall cornice/soffit installation and taping. 9.) Gypsum drywall and column surround substrate, taping and CT finish. 10.) Painting and wall graphics. 11.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 12.) Polish existing and new terrazzo floor finish. 13.) Rubber base trim. 14.) Wood doors and hardware. 15.) Drink Station equipment. 16.) Corner guards and wall surface protection. 17.) Room identification signage.


18.) Installation of existing and new lighted Food Concept identification signage above counters.

19.) Installation of television mounting brackets. 20.) Fire extinguishers and cabinets. 21.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 22.) Plumbing rough-ins and final connections to drink stations. 23.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 24.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 25.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

q. Food Court Vanilla Space:

1.) Concrete floor slab. 2.) Terrazzo floor patching with concrete. 3.) Heavy duty drywall and cold-formed stud partition walls, wall furring

and soffits. 4.) Under slab piping and grease trap. 5.) Power panel and feeder. 6.) Roof top exhaust fan curb. 7.) Fire alarm circuit rough-ins. 8.) Sprinkler system rough-ins. 9.) Revisions to exterior wall framing to receive new entry door.

r. Charley's food concept Serving area:

1.) Terrazzo floor patching with concrete. 2.) SS door frame. 3.) Metal stud walls and wall furring. 4.) Metal stud header/soffit framing. 5.) Access doors. 6.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 7.) Gypsum drywall header/soffit installation and taping. 8.) Painting. 9.) Ceramic tile floor, base and wall finishes. 10.) Architectural casework serving counter. 11.) Wall coverings and graphics. 12.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 13.) Corner guards and wall surface protection. 14.) Food concept signage. 15.) Fire extinguishers and cabinets. 16.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 17.) Power circuits and final connections to equipment. 18.) Plumbing rough-ins and final connections to equipment. 19.) Food service equipment, initial start-up and testing. 20.) Kitchen hood, exhaust fan and roof curb. 21.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 22.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 23.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

s. Subway food concept:

1.) Terrazzo floor patching with concrete. 2.) SS door frame. 3.) Metal stud walls and wall furring. 4.) Metal stud header/soffit framing. 5.) Access doors. 6.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping.


7.) Gypsum drywall header/soffit installation and taping. 8.) Painting. 9.) Ceramic tile floor, base and wall finishes. 10.) Architectural casework serving counter. 11.) Wall coverings and graphics. 12.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 13.) Corner guards and wall surface protection. 14.) Food concept signage. 15.) Fire extinguishers and cabinets. 16.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 17.) Power circuits and final connections to equipment. 18.) Plumbing rough-ins and final connections to equipment. 19.) Food service equipment, initial start-up and testing. 20.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 21.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 22.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

t. Taco Bell food concept:

1.) Terrazzo floor patching with concrete. 2.) SS door frame. 3.) Metal stud walls and wall furring. 4.) Metal stud header/soffit framing. 5.) Access doors. 6.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 7.) Gypsum drywall header/soffit installation and taping. 8.) Painting. 9.) Ceramic tile floor, base and wall finishes. 10.) Architectural casework serving counter. 11.) Thin stone panel finish. 12.) Wall coverings and graphics. 13.) Food service equipment, initial start-up and testing. 14.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 15.) Corner guards and wall surface protection. 16.) Food concept signage. 17.) Fire extinguishers and cabinets. 18.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 19.) Power circuits and final connections to equipment. 20.) Plumbing rough-ins and final connections to equipment. 21.) Food service equipment, initial start-up and testing. 22.) Kitchen hood, exhaust fan and roof curb. 23.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 24.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 25.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

u. Arby's food concept:

1.) Terrazzo floor patching with concrete. 2.) SS door frame. 3.) Metal stud walls and wall furring. 4.) Metal stud header/soffit framing. 5.) Access doors. 6.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 7.) Gypsum drywall header/soffit installation and taping. 8.) Painting. 9.) Ceramic tile floor, base and wall finishes.


10.) Architectural casework serving counter. 11.) Wall coverings and graphics. 12.) Food service equipment, initial start-up and testing. 13.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 14.) Corner guards and wall surface protection. 15.) Food concept signage. 16.) Fire extinguishers and cabinets. 17.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 18.) Power circuits and final connections to equipment. 19.) Plumbing rough-ins and final connections to equipment. 20.) Food service equipment, initial start-up and testing. 21.) Kitchen hood, exhaust fan and roof curb. 22.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 23.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 24.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

v. Boston Market food concept:

1.) Terrazzo floor patching with concrete. 2.) SS door frame. 3.) Metal stud walls and wall furring. 4.) Metal stud header/soffit framing. 5.) Access doors. 6.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 7.) Gypsum drywall header/soffit installation and taping. 8.) Painting. 9.) Ceramic tile floor, base and wall finishes. 10.) Architectural casework serving counter. 11.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 12.) Corner guards and wall surface protection. 13.) Food concept signage. 14.) Fire extinguishers and cabinets. 15.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 16.) Power circuits and final connections to equipment. 17.) Plumbing rough-ins and final connections to equipment. 18.) Food service equipment, initial start-up and testing. 19.) Kitchen hood, exhaust fan and roof curb. 20.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 21.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 22.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

w. Back of House area:

1.) Coordination of EF/EI walk-in refrigeration equipment. 2.) Terrazzo floor patching with concrete. 3.) HM door frames. 4.) Metal stud walls and wall furring. 5.) Metal stud header/soffit framing. 6.) Access doors. 7.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 8.) Gypsum drywall header/soffit installation and taping. 9.) Painting. 10.) Ceramic tile floor, base and wall finishes. 11.) Wood doors and hardware. 12.) Food service equipment, initial start-up and testing. 13.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish.


14.) Corner guards and wall surface protection. 15.) Fire extinguishers and cabinets. 16.) Power and lighting circuits, devices and lighting fixtures. 17.) Power circuits and final connections to equipment. 18.) Plumbing rough-ins and final connections to equipment. 19.) Food service equipment, initial start-up and testing. 20.) Kitchen hood, exhaust fan and roof curb. 21.) Ductwork, diffusers and grilles. 22.) Fire Alarm circuits and devices. 23.) Sprinkler system modifications and heads.

x. Offices, Employee Toilets and Break Room:

1.) Terrazzo floor patching with concrete. 2.) HM and view window door frames. 3.) Metal stud walls and wall furring. 4.) Metal stud header/soffit framing. 5.) Suspended gypsum drywall ceiling framing. 6.) Wood locker plinth framing and plywood top. 7.) Access doors. 8.) Gypsum drywall wall installation and taping. 9.) Gypsum drywall header/soffit installation and taping. 10.) Gypsum drywall ceiling installation and taping. 11.) Painting. 12.) Ceramic tile floor, base and wall finishes. 13.) Acoustical panel ceiling suspension and ceiling finish. 14.) Rubber base trim. 15.) Wood doors and hardware. 16.) Glass view windows. 17.) Corner guards and wall surface protection. 18.) Toilet accessories. 19.) Lockers. 20.) Room identification signage. 21.) Fire extinguishers and cabinets.

y. Option Proposals 1, 2 and 4 as set forth in detail in Section 01015 if Options are awarded:

1.) Additional concrete floor slabs. 2.) Additional polished concrete floor finish. 3.) Additional framing and finishes. 4.) Signage. 5.) Additional floor slab patching for newly installed sanitary sewer piping.

a) Backfill and compaction. b) Base course and compaction. c) Reinforced concrete floor patching.

D. General Provisions:

1. The Contractor is advised to take note of the following General Provisions of the Contract:

a. Cleaning up. b. Material and Workmanship. c. Accident Prevention. d. Existing structures on and surrounding site. e. Utilities and improvements.


f. Operation and storage areas. g. Site investigation. h. Permits. i. Other responsibilities indicated in General Provisions.

2. A copy of the Army & Air Force Exchange Service - General Provisions is included in the Solicitation Package.

1.2 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The Project will be constructed on an occupied Military Installation in and around an occupied facility.

B. Work performed under this Contract will require phasing and extensive coordination with AAFES and MacDill AFB personnel to ensure the health, safety and welfare of AAFES employees, customers and Base personnel.

C. Some phases or portions of phased work shall be performed as night work indicated accordingly on the Phased Construction Plan and Schedule.

1. All Mall floor slab demolition operations shall be conducted at night between the hours of 1900 and 0700 as indicated.

D. Contractor shall maintain half of designated entry openings at interior and exterior doors for use by Customers and AAFES personnel at all times except between the hours of 1900 to 0700 indicated accordingly on the Phase Construction Plan and Schedule.

E. Contractor shall be responsible for the construction of temporary barricades, barriers and services as indicated to:

1. Protect occupants and pedestrians from injury. 2. Protect vehicles and existing construction to remain from damage. 3. Maintain security of the Site and the Building at all times.

F. Refer to paragraph 1.27 of this Section and provisions of Section 01420, Environmental Protection for information pertaining to encounter of potentially hazardous materials.

1.3 SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General working hours on Base are from 0700 to 01600 hours.

B. No streets will be blocked without BCE approval.

C. Contractor shall immediately clean up any debris tracked onto streets resulting from this construction operation.

D. Construction areas, including equipment, temporary office and storage areas, shall be kept clean and neat.

E. No burning is permitted on the Base.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for application and any costs associated with waivers or permits required to operate cranes at the construction site as set forth in detail in Section 01000.

1.4 UTILITIES (WATER, SEWER, GAS AND ELECTRICITY)


A. Refer to Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.

B. AAFES will pay for utilities consumed within the building and related exterior construction work.

C. Contractor shall pay

D. Contractor shall be required to pay designated utility companies the prevailing rate for fees charged for this Project as needed for:

1. Inspection and connection of new utilities to existing services owned by utility company.

2. Connection fees and utilities consumed for temporary offices and storage sheds (water, sewer, gas and electricity).

3. All other fees required by private utility companies for construction of the Project.

E. MacDill AFB utilities information:

1. Water/Sewer:

a. Florida Government Utility Authority (FGUA):

1.) POC: Michael Wilson. 2.) Phone: (727) 359-1158.

2. Natural gas:

a. TECO Peoples Gas:

1.) POC: Rick Swirbul. 2.) Phone: (813) 275-3278.

3. Electrical power:

a. MacDill AFB:

1.) POC: Victor Nespeca. 2.) Phone: (813) 828-4531.

4. Communication – MacDill AFB:

a. MacDill AFB:

1.) POC: Cable Maintenance Shop. 2.) Phone: (813) 828-2940.

b. Private Utility:

1.) POC: Verizon & Brighthouse. 2.) Phone: (800) 432-4770 (Sunshine State one call of Florida).

5. Data/LAN – MacDill AFB:

a. POC: Mark Tedesco, Exchange IT. b. E-mail: [email protected]. c. Phone: (813) 840-0511 x 300 or (813) 244-7222.

1.5 LAYING OUT WORK

A. Layout:

1. Dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of work shall be verified by Contractor.


2. Discrepancies between Drawings, specifications, and Conditions shall be referred to the Contracting Officer in writing for adjustment before work affected is performed.

3. Failure to make such notifications shall place responsibility upon Contractor to carry out work in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for the location and elevation of all the construction contemplated by the construction documents.

C. Prior to commencing work, Contractor shall carefully compare and check all Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings, each with the other, that in any way affect the locations of elevation of the work to be executed by him.

1. Any discrepancy shall be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer or designated representative for verifications and adjustment.

2. Any duplication of work made necessary by failure or neglect on Contractor's part to comply with this function shall be done at his expense.

D. Field Dimensions:

1. The drawings accompanying these specifications indicate the general design and arrangement of all apparatus, fixtures, accessories, etc. necessary to complete the work required.

2. Exact location or arrangement of equipment may be subject to minor changes necessitated by field conditions and shall be made as required without additional cost to AAFES.

3. Measurements shall be verified by actual observations at the construction site, and Contractor shall be responsible for all work fitting into place in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner meeting the approval of the Contracting Officer.

1.6 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK

A. Carefully check the site where project is to be constructed and observe any overhead wires and equipment.

1. Any such work shall be temporarily or permanently moved, replaced, or protected as required to facilitate construction, whether or not shown or specified.

B. Attention is directed to the existence of pipe and other underground utilities and improvements.

1. Included will be potential under slab conduit beneath the building floor slab and locations shall be determined prior to any saw cutting of the existing concrete slab.

2. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect all such utilities

and improvements at all times during construction of this project.

C. In coordination with MacDill AFB BCE, Contractor shall be responsible for determining locations of underground lines that could be damaged by construction of this project.

1.7 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES

A. Contractor shall make utility connections “Hot/Live” whenever possible.

B. When “Hot/Live” connections are not feasible, Contractor shall perform the work under this Contract with a minimum of outage time for all utilities.

1. Contractor may be required to perform the work while the existing utility is in service.


2. Interruption shall be by written approval from utility owner. 3. Existing utility services may only be interrupted when approved, in writing, by the

Contracting Officer and MacDill AFB BCE.

C. When it is necessary to interrupt the existing utilities, Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer and MacDill AFB BCE facilities engineer in writing at least ten (10) business days in advance of the time he desires the existing service to be interrupted.

1. Interruption time shall be kept to a minimum. 2. Depending upon the activities at the facility that require continuous service from

the existing utility, an interruption may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by the Contractor.

a. In such cases the interruption may have to be scheduled at a time of minimum requirement of demand for the utility including nights, weekends or holidays.

b. The amount of time requested by the Contractor for interruption of existing utility services shall be as approved, in writing, by the Contracting Officer and MacDill AFB BCE.

1.8 EXCAVATION

A. Prior to commencing any excavation work the Contractor shall obtain a valid Excavation Permit from MacDill AFB BCE Offices.

B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain the necessary signatures and coordination for the permit.

C. AF Form 103, Work Clearance Permit, shall be obtained from MacDill AFB BCE by contacting POC listed in Section 01000.

1.9 BARRICADES AND WARNING DEVICES

A. Contractor shall provide barricades and lighting devices, in accordance with Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices, latest Edition, at all points of excavation and construction in vehicle traffic areas.

B. Refer to Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls for additional information and provide detailed Traffic Control Plan for review and approval by Contracting Officer and MacDill AFB Safety Officer.

1. Include provisions for transportation and delivery of materials and equipment to site without interference with normal traffic operations.

2. Include provisions for controlling and directing customers on site for ingress and egress to and from gasoline dispensing islands and parking without interference with other site functions.

1.10 WELDING PERMIT

A. Prior to commencing any welding, soldering or other open flame work, Contractor shall obtain a welding permit from MacDill AFB Fire Department.

1. POC: Base Fire Department/Technical Services. 2. Phone: (813) 828-4236.

1.11 PROTECTION FOR OPEN FLAME DEVICES


A. When open flame and/or spark producing devices, i.e., acetylene oxygen welding equipment, electric arc welding, etc., are employed for job accomplishment, the following procedures are mandatory:

1. Inspect all surroundings and equipment to insure that combustible substances are not present in any area where contact of metal at a temperature above the flashpoint of any compound is possible.

2. Ensure that no open containers or spills of combustible substances are present. 3. Ensure that ignition is not possible by conduction, convection, radiation, or

dispersion of molten metal. 4. Proper protection equipment and practices will be used, i.e., fireproof blankets,

wetting of surrounding area, removal o combustible materials where practicable, earth filled backing and portable fire extinguishers of proper type on hand.

5. When the above devices are being used notify the Base Fire Department POC listed above, 24 hours ahead of usage.

1.12 FIRE PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall at all times maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire damage.

B. All scrap materials, rubbish, and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the building and shall not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property.

C. Suitable storage space shall be provided 50 feet minimum outside the building area for storing flammable materials and paints.

1. No storage will be permitted within the building.

D. Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal containers and removed from the building during unused periods.

E. Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations of NFPA Nos. 10 and 241, however, in all cases a minimum of four fire extinguishers shall be available for each building.

F. Fire Codes: Contractor shall obey all requirements of the National Fire Codes, Army Fire Regulations and Base Fire Regulations, as they relate to his work on Base.

G. Contractor shall provide a fire extinguisher at each location where cutting and welding is being performed.

1. Where electric or gas welding or cutting is done, interposed shields of noncombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hot metal.

2. When temporary heating devices are used they shall be monitored when operating when other workmen are not on the premises.

1.13 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Work not included: Except for such auxiliary work as is shown or specified or is necessary as a part of the construction, the following work is not included in the Contract:

1. Any work shown, but marked "NOT IN CONTRACT" (N.I.C.). 2. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by the Vendors or

Concessionaires. 3. Any work indicated to be furnished and installed by AAFES.


4. Removal, salvage and/or demolition of existing Food Court equipment, fixtures and furnishings as set forth in Paragraph 1.1, C., 4. above.

5. Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling and coordination of all work including that work indicated to be performed by others.

1.14 AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. See Specification Section 01017, AAFES Furnished and Installed Equipment.

1.15 AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. See Specification Section 01018, AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment.

1.16 LINING OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the installation of jointed floor, wall, and ceiling materials that:

1. The joints line through in a straight line and in both directions wherever possible. 2. The joints relate to all openings and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically

placed wherever possible including:

a. Grills and registers. b. Lighting fixtures. c. Equipment. d. Miscellaneous items not specifically address but requiring alignment for

aesthetic purpose.

3. If, because of the non-related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings, etc., it is not possible to accomplish the above, Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer or designated representative to determine the most satisfactory arrangement.

4. The Contractor shall establish centerlines for all trades.

1.17 INTEGRATING WORK

A. All streets, buildings, and other improvements shall be protected from damage.

B. Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the project work and shall not in any way interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from street or adjacent property.

C. If new work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised not to disturb or damage the existing work more than necessary.

D. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired, and restored to its original condition at no cost to the Army and Air Force Exchange Service.

1.18 HEADROOM UNDER PIPES

A. All horizontal runs of plumbing and heating pipes and/or electrical conduit suspended from ceilings shall provide for a maximum headroom clearance, but in no case shall this clearance be less than 8'-0" without written consent from the Contracting Officer.

B. Where piping or conduit is left exposed within a room, the same shall run true to plumb, horizontal or intended planes.


C. Where possible, uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall, floor, or ceiling surfaces.

1.19 PATCHING GOVERNMENT-OWNED FACILITIES

A. Government-owned structures, facilities, streets, curbs, walks, etc., that are damaged or removed due to required excavations or other construction work, shall be patched, repaired or replaced, and be left in their original state of repair by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.20 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING

A. Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., are diagrammatic and job conditions may not always permit installation in the location shown.

B. When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the Contracting Officer or designated representative’s immediate attention and the relocation determined in a joint conference.

C. The Contractor will be held responsible for relocating any items without first obtaining the Contracting Officer's approval.

D. He shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.21 OVERLOADING

A. The Contractor shall be held responsible for excessive overloading of any part or parts of structures beyond their safe calculated carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment, tools, machinery, or any other item thereon.

B. No loads shall be placed on floors or roofs before they have attained their permanent and safe strength.

1.22 STANDARDS

A. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard such as Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or other similar standard shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof, and any amendment or supplement thereto, in effect on the date of invitation for proposals, except as limited to type, class, or grade, or modified in such reference, and except as otherwise indicated.

B. The standard referred to, except as modified in the specifications, shall have full force and effect as though printed in these specifications.

1. Where Federal Specifications are referred to as a measure of quality and standard, they refer to Federal Specifications established by the Procurement Division of the United States Government and are available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office.

2. Where Federal Specification numbers are used, they refer to the latest edition including amendments thereto.

3. Where Commercial Standards are referred to as a measure of quality, standard, and method of fabrication, they refer to Commercial Standards issued by the U.S. Department of Commerce.

4. Where A.S.T.M. Serial Numbers are used, they refer to the latest tentative specifications, standards specifications, standards methods, or standard method of testing issued by the American Society for Testing and Materials.


1.23 CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE

A. Except where tests and/or inspections in connection with structural materials are specified or required by applicable laws, rules, and regulations, manufacturer's certificate covering conformance with the requirements of the above mentioned Federal Specifications and Commercial Standards may be acceptable in lieu of such items.

B. Such certificates shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer and designated representative for all items so specified.

1.24 OCCUPANCY BY THE EXCHANGE

A. The Exchange shall reserve the right and privilege of partial occupancy during progress of the work.

B. Access shall be allowed at all times to the Exchange and its own Contractors in the endeavor.

1.25 TESTS AND REPORTS

A. See Specification Sections for detailed requirements of testing and reporting.

B. Refer to outline requirements in Section 01400, Quality Control and Section 01410, Testing Laboratory Services.

1.26 REFERENCES

A. All references to the word "Government" in the specifications shall mean Army and Air Force Exchange Service (AAFES).

B. Wherever the word "provide" is used in the Contract Documents as a directive, it shall be interpreted as meaning "provide and install completely and ready for use".

C. Definitions:

1. Vendor: Person or persons selling any material item. 2. Base or Facility: Location on which Project is being constructed. 3. Concessionaire: Person who is directly responsible for the lease of and operation

of the concessions such as Barber Shop or Laundry/Dry Cleaners. 4. Architect-Engineer: That person or firm responsible for preparing the working

drawings and specifications.

a. h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS 600 West Main Street, Suite 2 Post Office Box 820 Carbondale, Illinois 62901

618.457.5709

5. AAFES or Exchange: Army and Air Force Exchange Service. 6. Inspection Agency: Project Inspector contracted by AAFES.

1.27 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. MacDill AFB Environmental information:

1. Environmental – MacDill AFB:


a. POC: Kristy Snyder. b. E-mail: [email protected]. c. Phone: (813) 828-0789.

B. Do not incorporate any materials or equipment into the work that contain asbestos, lead-based paint, PCB’s or other hazardous materials.

C. Removal or disposal of toxic materials including asbestos containing material (ACM) is included in this Contract where specifically designated herein.

D. AAFES has tested, or caused to be tested, the areas of the building anticipated to be disturbed under the scope of this Project for hazardous materials with inspection, sampling and testing performed 04 and 13 January 2017 by Greenfield Environmental, Inc., 432 3rd Street North, St. Petersburg, Florida.

E. Inspection, sampling and testing determined that the following summarized areas of hazardous materials will be disturbed as set forth in the "Report of the NESHAP Limited Renovation Survey, Sampling and Evaluation of Asbestos-Containing Materials" found bound in this Project Manual under Section 02083, Asbestos Abatement.

F. Following is a summary of only the areas and materials identified as Asbestos Containing Materials:

1. Homogeneous Area HA 29 – 350 square feet of Gray vinyl floor tile over tan vinyl floor tile with yellow and black mastics located in the south BOH Receiving Area of the existing Food Court.

a. Sample Numbers 50, 51 and 52:

1.) Gray tile – No asbestos detected. 2.) Yellow mastic – No asbestos detected. 3.) Tan tile – No asbestos detected. 4.) Black mastic – 3% Chrysotile Asbestos.

2. Homogeneous Area HA 35 – 300 square feet of brown 12" x 12" vinyl floor tile with black mastic as a single layer located as a single layer in the Storage Room at the east end of the south BOH Receiving Area of the existing Food Court and at the bottom layers in the north and south offices of the south BOH Area.

a. Sample Numbers 65, 66 and 67:

1.) Floor tile – No asbestos detected. 2.) Mastic – 4% Chrysotile Asbestos.

3. Homogeneous Area HA 60 – 75 square feet of black roof flashing material located at the west entry canopy roof flashing areas on the north side of the building (North Retail Entry).

a. Sample Number PSI210_7/11:

1.) Roof flashing – 10% Chrysotile Asbestos.

4. Homogeneous Area HA 61 – 625 square feet of tar and gravel roofing system located at the west entry canopy roof and flashing areas on the north side of the building (North Retail Entry).

a. Sample Number PSI211_7/11:

1.) Black tar – 10% Chrysotile Asbestos. 2.) Gray insulation – No asbestos detected.


G. Refer to the NESHAP Report Attachment bound at the end of Section 02083, Asbestos Abatement for additional detailed information regarding anticipated ACM that could be disturbed during performance of work on this Project.

H. If the Contractor encounters suspect ACM or LBP not identified in the NESHAP Report Attachment immediately notify Wright-Patterson AFB 88 ABW/CEV and the Contracting Officer.

1. Immediately cease work until resolution is determined by MacDill AFB. 2. Advise Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing of the extent and

time delay anticipated where such materials are encountered.

1.28 HAZARDOUS WASTE STREAM MATERIALS

A. AAFES has also performed, or caused to be performed, a non-destructive assessment of the areas of the building anticipated to be disturbed under the scope of this Project in order to identify other potentially hazardous materials with survey work conducted on 04 and 13 January 2017 by Greenfield Environmental, Inc., 432 3rd Street North, St. Petersburg, Florida.

B. That assessment identified the following potentially hazardous materials that will be disturbed as set forth in the "Hazardous Waste Stream Assessment at the MacDill Air Force Base-Exchange Building (Furniture Store, Main Corridor, Food Court, Kitchen, UPS Store)" bound as Part B in this Project Manual under Section 02181, Hazardous Waste Stream Assessment.

C. Following is a summary of only the areas and materials identified in the waste stream assessment as potentially hazardous and shall require special precautions for legal demolition and disposal:

1. Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's):

a. Lighting ballasts.

2. Mercury Containing Lamps and Devices:

a. Fluorescent lamps. b. Exterior HID lamps. c. Mercury vapor lamps. d. Exit signs. e. Thermostat switches.

3. Ozone Depleting Substances:

a. HVAC refrigerants. b. Walk-in cooler and freezer refrigerants. c. Electric water coolers.

4. Other potentially hazardous materials identified:

a. Batteries. b. Hydraulic door closers. c. Fire extinguishers. d. Grease trap tanks. e. Lead plumbing vent flashings.

D. PCB ballasts shall be demolished, packaged, transported and disposed of as potentially hazardous waste in accordance with the requirements of MacDill AFB BCE Environmental and in strict compliance with State of Florida Rules and Regulations.


E. Mercury containing lamps and devices shall be demolished, packaged, transported and disposed of as potentially hazardous waste in accordance with the requirements of MacDill AFB BCE Environmental and in strict compliance with State of Florida Rules and Regulations.

F. Ozone depleting substances shall be legally recovered, transported and disposed of prior to demolition of any refrigeration equipment in accordance with the requirements of MacDill AFB BCE Environmental and in strict compliance with State of Florida Rules and Regulations.

G. No lead based paint materials were reported to be discovered within the area related to the scope of work.

H. Contractor shall use caution during demolition operations to prevent disturbance of any unknown hazardous materials that are suspected to contain asbestos, lead based paint or other suspect materials that encountered as work progresses.

I. Should the Contractor, during performance of work on this Project, encounter suspect hazardous materials not anticipated to be disturbed that require removal prior to progressing with work, Contractor shall:

1. Notify the Contracting Officer, designated representative and MacDill AFB BCE Environmental in writing stating the following prior to disturbance of such material(s):

a. Type and location of suspect material encountered. b. Extent of suspect material(s). c. Need for disturbance of such material(s). d. Options to avoid disturbing material(s).

2. Do not proceed with construction in areas of suspect hazardous materials without written direction from Contracting Officer.

J. Refer to provisions of Section 01420, Environmental Protection for additional information and procedures.

1.29 SUBMISSION OF PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer photographs taken on or about the first of every month, showing the general conditions of the work as viewed from the north, south, east, west where applicable and interior.

B. Photographs shall be digital (minimum of 1200 pixels x 1600 pixels [2 MB]) with a minimum of twenty (20) 3" x 5" standard prints accompanying each Application for Payment.

C. Each print shall be identified by date of exposure, project title, and AAFES Project Number, location and direction taken.

D. The Contractor may also submit a video of the above requirements as an option to photographs.

1.30 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS FURNISHED

A. After Contract award, and for construction purposes only, the Contractor will be provided:


1. A record set of “Issued for Construction” Drawings and Specifications. 2. A reproducible set of the “Issued for Construction” Drawings and Specifications in

electronic format (CD/.pdf)

B. Additional copies will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)

3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

END 01010.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01015 – OPTION PROPOSALS

OPTION PROPOSALS 01015-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE

A. Contractor shall provide Add Option Proposal prices on Solicitation Form for specified Option work.

B. Contractor shall coordinate all related and required work necessary to perform work specified in Option Proposals, when accepted and awarded.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. Section 01010, Summary of Work.

B. Section 01025, Cutting & Patching.

C. Section 01051, Grades, Lines & Levels.

D. Section 01310, Construction Progress Schedule.

E. Section 01340, Submittals.

F. Section 01600, Material & Equipment.

G. Section 01620, Storage & Protection.

H. Section 01650, System Start-up.

I. Section 01720, Project Closeout.

J. Specification Sections listed under respective Option Proposals.

2. DESCRIPTION OF OPTION PROPOSALS

2.1 Combined Work – All Trades Contract:

A. Option Proposal 1: Provide demolition and new construction work to construct exterior entrance upgrade indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.

1. Demolish concrete site paving for demolition of existing canopy column footings and construction of new concrete footing and foundation system for entrance upgrade including, but not limited to:

a. Protect existing building, entrance and site elements to remain. b. Maintain access/egress to and from existing entry between the hours of 1900

and 0700 by construction of barriers, directional signage and protection for customers, AAFES staff and others using sidewalk and driveway.

c. Sawcut and demolish concrete sidewalk paving in sub-phases to maintain access/egress and as indicated along north wall of building.

1.) North-south direction: From exterior building wall at column grid rows F.85 to ± G.3.

2.) East-west direction: From column grid rows ± 2 to ± 5.

2. Demolish and temporarily remove, salvage and protect designated Electrical components for reuse.

a. Disconnect and demolish canopy lighting fixtures and conduit retaining control circuit for new lighting fixtures.


b. Temporarily remove wall mounted tenant pylon sign and protect for reinstallation at new location.

c. Temporarily remove building identification sign and power supplies and protect for reinstallation at new location.

3. Demolish existing architectural and structural entry canopy components:

a. 3/4" cement plaster stucco ceiling and suspension system. b. Built-up roofing and flashing system found to be ACM in accordance with

requirements set forth in Section 02083, Asbestos Abatement in conjunction with:

1.) Sheet metal roof edge fascia. 2.) Roof insulation. 3.) 3" roof drain, leader and downspout piping to below grade and

permanently cap.

c. Metal clad plywood fascia panels, wood blocking and wood fascia framing. d. 1 1/2" Steel roof deck and 10" steel bar joists. e. Aluminum sheet metal column covers. f. Structural steel beams. g. Structural steel columns and concrete footings. h. All miscellaneous remnants of canopy and clean surrounding surfaces and

area to receive new construction. i. Face brick along column grid row 3.4 from outside corner south to existing

brick masonry door jamb pilaster.

4. Construct structural system to support entrance upgrades.

a. Excavate for new column and wall footings and place new reinforced concrete footings and foundation walls.

b. Set new structural steel columns, beams, cross-bracing and fixed canopy support brackets.

c. Cold-formed metal framing at walls, fascia and roof. d. Roof and wall sheathing.

5. Rough-in new conduit using existing wiring circuits, power supplies and controls for new fixtures and building signage.

a. Canopy ceiling rough-in cans. b. Wall mounted tenant pylon sign. c. Building identification sign.

6. Construct entry roof, wall and ceiling finishes.

a. Modified bitumen roofing and flashing into existing roof on backside of existing parapet wall.

b. Large format 8" x 16" decorative masonry knee walls either side of opening and return into existing brick masonry entrance door jambs.

c. EIFS system. d. Fixed aluminum canopy.

7. Install electrical fixtures and signage.

a. Ceiling lighting fixtures and lamps. b. Reinstall wall mounted tenant pylon sign at new location indicated. c. Reinstall wall mounted building identification sign at new location indicated.

8. Pertinent work specified elsewhere:


a. Division 1 – General Requirements. b. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. c. Section 02083 – Asbestos Abatement. d. Section 02750 – Concrete Site Paving. e. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. f. Section 04200 – Unit Masonry. g. Section 05100 – Structural Steel. h. Section 05310 – Steel Deck. i. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. j. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. k. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. l. Section 07210 – Building Insulation. m. Section 07240 – Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB. n. Section 07536 – Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only). o. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. p. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. q. Section 08305 – Access Doors. r. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. s. Section 10440 – Specialty Signs. t. Section 10711 – Fixed Canopies. u. Division 15 – Mechanical. v. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Option Proposal 2: Provide demolition and new construction work to construct exterior entrance upgrade indicated at the new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1. Demolish concrete site paving for construction of new concrete footing and foundation system for entrance upgrade including, but not limited to:

a. Protect existing building, entrance and site elements to remain. b. Maintain pedestrian circulation on the sidewalk to other entries between the

hours of 1900 and 0700 by construction of barriers, directional signage and protection for customers, AAFES staff and others using sidewalk and driveway.

c. Sawcut and demolish concrete sidewalk paving as indicated along north wall of building.

1.) North-south direction: From exterior building wall at column grid row 1 to ± 5' north of building wall.

2.) East-west direction: From column grid rows ± I.5 to ± 12.

2. Demolish and temporarily remove, salvage and protect designated Electrical components for reuse.

a. Disconnect and demolish header lighting fixture and conduit retaining control circuit for new lighting fixtures

b. Temporarily remove wall mounted tenant pylon sign currently located west of the angled north entrance to the existing food court adjacent to column grid row 9.1 and protect for reinstallation at new location.

c. Temporarily remove building identification sign (X FURNITURE) and power supplies.

1.) Deliver (FURNITURE) component of sign to AAFES for on-site storage. 2.) Protect (X) component of sign for reinstallation at new location.


d. Disconnect, remove, salvage and protect automatic entrance door and sidelite package.

1.) Deliver door and sidelite package to AAFES for on-site storage. 2.) Retain power and control circuit for extension and reinstallation in new

automatic entrance door package.

3. Demolish existing architectural components at existing entry opening:

a. Install temporary security barriers to isolate affected area of the Mall. b. Sheet metal gutter and downspouts between column grid rows ± I.5 to ± 12. c. Sheet metal roof edge fascia/gutter apron and built-up roofing flashing

system along parapet wall between column grid rows ± I.5 to ± 12. d. Four sheet metal clad, precast concrete pilaster caps from column grid row J

west to inside corner intersection between the 1972 Commissary Building and the 1978 Exchange Building.

e. Sawcut and demolish face brick from concrete masonry wall and pilasters starting at the east edge of pilaster located at column grid row J to the west edge of pilaster located closest to the inside corner intersection between Buildings.

f. Sawcut and demolish concrete masonry wall and two pilasters between the west side of pilaster located at column grid row J to the east side of the pilaster located closest to the inside corner intersection between Buildings.

g. Interior metal stud and gypsum board partition chases on both sides of original entry door.

h. Provide additional grinding of full thickness terrazzo and concrete floor slab from where partitions are removed to install new concrete topping for polishing.

4. Construct structural system to support entrance upgrades.

a. Excavate for new column and wall footings and place new reinforced concrete footings and foundation walls.

b. Set new structural steel columns, beams, cross-bracing and fixed canopy support brackets.

c. Cold-formed metal framing at walls, fascia and roof. d. Cold-formed metal framing to new entry door and sidelite rough opening to

plane on interior with existing furring. e. Roof and wall sheathing.

5. Rough-in new conduit using existing wiring circuits, power supplies and controls for new fixtures and building signage.

a. Canopy ceiling rough-in cans. b. Wall mounted tenant pylon sign on north face of original 1978 Exchange

Building adjacent to column grid row K. c. Building identification sign (salvaged X and new FOOD COURT).

6. Construct entry roof, wall and ceiling finishes.

a. Modified bitumen roofing and flashing into existing roof on backside of existing parapet wall.

b. Large format 8" x 16" decorative masonry knee walls either side of opening and return into existing brick masonry entrance door jambs.

c. EIFS system. d. Fixed aluminum canopy.

7. Construct interior Architectural components:


a. Furr wall areas adjacent to remaining concrete masonry walls to plane with existing.

b. Frame stepped soffit as indicated. c. Insulate stud and furring spaces and install vapor barrier. d. New concrete topping to match new floor finish elevation in original Dining

Room. e. Polish concrete topping to match surrounding areas. f. Install Type X gypsum drywall on wall framing and stepped soffit framing and

water resistant Type X gypsum drywall on pilaster framing, tape and finish. g. Paint new and existing gypsum drywall. h. CT finish at pilaster. i. Rubber base. j. Acoustical tile ceiling.

8. Install electrical fixtures and signage.

a. Ceiling lighting fixtures and lamps. b. Reinstall wall mounted tenant pylon sign at new location indicated. c. Reinstall wall mounted building identification sign at new location indicated.


a. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. b. Section 02750 – Concrete Site Paving. c. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. d. Section 03354 – Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement. e. Section 03356 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish. f. Section 04200 – Unit Masonry. g. Section 05100 – Structural Steel. h. Section 05310 – Steel Deck. i. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. j. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. k. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. l. Section 07210 – Building Insulation. m. Section 07240 – Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB. n. Section 07536 – Modified Roofing (Patching Only). o. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. p. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. q. Section 08305 – Access Doors. r. Section 08410 – Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts. s. Section 08460 – Automatic Entrance Doors. t. Section 08710 – Finish Hardware. u. Section 08800 – Glass & Glazing. v. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. w. Section 09300 – Tile. x. Section 09510 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings. y. Section 09650 – Resilient Flooring. z. Section 09900 – Painting aa. Section 10440 – Specialty Signs. bb. Section 10711 – Fixed Canopies. cc. Division 15 – Mechanical. dd. Division 16 – Electrical.


C. Option Proposal 3: Provide demolition and new construction work to construct additional site paving indicated between the original 1972 Commissary Building and the original 1978 Exchange Building in the east-west direction and from the intersection of Royal Tern Avenue and Blackbird Street to the south side of base bid work at the new Furniture Receiving and the south side of the existing 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition.

1. Demolish existing site paving as indicated including but not limited to:

a. Protect existing building, entrances and site elements to remain. b. Maintain pedestrian delivery access/egress to and from existing entries at the

south side of the existing 1978 Exchange Building (new Furniture Receiving) and the south side of the 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition (UPS and GNC) between the hours of 1900 and 0700 by construction of barriers, directional signage and protection for delivery personnel, AAFES staff and others using entrances.

c. Maintain protected pedestrian egress from required emergency egress doors on east side of the 1978 Exchange Building Retail area to an area of safe refuge in compliance with NFPA 101 and as approved by Contracting Officer, MacDill AFB Fire Chief and designated representatives.

d. Sawcut and demolish concrete sidewalk, stoop slabs, parking slabs, related substructure, sidewalks, equipment pads and base course as indicated between edges of existing asphalt paving and adjacent to exterior walls or new construction at existing buildings:

1.) Original 1972 Commissary Building (Food Court) 2.) Original 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition Building (UPS and GNC). 3.) Stoop slab at original 1978 Exchange Building (Center Mall), north of

the Pharmacy Addition (UPS and GNC).

e. Asphalt paving and base course.

1.) North-south direction: From intersection of roadways indicated above and the following exterior building walls:

a) South wall of the original 1978 Exchange Building (Center Mall) at column grid row F.2.

b) South edge of existing concrete sidewalk adjacent to the original 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition (UPS and GNC) at column grid row E.1.

c) South edge of new base bid Receiving slab adjacent to existing 1978 Exchange Building (Furniture) adjacent to column grid row D.8.

2.) East-west direction: From between the following exterior building walls:

a) West wall of the original 1972 Commissary Building (Food Court) at column grid row F.2.

b) East wall the original 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition (UPS and GNC) at column grid row 10.7.

c) East wall of the original 1978 Exchange Building (Furniture) adjacent to column grid row 10.

d) East edge of existing emergency exit slab at east wall of original 1978 Exchange Building (Retail) adjacent to column grid row 9.

2. Haul and place select fill materials as indicated and compact subgrade to receive new base course materials as indicated.


3. Haul and place base course materials and compact to receive new paving materials as indicated.

4. Form and construct new concrete sidewalks:

a. South side of original 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition (UPS/GNC). b. West side of original 1972 Commissary Building at location of new hollow

metal door out of Food Court “Vanilla Space”.

5. Construct new asphalt paving for driveway access and parking area. 6. Seal paving expansion and contraction joints, backfill and compact perimeters of

paved areas, place top soil and provide sod lawn areas. 7. Pertinent work specified elsewhere:

a. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. b. Section 02282 – Termite Control. c. Section 02300 – Earthwork. d. Section 02740 – Asphalt Concrete Paving. e. Section 02750 – Concrete Site Paving. f. Section 02923 – Turf & Grasses (Sod). g. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. h. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. i. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. j. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. (Protection). k. Section 09900 – Painting. (Protection). l. Division 15 – Mechanical. m. Division 16 – Electrical.

D. Option Proposal 4: Provide demolition and new construction work to replace additional under slab sanitary sewer piping in the new Women’s Public Toilet, Optometry/Optical, south Food Concept Preparations areas, and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms behind the new Food Court as indicated:

1. Demolish existing concrete floor slabs and under slab sanitary sewer piping including, but not limited to:

a. Protect existing construction elements to remain. b. Sawcut and remove designated concrete floor slab construction. c. Excavate and remove base course and pipe bedding to expose existing

sanitary sewer piping. d. Remove sanitary sewer piping, crumb trenches and establish new subgrade

to match existing in preparation for replacement with new piping.

2. Haul, place and compact pipe bedding material to establish flowline slopes as indicated to receive new piping.

3. Install new PVC sanitary waste and vent piping, bed piping and compact to subgrade in preparation to receive new floor slab base course material.

4. Haul, place and compact new base course material, patch vapor barrier, core drill cut edges of existing floor slab and install new adhesive anchored reinforcing.

5. Install new floor slab patches and prepare to receive new finish materials as indicated for adjacent existing slab areas.


a. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. b. Section 02282 – Termite Control. c. Section 02300 – Earthwork. d. Division 3 – Concrete Work. e. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.


f. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. g. Section 09300 – Tile. h. Section 09650 – Resilient Tile Flooring. i. Section 09680 – Carpet. j. Division 15 – Mechanical.

E. Option Proposal 5: Provide demolition and new construction work to replace the existing heating boiler and associated pumps located in the MPA behind the main store Retail area indicated:

1. Prepare and demolish boiler and pumps including, but not limited to:

a. Disconnect boiler and pumps from utility supply lines:

1.) Electrical power supplies. 2.) Natural gas piping.

b. Disconnect breeching as directed by MacDill AFB BCE. c. Isolate boiler and pumps from heating hot water loop. d. Drain boiler and pumps into separate reservoir and retain existing water for

refilling new system. e. Remove and dispose of boiler, pumps and related components no longer

needed.

2. Install new boiler and pumps on existing housekeeping pad:

a. Modify and extend piping and conduit and reconnect boiler and pumps to existing utility supply lines:

1.) Natural gas supply. 2.) Electrical power supply.

b. Install new combustion air system. c. Install new gas vent system. d. Modify and extend piping to reconnect to existing hot water loop piping. e. Fill new boiler and piping with original water drained from system. f. Legally dispose of any excess water as directed by MacDill AFB BCE

Environmental.

3. Install new boiler control system. 4. Provide system start-up, testing, training and O & M submittals. 5. Pertinent work specified elsewhere:

a. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. b. Division 15 – Mechanical. c. Division 16 – Electrical.

END 01015.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01017 – EXCHANGE (AAFES) FURNISHED & INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

EXCHANGE (AAFES) FURNISHED & INSTALLED EQUIPMENT 01017-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 AAFES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED PROPERTY

A. For the purposes of this Project the term Exchange (E) or AAFES (A) will be interchangeable and shall mean the Army and Air Force Exchange Service and/or its Concessionaires/Vendors (V).

B. Property: Property is indicated on the drawings.

C. Schedule: Contractor shall schedule early completion of designated areas for beneficial occupancy by AAFES usage prior to completion of entire project.

D. AAFES or others, including vendors and concessionaires, will furnish and install equipment as indicated on Equipment Plans and Schedules in the drawings.

1. Contractor's Duties:

a. Provide access for AAFES personnel. b. Coordinate work and cooperate with the installers of the property so that

installation can be accomplished in accordance with construction schedule. c. Provide all mechanical and electrical rough-ins in coordination with AFFES

furnished and installed equipment and building systems. d. Provide final hard wired or piped mechanical and electrical connections

between all property and rough-ins where indicated. e. Provide roof curbs, equipment supports and pipe/power portals for all roof

mounted equipment in conjunction with roof patching. f. Provide initial start-up and testing of equipment to ensure operation for

intended use. g. Provide installation of services/commodity spaces store identification signage

including wiring rough-ins and final wiring connections. h. Provide written notification to and coordination with Contracting Officer or

designated representative for final equipment start-up and training conducted by EXCHANGE.

2. AAFES Duties:

a. Inspect designated area prior to use and issue statement of acceptance of area for installation of property.

b. Make final plug-in or quick couple mechanical and electrical connections between property and building systems and Contractor provided rough-ins and devices where indicated.

c. Provide custodial services for designated areas during use after beneficial occupancy.

d. Provide all equipment start-up, training and training documentation.

1.2 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing to Contracting Officer or designated representative at least 30 days in advance of the designated delivery date.


B. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of AAFES furnished property the Contractor shall be responsible for storage, protection and/or redelivery cost.

C. Should AAFES be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under this contract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which he can file a claim under these conditions.

1.3 AAFES ACTIVITIES AFFECTING PROGRESS OF WORK:

A. Mall Areas: Schedule date of possession of these areas for installation of new fixtures, furnishings, accessories and graphics with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

B. Commodity Spaces: Schedule date of possession of these areas for use as swing space for temporarily relocated Concessions and Services.

C. Laundry/Dry Cleaning: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of equipment, fixtures, furnishings, accessories and graphics with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

D. Furniture Store Area: Schedule date of possession of these areas for installation of fixtures, furnishings, accessories and graphics with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

E. Food Court Dining Area: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of equipment, fixtures, furnishings, accessories and graphics with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

F. Charley's Preparation and Serving: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of equipment, fixtures, accessories and graphics with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

G. Subway Preparation and Serving: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of equipment, fixtures, accessories and graphics with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

H. Taco Bell Preparation and Serving: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of equipment, fixtures, accessories and graphics with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

I. Arby's Preparation and Serving: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of equipment, fixtures, accessories and graphics with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

J. Boston Market Preparation and Serving: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of equipment, fixtures, accessories and graphics with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

K. Walk-in Coolers/Freezer:


1. Schedule date of possession of these areas for installation of walk-in boxes, equipment, fixtures and accessories with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

2. Coordinate with AAFES cooler/freezer supplier and schedule Contractor provided pipe/power portals and equipment supports with other roofing system work prior to designated delivery date of walk-in boxes.

L. Back of House Areas: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of equipment, fixtures and accessories with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

M. Offices and Break Room Areas: Schedule date of possession of this area for installation of equipment, fixtures, furnishings and accessories with sufficient time to prevent scheduling delays in completion of the Project.

1.4 ACCEPTANCE OF AREAS FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY

A. Completion: Construction in each area at date scheduled for its use and possession by AAFES or others:

1. Shall be sufficiently complete, in accordance with Contract Documents, so that AAFES or others may occupy the area for the use for which it is intended.

2. Comply with Contract Clauses titled Inspection of Construction, and Use and Possession Prior to Completion.

B. Inspection: Prior to acceptance by AAFES of an area for beneficial occupancy:

1. The Contracting Officer will conduct an inspection of the specific area. 2. A list of deficiencies will be provided to the Contractor.

C. Acceptance: If the Contracting Officer determines the specific area is sufficiently complete for beneficial occupancy by AAFES:

1. The area will be accepted in writing with the exception of deficiencies listed. 2. The deficiencies listed shall be completed or corrected prior to final acceptance at

the completion of the project.

D. Damage: Damage resulting from AAFES' use will not be considered the Contractor's responsibility.

E. General Provisions: Refer to clause entitled "Final Inspection and Acceptance" of the AAFES "General Provisions".

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MALL AREAS:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Mall Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (EF/EI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of fixtures, furnishings, accessories and graphics requirements, rough-ins, installation and hard-wired final connection for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.


2.2 COMMODITY SPACES:

A. AAFES Use of Space: AAFES may utilize these areas for temporary relocation of Concessions and Services during the course of construction in Mall areas.

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination to facilitate installation of temporary items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.

2.3 LAUNDRY/DRY CLEANING:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Laundry/Dry Cleaning Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (EF/EI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment, fixtures, accessories and graphics requirements, rough-ins, hard-piped and hard-wired final connection for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.

2.4 FURNITURE STORE AREA:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Furniture Store Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (EF/EI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of fixtures, accessories and graphics requirements, rough-ins and hard-wired final connection for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above

2.5 FOOD COURT DINING AREA:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Food Court Dining Area Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (EF/EI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment, fixtures, furnishings, accessories and graphics requirements, rough-ins, hard-piped and hard-wired final connection for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.

2.6 CHARLEY'S PREPARATION AND SERVING:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Preparation and Serving Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (EF/EI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment, fixtures, accessories and graphics requirements, rough-ins, hard-piped and hard-wired final connection for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.


2.7 SUBWAY PREPARATION AND SERVING:


B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment, fixture, accessories and graphics requirements, rough-ins, hard-piped and hard-wired final connection for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.

2.8 TACO BELL PREPARATION AND SERVING:



2.9 ARBY'S PREPARATION AND SERVING:



2.10 BOSTON MARKET PREPARATION AND SERVING:



2.11 WALK-IN COOLERS/FREEZER:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Equipment and Furnishing Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (EF/EI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination for equipment, fixtures, accessories, routing lines, sleeves, cutting, drilling, initial start-up and testing for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.

1. Coordinate with cooler/freezer manufacturer and installer for size and location of rooftop mounted condensers on building.


a. Provide appropriately sized equipment supports for all roof-mounted condenser equipment.

b. Provide support angles between bar joists under roof deck at equipment supports and provide solid blocking anchorage to roof deck support structure.

c. Provide equipment support flashing to modified bitumen roofing.

2. Coordinate with cooler/freezer manufacturer and installer for location of roof mounted pipe portals for routing refrigerant lines, power and control wiring inside building. (Routing of line sets, power and control wiring across roof and on exterior building wall will NOT be allowed.)

a. Provide appropriately sized pipe portals for line sets, power conduits and control wiring.

b. Provide solid blocking and pipe portal anchorage to roof deck support structure.

c. Provide pipe/power portal flashing to modified bitumen roofing. d. Provide roof deck cutting for routing lines and wiring between roof of building

to interior and into walk-in boxes.

3. Installation of insulation system, edge blocking, modified bitumen roofing, base flashing and manufactured sheet metal counter flashing as specified in Sections 07210, 07536 and 07600.

2.12 BACK OF HOUSE AREAS:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Back of House Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (EF/EI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment, fixture and accessories requirements, rough-ins, hard-piped and hard-wired final connection for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.

2.13 OFFICES AND BREAK ROOM AREAS:

A. AAFES Furnished and Installed Office and Break Room Items: AAFES will furnish and install the items indicated (EF/EI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment, fixture and accessories requirements, rough-ins, hard-piped and hard-wired final connection for items furnished and installed by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth above.

END 01017.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01018 – EXCHANGE (AAFES) FURNISHED/ CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

EXCHANGE (AAFES) FURNISHED/ CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT 01018-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. For the purposes of this Project the term Exchange (E) or AAFES (A) will be interchangeable and shall mean the Army and Air Force Exchange Service and/or its Concessionaires/Vendors (V).

B. AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed (EF/CI) and Concessionaire/Vendor Furnished/Contractor Installed (VF/CI) equipment shall be handled in accordance with the "Army and Air Force Exchange Service General Provisions" clause entitled "AAFES Furnished Property".

C. AAFES will furnish equipment indicated for installation by the Contractor and will provide final equipment start-up and training.

D. Contractor shall provide:

1. Coordination and confirmation of exact equipment dimensions and rough-in requirements for all equipment furnished by AAFES.

2. All rough-ins and final connections to equipment designated for installation by Contractor.

3. Provide initial start-up and testing of equipment to ensure operation for intended use.

4. Provide written notification to and coordination with Contracting Officer or designated representative for final equipment start-up and training conducted by AAFES.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MALL AREAS:

A. AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Mall Area Items: AAFES will furnish the services and commodity space store identification signage indicated for installation by Contractor in the Mall Areas (EF/CI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of signage and power supply requirements, complete installation of new signage and reinstallation of salvaged existing signage including appropriate rough-ins, and final connections for the items furnished by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these Solicitation Documents.

2.2 BARBER SHOP:

A. AAFES Owned, Contractor Salvaged and Installed Barber Shop Items: Contractor shall salvage, store and protect existing equipment, fixtures, furnishings, mirrors and graphics indicated for installation by Contractor in the renovated Barber Shop (EF/CI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment and fixture requirements, complete installation of existing equipment, fixtures, furnishings, mirrors and graphics including appropriate rough-ins, and final connections for items owned and furnished by AAFES and salvaged for reinstallation by Contractor unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these Solicitation Documents.


2.3 OPTICAL:

A. AAFES Owned, Contractor Salvaged and Installed Optical Items: Contractor shall salvage, store and protect existing equipment, fixtures, furnishings and graphics indicated for installation by Contractor in the Optical (EF/CI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment and fixture requirements, complete installation of existing equipment, fixtures, furnishings and graphics including appropriate rough-ins, and final connections for items owned and furnished by AAFES and salvaged for reinstallation by Contractor unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these Solicitation Documents.

2.4 FOOD COURT DINING AREA:

A. AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Food Court Area Items: AAFES will furnish the Drink Station equipment, television brackets and signage indicated for installation in the Food Court Dining Area for installation by the Contractor (EF/CI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination and verification of Drink Station equipment plumbing and power requirements, locations, heights and power requirements for televisions and signage, furnish wall blocking and appropriate rough-ins for the items furnished by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these Solicitation Documents.

2.5 CHARLEY'S PREPARATION AND SERVING:

A. AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Food Service Equipment and Fixtures: AAFES will furnish the equipment and fixtures indicated for installation in the Preparation Areas and Serving Areas for installation by the Contractor (EF/CI).

B. Contractor Provide: Coordination, verification of equipment requirements, complete installation of equipment including appropriate rough-ins, and final connections for items furnished by AAFES unless indicated otherwise and subject to provisions set forth in these Solicitation Documents.

2.6 SUBWAY PREPARATION AND SERVING:



2.7 TACO BELL PREPARATION AND SERVING:




2.8 ARBY’S PREPARATION AND SERVING:



2.9 BOSTON MARKET PREPARATION AND SERVING:



2.10 BACK OF HOUSE AREAS:

A. AAFES Furnished, Contractor Installed Food Service Equipment and Fixtures: AAFES will furnish the equipment and fixtures indicated for installation in the Back of House Areas for installation by the Contractor (EF/CI).


3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES

A. Designate required delivery date for each product.

1. Notify the Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing at least 60 days in advance of the date that AAFES furnished equipment and furnishings will be needed.

2. Shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all plumbing and electrical rough-ins will be furnished by AAFES.

B. The equipment, fixtures and furnishings will be received at the job site by a representative of AAFES who will jointly, with the Contractor, verify condition and quantities.

1. The representative will then affect receipted transfer of custody of the equipment, fixtures and furnishings to the Contractor.

2. After receipt of equipment, fixtures and furnishings Contractor shall:

a. Coordinate all aspects of equipment, fixture, furnishings and signage installations with AAFES and/or AAFES supplier/vendor for location, mounting and/or placement into construction.


b. Handle, store (on-site), protect, provide rough-ins and make final hard wired and hard piped connections to equipment and fixture items.

c. Installation of shall be performed in accordance with the specifications, equipment, fixture and furnishing plans and schedules shown on the Drawings and the rough-in drawings provided by AAFES.

d. Construct all openings, furnish and install required sleeves and furnish and install all reinforcing, miscellaneous supports, angles, plates, anchors, and bolts necessary to secure AAFES furnished equipment in place.

e. Repair or replace items damaged as a result of Contractor's operations. f. Apply finish indicated, if any. g. Handle, store (on-site), protect, provide rough-ins and make final hard wired

connections to signage and/or remote power supply units where required.

1.) Most electronic AAFES signs require installation of remote power supplies (transformers) in accessible locations and routing of wiring between sign and power supply units.

2.) Due to limitations in distance between sign and power supply units, location of units shall be coordinated prior to installation.

3.) Contractor shall make all provisions for routing wiring from sign to power supply units and provide line voltage power to power supply units as part of their Contract.

a) Provide 12" x 12" access panel(s) wherever power supply units must be located above an inaccessible ceiling space such as gypsum drywall.

b) Provide J-box for mounting power supply unit(s) at all locations, whether accessible or inaccessible conditions are encountered.

c) Provide 3/4" conduit from back of sign panel or individual letters to J-box for routing wiring at all locations, whether accessible or inaccessible conditions are encountered for AAFES routing of wiring between.

d) Provide line voltage circuit to J-box at each location requiring a power supply unit and make final connections to power supply.

3. The installation shall be complete in all respects, including mechanical and electrical hook ups, and put into good operating condition.

4. Provide initial start-up and testing of equipment to ensure operation for intended use.

5. Provide written notification to and coordination with Contracting Officer or designated representative for final equipment start-up and training conducted by AAFES.

C. AAFES Duties:

1. Deliver all AAFES furnished items to the job site. 2. Uncrate, assemble, set in final position, align, join and level all equipment and

fixtures. 3. Uncrate, assemble, set in final position, level, install power supply units and route

wiring between sign and power supply units in conduit furnished by Contractor. 4. Schedule delivery date with supplier in accordance with Progress Chart. 5. Provide Contractor with installation drawings and instructions.


6. Provide Contractor with shop drawings indicating dimensional locations of all plumbing and electrical rough-ins.

3.2 DELIVERY DATE CHANGES:

A. Requests by Contractor to change designated delivery dates shall be made in writing at least 60 days in advance of the designated delivery date.

B. If the Contractor is not ready to accept delivery of AAFES furnished equipment the Contractor shall be responsible for storage and delivery cost.

C. Should AAFES be unable to effect the change, or should the Contractor fail to submit his request within the time stated above, the Contractor's obligation under his contract and as stated herein shall not be relieved and further, the Contractor will have no basis upon which he can file a claim under these conditions.

END 01018.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01026 – UNIT PRICES

UNIT PRICES 01026-1

1 GENERAL


A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide:

a. Unit prices as indicated for interior concrete floor slab repair and joint filler replacement.

b. Conformity to administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

B. Option Proposals 1 and 2:

1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide:

a. Unit prices as indicated for interior concrete floor slab repair and joint filler replacement for floor slab areas within scope of these Options.

b. Conformity to administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Contract Documents.

B. Division 1 – General Requirements.

C. Section 03354 – Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement.

D. Section 03356 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price shall be included in Contractor’s proposal on AAFES Solicitation Form 4450-024, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices shall include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment:

1. Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices.

2. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor’s measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner’s expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

UNIT PRICES 01026-2

D. List of Unit Prices:

1. A list of unit prices is included in Part 3 of this Section. 2. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for

materials described under each unit price.

2 PRODUCTS

A. See Section 03354 – Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement.

B. See Section 03356 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES

A. Refer to Section 03354, Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement for detailed description of work and method for computing base bid costs for the following items:

1. Joint filler removal and replacement. 2. Spalled joint repair or joint with metal keyway (less than ¾”). 3. Spalled joint repair with metal keyway or self leveling compound (greater than ¾”). 4. Crack repair. 5. Surface defect repair, including pop-outs, spalls and gouges. 6. Surface embed repair including cleanouts, in-floor electrical outlets and Walker

Duct access holes. 7. Large area surface repair, existing underlayment removal and replacement. 8. Grout coat surface enhancement, including micro-pin holes, pitting and other

shallow surface deficiencies. 9. Full grind, densify and polish portions of the project not currently indicated on the

drawings. END 01026.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01030 – SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES

SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES 01030-1

1 GENERAL


A. Substitution submission procedures.

B. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. AAFES Solicitation/Proposal/Award Form, contained in the AAFES solicitation package.

B. AAFES Instructions to Offerors and Conditions of Proposal/Awards form, contained in the AAFES solicitation package.

C. Individual specification Sections relevant to the work required under each option.

1.3 GENERAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. List proposed substitutions on the AAFES Proposal Substitution Form.

B. Substitutions listed on the AAFES Proposal Substitution Form will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at AAFES's discretion.

C. Accepted substitutions will be identified by Solicitation Amendment.

D. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each option.

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING SOLICITATION

A. Prior to solicitation closing, Contracting Officer will consider written requests to amend Solicitation Documents to ADD products not specified provided such requests are received with sufficient advance time to issue an Amendment, which must be issued 10 days prior to proposal date.

1. Requests received without sufficient advance time to review and be incorporated into an Amendment will not be considered with timing as determined by Contracting Officer.

2. If a request is approved, an Amendment will be issued indicating approval.

B. No substitutions will be considered after award of Contract except under one or more of the following conditions:

1. Required for compliance with final interpretations of code requirements or insurance regulations.

2. Unavailability of specified product, through no fault of Contractor. 3. Subsequent information discloses inability of specified product to perform properly

or fit designated space. 4. Manufacturer or fabricator refusal to certify or guarantee performance of product

as specified for intended use.

SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES 01030-2

1.5 SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS

A. In the event a material substitution is to be submitted, the Offeror will follow the procedure outlined in Paragraphs A1 thru 3 below and Paragraph B1 thru 6:

1. Proposing Offeror shall submit three copies of request for substitution. 2. Request shall be accompanied by complete data on proposed substitution

substantiating compliance with Contract Documents including product identification and description, performance and test data, references and samples where applicable, and an itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product specified.

3. Request shall be accompanied by accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product specified, whether or not modification or Contract sum is to be a consideration.

B. Requests for substitution based on the above, when forwarded by Offeror to Contracting Officer, are understood to mean that Offeror:

1. Represents that he/she has personally investigated proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to product specified.

2. Represents that he/she has coordinated the substitute product with subcontractors for compatibility of installation into Project and that no additional costs will be incurred due to acceptance of the substitution.

3. Will provide same guarantee for substitution that he/she would for specified product.

4. Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts and redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution.

5. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution, making such changes as may be required for work to be completed in all respects.

6. Product substitutions price increases will not be considered, only price decreases.

C. Substitutions will not be considered if:

1. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing submittals without formal request required above.

2. For implementation they require a substantial revision of Contract Documents in order to accommodate use.

3. They are unacceptable to the Contracting Officer.

D. NO FURTHER SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE PERMITTED AFTER CONTRACT AWARD.

E. Refer to AAFES Proposal Substitution Form (CSI) attached to the end of this Section.



END 01030. ATTACHMENT:

CSI PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION FORM (1 page)

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01045 – AAFES CUTTING & PATCHING

CUTTING & PATCHING 01045-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.


A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.

B. Section 01340 - Submittals.

C. Section 07270 - Firestopping.

D. Individual Product Specification Sections:

1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section. 2. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration any undesignated item of work that affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of AAFES or separate contractor.

B. Include in request:

1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected Work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed Work and Products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of AAFES or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.

CUTTING & PATCHING 01045-2

C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work.

B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

C. Provide protection from elements for areas that may be exposed by uncovering work.

3.3 CUTTING

A. Execute cutting and fitting to complete the Work.

B. Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work.

C. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.

D. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.

E. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.

F. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill.

1. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval from Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.4 PATCHING

A. Execute patching to complement adjacent Work.

B. Fit Products together to integrate with other Work.

C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

D. Employ original installer to perform patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

H. Refinish surfaces:

1. Match adjacent finish. 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. 3. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

END 01045.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01051 – GRADES, LINES & LEVELS

GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS 01051-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Contractor provide:

1. Lay out of Work. 2. Establish all working lines, levels, elevations and measurements.

B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:

1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 2. Section 01010 –Summary of Work. 3. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 4. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor shall provide:

1. Coordination and supervision of layouts of own forces and subcontractors. 2. Coordination of AAFES and AAFES/Vendor layouts.

a. Coordination and supervision of overall layout of Work.

1.) Coordination of AAFES Furnished/AAFES Installed equipment layout. 2.) Coordination and supervision of AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed

equipment layout.

3. Establish all working lines, levels, elevations and measurements for Work. 4. Employ qualified personnel to perform Work.

1.3 Contracting Officer will furnish:

1. Locations, dimensions and data pertaining to other improvements so far as known (shown of drawings).

2. Information and contact person for the purpose of Contractor coordination and supervision of AAFES furnished equipment and work.

END 01051.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01060 – EXCHANGE (AAFES) SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES

EXCHANGE (AAFES) SAFETY POLICIES & PROCEDURES 01060-1

1 GENERAL


A. Contractor required health and safety plan.

1. Contractor is responsible for risk assessment plan. 2. Contractor shall maintain OSHA permissible exposure limits related by the risk

assessment of 25 ppm (170 mg/cubic meter) during any 8 hour work shift for a 40-hour week.

B. Construction Hazard Plan.


A. Section 01090 – Exchange (AAFES) Safety Regulations & Codes.

B. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

1. Construction Hazard Plan. 2. Job Safety and Health Plan. 3. Emergency Response Plan.

C. Section 01420 – Exchange (AAFES) Environmental Protection.

D. Section 01720 – Project Closeout.

E. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition.

F. Section 02083 – Asbestos Abatement (with Report).

G. Section 02181 – Hazardous Waste Stream Assessment (with Report).

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Publication:

a. EM 385-1-1 Safety and Health Requirements Manual (Oct. 92)

2. OSHA 1910 R.E.G. - 29CFR, OSHA 1910.120

B. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for AAFES approval - The following items shall be submitted for AAFES approval:

1. Designation of Safety Representative: The Contractor shall designate in writing a qualified employee OSHA Trained under 1910.120 responsible for the overall supervision of all accident prevention activities.


a. Duties shall include ensuring applicable safety requirements are incorporated into work methods and inspecting the job site to ensure that safety measures and instructions are actually being applied.

b. This person shall be on site at all time that work is in progress.

2. The Contractor shall be trained/certified in OSHA 1910.120 procedures.

3. All other employees performing site work will meet OSHA 1910 training requirements for their job capacity.

B. Submittals for Information Only - The following items shall be Contractor certified:

1. Job Hazard Analysis:

a. Contractor shall develop a job hazard analysis for presentation at the pre-construction conference.

b. The Contractor's job hazard analysis shall list potential hazards that could arise during the course of the work.

c. For each hazard, the applicable paragraph of EM 385-1-1 shall be cited.

2. Job Safety and Health Plan:

a. The Contractor shall develop a Job Safety and Health Plan for presentation at the Pre-construction conference.

b. The Contractor's Safety Plan shall make whatever provisions are necessary to conduct his work in accordance with current OSHA standards.

c. The safety and health plan must specifically address the excavation portion of construction and will be specific to all Hazardous Materials (Haz-Mats), and incorporate decontamination procedures for personnel and equipment, continuous vapor monitoring, a prohibition against eating in proximity to the site, and a prohibition against the smoking of tobacco products in the proximity to the site.

d. The following are minimum requirements for the health and safety plan:

1.) The Contractor is responsible for all compounds and degradation products addressed by the Risk Assessment Plan.

2.) Specialized Designs: Specialized designs will be provided when the situation requires.

a) Examples of such designs include, but are not limited to, vapor barriers in areas of known vapor hazard.

3.) Safety Plans: Safety Plans will be the responsibility of the Contractor for construction areas identified by the installation and/or AAFES as areas of known hazards only.

a) These plans are required by 29 CFR 1910 and are the responsibility of the Contractor.

b) This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the Contractor.

4.) Minimum Requirements for the Health and Safety Plan are as follows:

a) Must be kept on site, and must be written. b) Will contain a hazard analysis (safety and health risk) for

each site task and operation (to be supplied by the installation).


c) Will include employee training (per paragraph (3) of 1910.120).

d) Will include personal protective equipment to be used by employees for each of the site tasks and operations (paragraph (g) (5) of 1910.120).

e) Will include provision for medical surveillance (paragraph (f) of 1910.120).

f) Will include the frequency and types of air monitoring, personal monitoring, environmental sampling techniques, instruments to be used (their maintenance and calibration).

g) Will include a site control program (per paragraph (d) of 1910.120) to be coordinated with the installation.

h) Will include a decontamination procedure (per paragraph (k) of 1910.120).

i) Will include an emergency response plan (per paragraph (1) of 1910.120).

j) Will include a confined space entry procedure (per 1910.146, 147 or program equivalent).

k) Will include provision for spill containment (per paragraph (j) of 1910.120).

l) Will include pre-entry briefings (prior to each site task activity) for all employees involved in the task, supervision, or emergency response.

m) Written verification of adherence to the "plan" by a Safety and Health Supervisor is required (the supervisor must meet the 1910.120 training requirements for supervisors).

n) Deficiencies will be corrected immediately upon discovery and after consultation with the AAFES Contracting Officer.

e. Hazard Response Plan: The planned, unplanned or non-predicted discovery of such hazards as transite pipe, contaminated soils, and other possible hazards will be addressed within an Emergency Response Plan (EMR) by Contractor and all subcontractors.

f. This requirement will be coordinated through the Health and Safety Program of the military installation by the contractor (sample provided).

g. Material Safety Data Sheets will be maintained at the site for all materials in use.

1.5 MONTHLY SAFETY MEETINGS

A. Schedule safety meetings with Contractor and subcontractor personnel on a monthly basis in conjunction with Progress/Pay Meetings.

1. Minutes of safety meetings shall be prepared and signed by the Contractor. 2. Concurrence signed by Inspection Section and the original submitted to the

Contracting Officer for inclusion in the contract file.

1.6 ACCIDENT REPORTING AND RECORD KEEPING

A. Accident reporting and record keeping shall be in accordance with Section 2, EM 385-1-1.


B. Telephonic reports of injuries or property damage will be made as soon as possible after the incident and will be followed by a copy of U.S. Army Investigation Accident Report (DA Form 285).


3 EXECUTION

3.1 LIFE OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall comply with EM-1-1 and all provisions of this section during the life of the contract.

3.2 HEAD PROTECTION (HARD HATS)

A. All work sites under this contract are designated Hard Hat Areas.

B. Contractor shall post the area in accordance with Paragraph 7.C.03, EM 385-1-1 and shall ensure that all personnel, vendors and visitors use hard hats while within the limits of the work site.

END 01060.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01090 – EXCHANGE (AAFES) SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES

EXCHANGE (AAFES) SAFETY REGULATIONS & CODES 01090-1

1 GENERAL


A. Reference Standards.

B. Licenses and Permits.

C. Safety.

D. Affirmative Procurement Program.

E. Ozone Depleting Substances.

F. Lead Based Paint.

G. Cleaning & Debris Control.

H. Nuisance Dumping & Polluting Activities.

I. Stormwater Pollution Prevention.

J. Excavation at IRP Sites.

K. Contaminated Soil.

L. Suspected Hazardous Materials.

M. Oil-Filled or Impregnated Electrical Components.

N. Spill Response and Reporting.

O. Waste Disposal and Environmental Protection.


A. Section 01000 – Requirements of MacDill AFB.

B. Section 01010 – Summary of Work.

C. Section 01060 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures.

D. Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.

E. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

F. Section 01400 – Quality Control.

G. Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services.

H. Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

I. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.

J. Section 01590 – Field Offices & Sheds.

K. Section 01600 – Material & Equipment.

L. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.


M. Federal, State and Local Codes and Ordinances take precedence over these Specifications and Drawings where conflicts occur, unless the Drawings or Specifications call for more stringent requirements.

1. Notify the Contracting Officer and designated representative of conflicts in writing.

N. Comply with all applicable laws, building and construction codes, OSHA Safety and Health Regulations and applicable requirements of any governmental agency under whose jurisdiction this Work is being performed.

O. Obtain a copy of standards referenced in the various Specification Sections.

1. Maintain copy at the jobsite during execution of Work to which the standard applies.

P. Construction that is not governed by the contract specifications will be governed by the more stringent provisions of the latest published edition or statute adopted edition, of the following applicable codes, regulations and standards.

1. ACI – American Concrete Institute.

a. ACI 318-11 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. b. ACI 530-11 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.

2. ADA – 2010 Standards for Accessible Design, Department of Justice, 15 September 2010.

3. ADAAG – Americans With Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.

4. AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction.

a. AISC 360-10, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

5. AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute,

a. AISI S100-07, Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members, with Supplement 2, Standards for Cold Formed Steel Framing.

6. ANSI – American National Standards Institute. 7. ASCE/SEI – American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute.

a. ASCE/SEI 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

8. ASHRAE – American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.

a. Energy Conservation in New Buildings Design (ASHRAE 90.1). b. Standard for Natural and Mechanical Ventilation (No. 62).

9. ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 10. ASPE – American Society of Plumbing Engineers. 11. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials, Standards and Certifications. 12. ATBCB – Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 13. AWS – American Welding Society.

a. AWS D1.1-1.4, Structural Welding Code, latest edition. b. AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum, latest edition.

14. CFR – Code of Federal Regulations. 15. CPSP – Consumer Products Safety Commission.

a. Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials, 1981 (As Amended).


16. CRSI – Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.

a. Manual of Standard Practice, 2009 edition.

17. EPA – Environmental Protection Agency.

a. Oil Pollution Prevention, 40 CFR, Ch.1, Part 112, 1July 2004 Edition.

18. FM – Factory Mutual, Standards and Certifications. 19. IBC – International Building Code, 2015 Edition. 20. IECC – International Energy Conservation Code, Latest Edition. 21. IMC – International Mechanical Code, 2015. 22. IPC – International Plumbing Code, 2015. 23. MIL-STD-3007F – Standard Practice for unified Facilities Criteria and Unified

Facilities Guide Specifications, 15 February 2006. 24. NAAQS – National ambient Air Quality Standards. 25. NCMA – National Concrete Masonry Association.

a. Specifications for the Design and Construction of Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry.

26. NESHAPS – National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants. 27. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association.

a. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2015. b. NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, 2013. c. NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2013. d. NFPA 17A, Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems, 2013. e. NFPA 54, ANSI Z223.1-2015 National Fuel Gas Code, 2015. f. NFPA 58, Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code, 2011. g. NFPA 70, National Electric Code, 2017. h. NFPA 72, Fire Alarm Code, 2016. i. NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. j. NFPA 96, Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease

Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment, 2014. k. NFPA 241, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration & Demolition Operations,

2013.

28. NLMA – Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association.

a. National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings.

29. OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

a. Occupational Safety and Health Act.

30. PCA – Portland Concrete Association.

a. Concrete Floors on Grade.

31. PCI – Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute. 32. UFAS – Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, U.S. Architectural and

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 33. UFC – Unified Facilities Criteria.

a. UFC 1-200-01, General Building Requirements, 20 June 2016. b. UFC 1-300-08, Criteria for Transfer and Acceptance of DoD Real Property,

16 April 2009 (including Change 2, August 2011). c. UFC 3-120-10, Interior Design 15 June 2006 (including Change 1, July

2007). d. UFC 3-201-01, Civil Engineering, 1 June 2013.


e. UFC 3-202-02, Landscape Architecture, 23 February 2009 (including Change 1, November 2009).

f. UFC 3-210-10, Low Impact Development, 1 June 2015 (including Change 1, 1 February 2016).

g. UFC 3-220-01, Geotechnical Engineering, 1 November 2012. h. UFC 3-301-01, Structural Engineering, 1 June 2013 (including Change 3, 12

September 2016. i. UFC 3-310-01, Structural Load Data, 25 May 2005. j. UFC 3-310-04, Seismic Design for Buildings, 1 June 2013 (including Change

1, 20 June 2016. k. UFC 3-401-01, Mechanical Engineering, 1 July 2013 (including Change 1,

October 2015). l. UFC 3-410-01, Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems, 1 July

2013 (including Change 3, 25 January 2017). m. UFC 3-420-01, Plumbing Systems, 25 October 2004 (including Change 10,

26 October 2015). n. UFC 3-501-01, Electrical Engineering, 6 October 2015. o. UFC 3-530-01, Interior and Exterior Lighting Systems and Controls, 1 April

2015 (including Change 3, 1 June 2016. p. UFC 3-600-01, Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities, 8 August 2016

(including Change 1, 28 November 2016). q. UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings, 09

February 2012 (including Change 1, 1 October 2013). r. UFC 4-010-02, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standoff Distances for Buildings

(FOUO), 09 February 2012. s. UFC 4-021-01, Design and O and M, Mass Notification Systems, 9 April 2008

(including Change 1, January 2010).

34. UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Standards and Certifications. 35. Water Conservation Requirement of the Federal Energy Policy Act, 1992. 36. Other applicable codes and standards as applicable or as referenced by the

individual specification Sections.

1.3 LICENSES AND PERMITS

A. Contractor shall obtain and maintain current for the duration of this Contract, all required Federal, State and local licenses and permits.

1. All associated fees and taxes shall be paid by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.

B. Obtain from Base security all required vehicle and entry permits as specified in Section 01010, Project Summary.

C. Obtain any additional permits as required by MacDill AFB BCE at no additional cost to the Government.

1.4 SAFETY

A. Comply with all Federal and State regulations concerning safety of personnel and equipment.

1. All Contractor personnel shall wear hard hats and steel toe safety shoes while on the project site.

2. All Contractor personnel shall wear hearing protection (ear muffs or ear plugs) when required by OSHA regulations.


B. Ensure that lock out, tag out procedures are established and used as directed by 29 CFR 1910.145.

C. Comply with all safety, traffic and protection requirements in effect on JBSA-Sam Houston.

D. Provide safety barriers around open excavations, openings in floors and other hazards created by the Contractor’s activities.

E. The Contracting Officer may direct the Contractor to cease activities that are deemed unsafe.

1.5 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT PROGRAM

A. These standards apply to all new construction, demolition, rehabilitation, alteration, modification, repair, and maintenance of existing facilities.

B. In an effort to comply with the affirmative procurement requirements of Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) and Executive Order 13101, the government strongly promotes the use of the recycled and recovered materials and products identified in the Environmental Protection Agency’s Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines.

C. Recycled and recovered materials and products shall be used throughout the project in quantities as set forth in the technical Sections of the specifications and subject to compliance with performance requirements of these specifications.

1.6 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

A. No ozone depleting substances (refrigerants or any other compounds) shall be used in any capacity on this project.

1.7 LEAD BASE PAINT

A. No paint with a lead content of 0.06 percent or greater shall be used in any capacity on this project.

1.8 CLEANING AND DEBRIS CONTROL

A. During the term of this Contract, the Contractor shall remove any materials and equipment that are not required for the completion of the work as promptly as possible.

1. All debris shall be removed from the site and legally disposed. 2. The Contractor shall take particular care to eliminate any hazards created by his

operations.

B. The Contractor is responsible for any damage caused by his debris without additional cost to the Government.

C. The Contractor shall maintain at all times during his work at this Project Site a strict windblown debris control program.

1. This program shall ensure no windblown debris or other debris from his work shall contaminate or interfere with any access to or operation of any facility or any parking area, road or street.


1.9 NUISANCE DUMPING AND POLLUTING ACTIVITIES

A. Polluting, dumping, or discharging of any harmful, nuisance, or regulated materials (such as concrete truck washout, vehicle maintenance fluids, residue from saw cutting operations, solid waste or hazardous substances) into building drains, site drains, streams, waterways, holding ponds or to the ground surface is not permitted.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damages resulting from dumping or discharges.

2. Contractor shall conduct activities in such a fashion to avoid creating any legal nuisance, including but not limited to, suppression of noise and dust, control of erosion, and implementation of other measures as necessary to minimize off site impacts of work activities.

B. Fugitive dust emissions (airborne dust generated by vehicles operating on unpaved surfaces, transfer or transport of dust producing materials, etc.) shall be controlled at the construction site, along haul routes and at staging areas.

1. Water spraying shall be conducted as necessary to minimize fugitive dust generation.

1.10 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION

A. Prior to clearing, grading or excavating, the Contractor shall notify the MacDill AFB, 6 CES/CEIE Environmental Flight as indicated on Civil Drawings.

B. Coordinate required onsite Pre-Site Construction Meeting a minimum of seven (7) days prior to commencement of any site work.

C. If contaminated ground water should be encountered during excavation activities Contractor shall notify MacDill AFB BCE Environmental immediately and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

1.11 CONTAMINATED SOIL

A. If unexpected contaminated soil is encountered while performing work, stop work immediately, notify MacDill AFB BCE Environmental and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

B. Do not resume work until approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.12 SUSPECTED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Any suspect hazardous materials encountered during demolition or construction shall immediately be brought to the attention of MacDill AFB BCE Environmental and provide written notification to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

B. Work shall not resume until the Contracting Officer is satisfied that the materials are not hazardous.

C. Should suspect materials be found to be hazardous, Contractor shall immediately take steps to contain the material, so further damage and contamination does not occur.

D. Contractor shall then submit a proposal for removal.


1.13 OIL-FILLED OR IMPREGNATED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. Notify Base Environmental Safety Office before demolition or installation of any oil-filled electrical equipment.

B. All transformers and light ballasts, unless labeled “No PCBs”, shall be legally disposed of at an off Base facility.

C. Transfer of custody paperwork shall be submitted to Contracting Officer, designated representative and MacDill AFB Environmental at Project Close-out.

1.14 SPILL RESPONSE AND REPORTING

A. Spills of hazardous waste, hazardous materials or non-regulated substances such as oils, antifreeze, grease, latex paint, hydraulic fluid, etc. shall immediately be reported.

1. If a spill occurs after normal working hours, or on a weekend or holiday, report spills to the Installation Fire Department.

B. Contractor is encouraged to have a supply of absorbent pads on-site to aid in immediate clean-up of smaller spills, such as oil, coolant or hydraulic fluid leaks from vehicles or equipment.

C. Spill notification placards are to be placed on the job site prior to construction.

D. Contractor shall develop a spill plan.

E. The format for the plan shall be approved by MacDill AFB BCE Environmental prior to construction.

1.15 WASTE DISPOSAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall comply, and ensure that all subcontractors comply, with all Federal, State, local laws, and regulations, ordinances and standards related to environmental pollution control and abatement in effect and the specific requirements stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B. All hazardous wastes as defined in 40 CFR, Part 261, shall be collected and disposed of in accordance with 40 CFR, Parts 260-268.

C. The Contractor is responsible for properly storing, marking, labeling, securing and transporting hazardous wastes.

D. All hazardous wastes shall be collected in contractor furnished DOT/UN approved containers and legally disposed of in an off Base facility.

1. Transfer of custody paperwork shall be submitted to Contracting Officer, designated representative and MacDill AFB Environmental at Project Close-out

2. The Contractor shall not store hazardous waste on Base for more than 30 days.

E. Any previously unidentified suspected hazardous materials encountered during performance of the work of the contract shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.


F. All general construction wastes, other than those specifically allowed, or required, to be disposed of on the Post shall be legally disposed at an off-base sanitary landfill.

G. Contractor shall refer to Waste Disposal Form attached at the end of this Section.



END 01090.


(POST OR BASE) WASTE DISPOSAL Contractor shall obtain all permits required by federal, state and local laws for the construction activities involved.

Contractor shall perform all work in such a manner as to minimize the polluting of air, water or land and shall, within reasonable limits, control noise and the disposal of solid waste materials, as well as other pollutants.

Contractor shall ensure that all construction, repair, maintenance operations and practices and waste disposal performed under this contract shall be in strict compliance with all applicable city, county, state and federal environmental laws and regulations.

1. Hazardous and Non-hazardous Waste Disposal: There are no known existing sources of hazardous waste involved with this project. If the Contractor generates or discovers suspected hazardous waste it shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contracting Officer for review and direction on how to proceed with handling and disposal. As part of the proposed implementation above and prior to on-site construction, the Contractor shall submit for approval, a plan for storing, characterizing and disposing of hazardous and non-hazardous waste materials resulting from the work under this contract. Waste includes, but is not limited to, paint waste, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers. If any waste material is dumped in unauthorized areas, the Contractor shall remove the materials and restore the area to the condition of the adjacent undisturbed areas. Where directed and approved by the Contracting Officer, contaminated ground shall be excavated, characterized, stored, disposed of and replaced with suitable fill material at the expense of the Contractor. All waste disposal shall be in strict accordance with local, state and federal requirements and regulations. Waste paint, paint equipment cleaners and used paint containers shall be disposed of off base by the Contractor, at the Contractors’ expense. Any soil contaminated through spillage shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with the requirements specified herein. Soil that is required to be removed shall be replaced by similar soil approved by the Contracting Officer.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01140 – PHASING

PHASING 01140-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


1. Coordination. 2. Barriers. 3. Temporary Utilities. 4. Notifications. 5. Schedule revisions.


A. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.


C. Section 01045 – Cutting & Patching.

D. Section 01051 – Grades, Lines & Levels.

E. Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules.

F. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

G. Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

H. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

I. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.

J. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.


A. Construction phasing shall serve as a guide in managing the construction progress.

B. In preparing construction phasing system, scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Some phases or portions of phased work shall be performed as night work indicated accordingly on the Phased Construction Plan and Schedule.

1. All Mall floor slab demolition work shall be performed between the hours of 1900-0700.

D. Contractor shall maintain half of designated entry door openings at interior, and exterior to interior doors for use by Customers and AAFES personnel at all times except between the hours of 1900 to 0700 indicated accordingly on the Phase Construction Plan and Schedule.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Construction shall be phased and coordinated with the Contracting Officer in order to keep to a minimum, any disruption of, or interference with, the operation of the existing retail facility.

1. Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer and designated representative within 15 days of notice to proceed if any problems or conflicts concerning indicated construction phasing are evident.

2. The Exchange will be in operation, throughout this contract.

a. Contractor shall submit Contractor prepared Construction Progress Schedule in accordance with Section 01320.

b. Submittal shall illustrate a detailed schedule of work utilizing the priority and sequence of work shown on the Construction Phasing Plan.

PHASING 01140-2

3. The Contractor shall keep the Contracting Officer and designated representative advised of any anticipated changes in the work schedule in sufficient time to permit adjustment of store operations, without adversely affecting the ability of the Exchange to function as required.

B. Phasing as shown on the drawings is the required sequence.

1. The Contractor must submit the schedule, for review, to the Contracting Officer within 15 days after execution of a contract.

2. Items specified herein are complementary to work items shown on the drawings schedule.

C. Beneficial occupancy inspection of finishes only will be made at the end of each work item to allow early access for fixture installations.

D. All phases shall be included in the contract performance period.

1.5 BARRIERS

A. Building areas adjacent to areas to be renovated will not be vacated by the Exchange.

B. Temporary barriers shall be erected by the Contractor as work progresses as specified in Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

C. Temporary Barriers shall be construction generally in the locations and type indicated as required.

1. Dust Barriers and Opaque Dust Barriers shall be installed from floor to ceiling, or from floor to underside of roof deck, to seal operational portions of the retail facility from areas of construction

2. Security Barriers shall be installed similarly and secured up to the bottom of roof deck without puncturing deck or roofing materials and shall be weather-tight where separating interior and exterior spaces.

3. Temporary Opaque and Security barriers exposed to customer view shall be painted with two coats of color as indicated or required by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.6 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain temporary or permanent power, water and HVAC systems in areas under construction and areas occupied by the Express.

B. Provide all isolation valves and temporary ductwork used to keep system on line in occupied areas for mechanical systems at no additional cost to AAFES including, but not limited to:

1. Air-handling units. 2. Supply piping. 3. Water lines. 4. Sprinkler system and other similar items.

C. Provide all temporary modifications required to existing electrical systems to maintain these systems in occupied areas at no additional cost to AAFES including, but not limited to:

1. Power. 2. Lighting. 3. Communication. 4. Data. 5. Fire Alarm and other special electrical systems.

D. Permanently reroute sanitary sewer lines in areas where lines are affected by construction in order to maintain sanitary facilities in operational condition prior to demolition operations.



END 01140.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01210 – SCHEDULE OF VALUES

SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01210-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Preparation of required documents.

B. Submittal procedures

C. Review procedures.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Section 01010 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01220 – AAFES Progress Meetings. 3. Section 01230 – Progress Payments. 4. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 5. Section 01700 – Project Closeout.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. Contractor shall submit Schedule of Values (CSV) to Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer for review within (15) days after notification of award of Contract.

B. Contractor, upon request by Architect-Engineer and/or Contracting Officer, shall support any values given with data that will substantiate value correctness.

C. Contractor shall use approved CSV as a basis of periodical progress application for payment.

1.4 FORM OF SUBMITTAL

A. CSV Submittal format:

1. Typewritten, on Application and Certificate for Payment (AIA Form G-702) and Continuation Sheet for G-702 (AIA Form G-703) available from the AIA Bookstore, 911 Washington Avenue - #225, St. Louis, Missouri 6310, (314) 231-4252.

2. Contractor’s form, similar to the AIA Forms specified above, may be substituted as long as all information is formatted identically to AIA format.

B. Contractor shall use specification index as a basis of example and format for listing and itemizing costs of work.

1.5 PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Itemize separate line items for total installed costs.

1. Itemize so that amounts shown for individual items do not exceed $10,000.00 wherever possible.

a. Break large items of work into smaller items, groups or phases to achieve specified amounts.

b. Individual items of equipment may be itemized in lump sum amounts for each piece of equipment.

c. Itemize demolition into separate line item or items. d. Labor and materials shall be separate line items if Contractor intends to request

payment for stored materials. e. List all subcontractors and supplier contracts that exceed $1,000.00.

2. Format to indicate separate line items for:

SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01210-2

a. Overhead and profit. b. Bonds. c. Insurance. d. General Requirements and mobilization. e. Separate line item cost for all subcontractors and any supplier whose

subcontract exceeds $1,000.00. f. Separate line item cost for each section of the Project Manual.

3. Payment for Stored Materials will not be made unless itemized separately from Labor.

B. Itemized separate line items shall reflect each phase or scope of Contract Work.

C. Contractor shall prepare CSV in sequential order of accepted construction practice.

1.6 REVIEW AND SUBMITTAL

A. If required after review by Architect-Engineer and/or Contracting Officer, revise and resubmit Schedule of Values in accordance with initial submittal requirements.

B. Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer will approve final submittal.

C. Architect-Engineer will distribute approved copies to AAFES and Contractor for use in preparing Pay Requests.

END 01210.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01220 – AAFES PROGRESS MEETINGS

AAFES PROGRESS MEETINGS 01220-1

1 GENERAL


A. AAFES Progress Meeting.


A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.

B. Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.

C. Section 01210 – Schedule of Values.

D. Section 01230 – Progress Payments.

E. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

F. Section 01720 – Project Record Documents.

1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. The AAFES representative shall schedule and preside at monthly progress meetings.

B. The AAFES representative shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants.

C. Location of Meetings: Construction office, or as directed in the notice.

D. Attendance Required:

1. AAFES representatives. 2. Architect-Engineer. 3. Architect-Engineer’s on-site representative. 4. Contractor's project manager. 5. Contractor's superintendent. 6. Major sub-contractors and suppliers. 7. MacDill AFB Environmental Division representative.

E. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Coordination of projected progress. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards.

AAFES PROGRESS MEETINGS 01220-2

11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to work.

F. Meeting Minutes: AAFES designated representative or Architect-Engineer shall record meeting minutes, and distribute copies to the participants and Contracting Officer within five (5) business days of the meeting.



END 01220.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01230 – PROGRESS PAYMENTS

PROGRESS PAYMENTS 01230-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 COST BREAKDOWN

A. After the Notice to Proceed is issued, the Contractor shall be required to provide a breakdown of work as indicated in Section 01210, Schedule of Values.

B. Each item of work must also indicate the subcontractor who will perform this work.

1.2 PREPARATION OF PAY REQUEST

A. Upon execution of the Notice to Proceed and prior to scheduling the first Progress/Pay Meeting the Contractor shall prepare and submit a Schedule of Values (CSV) to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer for review and approval in accord with requirements of Section 01210.

B. Itemize separate line items for total installed costs.

1. Itemize so that amounts shown for individual items do not exceed specified maximum amount indicated.

2. Format to indicate separate line items for overhead and profit, bonds, insurance, general requirements and mobilization as described.

a. Separate line item cost for all subcontractors and any supplier whose subcontract exceeds limits set forth.

b. Separate line item cost for each section of the Project Manual.

3. Payment for Stored Materials will not be made unless itemized separately from Labor.

C. Itemized separate line items shall reflect each phase or scope of Contract Work.

1.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS

A. Format and Data Required:

1. Submit pencil copy applications to Architect-Engineer for review at least 4-days in advance of scheduled Progress/Pay Meeting.

2. Applications shall be itemized on forms and in format required for CSV with values broken down as specified above.

B. Preparation of Pencil Copy Application for Each Progress Payment:

1. Application form:

a. Fill in required information, including that for change orders executed prior to date of submittal of application.

b. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets.

c. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of contracting firm.

2. Continuation sheets:

a. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item number and scheduled dollar value for each item.


b. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored.

1.) Round off values to nearest dollar, or as specified for Schedule of Values.

c. List each change order executed prior to date of submission at end of continuation sheets.

1.) List by change order number and description the same as for an original component item of work.

3. Architect-Engineer will use pencil copy of application for payment as a basis for evaluating completed work upon arrival to Site for monthly scheduled Progress/Pay Meetings.

a. Architect-Engineer will review progress of work with Contractor’s on-site Superintendent and make any changes in amounts requested.

b. The Architect-Engineer will present reviewed and initialed pencil copy of pay request to Contractor at Progress/Pay Meeting. for formal preparation and presentation to Contracting Officer for payment.

C. Preparation of Formal Application for Each Progress Payment:

1. The Contractor shall prepare formal typewritten copy of application for payment, edited as determined and agreed to on initialed pencil copy at the Progress/Pay Meeting.

2. Submit one (1) signed/notarized copy to Architect-Engineer via e-mail for formal approval, signature and presentation to the Contracting Officer.

a. Architect-Engineer will forward approved, signed application to Contracting Officer via e-mail within two (2) days of receipt from Contractor.

b. Upon acceptance of e-mailed application, payment to Contractor will be processed by AAFES subject to General Provisions of the Contract.

3. Submit one (1) additional hard copy to Architect-Engineer for formal approval and transmittal to Contracting Officer.

a. Attach current Construction Photos per requirements of Section 01010. b. Attach revised Progress Schedule per requirements of Section 01310. c. Attach Summary Report of progress since last request for payment and

anticipated progress until next request for payment.

D. Each request for payment shall be accompanied by the certification contained in Exhibit A, Clause 45b(2)(b) with Invoice number included.

E. If requested by AAFES, Contractor shall submit receipts or other vouchers showing his payments for material and labor, including payments to subcontractors.

1.4 STORED MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT NOT INCORPORATED IN THE WORK

A. Progress Payments will be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work provided that:

1. Such materials and equipment have been delivered to and suitably stored at site or some other location approved in writing by the Contracting Officer.

a. Provide list of stored materials for which payment is being requested for Contracting Officer and designated representative.


b. Store in like lots for ease of inventory by Contracting Officer or designated representative

2. All materials stored off-site shall be marked or tagged with identification of project to which they are assigned and shall be accessible for inspection.

3. Contractor submits evidence of title to such materials and equipment in the form of detailed receipts to Contracting Officer.

4. Care and custody of such materials and equipment and all costs incurred for movement and storage shall be responsibility of Contractor.

B. Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Insurance showing AAFES as an additional insured and showing amount of insurance coverage for the stored items or suitable proof that material and equipment are stored in a Bonded Warehouse.

C. Payment for stored materials will be subject to all conditions and approval of Contracting Officer.

1.5 PAYMENTS WITHHELD

A. The KO may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or a part of any payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect AAFES from loss on account of:

1. Defective work not remedied. 2. Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims. 3. Failure of the GC to make payments properly to subcontractors or for materials

or labor. 4. A reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed for the balance then

unpaid. 5. Damage to another Contractor or to some third party. 6. Failure to maintain milestones in accordance with the approved construction

progress schedule 01320 “Construction Progress Schedules”. 7. Failure to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials.

END 01230.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01310 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION

PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION 01310-1

1 GENERAL


A. Request For Information (RFI’s).

B. Pre-construction Meeting.

C. Pre-installation Conferences.

D. Other Coordination Meetings applicable to work at any given time.

1.2 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. RFI Forms: Contractor shall provide software-generated executable form acceptable to Architect-Engineer and AAFES Contracting Officer.

B. Architect-Engineer's Action: Allow seven working days for Architect-Engineer's response for each RFI.

C. RFI Log:

1. Maintain a tabular log of RFIs. 2. Submit log weekly.

1.3 PROJECT WEB SITE

A. Contractor provide Project Management Application Website for project communication and documentation.

1. Provide up to ten (10) Website user licenses for use of AAFES Project Manager, AAFES Contracting Officer, Contractor and Architect-Engineer.

2. Provide software instruction and training for Website users.

B. Project Website software package:

1. Meridian Systems, Prolog. 2. Other Construction Management software systems acceptable to Contracting

Officer or designated representative.

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. The Contracting Officer will schedule and preside at Pre-construction meeting.

B. Attendance Required:

1. Contracting Officer, Project Manager and other AAFES HQ representatives. 2. Local and regional AAFES representatives. 3. Architect-Engineer 4. Installation representatives (Engineering, Fire Chief, Security, Environmental, etc.) 5. Contractor 6. Major Sub-contractors

C. Agenda:

1. Execution of Notice to Proceed.


2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of sub-contractors. 4. Review of AAFES checklist of contract requirements. 5. Discussion of Contractor’s Schedule of Values. 6. Discussion of Construction Schedule. 7. Discussion of critical sequencing. 8. Designation of responsible personnel. 9. Processing of field decisions and change orders. 10. Submission of applications for payment. 11. Submittal of shop drawings. 12. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 13. Fire, safety and spill procedures. 14. Security procedures. 15. Accident prevention and reports. 16. Housekeeping procedures. 17. Use of premises

a. Office and storage locations. b. Personnel parking.

18. Major equipment deliveries. 19. Other issues pertinent to completing the contract.

D. Meeting minutes: Minutes will be taken by the A/E and distributed to AAFES, Contractor, and Installation Engineer.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. The Contractor shall schedule and preside at other project meetings when required.

B. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a Pre-installation conference at Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting.

a. Advise Contracting Officer and designated representative of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules.


l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

a. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

C. Coordination Meetings: At weekly intervals, in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, conduct Project Coordination Meetings to resolve routine issues.

END 01310.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01320 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES 01320-1

1 GENERAL


A. Format.

B. Content.

C. Revisions to schedules.

D. Submittals.




C. Section 01210 – Schedule of Values.

D. Section 01150 – Progress Payments.

E. Section 01310 – Project Management & Coordination.

F. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

1.3 SCOPE

A. Exhibit "A" - General Provisions of the AAFES Contract for Construction, Article entitled: "Schedule and Progress"

B. The Contractor prepared scheduling progress chart system shall serve as a guide in managing the construction progress and scheduling.

1.4 GENERAL

A. The scheduling progress chart system shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall consist of a Critical Path bar chart as described in this section.

B. In preparing this system, the scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be developed in accordance with construction phasing shown on the construction drawings where applicable.

C. The requirement for the system is included to assure adequate planning and execution of the work and to assist the Contracting Officer in appraising the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and evaluating progress of the work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a preliminary scheduling progress chart to the Contracting Officer or designated representative defining the Contractor's proposed operations for the first sixty (60) of the contract within ten (10) days after date of Notice to Proceed.


1. Indicate the Contractor's general approach for the balance of the project. 2. Include the cost of the activities expected to be completed or partially completed

before submission and approval of the complete progress schedule.

B. Upon approval of the preliminary scheduling progress chart by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, and within thirty (30) calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit the complete progress chart with copy to the Architect-Engineer.

C. Contractor shall also submit a narrative report with the updated bar chart, including a description of problem areas (current and anticipated) delaying factors and their impact, and an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed.

D. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires plus four (4) copies that will be retained by Contracting Officer and one (1) copy to be retained by the Architect-Engineer.

1.6 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES

A. Submit revised progress chart system with each monthly Application for Payment.

1. Copy of the complete bar chart with the current activity progress clearly indicated. 2. Current cost of each activity completed and each partially completed shall be

updated and included.

B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal and revised projected completion date of each activity.

C. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope and other identifiable changes that could affect the overall schedule.

D. Provide revised narrative report with each submittal describing work accomplished during the previous period, the work scheduled for the next period, anticipated problem areas and delays and impact on the Schedule.

E. Report corrective action taken or proposed.

1.7 PROGRESS CHART SYSTEM

A. The system consists of keeping a record of the time allotted for each activity and the actual progress of the activity.

B. Activities shall be listed vertically and shall include the units of work required for the project.

1. All activities of AAFES, which affect progress and Contract required dates for completion shall be shown.

2. Include activities for AAFES FURNISHED/AAFES INSTALLED and AAFES FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS.

C. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the Contracting Officer's approval.


1.8 FORMAT

A. Prepare schedules as a horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation, identifying first workday of each week.

1. A scale of time, from date of the beginning of the contract work to the date of completion of the contract work, shall be indicated horizontally on the chart.

2. The units of time indicated shall be days.

3. Indicate time allotted for each major activity, the actual progress of the activity and the time spent to date or to the finish of the activity.

B. The format shall be such to enable the Contracting Officer or designated representative to evaluate the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and to determine if the actual construction is on schedule.

1.9 CONTENT

A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction.

B. Identify each item by specification section number.

C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item and total percentage of Work completed as of the first day of each month.

D. Indicate delivery dates for AAFES furnished products.

1.10 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to project site file, subcontractors, suppliers and other concerned parties.

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules.



END 01320.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01331 – AAFES WEATHER TABLE

AAFES WEATHER TABLE 01331-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 INFORMATION AND DATA

A. Information and data furnished or referred to in the weather table is furnished for the Contractor's information.

B. The General Contractor is responsible for submitting a written request for time extension under this specification Section.

1. The General Contractor request shall include backup justification for each written request for time extension.

2. Any time extension granted under this specification Section shall be at no cost to AAFES.

1.2 CONTRACT TIME LIMITS

A. The contract time limits include weather conditions that are shown in the table listed herein.

1.3 TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER

A. This provision specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather affecting exterior work in accordance with the Contract.

B. The following listing defines the monthly anticipated adverse weather for the contract period and is based on NOAA data for the geographic location of the project.

MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER CALENDAR DAYS

MacDill Air Force Base – Florida (Hillsborough County)

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEPT OCT NOV DEC

01 01 02 03 03 03 03 04 01 02 02 03

C. This listing of anticipated adverse weather will constitute the base line monthly weather time evaluations.

1. Throughout the contract each month, actual adverse weather days will be recorded on a calendar basis (including weekends and holidays) and compared to the monthly anticipated adverse weather in this listing.

a. The term "actual adverse weather days" shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather.

b. The number of actual adverse weather days affecting exterior work shall be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month.

2. Adverse weather days must prevent work for 50 percent or more of the contractor's workday and delay work critical to the timely completion of the project.

3. If the number of actual adverse weather days exceeds the number of days anticipated in the above listing, then the Contracting Officer will determine the time extension for the Contractor.

AAFES WEATHER TABLE 01331-2

4. The Contracting Officer will convert any qualifying delays to calendar days and issue a modification in accordance with the contract.



END 01331.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01340 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SUBMITTALS 01340-1

1 GENERAL


A. Submittal procedures.

B. Construction progress schedules.

C. Shop Drawings.

D. Samples.

E. Product Data.

F. Certificates.



B. Section 01018 – AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment.

C. Section 01060 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures.

D. Section 01210 – Schedule of Values.

E. Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules.

F. Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

G. Section 01700 – Project Closeout.

H. Technical Sections of the Specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each submittal with AAFES Form 4450-048 as provided by AAFES or equivalent Contractor generated transmittal form in same format.

B. Sequentially number the transmittal form.

C. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.

D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate.

E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.


F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and in accordance with the List of Required Submittals in this section.

1. Transmit submittals to Contracting Officer and Architect-Engineer. 2. Coordinate submission of related items.

G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

1. Failure to identify such variations will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for completing the work in full accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Review/approval by the Contracting Officer does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for completing work in full accordance with the Contract Documents.

3. Review by the Architect-Engineer does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for completing work in full compliance with the Contract Documents.

H. Prior to approval of the material/product submitted:

1. Contractor shall include with the submittal a written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos.

2. This certificate is mandatory before review will be made and/or Contracting Officer approval issued.

I. Provide space for Contractor, Contracting Officer and Architect-Engineer review stamps.

J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate.

L. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit preliminary Scheduling Progress Chart within ten (10) days of the Notice to Proceed.

B. Submit complete (final) Scheduling Progress Chart within thirty (30) days of the Notice to Proceed.

C. Submit monthly revisions of Scheduling Progress Chart.

D. Submit monthly revised narrative reports.

E. Refer to Section 01320 - Construction Progress Schedules, for submittal information.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop Drawings for Review:

1. Submitted to Contracting Officer or designated representative for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

2. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a qualified detailer. 3. Minimum sheet size for shop drawings shall be 8 1/2" x 11". 4. After review, distribute copies in accordance with Submittal Procedures article

above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.


B. Shop Drawings for Project Close-out:

1. Submitted for AAFES's use after project completion. 2. Retain two (2) reviewed/approved sets of each Shop Drawing and Product

Data sheet for submittal to AAFES at Project Close-out as part of O & M Manuals per Section 01700.

C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service and for functional equipment and appliances.

1. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two for O & M Manuals, plus two (three on civil, structural, mechanical, and electrical submittals) copies that will be retained by Architect-Engineer.

1.6 SAMPLES

A. Samples for Review:

1. Submitted to Architect-Engineer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

2. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.

B. Samples for Information:

1. Submit for the Architect-Engineer’s review and Contracting Officer's knowledge as project administrator or for AAFES.

C. Samples for Selection:

1. Submitted to Architect-Engineer for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. 2. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors,

or in custom colors (if so stated in the product specification section), textures, and patterns for Architect-Engineer selection and Contracting Officer's approval.

3. After review, distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.

D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices.

E. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

F. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.

G. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; two of which will be retained by Contracting Officer.

H. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification sections.

I. Coordinate sample submittals with respective shop drawings.

1.7 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, specifications, illustrations, and other descriptive data.


B. Product data that relates to shop drawings or samples must be submitted with the respective shop drawings or samples.

1.8 CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or the Contractor to Contracting Officer, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Certify that material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

C. Submit supporting reference data, test results, affidavits, and/or certifications as appropriate.

D. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1.9 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. General Construction:

1. Section 01045, Cutting & Patching:

a. Schedules. b. Documentation.

2. Section 01051, Grades, Lines & Levels:

a. Schedules. b. Staging and Trailer Location Plan.

3. Section 01060, AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures:

a. Schedules. b. Documentation. c. Hazard, Health/Safety, Response Plans.

4. Section 01320, Construction Progress Schedules:

a. Preliminary Schedule. b. Complete Schedule. c. Revised Schedules. d. Revised Narrative Reports.

5. Section 01340, Submittals:

a. Schedules. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

6. Section 01420, Environmental Protection:

a. Environmental Protection Plan.

7. Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls:

a. Schedules. b. Shop Drawings. c. Documentation.


8. Section 01620, Storage & Protection:

a. Schedules. b. Documentation.

9. Section 01700, Project Closeout:

a. Project Record Documents. b. Operation & Maintenance Manuals. c. Approved Shop Drawings, Bound. d. Training Documentation. e. Warranties. f. End user agreement(s) and software license(s) where applicable. g. DD Form 1354 Quantities and Cost Information. h. Other Closeout Submittals.

10. Section 01710, Cleaning:

a. Instructions. b. Product Data.

11. Section 01720, Project Record Documents:

a. As-built Drawings. b. As-built Specifications.

12. Section 02070, Selective Demolition:

a. Schedules.

13. Section 02083, Asbestos Abatement:

a. Pre-work Submittals:

1.) Approvals. 2.) Notifications. 3.) Permit certifications. 4.) Licenses. 5.) Employees and training certifications. 6.) Release of claims. 7.) Medical surveillance. 8.) Asbestos plan. 9.) Air Sampling Professional certifications. 10.) Sample daily log. 11.) Medical training certifications. 12.) Respirator fit-tests certifications.

b. Schedules. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples. f. Air Monitoring results. g. Post-work Submittals:

1.) Daily log. 2.) Air monitoring results. 3.) Landfill receipts.


14. Section 02282, Termite Control:

a. Instructions. b. Test Reports. c. Certifications. d. Product Data.

15. Section 02300, Earthwork:

a. Samples. b. Test Reports. c. Documentation.

16. Section 02740, Asphalt Concrete Paving:

a. Product Data. b. Design Mixtures. c. Manufacturer Qualifications. d. Material Certificates. e. Material Test Reports.

17. Section 02750, Concrete Site Paving:

a. Product Data. b. Design Mixtures. c. Certifications. d. Test Reports.

18. Section 02923, Turf & Grasses:

a. Product Data. b. Seed Certification. c. Installer Qualifications. d. Product Certificates. e. Material Test Reports

19. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete:

a. Design Mix. b. Test Reports. c. Certifications. d. Shop Drawings. e. Product Data.

20. Section 03354, Interior Concrete Slab Repair:

a. Certifications. b. Product Data. c. Samples.

21. Section 03356, Polished Concrete Floor Finish:

a. Certifications. b. Test Reports. c. Product Data. d. Samples. e. Mock-up. f. Maintenance Manual.


22. Section 04200, Unit Masonry:

a. Certifications. b. Test Reports. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

23. Section 05120, Structural Steel:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Documentation.

24. Section 05310, Steel Deck:

a. Test Reports. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Documentation.

25. Section 05400, Cold-Formed Metal Framing:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Product Data.

26. Section 05500, Metal Fabrications:

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data.

27. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Product Data.

28. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Samples.

29. Section 06253, Slatwall Panel Systems:

a. Instructions. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

30. Section 06300, Fire Retardant Wood Treatment:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Product Data.


31. Section 06400, Architectural Woodwork:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples.

32. Section 07210, Building Insulation:

a. Certifications. b. Product Data.

33. Section 07240, Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples.

34. Section 07270, Firestopping:


35. Section 07470, Cementitious Reinforced Panels:

a. Instructions. b. Test Results. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples.

36. Section 07536, Built-up Roofing (Patching Only):

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Documentation.

37. Section 07540, Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO):

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples. e. Documentation.

38. Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet Metal:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Samples.

39. Section 07920, Building & Paving Joint Sealers:

a. Product Data. b. Samples. c. Documentation.


40. Section 08100, Metal Doors & Frames:

a. Schedules. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data.

41. Section 08211, Flush Wood Doors:

a. Schedules. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples. f. Documentation.

42. Section 08305, Access Doors:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data.

43. Section 08331, Overhead Rolling Grilles:

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

44. Section 08380, Double Acting Doors:


45. Section 08410, Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts:


46. Section 08460, Automatic Entrance Doors:


47. Section 08710, Finish Hardware:

a. Schedules. b. Product Data.

48. Section 08800, Glass & Glazing:

a. Test Reports. b. Certifications. c. Instructions. d. Product Data. e. Samples.


49. Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems:

a. Certifications. b. Instructions. c. Product Data.

50. Section 09300, Tile:


51. Section 09400, Bonded Terrazzo:

a. Installer Certifications. b. Product Data. c. Shop Drawings. d. Samples.

52. Section 09510, Acoustical Panel Ceilings:


53. Section 09650, Resilient Tile Flooring:


54. Section 09680, Carpet:


55. Section 09900, Painting:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

56. Section 09950, Wall Coverings:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Product Data.

57. Section 09986, Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels (FRP):

a. Product Data. b. Samples.

58. Section 10155, Toilet Compartments:



59. Section 10265, Wall Surface Protection Systems:


60. Section 10440, Specialty Signs:

a. Schedules. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

61. Section 10500, Metal Lockers:


62. Section 10522, Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets & Accessories:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data. e. Samples.

63. Section 10711, Fixed Sunshades & Awnings:


64. Section 10800, Toilet Accessories:

a. Instructions. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data. d. Samples.

65. Section 11400, Food Service Equipment:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Documentation.

66. Section 11410, Used Cooking Oil Equipment:

a. Instructions. b. Certifications. c. Shop Drawings. d. Product Data.

67. Section 12690, Floor Mats & Frames:



B. Special Construction:

1. Section 13851, Fire Alarm & Mass Notification Systems:

a. Product Data. b. Shop Drawings. c. Battery & Voltage Drop Calculations. d. Operation & Maintenance Manual.

2. Section 13915, Wet Pipe Sprinkler System:

a. Calculations. b. Flow test results. c. Certifications. d. Shop Drawings. e. Product Data.

C. Mechanical Construction:

1. Section 15013, Cleaning, Testing & Adjusting:

a. Test Results.

2. Section 15050, Basic Materials & Methods:


3. Section 15067, Testing Piping Systems:

a. Reports.

4. Section 15250, Piping Insulation:

a. Product Data.

5. Section 15400, Plumbing:

a. Product Data. b. Certificates.

6. Section 15450, Plumbing Fixtures & Trim:

a. Product Data.

7. Section 15510, Hydronic Piping:

a. Product Data.

8. Section 15535, Refrigerant Piping & Specialties:

a. Product Data. b. Test Results.

9. Section 15620, Fuel Fired Heaters:

a. Product Data. b. Warranties.

10. Section 15670, Split System Air Conditioners:

a. Product Data.

11. Section 15781, Packaged Central-Station Air-Handling Units:

a. Product Data.


12. Section 15782, Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units:

a. Product Data. b. Warranties.

13. Section 15815, Metal Ductwork:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data.

14. Section 15820, Duct Accessories:

a. Product Data

15. Section 15825, Food Service Ventilation Systems:

a. Product Data. b. Shop Drawings. c. Test Results.

16. Section 15855, Diffusers, Registers & Grilles:

a. Product Data.

17. Section 15872, Fans:

a. Product Data.

18. Section 15950, Controls & Instrumentation:

a. Product Data. b. Shop Drawings.

19. Section 15990, Testing, Adjusting & Balancing of HVAC Systems:

a. Qualifications. b. Reports.

D. Electrical Construction:

1. Section 16060, Electrical Demolition for Remodeling:

a. Schedules.

2. Section 16111, Conduit:

a. Product Data.

3. Section 16123, Building Wire and Cable:

a. Product Data. b. Manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Section 16130, Boxes:

a. Product Data.

5. Section 16141, Wiring Devices:

a. Product Data.

6. Section 16150, Manufactured Wiring Systems:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Manufacturer’s instructions.


7. Section 16170, Grounding and Bonding:

a. Product Data. b. Manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Section 16190, Supporting Devices:

a. Product Data. a. Manufacturer’s instructions.

9. Section 16195, Electrical Identification:

a. Product Data.

10. Section 16441, Enclosed Switches:

a. Product Data.

11. Section 16461, Dry Type Transformers:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Manufacturer Test Results. d. Installation Instructions.

12. Section 16470, Panelboards:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Manufacturer’s Instructions.

13. Section 16485, Enclosed Contactors:

a. Product Data.

14. Section 16510, Interior Luminaires:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Manufacturer’s instructions.

15. Section 16685, Surge Protection Devices (SPDs):

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Manufacturer’s Instructions.

16. Section 16686, Lighting Protection for Structures:

a. Certifications. b. Shop Drawings. c. Product Data.

17. Section 16904, Occupancy Sensors:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Product Data. c. Manufacturer's Instructions.

18. Section 16950, Testing:

a. Test results.



END 01340.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL

QUALITY CONTROL 01400-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE

A. Contractor shall establish a quality control system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of subcontractor(s) to ensure conformation to applicable specifications and drawings with respect to the materials, workmanship, construction, finish and functional performance.

1. Tests of materials and/or special inspections will be made, when required by these specifications, by applicable law, rules and regulations in accordance with respective Sections.

2. Where required by individual specification Sections, the Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency, licensed in the State of Florida, to perform specific services and testing.

a. Examples of professional testing services that shall be provided by the Contractor include tests during the manufacturing and fabrication processes that are not performed in the field, but required to assure quality control including, but not limited to:

1.) Ready-mix plant testing. 2.) Steel fabrication and shop welding.

b. Examples of professional testing services that shall be provided by the Contractor include field tests during construction to assure quality control including, but not limited to:

1.) Provision of a Qualified Professional, licensed in the State of Florida, to provide initial installation supervision and quality control inspections of environmental controls.

2.) Initial testing of borrow site material to determine suitability for compliance with specifications for use as fill material

3.) Personnel air monitoring for Asbestos Abatement. 4.) Termiticide application verification. 5.) Pipe pressure testing.

a) Distribution piping. b) Waste piping.

6.) Special Construction System Testing.

a) Fire Alarm. b) Mass Notification. c) Wet Pipe Sprinkler.

7.) Electrical testing. 8.) Utility service testing required by utility provider. 9.) Incidental testing required by the Installation. 10.) Installation Fire Department tests.

B. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all services and testing indicated above and those specified that are not specifically indicated to be provided by AAFES.

C. Testing agencies and tests to be performed and paid for by Contractor shall be approved by AAFES prior to employment of agency and performing tests.


D. If a material is not required to be field tested, the Contracting Officer shall require the supplier to furnish a certificate bearing legal signature of said supplier with each delivery of such material stating that such material complies with specification requirements.

E. If any work or materials requiring tests and inspections is executed, enclosed or covered before tests are made, or test reports distributed, whether the responsibility of the Contractor or AAFES:

1. Contractor shall, at his own expense, uncover such part of this work or material and keep it uncovered until such tests and inspections have been made and test reports distributed.

2. If work or material so tested and inspected shall be found not to conform to the requirements of the Construction Documents, it shall be deemed and construed to be defective materials or faulty workmanship and the Contractor, at his own expense, shall replace work or material removed and repair all work disturbed thereby.

F. The Contractor's(') testing agency(ies) shall report results of all tests in writing via e-mail transmittal simultaneously to the following:

1. Contracting Officer 3 copies 2. Site Inspector 1 copy 3. Contractor 1 copy 4. Architect-Engineer 1 copy

G. Reports shall state that tests were made under responsible charge of a Testing Engineer, holding a license to operate in the state where the project is being constructed, and that material or materials were tested in accordance with provisions of these specifications, and that material and/or materials tested, passed or failed to pass such requirements.

1.2 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY

A. Make notifications to testing agencies and coordinate services with Construction Schedule, whether provided by Contractor or AAFES.

1. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for its assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

2. Make arrangements with testing agency for on-site inspection services in conjunction with Construction Schedule.

3. All costs for ill-timed scheduling of testing agency on-site services shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. Cooperate with the Contracting Officer or designated representative and laboratory personnel and provide access to work and to manufacturer’s operations.

1. Provide samples of materials to be tested, in required quantities. 2. Furnish casual labor and facilities required to provide access to work to be tested:

a. To obtain and handle samples at the site. b. To facilitate inspections and tests. c. For laboratory’s exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.

C. The use of AAFES’ or Contractor’s independent testing services shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the plans and specifications.


D. Contractor shall coordinate with both AAFES and his own testing laboratories so that the work will be inspected and tested according to contract requirements.

1. This coordination includes notification of when tests should be taken, easy access to the work, and general cooperation in every way to insure proper control of the work.

E. Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall submit signed certificates stating tests for this work were made in accordance with provisions of these specifications and, further, all such tests and reports made were reported as required.

1. These certificates shall list all tests and dates when work was completed.

1.3 AAFES’ TESTING RESPONSIBILITY

A. AAFES will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Agency to perform specified quality control testing during construction indicated in the following Sections:

1. Asbestos Abatement: Section 02083 (APM). 2. Earthwork: Section 02300. 3. Asphalt Concrete Paving: Section 02740. 4. Concrete Site Paving: Section 02750. 5. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03300. 6. Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement: Section 03354 (by

AAFES Concrete Finish Consultant). 7. Polished Concrete Floor Finish: Section 03356 (by AAFES Concrete Finish

Consultant). 8. Structural Steel: Section 05120 (Field Q/C, Connections & Welding). 9. Steel Deck: Section 05310 (Field Q/C & Fastening). 10. Testing and Balancing of HVAC Equipment: Section 15990.

B. AAFES employment of Independent Testing Agency in no way relieves Contractor of his responsibilities to deliver Project in full compliance with the Contract Documents.


A. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services.

C. Related requirements and tests specified in Division 2 through 16.



END 01400.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01410 – TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410-1

1 GENERAL

A. Selection and payment.

B. Laboratory/Agency responsibilities.

C. Laboratory/Agency reports.

D. Limits on testing authority.

E. Contractor responsibilities.

F. Schedule of tests.


A. Section 02083 – Asbestos Abatement (APM services).

B. Section 02300 – Earthwork.

C. Section 02740 – Asphalt Concrete Paving.

D. Section 02750 – Concrete Site Paving.

E. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

F. Section 03354 – Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement (AAFES Concrete Finish Consultant).

G. Section 03356 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish (AAFES Concrete Finish Consultant).

H. Section 05120 – Structural Steel (Field Q/C, Connections & Welding).

I. Section 05310 – Steel Deck (Field Q/C & Fastening).

J. Section 15990 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

1.3 AAFES SELECTION AND PAYMENT

A. AAFES will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory to perform testing as specified in the individual Sections listed in Article 1.2 above.

B. In addition to traditional material inspection and testing, AAFES will employ and pay for:

1. Services of an Asbestos Project Manager/Air Sampling Professional (APM/ASP) to inspection critical barriers, observe abatement procedures and clear areas where ACM has been abated.

2. Services of a concrete finish expert to make recommendations and evaluate concrete floor topping placement, polishing and finishing work.

C. Employment of testing agency or laboratory in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

1.4 LABORATORY/AGENCY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

B. Provide qualified personnel at site.


C. Cooperate with Contracting Officer or designated representative and Contractor in performance of services.

D. Perform specified sampling and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.

E. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Promptly notify Contracting Officer or designated representative and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products.

G. Perform additional tests required by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

H. Submit e-mail or server based written test reports within 3-days after test is performed to the following parties:

1. Contracting Officer. 2. Site Inspector. 3. Contractor. 4. Architect. 5. Applicable Consulting Engineer.

I. Each report shall include:

1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing Laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results.

J. Upon completion of the project, the testing agency shall prepare a certificate, certified in the presence of a Notary Public, stating testing for this work was conducted in accordance with the provisions of these specifications, and further, all tests and reports were provided for this job were reported as required.

1.5 LIMITS ON TESTING AUTHORITY

A. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

C. Agency or laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.

D. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.



A. Deliver to agency or laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

B. Notify Contracting Officer, designated representative and field testing agency laboratory a minimum of 24 hours prior to time for operations requiring testing services.

C. Coordinate work and cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.

D. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested. 3. To facilitate tests. 4. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

E. Employ services of an independent testing laboratory, licensed in the State of Florida, and pay for additional samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified requirements:

1. For Contractor's convenience. 2. When initial tests indicate work does not comply with contract documents, provide

and pay for additional testing. 3. When, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer or designated representative,

additional tests or inspections are required because of the manner in which the Contractor executes his work, provide and pay for additional testing.

4. Examples of such tests and inspections are:

a. Tests of materials substituted for previously approved or specified materials. b. Retests made necessary by failure of materials to comply the requirements of

the specifications. c. Load tests made necessary because portions of the structure do not meet

specifications or drawings requirements.

5. Testing specified in Section 01400, Quality Control and other Sections of the Project Manual that are identified to be provided by the Contractor.

1.7 SCHEDULE OF TESTS

A. Test required and standards for testing are specified in the individual specification Sections.

B. Inspection, sampling and testing as paid for by AAFES is required for the following individual components or systems of Work:

1. Supervision and inspection of Asbestos Abatement work by Asbestos Project Manager in accord with specification Section 02083.

2. Soils and base course compaction control in accord with specification Section 02300; ASTM D-1557, Modified Proctor Test.

3. Asphalt concrete pavement in accord with specification Section 02740; core sampling to determine pavement depth variances.

4. Concrete paving in accord with Specification Section 02750 and subject to provisions set forth below for Concrete Work.

5. Concrete Work, Section 03300.

a. Testing and evaluation of concrete strength shall conform to latest edition of American Concrete Institute Standard 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".


b. Tests for compressive strength of concrete cylinders:

1.) One composite sample shall be obtained for each day’s pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cubic yards but less than 25 cubic yards.

2.) One additional composite test shall be taken for each additional 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof over the initial 25 cubic yards.

3.) Each test shall be comprised of 4 cylinders cured under exact conditions as the related concrete pour for a minimum of 24-hours before being removed from the site.

6. Structural Steel field testing, visual bolt tensioning, field welding, fastening and other structural performance testing as specified in Sections 05120 and 05310.

7. Testing and balancing of heating and ventilation equipment is specified in Section 15990.

C. Testing and/or certification paid for by the Contractor is required for the following individual components or systems of Work:

1. Supervision and quality control inspection of environmental controls. 2. Initial testing of borrow site material to determine suitability for compliance with

Specifications for use as fill material. 3. Personnel air monitoring in accord with specification Section 02083. 4. Certification of termiticide application in accord with specification Section 02282. 5. Ready-mix plant testing or certification as specified in Sections 02750 and 03300. 6. Structural steel fabricator shop quality control procedures and shop welds as

specified in Section 05120. 7. Special systems testing as specified in Division 13. 8. Pipe pressure testing as specified in Division 15. 9. Testing of electrical components and systems as specified in Division 16. 10. Other utility services testing as required by authorities having jurisdiction.



END 01410.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01420 – EXCHANGE (AAFES) ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

EXCHANGE (AAFES) ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 01420-1

1 GENERAL


A. Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and performing all work required for the prevention of environmental degradation during and as a result of construction operations under this contract.

B. These requirements are in addition to any environmental protection requirements elsewhere in these specifications.

C. For the purpose of this specification, environmental pollution is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents, not naturally occurring at the site, which adversely affect:

1. Human health or welfare. 2. Unfavorably alter ecological balances important to human life. 3. Other species of importance to humans. 4. Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic and recreational purposes.

D. The control of environmental pollution by the Contractor requires consideration of air, water, and land, and involves noise control, solid waste management and management of radiant energy and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants.

E. This section also requires the protection of cultural and historic resources.

F. Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with the work called for under the various sections of Division 2.

1.2 CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OBLIGATIONS

A. Work under this contract is to be performed on a government facility.

B. All environmental rules applying to Contractor operations elsewhere will also apply on the government facility.

C. Contractor (and any subcontractor, agent or representative) shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations providing for environmental protection and pollution control and abatement.

D. Contractor has the duty to determine for himself where such laws and regulations apply.

E. These regulations include but are not limited to:

1. Clean Air Act. 2. Clean Water Act. 3. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. 4. Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA). 5. Toxic Substances Control Act. 6. Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act.


7. Coastal Zone Management Act. 8. Endangered Species Act. 9. National Historic Preservation Act. 10. Safe Drinking Water Act. 11. Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act. 12. Oil Pollution Act. 13. Archeological Resources Protection Act. 14. Pollution Prevention Act. 15. National Environmental Policy Act.

F. Although the Contractor may request assistance from the Contracting Officer in delineating applicable environmental laws and regulations, Contractor has an independent responsibility to make its own determination and to do so in a timely fashion.

1.3 FINES OR PENALTIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL NON-COMPLIANCE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying any fines or penalties assessed against AAFES or the installation or the Army or the Air Force for violations of environmental laws or regulation resulting from acts or omissions of the Contractor or its employees, subcontractors, or agents.

B. This obligation is in addition to any fines or penalties that may be assessed against the Contractor for the same conduct.

C. Contractor may either reimburse these fines or penalties through the Contracting Officer, or with the consent of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor may pay such fines or penalties directly to the regulatory agency or agencies concerned.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGES

A. Contractor agrees to hold harmless and indemnify AAFES (which includes the Army, Air Force, or other Department of Defense component, as appropriate) for any and all damages of any kind resulting from environmentally harmful activities by the Contractor, Contractor’s employees or agents or subcontractors.

B. “Damages” includes but are not limited to personal injury, property damage (including diminution of value) or death, environmental restoration and response costs, natural resource damages, expert witness and attorney’s fees, and reimbursement of any and all expenses incurred to obtain permits as a result of Contractor’s failure to identify or obtain permits for itself or AAFES.

1.5 CONTACTS WITH ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY OFFICIALS

A. Contractor shall immediately advise the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental office of the content of all contacts with Federal, State, or local environmental regulators, before, during, and after the performance of this contract concerning the performance of this contract.


2 PERMITS

2.1 PERMITS FOR EQUIPMENT USED BY CONTRACTOR IN PERFORMING AAFES CONTRACTS

A. For equipment used in the performance of this contract, Contractor shall obtain in Contractor’s name and at no additional expense to AAFES, all permits, coordination, certifications or other regulatory authorization necessary to perform and complete the work required by this contract under applicable environmental laws and regulations.

B. “Applicable environmental laws and regulations” includes but is not limited to:

1. Clean Air Act. 2. Clean Water Act. 3. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. 4. Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA). 5. Toxic Substances Control Act. 6. Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act. 7. Coastal Zone Management Act. 8. Endangered Species Act. 9. National Historic Preservation Act. 10. Safe Drinking Water Act. 11. Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act. 12. Oil Pollution Act. 13. Pollution Prevention Act. 14. State, County, and Local laws and regulations on the same subjects. 15. National Environmental Policy Act.

2.2 PERMITS NEEDED FOR CONSTRUCTION, EXCAVATION, MODIFICATION, RENOVATION, DEMOLITION, INSTALLATION, OR OTHER ALTERATION OF BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATIONS, REAL PROPERTY OR SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall identify all Federal, State, County, or local, permits, coordination, certifications or other regulatory authorization requirements under all applicable environmental laws and regulations as defined in (A.) above.

B. Contractor shall then prepare and submit in draft all applicable permit applications, coordination, notices, or other required filings, together with all supporting data to the Contracting Officer for review.

C. Permit applications or notifications or other documents that must be submitted by AAFES will be submitted by AAFES, and any documents that must be submitted by the Contractor will be returned after review to the Contractor for submission.

D. No work requiring permit or other written authorization shall proceed before the Contractor has the permit or authorization or a copy thereof in its possession.


3 MATERIALS

3.1 RECYCLED MATERIALS

A. Materials used in this contract shall be, to the greatest extent practicable and consistent with financial prudence, made of recycled materials or of materials that are recyclable.

B. Where construction debris such as concrete or asphalt or wood can be recycled, this alternative will be considered.

3.2 ASBESTOS

A. Asbestos will not be used or included in this project.

3.3 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL’S (PCBS)

A. PCBs will not be used or included in this project.

3.4 LEAD-BASED PAINT

A. Lead-based paint will not be used or included in this project.

3.5 OZONE-DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

A. “Class I substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class I by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to chlorofluorocarbons, halons, carbon tetrachloride, and methyl chloroform.

B. “Class II substance,” as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class II by EPA (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to hydorchlorofluorocarbons.

C. As required by 42 USC 7671j(b), c, and (d) and 40 CFR Part 82, Subpart E, the Contractor shall label products which contain class I or class II ozone-depleting substances or are manufactured with a process that uses class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, or containers of class I or class II ozone-depleting substances, as follows:

“WARNING: Contains (or manufactured with, if applicable) _________*_________, (a) substance(s) which harm(s) public health and the environment by destroying ozone in the upper atmosphere.”

(*The Contractor shall insert the name of the substance(s).)

D. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Sections 608 and 609 of the Clean Air Act (42 USC 7671g, National Recycling Emission Reduction Program and 7671h, Servicing of Motor Vehicle Air Conditioners) as each or both apply to the contract.

3.6 PESTICIDES

A. Except as may be specified elsewhere in this contract, Contractor will not use or apply pesticides (such as herbicides or weed-killers, insecticides, or rodenticides) without the specific written prior approval of the Contracting Officer.


4 EXECUTION

4.1 GENERAL: SITE DISTURBANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITES

A. Contractor shall use industry-recognized best management practices to avoid creation of fugitive dust emissions and to avoid and control storm water runoff from the construction site and any temporary roads that may be used for access to it.

1. Water sprinkling may be used to control dust.

B. Contractor shall perform all work under this contract in such a manner that no pollutants of any kind are released into ditches, storm drains, streams, lakes, or other surface waters on or connected to the site.

4.2 PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES

A. General:

1. The Contractor shall not pollute storm drainage, streams, lakes, or reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, acids, construction wastes or other harmful materials or pollutants.

2. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and comply with all applicable Federal, State, Regional, Municipal, and other regulations.

B. Spillage:

1. The Contractor shall take special measures to prevent chemicals, fuels, oils, greases, bituminous materials, waste washings, herbicides, cement, and surface drainage from entering public waters.

2. In the event of a spill, the Contractor must make all required notifications to Federal, State or local authorities and will notify the Contracting Officer immediately.

C. Washing and Curing Water:

1. Water used in aggregate processing, concrete curing, foundation, and concrete lift clean-up and other waste water shall not be allowed to enter the storm drainage system.

4.3 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES

A. General:

1. It is intended that the land resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work performed under this contract be preserved in their present condition or be restored to a condition after completion of construction that will appear to the natural and not detract from the appearance of the project.

2. The Contractor shall limit his construction activities to areas defined by the Drawings or Specifications.

B. Prevention of Landscape Defacement:

1. Except in areas marked on the plans to be cleared, the Contractor shall not deface, remove, cut, injure or destroy trees or shrubs without specific written authority.

2. Trees designated to be saved shall be protected from either excavation or filling within the root zone.


3. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened or attached to any existing trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized by the Contracting Officer.

4. The Contractor shall in any event be responsible for any damage resulting from such use.

C. Restoration of Landscape Damage:

1. Any trees or other landscape features scarred or damaged by the Contractor’s equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to the original condition at the Contractor’s expense.

2. The Contracting Officer will decide what method of restoration shall be used, and whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed or removed and disposed of under requirements for clearing and grubbing (Section 02102).

3. All scars made on trees not designated on the plans to be removed by equipment construction operations, or by the removal of limbs larger than 1-inch in diameter shall be coated immediately with an approved tree wound dressing.

4. All trimming or pruning shall be performed in an approved manner by experienced landscape personnel.

5. Tree trimming with axes shall not be permitted. 6. Trees that are to remain, either within or outside established clearing limits, that are

subsequently damaged by the Contractor and are beyond saving in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, shall be immediately removed and replaced with a nursery-grown tree of the same species.

4.4 CONTROL OF AIR EMISSIONS

A. Contractor’s actions shall conform to all Federal, State, and local requirements for the control of air emissions during work under this contract.

B. Trucks leaving the site will be brushed or washed to remove all practicable amounts of dust or other material that may become airborne.

C. Contractor will ensure that all internal construction vehicles and equipment used will have the lowest practicable emissions characteristics and be maintained in optimum operating condition for the reduction of air emissions.

D. Where use of electric motors instead of internal combustion engines is feasible, electric motors will be used during construction.

5 WASTE DISPOSAL

5.1 POLLUTION PREVENTION & WASTE DISPOSAL

A. The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular.

B. Recycling shall be implemented at every practicable stage of the project.

5.2 WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Pollution Prevention:

1. The Contractor should use prior planning to find those materials and work practices that will minimize the creation of waste in general and hazardous waste in particular.


B. Hazardous Waste Generation, Handling, and Disposal.

1. Work done under this contract is to be performed on a government facility. 2. According to rules and procedures of the United States Environmental Protection

Agency, the federal facility is required to have a generator identification number under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and to be responsible for wastes (as defined under RCRA) produced, managed, stored, disposed on, or transported from the facility.

3. Accordingly, Contractor will, to the greatest extent practicable, use materials, processes, and techniques that will avoid the creation of hazardous waste.

4. Contractor shall prepare and follow a written waste management and disposal plan for all hazardous wastes generated on the site.

5. Prior to generation of any hazardous wastes, Contractor will coordinate planned activities regarding hazardous materials and hazardous waste with the Contracting Officer.

6. Contractor shall submit a written waste management plan, through the Contracting Officer, to installation environmental office.

a. Contractor shall follow this plan after approval by the Contracting Officer.

7. Under no circumstances will Contractor bring onto the site hazardous waste that has been generated elsewhere.

8. All hazardous waste will be properly disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with all Federal, State, and local requirements.

C. Disposal of Non-RCRA Wastes.

1. All non-hazardous wastes generated on the site as a result of this contract must be disposed of properly, in accordance with all Federal, State, and local requirements.

2. Materials will be recycled whenever practicable. 3. Prior to creation of such wastes, the Contractor shall submit to the installation

environmental management function, through the Contracting Officer, a plan for disposal of wastes. Such plan shall include the types of waste to be created, how they shall be stored, managed and disposed. Contractor shall follow this plan once it has been approved by the installation and Contracting Officer.

4. Such wastes will not be created until approved by the Contracting Officer.

D. Construction Debris.

1. Debris from demolition of existing structures will ordinarily be removed to a location on the installation or as designated by the installation authorities.

2. If a location on the installation is not available, other sections in this contract may require the Contactor to remove clean construction debris from the site to a location of the Contractor’s choosing off the installation. (Site soil or other site media are not covered by this paragraph.)

3. Debris will be recycled or disposed of in accordance with MacDill AFB and all applicable Federal, State and local rules.

a. Such debris must be free of all contamination, including but not limited to, lead paint, asbestos, and insecticides.

4. Prior to removal of any construction debris, that debris must be certified by the installation to be free of contamination and of no value to the United States, and this certification must be provided to the Contracting Officer.


a. To expedite work, this may be accomplished by e-mail or other suitable electronic means, however, the original certification form must be provided to the Contracting Officer.

b. No form is prescribed for this certification so long as all necessary information is provided and the document is signed by an authorized installation representative.

c. However, an example is provided at page 01420-9 and this form may be used.

5. All construction debris removed from the installation must be covered by a certification.

6. The Contractor must arrange with the installation POC whether all debris will be covered by one certification or if several certifications will be required.

E. Consolidated Waste Disposal Plans:

1. Contractor may, at Contractor’s option, submit for approval as specified above one consolidated plan for handling hazardous and non-hazardous wastes.

F. Earthwork and Removal of Potentially Contaminated Media:

1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, the site has been inspected and is, consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution.

a. However, work under this contract will be performed on a military installation, where the history of prior military and industrial activities is not necessarily completely known.

b. The following provisions prohibit the removal from the installation of soil or other materials found on site and are included, in an abundance of caution, for the protection of AAFES, the installation, and the Contractor.

2. Notwithstanding any other clause in this contract, including but not limited to all standard site work general provisions (02010-02900); no media by-product resulting from site preparation, construction or excavation shall be moved off the post, base, or installation where the construction is occurring.

a. If the construction is off the post, base or installation, no media by-product shall be moved off the construction site.

3. The Contractor shall:

a. Leave the media in place at the site, subject to appropriate erosion control or; b. Haul the media to and place it at a location on the installation that has been

designated either in this contract or in writing by the Contracting Officer; and c. If unforeseen difficulties arise, such as excessive quantity of media is generated,

the Contractor shall advise the Contracting Officer and shall not remove media from the site without written authorization from the Contracting Officer.

4. Definitions.

a. Media – Any soil, water, or air, moved, disturbed or released from a site. b. The terms hazardous, waste, pollutant, contaminate, substance have the same

meanings and usage here as they commonly do in CERCLA, RCRA, FWPCA, CAA, TSCA, and SDWA respectively.


INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FOR CLEAN CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS TO BE REMOVED FROM AAFES PROJECT SITE As representative of ___________________________ (insert name of installation), I am authorized to certify, and hereby do so certify, that the construction debris to be removed from the AAFES project site at ______________________ ____________________________________________ (describe project and list address, for example Main Exchange Project, 111 Road A, X installation) has been inspected and is of no value to the United States and is free of all contamination, including but not limited to: lead paint, asbestos, PCBs, and pesticides. CERTIFICATION: Signed: ______________________________________________ Date: ____________________ Printed Name, Rank or Grade, and Duty Title: ___________________________________________ ORIGINAL OF THIS FORM MUST BE PROVIDED TO CONTRACTING OFFICER


6 UNEXPECTED SITE CONDITIONS

6.1 CONTAMINATED SOIL OR GROUNDWATER

A. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this contract, site has been inspected and is, consistent with best professional judgment, free of environmental contamination or pollution. However, unexpected conditions can always arise.

B. Contractor or subcontractor personnel may encounter soil or groundwater that is suspected to be contaminated, either because of odors, colors, free liquids, unexpected construction debris, or other suspicious conditions.

C. Should this occur, Contractor will immediately notify the Contracting Officer and the installation environmental office and take necessary initial measures to protect workers, the site, and other personnel.

6.2 UNEXPECTED ARTIFACTS OR RELICS

A. Should Contractor employees in the course of site preparation or other work on this contract find unexpected historic or archeological remains, such as bones, arrow points, pottery remnants, foundations, or other evidence of previous uses of the site, Contractor will cease further site-disturbing activity and immediately notify the Contracting Officer and installation environmental office.

END 01420.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01500 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES, BARRIERS & CONTROLS

TEMPORARY FACILITIES, BARRIERS & CONTROLS 01500-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE.

A. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary facilities and controls, including construction aids and equipment for common use and to facilitate execution of the work:

1. Chutes. 2. Cranes. 3. Hoists. 4. Platforms. 5. Railings. 6. Ramps. 7. Runways. 8. Stairs.

B. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary barriers and enclosures to separate phased construction areas and areas occupied for use by AAFES.

C. Contractor provide and submit for approval a detailed Traffic Control Plan.

D. Contractor shall provide all other construction aids required to complete work:

1. Temporary devices and equipment. 2. Temporary protection coverings.

E. Contractor shall provide Site security program at mobilization:

1. Enforce site security program. 2. Implement installation rules and regulations for all work at MacDill AFB. 3. Enforce supplemental security program specified in the Section. 4. Coordinate and cooperate with MacDill BCE in establishing, maintaining and

enforcing security program during construction. 5. Protect work, stored materials and construction equipment from theft and

vandalism. 6. Prevent access to construction areas by unauthorized persons. 7. Protect Installation and AAFES property at site from theft, vandalism or damage

from Contractor’s work or employees.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01010 – Project Summary. 2. Section 01060 – AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures. 3. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities. 4. Section 01590 – Field Offices and Storage Sheds. 5. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition.

B. Installed but specified elsewhere:

1. Structural cold-formed metal framing members related to work under this Section are specified in Section 05400, Cold-formed Metal Framing.


2. Wood framing, plywood, fasteners and other wood materials related to work under this Section are specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

3. Hardware requirements related to work under this Section are specified in Section 08710, Finish Hardware.

4. Non-structural cold-formed metal drywall framing members and gypsum drywall are specified in Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems.

5. Other technical Sections of the specifications as related to work under this Section.

C. Temporary facilities, barriers and controls must comply with NFPA 241, EM-385-1-1 and UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Coordinate and comply with requirements established by MacDill AFB BCE.

B. Obtain all permits and inspections required.

C. Comply with specified codes and regulations: Latest editions in effect as of date of bidding documents.

1. International Building Code. 2. National Fire Protection Agency, NFPA 241. 3. Engineer’s Manual, Safety-Safety & Health Requirements, EM-385-1-1. 4. Uniform Facilities Criteria, UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7. 5. National Electric Code (ANSI C1). 6. National Electrical Safety Code. 7. Federal and State Requirements.

D. Comply with applicable provisions of ADA and UFAS to maintain accessible paths of travel and means of egress during construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls Plan for coordination that indicates dust/debris control measures, security measures, proposed locations and proposed time frame of necessity for such items.

1. Submit Plan(s) at a minimum scale of 1/8” = 1’-0”. 2. For each Phase of work indicate:

a. Locations of all temporary partitions. b. Proposed partition types. c. Door locations and door types to be provided. d. Other information to describe means of protecting occupied areas of the

building from dust, debris and personal injury.

3. Schematically indicate temporary isolation of HVAC system on plan.

a. Indicate location of proposed air filtration system, make-up air and air filtration discharge.

b. Other dust control measures.

4. Schematically indicate temporary isolation of building sprinkler system zones and duration of isolation during construction.


5. Schematically indicate waste management plan.

B. Provide narrative to accompany Drawing(s) that briefly describes procedures to be followed, regulatory requirement compliance and special provisions for items not specifically addressed in Drawing.

C. Prior to the start of work, submit a site plan showing the locations and dimensions of temporary facilities (including layouts and details, equipment and material storage area (onsite and offsite), access and haul routes, avenues of ingress/egress to the fenced area and details of the fence installation.

1. Identify any areas that may have to be graveled to prevent the tracking of mud. 2. Indicate if the use of a supplemental or other staging area is desired. 3. Show locations of safety and construction fences, site trailers, construction

entrances, trash dumpsters, temporary sanitary facilities, and worker parking areas.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

A. Traffic Control Plan:

1. Provide detailed Traffic Control Plan incorporating the following features for review and approval by Contracting Officer and MacDill AFB Safety Officer:

a. Indicate temporary barriers, barricades, cones, lighting and signage required to safely allow customer vehicular ingress and egress to and from Site where applicable.

1.) Include traffic control devices required to safely direct ingress and egress customer traffic to and from parking areas.

b. Indicate drives, temporary barriers, barricades, cones, lighting and signage required to safely allow truck deliveries and garbage pick-up to existing building.

2. Indicate detailed provisions for safe transportation, delivery and hauling of construction materials and equipment to site without conflict with vehicular customer and normal traffic in and around the site.

B. Barricades:

1. Erect and maintain temporary barricades to limit public access to hazardous areas. 2. Whenever safe public access to paved areas such as roads, parking areas or

sidewalks is prevented by construction activities or as otherwise necessary to ensure the safety of both pedestrian and vehicular traffic barricades will be required.

3. Securely place barricades clearly visible with adequate illumination to provide sufficient visual warning of the hazard during both day and night.

C. Fencing:

1. Provide fencing along the construction site at all open excavations and tunnels to control access by unauthorized people.


2. In addition, prior to the start of work, enclose those areas at the construction site that are not within the construction fence with a temporary safety fence, including gates and warning signs, to protect the public from construction activities.

a. The safety fence shall match the base standard color (or bright orange where it protects excavated areas), shall be made of [high density polyethylene grid or approved equal, a minimum of 42 inches high, supported and tightly secured to steel posts located on minimum 10 foot centers.

b. Remove the fence from the work site upon completion of the contract.

2.2 TEMPORARY INTERIOR BARRIERS

A. Provide the following under the Work of this Section:

1. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 6-mil minimum thickness, with flame spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84.

2. Dust Barrier Tape: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by polyethylene sheet manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations.

3. Dust Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats of 36” x 60” minimum size at exits from work areas and wherever necessary to control the spread of dust from foot traffic.

4. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool or rock wool with maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50.

B. Material may be new or used.

C. Materials shall be adequate for purposes intended,

D. Materials shall not create unsafe or unsanitary conditions.

E. Materials shall be furnished in compliance with specified codes and standards.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Provide the following minimum equipment items under work of this Section:

1. Spring-Loaded Poles, Ceiling and Wall Rails and Side Wall Clamps: Dust barrier system for fast setup and breakdown dust barrier systems that consist of spring-loaded support poles that extend from 4’-7” to 12’-0” or 6’-9” to 21’-0” and hold plastic sheet in position as a curtain barrier equal to system manufactured by Zipwall, 37 Broadway, Arlington, MA 02474, (800) 718-2255, (www.zipwall.com).

2. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated with class and extinguishing agent as required by specified Code and MacDill AFB CE Fire Department for locations and classes of fire exposure.

3. Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter equipped portable units with four stage filtration.

a. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. b. Configure to run continuously.

2.4 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

A. Temporary Walls, Closures, Security Enclosures and Barricades:


1. Provide and maintain all barricades or enclosures required to protect the work in progress from outside elements, dust, interior construction dust and noise, and other disturbances as a result of work under this Contract.

2. Such protection shall be positive, shall meet the approval of the Contracting Officer, and shall be maintained for the duration of the construction period, or as required to provide for the protection as specified.

B. Provide weather protection for materials and allow for effective construction heating and to prevent entry of unauthorized personnel.

C. Maintain site and work areas in secure, enclosed condition at end of each workday.

1. Provide temporary enclosures or barriers of substantial construction. 2. Provide temporary opening protections where areas cannot be closed and secured

at the end of each workday.

2.5 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COVERINGS

A. Contractor coordinate installation of temporary protective coverings with work of various trades.

B. Contractor provide temporary protective coverings over finishes that could be damaged by construction activities.

C. Protective coverings shall be maintained throughout the duration when construction activities require surface protection or until the Contracting Officer authorizes removal.

D. Regularly clean areas and protective coverings as construction activities require in order to prevent damage to new finishes and substrates.

E. Upon completion of work remove temporary protective coverings, clean and repair any damage to new construction surfaces.

2.6 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTION

A. Provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work, all temporary rigging, scaffolding, hoisting equipment, ladders to roof, barricades around openings, and all other temporary work as required to complete all work of the Contract.

B. Contractor shall coordinate the use and furnishing of scaffolds with his subcontractors.

C. Provide, maintain and remove upon completion of the work, or sooner if authorized by the Contracting Officer, all fences, barricades, lights, shoring, pedestrian walkways, and other protective structures or devices necessary for the safety of workmen, AAFES employees, equipment, the public, and property.

D. All temporary construction and equipment shall conform to all regulations, ordinances, laws and other requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, including insurance companies, with regards to safety precautions, operation and fire hazard.

E. Pumping: Provide and maintain pumping facilities, including power, for keeping the site, excavations and structures free of accumulations of water at all times, whether from underground seepage, rainfall, drainage or broken lines.


2.7 MAINTENANCE OF SECURITY

A. Initiate security program in compliance with Installation’s directions prior to mobilization.

B. Maintain security program throughout construction period until AAFES acceptance precludes need for Contractor security.

C. Vehicle use shall be enforced as follows:

1. Keep all vehicles, mechanized or motorized equipment locked at all times when parked or unattended on site.

2. Do not leave vehicle unattended with engine running or with ignition key in place. 3. Parking will be permitted only in areas designated by MacDill AFB BCE. 4. All traffic control shall be subject to MacDill AFB BCE approval.

D. Comply with requirements set forth in Paragraphs 2.3 and 2.4 for secure closure of all window openings during window replacement operations.

2.8 ENTRANCE CONTROL

A. Provide control of all construction personnel and vehicles entering and leaving project site and building.

B. Unauthorized Entry:

1. Maintain provision for closing and locking the building as soon as possible. 2. When exterior work is in process such as concrete finish work, the Contractor shall

maintain security so work and property will not be harmed or damaged.

C. Damage or Theft:

1. Protect the work and material to be used on the project, from damages or loss due to the elements, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, or other causes.

2. Contractor shall be held responsible for such damages, or loss, which he shall remedy at his expense.

2.9 TOOL AND EQUIPMENT SECURITY

A. Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of tool and equipment storage security program prior to commencement of work.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with tool and equipment security program and shall inform all workers of specific requirements affecting each craft.

C. Storage of tools and equipment will be allowed within the facility.

2.10 PROJECT BULLETIN BOARD

A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain, during the life of the project, a weather-tight bulletin board approximately 3 feet high by 5 feet wide, having not less than two hinged or sliding glass doors with provisions for locking.

1. The bulletin board shall be mounted where, and as approved by the Contracting Officer, in a prominent place, accessible to employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors, and to applicants for employment.

2. The bulletin board shall remain the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed by him upon completion of the contract work.


B. The following information, which will be furnished by AAFES to the Contractor (except safety posters), shall be posted on the bulletin board, and shall be maintained by the Contractor in an easily readable condition at all times for the duration of the Contract:

1. The Equal Employment Opportunity Poster and Notice of Nondiscrimination of Employment (Standard Form 38).

2. Wage Rate Information Poster (Form SOL 155), with the contract schedule of minimum rates as required by the Davis-Bacon Act.

3. Safety posters.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Consult with Contracting Officer, review site conditions and factors that affect construction procedures and construction aids, which may be affected by execution of the work.

B. Coordinate requirements for enclosures and installation procedures with MacDill AFB BCE representative(s).

3.2 INSTALLATION-GENERAL

A. Provide temporary facilities, barriers and controls for use when necessary to avoid delay in performance of Contract and maintain until no longer necessary or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent construction.

B. Locate temporary facilities, barriers and controls where they will suitably serve Project, result in minimum interference with performance of Work and least interfere with AAFES operations.

C. Relocate and modify temporary facilities, barriers and controls as Work progresses to maintain criteria set forth above.

3.3 EMPLOYEE PARKING

A. Contractor employees shall park privately owned vehicles in an area designated by the Contracting Officer or designated representative and as approved by MacDill AFB BCE.

B. This area will be within reasonable walking distance of the construction site.

C. Contractor employee parking shall not interfere with existing and established parking requirements of the Installation.

3.4 TRAFFIC PROVISIONS

A. Maintenance of Traffic:

1. Conduct operations in a manner that will not close any thoroughfare or interfere in any way with traffic on roadways except with written permission of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and MacDill AFB BCE at least 15 calendar days prior to the proposed modification date.

2. Provide a Traffic Control Plan detailing the proposed controls to traffic movement for approval.


a. The plan must be in accordance with State and local regulations and MacDill AFB BCE.

b. Contractor may move oversized and slow-moving vehicles to the worksite provided requirements of the highway authority have been met.

B. Conducting Work:

1. Conduct work so as to minimize obstruction of traffic, and maintain traffic on at least half of the roadway width at all times.

2. Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer or designated representative and MacDill AFB BCE prior to starting any activity that will obstruct traffic.

3.5 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Maintain support facilities until Contracting Officer schedules Substantial Completion inspection.

2. Remove before Substantial Completion. 3. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use

permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and maintain Project site, excavations and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Sections for requirements pertaining to waste disposal and recycling, including disposal of materials controlled by MacDill AFB 88 ABW/CEV.

F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

3.6 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed new opening cuts in exterior of existing building.

1. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

2. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

C. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.


D. Covered Walkway: Erect protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals through or adjacent to areas of Work where overhead hazard exists.

1. Coordinate with entrances, other temporary facilities, barriers, controls and obstructions.

2. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and requirements indicated on Drawings.

3. Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, exit signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage.

E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and after completion from the following:

1. Exposure, inclement weather, other construction operations and similar activities. 2. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure for building exterior.

F. Temporary Barriers: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof barriers to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by AAFES and tenants from fumes and noise.

1. Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required, provide a single layer of 6 mil fire resistant clear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced sheet.

a. Tape all joints and provide fire resistive treated 2 x 4 wood or metal stud top and bottom runners and verticals 4 foot o.c. with polyethylene sheet wrapped and taped to the runners.

b. Seal Joints and Perimeter:

1.) Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required.

2.) Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public while maintaining specified exiting requirements.

c. At Contractors option the specified Zipwall temporary barrier system may be used in lieu of field constructed temporary dust barriers.

2. Opaque Dust Barrier: Where dust barriers are required and where indicated for long duration separation of construction operations from AAFES and tenant spaces, provide braced metal stud framing:

a. Cover framing on construction side with 6-mil fire resistant clear polyethylene fiberglass reinforced sheet with taped joints and perimeter.

b. Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire taped on the AAFES/tenant side from floor to ceiling.

c. Provide R-11 fiberglass batt insulation for thermal separation from unconditioned construction areas and noise reduction adjacent to sales, food service or office areas.

d. Seal Joints and Perimeter:

1.) Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required.

2.) Where practical, locate doors in or towards back of house areas to avoid tracking dust in areas open to the public while maintaining specified exiting requirements.


3. Security Weather-tight Barrier: Where a secure weather-tight barrier is required and where a temporary exit enclosure through surrounding and overhead construction is indicated, provide braced metal stud framing:

a. Cover framing on construction or exterior side with ½ inch plywood. b. Provide ½ inch gypsum board, fire-taped on the AAFES/public side on entire

enclosure. c. Provide R-11 fiberglass batt insulation for thermal separation from the

exterior, unconditioned construction areas and noise reduction adjacent to sales, food service or office areas.

d. Panelize framing for ease of removal and relocation.

G. Temporary Opening Protection: Provide temporary rated an non-rated hollow metal doors and frames or suitable equivalent of substantial construction as approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1. Dust Barriers and Opaque Dust Barrier Doors:

a. Construct at each access through the barrier. b. Doors shall be hinged with latches and provided with double high security

padlocks in accordance with AAFES security. c. Maintain adhesive surfaced foot mats in door locations.

2. Security Barrier Doors:

a. Construct at each exterior opening through barrier. b. Doors and frames shall be hollow metal and of substantial gauge and

anchorage to provide secure enclosure. c. Set doors and frames to swing in the direction of exit. d. Provide hinges, exit devices and closers with exit devices always operable in

the direction of exiting and locked on the opposite side.

H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses and in compliance with NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and

similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and protection program for personnel at Project site.

a. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures.

b. Post warnings and information.

3.7 REMOVAL

A. Upon Contracting Officer's prior written authorization, completely remove temporary materials and equipment.

B. Clean and repair all damage caused by installation.

C. Restore to original conditions.

END 01500.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01510 – TEMPORARY UTILITIES

TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510-1

1 GENERAL


A. Contractor provide and/or maintain during construction period:

1. All temporary utilities for construction:

a. Electricity. b. Lighting. c. Heat. d. Ventilation. e. Telephone service. f. Water. g. Sanitary facilities.

2. All temporary utilities listed above for temporary field offices and storage sheds. 3. Provide and trash dumpsters or other means to dispose of demolition and

construction debris. 4. Pay utility and trash disposal fees and use charges not specifically identified

herein. 5. All temporary utilities in excess of those specified, or exceeding capacity of

existing or permanent systems.




C. Section 01590 – Field Offices and Sheds.

D. Section 01620 – Storage & Protection.

E. Section 02083 – Asbestos Abatement.

F. Division 15 – Mechanical.

G. Division 16 – Electrical.

1.3 UTILITY PROVIDERS

A. AAFES will pay for utilities consumed for this Project (water, sewer, gas and electricity) as related to building construction.

B. Contractor shall pay prevailing rates to utility owner for utilities used for temporary offices, construction trailers and storage sheds.

C. Contractor shall pay privatized utility tapping and inspection fees.

D. Utilities information:


1. Water/Sewer:

a. Florida Government Utility Authority (FGUA):

1.) POC: Michael Wilson. 2.) Phone: (727) 359-1158.

2. Natural gas:

a. TECO Peoples Gas:

1.) POC: Rick Swirbul. 2.) Phone: (813) 275-3278.

3. Electrical power:

a. MacDill AFB:

1.) POC: Victor Nespeca. 2.) Phone: (813) 828-4531.

1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Obtain and pay for permits and inspections required by governing authorities.

B. Comply with specified codes and regulations: Latest editions in effect as of date of bidding documents.

1. National Fire Protection Agency, NFPA 241. 2. Engineer’s Manual, Safety-Safety & Health Requirements, EM-385-1-1. 3. Uniform Facilities Criteria, UFC 3-600-1, Sections 1-7. 4. National Electric Code (ANSI C1). 5. National Electrical Safety Code. 6. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Standards. 7. Federal and State Requirements.

1.5 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

A. AAFES will furnish source for temporary water from existing water service within the building.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install a temporary water service from source to be used for construction needs, fire protection, cleaning and miscellaneous use throughout the construction period.

1. The temporary water service shall originate after the meter from the building water source as coordinated with Contracting Officer or designated representative and Store Manager.

2. Extend piping from source to points as needed for construction in compliance with referenced Codes and regulations of MacDill AFB BCE.

3. Size temporary water service as needed for construction operations. 4. Provide certified reduced pressure zone (RPZ) backflow protection. 5. Provide water hoses from source to point of operations.

C. Do not route temporary water piping on grade, floor or roof during construction and provide drip pans under each temporary water connection where damage to new materials could result.

D. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of water usage during construction.


E. AAFES will pay for the cost of water consumed during construction and after beneficial occupancy by AAFES.

F. Contractor shall pay for temporary extension of AAFES furnished water source and all additional costs for permits, connection fees, and water used for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds.

1.6 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC FOR PROJECT CONSTRUCTION

A. AAFES will furnish source for temporary power from existing power panels in the building.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install a temporary secondary electric load center for construction needs throughout the construction period per MacDill AFB BCE standards.

1. The temporary electric service shall be a 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 200 amp minimum service for construction operations.

2. Provide a power center temporarily mounted to the building consisting of the following:

a. Main disconnect. b. 20 amp, 120/208 volt circuits as necessary, each protected by a circuit

breaker, for use by all trades.

1.) All outlets shall be grounded. 2.) Outlets shall be located so that no extensions are more than 100 feet

in length.

3. Users shall provide grounded, Underwriters’ Laboratories approved extension cords from power center to point of operations.

C. The temporary electric service or extension of existing service shall comply with the National Electric Code.

D. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of power usage during construction.

E. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of five (5) foot candles in all work areas.

1. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

2. Provide guarded lighting sockets and lamps.

a. Use 100 watt lamps, minimum. b. Maintain socket voltage of 100 volts minimum in lighting system.

3. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 4. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.

F. AAFES will pay for the cost of electricity consumed during construction, including power consumed after installation of permanent service where required, and after beneficial occupancy by AAFES.

G. Contractor shall pay for temporary extension of AAFES furnished power source and all additional costs for service or service extensions and electricity used for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds per requirements listed in Section 01590 – AAFES Field Offices and Sheds.


1.7 TEMPORARY HEATING

A. Contractor shall provide, install and maintain temporary heat in the construction areas throughout the construction period to facilitate the progress of work, protect work against cold, dampness, condensation, and to provide suitable ambient temperatures and humidity levels for proper installation and curing of materials.

B. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary heat meeting the following requirements:

1. As required under each individual specification Section for each product or material during storage.

2. As required under each individual specification Section for proper placement, setting, and curing of materials.

3. Maintain a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F. (5 degrees C.) for twenty-four (24) hours a day during placing, setting, and curing of cementitious materials.

4. Maintain a minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. (28 degrees C.) for twenty four (24) hours a day, seven day prior to and during placing of interior finishes, including but not limited to:

a. Gypsum drywall. b. Painting. c. Resilient flooring and base. d. Tile work. e. Acoustic ceilings. f. Finish carpentry.

5. Maintain specified temperatures from the time of placement until beneficial occupancy, for installation all finish materials.

C. Contractor may use the permanent heating system for construction purposes under the following conditions:

1. Contractor shall obtain approval for use and operation of the system from the Contracting Officer and verify proper filters are in place.

2. Contractor shall provide and pay for maintenance and shall provide new filters and replace any damaged or worn parts immediately and until final acceptance by AAFES.

D. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of energy usage during construction.

E. AAFES will pay for natural gas and electricity consumed by the temporary and permanent heating equipment.

F. Contractor shall pay for extension of AAFES furnished temporary heating source, any additional costs for consumables used during temporary heating of construction areas, and those costs required for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds per requirements listed in Section 01590 – AAFES Field Offices and Sheds.

1.8 TEMPORARY COOLING

A. Contractor shall provide, install and maintain temporary cooling in the construction areas throughout the construction period to facilitate the progress of work, protect work against dampness, condensation, and to provide suitable ambient temperatures and humidity levels for proper installation and curing of materials.


B. Contractor may utilize the permanent cooling system to maintain temperatures and humidity during construction.

1. Extend and supplement with temporary cooling devices as needed. 2. Maintain conditions during the installation of finish materials as specified in

individual specification Sections.

C. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F (26 degrees C) in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, the contractor shall obtain approval for use and operation of the system from the Contracting Officer and verify filters are in place.

E. Contractor shall provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts immediately and until final acceptance by AAFES.

F. AAFES will pay for utilities consumed by the temporary and permanent cooling equipment.

G. Contractor shall pay for extension of AAFES furnished temporary cooling source, any additional costs for consumables used during temporary cooling of construction areas, and those costs required for temporary field offices, construction trailers and storage sheds per requirements listed in Section 01590 – AAFES Field Offices and Sheds.

1.9 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation to:

1. Aid in curing installed materials. 2. Dispersal of humidity. 3. Ventilation of temporary sanitary facilities. 4. Prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapors, or gases in areas

occupied during construction.

B. Contractor shall employ the use of temporary ventilating equipment, adequately sized to accomplish the required ventilation.

C. Contractor shall be held responsible for monitoring conservation of power usage for ventilation during construction.

D. AAFES will pay for electricity consumed by the temporary and permanent ventilation equipment.

1.10 TELEPHONE SERVICE

A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization.

B. Refer to Section 01590 - Field Offices and Sheds.

1.11 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary toilet facilities and enclosures for use by construction personnel and authorized parties throughout construction period.


1. Existing facility use in this or nearby buildings is not permitted. 2. Provide at time of project mobilization. 3. Furnish, install, and maintain adequate portable chemical toilets. 4. Provide regular maintenance service to maintain clean and sanitary conditions.

B. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary mobile building public toilets toilet facilities in size and fixture count to replace Mall Public Toilet facilities during the phased construction of the permanent toilet facilities.

1. Mobile buildings shall be provided for both male and female customers with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations and shall be completely accessible to the physically handicapped including ADA compliant signage.

2. Coordinate location of temporary mobile buildings with MacDill AFB and AAFES Store Manager for convenient access by customers.

3. Mobile buildings shall be structurally sound, secure, weather tight, insulated enclosures.

4. Finishes:

a. Exterior finish materials shall be weather resistant, finished in one color acceptable to MacDill AFB.

b. Interior finish materials shall be prefinished or painted sheet type materials for walls and ceilings with resilient tile floors and wall base with materials suitable for regular cleaning and in compliance with sanitation code requirements.

5. Provide temporary power, heating, cooling and code compliant ventilation to maintain comfort levels within applicable building code requirements.

a. Heating, cooling and ventilation equipment shall be automatic type with tamper-proof thermostat controls.

b. Equipment shall be capable of maintaining 70-degrees F (21 degrees C) heating and 74 degrees F (23 degrees C) cooling.

6. Provide, maintain and relocate temporary signage within the building directing customers to facilities from beginning of phased demolition of permanent public toilets until completion of public toilet renovation.

7. Upon completion of phased renovation of permanent public toilets and acceptance by Contracting Officer or designated representative completely remove temporary mobile buildings, associated construction and repair or replace any damaged existing site construction to the satisfaction of AAFES Contracting Officer and MacDill AFB BCE.



END 01510.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01580 – PROJECT IDENTIFICATION & SIGNS

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION & SIGNS 01580-1

1 GENERAL


A. Double sided Project identification sign.

B. Vinyl sign face graphic.

C. Maintenance.

D. Removal.



B. Section 01590 – Field Offices and Sheds.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design sign and structure to withstand 90 miles/hr (145 km/hr) wind velocity.

B. Sign Graphic Supplier: Experienced as a professional sign installer for minimum three years.

C. Painting: Sign structure and background shall be adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in compliance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Provide Shop Drawings indicating the following:

1. Structure, sizes, and grades of members including sign face. 2. Background color chart for selection purposes. 3. Vinyl sign face graphic indicating colors in Pantone numbers.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate.

B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, 48 inches x 96 inches.

C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized.

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION & SIGNS 01580-2

D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats; sign background of color as indicated on the drawing.

E. Graphics: Vinyl sign face graphic with adhesive backing.

2.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN

A. One double-sided painted sign of construction, design, and content shown on Drawings, location designated.

B. Contractor provide two (2) sets of vinyl graphics with adhesive backing and install on Contractor prepared structure and painted background as indicated.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install project identification sign as indicated within 30 days after Notice to Proceed.

B. Erect at designated location.

C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings.

D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints and anchor securely.

E. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing a neutral off-white color as approved by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

F. Install vinyl sign graphics to both faces of sign panel as indicated.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage.

3.3 REMOVAL

A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area.

END 01580.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01590 – EXCHANGE (AAFES) FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS

EXCHANGE (AAFES) FIELD OFFICES & SHEDS 01590-1

1 GENERAL


A. Temporary field offices, construction trailers and sheds.

B. Maintenance and cleaning.

C. Removal.



B. Section 01010 – Summary of Project.

C. Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection.

D. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls.

E. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS

A. Materials, Equipment, Furnishings: Serviceable, new or used, adequate for required purpose.

B. Temporary field office and storage sheds may be furnished at Contractor’s option for this Project.

1. It is the intent of this Section to establish a minimum standard of quality for a temporary field office and storage sheds.

2. Should Contractor determine the need for such temporary facilities they shall be furnished in compliance with requirements set forth below.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Buildings: Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors.

B. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for office and storage spaces.

1. Maintain during progress of Work. 2. Remove at completion of Work.

C. Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements.


D. Exterior Materials: Weather resistant, finished in one color acceptable to MacDill AFB BCE.

E. Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, pre-finished or painted; resilient floors and bases.

F. Lighting for Offices (At Contractor’s Option): 50 ft-C (538 lx) at desk top height, exterior lighting at entrance doors.

G. Fire Extinguishers: One 10# standard dry chemical (ABC) type fire extinguisher at each office and each storage area.

H. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified conditions for storage of products.

2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL

A. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) heating and 76 degrees F (23 degrees C) cooling.

B. Storage Spaces (At Contractor’s Option or as Required for Materials being Stored): Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain Products in accordance with Contract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of Products.

2.4 CONTRACTOR OFFICE AND FACILITIES

A. Size:

1. To meet Contractor's needs. 2. Minimum size for office space shall be 100 square feet.

B. Telephone:

1. At Contractor’s option he shall install, maintain and pay for telephone service for the Contractor's field office including an answering device and outside bell.

2. Mobile telephones will be acceptable providing non-interrupted service can be established between the Contractor and the following:

a. Contracting Officer or designated representative. b. AAFES Project Manager. c. Base CES. d. Architect-Engineer. e. All other relevant parties including major subcontractors and material

suppliers.

C. Fax (At Contractor’s Option): Install, maintain and pay for facsimile service for the Contractor's Field Office.

D. Furnishings: Contractor's option.

E. Equipment:

1. Four (4) adjustable band protective helmets for visitors. 2. One (1) 10 inch (250 mm) outdoor weather thermometer. 3. Weather protected bulletin board for posting information required by the contract.


2.5 STORAGE AREAS AND SHEDS

A. Size to storage requirements for products of individual Sections.

B. Allow for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for inspection of products.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.

B. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not permitted on Installation property.

3.3 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

A. Weekly cleaning services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas.

B. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow.

3.4 REMOVAL

A. At completion of Work remove buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris. Restore areas.

END 01590.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01600 – MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-1

1 GENERAL



1. Specified materials and equipment. 2. Transportation and delivery. 3. Equipment and personnel at site. 4. Coordination of delivery for Materials and Equipment. 5. Coordination of space allocation to receive Materials and Equipment. 6. Coordinate and provide space allocation to receive Materials and Equipment

delivered by AAFES and AAFES Vendors.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01010 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01030 – Substitutions & Product Options. 3. Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules. 4. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 5. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls. 6. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities. 7. Section 01590 – Field Offices & Sheds. 8. Section 01620 – Storage and Protection. 9. Section 01710 – Cleaning. 10. Section 01720 – Project Record Documents. 11. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.2 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in installation:

1. Provide three (3) copies to the Contracting Officer. 2. Transmit one (1) copy to the Architect-Engineer. 3. Maintain one (1) set of complete instructions at job site during installation and until

completion. 4. Retain an additional three (3) sets of complete instructions for insertion in Operation

and Maintenance Manuals to be submitted at Final Completion.

B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.

1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Contracting Officer for further instructions.

2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.

C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT INCORPORATED INTO THE WORK

A. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.

B. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by Contracting Officer.

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-2

C. Manufactured and fabricated products:

1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with best engineering and shop practices. 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be

interchangeable. 3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to

unless variations are specifically approved in writing.

D. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified.

E. Do not incorporate any materials or equipment into the work that contain asbestos, lead paint, PCB's or other hazardous materials.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site.

1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.

2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of contract documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged.

B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging.

C. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of assemblies or equipment to permit easy identification of parts and to facilitate assembly.

D. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent scraping, marring or other damage to products, equipment or surrounding surfaces.

3.2 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. In accord with Section 01620.

END 01600.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01620 – STORAGE & PROTECTION

STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01620-1

1 GENERAL


A. Contractor provide and maintain:

1. Coordination of location for storage of materials with MacDill AFB BCE. 2. Storage for materials and equipment to be installed in project. 3. Protection and security for stored materials and equipment, on and off site. 4. Maintenance and protection for products, materials and equipment after installation

and until completion of project. 5. Cooperate and assist AAFES in storage and protection of equipment.


A. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01010 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules. 3. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 4. Section 01510 – Temporary Utilities. 5. Section 01600 – Materials & Equipment. 6. Section 01710 – Cleaning. 7. Section 01720 – Project Closeout. 8. Technical Sections of the Project Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01340, submit:

1. Request for allocation of storage space, if applicable. 2. List of materials and equipment to be stored. 3. Proposed location for storage. 4. Special storage requirements. 5. Schedule of anticipated storage dates.

1.4 STORAGE

A. Obtain permission from MacDill AFB BCE and coordinate with appropriate authorities for suitable storage area on Project Site or in the vicinity of the Project Site and as indicated.

B. Store products immediately on delivery, and protect until installed in the work.

C. Store in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

D. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weathertight enclosures.

1. Maintain temperatures within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. 2. Provide humidity control for sensitive products, as required by manufacturer's

instructions. 3. Store unpacked products on shelves, in bins or in neat piles, accessible for

inspection.

E. Exterior Storage:

1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking or skids to support fabricated products above ground.

a. Prevent soiling or staining. b. Cover products, subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the

elements, with impervious sheet coverings. c. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

2. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces such as paved areas, or provide plywood or sheet materials to prevent mixing with foreign matter.

STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01620-2

a. Provide surface drainage to prevent flow or ponding of rainwater. b. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious material or liquids.

F. Arrange storage in manner to provide easy access for inspection.

1. Do not inhibit use of:

a. Fire lanes and exits. b. Roadways. c. Adjacent properties.

G. Store combustible materials in accordance with applicable regulations.

1.5 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE

A. Maintain periodic system of inspection of stored products on scheduled basis to assure that:

1. State of storage facilities is adequate to provide required conditions. 2. Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis. 3. Surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected. 4. Any weathering of products, coatings and finishes is not acceptable under

requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Provide continuous maintenance for all temporary structures.

C. Repair or refinish damaged or weathered portions of structure as required to maintain in specified condition.

D. Repair or replace defective utility connections required for temporary utilities.

E. Clean storage areas at least once a week.

1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

A. Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations and remove when no longer needed, prior to completion of work.

B. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment and surfaces.

C. Provide coverings to protect finished surfaces from damage.

1. Cover projections, wall corners, and jambs, sills and soffits of openings, in areas used for traffic and for passage of products in subsequent work.

2. Protect finished floors and stairs from dirt and damage:

a. In areas subject to foot traffic, secure heavy paper, sheet goods, or other materials in place.

b. For movement of heavy products, lay planking or similar materials in place. c. For storage of products, lay tight wood sheathing in place.

D. Waterproofed and roofing surfaces:

1. Prohibit use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of any products. 2. When some activity must take place in order to carry out the contract, obtain

recommendations of installer for protection of surface.

a. Install recommended protection and remove on completion of that activity. b. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas.

E. Landscaping:

1. Protect and prohibit activities that could damage landscaping. 2. Prohibit traffic of any kind across planted areas.

2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END 01620.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01650 – SYSTEMS START-UP

SYSTEMS START-UP 01650-1

1 GENERAL


A. Starting Special Construction, Mechanical and Electrical systems.

B. Demonstration and instructions for MacDill AFB BCE and AAFES personnel for Special Construction, Mechanical and Electrical systems.

C. Initial starting, adjusting and operational testing for AF/AI, AF/CI equipment, fixtures and signage.

D. Coordination of testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC systems.


A. Section 01017 – AAFES Furnished/AAFES Installed Equipment.

B. Section 01018 – AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment.

C. Section 01400 – Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports.

D. Section 01700 – Project Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials.

E. Division 11 – Equipment.

F. Division 13 – Fire Protection.

G. Division 15 – Plumbing and HVAC.

H. Division 16 – Electrical, Communications, Alarms and Surveillance.

1.3 STARTING AND TESTING SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall coordinate and schedule start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Notify Contracting Officer and designated representative seven (7) days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Contractor shall provide:

1. Initial start-up and functional testing of all Food Service Equipment and Walk-in Refrigeration Equipment to ensure installation is complete and equipment is functionally ready for AAFES provided final start-up and training demonstrations to employees.

2. Final start-up and testing of Fire Alarm, Fire Protection, HVAC, Electrical, and Communications equipment items and training for MacDill AFB maintenance personnel and AAFES employees for operation, adjusting and maintenance of that equipment.


D. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.

E. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

F. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

G. Execute initial start-up and functional testing under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative and/or Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

H. When specified in individual specification Sections for building equipment, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

I. Submit a typewritten report in accordance with Section 01340 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

1. Provide copies of typewritten reports in O & M Manuals at Project Close-out.

1.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Contractor shall provide sign-in log sheets and written meeting minutes for each unit or group of units demonstrated.

1. Obtain contact information and signature for each demonstration attendee. 2. Provide written minutes of each demonstration conducted. 3. Submit dated written record of each demonstration, along with sign-in log sheet

and meeting minutes as part of Project Closeout submittals and specifically include with Operation and Maintenance Manuals submitted under Section 01720.

B. Contractor provide digital video recording (DVR) in four (4) copies of each training session and each equipment demonstration session required to be conducted by Contractor below for submittal to AAFES and MacDill AFB BCE at Final Closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01720 and as follows.

1. Training and demonstration of Food Service Equipment and other major AAFES furnished equipment items will be performed by AAFES.

2. Training and demonstration of Fire Alarm, Mass Notification, Sprinkler System, Hood Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical and Communications systems equipment items shall be provided by Contractor and shall be recorded for submittal as indicated in Paragraph 1.4, B. above.

C. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to AAFES and Installation personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection.

D. Demonstrate project equipment by a qualified representative who is knowledgeable about the project.

E. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months.

F. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction.


G. Review contents of operation and maintenance manuals with AAFES and Installation personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

H. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time at designated location.

I. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

J. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual Sections but in no case less than 1-hour for each unit or group of units demonstrated.

1.5 TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING

A. AAFES will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 15990.

C. Reports shall be submitted by the independent firm to the Contracting Officer and designated representative indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.



END 01650.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01700 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Substantial Completion.

B. Final Inspections.

C. Closeout Submittals.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. General Provisions of the Contract: Final Acceptance and Payment.

B. Section 01340 – Submittals.

C. Section 01650 – Systems Startup.

D. Section 01710 – Cleaning.

E. Section 01720 – Project Record Documents.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

A. Contractor:

1. Submit written certification to Contracting Officer that project, or designated portion of Project, is substantially complete.

2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected.

B. Contracting Officer will make an inspection after receipt of certification.

C. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is substantially complete:

1. Contractor shall prepare, and submit to Contracting Officer, a list of items to be completed or corrected, as determined by the inspection.

2. Contracting Officer will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion, containing:

a. Date of Substantial Completion. b. Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified, and amended by

Contracting Officer. c. The time within which Contractor shall complete or correct work of listed items. d. Time and date AAFES will assume possession of work or designated portion

thereof. e. Responsibilities of AAFES and Contractor for:

1.) Utilities. 2.) Operation of mechanical, electrical, and other systems. 3.) Maintenance and cleaning. 4.) Security.

f. Signatures of:

1.) Contracting Officer. 2.) Contractor.


3. AAFES occupancy of project or designated portion of project:

a. Contractor shall perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01710. b. AAFES will occupy project, under provisions stated in Certificate of Substantial

Completion.

4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time.

D. Should Contracting Officer consider that work is not substantially complete:

1. He shall immediately notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor: Complete work, and send second written notice to contracting officer,

certifying that project, or designated portion of project, is substantially complete. 3. Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.4 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall submit written certification that:

1. Contract documents have been reviewed. 2. Project has been inspected for compliance with contract documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Facility Representatives and

are operational. 5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection.

B. Contracting Officer will make final inspection after receipt of certification.

C. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is finally complete in accordance with requirements of contract documents, he shall request contractor to make project closeout submittals.

D. Should the Contracting Officer consider that work is not finally complete:

1. He shall notify contractor, in writing, stating reasons. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send

second written notice to the Contracting Officer certifying that work is complete. 3. The Contracting Officer will reinspect work.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Project Record Documents: Specified requirements of Section 01720.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three “D” side ring binders with durable plastic covers.

B. Prepare binder set covers with printed title "Operation and Maintenance Manuals", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.

C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on 20 pound white paper, in three parts as follows:


1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.

2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section.

a. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers.

b. Identify the following:

1.) Significant design criteria. 2.) List of equipment. 3.) Parts list for each component. 4.) Operating instructions. 5.) Value chart. 6.) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 7.) Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

8.) End user agreement(s) and software license(s) where applicable.

3. Part 3: All test reports indicated and performed during course of Project including AAFES independent testing laboratory reports and those specified to be performed by Contractor’s own testing agencies or forces.

4. Part 4: Project documents and certificates, including the following:

a. All A/E reviewed, Contractor approved shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties. e. Training Sessions attendance roster.

E. Submit five (5) copies of the operation and maintenance manuals as follows:

1. Contracting Officer: One (1) copy. 2. AAFES General Manager: Two (2) copies. 3. MacDill AFB BCE: Two (2) copies.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION:

A. The Contractor shall provide, at his expense, manufacturer's representatives to completely check out all mechanical and electrical systems and items covered by the drawings and specifications.

B. This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to, and during the initial start up.

C. After all systems are functioning properly, the representatives shall instruct Facility Maintenance Personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of each item.

D. In addition to instructions given at the project, the Facility Maintenance Personnel shall be given a classroom instruction course on operation and maintenance of the systems. Training sessions shall be limited to four (4) continuous hours where practical.

E. Schedule additional four (4) hour sessions as required.


1.8 WARRANTY AND EXTENDED WARRANTIES:

A. Upon completion of project and prior to final payment Contractor shall furnish warranties as required by Contract and technical Sections of Specifications.

1. Contractor shall fully warrant all labor and materials for a full year following Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance of the Project by the Contracting Officer as required by the Contract for Construction in compliance with requirements set forth in Exhibit F of the Solicitation Package.

2. All applicable products, materials, systems and equipment entering into the Work shall be warranted by the manufacturer’s standard commercial warranty for a period of not less than one (1) year.

3. In addition to the standard warranty there are products, materials, systems and equipment designated in the Technical Sections of the specifications that shall be warranted beyond one (1) year.

a. Refer to Technical Sections for extended warranties beyond one (1) year. b. Provide manufacturer’s fully executed warranty for specified period,

commencing on date of Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance, covering items listed.

4. All warranties shall be properly executed in four copies (1 original and 3 copies) by Contractor and submitted in conjunction with the O & M Manuals at Project Closeout for distribution to AAFES and MacDill AFB BCE.

B. Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation assumed under contract.

C. Submit guarantee covering entire project for one year.

D. Submit separate extended warranties and guarantees for portions of work where Technical Sections of the specifications require longer periods of time.

1. Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods on these items.

E. Guarantees shall become valid and operative upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection and Acceptance by AAFES.

F. Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage is a result of abuse, neglect by AAFES, or his successor(s) in interest.

1.9 DD FORM 1354:

A. Preparation of DD Form 1354 "Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property":

1. At the conclusion of the project the Contractor will compile and furnish to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer cost information and quantity data:

a. Itemized list of structures, building elements and systems, including quantities of materials, that were demolished.

b. Itemized list of new structures, building elements and systems, including quantities of materials, that were furnished and installed under this project.

2. A list of items for which the costs and quantity data are required will be furnished to the Contractor.


B. Such information shall be returned to the Architect-Engineer and Contracting Officer within 10 days from the receipt of the list.

C. Architect-Engineer will prepare and submit a copy of DD Form 1354 to the Contracting Officer for transmittal to MacDill AFB BCE office at completion of Project.

1. Point of contact: Geralyn Lee, Real Estate Manager 2. E-mail: Phone number: 813-828-4260

D. DD Form 1354 Attachments:

1. Department of Defense Instruction, Form 4165.40. 2. Suggested Instructions for Preparing DD Form 1354. 3. Checklist for Buildings Info for DD Form 1354 & Real Property Card. 4. Transfer and Acceptance of Military Real Property, DD Form 1354.



END 01700.

HQ Army & Air Force Exchange Service Design Criteria Manual EXHIBIT J

1


2


3

SUGGESTED INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARING DD FORM 1354 (TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY)

1. The page number and the total number of pages comprising each transfer shall be shown in the space provided at the top

right-hand part of the form. 2. When two or more pages are required, Items 27 through 29 shall be completed only on the final page. In such cases, the

bottom portion of the form shall be torn off of all pages, except the final page, at the line above Items 27 and 28. ITEM 1 - Self – explanatory ITEM 2 - Primarily for Navy use, the district number will be assigned by area or district public works office in accordance with coding pattern set forth in NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 6. For Army use, enter appropriate Army Engineer district where construction is performed and/or from which the transfer is made. For transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter appropriate Army Engineer district or the district number assigned by area, or Naval district public works office from which the construction transfer is made. ITEM 4 - For Navy use only, see NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 5. ITEM 5 - Enter date of preparation. ITEM 6 – For Army use, enter appropriate Army job and directive number. For Air Force use, enter base job number, as appropriate, when form is used for transfer within the Air Force. ITEM 7 – For Army use, or for transfer of construction to the Air Force, enter separate series of numbers, by fiscal year, for each installation to which real property is transferred; e.g., for FY 1962 show 62-1, 62-2, etc. For Navy use, this serial number will be assigned by respective area or district public works office and will represent the numerical sequence of submissions by respective contract number. ITEM 8 – Insert appropriate contract number. ITEM 9 – Self-explanatory. ITEM 10 – 12: Instructions for Items 2,3 and 4 apply. (not applicable for Air For Use.) ITEM 13 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to or used by the activity named in accordance with Item 9. See NAVEXOS P-1570, par. 3805-7, Item 10. ITEM 14 – For Navy use only. Insert the accounting number assigned to the activity performing the official property accounting for the activity shown in Item 9. See NAVCompt Manual, Vol. 2, Chapter 5, for accounting numbers. ITEM 15 – Insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (A) to indicate whether the transfer involves new construction, existing facilities or capital improvements to existing facilities. If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. Additionally, insert an “X” in the appropriate box of block (B) to indicate whether transfer is being made at time of beneficial occupancy, physical completion or financial completion (with respect to new construction). If the “other” category is used, explain in remarks, Item 31. ITEM 16 – Enter the code number assigned to identify the project with the appropriate construction authorization law. ITEM 17 – Each single entry will be identified as an item number and this item number will be shown in this column. ITEM 18 – 19: Category Code and Description. Enter the category code and description (see DoD Instruction 4165.3 (reference (a) ) or attachment 1 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)) that appropriately describes the primary use for which the facility (buildings, structures, utilities) is designed. Not more than one category code (Item 18) will be listed as a line item (Item 17).


4

ITEM 20 – Number of Units in terms of buildings or other structures. ITEM 21 – Type – enter type of construction; i.e., “P” for permanent, “S” for semipermanent or “T” for temporary. ITEM 22 – Enter the unit of measure abbreviation, such as “SF” for square feet, etc. (see attachment 2 to enclosure 1 to DoD Instruction 4165.14 (reference (b)). ITEM 23 – Enter total quantity as described In Item 22. ITEM 24 –Indicate by item number, category code, and description the appropriate cost. In those instances where a document is prepared which lists items carrying costs which, in some cases, may be final and in others may be preliminary, each cost figure by line item will carry an alphabetical suffix of (P) for preliminary or (F) for final. ITEM 25 – 31: Self-explanatory. #First amendment (Ch 1, 7/28/67)

HQ

Arm

y &

Air

Fo

rce

Exc

han

ge

Ser

vice

Des

ign

Cri

teri

a M

anu

al

EX

HIB

IT J

TR

AN

SF

ER

AN

D A

CC

EP

TA

NC

E O

F M

ILIT

AR

Y R

EA

L P

RO

PE

RT

Y

PA

GE

O

F

PA

GE

S

1.

FR

OM

: (I

nsta

llatio

n/A

ctiv

ity/S

ervi

ce)

2.

O

PE

RA

TIN

G

UN

IT

3. D

IS

TR

ICT

C

OD

E

4. O

PE

R

AT

ING

A

GE

NC

Y

5. D

AT

E

6. J

OB

NU

MB

ER

7.

SE

RIA

L N

UM

BE

R

7. C

ON

TR

AC

T

NU

MB

ER

15.

TY

PE

OF

TR

AN

SA

CT

ION

1.

F

RO

M:

(Ins

talla

tion/

Act

ivity

/Ser

vice

) 2.

O

PE

RA

TIN

G

UN

IT

11.

DIS

-T

RIC

T

CO

DE

12.

OP

ER

A

TIN

G

AG

EN

CY

13. A

C

CO

UN

TIN

GN

UM

BE

R

14. A

C

CO

UN

T-

OF

FIC

E

NU

MB

ER

NE

W C

ON

ST

R

EX

IST

ING

FA

C

CA

PIT

AL

IM

P

OT

HE

R (

SP

EC

IFY

)

B

EN

F/O

P

HY

SIC

AL

C

OM

F

IN. C

OM

O

TH

ER

(S

PE

CIF

Y)

16.

PR

OJE

CT

N

UM

BE

R

ITE

M

NO

.

17

CA

TE

GO

RT

Y

CO

DE

18

FA

CIL

ITY

(c

ateg

ory

desc

riptio

n)

19

NO

. O

F

UN

ITS

20

TY

PE

21

UN

IT

OF

M

EA

S

22

TO

TA

L Q

UA

NT

ITY

23

CO

ST

24

DR

AW

ING

N

UM

BE

RS

25

RE

MA

RK

S

26

41

65

27.

STA

TE

ME

NT

OF

CO

MPL

ET

ION

: T

he f

acil

ites

list

ed h

ereo

n ar

e in

acc

orda

nce

with

map

s, d

raw

ings

, an

d sp

ecif

icat

ions

and

cha

nge

orde

rs a

ppro

ved

by th

e au

thor

ized

rep

rese

ntat

ive

of th

e us

ing

agen

cy e

xcep

t fo

r th

e de

fici

enci

es li

sted

on

the

reve

rse

side

.

28. A

CC

EP

TE

D B

Y (

Sig

natu

re)

DA

TE

TR

AN

SF

ER

RE

D B

Y (

Sig

natu

re)

Titl

e (A

rea

Eng

r./B

ase

Eng

r/ D

PW

O)

DA

TE

TIT

LE (

Pos

t E

ngr.

/Bas

e E

ngr.

/Nav

y R

ep.)

29

. PR

OP

ER

TY

V

OU

CH

ER

NU

MB

ER

DD

FO

RM

1 N

0V 6

1 135

4

SU

PE

RS

ED

ES

EN

G F

OR

MS

290

AN

D 2

90B

AN

D N

AV

DO

CK

S F

OR

M 2

317

4165.40 (Encl 1) Nov 14, 61

5 of 11


Page 6 of 11

30. CONSTRUCTION DEFICIENCIES

31. REMARKS

This form has been designed and issued for use in connection with the transfer of military real property between the military departments and to or form other government agencies. It supersedes ENG Forms 290 and 290B (formerly used by the Army and Air Force) and NAVDOCKS Form 2317 (formerly used by the Navy). Existing instruction issued by the military departments relative to the preparation of the three superseded forms are applicable to this form to the extent that the various items and

columns on the superseded forms have been retained. Additional instructions, as appropriate, will be promulgated by the military departments in connection with any new items appearing hereon. With the issuance of this DD form, it is not intended that the department shall revise and reprint manuals and directives simply to show the number of this DD form. Such action can be accomplished through the normal course of revision for other reasons.


Page 7 of 11

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 CATEGORY CODES: VERIFY FOR ARMY FACILITIES AND AIR FORCE FACILITIES OF THE SAME DESCRIPTION • • • (ABBREVIATION-NOMENCLATURE) * DESCRIPTION: ARMY AIR FORCE SHOPPING CENTER: (EXCH MAIN RETL) : 740-53 (EXCH SALES STORE) 740111 SHOPPETTE (EXCHANGE BRANCH) :740-50 (EXCH BRANCH) 740382 CLASS SIX (CLASS VI) :740-84 (BSE PACKAGE STORE) 740269 CAR CARE CENTER (EXCH SVC STA) :740-52 (EXCH SVC STN) 740383 BURGER KING (POST RESTAURANT) :740-64 (EXCH CAFE SNK BAR) 722345 CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST

1. BUILDING SQUARE FOOTAGE: A.RETAIL AREAS:___________SF B. ADMIN/EMPLOYEE AREA_________SF C. MPA:___________SF D. SERVICES ACTIVITIES: ____________________SF E. FOOD ACTIVITIES________SF. F. MALL/PUBLIC TOILETS: ___________________SF G. MERCH. EQUIP. RM______SF H. TOTAL BLDG:___________SF

2. BUILDING $ _____________________ (TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE LESS THE SUM OF THE FOLLOWING) 3. HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM $ _____________________ TOTAL:_________________TONS

(AR)826-11 OVER 100 TONS (AC PL OV 110 TN) (AF)826123 OVER 100 TONS (A/C PLT OVET 100 TN) (AR)826-12 26-100 TONS (AC PL-26-100 TN) (AF)826122 25-100 TONS (A/C PLT 25<100 TN) (AR)826-13 6-25 TONS (AC PL 6-25- TN) (AF)890121 5-25 TONS (A/C PL 5 TO 25 TN)

4. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (FIRE ALARM SYS) AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM $______________________

(AR)880-50 (AUTO SPNLKR SYS) (AF)880221 (AUTO FR DTECTN SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ FOAM FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (AR)880-60 (AUTO SPNKLR SYS) $______________________ (AF)980235 (DRY CHEM SYS) TOTAL:NUMBER OF HEADS______________ (AR)843-11 FIRE HYDRANTS $______________________ (AF)843315 (FR HYDR)

5. UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (INCLUDE. METER $______________________ (AR)812-42 UNGD ELEC DISTR) (AF) (SEC DISTR LNE UG) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:___________L.F OF____IN. CONDUIT AND_____________CONDUCTOR


Page 8 of 11

ITEMS FOR DD FORM 1354 (CONTINUED)

CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 6. ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER $______________________

(AR)813-60 (TRANSFORMER) (AF)812225 (PRIM DISTR LNE UG) PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER____________KVA

7. NATURAL GAS LINE TO BUILDING (INC. METER) $______________________ (AR)824-10 (GAS PIPE LIBE) (AF)824464 (GAS MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________)

8. UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE $______________________ (AR)..... (UNDG TELEPHONE) (AF)135583 (TEL DUCT FCLTY) (AF)890181 (UTIL LNE DUCTS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. CONDUIT

9. SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)832-10 (SANITARY SEWER) (AF)932267 (SAN SEWAGE MAIN) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING: ___________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL: _________________)

10. GREASE INTERCEPTOR $______________________ (AR)833-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) CAPACITY ___________GALLONS

11. STORM SEWER SYSTEM

(AR)871-10 (STORM SEWER) (AF)871183 (STRM DRN DSPL) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING:____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) TOTAL NUMBER OF DROP INLETS:___________

12. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM $______________________ (AR)842-10 (WATER PIPE LN P) (AF)842245 (WTR DISTR MAINS) TOTAL SERVICE TO BUILDING :____________L.F. OF________IN. PIPE (MATERIAL:_________________) (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER)

13. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM $______________________ (INCLUDING METER & BACK FLOW PREVENTER) (AR)871-30 (IRRIGATION FAC) TOTAL NUMBET OF HEADS_________________

14. DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE $______________________ (AR)833-12 (REFUSE COLL BLD) TOTAL AREA:_____________S.F.


Page 9 of 11


CATEGORY CODE DESCRIPTION COST 15. PAVING (NON ORGANIZATION VEHICLE PARKING) $______________________

(AR)852-15 (NON ORG VEH PRK) (AF)852262 (VEH PKING N/ORGN) TOTAL ASPHALT PAVING:___________S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL TOTAL CONCRETE PAVING:_________ S.Y. OF __________IN. THICK W/_______IN. ________________BASE MATERIAL

16. CONCRETE WALKS, SLABS & PADS $______________________ (AR)852-20 (SIDEWALK) (AF)852289 (SIDEWALK) PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC TOTAL AREA:____________S.F. (EXCLUDING PAVER TILES)

17. CONCRETE CURBS & GUTTERS $______________________ (AR)851-10 (ROADS PAVED) (AF)851143 (CURBS & GUTTERS) TOTAL AREA:____________L.F.

18. EXTERIOR SITE LIGHTING (EXT LIGHTING) $______________________ (AR)812-30 (EXT LIGHTING) (AF)812926 (EXTERIOR AREA LTG) TOTAL NUMBER OF POLES______________________

19. LANDSCAPING (RELATED LAND IMPROV NB) $______________________ (AR)871-75 (RELATED LAND INPROV NB)

20. GASOLINE DISPENSING SYSTEMS $______________________ (AR)411-90 (LOCAL DESCRIPTION) UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS: NUMBER OF TANKS:_____ SIZE:______ GALLONS NUMBER OF DISPENSERS:__________ NUMBER OF HOSES:_______________ CANOPY SIZE:______ SF $_________________ KIOSKS: NUMBER________MGFR____________ COST $ ____________________

21. CHAIN LINK FENCING (FENCE OR WALLS) $______________________ (AR)872-10 (FENCE OR WALLS) (AF)872248 (FENCE INTERIOR) TOTAL LINEAR FEET:_______________L.F.

22. TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COSTS: $______________________


Page 10 of 11


ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS H.V.A.C. UNITS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. EXHAUST FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. SUPPLY FANS # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ 1. 2. 3. 4. CHILLER BOILER HEAT PUMP ROOFTOP A/C UNITS DOCK LEVELERS DOCK SHELTERS ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PANELS / LIGHT FIXTURES ITEM NO MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER QUANTITY DESCRIPTION PLUMBING # MANUFACTURER MODEL # CAPACITY SERIAL # ___ WATER HEATER WATER CLOSET WATER CLOSET (H.C.) URINAL LAVATORY LAVATORY (H.C.) FLOOR SINKS(___#) FLOOR DRAINS(___#) MOP SINK ROOF DRAINS (___#)


Page 11 of 11


ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUIRED

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS FOR FOOD ACTIVITIES ANSUL CHEMICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM TYPE OF SYSTEM:____________ TOTAL NUMBER OF: HEADS_________ AUTOMAN RELEASE_________ REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATIONS___________ SNAP ACTION ASSEMBLIES__________________ MECHANICAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES________’

ITEMS REQUIRED IN CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS 1. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S TESTING / TRAINING REPORTS: A. TEST AND BALANCE REPORT ON MECHANICAL SYSTEMS B. CERTIFICATION OF GROUNDING (RESISTANCE) POWER TRANSMISSION C. INSTRUCTION / TRAINING SESSIONS ON ALL MECH/ELEC/EQUIPMENT (INCLUDING PARTICIPANTS’ ROSTER) 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY 3. ROOF(S) WARRANTY 4. ELECTRIC WARRANTY 5. HVAC WARRANTY 6. GREENHOUSE WARRANTY 7. TERMITE PROTECTION GUARANTEE 8. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT ON “NO ASBESTOS BEARING MATERIALS” USED IN CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01710 – AAFES CLEANING

CLEANING 01710-1

1 GENERAL


A. Progress Cleaning.

B. Final Cleaning.


A. General Provisions of the Contract.


C. Section 01045 – Cutting and Patching.

D. Section 01590 – Field Office and Storage Sheds.

E. Technical Sections of the Specifications – Cleaning Requirements.

1.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the following safety and insurance standards:

1. The Corps of Engineers Manual, EM 385-1-1, latest edition, entitled: "General Safety Requirements", as referred to in General Provisions, Paragraph: Accident Prevention.

B. O.S.H.A. Standards:

1. The Contractor shall be required to comply with OSHA Standards. 2. The OSHA Standards are subject to change, and such changes may affect the

Contractor in his performance under the contract. 3. It is the Contractor's responsibility to know such changes, effective dates of changes,

and comply with all requirements.

C. Hazards Control:

1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. 2. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during the use of volatile or noxious substances.

D. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.

1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the installation. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm

or sanitary drains. 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned.

CLEANING 01710-2

B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Execute cleaning to ensure that the building, grounds, and public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.

B. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

C. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.

D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at public or private dumping areas off of Government property in accordance with Sections 01420.

E. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.

1. Do not drop or throw materials from heights. 2. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted.

G. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ professional cleaners for final cleaning.

B. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and of concealed spaces.

C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, temporary labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated to shine; finish vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

D. Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.

E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

F. Broom clean and power wash paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

G. Clean all glass.

H. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction.

I. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils, if air H.V.A.C. units were operated without filters during construction.

J. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by AAFES.

END 01710.

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01720 – AAFES PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Section 01340 – Submittals.

B. Section 01650 – System Start-up.

C. Section 01700 – Project Closeout.

1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain at job site, one copy of:

1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Reviewed Shop Drawings. 5. Change Orders. 6. Other Modifications to Contract. 7. Field Test Records.

B. Store documents in field office apart from documents used for construction.

C. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.

D. File documents in accordance with Project Filing Format of Uniform Construction Index.

E. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition.

F. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

G. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.3 MARKING DEVICES

A. Provide red colored pencils for all marking.

1.4 RECORDING

A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT" in 2 inch high printed letters.

B. Keep record documents current.

C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.

D. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction.

1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level. 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced

to permanent surface improvements.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-2

3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of structure.

4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by change order or field order. 6. Details not on original contract drawings.

E. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark up each section to record:

1. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. 2. Other matters not originally specified.

1.5 SUBMITTAL

A. Transmit one (1) complete edited set of As-Built Record Document mark-ups to the Architect-Engineer for review.

1. Resubmit until Architect-Engineer approves Documents for use in developing electronic copies for distribution.

B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:

1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Title and number of each record document. 5. Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate. 6. Signature of Contractor, or his authorized representative.

C. Architect-Engineer will correct original Drawing and Project Manual files using Contractor furnished mark-ups.

D. Architect-Engineer will deliver corrected As-Build Record Documents to Contracting Officer and MacDill AFB BCE.

1. AAFES:

a. Two (2) sets. b. One (1) CD.

2. MacDill AFB: Two (2) sets. END 01720.

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02070 – Selective Demolition

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide phased selective demolition of designated exterior elements as indicated in preparation for new roof patching, building construction and site work:

a. Roof elements:

1.) Rooftop exhaust fans for patching roof including:

a) Electrical and control circuits and conduit b) Disconnect switches. c) Equipment curbs.

2.) Rooftop gravity vents for patching roof including:

a) Equipment curbs.

3.) Rooftop condensing units for interior coolers and freezers for patching roof including related:

a) Refrigerant piping. b) Electrical and control circuits and conduit. c) Disconnect switches, boxes and pipe portal. d) Lighting protection system including air terminals and main

conductors. e) Equipment support stands.

4.) Supply air fans:

a) Electrical and control circuits and conduit. b) Equipment curbs.

5.) Make-up air unit:

a) Electrical and control circuits and conduit. b) Disconnect switch. c) Condensate line. d) Equipment curb.

6.) Heat pump unit:

a) Electrical and control circuits and conduit. b) Disconnect switch. c) Refrigerant line set. d) Equipment supports.

7.) Pipe penetrations for patching roof.

a) Power/pipe portals. b) Plumbing vents.

8.) Exhaust fan termination.

a) Round sheet metal duct. b) Rain cap.


9.) Natural gas piping:

a) Pipe support stands.

10.) Prepare roof areas to receive patching where equipment was removed including:

a) Remove all curb and support flashings, cant strips and pipe penetration flashings where equipment curbs, supports, pipe portals and pipe penetrations occur in areas designated for demolition.

b) Cut and spud back existing modified bitumen cap sheet and layered roofing felts to top of insulation sufficiently to provide new lap splices in built-up roofing membrane for patching.

c) Cut and remove roof insulation to top of structural roof deck to facilitate patching deck with new materials.

d) Clean and prepare structural roof deck to receive new support angles or cold-formed reinforcing channels as indicated.

11.) Prepare new openings for installation and flashing of new roof curbs and pipe/power portals including, but not limited to:

a) Cut and spud back existing modified bitumen cap sheet and layered roofing felts to top of insulation sufficiently to provide new lap splices in built-up roofing membrane for patching and new flashing.

b) Cut and remove roof insulation to top of structural roof deck to facilitate equipment and pipe/power portal curb anchorage and subsequent patching.

c) Cut and remove structural roof deck between bar joists for new equipment ductwork and installation of power and piping to units.

d) Clean and prepare structural roof deck to receive new support angles or cold-formed reinforcing channels as indicated.


1.) Electrical circuits, raceways, building mounted lighting and other work related to building areas being demolished.

2.) Canopy roofs, awnings, supporting members and flashings. 3.) Ground mounted walk-in refrigeration equipment including power and

piping disconnects. 4.) Treated wood posts, 1 x treated slats, gate and hardware at wood

framed CO2 tank screen wall. 5.) Distribution piping related to CO2 tank. 6.) Brick masonry screen wall and related concrete substructure. 7.) Hollow metal entry doors, frames and hardware. 8.) Face brick and non-load bearing concrete masonry. 9.) Cold-formed metal stud exterior wall construction. 10.) Solarium structure and related mechanical room:

a) Solarium glazing and framing system. b) Sheet metal roof/wall counter flashings, roof/wall flashings,

parapet copings and Solarium sill flashings. c) Sheet metal roofing, plywood sheathing and steel roof deck on

Mechanical Room. d) Brick masonry walls at Mechanical Room and Solarium sill wall

in entirety to top of foundation/footing system.


e) Gypsum board wall and header finishes to expose metal header

studs and structural steel framing. f) Selective demolition of all non-load resisting cold-formed metal

stud framing at structural header and columns. g) Sawcut ± 2'-0" south of original floor transition joint. h) Concrete Solarium floor slab and thickened slab edge of original

building. i) Mechanical Room and Solarium foundation walls and footings in

entirety. j) Prepare all newly exposed surfaces and opening to receive new

infill construction.

c. Site elements:

1.) Electrical circuits, raceways, site lighting and other work related to site preparation for new construction indicated.

2.) Pipe bollards and footings to 3’-0” below grade. 3.) Pipe column supported, slab mounted canopy structure. 4.) Freestanding, medium temperature, walk-in cooler, including related:

a) Refrigerant piping. b) Electrical circuit and conduit. c) Disconnect switch and boxes. d) Condensing unit.

5.) Condensing units for interior coolers and freezers including related:

a) Refrigerant piping. b) Electrical circuit and conduit. c) Disconnect switch and boxes.

6.) Sawcut and remove designated paving indicated, including:

a) Cast-in-place sidewalks. b) Cast-in-place concrete curbs. c) Cast-in-place concrete receiving slabs. d) Cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade. e) Cast-in-Place concrete stoop slabs and substructure. f) Bituminous concrete paving. g) Unsuitable base course and sub-base materials and prepare

sub-grade to receive new compacted base course.

7.) All equipment pads related to demolished ground mounted equipment.

8.) Palm tree, related root ball and shallow root system completely to a minimum depth of 4'-0" below new finish grade.

2. Phased selective demolition of designated interior building elements indicated including but not limited to:

a. Electrical work:

1.) Lighting fixtures, circuits and conduit. 2.) Power devices, circuits and conduit. 3.) Disconnect switches. 4.) Transformers. 5.) Power distribution panels and feeders. 6.) Hardwired Food Service equipment disconnects.


7.) Food concept signage disconnects. 8.) FA, MN and other special system devices and circuits. 9.) Other Electrical work commensurate with scope of demolition.

b. Mechanical work:

1.) HVAC equipment. 2.) Kitchen hoods and related fire suppression systems. 3.) Diffusers and grilles. 4.) Ductwork. 5.) Condensers. 6.) Thermostat and control wiring. 7.) Other Mechanical work commensurate with scope of demolition.

c. Plumbing work:

1.) Hard piped Food Service equipment disconnects. 2.) Plumbing fixtures. 3.) Floor drains. 4.) Above and below slab supply, waste and vent piping. 5.) Grease trap. 6.) Natural gas piping. 7.) Refrigeration line sets. 8.) Other Plumbing work commensurate with scope of demolition.

d. Sprinkler work:

1.) Isolation and temporary shutdown of branch lines for demolition. 2.) Heads and drops. 3.) Piping.

e. Wall graphics, vinyl base and corner guards. f. Wainscot panels and wall end caps. g. Metal lockers. h. Equipment, fixtures and accessories not designated for temporary removal,

storage and reinstallation in new construction. i. Food service equipment not removed, salvaged and stored by AAFES

personnel. j. Doors and frames. k. Serving counters, countertops and casework. l. Walk-in cooler/freezers. m. ACT ceiling, grid and suspension system. n. Suspended gypsum board ceiling and suspension system. o. Structural concrete Mechanical loft floor, framing and metal ladder. p. Stud and gypsum drywall partitions and soffits. q. Stud and gypsum drywall column covers. r. Wall furring and gypsum drywall or other finishes to face of masonry

substrates. s. Ceramic wall tile and gypsum drywall to face of studs or furring. t. Fiberglass reinforced panel and gypsum drywall to face of studs or furring. u. Gypsum drywall to face of studs or furring. v. Brick masonry partitions and related footing/foundation to 12" minimum below

floor slab. w. Shoring and brick masonry/metal stud framing. x. Shoring and load bearing concrete masonry wall. y. Clay paver tile, quarry tile and ceramic tile floor finishes. z. Vinyl composition floor tile, base and mastic.


aa. Asbestos floor tile, base and mastic. bb. Floors and concrete floor slabs:

1.) Sawcut and remove clay paver tile, quarry tile, ceramic tile and mortar setting beds in preparation to receive new topping and finish flooring.

2.) Sawcut and remove Mall floor slabs for complete replacement:

a) All Mall floor slab demolition operations shall be conducted at night between the hours of 1900 and 0700 as indicated on the Phased Construction Plan and Schedule.

b) Sawcut and remove perimeter ceramic tile and setting bed or full thickness terrazzo substrate adjacent to wall construction to remain as indicated to facilitate sawcut and removal of original concrete floor slab

c) Sawcut perimeter of original concrete floor slab adjacent to wall construction to remain and remove concrete in entirety in preparation to receive new compacted base course, vapor barrier and reinforced concrete floor slab to receive polished finish.

3.) Sawcut and remove floor finishes and concrete slab-on-grade for new under-slab sanitary sewer piping.

3. Contractor provide temporary removal, storage and protection of designated exterior and interior building elements as indicated for reinstallation in new construction.

a. Roof:

1.) Lightning protection system:

a) Air terminals and related pitch pockets. b) Cable clamping devices for connections and grounding. c) Braided cabling.

2.) Antennas:

a) Data/communication. b) Cabling and other miscellaneous roof mounted communication

and signal sending/receiving equipment.

b. Site:

1.) CO2 tank for reinstallation in new construction.

c. Building:

1.) All Optometry equipment including, but not limited to:

a) Examination chairs. b) Eye examination equipment.

2.) All Optical fixtures and equipment including, but not limited to:

a) Reception desk. b) Eye glass fitting tables. c) Eye glass display casework.

3.) Barber Shop fixtures, furnishings and equipment including, but not limited to:

a) POS station and equipment. b) Waiting chairs.


c) Barber chairs. d) Back counters, sinks and trim. e) Wall mounted mirrors.

B. Option Proposals 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5: If Options area awarded as set forth in detail in Section 01015, and subject to Base Bid requirements, Contractor provide:

1. Option Proposal 1: Additional demolition of roof, site and exterior building elements at North Retail Entry including but not limited to:

a. Temporary removal, storage and protection of designated wall mounted building signage including:

1.) Wall mounted building entry identification signage for reinstallation in new location while maintaining interior circuiting, raceway and power supplies for extension to new sign location.

2.) Wall mounted pylon sign for reinstallation in new location while maintaining interior circuiting, raceway and power supply for extension to new sign location.

b. Exterior electrical components related to wall mounted building signage. c. Electrical circuits, raceways and canopy lighting in entirety related to

elements being demolished. d. Asbestos modified bitumen built-up roofing system, flashings and related

sheet metal coping abatement on exterior entry canopy. e. Additional roof elements including copings, base flashings, roofing and other

roof related items indicated. f. Additional concrete sidewalk site paving, base course and unsuitable sub-

base materials and other site related elements indicated. g. Additional building elements including:

1.) Entry canopy in entirety:

a) Suspended plaster ceiling and vent extrusions. b) Roof drain, leader and downspout and permanently cap below

grade. c) Aluminum clad fascia and fascia framing. d) Structural roof deck and all roof framing members. e) Structural columns. f) Footings and substructure.

2.) Designated portion of cantilevered brick masonry canopy over entry in entirety:

a) Suspended plaster soffit ceiling and vent extrusions. b) Sheet metal coping covers. c) Built-up modified bitumen roofing and base flashing with granular

cap sheet including cant strips and roof insulation. d) Face brick. e) Parapet wall framing, perimeter channel and wood blocking. f) Structural steel beams, bracing and ledger angles. g) Steel roof deck. h) Cleanly sawcut cantilevered joist ends and cantilevered

structural steel beam to receive new construction.

3.) Designated face brick along west exterior wall return to entry door sidelight.

h. Prepare all newly exposed surfaces to receive new entry portal construction.


2. Option Proposal 2: Additional demolition of exterior and interior building and site related elements at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture entry) including but not limited to:

a. Temporary removal, storage and protection of wall mounted Food Court pylon sign and power supply for reinstallation in new location.

b. Removal of wall mounted entry identification sign including power supplies and deliver to AAFES designate on-site storage area while maintaining interior circuiting and raceway for extension to new sign location.

c. Removal of glazing, automatic entry door package including transom and deliver to AAFES designated on-site storage area while maintaining interior power and control wiring circuiting and raceway for extension to new automatic entry door.

d. Exterior electrical components related to wall mounted entry identification sign.

e. All electrical components related to wall mounted Food Court pylon sign. f. Electrical circuits, raceways and lighting in entirety related to elements being

demolished and not salvaged. g. Additional roof elements including roof edge fascia gutter apron, gutter,

downspout, roof edge flashings, roofing and other roof related items indicated.

h. Additional concrete sidewalk site paving, base course and unsuitable sub-base materials and other site related elements indicated including exterior aluminum pipe railing in entirety at west side of entry.

i. Sheet metal caps, original precast concrete caps and brick masonry at each of four concrete masonry pilasters indicated on either side of grid row 1/J.

j. Face brick, non-load bearing concrete masonry wall construction, steel lintels and one concrete masonry pilaster indicated directly west of grid row 1/J.

k. Additional interior building elements including, but not limited to:

1.) Stud and gypsum drywall partitions and soffits. 2.) Ceramic tile floor finish. 3.) Grind full thickness terrazzo flooring and concrete floor slab to receive

new topping.

l. Prepare all newly exposed surfaces and opening to receive new entry portal construction.

3. Option Proposal 3: Additional demolition of site paving and related elements as indicated between the original 1972 Commissary Building and the original 1978 Exchange Building in the east-west direction and from the intersection of Royal Tern Avenue and Blackbird Street to the south side of base bid work at the new Furniture Receiving and the south side of the existing 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition including but not limited to:

a. Protect existing building, entrances and site elements to remain. b. Maintain pedestrian delivery access/egress to and from existing entries at the

south side of the existing 1978 Exchange Building (new Furniture Receiving) and the south side of the 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition (UPS and GNC) between the hours of 1900 and 0700 by construction of barriers, directional signage and protection for delivery personnel, AAFES staff and others using entrances.

c. Maintain protected pedestrian egress from required emergency egress doors on east side of the 1978 Exchange Building Retail area to an area of safe refuge in compliance with NFPA 101 and as approved by Contracting Officer, MacDill AFB Fire Chief and designated representatives.


d. Sawcut and demolish concrete sidewalk, stoop slabs, parking slabs, related substructure, sidewalks, equipment pads and base course as indicated between edges of existing asphalt paving and adjacent to exterior walls or new construction at existing buildings:

1.) Original 1972 Commissary Building (Food Court) 2.) Original 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition Building (UPS and GNC). 3.) Stoop slab at original 1978 Exchange Building (Center Mall), north of

the Pharmacy Addition (UPS and GNC).

e. Asphalt paving and base course.

1.) North-south direction: From intersection of roadways indicated above and the following exterior building walls:

a) South wall of the original 1978 Exchange Building (Center Mall) at column grid row F.2.

b) South edge of existing concrete sidewalk adjacent to the original 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition (UPS and GNC) at column grid row E.1.

c) South edge of new base bid Receiving slab adjacent to existing 1978 Exchange Building (Furniture) adjacent to column grid row D.8.

2.) East-west direction: From between the following exterior building walls:

a) West wall of the original 1972 Commissary Building (Food Court) at column grid row F.2.

b) East wall the original 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition (UPS and GNC) at column grid row 10.7.

c) East wall of the original 1978 Exchange Building (Furniture) adjacent to column grid row 10.

d) East edge of existing emergency exit slab at east wall of original 1978 Exchange Building (Retail) adjacent to column grid row 9.

4. Option Proposal 4: Additional demolition to replace additional under slab sanitary sewer piping as indicated in the new Women’s Public Toilet, Optometry/Optical, south Food Concept Preparations areas, and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms behind the new Food Court including but not limited to:

a. Demolish existing concrete floor slabs and under slab sanitary sewer piping including, but not limited to:

1.) Protect existing construction elements to remain. 2.) Sawcut and remove designated concrete floor slab construction. 3.) Excavate and remove base course and pipe bedding to expose

existing sanitary sewer piping. 4.) Remove sanitary sewer piping, crumb trenches and establish new

subgrade to match existing in preparation for replacement with new piping.

5. Option Proposal 5: Additional demolition of boiler and pumps as indicated to replace the existing heating boiler and associated pumps located in the MPA behind the Main Store Retail area including but not limited to:

a. Disconnect boiler and pumps from utility supply lines:

1.) Electrical power supplies. 2.) Natural gas piping.


b. Disconnect breeching as directed by MacDill AFB BCE. c. Isolate boiler and pumps from heating hot water loop. d. Drain boiler and pumps into separate reservoir and retain existing water for

refilling new system. e. Remove and dispose of boiler, pumps and related components no longer

needed.

C. Temporary Barriers:

1. Contractor shall provide full containment dust barriers as specified in Section 01500 for all demolition work to prevent infiltration of dust and debris into occupied spaces of the building.

2. Contractor shall take special precautions during Mall related floor demolition work to control dust, water and debris including, but not limited to:

a. Construction of substantial and durable full containment dust barriers to cordon off Mall areas and adjacent Mall Service/Concession Shops prior to removal of any flooring.

b. Dust barriers shall be sealed at all wall and ceiling surfaces with all joints made completely impenetrable to fugitive dust, debris and water escaping from confined area into occupied areas of the building.

D. Each Subcontractor:

a. Provide temporary shoring, bracing, underpinning and other means necessary to protect existing structure and building elements to remain during demolition of their respective parts.

b. Coordinate phasing of Work with Contracting Officer or designated representative and AAFES Store Manager to minimize disturbance of normal operation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01010 – Project Summary. 2. Section 01015 – Option Proposals. 3. Section 01420 – Environmental Protection-AAFES. 4. Section 02083 – Asbestos Abatement. 5. Section 02181 – Hazardous Waste Stream Assessment. 6. Section 02300 – Earthwork. 7. Section 02750 – Site Concrete Work. 8. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 9. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 10. Section 06100 – Carpentry. 11. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 12. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 13. Section 09300 – Tile. 14. Section 09510 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings. 15. Section 09650 – Resilient Flooring. 16. Section 09900 – Carpet. 17. Division 15 – Mechanical. 18. Division 16 – Electrical.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule in accord with Sections 01310 and 01340.


B. Submit record drawings in accord with 01720.

1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. This Project shall require phased construction in order to maintain operation at all times during construction activities.

B. This Project will be constructed at an occupied military retail facility:

1. AAFES will occupy the entire facility for the purpose of normal operations during construction of Work.

2. Contractor shall be required to phase construction in order to maintain normal operations at all times during construction activities.

C. AAFES has performed, or caused to be performed, inspection, sampling and testing within the areas of the building anticipated to be disturbed under the scope of this Project for hazardous materials with inspection, sampling and testing performed 04 and 13 January 2017 by Greenfield Environmental, Inc., 432 3rd Street North, St. Petersburg, Florida.

1. Inspection, sampling and testing determined that the following areas of Asbestos Containing Materials will be disturbed as set forth in the "Report of the NESHAP Limited Renovation Survey, Sampling and Evaluation of Asbestos-Containing Materials" found bound in this Project Manual under Section 02083, Asbestos Abatement.

a. Following are areas and materials identified as Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) that will be affected under Base Bid:

1.) Homogeneous Area HA 29 – 350 square feet of Gray vinyl floor tile over tan vinyl floor tile with yellow and black mastics located in the south BOH Receiving Area of the existing Food Court, Sample Numbers 50, 51 and 52:

a) Gray tile – No asbestos detected. b) Yellow mastic – No asbestos detected c) Tan tile – No asbestos detected. d) Black mastic – 3% Chrysotile Asbestos.

2.) Homogeneous Area HA 35 – 300 square feet of brown 12" x 12" vinyl floor tile with black mastic as a single layer located as a single layer in the Storage Room at the east end of the south BOH Receiving Area of the existing Food Court and at the bottom layers in the north and south offices of the south BOH Area, Sample Numbers 65, 66 and 67:

a) Floor tile – No asbestos detected. b) Mastic – 4% Chrysotile Asbestos.

b. Following are areas and materials identified as Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) that will be affected under Option Proposal 1:

1.) Homogeneous Area HA 60 – 75 square feet of black roof flashing material located at the west entry canopy roof flashing areas on the north side of the building (North Retail Entry), Sample Number PSI210_7/11:

a) Roof flashing – 10% Chrysotile Asbestos.


2.) Homogeneous Area HA 61 – 625 square feet of tar and gravel roofing system located at the west entry canopy roof and flashing areas on the north side of the building (North Retail Entry), Sample Number PSI211_7/11:

a) Black tar – 10% Chrysotile Asbestos. b) Gray insulation – No asbestos detected.

3.) Refer to the NESHAP Report Attachment bound at the end of Section 02083, Asbestos Abatement for additional detailed information regarding anticipated ACM that could be disturbed during performance of work on this Project.

2. A non-destructive assessment of the areas of the building anticipated to be disturbed under the scope of this Project was conducted in order to identify other potentially hazardous materials as set forth in the "Hazardous Waste Stream Assessment at the MacDill Aire force Base-Exchange Building (Furniture Store, Main Corridor, Food Court, Kitchen, UPS Store)” found bound in this Project Manual under Section 02181, Hazardous Waste Stream Assessment.

a. Following are the areas and materials identified in the waste stream assessment as potentially hazardous and shall require special precautions for legal demolition and disposal:

1.) Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's):

a) Lighting ballasts.

2.) Mercury Containing Lamps and Devices:

a) Fluorescent lamps. b) Exterior HID lamps. c) Mercury vapor lamps. d) Exit signs. e) Thermostat switches.

3.) Ozone Depleting Substances:

a) HVAC refrigerants. b) Walk-in cooler and freezer refrigerants. c) Electric water coolers.

4.) Other potentially hazardous materials identified:

a) Batteries. b) Hydraulic door closers. c) Fire extinguishers. d) Grease trap tanks. e) Lead plumbing vent flashings.

b. PCB ballasts shall be demolished, packaged, transported and disposed of as potentially hazardous waste in accordance with the requirements of MacDill AFB BCE Environmental and in strict compliance with State of Florida Rules and Regulations.

c. Mercury containing lamps and devices shall be demolished, packaged, transported and disposed of as potentially hazardous waste in accordance with the requirements of MacDill AFB BCE Environmental and in strict compliance with State of Florida Rules and Regulations.


d. Ozone depleting substances shall be legally recovered, transported and disposed of prior to demolition of any refrigeration equipment in accordance with the requirements of MacDill AFB BCE Environmental and in strict compliance with State of Florida Rules and Regulations.

3. No lead based paint materials were reported to be discovered within the area related to the scope of work.

D. If the Contractor encounters suspect ACM or LBP not identified in the NESHAP Report Attachment immediately notify MacDill AFB BCE Environmental and the Contracting Officer.

1. Immediately cease work until resolution is determined by MacDill AFB. 2. Advise Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing of the extent and

time delay anticipated where such materials are encountered.

E. Should the Contractor encounter suspect hazardous materials not identified above during performance of the Work, including asbestos or lead based paint materials, stop Work immediately.

1. Make immediate notifications to MacDill AFB and the Contracting Officer. 2. Refer to Sections 01010, 01022 and 01420 for information pertaining to encounter

of potentially hazardous materials.

F. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas.

G. Maintain protected and secure egress and access to site and building at all times.

H. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices in accord with Sections 01000, 01022, 01060, 01420 and 01500.

2. PRODUCTS (Not applicable.)

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Execute cutting and patching in accordance with these Specifications.

B. Erect and maintain secure weatherproof closures for exterior openings in accord with Section 01540.

C. Protect existing items not indicated to be demolished.

D. Disconnect and remove designated utilities within demolition areas and permanently cap services shown on drawings.

E. Mark location of disconnected utility services and indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents in accord with Section 01720.

3.2 SALVAGED ITEMS

A. Salvage designated items scheduled for reuse, store and protect from damage prior to restoration work.

B. Salvaged items shall be free from damage due to removal and storage operations at time of reinstallation in Work.


3.3 EXECUTION

A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner.

1. Protect supporting structural members and existing construction to remain. 2. Coordinate roof patching with requirements of Section 01500.

B. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site.

C. Remove materials to be salvaged and reinstalled or retained in manner to prevent damage.

1. Protect in a manner to maintain in original condition at time of construction. 2. Store salvaged items in accord with Section 01620.

D. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered in compliance with all regulatory requirements and laws, whether referenced herein or not.

E. Do not burn or bury materials on site.

F. Upon completion of work:

1. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. 2. Leave areas in clean condition. 3. Reinstall salvaged items as indicated.

END 02070.

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02083 – ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02083-1

MACDILL AIR FORCE BASE – EXCHANGE BUILDING

3108 NORTH BOUNDARY BOULEVARD TAMPA, FLORIDA

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Licensed persons who have received specialized training from an OSHA and/or EPA approved agency and licensed in the State of Florida to perform Asbestos Abatement Work as an Asbestos Abatement Contractor, herein referred to as the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor.

b. Coordination of all Work specified under this Section. c. Coordination and all Work specified under certain related Division 1,

General Requirements Sections:

1.) Notifications. 2.) Layout. 3.) Safety precautions. 4.) Schedules. 5.) Quality control responsibilities. 6.) Temporary construction barriers. 7.) Temporary utilities.

2. Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor provide:

a. Labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the completion of work specified under this Section in compliance with all applicable Federal, State and Local laws, rules and regulations.

b. All temporary construction, materials and equipment, beyond Contractor requirements for temporary construction barriers, necessary to establish work areas for the abatement of asbestos containing materials as defined and specified herein including, but not limited to:

1.) Airlocks. 2.) Containment barriers, critical barriers, primary and secondary

barriers and mini-containments. 3.) Clean rooms. 4.) Decontamination enclosure systems. 5.) Equipment decontamination enclosures. 6.) Equipment rooms. 7.) Holding areas. 8.) Shower rooms. 9.) Washrooms.

B. Option Proposal 1:

1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide additional Asbestos Abatement work to remove sheet metal copings, modified bitumen flashings and roofing system found to contain Asbestos over existing exterior entry canopy at North Retail Entry.


1.2 EXTENT OF WORK

A. The locations of asbestos containing materials were identified in the Greenfield Environmental, Inc. (GE) Asbestos Survey dated January 19, 2017 attached to this Section.

B. Existing Conditions: The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor undertaking the work under this Section is assumed to have visited the premises and to have taken into consideration all conditions that may affect his work.

1. No consideration will be given any claim based on lack of knowledge ofexisting conditions except where existing conditions are such as cannot bereadily ascertained.

2. Any claims relating to conditions, which were not readily ascertainable, shall beadjusted as provided for changes in the work.

C. Quantities and locations of Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) indicated and the extent of Work included in this Section are estimates that are limited by the physical constraints imposed by occupancy of the Building.

1. Variations on the order of 5% more or less shall be expected.2. Contractor and Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor are solely responsible for

verifying all quantities and locations of materials for this project.

D. The work specified herein shall be the removal of the asbestos and other hazardous material by licensed persons who have received specialized training from an OSHA, EPA approved agency and who are knowledgeable, qualified and trained in the removal, handling and disposal of asbestos material, and subsequent cleaning of the affected environment.

E. In the event the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor discovers a conflict in the Contract Documents and/or requirements or codes, the conflict shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and the Asbestos Project Manager (APM).

1. Whenever there is a conflict or overlap in requirements the most stringent shallapply.

2. Any actions taken by the Contractor or Asbestos Abatement Subcontractorwithout obtaining guidance from the Contracting Officer shall become the solerisk and responsibility of the Contractor.

3. All cost incurred due to such action are also the responsibility of theContractor.

F. The following materials were determined to be ACMs and will require abatement prior to the planned renovation activities:

1.) Mastic on VFT Option 1A: Approximately 350 square feet (Southwest Corridor Floor Area in the Kitchen)

2.) Mastic on VFT Option 1A: Approximately 300 square feet (Single Layer in the Southeast Storage Closet and at the Bottom Layers in the North and South Office Floors in the Kitchen)

3.) Black Roof Flashing Material Option 1B: Approximately 75 square feet (Western Entry Canopy Roof Flashing Areas on the North Side of the Structure)

4.) Tar and Gravel Roofing System Option 1B: Approximately 625 square feet (Western Entry Canopy Roof and Flashing Areas on the North Side of the Structure)


G. All asbestos abatement work shall be subject to inspection by representatives of the State of Florida, the Contracting Officer or designated representative in conjunction with the APM.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Quality control inspection and testing during Asbestos Abatement Work will be provided by an independent oversight consultant, referred to herein as the Asbestos Project Manager (APM), employed by the Architect-Engineer and paid for by AAFES.

B. Responsibilities of the APM, Testing Laboratory Services and specific requirements for performance of these services are set forth in this Section.

C. Temporary Facilities, Barriers and Controls:

1. Contractor shall be responsible for layout and provision of all temporaryconstruction partitions used in performance of the Work.

2. Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall be responsible for provision of alladditional barrier construction required for safety and protection of buildingoccupants from exposure to asbestos and as specified herein for theabatement of asbestos containing materials.

D. Temporary Utilities:

1. Contractor shall be responsible for provision or extension of all temporaryutilities used in performance of the Work.

2. Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall be responsible for provision of alladditional utilities or utility extensions and all equipment required for safety andprotection of building occupants from exposure to asbestos and as specifiedherein for the abatement of asbestos containing materials.

1.4 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of the operations of all trades, and/or materialmen engaged in the work of this Section,

B. Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor and personnel shall cooperate fully with the AAFES representative and APM to facilitate efficient use of Building and areas within the Building.

1. Provide proper coordination of the operations of all trades, and/or material menengaged in the Work of this Section and shall coordinate this Work with theConstruction Phasing Plan, Phased Construction Schedule and the BuildingContractor.

2. Comply with all applicable Federal, State and Local regulations andrequirements.

C. Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall be licensed in the State of Florida for Asbestos Abatement.

D. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor, by submitting proposal to the Contractor, acknowledges that he is aware of and familiar with the contents and requirements of the following regulations, codes, and standards and further acknowledges and agrees that he alone is responsible for performance of the work in strict compliance therewith and for every instance of failure to comply therewith.


E. Regulations, Codes, and Standards:

1. The current issue of each document shall govern.2. Where conflict among requirements or with these specifications exists, the

more stringent requirements shall apply.

F. Federal requirements that govern some aspect of asbestos abatement include, but ore not limited to the following regulations:

1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

a. Title 29 CFR 1926.1101 – Construction Standard for Asbestos.b. Title 29 CFR 1910.132 - Personal Protective Equipment.c. Title 29 CFR 1910.134 - Respiratory Protection.d. Title 29 CFR 1926 - Construction Industry Standards.e. Title 29 CFR 1910.20 - Access to Employee Exposure and Medical

Records.f. Title 29 CFR 1910.1200 - Hazard Communication.g. Title 29 CFR 1910.151 - Medical and First Aid.

2. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

a. 40 CFR 61 Subpart A and M (Revised Subpart B) - National EmissionStandard for Hazardous Air Pollutants - Asbestos.

b. 40 CFR 763.80 - Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA).

3. Department of Transportation (DOT) Title 49 CFR 100 - 185 – Transportation.

G. State of Florida Requirements that applies to the asbestos abatement work, disposal and clearance include, but are not limited to:

1. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall maintain one (1) copy EPA,OSHA, and Florida Department of the Environment Protection governing thework at the site available for review,

2. Licensing and notification requirements mandated by the State of Florida andEnvironmental Protection Commission of Hillsborough County shall be adheredto.

H. Standards:

1. Standards which govern asbestos abatement activities include, but are notlimited to, the following:

a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z9.2-79 – FundamentalsGoverning the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems Z88.2 -Practices for Respiratory Protection.

b. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)586-90 - UL Standard for Safety of HEPAfilter Units, 7th Edition.

I. Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor's Warranty:

1. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor warrants that he is familiar with thecodes applicable to the work and that he has the skill, knowledge,competence, organization, and plant to execute the work promptly andefficiently in compliance with the requirements of this Section.

2. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor, having the obligation to keep acompetent job supervisor on the work during its progress, employ only skilledmechanics, and enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees,is responsible for seeing that the work is installed in accordance with thisSection.


3. Failure or omission on the part of the Contracting Officer, designatedrepresentative or APM, either to discover or to bring to the attention of theContractor or Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor any deviation from, omissionfrom, or noncompliance with the Plans and Specifications:

a. Shall not be set up by the Contractor or Asbestos AbatementSubcontractor as defense for failure on his part to install the work inaccordance with this Section or for any other neglect to fulfillrequirements of this Section.

b. Nor shall the presence of any one, or all, of any of the foregoing at thesite or the fact that any one, or all, or any of the foregoing may haveexamined the work or any part of it be set up as defense by theContractor or Asbestos Abatement Contractor against a claim for failureon his part to perform the work in accordance with this Section or for anyneglect to fulfill the requirements of this Section.

J. Hold Harmless: The Contractor and Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall hold US Army, AAFES, the APM and Architect-Engineer harmless for any failure to comply with any applicable work, packaging, transporting, disposal, safety, health, or environmental requirement on the part of himself, his employees, or his sub-subcontractors.

K. Certificate of Workers Release: Each asbestos abatement worker or any other worker of other trades or supervisory personnel who enters the contaminated work area shall submit a Certificate of Worker's Release and a copy of their Florida photo identification to the Contracting Officer or designated representative and the APM.

L. Workers of Other Trades: No unauthorized personnel shall be admitted within the abatement area before Initial Clearance.

M. Safety:

1. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor alone shall be responsible for thesafety, efficiency, and adequacy of his plant, appliances, and methods, and forany damage, which may result from their improper construction, maintenance,or operation.

a. He shall erect and properly maintain at all times proper safeguards for theprotection of workmen and the public and shall post danger warningsagainst hazards created by the construction operations.

b. He shall designate a responsible member of his organization on the worksite, whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.

c. In the absence of notice to the contrary, filed in writing to the ContractingOfficer or designated representative and APM, this person shall be thejob supervisor of the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor.

2. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall assume all responsibility for anytoxic effects to workers of the air supplied to respirators or of encapsulant or ofwetting agents and the disposal of said agent and any residual toxic damagingresidues to personnel or property.

3. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall at all times enforce strictdiscipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ on thework force any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the work assigned to himnor anyone who has not received notice of the hazards of asbestos removaland training in use of respirators, safety procedures, equipment, clothing, andwork procedures.


4. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall at all times enforce personnelprotection equal to or better than the minimum standards established in otherparts of this Section.

5. The Williams-Steiger Occupational and Safety Health Act of 1970, asamended, shall be strictly complied with in the conduct of the work.

a. This Act shall govern the conduct of the Asbestos AbatementSubcontractor's workmen, tradesmen, materialmen, subcontractors andvisitors to the project site.

6. In order to protect the lives and health of his employees, the AsbestosAbatement Subcontractor shall comply with all pertinent provisions of the latestedition of the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction", issued by theAssociated General Contractors of America, Inc.

a. Maintain an accurate record of all accidents that occur on the Project.b. An injury or loss of life must be immediately reported by the Contractor

and Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor to the Contracting Officer ordesignated representative and APM.

c. A copy of the Contractor's and Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor’sreport to his insurer of an accident shall be furnished to the ContractingOfficer or designated representative and the APM.

7. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor, in coordination with the Contractor,shall provide and maintain during the construction period such pedestrianwalkways, construction hoists, temporary access ladders or construction stairs,temporary fences and safety guard rails as required or necessary to properlycomplete the work.

a. He shall provide and maintain such barricades, warning signs anddevices, temporary lighting and other safety measures to properly protectworkmen and the public.

N. Emergencies: In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property, the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Contracting Officer, designated representative or APM, is hereby permitted to act at his discretion to prevent such threatened loss or injury.

1.5 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN AND ARRANGEMENTS

A. A written Emergency Action Plan shall be developed by the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor prior to commencing abatement activities.

1. This Plan shall be agreed to by the Contracting Officer or designatedrepresentative, APM, Exchange personnel and the Installation.

2. The Plan shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.38 (a);(b).

B. Emergency procedures shall be in typewritten form and prominently posted and available in the regulated area.

1. Prior to entering the regulated area all personnel must read and sign theseprocedures to acknowledge understanding of the regulated area layout,location of emergency exits and emergency procedures.

C. Emergency planning shall include written notification of police, fire, and emergency medical personnel of planned abatement activities, work schedule and layout of regulated areas and particularly barriers that may affect response capabilities.


D. Emergency planning shall include consideration of fire, explosion, hazardous atmospheres, electrical hazards, slips/trips and falls, confined spaces, and heat stress illness.

1. Written procedures for response to emergency situations shall be developedand employee training in procedures shall be provided.

E. Employees shall be trained in regulated area/site evacuation procedures in the event of workplace emergencies.

1. For non life-threatening situations employees injured or otherwiseincapacitated shall decontaminate following normal procedures with assistancefrom fellow workers, if necessary, before exiting the regulated area to obtainproper medical treatment.

2. For life-threatening injury or illness, worker decontamination shall take leastpriority after measures to stabilize the injured worker, remove them from theregulated area, and secure proper medical treatment.

F. Telephone numbers of all emergency response personnel shall be prominently posted in the clean room, along with the location of the nearest telephone.

G. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall provide verification of first aid/CPR training for personnel responsible for providing first aid/CPR.

1. OSHA requires medical assistance within 3 minutes of a life-threateninginjury/illness.

2. Bloodborne Pathogen training shall also be verified for those personnelrequired to provide first aid/CPR.

H. The Emergency Action Plan shall provide for a Contingency Plan in the event that an incident occurs that may require the modification of the standard operating procedures during abatement.

1. Such incidents include, but are not limited to, fire; accident; and power failure.2. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall detail procedures to be followed

in the event of an incident assuring that work is stopped and wetting iscontinued until correction of the problem.

1.6 STOP ASBESTOS REMOVAL

A. If the Contracting Officer, designated representative, APM or Installation Environmental Office presents a written Stop Work Order:

1. Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall immediately stop all asbestos removaland adequately wet any exposed ACM.

2. Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall not resume any asbestos removalactivity until authorized to do so by the Contracting Officer or designatedrepresentative.

B. A Stop Work Order may be issued at any time the abatement conditions or activities are not within specification requirements.

C. Work stoppage will continue until conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.

D. Standby time and costs for corrective actions will be borne by the Asbestos Abatement Contractor, including the APM’s time and expenses.


E. The occurrence of any of the following events shall be reported immediately by the Building Contractor in writing to the designated representative and APM and shall require the Asbestos Abatement Contractor to immediately stop asbestos removal activities and initiate fiber reduction activities:

1. Asbestos > 0.01 f/cc outside a regulated area or >0.05 f/cc inside a regulatedarea.

2. Breach/break in regulated area critical barrier(s)/floor.3. Serious injury at the site.4. Fire/safety emergency at the site.5. Respiratory protection system failure.6. Power failure.7. Loss of wetting agent.8. Visible emissions observed outside the regulated area.

1.7 TERMINOLOGY

A. The term Contractor, as used in the Section, refers to the Prime Contractor that has been awarded a Contract by the Army and Air Force Exchange Service for performance of ALL Work/ALL Trades for this Project.

B. The term Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor, as used in this Section, refers to the Contractor’s Subcontractor who employs licensed persons who have received specialized training from an OSHA and/or EPA approved agency, and is licensed in the State of Florida to perform Asbestos Abatement Work and who will be responsible for the Work of this Section.

C. The term Asbestos Project Manager or APM, as used in this Section, refers to the independent oversight consultant, certified in the State of Florida, responsible for quality control inspection and testing agency before and upon completion of Asbestos Abatement Work, employed by the Architect-Engineer and paid for by AAFES.

D. Other commonly-used terms are defined in the context of these specifications is as follows:

1. Abatement: Removal only procedures to control or decrease fiber releasefrom asbestos-containing building materials or insulation material containingasbestos.

2. ACM: Asbestos Containing Materials.3. Aerosol: Solid or liquid particulate suspended in air.4. Adequately Wet: Sufficiently mixed or penetrated with liquid to prevent the

release of particulates. If visible emissions are observed coming from the ACM,then that material has not been adequately wetted.

5. Aggressive Method: Removal or disturbance of building material by sanding,abrading, grinding, or other method that breaks, crumbles, or disintegratesintact ACM.

6. Aggressive Sampling: Air monitoring samples collected while fans or othersuch devices are used to generate air turbulence within the work area. A leafblower will be used to initially sweep the floors, walls, and ceiling of the workarea.

7. Air Filtration Device (AFD): A portable local exhaust system equipped withHEPA filtration and capable of maintaining constant, low velocity airflow intocontaminated areas from adjacent uncontaminated areas.


8. Air Lock: A system for permitting ingress or egress to the work area withminimum air movement between a contaminated area and an uncontaminatedarea. An air lock can be constructed of plastic sheets or with a set of rigiddoors with fixed louvers.

9. Air Monitoring: The process of measuring the fiber content of a specificvolume of air in a stated period of time.

10. Amended Water: Water to which a surfactant has been added.11. Authorized Visitor: The Contracting Officer or designated representative, or

representatives of any regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over theproject.

12. Barrier: Any surface that isolates the regulated area and inhibits fibermigration from the regulated area.

13. Containment Barrier: An airtight barrier consisting of walls, floors, and/orceilings of sealed plastic sheeting that surrounds and seals the outer perimeterof the regulated area.

14. Critical Barrier: The barrier responsible for isolating the regulated area fromadjacent spaces, typically constructed of plastic sheeting secured in place atopenings such as doors, windows, or any other opening into the regulatedarea.

15. Class II Asbestos Work: Activities involving the removal of ACM that is notthermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is not limitedto, the removal of asbestos-containing wallboard, floor tile and sheeting,roofing and siding shingles, and construction mastic.

16. Clean Room: An uncontaminated area or room that is part of the workerdecontamination enclosure system, with provisions for storage of workers'street clothes and protective equipment.

17. Competent Person: One who is properly trained and is capable of identifyingexisting asbestos hazards in the work place, is capable of selecting theappropriate control strategy for asbestos exposure, and one who has theauthority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate the asbestos hazard.

18. Decontamination Enclosure System: A series of connected rooms, for thedecontamination of workers or of materials and equipment. Except wherespecified otherwise, decontamination enclosure system shall contain at leaseone air lock.

19. Disposal Bag: Typically 6 mil thick siftproof, dustproof, leaktight containerused to package and transport asbestos waste from regulated areas to theapproved landfill. Each bag/container must be labeled/marked in accordancewith EPA, OSHA and DOT requirements.

20. Equipment Decontamination Enclosure: That portion of a decontaminationenclosure system designed for controlled transfer of materials and equipment,typically consisting of a washroom and a holding area.

21. Equipment Room: A contaminated area or room that is part of the workerdecontamination enclosure system, with provisions for storage of contaminatedclothing and equipment.

22. Fixed Object: A unit of equipment or furniture in the work area that cannot beremoved from the work area.

23. Full Facepiece High Efficiency Respirator (FFHER): A respirator that coversthe wearer's entire face from the hairline to below the chin and is equipped withfilter.

24. Half Mask High Efficiency Respirator (HMHER): A respirator that coversone-half of the wearer's face and is equipped with filters capable of screeningout 99.97 percent of all particles larger than 0.3 microns.


25. HEPA Filter: A high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter capable of trappingand retaining 99.97 percent of the fibers of 0.3 micrometers in size.

26. HEPA Vacuum Equipment: High efficiency vacuuming equipment with aHEPA filter.

27. Holding Area: A chamber in the equipment decontamination enclosure locatedbetween the washroom and an uncontaminated area. The holding areacomprises an air lock.

28. Lockdown: Procedure of applying an encapsulant as a protective coating orsealant to a surface from which asbestos-containing material has beenremoved to control and minimize airborne asbestos fiber generation that mightresult from residual asbestos-containing debris. Lockdown must be compatiblewith spray back.

29. Movable Object: A unit of equipment or furniture in the work area which canbe removed from the work area.

30. MTA: Mastic Tile Adhesive31. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP's):

EPA's rule to control emissions of asbestos to the environment.32. Negative Pressure: Air pressure that is lower than the surrounding area,

created by exhausting air from a sealed regulated area through HEPAequipped filtration units. OSHA requires maintaining -0.02" water gauge insidethe negative pressure enclosure.

33. Owner: MacDill AFB Exchange, Tampa, Florida.34. Permissible Exposure Limits (PEL): The amount of time that a person can

be exposed to an airborne concentration of asbestos in excess of a certainquantity of fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc) of air. These quantities are 0.1 f/ccfor the “time weighted average” limit (TWA) and 1.0 f/cc for the “excursion”limit.

35. Personal Sampling/Monitoring: Representative air samples obtained in thebreathing zone of the person using a cassette and battery operated pump todetermine asbestos exposure.

36. Plasticize: To cover floors, walls, and ground surface with plastic sheeting asherein specified.

37. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT): A fit test using a challenge material that can besensed by the wearer if leakage in the respirator occurs.

38. Powered Air Purifying Respirator (PAPR): Either a full facepiece, helmet, orhooded respirator that has the breathing air powered to the wearer after it hasbeen purified through a filter.

39. Regulated Area: An area established by the employer to demarcate whereClass I, II, III asbestos work is conducted, and any adjoining area where debrisand waste from such asbestos work may accumulate; and a work area withinwhich airborne concentrations of asbestos exceed, or there is a reasonablepossibility they may exceed the PEL.

40. Removal: All herein specified procedures necessary to remove asbestos-containing materials from the designated areas and to dispose of thesematerials at a regulated landfill.

41. Shower Room: A room between the clean room and the equipment room inthe worker decontamination enclosure system, with hot and cold running waterand suitably arranged for complete showering during decontamination. Theshower room comprises an air lock between contaminated and clean areas.

42. Surfactant: A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration.


43. Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM): A microscopy method that canidentify and count asbestos fibers.

44. Type C Respirator: A respirator designed to provide a very high level ofprotection that supplies air to the wearer from an outside source such as acompressor.

45. VAT: Vinyl Asbestos Floor Tile.46. VCT: Vinyl Composition Tile47. Visible Emissions: Any emissions, which are visually detectable without the

aid of instruments, coming from ACM/PACM/RACM or ACM waste material.48. Washroom: A room between the work area and the holding area in the

equipment decontamination enclosure system. The washroom comprises anair lock.

49. Waste Generator: Any owner or operator whose act or process producesasbestos-containing waste material.

50. Waste Shipment Record: The shipping document, required to be originatedand signed by the waste generator, used to track and substantiate thedisposition of asbestos-containing waste material.

51. Wet Cleaning: The process of eliminating asbestos contamination frombuilding surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning toolswhich have been dampened with water, and by afterwards disposing of thesecleaning tools as asbestos-contaminated waste.

52. Work Area: Designated rooms, spaces, or areas of the project in whichasbestos abatement actions are to be undertaken or which may becomecontaminated as a result of such abatement actions. A contained work area isa work area that has been sealed, plasticized, and equipped with adecontamination enclosure system. A non-contained work area is an isolatedor controlled-access work area which has not been plasticized nor equippedwith a decontamination system.

53. Work Certification: Certification obtained from an EPA approved organizationstating that the worker has attended and satisfactorily completed a Floridaapproved asbestos supervisor or worker training course as required in thesespecifications.

54. Worker Decontamination Enclosure System: That portion of adecontamination enclosure system designed for a controlled passage of workers, and other personnel and authorized visitors, typically consisting of a clean room, a shower room and an equipment room.

1.8 PERSONNEL PROTECTION

A. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor acknowledges and agrees that he is solely responsible for providing and enforcing worker protection requirements at least equal to those specified herein.

1. Table A summarizes the minimum levels of personnel protection required.

B. General:

1. Prior to commencement of work, all workers, including workers of other trades,shall be instructed, and shall be knowledgeable, in the appropriate proceduresof personnel protection and asbestos abatement.

a. On-site training in the use of equipment and facilities unique to this jobsite shall be performed.


b. Emergency Evacuation Procedures to be followed in the event ofcompressor failure shall be included in worker training prior tocommencement of work.

c. Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall submit a typewritten descriptionof this training program describing the contents to the Contracting Officeror designated representative, APM and the Installation prior to start of anyconstruction activities.

2. Provide workers with sufficient sets of protective disposable clothing,consisting of full-body coveralls, head covers, gloves, and 18" high boot-typefoot covers of sizes to properly fit individual workers.

a. Disposable coveralls, head covers, and 18" high boot-type foot coversshall be constructed of material equal to DuPont "TYVEK-Type 14 asminimum requirement.

3. Provide eye protection and hard hats as required for job conditions or byapplicable safety regulations.

a. Reusable foot wear, hard hats, and eye protection devices shall be left inthe Contaminated Equipment Room until the end of the asbestosabatement work.

b. Upon completion of asbestos abatement work, such items shall bedisposed of as asbestos waste or decontaminated for reuse.

4. Provide authorized visitors with a set of suitable protective disposable clothing,headgear, hard hats, eye protection, and foot wear of sizes to properly fitvisitors whenever they are required to enter the work area, to a minimum offour (4) sets per shift.

5. Provide and post the asbestos abatement decontamination and workerprotection procedures in the equipment room and the clean room.

6. Thoroughly clean surfaces of contaminated containers and equipment by wetsponging or wiping before moving such items into the equipmentdecontamination enclosure system washroom for final cleaning and removal touncontaminated areas.

a. Ensure that personnel do not leave work areas through the equipmentdecontamination enclosure.

TABLE A MINIMUM PERSONNEL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS 1

ACTIVITY RESPIRATORY PROTECTION

DISPOSAL CLOTHING

SHOWER REQUIRED

AFTER WORK

DECON UNIT

Removal of “fixed” items prior to work-no potential asbestos exposure.

None No No No

Removal of “carpet”-potential asbestos exposure.

HMHER Yes Yes Yes

Pre-cleaning prior to abatement HMHER Yes No No

Sealing openings prior to abatement-no potential asbestos exposure

None No No No

Plasticizing prior to abatement-no potential asbestos exposure

None No No No

Plasticizing prior to abatement-potential asbestos exposure

HMHER Yes Yes Yes


Gross Removal HMHER Yes Yes Yes

Cementitious Siding/Soffit/Fascia Removal

HMHER Yes Yes Yes2

Glovebag Removal PAPR Yes Yes Yes

Asbestos-containing roofing material PAPR Yes Yes Yes

Asbestos-contaminated soil PAPR Yes Yes Yes

Flooring HMHER3 Yes Yes Yes

Preliminary clean-up (after gross removal)

HMHER Yes Yes Yes

Plastic removal after initial clearance HMHER Yes Yes Yes

Lockdown HMHER3 Yes Yes Yes

Cleaning & Plastic removal after lockdown-before final clearance

HMHER Yes Yes Yes

Activities after final clearance None No No No

Loading asbestos containing material on truck (outside work area)

HMHER Yes No No

1 These are minimum requirements only. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor is fully responsible for the protection of all personnel at the site. Where conflict or interpretational differences arise, the text of the specifications apply. 2 On-site for emergency use.

3 Use appropriate chemical cartridges for mastic solvent and lockdown sealant.

Type C – Supplied air regulator, either full face or hood.

PAPR – Powered air purifying respirator.

NMHER – Half mask high efficiency respirator.

C. Respiratory Protection:

1. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor will provide workers with personallyissued and marked respiratory equipment approved by NIOSH and OSHAwhich is suitable for the asbestos exposure level in the work area according toOSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.1101 (applicable standard), and as morestringently specified otherwise herein.

a. Develop and implement a Respiratory Protection Program (RPP) that is incompliance with the January 8, 1998 OSHA requirements found at 29CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1910.132;134.

b. Powered Air Purifying Respirators shall be used to remove all asbestos-containing materials.

1.) Downgrading may be considered after all gross removal is complete, and a time weight average (TWA) has been established in the work area.

2. Where respirators with disposable filter parts are employed, the AsbestosAbatement Subcontractor will provide sufficient filter parts for replacement asnecessary by the worker or as required by the applicable regulation.

3. Respirators shall be worn by all persons while in an established work area.

D. Asbestos Abatement Decontamination and Worker Protection Procedures during Gross Removal:


1. Construct a two-stage decontamination unit with appropriate signage outsideof the enclosed phased perimeter.

a. The decontamination unit shall be covered with black polyethylene withair locks to the exterior and between each unit and work area.

2. Each worker or authorized visitor shall, upon entering the job site, removestreet clothes in the clean room, put on a clean respirator (with new filters, ifappropriate) and don one set of clean protective clothing before entering theequipment room or the work area.

3. Each worker or authorized visitor shall, each time he leaves the work area,remove one set of protective clothing in the equipment room and place in adisposal bag; proceed to the clean room and remove all protective clothing andrespirator and dress in street clothes at the end of each day's work, or in cleancoveralls before eating, smoking, or drinking.

a. Disposable clothing of the type worn inside the work area is not permittedoutside the work area, except when loading bags on truck.

4. Workers or authorized visitors shall not eat, smoke, drink, chew gum or othersubstances while in the work area or decontamination areas.

5. Contaminated worker footwear shall be stored in the equipment room when notin use in the work area.

a. Upon completion of asbestos abatement, dispose of footwear ascontaminated waste or clean thoroughly inside and out, using soap andwater, before removing from work area or from equipment and accessarea.

b. Store contaminated equipment in the equipment room for reuse or placein receptacles for disposal with other asbestos contaminated materials.

6. Workers removing waste containers from the equipment decontaminationenclosure shall enter the holding area from outside wearing a respirator anddressed in clean coveralls of a color different from those used in the work area.

a. No worker shall use this system as a means of leaving or entering thework area.

7. Workers shall be fully protected with respirators and protective clothing fromthe time of first disturbance of asbestos-containing or contaminated materialsprior to commencing actual asbestos abatement and until final clean-up iscompleted.

E. Exchange Responsibilities:

1. Prior to commencement of work:

a. Notify occupants adjacent to regulated areas of project dates andrequirements for relocation, if needed.

1.) Arrangements must be made prior to starting work for relocation of desks, files, equipment and personal possessions to avoid unauthorized access into the regulated area.

2.) Note: Notification of adjacent personnel is required by OSHA in 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k) to prevent unnecessary or unauthorized access to the regulated area.


F. Site Security

1. Regulated area access is to be restricted only to authorized, trained/accreditedand protected personnel.

a. These may include the Contractor's employees, employees ofSubcontractors, authorized Exchange employees and representatives,post or base State and local inspectors, and any other designatedindividuals.

b. A list of authorized personnel shall be established prior to commencingthe project and be posted in the clean room of the decontamination unit.

2. Entry into the regulated area by unauthorized individuals shall be reportedimmediately to the Competent Person by anyone observing the entry.

a. The Competent person shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer’sRepresentative or APM.

3. A logbook shall be maintained in the clean room of the decontamination unit.

a. Anyone who enters the regulated area must record their name, affiliation,time in, and time out for each entry.

4. Access to the regulated area shall be through a critical barrier doorway.

a. All other access (doors, windows, hallways, etc.) shall be sealed orlocked to prevent entry to or exit from the regulated area.

b. The only exceptions for this requirement are the waste/equipment load-out area, which shall be sealed except during the removal ofcontainerized asbestos waste from the regulated area, and emergencyexits.

c. Emergency exits shall not be locked from the inside; however, they shallbe sealed with poly sheeting and taped until needed.

5. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor's Competent Person shall control sitesecurity during abatement operations in order to isolate work in progress andprotect adjacent personnel.

a. A security system shall be provided at the entrance to the regulated areato assure that all entrants are logged in/out and that only authorizedpersonnel are allowed entrance.

6. The Contractor and Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor will have theExchange’s assistance in notifying adjacent personnel of the presence,location and quantity of ACM in the regulated area and enforcement ofrestricted access by the Exchange associates or representatives.

7. The regulated area shall be locked during non-working hours and secured bythe Exchange.

1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. Pre-Work Information: The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall provide three (3) bound copies in three ring binders of pre-work submittal items listed herein within seven (7) calendar days following the Pre-construction Meeting.

1. General:

a. Written approval of all pre-work submittals must be from the ContractingOfficer or designated representative and APM prior to start of anyasbestos abatement work as specified under this Section.


b. Delays attributable to untimely submittals will not serve as a basis forextending time for contract completion.

2. NESHAP Sources: A person who intends to engage in an asbestos projectwhich is a NESHAP source shall notify the Environmental ProtectionCommission of Hillsborough County (EPCHC) in writing in accordance with therequirements of 40 CFR Part 61.

a. A copy of the notification must be sent to:b. MacDill AFB DPW/EDc. A copy of the notification shall also be sent to the Contracting Officer or

designated representative and the APM.

3. Local Notification: The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall notify, inwriting the base security police department that asbestos abatement work isbeing conducted and that their departments should take precautions if they arerequired to enter the work area during an emergency.

4. Landfill Submittals: Submit to the Contracting Officer or designatedrepresentative and APM a notarized certification that all required permits,landfill site location, and arrangements for transport and disposal of asbestos-containing or contaminated materials, supplies, and the like have beenobtained.

5. Licensure: Written evidence of licensure as an Asbestos AbatementSubcontractor under the rules and regulations of the State of Florida.

a. This information must include license number and date of license.

6. Employee Names and Training: Submit to the Contracting Officer ordesignated representative and APM a notarized certification listing eachemployee by name and indicating that each employee has had instructions onthe hazards of asbestos exposure, on use and fitting of respirators, onprotective dress, on use of showers, on entry and exit from work area, and onall aspects of work procedures and protective measures and understands theinstructions.

a. Training courses shall be by a Florida approved training provider.

7. Certificate of Worker's Release: Submit to the Contracting Officer ordesignated representative and APM a notarized Certificate of Worker'sRelease for each worker, including workers of other trades, in accordance withrequirements of this Section.

a. Worker release shall release Contractor, Owner, AAFES, Architect-Engineer and APM from claims relating to the abatement project.

b. This includes a statement that the worker understands that asbestos is aknown carcinogen and can cause cancer.

8. Medical Surveillance: Signed statement by a Medical Doctor, or equivalent foreach and every worker to be utilized on this project.

9. Asbestos Plan: Submit a detailed plan of the work procedures to be used in theremoval of materials containing asbestos.

a. This plan must include disposal plan, type of wetting agent to be used, airmonitoring, and a detailed description of the method to be employed inorder to control pollution.


b. An asbestos plan must be approved for each delivery order prior to thestart of any asbestos work.

c. Plan must be signed by an EPA Certified Asbestos Designer.

10. Air Sampling Professional: Submit the name, address, and telephone numberof the air sampling professional selected for the monitoring, testing, andreporting of airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers along with certificationthat persons analyzing the samples have been judged proficient by successfulparticipation within the last year in the National Institute for OccupationalSafety and Health (NIOSH) Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT) Program, andhave successfully completed a “Sampling and Evaluating Airborne AsbestosDust” - NIOSH 582 course or equivalent.

a. The air sampling professional shall be under the supervision of a FloridaCertified Asbestos Consultant.

11. Daily Log: Submit to the Contracting Officer or designated representative andAPM a sample of the daily log form.

12. Medical Training: A list of and verification of training for all personnel who havecurrent first-aid/CPR training.

a. A minimum of one person per shift must have adequate training.

13. Respirator Fit Test: Current fit-tests for all personnel wearing respirators on-site meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (h) and Appendix C.

B. During Work Information: The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor will provide the information described herein to the Contracting Officer or designated representative and APM at the time specified.

1. General:

a. Untimely submittal of information may be cause for halting work.b. Delays attributable to untimely submittals will not serve as a basis for

extending time for contract completion, but will be a basis for withholdingpayments.

2. Air Monitoring Results: Results of all air monitoring performed by the AsbestosAbatement Subcontractor will be posted for all workers to see within 24-hoursafter collection.

a. A copy of the results will be provided to the Contracting Officer ordesignated representative and APM at the same time.

C. Post-Work Information: The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor will provide the information described herein to the Contracting Officer or designated representative and APM before final payment is authorized.

1. Daily Log: Copies of a daily log showing the date and time of all personsentering and leaving the work area.

2. Air Monitoring: Submit a copy of employee air monitoring results relative toOSHA Respiratory Protection Level Compliance.

3. Landfill Receipts: Receipts from landfill operator which acknowledge theContractor's delivery(s) of material, will be submitted within 30 days followingremoval from building.

a. Receipts shall include date, quantity of material delivered, and signatureof authorized representative of landfill.


1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Air monitoring will be performed before and after asbestos abatement to document airborne asbestos fiber concentrations.

1. In general, the APM will be responsible for air monitoring outside and insidethe work areas, and performing clearance testing.

2. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall employ, at his/her expense, anAir Sampling Professional to conduct all personal air monitoring.

B. Asbestos Project Manager (APM):

1. The APM will collect air samples for ambient air before and upon completion ofabatement.

a. Samples will be collected before and upon completion using NIOSHMethod 7400.

b. The fiber concentration must be less than 0.01 f/cc and must not exceedambient levels surrounding the abatement activity.

2. Conduct air monitoring using procedures specified in NIOSH Analytical Method7400, Asbestos Fibers in Air (February, 1979) which is incorporated byreference, or equivalent. When clearance monitoring by transmission electronmicroscopy is elected, the protocol outlined in the U.S. EPA Asbestos Hazardand Emergency Response Act (AHERA) rules in 40 CFR Part 763 shall apply.

a. Also, for air monitoring take sufficient samples to represent asbestosconcentrations in the entire work area. Representative sampling shallrequire at least:1.) One sample in every room; and 2.) At least one sample for every 50,000 cubic feet or 5,000 square

feet of floor area, whichever requires more samples.

3. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall be advised at any time ifquestions arise as to compliance with standards of quality and completenessof the work, and shall use his best efforts to resolve any such questions to thesatisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

4. Confirmation sampling and analysis will be the responsibility of the AsbestosAbatement Subcontractor’s Air Sampling Professional (ASP) with review andapproval of the APM.

a. An agreement between the ASP and the APM shall be reached on theexact details of the confirmation effort, in writing, including such things asthe number of samples, location, collection, quality control on-site,analytical laboratory, interpretation of results and any follow-up actions.

b. This written agreement shall be co-signed by the ASP and APM anddelivered to the Contracting Officer with copy to the Architect-Engineer.

C. Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor Tests:

1. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor, at his expense, shall provide all testsrequired by specified applicable regulations, codes, and standards, and anyother tests for his use.

2. Results of all testing shall be provided to the Contracting Officer or designatedrepresentative and APM within 24-hours after completing the tests.


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Delivery of Materials: All materials used in this Section shall be delivered in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name.

B. Storage of Materials: Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from set or damp surfaces, and under cover sufficient to prevent damage or contamination.

C. Damaged Materials: Damaged or deteriorating materials shall not be used and shall be removed from the premises.

1. Material that becomes contaminated with asbestos shall be disposed of ascontaminated material in accordance with the applicable regulations.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS

A. Warning Labels and Signs: Signs posted and labels used shall not be less than required by OSHA Regulations 29 CFR 1926.1101 as shown below.

1. Locate signs at such a distance that personnel may read the sign and take thenecessary protective steps required before entering the area.

2. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall have warning labels and signs inthe native language of any worker that cannot understand written English.

3. Provide labels and affix to all asbestos materials, scrap, waste, debris, andother products contaminated with asbestos.

4. Provide additional warning labels and signs in the native language of workersthat cannot understand written English.

B. Sign Format: Sample Recommended Format

Warning Sign

DANGERASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG

DISEASE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE

CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA

Required Asbestos Waste Container Warning Labels

DANGERCONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS

AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD

and

RQ HAZARDOUS, SUBSTANCE, SOLID, NOS,

ORM-E, NA 9188 (ASBESTOS)


C. Project Notification Signs. A business entity or public unit planning an asbestos project that is a NESHAP source shall also comply with the following:

1. Except in emergency situations at least 3 days before removing orencapsulating asbestos, post the signs immediately outside all entrances toand exits from the work site or asbestos project to inform the public in theimmediate vicinity that asbestos abatement will be performed; and

2. Keep the signs posted until the visual and air clearance requirements are met.

2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Plastic or Polyethylene Sheet: Fire retardant, six (6) mil thickness or greater as specified in rolls of sizes to minimize the frequency of joints.

B. Tape and Glue: Capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of plastic and for attachment of plastic sheet to finished surfaces without damage to existing finish or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials and capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including use of amended water.

1. Where appropriate, wood furring strips may be used, without damage tosubstrate.

C. Surfactant (Wetting Agent): Surfactant shall consist of resin materials in water base which have been tested to indicate material is nontoxic and non-irritating to skin and eyes, and non-carcinogenic, as approved by EPA and the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

D. Plastic Bags: Seamless 6 mil (0.006") thickness with caution labels in accordance with OSHA Regulations 29 CFR 1926.1101.

E. Caulk: Materials shall be provided for work of this Section in products as regulated and suitable for intended use.

F. Water Sprayer: Airless or other low pressure sprayer for amended water application.

G. Air Filtering Equipment: For internal re-circulation and air filtering in the work area.

1. High Efficiency Particulate Air Filtration System or Electronic Precipitators maybe used by the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor.

2. No air movement system or air equipment shall discharge asbestos fibersoutside the work area above levels considered acceptable for final clearanceand re-occupancy of the work area.

H. Communication Equipment: Suitable for inter-room communications, such as "walkie-talkies" or "radio band" communicators.

I. Transportation: Enclosed vehicle, as required, to be suitable for loading, temporary storage, transit, and unloading of contaminated waste without exposure to persons or property.

J. Mechanical and Electrical: Materials shall be provided for work of this Section in accordance with regulated practices and subject to all standards for quality and workmanship as specified in Division 15, Mechanical and Division 16, Electrical.

K. Thermal or Acoustical Materials: Spray or trowel-applied thermal or acoustical insulation material used for patching or replacement must provide performance characteristics equivalent to or better than the original material and shall be non-carcinogenic.


L. Other Materials: Provide all other materials, such as lumber, plywood, tools, scrapers, brushes, cleaning materials, adhesive, nails, hardware, etc., which are required to construct and dismantle the decontamination area and the barriers that isolate the work area or any material required for the work of this Section.

M. Tools: Provide suitable tools for asbestos removal, encapsulation and/or enclosure.

N. Air Filtration Devices (AFD): Provide high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filtration systems equipped with filtration equipment, which comply with ANSI 29.2-79, for local exhaust ventilation and work area air filtration.

1. Air movement systems or air filtering equipment should not discharge unfilteredair outside the work area.

2. A sufficient quantity of AFD's (both inside the work area and work areaexhaust) shall be utilized so as to provide one work place air change every 15minutes.

3. To calculate the total air flow movement:

Total Cubic Feet Per Minute (CFM) = Volume of work area in ft315 minutes

4. To calculate the number of units needed for the abatement:

No. units needed = Total CFM capacity of unit in CFM

O. Enough work area exhaust is required to maintain the required negative pressure (vacuum) in the work area.

1. The exhaust from the air filtration devices shall be to the outside of thebuilding.

2. Construct a security weather tight barrier at the exterior of the building, asrequired, for exhausting the air filtration devices.

3. Coordinate construction of the barrier with the Contracting Officer ordesignated representative, APM, AAFES General Manager and MacDill AFBDPW/ED.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Pre-abatement Meeting:

1. The DPW/ED representative, upon receipt, review, and substantial approval ofall pre-abatement submittals and verification by the Asbestos AbatementSubcontractor’s ASP that all materials and equipment required for the projectare on the site, will arrange for a pre-abatement meeting between theContractor, Competent Person(s), the DPW/ED representative(s), Installationrepresentatives and the APM.

2. The purpose of the meeting is to discuss any aspect of the submittals needingclarification or amplification and to discuss any aspect of the project executionand the sequence of the operation.

3. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall be prepared to provide anysupplemental information/documentation to the DPW/ED representativeregarding any submittals, documentation, materials or equipment.

4. Upon satisfactory resolution of any outstanding issues, the Contracting Officeror designated representative will issue a written order to proceed to theContractor with copy to the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor.


5. No abatement work of any kind described in the following provisionsshall be initiated prior to the Contracting Officer’s written order toproceed.

B. All work performed herein shall be accomplished using procedures and techniques which do not violate standards of personnel protection identified in Paragraph 1.8 of this Section.

C. Separate Work Areas from Occupied Areas by providing Asbestos warning signs posted on non-work side.

3.2 PREPARATION OF WORK AREA

A. The following procedures for preparation of the work area are given in sequential order for various types of abatement.

1. The activities should be followed in the order given.

B. Removal of Vinyl Asbestos Floor Tile and Mastic:

1. Provide temporary power and lighting and ensure safe installation of temporarypower sources and equipment per applicable electrical code requirements andOSHA requirements for temporary lighting in the asbestos abatement workarea.

2. Pre-seal all openings including, but not limited to doorways, windows, wallopenings HVAC vents and intake grilles and any other penetration of the workarea with 6-mil plastic sheeting using duct tape.

3. Provide and install decontamination enclosure systems in accordance withparagraph 3.3 of this Section.

4. Provide personnel protection according to Paragraph 1.8 of this Section asapplicable.

5. Install and initiate operation of air filtration devices (see Paragraph 2.3, N. ofthis Section) to provide a negative pressure of at least -0.02 inches of waterwithin the work area.

a. Located air filtration devices venting the work area so that make-up airenters the work area mainly through the worker decontamination unit andtraverses the work area as much as possible.

b. Openings made in the enclosure system to accommodate the AFD’s shallbe made airtight with tape and/or caulking as needed.

1.) If more than one unit is installed, they should be turned on one at a time, checking the integrity of wall barriers for secure attachment and need for additional support.

c. AFD’s shall be exhausted to the outside of the building wheneverfeasible.

1.) Coordinate location of exhaust ducting and exhaust terminations with the Contracting Officer or designated representative, APM, AAFES General Manager, MacDill AFB DPW/ED and the Contractor.

2.) Do not exhaust into occupied areas or adjacent rooms of the building.


d. Once operational, the AFD’s shall not be shut down until the work area isreleased following final clearance procedures.

1.) Change pre-filters prior to abatement in each work area. 2.) Change HEPA filters as required to maintain fiber counts inside

work area less than 0.01 fibers/cubic centimeter.

e. Demonstrate proper operation of AFD’s and enclosure integrity throughthe use of a differential pressure meter or manometer.

1.) A pressure difference of at least -0.02 inches of water should be maintained in the work area.

2.) This procedure shall be done prior to any asbestos removal, and shall be continuously monitored.

3.) A record of manometer readings shall be submitted to the Contractor Officer or designated representative and APM daily.

C. Removal of Asbestos Roofing Materials:

1. Provide personnel protection according to Paragraph 1.8 of this Section asapplicable.

2. Coordinate with the Contracting Officer or designated representative, APM,AAFES General Manager, MacDill AFB DPW/ED and the Contractor todecommission the entry/exit doors beneath the subject abatement area.

3. Polyethylene sheeting will be placed on the ground beneath the abatementarea.

4. Proper wet removal methods will be adhered to during the roofing abatementactivities.

3.3 DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS

A. General: A two-stage portable or constructed decontamination enclosure shall be attached to the outside of each work area for worker decontamination.

1. The decontamination enclosure shall be covered with black polyethylene.2. Coordinate location of the decontamination unit with Contracting Officer or

designated representative, APM, AAFES General Manager and the Contractor.

B. Structure: Use modular systems or build wood or metal studs, joists, and rafters, 24" o.c. on floors, walls and ceilings faced with 3/8" plywood sheathing on work side, framing enclosure systems.

1. Connect with framed-in tunnels and line with two layers of 6 mil plastic sheetssealed with glue and tape at all lap joints in the plastic for all enclosures anddecontamination rooms.

2. Use two layers of 6-mil plastic sheets for floors turned up minimum 16".

C. Air Locks: In all cases, access between contaminated and uncontaminated rooms or areas shall be through an air lock.

D. Worker Decontamination Enclosure System: The Worker Decontamination Enclosure System outside the work area shall consist of two totally enclosed chambers as follows:

1. An equipment room shall have air locks to the workers gross cleanup area.

a. The equipment room shall be of sufficient size to accommodate at leastone worker, allowing him enough room to remove his protective clothingand footwear, a 6-mil disposal bag in an impermeable container, and anyother equipment that the Contractor wishes to store when not in use.


2. A clean room shall have air locks into the equipment room.

a. The clean room shall be sized to adequately accommodate the workcrew.

b. Benches for seating shall be provided and hooks for hanging up streetclothes.

c. Shelves for storing respirators shall also be provided in this area.d. Clean disposable clothing, and replacement filters for respirators, clean,

dry towels and other necessary items shall be provided in adequatesupply at the clean room.

e. A location for posting shall also be provided in this area.f. Whenever possible, a lockable door shall be used to permit access into

the clean room from outside the work area.g. Lighting, heat and electricity shall also be provided in this area.h. This space shall not be used for storage of tools, equipment or materials

or as office space.

3. The decontamination enclosure shall be covered with black polyethylene withappropriate signage.

3.4 INSPECTION OF WORK AREA

A. Prior to removal of any asbestos-containing material the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall ensure the following activities must have been completed and approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative and APM.

1. Worker decontamination enclosure has been constructed or is on site.2. All pre-abatement submissions, notifications, posting and permits have been

provided and are satisfactory to the Contracting Officer or designatedrepresentative and APM.

3. All equipment for abatement, clean-up and disposal are on hand.4. All worker training (and certifications) is completed and submitted.5. Arrangements have been made for disposal of waste at an acceptable site.6. Arrangements have been made for building security.

B. Approval or acceptance by the Contracting Officer or designated representative or APM does not relieve the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor of his responsibility to comply with all requirements of this Section, referenced Codes, Standards, rules and regulations governing the Work.

3.5 MAINTENANCE OF ENCLOSED WORK AREA AND DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS

A. Prepare the area as described in Paragraphs of this Section for Gross Asbestos Removal of Vinyl Asbestos Floor Tile and Mastic.

1. Do not lay plastic sheeting on the floors.

B. Spray areas of asbestos material with amended water, using spray equipment recommended by surfactant manufacturer capable of providing a "mist" application to reduce the release of fibers.

1. Saturate the material sufficiently to wet it to the substrate without causingexcess dripping.

2. Spray the asbestos material repeatedly during work process to maintain wetcondition and to minimize asbestos fiber dispersion.

C. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall use infrared heat machine removal methods and equipment.


D. Remove floor tile mastic adhesive with a chemical low odor or no odor solvent.

1. No petroleum or terpene based solvents will be permitted.2. All solvents must be approved by APM prior to use.3. Dispose of all rags, mops, etc. as contaminated waste.

E. As material is removed, double bag for disposal.

1. Material with sharp edges shall be placed in burlap or cloth bags prior todouble bagging.

2. Do not leave bags in containment overnight.

F. After completion of stripping work, floors shall be wet-brushed and wiped.

1. There shall be no tile or mastic residue remaining on the surfaces followingremoval and clearing.

G. Where cracks or joints are found within the work area, the cracks/joints shall be cleaned to remove residual mastic.

1. Remove loose concrete, dirt and debris from crack with a hand grinder andwire wheel.

2. HEPA vacuum cracks to remove any remaining debris.

H. After removal of mastic and initial inspection by Contracting Officer or designated representative and APM, mist air with airless sprayer and amended water.

1. Do not spray a lockdown sealant on floor.

I. All bags and wrapped material shall be labeled with the Owner’s name, city and state of origin with proper waste generator labels.

3.6 REMOVAL OF BAGGED OR WRAPPED ACM

A. ACM Removal: Remove sealed and labeled bags and wrapped materials of contaminated material from the work area daily, at night after normal BX operating hours, and dispose of as contaminated waste in permitted sanitary landfill.

1. These bags must remain under the positive control of the Asbestos AbatementSubcontractor and must never be left unattended in an area or on a vehiclewhere unauthorized persons could gain access.

2. Material shall be carefully lowered to the ground using either a lift or a chuteinto the disposal vehicle.

3. Coordinate removal of ACM with the AAFES General Manager and employeeschedule.

B. Control: Contaminated materials in bags loaded on transportation vehicles shall become the property of the Contractor and are no longer considered the property of the Owner.

1. Contractor shall hold the Owner, the Army and Air Force Exchange Service,Contracting Office, Architect-Engineer and the APM harmless from anycontamination caused by transportation of asbestos-containing materials.

2. All removed asbestos materials shall be taken from the building.

a. Contractor must post warning signs on truck during loading and unloadingoperations.

b. A load out area at the south end of the building will be designated for avehicle or dumpster.


c. Coordinate exact location of vehicle or dumpster with Contracting Officeror designated representative or APM and the AAFES General Manager.

C. Disposal: Disposal of asbestos shall be in accordance with 40 CFR Part 61 and Florida Department of Environmental Protection.

3.7 CLEAN-UP AND CLEARANCE TESTING OF WORK AREAS

A. Acceptance Procedure for Gross Removal: Cleaning of the work areas and other contaminated areas shall be conducted in accordance with the three-step procedure described below unless noted:

1. Step 1, Preliminary Cleanup: Visual inspection.2. Step 2, Final Re-occupancy: Visual inspection and fiber concentration less

than 0.01 fibers/cubic centimeter using phase contrast microscopy.

B. Step 1. Preliminary Cleanup:

1. Remove visible accumulation of asbestos mastic, debris and cleancracks/joints.

2. Wet clean all surfaces and objects in the work area and any othercontaminated area.

3. The APM will perform a visual inspection.

a. If the APM finds visible accumulations of dust, mastic, etc. in the workarea, the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor shall repeat the wetcleaning until the work area is in compliance.

C. Step 2. Lockdown:

1. After visual inspection, all surfaces and building components from whichasbestos-containing material was removed, shall be wet wiped and the airmisted with an airless sprayer with amended water.

a. Do not spray a lockdown sealant on the floor.

2. When the area dries, wet clean and/or HEPA vacuum all surfaces again.

D. Step 3. Final Re-occupancy Clearance:

1. A final inspection for re-occupancy will be done at the written request of theAsbestos Abatement Subcontractor to the Contractor, Contracting Officer ordesignated representative and APM for the purpose of observing the conditionof cleaned areas to be free of dust, dirt, and debris.

a. Evidence of asbestos contamination identified during the inspection willnecessitate further cleaning as heretofore specified.

2. When the work area passes the APM’s re-occupancy inspection, and at thewritten request of the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor, the APM shall testfor re-occupancy.

a. Re-occupancy will be approved by the APM if the fiber count inside thework area is less than 0.01 fibers/cubic centimeter, (as reported by theAsbestos Project Manager).

b. Failure to achieve this level will necessitate further cleaning by and at theexpense of the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor.


c. Conduct air monitoring using procedures specified in NIOSH AnalyticalMethod 7400, Asbestos Fibers in Air (February, 1979) which isincorporated by reference, or equivalent. When clearance monitoring bytransmission electron microscopy is elected, the protocol outlined in theU.S. EPA Asbestos Hazard and Emergency Response Act (AHERA)rules in 40 CFR Part 763 shall apply.

1.) Also, take sufficient samples to represent asbestos concentrations in the entire work area. Representative sampling shall require at least: i. One sample in every room; andii. At least one sample for every 50,000 cubic feet or 5,000

square feet of floor area, whichever requires more samples.

3. When the work area passes the re-occupancy test, the polyethylene and allcontrols and seals established will be removed, placed in double bags, anddisposed of as asbestos contaminated waste.

E. Other Information:

1. Extra time required to clean work areas to obtain proper working and clearancetests shall not be considered grounds for an extension of time for contractcompletion.

2. Extra time and costs to collect and analyze clearance samples because thefirst results were not acceptable will be at the expense of the AsbestosAbatement Subcontractor or and will be deducted from the Contractor’scontract sum.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED WASTE

A. Remove sealed and labeled bags and wrapped contaminated material and dispose of as contaminated waste in permitted sanitary landfill as follows:

1. There shall be no visible emissions to the outside air from an active wastedisposal site where asbestos-containing waste is deposited.

2. Asbestos waste shall be sealed in leak-proof bags or double wrapped andlabeled in accordance with Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Section1926.1101 and CFR Parts 171 and 172, Hazardous Substances: Final Rule.

a. Such bags and wrapped materials shall be removed daily from thebuildings where work is in progress, or shall be stored in approved lockedvan or truck.

b. These containers must remain under the positive control of the AsbestosAbatement Subcontractor and must never be left unattended orunsecured where unauthorized personnel could gain access.

c. Clearly label the bags and any structural components wrapped in plasticas asbestos waste. In addition to any label required by 29 CFR Part 1910or 40 CFR Part 61, affix a label including the following information:

1.) The number of the person's license to remove or encapsulate asbestos; and

2.) The date the bag was sealed.

B. Trucks hauling bags and drums shall be enclosed to prevent loss or damage to containers in route to approved landfill.


1. Receipts including date, quantity of material and signature from authorizedrepresentative of landfill operator for all deliveries of waste material shall bedelivered to the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2. Contractor shall post warning signs on truck during unloading operations.

C. Bags and wrapped materials shall be labeled with the Owner's name and the City and State of origin.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The purpose of the work of the APM is to assure quality; resolve problems; and prevent the spread of contamination beyond the regulated area.

B. APM responsibilities, as oversight consultant, include performing the final inspection and testing to determine whether the regulated area or building has been adequately decontaminated.

C. All air monitoring is to be done utilizing PCM.

D. The APM will perform the following tasks for each Work Area at each Phase of the Project where asbestos abatement is performed:

1. Task 1: Establish background levels before abatement begins by collectingbackground samples.

a. Retain samples for possible TEM analysis.2. Task 2: Perform, in the presence of the Contracting Officer or designated

representative, final inspection and testing of a decontaminated regulated areaor building at the conclusion of the abatement and clean-up work to certifycompliance with all regulations and the work of the Section.

3. Task 3: Issue certificate of decontamination for each regulated area or buildingand project report.

E. All documentation, inspection results and testing results generated by the APM will be available to the Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor for information and consideration.

F. The Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor and Contractor shall cooperate with and support the APM for efficient and smooth performance of their work.

G. The monitoring and inspection results of the APM will be used by the Contracting Officer to issue any Stop Removal orders to the Contractor and Asbestos Abatement Subcontractor before abatement work and to accept or reject a regulated area or building as decontaminated.

H. All air sampling and analysis data will be recorded in an easily readable format showing time, date and location of collection.

3.10 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION

A. The APM shall complete and sign the "Certificate of Completion", attached at the end of this Section, in accordance with Attachment 1 at the completion of the abatement and decontamination of EACH regulated area.

02083-

r....... Greenfield 't Environmental

REPORT OF THE NESHAP LIMITED RENOVATION SURVEY, SAMPLING AND EVALUATION OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS

atthe

MACDILL AIR FORCE BASE - EXCHANGE BUILDING (FURNITURE STORE, MAIN CORRIDOR, FOOD COURT, KITCHEN, UPS STORE,

FIXTURE STORAGE ROOM AND SELECT EXTERIOR & ROOF AREAS) 3108 NORTH BOUNDARY BOULEVARD

TAMPA, FLORIDA

January 19, 2017 GE Project Number 2699-0100

Submitted to:

H. Michael Bohnsack Architects Mr. Harlen Bohnsack

Principal/Owner 600 West Main Street, Suite 2

Carbondale, Illinois 62901

Prepared by:

Greenfield Environmental, Inc. 432 3rd Street North

St. Petersburg, Florida 33701

432 3rd Street North, St. Petersburg, FL 33701 • Phone: 727.896.1266 • Fax: 727.896.1566

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

The survey and laboratory analysis conducted at the MacDill Air Force Base Exchange

Building - Furniture Store, Main Corridor, Food Court, Kitchen, UPS Store, Fixture Storage

Room and select Exterior & Roof areas located at 3108 North Boundary Boulevard in

Tampa, Florida indicated that four (4) of the materials assessed were found to contain

asbestos in amounts greater than one (1) percent. These materials are four (4) types of

Category I non-friable materials in the form of two (2) types of vinyl floor tile with mastic,

roof flashing material and a tar and gravel roofing system.

If these materials will be disturbed, they must be removed by a State of Florida Licensed

Asbestos Abatement Contractor properly prior to renovation activities which may disturb

the materials. Alternatively, these materials may remain in place, provided that they are

not impacted.

Please note, limited destructive evaluation of the ceramic tile located at floor areas was

conducted at the occupied building. If additional materials, not described in this report, are

discovered during upcoming renovation activities they must be evaluated prior to disturbing

the materials.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section

1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................... 1

2.0 FACILITY DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................... 3

3.0 SURVEY METHODS AND LABORATORY ANALYSIS ............................................ 4

4.0 SUSPECTED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS .. : ........................................ 5

5.0 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS ............................................................................. 6

6.0 CONCLUSIONS ...................................................................................................... 14

APPENDIXAAPPENDIX BAPPENDIX CAPPENDIX D-

LIST OF APPENDICES

2011 LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS - PSI 2017 LABO RA TORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS - GE SITE MAP CERTIFICATIONS

GE Project No. 2699-0100

1.0 INTRODUCTION

A survey for asbestos-containing materials (ACMs) was conducted by Greenfield

Environmental, Inc. (GE) at the MacDill Air Force Base Exchange Building - Furniture

Store, Main Corridor, Food Court, Kitchen, UPS Store, Fixture Storage Room and select

Exterior & Roof areas located at 3108 North Boundary Boulevard in Tampa, Florida. The

survey was performed on January 4th & 13th, 2017 by Nicholas Barron, Accredited EPA

Asbestos Inspector. GE is a Florida Licensed Asbestos Consulting Firm with a

corresponding license number of ZA-0000268. Additionally, PSI conducted asbestos

inspections in July and August of 2011 at select areas within the Exchange Building. Select

information reported in the July 22nd and August 17th, 2011 NESHAP Renovation Survey

were utilized to complete this report.

The survey was conducted in order to identify any asbestos-containing materials which

may exist at the site in accordance with the National Emissions Standard for Hazardous

Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Regulation. Every reasonable effort was conducted to evaluate

accessible suspect building materials at the occupied areas.

More specifically, our scope of services for this project consisted of the five following

steps: Site Walk-Through and Observations,

Bulk Sampling of Suspect ACMs,

Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) Analysis of Bulk Samples,

Hazard Assessment and Evaluation, and

Final Report Development.

1


The findings of this report represent Greenfield Environmental, lnc.'s (GE) best

professional judgement and no other warranty is expressed or implied. This report is

intended only for the use of H. Michael Bohnsack Architects and its agents and affiliates.

The contents should not be relied upon by any other parties without the expressed written

consent of GE.

2


2.0 FACILITY DESCRIPTION

The subject areas in the Exchange Building consist of the furniture store, the main corridor,

the public restrooms, the kitchen/food court areas, the UPS Store and fixture storage room.

The structure was observed to be constructed of metal, concrete and brick on a concrete

slab foundation. Interior finishes consist of drywall, vinyl base cove, vinyl wall covering,

ceiling tile, concrete flooring, ceramic tile, vinyl floor tile and carpeting. The HVAC systems

were split systems with fiberglass flex-duct, fiberglass ductboard and sheet metal duct. The

roof consists of a rolled roofing system, tar and gravel roofing and roofing mastic. The

exterior is finished with brick and stucco.

3


3.0 SURVEY METHODS AND LABORATORY ANALYSIS

The sampling conducted in this asbestos survey was performed in accordance with Title

40, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 763 for suspectACMs. The EPA regulations

require that sample locations be randomly selected. All suspect asbestos-containing

materials and PACM (materials presumed to contain asbestos under the OSHA Asbestos

Rule, 29 CFR 1910) were identified and samples of each different material were obtained.

The bulk sampling procedure utilized for collection of suspect samples required the

establishment of homogeneous sampling areas. A homogeneous sampling area is defined

as an area of friable or non-friable material of similar type that appeared to be applied or

installed during the same general period of time. All sample locations were identified with

numbers corresponding to those listed in Section 5.0 " Description of Materials" of this

report.

Samples which were collected from these pre-determined homogeneous sampling areas

were labeled and transported to Air Quality Environmental, Inc. (NVLAP No. 200957-0)

for analysis. All samples were analyzed using EPA approved Polarized Light Microscopy

(PLM) coupled with dispersion staining. Properties such as refractive indices, birefringence,

sign of elongation and extinction angle are unique to crystalline asbestos forms and are

used to identify the type of asbestos mineral as chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite,

anthophyllite, tremolite or actinolite. Percentages of the identified types of asbestos are

determined by visual estimation. Attempts are made to mix the sample thoroughly to

provide a more accurate percentage. Any material containing greater than one percent

(1 %) by weight of any type of asbestos is considered by the EPA to be an ACM and if

disturbed must be handled according to specific regulations.

4

GE Project No. 2699-01 OD

4.0 SUSPECTED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS

The following is a summary of the materials sampled and tested during the survey and

evaluation of the Exchange Building - Furniture Store, Main Corridor, Food Court, Kitchen,

UPS Store, Fixture Storage Room and select Exterior & Roof Areas:

• Ceramic Tile with Grout and Thin-set

• Drywall Systems

• Terrazzo Flooring

• Mastic Wrap with Foam Glass Insulation

• Duct Mastic

• Vinyl Base Cove with Mastic

• Vinyl Floor Tile with Mastic

• Ceiling Tile

• Vinyl Wall Covering with Mastic

• Textured Ceiling Deck System

• Rolled Roofing System

• Gypsum Roof Deck

• Roofing Mastic

• Stucco

• Tar and Gravel Roofing

• Caulking

• Brick and Mortar

• Roof Flashing Material

5


5.0 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS

The following is a description of the materials sampled at the Exchange Building - Furniture

Store, Main Corridor, Food Court, Kitchen, UPS Store, Fixture Storage Room and select

Exterior & Roof Areas:

Homo. Sample Description/ Asbestos Fri ability

Approx. Area Number Location Content

Condition Quantity

I Main Corridor & Public Restrooms I 03 04 Drywall System Located at the Walls and No

01 05 Select Ceilings Throughout the Corridor Asbestos Friable Good ------112 and Public Restrooms Detected 113

GW White Duct Mastic Located at the Duct No Non- BG Seams at the Upper Ceiling Areas Asbestos

Friable Throughout Detected

GOJ White 2' x 4' Dot and Fissure Pattern No EJBG Ceiling Tile Located at the Ceilings Asbestos Throughout Detected

Brownish Tan with Blue, Red & Orange

81 Ceramic Tile with Grout and Thin-set No

Non-04 Located at the Floors in the West, Central Asbestos Good ------

82 and the Northern Section of the East Detected

Friable

Corridor

800 Off-white Ceramic Tile with Grout and No Non- BG Thin-set Located at the Southern Section Asbestos

Friable of the East Corridor Floors Detected

Blue Ceramic Tile with Grout and Thin-set

104 Located at the Soda Storage Room No

Non-06 Adjacent to the Northeast the Charley's Asbestos Good ------

105 Philly Steaks and in the Corridor Adjacent Detected

Friable

to the Southwest of Charley's Philly Steaks

Light Blue Ceramic Tile with Grout Located No

Non- BG 800 Asbestos 107 at the Public Restroom Walls

Detected Friable

6


§ Sample

I Description/

I Asbestos

Friability Condition Approx.

Number Location Content Quantity a

BS Off-white Gray Speck Patterned Ceramic No Non- BB 109

Tile with Grout Located at the Public Asbestos Friable

Restroom Floors Detected

BOO Orange Ceramic Tile with Grout and Thin- No Non- BB 111

set Located at the Corridor Wall Base Asbestos Friable

Areas Detected

151 Brick and Mortar Located at Select Interior

No 10 152 Asbestos

Non-Good ------

153 Wall areas

Detected Friable

I Furniture Store I 06 07

Drywall System Located at the Walls and No

11 119 Asbestos Friable Good ------

120 Select Ceiling in the Furniture Store

Detected 121

[][][] White Terrazzo Located at the Floors (Top No

Non- BB Asbestos Layer) - Excluding Southeast Closet

Detected Friable

[] 11 Tan Terrazzo Located at the Floors

No Non- BB PSl21 7/11

(Bottom Layer) Asbestos

Friable PSl22_7/11 Detected

12 White Wrap with Mastic Located at the

No Furniture Store Mechanical Room and the Non-

14 13 Asbestos Good ------14

Mechanical Room Adjacent to the Detected

Friable

Furniture Warehouse

GOD White Duct Mastic Located at the Duct No

Non- BB Asbestos Seams at the Upper Ceiling Areas

Detected Friable

8[0 Brown Vinyl Base Cove with Mastic No

Non- BB Asbestos Located at Southeast Storage Room Walls

Detected Friable

[J[JJ Dark Tan/Brown 12" x 12" Vinyl Floor Tile No Non- BB with Mastic Located at the Southeast Asbestos

Friable Storage Room Floors Detected

7

GE Project No. 2699-01 oo

§ Sample

I Description/

I Asbestos

Fri ability Condition Approx.

Number Location Content. Quantity a

[][][] White 2' x 4' Dot Pattern Ceiling Tile No BBB Asbestos

Located at the Ceilings Throughout Detected

[][][] White 12" x 12" Vinyl Floor Tile with Mastic No Non- BB Located at the Northwest Employee Area Asbestos

Friable Floors Detected

[][JD Gray Vinyl Base Cove with Mastic Located No Non- BB at the Walls in the Northwest Employee Asbestos

Friable Area Detected

122 Dark Gray Vinyl Base Cove with Tan No

Non-21 Mastic Located at Furniture Store Sales Asbestos Good ------

123 Floor Wall Areas Detected

Friable

Food Court & Kitchen (Including Manchu Wok, Charley's Philly Steaks, Taco Bell, Anthony's Pizza, Subway, UPS Store Offices and Storage Rooms)

[][JD Tan Ceramic Tile with Grout and Thin-set No Non- BB Located at the Customer Side of the Asbestos.

Friable Service Counter at Manchu Wok Detected

0 Gray Ceramic Tile with Grout and Thin-set No Non- BB PSl14_8/11 Located at the Serving area Wall in Asbestos

Friable Manchu Wok Detected

34 35

36 No

37 Drywall System Located at the Walls and 24 Asbestos Friable Good ------

38 Select Ceilings Throughout the areas Detected

PSl16_8/11 PSl17 _8/11 PSl18 8/11 000 White 2' x 4' Dot and Worm Pattern Ceiling No BBB 40 Tile Located at the Central Storage and Asbestos

41 Central Kitchen Ceiling areas Detected

8ITJ Brown Mastic Wrap Located at the Upper No Non- BG West Upper Ceiling AC Room in the Asbestos

Friable Kitchen Detected

8


§ Sample

I Description/

I Asbestos



[][]] White Mastic Wrap Located at the Upper No Non- BB West Upper Ceiling AC Room in the Asbestos

Friable Kitchen Detected

[][TI Gray HVAC Mastic Located at the South No Non- BB Duct Seams in the West Upper Ceiling Air Asbestos

Friable Handler Room in the Kitchen Detected

Gray Tile -No

Asbestos Detected

Yellow Mastic - No

Gray Vinyl Floor Tile over Tan Vinyl Asbestos

50 Detected 350 29 51

Floor Tile with Mastics Located at the Non-Good Square

Southwest Corridor Floor Area in the Friable 52

Kitchen Tan Tile - Feet

No Asbestos Detected

Black Mastic -3% Chrysotile Asbestos

[j 53 Gray Vinyl Floor Tile with Yellow Mastic No B 54 over White Vinyl Floor Tile with Tan Mastic

Asbestos Non-

Good 55 Located at the Southeast Corridor Floor

Detected Friable

114* Areas in the Kitchen

[][}] Brown/Orange Ceramic Tile with Grout and No Non- BB Thin-set Located at the Floors and Wall Asbestos

Friable Base Areas in the Kitchen areas Detected 8[I] White 2' x 2' Drywall Ceiling Tile Located at No EJBG 59 Charley's Philly Steaks, Taco Bell, Asbestos

60 Anthony's Pizza and Subway Ceiling areas Detected

Pink 12" x 12" Vinyl Floor Tile over Tan No BG 61 Vinyl Floor Tile with Yellow Mastics Non-

33 62 Located at the North Office Floor (Top

Asbestos Friable

Layer) in the Kitchen Detected

9


§ Sample

I Description/

I Asbestos



White with Blue Fleck Patterned 12" x 12" No

63 Vinyl Floor Tile over Tan Vinyl Floor Tile Non-34

64 with Yellow Mastics Located at the South Asbestos Good ------

Detected Friable

Office Floor (Top Layer) in the Kitchen

Tile - No Brown 12" x 12" Vinyl Floor Tile with Asbestos

65 Black Mastic Located as a Single Layer Detected 300 35 66 in the Southeast Storage Closet and at

Non-Good Square

67 the Bottom Layers in the North and Mastic - 4% Friable

Feet South Office Floors in the Kitchen Chrysotile

Asbestos

GOJ Black 6" Vinyl Base Cove with Tan Mastic No Non- BG Located at Select Walls in the Kitchen Asbestos

Friable Corridor Detected

GOO Gray 4" Vinyl Base Cove with Yellow No Non- BG Mastic Located at Select Walls in the Asbestos

Friable Kitchen Corridor Detected

GITJ White HVAC Mastic Located at the No Non- BG Fiberglass Insulated Metal Duct at the Asbestos

Friable Upper Ceiling in the Kitchen Detected

GOO Yellow Textured Ceramic Tile with Grout No Non- BG and Thin-set Located at the Bathroom Asbestos

Friable Walls in the Kitchen Detected

GCD Light Brown Ceramic Tile with Grout and No Non- BG Thin-set Located at the Bathroom Floors in Asbestos

Friable the Kitchen Detected

CJ[IJ Gray Ceramic Tile with Grout and Thin-set No Non- BG Located at the Floors and Wall Base Areas Asbestos

Friable in Charley's Philly Steaks Detected

Brown Treaded Ceramic Tile with Grout No

85 and Thin-set Located at the Serving, Non-42 Asbestos Good ------

86 Kitchen and Dishwashing Area Floors in Detected

Friable Manchu Wok GOD White 2' x 4' Drywall Ceiling Tile Located at No EJBB 88 the Ceiling Throughout (Excluding the East Asbestos

89 Storage Area) in Manchu Wok Detected

10


§ Sample

I Description/

I Asbestos



90 White HVAC Mastic Located at the Duct

No Seams at the Upper Ceiling Areas in Non-


Manchu Wok, Charley's Philly Steaks and Detected

Friable the UPS Store

93 White 12" x 12" Vinyl Floor Tile over White

No Vinyl Floor Tile with Yellow Mastics Non-


Located at the East Storage Area Floors in Detected

Friable Manchu Wok

c:J[J[] White Tile Pattern Vinyl Wall Covering with No Non- BG White Mastic Located at Select Wall Areas Asbestos

Friable in the Manchu Wok and Kitchen Detected

99 White 2' x 2' Dot Pattern Ceiling Tile No 47 100 Located at the East Storage Ceiling Areas Asbestos Friable Good ------

101 in the Manchu Wok and in the UPS Store Detected

c:J[J[J Black 4" Vinyl Base Cove with Tan Mastic No

Non- BG Asbestos 103 Located at the UPS Store Walls

Detected Friable

GOO Vinyl Wall Covering with Tan Mastic No Non- BG 116

Located at Select Wall Areas in the Asbestos Friable

Kitchen and Charley's Philly Steaks Detected

GOO Tan Carpet Mastic Located at UPS Store No

Non- BG Asbestos 118 Floor Areas

Detected Friable

c:J[J[J White Ceramic Tile with Grout and Thin- No Non- BG 158

set Located at Select Wall Areas in the Asbestos Friable

Kitchen Detected

GOO Brown Caulking Located at the Window No

Non- BG Asbestos 160 Seams at the Entry to the UPS Store

Detected Friable

G 151 Brick and Mortar Located at Select Interior

No Non- BG 152

Wall areas Asbestos

Friable 153 Detected

11


Homo. Sample Description/ Asbestos Friability Condition

Approx. Area Number Location Content Quantity

I Fixture Storage Room I Textured Ceiling Decking System Located

124 at the Ceiling Areas Throughout (This No 53 125 Material is also Present at the Ceiling in Asbestos

Non-Good ------

126 the Mechanical Room Adjacent to the Detected Friable

Class XI Store)

I Exterior and Roof Areas I Gray Rolled Roofing System with Light

127 Weight Insulation over Styrofoam No Non-

54 128 Insulation Located at the Roof over The Asbestos Good ------129 Furniture Store, the South Adjacent Detected

Friable

Hallway and Fixture Storage Room

[] 130 Gypsum Roof Decking Located at the Roof

No EJB 131 over The Furniture Store, the South

Asbestos Non-

132 Adjacent Hallway and Fixture Storage

Detected Friable

Room (Under HA#53)

GOO Black Roofing Mastic Located Along the No Non- BB . 134 Roof Perimeter at Patch areas over the Asbestos

Friable Furniture Store Detected

[] 135 Black Roofing Mastic Located at

No B 136 Equipment and Pitch Pan Flashing areas

Asbestos Non-

Good

137 over the Kitchen and Charley's Philly

Detected Friable

Steaks areas

GOO Black Roofing Mastic Located at Select No Non- BB 139

Flashing areas over the Manchu Wok and Asbestos Friable

Charley's Philly Steaks areas Detected

G 140 Gray Rolled Roofing Located at the No Non- BB 141 Western Entry Canopy Roof and Flashing Asbestos

Friable 142 Areas on the North Side of the Structure Detected

8 Black Roof Flashing Material Located at

10% EJ 75 the Western Entry Canopy Roof

Chrysotile Non-

Square PSl210_7/11 Flashing Areas on the North Side of the Friable

Asbestos Feet Structure (Under HA#58)

12


§ Sample

I Description/

I Asbestos



Black Tar -10%

Chrysotile Tar and Gravel Roofing System Located Asbestos

625 61 PSl211_7/11

at the Western Entry Canopy Roof and Non-Good Square

Flashing Areas on the North Side of the Gray Friable Feet

Structure (Under HA#58) Insulation -No

Asbestos Detected

G 143 Stucco Located at the Ceiling areas of the

No BBB 144 Asbestos 145 Two (2) North Entry Canopies

Detected

G 146 Tar and Gravel Roofing System Located at No Non- BB 147 the Eastern Canopy Roof on the North Asbestos

Friable 148 Side of the Structure Detected

c:JOD Brown Caulking Located at the Metal Roof No Non- BB 150

Seams and Vent over the Manchu Wok Asbestos Friable

area Detected

G 151 Brick and Mortar Located at Exterior Wall

No Non- BB 152 Asbestos

153 areas Throughout

Detected Friable

8 154 Black Caulking Located at the Exterior No Non- BB 155 Window Seams at the Food Court Dining Asbestos

Friable 156 area Detected

Note-Quantities are provided for convenience only and shall not be used for any bidding purposes.

*This sample was collected for confirmatory purposes in order to verify that a mastic material, which appeared to be black mastic, was not present at the subject floor area. No asbestos containing black mastic was found in the confirmatory sample.

13


6.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

The results of our observations and laboratory testing at the MacDill Air Force Base

Exchange Building - Furniture Store, Main Corridor, Food Court, Kitchen, UPS Store,

Fixture Storage Room and select Exterior & Roof areas located at 3108 North Boundary

Boulevard in Tampa, Florida indicated that of the one hundred seventy-three (173)

samples assessed, four (4) of the materials sampled were found to contain asbestos in

amounts greater than one (1) percent.

Category I non-friable asbestos-containing materials were discovered during our survey

in the form of two (2) types of vinyl floor tile with mastic, tar and gravel roofing system and

a roof flashing material. Category I non-friable asbestos-containing materials are those in

which the asbestos fibers are bound with other materials in such a way that the release of

those fibers into the air from casual contact or normal wear is unlikely. If these materials

are left undisturbed, they present a low threat to release harmful asbestos fibers.

The asbestos containing materials detected may remain in place, provided that they are

not disturbed. If these materials are to be disturbed during upcoming renovations they

must be removed by a State of Florida Licensed Asbestos Abatement Contractor prior to

any disturbance. Proper notification must be provided to the local regulatory agency prior

to asbestos abatement activities.

14

PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS

The discussions and conclusions contained in this asbestos survey have been prepared

and reviewed by the following certified professionals.

Project Manager

AHERA Inspector #6216421

~~-1 Michael W. Rothenburg, PE b Florida Licensed Asbestos Consultant

#EA0000041

APPENDIX A

2011 LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS - PSI

Altrl: Kartov!eky CufaNmiet ID: PROF bl PSI- Professional CllSWf''IC!

5801 Benjanlin Center Reco1¥Bd: oen.sm /\M

Suite 112 EMSL t'.)der 17i10443B

Tampa, Fl 33834 Fax: Z49·030i Phone: (813} 800· 1075

EMSL Pr-0ject MCSSffurnlturo Store/Clan Six

Analysis Da!ff 8/i5J20H

Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Burk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/1'16 Method using Polarized light Microscopy

1() HI/AC !vlas1lc

i'l MVAC Mas!ic

Floor rno

White

l\kln·Fitrous Horrogn110ous

While

Non-fihmus Ht•mogeneotJs

Beige t~n·fibmus Ho1nngrm0ous

Seig<? Non· flbfOHS Hbnxtptn Kl GUS

(<uy

~Jo11·F1brnus Hornogenaout,

Roct!Slnck ¥kln~Fibrcus

Homof)eneous

< 1 % Cellulose

100% l\klnAlbrous (o1Jher)

100% Non-f!Nous (olher)

~ % Type

PSI~ Profes1!iiiom~I Service Industries 5801 Benjarnin Center Drive Suite 112 Tampa, f L .,.,{),.'.)"'t

nx Project

Cui,lor1101 ID: CV'iltli\Y;\I

Recd\/12d:

EMSL Order

EMSLPror

Analysis Da!e:

PROF(;:/

08115!!1 S;;l{l At.I

1711044:38

8115/2011

Test Report: Asbestos Analysis Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R .. 93/116 Method using

156

Polarized Light Microscopy

Grout

Thin Se!

Orywall

Black

t'kin· Flbrous Hormgene0us

CA'ay Non-Fibrous K::,lmogeneous

Gray!Tan

Fibrous HeiCffOfJ&fl&OUS

\Nhile

Non-Fibrous Kornogenoous

Grny!Tar1 Fibrous Heterogeneous

Joif11 COil1flOIJl1d While

f'.bn·Fibmvs Hon.,geneous

% Fibrous

< i % Celluklse

t;eiliJ!ose

G4rns

W<'in~nu;ly \~~· ~'1li;1tt

othf:r ;;;:proved ngn;iioi y

~~% Type

Keith Kartovicky PSI~ Professional Sr:u·vf ce 5601 Benjamin Centf.tr Suite 112 Tampa, Fl 33634

249-0301 Phone: MCSS!Furniture Stor?IC!ass Six

CU$I0!11dr

Cus(()ffk;J;I PO,

Rece:\~CI:

EMSL Order

EMSL Pror

Date;

06115/11 !:t30 AM

17110443£!

8!15/201'1

Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials vla EPA 600/R .. 93/116 Method using Po&arized light Microscopy

11fl/)44JIMflfl!

C,,raylTzm

fibrous m!er Q\101'1COVS

While f-.bn-Fibrous 1"%lr1'10lf&l'W±fl!JS

WhHnfBk1ck ~kin-F1t:rotts Hn!omgerieous

Non- flbr<Am mn»geneous

Minllc Wrnp W!1ite Non-f1tm:Jus mmogornious

Fitlrnus Heterogeneous

15% Cefloklse

<4°;;, Giass

45'1;, Glass

l fr% Cellulose

Keith Kartovicky PSI~ Professional Service tndustries 5801 Benjamin Center Drive Suite 112 Tampa, fl 33634

Phone: (613) 88&1075

MCSS f furniture Store I Class Six i Future Subway Macdiil AFB Tal'flPll

Cui;to!l'1er 10: Customer PO:

Received: EMSL Order:

EMSL

Analysis Date:

FROF02

00121111 12:00 PM

i7111J3402

8/22/2011

Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R~931116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy

Sample Ot.scriptkm Appearance % fibrous % Non· fibrous % Type

20B Viny! Floor Tile 100% Notrfil:lrOUB Norw Detected

t / ~ h<dfl2°00?D.B NorH'ibrous Honmgeooous

we Mastic Yellow 1CKFio hbn·fil:lfOUS (other} None Detected

No:>Film:ms H'.imogeneous

21 Tarrazo Ukc Whitr 100% Nofl·Hbrous \other) f\l()ne OetBCtwd Fooring i'lOP·Fibwus

Homogeneous

22 Tarrazo WMe 100% Non·fibmus (other) None Detected Fk:x:mng Non·Flbrous

Homogeneous

23 G!ue 100% Non-fibrous (olhef) None Oet«:md

hbn·f1bmus Hommjtlneous

24 G!ue HlO'/t, t'<hn-fibmus None Oetaeted

Non-Fibrous Horrogeooous

N;;tasha Montoya (55)

i ~ ! :

Att(r Keith Kartovicky cuslomm to PROH.l2 PSI ~ Professional Strvice industries Customer f•O

5801 Benjamin Center Odva Receiv;,'il 0012?!1 I 9.45 AM

Suitt 112 EMSlOrdor: ff'lHl35BS

Tampa, FL 33634 Fax (1.113} 24~0301 P!iooe: {812!} i18!M075

EMSI Pr~: MCSSifumlturb Storn!Class Slxffutura Subway

AM!yll!s Date: 512712011

Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Sulk Materials via EPA 600/R-931116 Method using Polarized light Microscopy

203 13r1ck

200

! " 1(!35&84100!)

210 ~/ ~ tQJfdiH'JOfll

212

Gray

Noo·Fibroos

Nun·F1l'!mvs I lcleroganeous

D!oct

Fibrous Ha!efogen11oos

White

Noo·flbrous

~-Qi

% iype

K1ml'!cfly Wallace, laoon~101y Manager er olhet appmvt;(J signatory

APPENDIX B

2017 LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS - GE

9.125 Seminole Boulevard. Seminole, Florida 33772 (727} 398-0900 FAX (727) 39g_0996

Client Name: Greenfield Environmental 432 3rd Street North St. Petersburg, Florida 33701

Project Name:

Date Analyzed:

H Michael Bohnsack Architects #2699-0100 MacDill Air Force Base - X Change Bldg January 10, 2017

Asbestos Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method· PLM I OS - EPA Method - 600/R-93/116 - EPA 600/M4-82-020 ILab# Client# Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers

336617 1 Ceramic Tile tan tile NAO gray grout NAO

336618 2 Ceramic Tile tan tile NAO gray grout NAO

336619 3 Drywall System wht compounds NAO drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose drywall powder NAO 4% Cellulose

4% Glass Fibers

336620 4 Drywall System wht compounds NAO drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose drywall powder NAO 4% Cellulose

4% Glass Fibers

336621 5 Drywall System wht com pounds NAO drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose drywall powder NAO 4% Cellulose

4% Glass Fibers

336622 6 Drywall System wht com pounds NAO drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose drywall powder NAO 4% Cellulose

4% Glass Fibers

336623 8 Building Material white NAO

336624 9 Building Material white NAO

336625 10 Building Material wht I gray I tan NAO

336626 11 Building Material white I tan NAO

336627 12 Insulation wht mastic NAO 25% Glass Fibers 5% Cellulose

blk foam glass NAO

tThese samples were analyzed by layers. Specific layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA considers a rnateri81 to bo asbestos containing only if it contains mere than 1 % asbestos by Calibrated Visual Arna Estimation (CVAE). EPA regulations also indicate that Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials which are friable or may become friable, be further analyzed by point coLmting when the results indicate less than 10% asbestos by CVAE. Air Ouali!y Environmental utilizes CVAE on a rolltine basis and does not include counting unless specifically requested. Additionally, these results may not be reproduced except in ftJIL This report is to be interpreted only by the person (s) whom have collected the samples. Furthermore, this report may not be used as a claim to product certification, approval or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any other agency of the Federal Government. tFloor Tile end other resinous Iv bound materials, when because of limitations in separating closely bound lioers and in detecting of small leng{h a definitive result is required, AQE recommends utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmissiun Electron Microscopy,

Lab File Number: 39140 Analysis Pages 1 of 8

% Binders

100% Quartz and Binders 100% Quartz and Binders


100% Carbonates and Binders

92% Gypsum and Binders











70% Binders

100% Glass

Analyzed by:

NVLAP Lab Code 200759-0

I

Client Name: Greenfield Environmental


Project Name:

Date Analyzed:

H Michael Bohnsack Architects #2699-0100 MacDill Air Force Base - X Change Bldg

January 10, 2017

Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method: PLM I OS - EPA Method 600/R-93/116

!Lab# Client# Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers 336628 13 Insulation wht mastic NAO 25% Glass Fibers

5% Cellulose blk foam glass NAO

336629 14 Insulation wht mastic NAO 25% Glass Fibers 5% Cellulose

blk foam glass NAO

336630 15 Mastic white NAO 3% Cellulose



336633 18 Cove Base brown base NAO yellow mastic NAO

336634 19 Cove Base brown base NAO yellow mastic NAO

336635 20 Flooring tan tile NAO tan mastic NAO



336638 23 Ceiling Tile white I tan NAO 45% Cellulose 20% Mineral Wool



336641 26 Flooring white tile NAO yellow mastic NAO tan compound NAO 6% Cellulose

336642 27 Flooring white tile NAO

yellow mastic NAO tan compound NAO 2% Cellulose

tThese samples were analyzed by layers, Specific layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant The EPA considers a material to be asbestos containing only if it contains more than 1 % asbestos by Calibrated Visual Area Estimation (CVAE), EPA regulations also indicate that Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials which are friable or may become friable, be further analyzed counting when the results indicate less than 10% asbestos by CVAE. Air Quality Environmental

% Binders 70% Binders

100% Glass

70% Binders

100% Glass

97% Binders

97% Binders

95% Binders

100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders





35% Perlite and Binders



100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 94% Carbonates and Binders


100% Binders 98% Carbonates and Binders

utilizes CVAE on a basls and does not include point counting unless specifically requested, Additionally, these results Analyzed by: may not be reproduced except in full. This report data is to be mterpreted only by the person {s) whom have collected the samples, Furthermore, this report may not be used as a claim to product certification, approval or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any other agency of the Federal Government · tFloor Tile and other resincusly bound materials, when analyzed by EPA method, may yield false neg alive results because of /~-· -- -. limitations in separating closely bound fibers and in detecting fibers of small length and diameter. When a definitive result is required, AQE recommends utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmission Electron Microscop\'

Lab File Number: 39140 Analysis Pages 2 of 8 NVLAP Lab Code 200759-0

I


Project Name:

Date Analyzed:

H Michael Bohnsack Architects #2699-0100 MacDill Air Force Base - X Change Bldg January 1 O, 2017

Ab t s es os, B lk S u I A I ampe na1ys1s d P M OS P OR3/6 P60/ Test Metho : L I - E A Method - 60 I -9 11 - E A 0 2 2 M4-8 -0 0 !Lab# Client# Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers

336643 28 Flooring white tile NAO yellow mastic NAO tan compound NAO 2% Cellulose

336644 29 Cove Base gray base NAO tan mastic NAO





336649 34 Drywall System wht compound NAO drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose drywall powder NAO 6% Cellulose


336651 36 Drywall System wht com pound NAO drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose drywall powder NAO 6% Cellulose


336653 38 Drywall System wht compound NAO

drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose drywall powder NAO 6% Cellulose

336654 39 Ceiling Tile white I tan NAO 45% Cellulose

10% Mineral Wool


tThese samples were analyzed by layers. Specific layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA considers a material to be asbestos containing only if it contains more than 1 % asbestos by Calibrated Visual Area Estimation (CVAE). EPA regulations also indicatu lhat Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials which are friable or may become friable, ba further analyzed by point counting when the resulls indicate less than 10% asbestos by CVAE. Air Quality Environmental utilizes CVAE on a routine basis and does not include uniess specifically requested, Additionally, these results may not be reproduced except in f1;IL This report is to be only by the person (s) whom have collected the samples. Furthermore. this report may not be used as a claim to certification, approval or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any other agency o! !he Federal Government tFloor Tile and other resinouslv bound materials, when by EPA method. may yield false negaHve results because of limitations in separating closely bound fibers and in detecting of srnall length and diameter. When a definitive result is required, AQE recommends utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmission Electron Microscopy.


% Binders

100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 98% Carbonates and Binders


















r Analyzed by: ! \ /


I


Project Name:

Date Analyzed:


Asbestos Bulk Sample Analysis , Test Method: PLM I OS - EPA Method - 600/R-93/116 - EPA 600/M4-82-020

!Lab# Client# Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers % Binders

336656 41 Ceiling Tile white I tan NAO 45% Cellulose 45% Perlite and Binders 10% Mineral Wool

336657 42 Insulation wht/brn mastic NAO 25% Glass Fibers 70% Binders 5% Synth. Fibers

blk foam glass NAO 100% Glass





336661 45 Insulation white mastic NAO 100% Binders blk foam glass NAO 100% Glass

336662 46 Insulation white mastic NAO 100% Binders blk foam glass NAO 100% Glass

336663 47 Insulation white mastic NAO 100% Binders


336664 48 Mastic gray NAO 100% Carbonates and Binders

336665 49 Mastic gray NAO 100% Carbonates and Binders

336666 50 Flooring gray I blk tile NAO 100% Carbonates and Binders

yellow mastic NAO 100% Binders

tan tile NAO 100% Carbonates and Binders

black mastic 3% Chrysotile 97% Bitumen and Binders

336667 51 Flooring Not Analyzed, Stop At First Positive

I 336668 52 Flooring Not Analyzed, Stop At First Positive

336669 53 Flooring gray I blk tile NAO 100% Carbonates and Binders yellow mastic NAO 100% Binders

yellow tile NAO 100% Carbonates and Binders

tan mastic NAO 100% Carbonates and Binders

tTl«;se samples were analyzed by layers. Specific layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA considers a material to be eSbestos containlng only if it contains more than asbestos by Calibrated Visual Area Estimation (CVAE). EPA regulations also indicate that Regulated Asbestos Containing which are friable er may become Mable, be further analyzed counting when the results indicate less than 10% asbestos by CVAE. Air Quality Environmental utilizes CVAE. on a basis and does not include unless specifically requested. Additionally, these results may not be reproduced except in full. Tl)is r0port is to be only by the parson (s) wt1om have collected the

r Analyzed by:

t samples. Furthermore, this report may not be used as a claim to certification, approval or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST orany other agency oflhe Federal Government tFloor Tile and other resinously bound materials, when results because of limitations in separating closely bound fibers and in detecting of srnall leng\h a defini!ive result is required, AQE recommends utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmission Electron Microscopy.


I


Project Name:

Date Analyzed:


Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method: PLM I OS - EPA Method - 600/R-93/116 - EPA 600/M4-82-020 !Lab# Client# Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers

336670 54 Flooring gray I blk tile NAO yellow mastic NAO yellow tile NAO tan mastic NAO

336671 55 Flooring gray I blk tile NAO yellow mastic NAO yellow tile NAO tan mastic NAO

336672 56 Ceramic Tile brown tile NAO black grout NAO white mastic NAO

336673 57 Ceramic Tile brown tile NAO black grout NAO white mastic NAO

336674 58 Ceiling Tile surfacing NAO drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose drywall powder NAO 3% Cellulose

3% Glass Fibers


3% Glass Fibers


3% Glass Fibers

336677 61 Flooring pink tile NAO tan tile NAO yellow mastics NAO

336678 62 Flooring pink tile NAO tan tile NAO yellow mastics NAO

336679 63 Flooring white tile NAO tan tile NAO

yellow mastics NAO tThasa samples were analyzed by layers. Specific layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA corisiders a materiol to be asbestos containing only if it contains more than 1 % asbestos by Colibrated Visual Arna Estimation (CVAE). EPA regulations also indicate that Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials which are friable or may become friable, be further analyzed by point counting when the results indicate less than 10% asbestos by CVAE Air Quality Environmental Lililizes CVAE on a routine basis and does not include unless specifically requested. Additionally, these results may not be exc.ept in fulL This report is to be only by the person (s) whom hnve collected the samples. this report may not be used as a claim to certification, approval or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST or any other agency ol the Federal Government tFloorTile and other resinously bound materials, when analyzed by EPA method, false negalive results because o! Hmita!ions in separating closely bound fibers and in detectin9 Fibef'5 of small length diameter, When a definitive result is requ!red,AQE recommends utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmission Electron Microscopy.


% Binders

100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders


100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders

100% Quartz and Binders 100% Quartz and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders


100% Binders

94% Gypsum, Mica, Binders

100% Binders


100% Binders


100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders



100% Binders

( Analyzed by:


I


Project Name:

Date Analyzed:


Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method: PLM IDS - EPA Method - 600/R-93/116 - EPA 600/M4-82-020 !Lab# Client# Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers

336680 64 Flooring white tile NAD tan tile NAD yellow mastics NAD

336681 65 Flooring tan tile NAD black mastic 3% Chrysotile

336682 66 Flooring Not Analyzed, Stop At First Positive

I 336683 67 Flooring Not Analyzed, Stop At First Positive

336684 68 Cove Base black base NAD tan mastic NAD

336685 69 Cove Base black base NAD tan mastic NAD

336686 70 Flooring gray vinyl NAD white vinyl NAD yellow mastics NAD

336687 71 Flooring gray vinyl NAD white vinyl NAD yellow mastics NAD

336688 72 Mastic wht mastic wrap NAD 25% Glass Fibers 20% Cellulose 10% Synth. Fibers

336689 73 Mastic wht mastic wrap NAD 25% Glass Fibers 20% Cellulose 10% Synth. Fibers

336690 74 Mastic wht mastic wrap NAD 25% Glass Fibers

20% Cellulose 10% Synth. Fibers

336691 75 Ceramic Tile yellow tile NAO grout NAD mastic NAD

336692 76 Ceramic Tile yellow tile NAD

grout NAD mastic NAD

tThese samples were analyzed by layers. Specific layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA considers a rnatorial to be asbostos containing only if H contains mom than i % asbestos by Calibrated Visual Area Estimation (CVAE). EPA regulations also indicate that Regulate-OAsbestos Materials which are friable or may become friable, be further analyzed by point counting when the results indicate less than asbestos by CVAE. Air Quality Environmental utilizes CVAE on a routine basis and does not include un!ess specifically requested. Additionally, these results may not be reproduc.ed except in full. This report is to be only by the p<:<rson (s) whom have collected the samples. Furthermore, this report may not be used as a claim to certification, approval or endorsement by NVlAP, NIST or any other agency ol the Fede rat Government tFloor Tile and other resinously bound materials, when analyzed by EPA method, iaise results because o! limitations Fl separating closely bound fitJers and in \letecting fibers of small length diameter. a definitive result is required, AQE recommends utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmission Electron Microscopy.


% Binders


100% Carbonates and Binders 97% Bitumen and Binders





45% Foil and Binders



100% Quartz and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders

100% Quartz and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders

Analyzed by:

Giles Microscopist


I


Project Name:

Date Analyzed:

H Michael Bohnsack Architects #2699-0100

MacDill Air Force Base - X Change Bldg January 10, 2017

Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method· PLM IDS - EPA Method - 600/R-93/116 - EPA 600/M4-82-020 !Lab# Client# Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers

336693 77 Ceramic Tile tan tile NAO grout NAO

th inset NAO

336694 78 Ceramic Tile tan tile NAO grout NAO th inset NAO

336695 79 Ceramic Tile gray tile NAO grout NAO

336696 80 Ceramic Tile gray tile NAO grout NAO

336697 81 Ceramic Tile brown tile NAO grout NAO th inset NAO

336698 82 Ceramic Tile brown tile NAO grout NAO th inset NAO



336701 85 Ceramic Tile brn I blk tile NAO grout NAO

th inset NAO

336702 86 Ceramic Tile brn I blk tile NAO grout NAO th inset NAO

336703 87 Ceiling Tile surfacing NAO


3% Glass Fibers

336704 88 Ceiling Tile surfacing NAD drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose drywall powder NAO 3% Cellulose

3% Glass Fibers fThese samples were analyzed by layers. Specific layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA considers a material to bo asbestos containing only if it contains more than 1 % asbestos by Colibratoo Visual Area Estimation (CVAE). EPA regulations also indicate that Regul<1ted Asbestos Containing Materials which are friable or may become triable, be further analyzed by point counting when the results indicate less than 10% asbestos by CVAE. Air Quality Environmental utilizes CVAE on a routine basis and does not include requested. Additionally. these results may not bE> reproduced except in fulL This report is to oo person whom have collected the samples. Furthermore, this report may not be used as a claim to or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any other agency of!he Federal Government

and other resinousiv bound materials, when false negative results because of hmii,o,ti(m< in separating closely bound WJers and in detecting of small km9th diameter. When a definitive result is required, AQE recommends ulilizing altema!ivt~ methods of identification, including Transmission Electron Microscopy.


% Binders 100% Quartz and Binders 100% Quartz and Binders 100% Quartz and Binders

100% Quartz and Binders 100% Quartz and Binders 100% Quartz and Binders



100% Quartz and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Quartz and Binders

100% Quartz and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Quartz and Binders





100% Binders


100% Binders


, Analyzed by: ! \


I


Project Name:

Date Analyzed:


Asbestos Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method: PLM I OS - EPA Method - 600/R-93/116 - EPA 600/M4-82-020

!Lab# Client# Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers


3% Glass Fibers

336706 90 Mastic white NAO



336709 93 Flooring white tiles (2) NAO yellow mastics NAO



336712 96 FRP white panel NAO 55% Glass Fibers white mastic NAO






336718 102 Cove Base black base NAO tan mastic NAO

336719 103 Cove Base black base NAO tan mastic NAO

tThese samples were analyzed by layers_ Speciftc layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant The EPA considers a material to be :Jsboslos containing only if it contains more than 1 % asbestos by Calibrated Visual Area Estimation (CVAE). EPA regulations also indicate that Regulated Asbestos Materials which are friable or rnay become friable, be further analyzed by point COLmling when the results indicate less than asbestos by CVAE. Air Quality Environmental utilizes CVAE on a routine basis and does not include point counting unless specifically requested. Additionally, these results may not bEt reproduced except in fulL This report data is to be interpreted only by the person (s) whom have collected the samples. Furthermore, this report may not be used as a claim to produd certification, approval or endorsement by NVLAP. N !ST or any other agency ot the Federai Government. tFloor Tile and other resinousiy bound materials, when analyzed by EPA method, may yield false negalive results because ol limitations in separaling closely bound fibers and in detecting fibers oi small length and diameter. When a definittve result is required,AQE recommends utilizing alternative methods of idi,mtiftcation, includino Transmission Electron Microscopy_


% Binders

100% Binders














100% Binders 100% Binders


( Analyzed by:

Microscopist


I

A iur (~.a H ty ]E inrv[iro mumiernta ll, Inc. · Lahoratori' Services

9325 Seminole Boulevard, Seminole. Florida 33772 (727) 398-0900 FAX {727) 398-0996

Client Name: Greenfield Environmental 432 3rd Street North

St. Petersburg, Florida 33701

Project Name:

Date Analyzed:

H. Michael Bohnsack Architects #2699-0100

MacDill Air Force Base - Exchange Bldg, Tampa January 17, 2017

Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method· PLM IDS - EPA Method - 600/R-93/116 - EPA 600/M4-82-020


337402 7 Drywall System wht com pound NAD

drywall mat NAD 100% Cellulose drywall powder NAD 4% Cellulose

4% Glass Fibers

337403 104 Ceramic Tile tan I blue tile NAD

grout NAD

337404 105 Ceramic Tile tan I blue tile NAD

grout NAD th inset NAD

337405 106 Ceramic Tile gray tile NAO grout NAD

th inset NAD

337406 107 Ceramic Tile gray tile NAD

grout NAD

th inset NAD

337407 108 Ceramic Tile gray tile NAO

grout NAD th inset NAO

337408 109 Ceramic Tile gray tile NAD

grout NAD

th inset NAO

337409 110 Ceramic Tile wht I brn tile NAD

grout NAD

337410 111 Ceramic Tile wht I brn tile NAD grout NAO

337411 112 Drywall System wht compounds NAO drywall mat NAD 100% Cellulose

drywall powder NAD 4% Cellulose 4% Glass Fibers

tThese samples •,vere analyzed by layers. Specific layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA considers a material to be asbestos containing only if it contains more than 1 % asbestos by Calibrated Visual Area Estimation (CVAE). EPA regulations also indicate !hat Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials which are friable or may become friable, be further analyzed by point counting when the results indicate less than 10% asbestos by CVAE. Air Quality Environmental utilizes CVAE on a routine basis and does not include unless specifically requested. Additionally, these results may not be reproduced except In full. This report is to be only by the person (s) whOm hove collected the samples. Furthermore, this report may not be used as a claim to certification, approval or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any other agency of the Federal Government. tFloor Tile and other resinously bound materials, when analyzed by EPA method, false because of limitations ~n separ<:ding closely bo1,.md fibers and in detecting fibers of srna!l k:ngfr1 diameter. a definitive result is required, AQE recommernfa utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmission Efedron Microscopy.


% Binders



100% Quartz and Binders




100% Quartz and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders






100% Quartz and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders

100% Quartz and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders



Analyzed by:

Microscopist


I


Project Name:

Date Analyzed:

H. Michael Bohnsack Architects #2699-0100 MacDill Air Force Base - Exchange Bldg, Tampa January 17, 2017

Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method· PLM I OS - EPA Method 600/R-93/116 I Lab# Client# Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers

337412 113 Drywall System wht compound NAO


2% Glass Fibers

337413 114 Flooring tan mastic NAO white tile NAO gray material NAO

337414 115 FRP white panel NAO 45% Glass Fibers tan mastic NAO

337415 116 FRP white panel NAO 45% Glass Fibers tan mastic NAO

337416 117 Mastic yellow NAO

337417 118 Mastic yellow NAO

337418 119 Drywall System wht compound NAO drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose

drywall powder NAO 4% Cellulose 4% Glass Fibers

337419 120 Drywall System wht com pound NAO drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose drywall powder NAO 4% Cellulose

4% Glass Fibers

337420 121 Drywall System wht compound NAO drywall mat NAO 100% Cellulose

drywall powder NAO 4% Cellulose 4% Glass Fibers



337423 124 Stucco gray I white NAD

337424 125 Stucco gray I white NAO

tThese ssmples were analyzed by layers. Specific layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA considers a materiel to be asbestos containing only if it contains more than 1 % asbestos by Calibrated Visual Area Estimation

EPA regulations also indicate that Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials wructl are friable or may become friable, analyzed by point counting when !he results indicate less than 10% asbestos by CVAE. Air Quality Environmental

utilizes CVAE on a rout\ne basis and does not include point counting unless specifically requested~ Additionaiiy, these results may not be reproduced except in fulL This report data is to be interpreted only by the person (s) whom have collected the samples. Furthermore. this report may not be used es a claim to product certification. approval or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or 1rny other agency of the Federal Government. tFloorTile end other re<\inously bound materials, when analyzed by EPA method, may yield false negetive results because of limitations in separating closely bound fibers and in detecting fibers of small length and diameter. When a definitive result is requirect,AOE recommends utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmission Electron Microscopy.


% Binders



100% Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Quartz and Binders



100% Binders

100% Binders











Analyzed by:


I



Project Name:

Date Analyzed:


Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method: PLM IDS - EPA Method - 600/R-93/116 - EPA 600/M4-82-020 I Lab# Client# Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers % Binders

337425 126 Stucco gray I white NAO 100% Quartz and Binders

337426 127 Roofing Material blk I wht layer NAO 25% Synth. Fibers 75% Bitumen and Binders black layers NAO 30% Glass Fibers 70% Bitumen and Binders black mastic NAO 100% Bitumen tan insulate NAO 100% Cellulose foam insulate NAO 100% Synthetics



337429 130 Roofing Material black shingle NAO 35% Glass Fibers 65% Bitumen and Binders

black mastic NAO 100% Bitumen wht compound NAO 100% Gypsum and Binders

337430 131 Roofing Material black shingle NAO 35% Glass Fibers 65% Bitumen and Binders black mastic NAO 100% Bitumen wht com pound NAO 100% Gypsum and Binders

337431 132 Roofing Material black shingle NAO 35% Glass Fibers 65% Bitumen and Binders black mastic NAO 100% Bitumen

wht compound NAO 100% Gypsum and Binders

337432 133 Mastic black NAO 5% Cellulose 95% Bitumen and Binders

337433 134 Mastic black NAO 3% Cellulose 97% Bitumen and Binders

337434 135 Mastic black NAO 100% Bitumen

337435 136 Mastic black NAO 100% Bitumen

337436 137 Mastic black NAD 100% Bitumen

tThese by layers. Specif:c layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA consldens a matoriai to bo cont1lining only If it contains more than 1 % ashastos by Calibrated Visual Arna Estimation (CVAE). EPA regulations also indrcate that Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials which are friable or may become triable. be further analyzed cOLmting when the results indicate lass than 10% asbestos by CVAE. Air Quality Environmental ulilizes CVAE on a basis and does not include point counting unless specifically requested. Additionally. these results rnay not be except in foll. This report dato is to be interpreted only by the person (s) whom have collected the

: Analyzed by: i \

samples. this report may no! be used as a claim to product certification, approval or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any other agency of !he Federal Government tFloor Tile and other resinous!y bound materials, when analyzed by EPA method, false negative results because of !irnitations in separating closely bound fibers and in detecting "fibers of srnaii length diameter. VVhen .a definitive result ls required,AQE recommends utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmission Electron Microscopy,


I



Project Name:

Date Analyzed:

H. Michael Bohnsack Architects #2699-0100

MacDill Air Force Base - Exchange Bldg, Tampa January 18, 2017

Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method: PLM IDS - EPA Method - 600/R-93/116 - EPA 600/M4-82-020 !Lab# Client# Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers

337437 138 Roofing Material brn I slv layer NAO 20% Synth. Fibers 10% Cellulose

black mastic NAO

337438 139 Roofing Material brn I slv layer NAO 20% Synth. Fibers 10% Cellulose

black mastic NAO

337439 140 Roofing Material blk I wht layer NAO 25% Glass Fibers

wht material NAO 40% Glass Fibers





337442 143 Stucco texture NAO gry I wht stucco NAO

337443 144 Stucco texture NAO

gry I wht stucco NAO

337444 145 Stucco texture NAO gry I wht stucco NAO

337445 146 Roofing Material blk gravel mat. NAO 5% Glass Fibers

tan material NAO 85% Cellulose





337448 149 Caulk brown NAO

337449 150 Caulk brown NAO

337450 151 Ceramic Tile gray I red tile NAO

grout NAO

337451 152 Ceramic Tile gray I red tile NAO

grout NAO tThese samples were analyzed by layers. Specific layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA considers o motoriol to be osbostos containing only if it contoins mom than 1 % asbestos by Calibrated Visual Area Estimation (CVAE). EPA regulations also indicate that Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials which are friable or may become friable, be further analyzed by point when the results indicate less than 10% asbestos by CVAE Air Quality Environmental utilizes CVAE on a routine basis not include point counting unless specifically requested. Additionally, these results may not be repmdw:-.ed except rn foll. Ttiis report data is to be interpreted only by the person (s) whom have collected the samples. Furthermore, this report may not be used as a claim to product certification, approval or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST orany other agency of the Federal Government. tFloor Tile and other resinousiy bound materials, when analyzed by EPA method, false results because of limitallons In separating closely bound fibers and in detecting fibers of small length diameter. a definitive reslll1 is required, AQE recommends utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmission Electron Microscopy.


% Binders

70% Bitumen and Binders

100% Bitumen


100% Bitumen

75% Bitumen and Binders 60% Gypsum and Binders






95% Bitumen and Binders 15% Perlite


15% Perlite


15% Perlite







Analyzed by:

Microscopist


I


Project Name:

Date Analyzed:


Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method: PLM IDS - EPA Method - 600/R-93/116 - EPA 600/M4-82-020


337452 153 Ceramic Tile gray I red tile NAD grout NAD

337453 154 Caulk black NAD

337454 155 Caulk black layer NAD gray layer NAO

337455 156 Caulk black layer NAD gray layer NAD

337456 157 Ceramic Tile white tile NAD yellow mastic NAD

337457 158 Ceramic Tile white tile NAD yellow mastic NAD

337458 159 Caulk brown NAD 6% Synth. Fibers

337459 160 Caulk brown NAO 6% Synth. Fibers

tThese samples were analyzed by layers. Specific layer or component asbestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA considers a material to be asbestos containing only if it contains mom than 1 % asbestos by Calibrated Visual Area Estimation (CVAE). EPA regulations also indicate that Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials which are friable or may become friable. be further analyzed by point counting when the results indicate less than 10% asbestos by CVAE. Air Quality Environmental utilizes CVAE on a routine basis and does not include point counting unless specifically Additionally, these results may not b& reproduced except in full. This report data is to be interpreted the (S) whom have collected the samples. Furthermore, this report may not be used as a claim to product approval or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST or any other agency ol tha Faderal Government. tFloor Tile and other resinously bound materials. when analyzed by EPA method, false negaiive results because of limitetions in separating closely bound fibers and in detecting fibers of small length diameter. When a definitive restJlt is required, AQE recommends utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmission Electron Microscopy.


% Binders


100% Binders



100% Quartz and Binders 100% Binders

100% Quartz and Binders 100% Binders

94% Binders

94% Binders

r Analyzed by: \ \

Giles Microscopist


I

APPENDIX C

SITE MAPS

Nick Barron

Polygon

Nick Barron

Rectangle

Nick Barron

Rectangle

Nick Barron

Rectangle

Nick Barron

Text Box

SITE MAP WITH LOCATIONS OF ACMs

Nick Barron

Polygon

Nick Barron

Rectangle

Nick Barron

Text Box

LOCATION OF HA#35

Nick Barron

Rectangle

Nick Barron

Text Box

LOCATION OF HA#60 & 61

Nick Barron

Rectangle

Nick Barron

Text Box

LOCATION OF HA#29

Nick Barron

Polygon

Nick Barron

Text Box

SUBJECT SURVEY AREA

APPENDIX D

CERTIFICATIONS

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION FORASBESTOS ABATEMENT INSPECTIONSGREENFIELD ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.

432 3rd STREET NORTHSt. Petersburg, Florida 33701

(727) 896-1266

Project: Project Number:

Work Area:

PRE-CLEARANCE VISUAL INSPECTION - DATE COMPLETED:

The work area was visually inspected by GE representative:

The work area passed the pre-clearance visual inspection.

The work area failed the pre-clearance visual inspection and must be re-inspected after the followingdefects have been addressed:

PCM CLEARANCE AIR SAMPLING - DATE COMPLETED:

The following samples were collected and analyzed:

Sample Number: Sample Number: Sample Number: Results: Results: Results: All samples were below EPA standard of 0.010 fibers per cubic centimeter.

All samples were not below EPA standard of 0.010 fibers per cubic centimeter. The work area needsto have the following deficiencies corrected prior to the collection of additional final air samples:

ADDITIONAL COMMENTS:

INDUSTRIAL HYGIENIST SIGNATURE : PRINT :

Forms/ABSvisualInspecSheet_MacDill

hhenke

Typewritten Text

ATTACHMENT 1

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONDITIONS Section 02181– HAZARDOUS WASTE STREAM ASSESSMENT

HAZARDOUS WASTE STREAM ASSESSMENT 02181-1

1. GENERAL


A. Base Bid:


a. Verification of data and existing conditions. b. Demolish hazardous materials in accordance with requirements indicated. c. At Contractor’s option, perform additional hazardous materials investigation

at own expense upon approval by Contracting Officer.



1. Section 01000 – Requirements of MacDill AFB. 2. Section 01010 – Summary of Work. 3. Section 01045 – Cutting & Patching 4. Section 01320 – Construction Progress Schedules. 5. Section 01420 – AAFES Environmental Protection. 6. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 7. Section 02083 – Asbestos Abatement. 8. Division 15 – Mechanical. 9. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Demolition of building materials, components and systems identified in this Section as potentially hazardous waste stream materials shall require special precautions for packaging, transportation and legal disposal or recycling as potentially hazardous waste as specified in Section 02070, Selective Demolition, in accordance with the requirements of MacDill AFB BCE Environmental and in strict compliance with Rules and Regulations of the State of Florida.

C. By others:

1. AAFES has caused a non-destructive hazardous waste stream survey and other hazardous materials evaluations to be performed at the existing Exchange Building in area anticipated to be disturbed under this Project.

2. This hazardous waste stream survey was performed by:

a. Greenfield Environmental. 432 3rd Street North

St. Petersburg, Florida 33701 Phone: (727) 896-1266 E-mail: [email protected]

3. Results of this non-destruction hazardous waste stream survey are presented in the "HAZARDOUS WASTESTREAM ASSESSMENT AT THE MACDILL AIR FORCE BASE-EXCHANGE BUILDING (FURNITURE STORE, MAIN CORRIDOR, FOOD COURT, KITCHEN, UPS STORE) LOCATED AT 3108 NORTH BOUNDARY BOULEVARD IN TAMPA FLORIDA" with on-site inspection performed on 04 and 13 January 2017 by Nicholas Barron.

HAZARDOUS WASTE STREAM ASSESSMENT 02181-2

4. Materials, components and systems surveyed are included in this Section for informational purposes only:

a. Neither AAFES, the Contracting Officer nor the Architect-Engineer can guarantee the accuracy, validity or conditions from the information presented.

b. Neither AAFES, the Contracting Officer nor the Architect-Engineer assume any responsibility for the Contractor’s interpretation of the information presented.

1.3 SURVEY INFORMATION

A. Information shown on the following pages is bound herein for the offerer’s benefit.

1. Offerers shall realize the possible variation of conditions related to the non-destructive nature of this Survey and information presented.

2. Contractor shall assume responsibility for any conclusions interpreted from the data and shall be responsible for any consequences of acting on conclusions obtained.

B. The complete hazardous waste stream survey is bound on the following 6 pages with the following major Table of Contents:

A. LETTER TO A-E, Pages 1-2.

B. APPENDIX A CHECKLIST COVER, Page 3.

C. BUILDING DECOMMISSIONING VISUAL CHECKLIST, Page4.

D. APPENDIX B OSHA HAZWOPER CERTIFICATION, Page 5.

E. CERTIFICATION-Nicholas Barron, Page 6.

END 02 81 10.

January 19, 2017

H. Michael Bohnsack Architects Mr. Harlen Bohnsack Principal/Owner 600 West Main Street, Suite 2 Carbondale, Illinois 62901

Greenfield Environmental

RE: HAZARDOUS WASTESTREAM ASSESSMENT AT THE MACDILL AIR FORCE BASE-EXCHANGE BUILDING (FURNITURE STORE, MAIN CORRIDOR, FOOD COURT, KITCHEN, UPS STORE) LOCATED AT 3108 NORTH BOUNDARY BOULEVARD IN TAMPA, FLORIDA

Dear Mr. Bohnsack:

Greenfield Environmental, Inc. (GE) has completed the assessment of the visually accessible hazardous wastestreams present at the above referenced building areas. The assessment activities were conducted on January 4th & 13th, 2017 by Nicholas Barron of GE. Mr. Barron is trained and certified by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) for working with hazardous materials.

The purpose of this survey was to assess for the presence, extent, and condition of potentially hazardous materials such as fluorescent lights, ballasts, hydraulic door closers, mercury containing switches and other wastes at the building areas to be renovated.

The wastestream assessment was performed at the furniture store, main corridor, public restrooms, food court, kitchen, UPS Store areas. No other structures or areas were inspected as part of this evaluation.

The following potentially hazardous building materials were viewed during our assessment: fluorescent light bulbs, ballasts, exit lights, HVAC systems, transformers, hydraulic door closers, fire extinguishers and walk-in coolers containing refrigerants. The hazardous materials viewed all appeared to be in good condition. The exact refrigerants used at the mechanical systems and walk-in coolers are not known. See the attached visual checklist for quantities of the potentially hazardous materials

Please note, the exact quantity of transforms to be decommissioned is unknown. Any transformers that are to be demolished have the potential to contain PCB's and must be disposed of in compliance with State of Florida regulatory requirements. Additionally, cleaning chemicals in the kitchen and electronic office equipment were observed in the kitchen and furniture store. It is the understanding of GE that these materials are to be relocated and that these chemicals and electronic equipment will be repurposed upon occupancy.

432 3rd Street North, St. Petersburg, FL 33701 • Phone: 727.896.1266 • Fax: 727.896.1566

This wastestream assessment report has been prepared by GE in a manner consistent with industry standards. All quantities listed in this report are approximations based on our multiple site visits. Under no circumstances is this survey to be utilized as a proposal, scope of work, or project specification document.

GE is pleased to have been of assistance to you on this project and we look forward to working with you in the future. If you have any questions or if we can be of any further service, please do not hesitate to call us at (727) 896-1266.

Sincerely,

GREE7' ENVIRONMENTAL, INC.

I

Nicho~rr_oi:vProject Manager

2699-01 OO_Wasteletter Enclosure

APPENDIX A

CHECKLIST

GREENFIELD ENVIRONMENTAL, INC. BUILDING DECOMMISSIONING VISUAL CHECKLIST

Project#: 2699-0100 Date:01/04 & 13/2017

All quantities listed in this checklist are approximations based on our multiple site visits:

Fluorescent Lights: Yes No Quantity: 1425

Ballasts: Yes No Quantity: 500

Misc Exterior Lights: Yes No Quantity:

Mercury Vapor Lights: Yes No Quantity:

Thermostat Switches: Yes No Quantity:

HVAC Refrigerants: Yes No Quantity: 2 (Furniture Store & Kitchen)

(Air Handler Systems)

Walk-in Coolers: Yes No Quantity: 3 (Kitchen & Manchu Wok)

(Refrigerants)

Storage Tanks: Yes No AST UST

Hydraulic Door Closures Yes No Quantity: 14

(Oil)

Exit Signs Yes No Quantity: 18

(Batteries & Bulbs)

Lead Roof Vents: Yes No Location:

Alarm System Batteries: Yes No Quantity:

Misc Office Equipment: Yes No Location: Various (to be Relocated)

Fire Extinguishers: Yes No Location: 8

Miscellaneous Drums Yes No Quantity: Various (to be Relocated)

or Containers:

APPENDIX B

OSHA HAZWOPER CERTIFICATION

I fie m on

Nicholas Barro11,

has satisfactorily passed an exam and completed an 8-hour annual refresher training course entitled Hazardous \Vaste Operations and Emergency Response meeting the :requirements identified in Title 29 CFR 191 OJ20.

This course has been awarded 1.34 Industrial Hygiene CM Points by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene-Approval Number 13334. This course is also eligible for .66 Continuance of Certification

(COC) points from the Board of Certified Safoty Professionals.

April 11, 2016

Certificate Number

662225

www, nationalenvircmmentaltrainers. com

Sui.nature of Instructor

Clay Bednarz;, MS,

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02282 – TERMITE CONTROL

TERMITE CONTROL 02282-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. General Contractor Provide:

a. Soil treatment of new floor slab areas. b. Retro-treatment of substructure for termite control in all renovated areas of

the building receiving new topping or overlay type floor finishes. c. Furnish certifications of EPA compliance. d. Testing services certifying application rates. e. Warranty.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01010 – Project Summary. 2. Section 01041 – Project Coordination. 3. Section 01045 – Cutting & Patching. 4. Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services. 5. Section 01620 – Storage & Protection. 6. Section 02200 – Earthwork. 7. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions.

B. Certification: Furnish written certification certifying that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Regulations for Termiticides.

C. Testing Service: Provide and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to certify termiticide application rates and submit observation data.


A. In addition to requirements of these specifications:

1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. 2. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for preparation of substrate and

application.

B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution.

C. Use only termiticides that bear a Federal registration number of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations.


B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather.

C. Fully comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer.

1.6 SPECIFIC PRODUCT WARRANTY

A. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites.

1. If subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re-treat soil.

2. Repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

B. Warranty shall be for a period of 5 years from date of treatment, signed by Applicator and General Contractor.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION

A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites that is EPA registered and complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutent. 2. Provide a solution consisting of one of following chemical elements and

concentrations:

a. TalstarOne: 0.6 percent in water emulsion, FMC Corporation, Philadelphia, PA 19103.

b. Premise 75: 0.5 percent in water emulsion, Bayer Corporation, Kansas City, MO 64120.

c. Termidor SC: 0.6 percent in water emulsion, BASF Corporation, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.

B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if also acceptable to the Contracting Officer or designated representative and approved for intended application by jurisdictional authorities.

C. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not injurious to planting.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter that could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated.

1. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations.

2. Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

B. Under new slab-on-grade areas treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the following rates of application:


1. Apply 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet to soil in critical areas under existing and new slab-on-grade construction, including:

a. Entire perimeter inside of foundation walls. b. Along both sides of interior partition walls. c. Around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab. d. Around interior wall footings.

2. Under new slab areas:

a. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 square feet to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material.

b. Apply 1 gallon of chemical solution per 10 square feet as an overall treatment under slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel.

C. Under existing and patched slab-on-grade construction within all floor areas that receive new topping or overlay type finishes under this Project retro-treat listed building elements at the following rates of application:

1. Under patched slab areas for utility trenches:

a. Apply 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet to areas where fill is pipe bedding gravel, washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material.

2. At interior perimeters of existing slab areas:

a. Apply chemical solution by drilling and rodding existing floor slab at not more that 12" on center and applying chemical solution to attain application rate of 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet.

3. At interior expansion joints, interior walls and pipe penetration areas:

a. Apply chemical solution by drilling and rodding existing floor slab at not more than 12" on center and applying chemical solution to attain application rate of 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet.

4. At exterior perimeter of building paved areas:

a. Apply chemical solution by drilling and rodding existing floor slab at not more than 12" on center and applying chemical solution to attain application rate of 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet.

5. At exterior perimeter of building lawn areas:

a. Dig a trench 6" to 8" wide along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 12".

b. Rod holes in backfill to top of footing at not more than 12" o.c. and apply chemical solution to attain application rate of 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet for each foot of depth from grade to footing.

c. Mix chemical solution with the soil as it is being replaced in trench.

D. General Contractor shall neatly patch all holes drilled in existing concrete floor slabs and paved areas to match surrounding materials in type, depth and appearance.

E. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied and remove signs when areas are covered by other construction.

F. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, or other construction activities following application.



A. Prime General Contractor shall provide certified documentation on Contractor's letter head that specified application rates were met or exceeded by termite control applicator.

B. Documentation shall be signed by both Prime General Contractor and applicator and submitted with warranty in O & M Data submitted at Project closeout.

END 02282.

DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK Section 02300 – EARTHWORK

EARTHWORK 02300-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Excavation and backfill for new concrete site paving. b. Drainage fill course for support of building and paving slabs. c. Excavation and backfill for utility trenches. d. Excavation, pipe bedding and backfill for site utility services. e. Coordination of testing laboratory services for compaction of fill materials.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide additional earthwork as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building:

a. Excavation and backfill related to excavation and compaction for new footings and foundations related to entry portal and wall infill.

b. Placement and compaction of sub-base and base course materials related to new sidewalk paving.

C. Option Proposal 2:

1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide additional earthwork as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

a. Excavation and backfill related to excavation and compaction for new footings and foundations related to entry portal and wall infill.

b. Placement and compaction of sub-base and base course materials under new sidewalk paving.

D. Option Proposal 3:

1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide additional earthwork as indicated at exterior area directly west of the new Food Court (original Furniture Store) of the original 1972 Commissary Building and east of the Exchange Retail area of the 1978 Exchange Building.

a. Excavation and backfill related to excavation for driveway and parking area. b. Placement and compaction of sub-base and base course materials under

new sidewalk paving.

E. Option Proposal 4:

1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide additional earthwork as indicated for under slab sanitary sewer piping in the new Women’s Public Toilet, Optometry/Optical, south Food Concept Preparations areas, and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms behind the new Food Court.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. 01051 – Grades, Lines & Levels.

EARTHWORK 02300-2

2. 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 3. 01400 – Quality Control. 4. 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services. 5. 01420 – Environmental Protection-AAFES. 6. 02070 – Selective Demolition. 7. 02740 – Asphalt Concrete Paving. 8. 02750 – Site Concrete Work. 9. 02923 – Turf & Grasses (SOD).

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate earthwork with other work and with stages of construction to allow a uniform, orderly sequence of operations without delay to total project and without undue interference with construction and AAFES operations.

B. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative and MacDill AFB CE before starting work.

1. Identify existing and new utility lines and coordinate with utility owner. 2. Coordinate installation of rigid wall perimeter insulation and other items related to

the work.

1.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect benchmarks and existing structures; roads, sidewalks, paving and curbs designated to remain against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic.

B. Protect existing utility mains, services and lines against damage from excavation procedures.

C. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning or other methods to prevent cave-ins or loose dirt from falling into excavations.

D. Keep bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath excavations clean and dry from high groundwater. Provide the necessary dewatering and gravel bedding to maintain dry stable soil compaction.

E. Protect excavations from exposure to excessive water by grading to prevent surface water runoff into excavated areas.

F. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative immediately of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue work in area until Architect/Engineer issues written notification, confirmed in writing, to resume work.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Excavation: Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent stockpiling or disposal of materials removed.

B. Unauthorized Excavation: Unauthorized Excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect/Engineer.

C. Additional Excavation: Excavation required when unsuitable subgrade conditions dictate excavating to a deeper elevation.

D. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular subbase, drainage fill or topsoil materials.

EARTHWORK 02300-3

E. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, curbs or other man made stationary features occurring above or below ground surfaces.

1.6 REFERENCES & QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. American Association of State highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. AASHTO T 180 – Moisture-Density relations of Soils Using a 10-lb Rammer and an 18-in Drop.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D 1556 – Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.

2. ASTM D 1557 – Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 56,000 ft-lbf/ft.

3. ASTM D 2167 – Test method for Density and Unit weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method.

4. ASTM D 2487 – Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. 5. ASTM D 2922 – Test methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 6. ASTM D 3017 – Test methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures.

C. State of Florida – Department of Transportation (FDOT):

1. Office of Construction-Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.

a. The provisions for method of measurement and payment do not apply. b. Reference to “Engineer” and “State” shall be interpreted to mean “Contracting

Officer” and “Federal Government” respectively.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Site Information: Empirical data and building code minimum design values were used for the basis of the design.

1. Design based upon empirical data does not warranty of accuracy or continuity of soil at all areas of the Site.

2. The Contracting Officer, designated representative or the Federal Government will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn by Contractor.

3. Contractor may perform test borings and other exploratory operations, at his or her option and expense.

B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utility mains, services and lines in areas of excavation work.

1. If utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations.

2. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility Architect/Engineer immediately for directions.

a. Cooperate with the MacDill AFB CE, the Contracting Officer or designated representative and utility company in keeping respective services and facilities in operation.

b. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and utility owner.

EARTHWORK 02300-4

3. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed or found to be abandoned, in coordination with utility companies for shutoff of services, if lines are active.

C. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.

D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.

1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, pavements and other construction from damage

caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, equipment and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340.

B. Samples:

1. Submit 10-pound samples of existing soil and each type of fill to testing laboratory. 2. All sample containers shall be identified with the name of the material source.

1.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Specification Section 01400 – Quality Control and specification Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services: Testing and analysis of soil materials.

B. Testing and Analysis of Subsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557 and ASTM D2487.

C. Testing and Analysis of Topsoil Material: Composition testing as specified herein.

D. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

E. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor may use any hand or mechanical equipment and methods necessary for successful completion of work except explosives.

2.2 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Source: material classified below as Backfill, Fill Material and Select Materila shall be obtained from source outside of Ft. Hamilton.

B. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, SP, GC, SC, ML and CL.

C. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups MH, CH, OL, OH and PT.

EARTHWORK 02300-5

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1 ½” sieve and not more that 5 percent passing a number 4 sieve.

E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, wood, cellulose, organic materials and other deleterious matter subject to termite attack.

1. Subsoil used for fill shall be a fine-grained soil 50 percent or more of which passes a No. 200 sieve with a liquid limit of 50 percent or less.

F. Topsoil: Friable loam free from subsoil, roots, grass, excessive amount of weeds, stones and foreign matter; acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5; containing a minimum of 4% and a maximum of 25% organic matter.

1. Use topsoil on site conforming to these specifications where necessary to make repairs to lawn areas destroyed by construction activities.

2. Import suitable topsoil for lawn repairs if stockpiled quantity is inadequate to complete work.

G. Suitable subsoil material stockpiled on site may be used for fill.

H. Unsuitable subsoil material shall be removed from site.

I. If adequate subsoil has not been stockpiled, contractor shall import suitable subsoil material for filling.

1. Source of acceptable fill material shall be responsibility of contractor. Fill shall be from FDOT approve source of fill material.

2. Contractor shall submit material samples to Testing Laboratory for approval prior to importing subsoil to site.

3. Testing to determine optimum moisture content and maximum density shall be made when a barrow pit is opened or when material appears to change.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before any cuts are made, all destructive operation and demolition shall have been completed for areas where exterior wall repair work is scheduled to progress.

B. Identify specified lines, levels, contours and data; coordinate with 01051.

C. Identify known below grade utilities: stake and flag locations.

D. Identify and flag above grade utilities.

E. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area.

F. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed conditions, discontinue affected work.

1. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative immediately. 2. Confirm notification in writing.

3.2 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, filled, surfaced or built upon and stockpile in area designated on site.

EARTHWORK 02300-6

B. Do not excavate wet topsoil.

3.3 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated and transport to areas requiring fill or stockpile in area designated on site until required.

B. Do not excavate wet or frozen subsoil.

C. Excavation shall be scheduled and performed in a manner to allow orderly construction of building and structures indicated.

D. Excavating areas shall not impair usefulness of existing building and structures that are to remain and shall not present a hazard to persons or property.

E. Excavating areas shall not change general pattern of existing drainage and shall be drained by sloping or channeling uniformly to a drainage outlet.

3.4 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS

A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction.

1. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.

2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.

B. Provide materials for shoring and bracing where required by conditions encountered.

3.5 EXCAVATION REMEDIATION

A. Unauthorized excavation, as defined in paragraph 1.5, as well as remedial work directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative shall be at Contractor’s expense.

1. Under footings and foundation bases fill unauthorized excavation by:

a. Extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation.

b. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring subgrade elevations to proper height, when acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

2. In locations other than above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect/Engineer.

B. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations notify testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer to make an inspection of conditions.

C. If testing laboratory determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered.

3.6 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

EARTHWORK 02300-7

B. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations.

1. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations.

2. Provide and maintain pups, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

C. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rainwater and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas.

D. Trench excavations shall not be used as temporary drainage ditches.

3.7 DUST CONTROL

A. Contractor shall periodically sprinkle or spray with water all areas being worked on as required to control dust.

B. Water must be uniformly applied as a spray; the use of open-end hoses will not be allowed.

C. Extreme care shall be exercised when applying water to avoid raising moisture content beyond allowable limits.

3.8 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 feet.

B. Footing excavations:

1. Footing excavations shall be of dimension of footing where nature of soil stability will permit accurate cuts and square corners.

2. If soil stability dictates use of forms, extend a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal concrete formwork.

3. Allow sufficient clearance for installation of services, other construction and for inspection.

C. Do not disturb bottom of excavations.

1. Excavate to final grade by hand just prior to placement of reinforcing steel. 2. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other

work.

3.9 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet as directed by Architect and cover to protect from erosion.

1. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 3. Do not store within drip line of existing trees to remain.

B. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where directed by Architect as for topsoil.

EARTHWORK 02300-8

C. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and material not acceptable for use as backfill or fill.

3.10 UTILITY TRENCHING

A. Excavation:

1. Trenches shall be of the necessary width for proper laying of pipe, cables or ducts. 2. The banks of trenches shall be as nearly vertical as practical.

a. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of existing soil.

3. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be stock piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins.

a. All excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill shall be piled as necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations.

b. Any water accumulating in trenches shall be removed by pumping or by other approve methods.

4. The bottom of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing for entire length, except for the portions of pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for bedding bell holes and for the proper sealing of pipe joints and as hereinafter specified.

a. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall be dug after the trench bottom has been graded and in order that pipe rest on the prepared bottom for as nearly full length as practical.

b. Bell holes and depressions shall be only of such length, depth and width as required for properly making the particular type of joint.

5. Stone and rubble shall be removed as necessary to avoid point bearing. 6. Except as hereinafter specified for wet or otherwise unstable material, over-depths

shall be backfilled with materials specified for backfilling the lower portion of trenches.

a. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable material that is incapable of properly supporting the pipe is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such material shall be over excavated to a depth to allow for construction of stable pipe bedding.

b. The trench shall be backfilled to the proper grade with suitable approved materials.

B. Utility Pipe Bedding:

1. Provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4 except as specified herein.

a. Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density.

b. Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe.

2. Provide ASTM D 2321 materials as follows:

a. Class I: Angular, 0.25 to 1.5 inches, graded stone including a number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone and crushed shells.

EARTHWORK 02300-9

b. Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1.5 inches including various graded sans and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally granular and non-cohesive, either wet or dry.

1.) Soil Types GW, GP, SW and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487.

3.11 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits but not until completion of the following:

1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, waterproofing and perimeter insulation.

2. Inspection, testing, approval and recording location and depths of underground utilities.

3. Removal of formwork. 4. Removal of all shoring, bracing and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 5. Removal of trash and debris. 6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported

walls.

B. Backfill areas to contours, elevations and dimensions indicated, compacting each lift prior to placement of overlying lift.

C. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement.

D. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

E. Common fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers as specified herein.

1. Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors with mechanical hand tampers.

2. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to satisfactory moisture content. 3. Finish to a smooth surface by blade, rolling with a smooth roller, or both.

F. Backfill, Fill Material and Select Material:

1. Place and compact backfill material adjacent to structure as the structural elements are completed and accepted.

2. Backfill against concrete only when approved by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3. Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against structures.

G. Aggregate Base: Place and compact materials specified in Section 02750, Site Concrete Work and Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

H. Place topsoil in equal continuous layers as specified herein and where indicated, taking care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of utilities.

I. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

J. Maintain optimum moisture content of materials to attain required compaction density.

K. Backfill against supported foundation walls and structures or backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported walls until supports are in place.

EARTHWORK 02300-10

L. Provide a positive grade away from building a minimum of 2 inches in 10 feet unless indicated otherwise.

M. Make gradual grade changes and blend slope into level areas.

N. Remove surplus imported backfill materials completely off from government property and legally dispose.

O. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.

3.12 COMPACTION

A. Method of compaction and equipment used shall be at Contractor’s option but must produce acceptable results.

B. Compacting equipment and operations shall be coordinated with rate of placing so that required density is obtained.

C. Special care shall be exercised in compacting adjacent to structures and in sharp depressions.

1. Where such areas are inaccessible to compacting equipment being generally used, material shall be placed in 4-inch horizontal layers and uniformly compacted with suitable mechanical equipment.

2. Power-driven, rider-operated spreading, compacting, heavy equipment shall be kept a minimum of 4 feet away from building, sanitary sewer and storm drainage structures.

D. All subgrade material shall be compacted to not less than the following percentages of maximum standard laboratory dry density as determined by ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor) test methods:

1. Subgrade not supporting buildings or surfacing: 90 percent. 2. Subgrade supporting buildings or surfacing: 98 percent. 3. Subgrade supporting utilities: 95 percent 4. Areas requiring compaction to support buildings or surfacing shall extend a

minimum of 3 feet beyond limits of structure being supported.

E. Moisture Content: Within 2 percent of optimum moisture content determined in accord with ASTM D-1557.

1. If compaction is performed while moisture content of material is more or less than specified, additional operations as required to obtain required compaction shall be performed by Contractor.

2. No adjustment in price or contract amount will be allowed on account of any such additional work nor on account of delays occasioned thereby.

3.13 BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE

A. Drainage course consists of placement of drainage fill material, in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs.

B. Place drainage fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness.

1. When a compacted drainage course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single layer.

EARTHWORK 02300-11

2. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted.

C. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement operations.


A. Testing services shall be supervised by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida.

B. Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed.

C. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D2167 (rubber balloon method) as applicable.

D. Footing Subgrade:

1. For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform at least two tests to verify required design bearing capacities.

2. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

E. Foundation Wall Backfill: Perform at least ten field density tests at random locations and elevations as determined appropriate by the Testing Agency Engineer.

F. Building Slab Subgrade:

1. Perform at least one field density test of subgrade for every 500 square feet of building slab, but in no case fewer than five tests.

2. In each compacted fill layer, perform at least one field density test for every 500

square feet of overlaying building slab but in no case fewer than five tests.

G. If, based on testing service reports, inspection and review by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, subgrade fills that have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and testing until specified density is obtained.

3.15 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL

A. Distribution and removal of materials and equipment:

1. Remove and dispose of debris and unsuitable soil materials off site. 2. At completion of grading operations remove equipment from site.

B. Repair damage resulting from building excavation and backfill operations.

C. Leave stockpile areas and entire job site clean and raked, ready to receive topsoil and landscaping.

3.16 CLEANUP

A. Perform cleanup during installation of work and upon completion of work.

EARTHWORK 02300-12

B. Repair damage resulting from excavation operations to satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and MacDill AFB CE.

END 02300.

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK SECTION 02740 – ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02740-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this Section includes the following:

1. Aggregate base course. 2. Tack Coat. 3. Asphalt concrete paving wearing and binder course. 4. Surface sealer.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 2. Section 02300 – Earthwork 3. Section 02750 – Site Concrete Work.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide additional asphalt concrete paving work indicated at exterior area directly west of the new Food Court (original Furniture Store) of the original 1972 Commissary Building and east of the Exchange Retail area of the 1978 Exchange Building.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Federal Specifications (FS)

1. FS TT-P-1952B, Type 1 – Paint, Traffic and Airfield Marking, Waterborne 2. FS TT-B-1325C, Beads (Glass Spheres) Retro-Reflective

B. State of Florida, Department of Transportation (FDOT):

1. Office of Construction Administration – Construction and Material Specifications. a. The provisions for method of measurement and payment do not apply. b. Reference to “Engineer” and “State” shall be interpreted to mean “Contracting

Officer” and “Federal Government” respectively.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Paving: Designed for parking and movement of trucks up to 30,000 lbs.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 1340 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit product information and mix design.

C. Job Mix Design.

D. Certificates:

1. Provide certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports. 2. Certify that materials comply with specification requirements. 3. Signed by asphalt concrete producer and Contractor.



A. Perform work in accordance with FDOT Office of Construction Administration – Construction and Material Specifications, Latest edition.

B. Qualifications of Asphalt Concrete Producer: Use only materials which are furnished by a bulk asphalt concrete producer regularly engaged in production of hot-mix, hot-laid asphalt concrete.

1.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Job-mix Criteria:

1. Provide job-mix formulas for each required asphalt-aggregate mixture. 2. Establish a single percentage of asphalt cement to be added to aggregate, and a

single temperature at which asphalt concrete is to be produced. 3. Comply with the mix requirements of the FDOT Construction and Material

Specifications, Latest edition. 4. Maintain material quantities with allowable tolerances of the governing standards.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS.

A. Graded Aggregate Base Course.

1. FDOT 204 - Aggregate Base.

B. Asphalt.

1. FDOT 334 - Asphalt Concrete Pavements - General.

C. Primer.

1. FDOT 300 - Prime Coat.

D. Asphalt Concrete Surface Course – All Areas.

1. FDOT 901 - Course Aggregate.

E. Asphalt Concrete Base Course – Driveways and Heavy Duty.

1. FDOT 901 - Aggregate for Asphalt Concrete Base.

2.2 RECYCLED ASPHALT MATERIAL

A. Material:

1. Asphalt concrete mix may contain a 30% maximum percent by weight of the total aggregate material, reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP).

2. Material shall be in accordance with FDOT 401.4 – Reclaimed Asphalt Concrete Pavement.

3. The provisions of FDOT 401 – Asphalt Concrete Pavements - General shall apply except that the contractor has the option of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP). Maximum percentage of RAP shall follow MacDill AFB and UFC 3-250-01 standards.

B. Mix Design:

1. Mix design shall meet the requirements for the type of asphalt concrete specified.


2. Clearly state the viscosity of reclaimed asphalt cement, grade of new asphalt cement, properties of recycling agent if used, and percentage of each in the mix.

3. Furnish a new job mix formula for each change in percentage of RAP material used.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that compacted base course is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

3.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Provide size and quantity of equipment to complete the work specified within the project time schedule.

B. Bituminous Pavers: Self-propelled that spread hot asphalt concrete mixtures without tearing, shoving or gouging surfaces, and control pavement edges to true lines without use of stationary forms.

C. Rolling Equipment:

1. Self-propelled, steel-wheeled and pneumatic-tired rollers that can reverse direction without backlash.

2. Other type rollers may be used if acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

D. Hand Tools: Provide rakes, lutes, shovels, tampers, smoothing irons, pavement cutters, portable heaters, and other miscellaneous small tools to complete the work specified.

E. Bituminous Distributor:

1. Distributor shall be mounted on pneumatic tires of such size and number to prevent rutting, shoving or otherwise damaging the base surface or other layers in the pavement structure.

2. The distributor shall be designed and equipped to spray the bituminous material in a uniform coverage at the specified temperature, at readily determined and controlled rates with an allowable variation from the specified rate of not more than plus or minus 5 percent, and at variable widths.

3. Distributor equipment shall include a separate power unit for the bitumen pump, full-circulation spray bars, tachometer, pressure gages, volume-measuring devices, adequate heaters for heating for heating of materials to the proper application temperature, a thermometer for reading the temperature of tank contents, and a hand hose attachment suitable for applying bituminous material manually to areas inaccessible to the distributor.

4. The distributor shall be equipped to circulate and agitate the bituminous material during the heating process.

F. Power Brooms and Power Blowers:

1. Power brooms and power blowers shall be suitable for cleaning the surfaces to which the tack coat is to be applied.


3.3 TRANSPORTING

A. Transport asphalt concrete mixtures from mixing site in trucks having tight, clean compartments.

B. Coat hauling compartments with a lime-water mixture to prevent asphalt concrete mixture from sticking.

C. Elevate and drain compartment of excess solution before loading mix.

D. Provide covers over asphalt concrete mixture when transporting to protect from weather and to prevent loss of heat.

E. During periods of cold weather or for long distance deliveries, provide insulation around entire truck bed surfaces.

3.4 AGGREGATE PLACEMENT

A. Begin spreading base material at the point nearest the source of supply.

1. Permit traffic and hauling over the base. 2. Fill ruts formed by traffic and re-roll. 3. After base course placement, continue machining and rolling until surface is

smooth, compacted, well bonded, and true to the designed cross section. 4. Compact to 100 percent ASTM D 698 maximum dry density. 5. Maintain the base smooth and true to grade and cross section until bituminous

concrete placement.

B. Where the required thickness is more than 6 inches, the material shall be spread and compacted in 2 or more layers of approximately equal thickness, the maximum compacted thickness of any one layer not to exceed 6 inches.

C. When vibrating or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used, the compacted depth of a single layer of base course may be increased to 8 inches upon approval by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

D. Not more than one sample in every 5 shall have a density of less than that specified and the density of such sample shall not be more than 2 percent below that specified.

E. If the surface of the base becomes uneven, or distorted and sets up in that condition, it shall be scarified, reshaped and re-compacted.

F. If the sub-base, when compacted and shaped, shows a deficiency in thickness or if depressions occur in the surface, the Contractor shall scarify such sections before additional material is added and allowance will not be made for such scarifying.

3.5 PREPARATION OF SURFACE:

A. Immediately before applying the tack coat all loose material, dirt, clay, or other objectionable material shall be removed from the surface to be treated.

B. The area to be tacked shall also be dry and clean.


3.6 TACK COAT:

A. Quantities:

1. Bituminous material for the tack coat shall be applied in quantities of not less than 0.05 gallon per square yard nor more than 0.15 gallon per square yard of pavement surface.

2. The exact quantities within the range specified, which may be varied to suit field conditions, will be determined by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

B. Cutback Asphalt Application:

1. Cutback asphalt application temperature shall provide an application viscosity between 10 and 60 seconds, Saybolt Furol, or between 20 and 120 centistokes, kinematic.

2. The temperature viscosity relation shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

C. Application:

1. Following preparation and subsequent inspection of the surface, the tack coat shall be applied at the specified rate with uniform distribution over the surface to be treated.

2. All areas and spots missed by the distributor shall be properly treated with the hand spray.

D. Curing: Following application of the tack material and prior to application of the succeeding layer of pavement, the tack shall be allowed to cure and obtain evaporation of any volatiles or moisture.

E. Protection: Until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, and tacked area shall be maintained by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing the re-tacking deficient areas at no additional cost to AAFES.

F. Excess Material: If required, clean dry sand shall be spread to effectively blot up any excess bituminous material.

G. Cautions: No smoking, fires, or flames other than the heaters that are a part of the equipment shall be permitted within 25 feet of heating, distributing and transferring operations of bituminous material other than bituminous emulsions.

3.7 PLACEMENT

A. Install work in accordance with FDOT 334 - Asphalt Concrete Pavements – General.

B. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density.

1. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. 2. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

C. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks.

D. Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surface, spread and strike-off using paving machine.


E. Spread mixture at a minimum temperature of 225 degrees F.

F. Inaccessible and small areas may be placed by hand.

G. Place each course at thickness so that when compacted it will conform to the indicated grade, cross-section, finish thickness, and density indicated.

H. Hand Placing:

1. Spread, tamp, and finish mixture using hand tools in areas where machine spreading is not possible, as acceptable to Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2. Place mixture at a rate that will insure handling and compaction before mixture becomes cooler than acceptable working temperature.

I. Joints:

1. Carefully make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days work, to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining work.

2. All joints shall be sealed with a protective coating of liquid asphalt sealer. 3. Construct joints to have same texture, density and smoothness as adjacent

sections of asphalt concrete course. 4. Clean contact surfaces free of sand, dirt, or other objectionable material and apply

tack coat. 5. Offset transverse joints in succeeding course not less than 24 inches (600 mm). 6. Cut back edge of previously placed course to expose an even, vertical surface for

full course thickness. 7. Offset longitudinal joints in succeeding courses not less than 6 inches (150 mm). 8. When the edges of longitudinal joints are irregular, honeycombed, or inadequately

compacted, cut back unsatisfactory sections to expose and even, vertical surface for full course thickness.

3.8 COMPACTION

A. Provide sufficient rollers to obtain the required pavement density.

B. Begin rolling operations as soon after placing when the mixture will bear weight of roller without excessive displacement.

C. Do not permit heavy equipment, including rollers to stand on finished surface before it has thoroughly cooled or set.

D. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating place compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

E. Start rolling longitudinally at extreme lower side of sections and proceed toward center of pavement. Roll to slightly different lengths on alternate roller runs.

F. Do not roll centers of sections first under any circumstances.

G. Breakdown Rolling:

1. Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of transverse and longitudinal joints and outside edge.


2. Operate rollers as close as possible to paver without causing pavement displacement.

3. Check crown grade and smoothness after breakdown rolling. 4. Repair displaced areas by loosening at once with lutes or rakes and filling, if

required, with hot loose material before continuing rolling.

H. Second Rolling:

1. Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible while mixture is hot and in condition for compaction.

2. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted.

I. Finish Rolling:

1. Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. 2. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained specified

density.

J. Patching:

1. Remove and replace defective areas. 2. Cut-out and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete.

3. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness. 4. Remove deficient areas for full depth of course. 5. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic with edges vertical. 6. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new asphalt concrete mixture.

3.9 TOLERANCES

A. Aggregate Base.

1. Flatness: Maximum variation of ½ inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. 2. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within ½ inch. 3. Variation From Design Elevation: Within ½ inch.

B. Bituminous Pavement.

1. Surface Tolerance:

a. The surface will be tested using a 10-foot (3.05 M) straightedge. b. The variation of the surface from the testing edge of the straightedge

between any two contacts with the surface shall not exceed ¼ inch (6 mm). c. All humps or depressions exceeding the specified tolerance shall be

corrected or the defective work removed and replaced with new material.

2. Thickness Tolerance:

a. It is the intent of these specifications that the base course shall be constructed in accordance with the thickness shown on the plans and the binder and surface courses constructed in accordance with the rate of application shown on the plans.

b. Where any such courses are found not so constructed, the rules for correction provided herein shall govern.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. AAFES will employ, and pay for, services to perform asphalt concrete testing and inspection service.


B. Contractor is responsible to include sampling and testing of asphalt concrete materials proposed, and tests and calculations for asphalt concrete mixtures.

C. Asphalt testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the FDOT Construction and Material Specifications, Latest edition.

D. Field testing shall include the following:

1. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness shall not be acceptable if exceeding ½ inch allowable variation from thickness shown on drawings tested by coring.

2. Surface Smoothness:

a. Inspect finished surface of each asphalt concrete course for smoothness, using a 10-foot straightedge applied parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved areas.

b. Surfaces will not be acceptable if the base course smoothness exceeds ¼ inch in 10 feet.

E. Test locations will be taken in the new pavement area.

F. Contractor shall repair holes from test specimens as specified for patching defective work.

3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Cleaning: After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled asphalt materials to the satisfaction of Contracting Officer or designated representative.

B. Protection:

1. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphalt concrete pavement, until it has cooled and hardened, and in no case sooner than 6 hours.

2. Provide barricades and warning devices as required to protect pavement and the general public.

END 02740.

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK SECTION 02750 – SITE CONCRETE WORK

SITE CONCRETE WORK 02750-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Subgrade preparation of areas to receive base course. b. Placement of compacted base course. c. Formwork. d. Reinforcement. e. New footing at Solarium demolished for new construction. f. Patching of sidewalk slab demolished to remove Solarium and related

structure. g. Concrete slab-on-grade receiving slabs and ramp apron. h. New concrete dumpster enclosure slab and apron. i. Concrete pad for new air conditioning unit (AC-1). j. Control and expansion joints. k. Surface finish. l. Curing. m. Joint sealant. n. Testing laboratory services for testing concrete in compliance with this

Section and Section 01410.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide additional concrete to patch sidewalk slab demolished for new construction as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building:

a. Subgrade preparation. b. Placement/compaction of base course materials. c. Welded wire fabric reinforcing. d. Placement and finishing of concrete sidewalk.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide additional concrete to patch sidewalk slab demolished for new construction as indicated at the new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

a. Subgrade preparation. b. Placement/compaction of base course materials. c. Welded wire fabric reinforcing. d. Placement and finishing of concrete sidewalk.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide additional concrete receiving slab-on-grade and sidewalk directly south of the 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition (UPS and GNC) and sidewalk between the end of that slab and Door FC-43A in the west wall of the new Food Court (original Furniture Store) at the original 1972 Commissary Building.

a. Subgrade preparation. b. Placement/compaction of base course materials.


c. Welded wire fabric reinforcing. d. Placement and finishing of concrete sidewalk.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01051 – Grades, Lines and Levels. 2. Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services. 3. Section 02282 – Termite Control. 4. Section 02300 – Earthwork. 5. Section 02740 – Asphalt Concrete Paving. 6. Section 02750 – Turf & Grasses (SOD). 7. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 8. Section 07920 – Building & Pavement Joint Sealers. 9. Division 15 – Mechanical. 10. Division 16 – Electrical.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A 185 – Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A 615 – Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement,

Grade 60. 3. ASTM C 33 – Concrete Aggregate. 4. ASTM C 94 – Ready-Mixed Concrete. 5. ASTM C 143 – Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 6. ASTM C 150 – Portland Cement. 7. ASTM C 171 – Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 8. ASTM C 171 – Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 9. ASTM C 173 – Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 10. ASTM C 309 – Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 11. ASTM D 422 – Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. 12. ASTM D 1752 – Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Filler for

Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

C. Federal Specifications (FS): FS SS-S-1401-(Rev. C) Sealants, Joint, Non-Jet-Fuel-Resistant, Hot-Applied, for Portland Cement and Asphalt Concrete Pavements.

D. State of Florida, Department of Transportation (FDOT): standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Latest Edition.

1. The provision therein for method of measurement and payment do not apply. 2. References to “Engineer” and “State” shall be interpreted to mean “Contracting

Officer or designated representative” and “Federal Government” respectively.

E. Specified references, or cited portions thereof, current at date of bidding documents unless otherwise specified, govern the work.


A. Except as modified herein or as indicated, work and materials shall be performed and furnished in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Latest Edition.


B. Obtain all materials from respective same source throughout construction operations.

C. Coordinate density testing of base course & compression strength testing of concrete with testing laboratory employed & paid for by AAFES.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS.

A. Provide all materials in accord with referenced Sections, Articles of FDOT Specifications, and from FDOT approved material sources.

B. Granular Sub-base: Comply with requirements for subgrade preparation, placement and compaction for concrete paving as specified in Section 02300.

C. Base Course Aggregate: Comply with requirements for base course placement and compaction for concrete paving as specified in Section 02300.

D. Portland Cement Concrete Sidewalks & Pavement, including accessory items: Comply with applicable Sections of FDOT Specifications for:

1. Aggregate. 2. Portland Cement. 3. Concrete Reinforcement Fabric & Reinforcement Bars. 4. Concrete Admixtures. 5. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler. 6. Water. 7. Concrete Pavement & Drives. 8. Concrete Sidewalks and Curbs & Gutters.

E. Joint Sealant: Refer to Section 07920, Building & Pavement Joint Sealers.

2.2 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

A. See Section 02300, Earthwork for aggregate base course material requirements.

B. Base course materials shall have a minimum California Bearing Ratio (CBR) or 10.

2.3 FORMWORK

A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301.

B. Forms shall be of steel, except that wood forms may be used on curves having a radius of 150 feet or less and for fillets.

C. Forms shall be equal in depth to the edge thickness of the slab indicated.

D. Forms shall be in one piece for the full depth required except where indicated to provide multiple slab thicknesses, forms may be built-up with metal or wood to provide an increase in depth of not more than 26 percent.

1. Steel forms shall be furnished in sections of not less than 10 feet in length except at curves.

a. Each 10 foot length shall be provided with a minimum of three form braces and pin sockets spaced so that the form will be rigidly braced throughout the span.


b. Lock joints between form section shall be free from play or movement. c. Forms shall be free of warps, bends or kinks.

2. Form tolerances:

a. Top form surfaces shall not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true line.

b. Face of forms shall not vary more than ¼ inch in 10 feet from a true plane. c. Forms with battered top surfaces or distorted faces shall be removed from the

Project..

3. Wood forms for curves and fillets shall be made of well seasoned, surfaced plank or plywood, straight and free from warp or bend, adequate in strength and rigidity for proposed use.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing steel: ASTM A 615, 60 ksi yield, deformed billet steel bars, unfinished.

B. Welded steel wire fabric: ASTM A 185, plain type, flat sheets, unfinished.

C. Dowels: ASTM A 615, 60 ksi yield, plain steel, unfinished.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland cement:

1. ASTM C 150, Type I or II at Contractor’s option. 2. Temperature of cement shall not be over 140 degrees F. when delivered to

batching plant.

B. Aggregate:

1. ASTM C 150, Type I or II at Contractor’s option. 2. Temperature of cement shall not be over 140 degrees F. when delivered to

batching plant.

C. Air Entraining Admixture: The admixture shall be free of chlorides with formulation being adjusted to provide the recommended percentage of free air.

D. Water: Clean, potable and free of impurities detrimental to concrete.

E. Curing Materials: The use of covering material that contains or becomes contaminated with sugar in any form, tannic acid or any other substance detrimental to Portland cement concrete will not be permitted.

1. Polyethylene sheeting shall be white, opaque and free of visible defects, uniform in appearance and shall not be less than 0.004 inches thick.

2. Waterproof paper shall conform to ASTM C 171, with topside of paper white.

2.6 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. General:

1. For additional requirements see paragraph herein entitled “Inspection and Testing”.

2. Laboratory test reports shall be identified with project location and submitted to the Architect for approval.


3. The contractor shall be responsible to coordinate testing procedures with the laboratory and be responsible for incorporating into the paving concrete of the minimum strengths specified.

B. Concrete Mix Design:

1. Strength and Slump: 4000 psi at 28 days 2. Air Entrainment: 5 to 7% 3. Slump: 3 to 5 inches 4. The water content of the concrete will be the minimum necessary to obtain the

workability required for the specific conditions and methods of placement.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before commencing the placement of base course, the previously constructed subgrade, as specified in Section 02300 - Earthwork, shall be inspected for surface tolerances and shall be cleaned of all foreign substances.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BASE COURSE

A. See Section 02300 and 03300 for base course installation requirements.

B. No work shall proceed on pavement course until the base has been satisfactorily installed and inspected.

3.3 FORM SETTING

A. The forms shall be set in firm soil cut true to grade so that each form section when placed will be firmly in contact with the underlying layer for its entire length and base width.

B. The form sections shall be staked into position and tightly locked together.

C. The length of pins and quantity provided in each section shall be sufficient to hold the form at the correct line and grade.

D. When tested by a 10-foot straightedge the top of the form shall conform to the requirements specified for the finished surface of the concrete, and the longitudinal axis of the upstanding leg shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the straightedge.

E. Conformity to the alignment and grade elevations shown on the drawings shall be checked, and necessary corrections shall be made immediately prior to placing the concrete.

F. The forms shall be cleaned and coated with non-staining form oil before being set in place.

3.4 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with FDOT Sections pertaining to Portland Cement Concrete Pavement.

B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.


C. Items to be embedded in the concrete shall be positioned accurately before placing concrete and held securely in position.

D. No concrete shall be placed until preparatory work (forms, reinforcement, subgrade, etc) has been approved by the project inspector.

1. Each time the contractor intends to place concrete he shall notify the inspector and obtain approval.

2. The contractor shall notify the inspector at least 24 hours before the intended time for placement.

E. Prior to placement of concrete the forms and subgrade shall be free of debris, water, snow, extraneous oil, or other harmful substances or coatings.

1. Any oil on the reinforcing steel or other surfaces required to be bonded to the concrete shall be removed.

2. Rock surfaces shall be cleaned by wire brush scrubbing, as necessary, and shall be wetted immediately prior to placement of concrete.

3. Placement of concrete on mud, dried earth, uncompacted fill or frozen subgrade will not be permitted.

F. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints and do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.

G. Concrete shall be distributed so that when consolidated and finished, the grade, surface elevation, and dimensions at all points are as required.

H. All edges that will be exposed to view when the structure is completed shall be given a 3/4 inch chamfer unless the edge is indicated to be rounded by a finishing tool.

1. Chamfers shall be made by placing suitable forming strips inside the forms.

I. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as closely as possible to its final position. Concrete shall not be dropped from higher than 2 feet above the surface where it is being deposited.

1. Chutes, pipes or "elephant trunks" will be used where required to distribute the concrete and to avoid dropping the concrete.

2. Concrete shall be thoroughly distributed and worked into corners and around reinforcement as required to prevent formation of voids in the concrete.

J. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by vibrating, rodding, or tamping.

1. Mechanical vibrators shall be used wherever possible. 2. Vibration shall not be applied directly to the reinforcing steel or to the forms.

K. Bars or heavy tools shall not be used against the concrete in removing the forms.

1. Any concrete damaged in form removal shall be repaired promptly by the contractor at no cost to AAFES.

L. After removal of forms, formed surfaces shall be patched as follows:

1. Remove loose material, cut back unsound concrete, and voids fill holes with a stiff Portland cement mortar mix.

2. Make patching mortar using some white cement with the regular cement and sand. 3. Mix patching mortar to match surrounding concrete.


3.5 JOINTS

A. Joints shall conform to the details indicated and shall be perpendicular to the finished grade of the pavement.

B. Transverse expansion and contraction joints shall be straight and continuous from edge of the pavement.

C. Expansion Joints shall be formed of preformed filler material.

1. The filler shall be securely held in position by means of approved metal supports which shall remain in the pavement.

2. A removable metal channel cap bar shall be used to hold the parts of the joint in proper position and protect the filler from damage during concreting operations.

3. The cap bar shall be removable without damage to the pavement to provide a space for sealing of the joint.

4. Adjacent sections of filler shall be fitted tightly together and the filler shall extend across the full width of the paving lane in order to prevent entrance of concrete into the expansion space.

5. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures and features that project through, into, and against the pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated, and installed in such a manner as to form a complete, uniform separation between the structure and pavement.

D. Construction Joints:

1. Provide only if an emergency stop occurs. 2. Remove the concrete back to indicated location of expansion joint and install

dowelled construction joint as shown.

E. Sealing Joints:

1. Joints shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit in accord with requirements of Section 07920, Building & Paving Joint Sealants.

2. Crimping or sawing of filler-type joints shall be accomplished immediately before sealing of the joints.

F. Grooving and Sealing Cracks: Random cracks, except those specifically excluded by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, that occur in the pavement during construction shall be grooved and sealed.

1. The top of the crack shall be grooved to a depth of 3/4 inch and to a width not less than 3/8 inch nor more than 5/8 inch by means of an approved mechanical grooving machine.

2. The grooving tool shall be capable of following closely the path of the crack and of widening the top of the crack to the required section without damaging the concrete.

3. Loose material shall be removed and the groove shall be completely sealed with an approved type of joint sealing material.

3.6 FINISHING

A. Formed Surfaces:

1. Fins and loose material shall be removed.


2. Unsound concrete and voids shall be cut back to solid concrete, reamed, brushed-coated with cement grout, and filled solid with a stiff Portland-cement-sand mortar mix.

3. Patchwork shall finish flush with adjoining concrete surfaces and, where exposed, shall match adjoining surfaces in texture and color.

a. Patchwork shall be cured for 72 hours. b. White Portland cement shall be used as needed to attain color match.

B. Unformed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces shall be finished to a true plane with no deviation exceeding 5/16 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.

2. Surfaces shall be pitched to drain. 3. Surfaces shall be screeded and floated to the required level with no coarse

aggregate visible before finishing as specified below.

C. Monolithic Finish:

1. Monolithic finish shall be given to slabs unless otherwise specified. 2. After the surface moisture has disappeared, floated-surfaces shall be steel-

troweled to a smooth, even, dense finish free from blemish including trowel marks.

D. Nonslip Finish: Nonslip finish shall be given to landings, exterior building entrances, and sidewalks so indicated by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of main traffic.

3.7 PATCHING

A. Patch to match material, color and texture of surrounding area.

B. Replace defective work if patching is not acceptable to Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.8 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Curing:

1. Immediately after the finishing operations, the exposed concrete surface shall be cured.

2. Immediately after finishing the concrete, the exposed surfaces shall be coated with a membrane-forming curing compound.

a. The compound shall be applied in 2 coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square feet per gallon for each coat.

b. The second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat.

c. The compound shall form a uniform continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections.

d. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above at no additional cost to the Government.

e. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected for seven days from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and from any other action that might disrupt the continuity of the membrane.


B. Backfilling: After curing, debris shall be removed, and the area adjoining the sidewalk shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with the lines and grades indicated.

C. Protection: The completed paving shall be protected from damage until accepted.

1. Contractor shall repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction.

2. Paving that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire length between regularly scheduled joints.

a. Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable. b. Removed damaged portions shall be legally disposed of off Site.

3.9 CONCRETE INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. AAFES will employ and pay for concrete testing services as follow:

1. Perform concrete inspection and tests as listed in “Methods and Sampling and Testing”, ASTM C94 latest edition, ACI 301, Chapter 16; and as indicated, all in accordance with specification Section 01410 – Testing Services.

2. The more stringent requirements shall be followed.

B. Concrete Test:

1. Air content test shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 173.

a. Test for determining air content shall be made each time test cylinders are fabricated.

2. Slump test of concrete shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 143.

a. At least one slump test shall be made each time test cylinders are fabricated.

C. Compressive strength:

1. One set for each 10 cubic yards or fraction thereof each class concrete with a minimum of one sample taken and tested for each days pour and tested as follows:

a. 2 specimens tested at 7 days, b. 3 specimens tested at 28 days c. 1 retained for later testing if required.

2. A minimum of one of the 7-day test samples and one of the 28 day test samples shall be cured in or adjacent to forms to allow test cylinders to cure under identical conditions to pour.

3. Test results will be furnished, in writing, to the Contractor, Contracting Officer and designated representative.

END 02750.

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02923 – TURF & GRASSES (SOD)

TURF & GRASSES (SOD) 02923-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Sod bed preparation and placing. b. Sodding lawns c. Mulching and fertilizing d. Maintenance: See watering, mowing, fertilizing, core aerating, weed control

and other specific requirements. e. Clean Up

B. The extent of lawn work is indicated on the drawings.

1. The lawn work limits equal the Contract Limit Line except as indicated. 2. Non-paved, non-roofed areas within the Contract Limit Line shall receive lawn or a

vegetative ground cover as indicated. 3. Lawn areas shall receive four (4") inches settled depth of topsoil prior to placement

of lawn seed or sod. 4. Existing lawn areas that are not disturbed require no additional work.

C. Contractor provide materials, labor, equipment, and services required to accomplish related work as indicated.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide additional sod work indicated at exterior area directly west of the new Food Court (original Furniture Store) of the original 1972 Commissary Building and east of the Exchange Retail area of the 1978 Exchange Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 02282 – Termite Control.

B. Section 02300 – Earthwork.

C. Section 02740 – Asphalt Concrete Paving.

D. Section 02750 – Site Concrete Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish name of Landscape subcontractor or Nurseryman to perform lawn work and obtain Contracting Officer’s or designated representative’s approval.

B. Provide Material Certificates and MPD for:

1. Sod species and source, location for sod producer. 2. Limestone. 3. Fertilizers.


C. Provide Topsoil Test Report: Submit test results from independent testing laboratory on their letterhead reporting:

1. Certify soil texture and content, pH value, sieve and nutrient analysis. 2. Specific recommendations on liming and fertilizing (nitrogen, phosphate and

potash).

D. Schedule: Prior to construction, provide a schedule that addresses lawn thresholds involving erosion control stabilization.


A. Installer: Work shall be contracted to an established Landscape subcontractor or Nursery firm having sufficiently experienced crews, supervisor(s), specialized equipment, and an excellent record of performance on completed lawn projects of comparable size, scope, and quality.

B. Provide expert turfman to direct the work in the field on a regular, daily basis.

C. Sod Standards: Comply with the American Sod Producers Association (ASPA) class of sod materials.

D. Nomenclature: Seed names shall conform to the National Turfgrass Federation, Inc.

E. Delivery, Storage, and Handling:

1. Deliver fertilizer materials in original unopened containers clearly showing weight, analysis by weight and name of manufacturer.

2. Store in cool, dry place in a manner to prevent wetting and deterioration.

1.5 SOD DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Cut, deliver, and install sod within a 24-hour period.

B. Do not harvest or transport sod when moisture content may adversely affect sod survival.

C. Protect sod from sun, wind, and dehydration prior to installation.

D. Do not tear, stretch or drop sod during handling and installation.

E. Store materials at site in an orderly manner at location(s) acceptable to the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Sod:

1. Proceed with and complete sodding work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.

2. Perform sodding after planting, fine grading, and other work affecting the ground surfaces in the work areas has been completed satisfactorily.

3. Provide sod as specified. 4. Substitutions not permitted unless approved in writing by Amendment prior to

Solicitation.


5. Provide water, meters, labor, hoses, sprinklers and watering equipment. 6. AAFES will pay for the water usage if required.

B. Construction Review:

1. Upon completion of sod bed preparation, notify Contracting Officer or designated representative to review work.

2. The Contracting Officer or designated representative may review string graded areas by the Contractor to check for surface smoothness and general compliance with grading requirements.

a. Fill or cut by hand raking or other acceptable means to achieve smooth, even well-draining lawn surfaces free of "bird baths" and breaks in grade as directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative at no additional expense to AAFES.

b. Review by string grading shall not alleviate the Contractor of his responsibility for conforming to the required grades as shown on the drawings, nor be misconstrued as final acceptance of lawn work.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOD

A. Sod shall conform to FDOT specifications, nursery grown pasture sod with majority Bahia.

B. Provide well-rooted, healthy sod, free of diseases, nematodes and soil borne insects.

1. Provide sod uniform in color, leaf texture, density, and free of weeds, undesirable grasses, stones, roots, thatch and extraneous material viable and capable of growth and development when planted.

2. Sod is considered free of weeds when less than five (5) weeds are found per one hundred (100 s.f.) square feet.

C. Furnish sod machine stripped and of supplier's standard width, length, and thickness:

1. Uniformly 1" to 1-1/2" thick with clean cut edges. 2. Mow sod before stripping.

D. Mowing Height: Before stripping, sod shall be mowed uniformly at a height of 1 to 1-1/2 inches.

E. Thickness of Cut:

1. Sod shall be machine cut at a uniform soil thickness of 5/8 inch, plus or minus 1/4 inch, at the time of cutting.

2. Measurement for thickness shall exclude top growth and thatch.

F. Thatch: Sod shall be relatively free of thatch, up to 1-2 inch allowable (un-compressed).

G. Pad Size:

1. Individual pieces of sod shall be cut to the supplier's standard width and length. 2. Maximum allowable deviation from standard widths and lengths shall be plus or

minus 1/2" on width and plus or minus 5% on length. 3. Broken pads and torn or uneven ends will not be acceptable.

H. Strength of Sod Sections: Standard size sections of sod shall be strong enough to support their own weight and retain their size and shape when suspended vertically from a firm grasp on the upper 10% of the section.


2.2 LIMESTONE

A. Shall be ground limestone in the producer's standard bags containing not less than 85% total carbonates and conforming to the following gradations:

Sieve Designation % Passing No. 100 50-100 No. 20 100

2.3 FERTILIZER

A. Starter Fertilization:

1. Immediately prior to seeding fertilizer with a commercial starter fertilizer, granular, non-burning product, with not less than 50% organic slow acting, micro nutrients and 1% iron, guaranteed analysis commercial fertilizer.

2. Fertilizer shall contain: 15% nitrogen, 24% available phosphorus and 19% water soluble potash (15-24-19).

3. Apply at a rate of 4 lbs/1,000 sf or 175 lbs/acre.

B. Subsequent and Final Fertilizations: Apply commercial fertilizer, granular non-burning product with not less than 50% organic slow acting, guaranteed analysis:

1. For Spring Lawn Work:

a. Fertilizer shall contain: 10% nitrogen, 6% available phosphorus, and 4% water soluble potash (10-6-4).

b. Apply at rate of 10 lbs/1,000 s.f. or 400 lbs/acre or as recommended by the topsoil testing agency for maximum growth.

2. For Fall Lawn Work:

a. Fertilizer shall contain: 5% nitrogen, 10% available phosphorus, and 5% water soluble potash (5-10-5).

b. Apply at rate of 10 lbs/1,000 s.f. or 400 lbs/acre or as recommended by the topsoil testing agency for maximum growth.

2.4 WATER

A. Free of substance harmful to lawn, other plants, humans and animals.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify limits of lawn in the field with drawings but in no case less than the extent of areas disrupted by construction and construction activities.

B. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative of discrepancies prior to proceeding with lawn work.

C. Examine finish surfaces, grade, topsoil quality, and depth.

D. Do not start lawn work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.


3.2 PREPARE GENERAL LAWN AREAS TYPE

A. Perform a pH test, sieve, and nutrient analysis of the topsoil and advise the results to the Contracting Officer or designated representative prior to adding limestone or other soil amendments.

B. Remove debris:

1. Remove stone 3/4" or larger by handpicking, fine tooth aluminum grading rakes, and/or mechanized stone picker.

2. When topsoil has hardened, cultivate soil to a four (4") inch depth by plowing, discing, harrowing, or otherwise scarifying and loosening the topsoil.

C. Grade lawn areas to a smooth, free draining even surface with a loose, moderately coarse texture.

1. Roll, scarify, rake, and level as necessary to obtain true, even lawn surfaces and fill depressions as required to drain.

2. Correct irregularities in the surface resulting from tillage operations to prevent formation of depressions or water pockets.

D. Cultivate soil to provide a firm bed of minimum of four (4") inches deep, free of clods, stones, or foreign matter over two (2") inches in diameter from the top of soil.

1. Do not move heavy objects except necessary lawn making equipment over the lawn areas after the soil is prepared unless it is again loosened and graded.

2. Remove stones greater than one 3/4" in diameter during cultivation. Level undulations and irregularities in the surface.

E. Provide adjusted rate of application as recommended in Topsoil Test Report submittal and when rate differs add ground limestone at the rate of 100 lbs. per 1,000 S.F. or equivalent acidifier as directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

F. Place starter fertilizer at the rate of 4 lbs. per 1,000 S.F. and mix into full depth of topsoil.

G. Rake area with fine toothed aluminum grading rake before placing sod to obtain a smooth surface at the proper elevation.

1. Drag area with a wood float to level out minor humps and hollows. 2. Beds shall have a smooth friable uniform surface, free of areas ponding water.

3.3 SODDING

A. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative that sod bed is ready for review as specified in Job Conditions.

1. Obtain Contracting Officer or designated representative's approval prior to sodding.

B. Moistening the Soil: During periods of higher than optimal temperature for species being specified and after unevenness in the soil surface has been corrected, the soil shall be lightly moistened immediately prior to laying the sod.

C. Sod immediately after preparation of bed and Contracting Officer or designated representative's approval.

D. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly-fitted joints in strips parallel to contours.

1. Butt ends and sides of sod strips.


2. Do not overlap edges. 3. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. 4. Remove excess sod to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. 5. Provide sod pad top flush with finish grade of adjacent curbs, pavements, drainage

structures and seeded areas.

E. Do not lay dormant sod or install sod on soil surfaces that are hot, dry, saturated or frozen.

F. When sodding slopes, install initial row of sod in a straight line, beginning at bottom of slope.

G. Place subsequent rows parallel to and lightly against previously installed row.

H. Sod strips laid in drainageways must meet the finished grades shown on the drawings.

I. Stake sod on lawn slopes 3H to 1V (horizontal to vertical) and steeper to prevent slippage.

1. Use two (2) stakes per square yard of sod. 2. Stakes are to have their flat sides against the slope and be driven flush with sod

surface.

J. Roll with light lawn roller to ensure contact with subgrade.

K. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after laying.

L. Do not allow sod to dry out.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance by Contractor begins as soon as lawns are sodded or seeded.

1. Protect lawns from drought, washout and wind erosion. In general, maintain new installed lawn areas, including watering, fertilizing, core aerating, spot weeding, mowing, applications of herbicides, fungicides, insecticides, and re-sodding until a full, uniform, healthy, vigorous stand of grass free of weed, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects is achieved and accepted by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2. Watering Sodded Lawns:

a. First Week: Provide water, meters, labor, hoses, sprinklers and watering equipment for rooting of the sod.

b. AAFES will pay for water usage if required. c. Soil on sod pads shall be kept moist. d. In the absence of adequate rainfall, watering shall be performed daily or as

often as necessary during the first week and in sufficient quantities to maintain moist soil to a depth of at least four (4") inches.

e. Lawn areas shall receive a minimum of one (1") of water per week, by natural rainfall, irrigation or a combination of both.

3. Second and Subsequent Weeks:

a. Provide water, meters, labor, hoses, sprinklers and watering equipment as required to maintain adequate moisture, in the upper four (4") inches of soil, necessary for the promotion of deep root growth until final acceptance.

b. The Owner will pay for water usage if necessary. c. Lawn areas shall receive a minimum of one (1") of water per week, by natural

rainfall, irrigation or a combination of both.


4. Protect: Protect lawn areas against trespass, vandalism and routine student pedestrian traffic by temporary fencing or other means.

5. Repair: Repair, rework, and resod as originally specified for areas that have washed out, eroded, do not germinate and are vandalized or otherwise damaged.

6. Mow: Initial mowing of general lawn areas shall begin when the blade height reaches 2 and the soil will bear the weight of the lawn mower.

7. Use mowers with low impact tires.

a. For the first 3 mowings cut the grass blades to 1.5 inches. After that mow the grass when it reaches a height of about 3.5" to a height of about 2.5".

b. Never remove more than 1/3 of the grass blade at any one mowing. A minimum of five (5) mowings are required (approximately once per week after the initial germination period to final acceptance).

c. Notify the Contracting Officer or designated representative of dates in writing as mowing is performed.

d. Excess clippings shall be carefully raked so as not to remove healthy grasses, and removed.

8. Core Aerating:

a. Between mowings three (3) and four (4), core aerate general lawn areas about three (3") inches on center minimum three (3") inches deep to ensure aggressive root growth.

b. This will require multiple passes at different directions to achieve 16 to 20 holes 3/4" to 1" diameter per square foot.

c. Sweep scattered plugs off paved areas onto adjacent lawn areas. Pulverize plugs during subsequent mowing operations.

d. Provide additional core aerating after the 5th mowing as directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative to expedite the lawn maturation process.

e. Moisten field by thoroughly watering the topsoil profile, several days in advance of coring to facilitate proper penetration of the topsoil.

f. Do not core aerate moist meadow areas.

9. Fertilizer:

a. Immediately after core aerating, between mowings three (3) and four (4), apply subsequent fertilizer at the rate of 10 lb./1,000 s.f.

b. Provide additional fertilizer after the 5th mowing as directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative to expedite the lawn maturation process.

c. Apply a final fertilizer just prior to final acceptance at the same application rate. Fertilize all lawn areas

10. Weed Control: When infestation of weeds or crabgrass develops in general lawn areas, treat infestation by hand weeding or herbicides control appropriate to the area.

a. Furnish and install weed chemical control as recommended by manufacturer. b. Herbicides controls must be acceptable to the Owner. Obtain and pay for

permits. c. Use as directed by the manufacturer and applicable laws, codes, ordinances

and regulatory requirements. d. Do not apply weed controls in moist meadow areas.

11. Maintenance by the Contractor continues through the certificate of substantial completion to final acceptance by the Contracting Officer or designated representative as described below.

12. Maintenance by Owner begins after final acceptance of the lawn.


3.5 STANDARDS FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF LAWNS

A. Review to determine substantial completion of lawns will be made by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, upon request.

B. Provide notification at least five (5) working days before requested review date.

C. Lawn areas will be substantially complete provided requirements, including maintenance, have been complied with.

1. A healthy, vigorous, uniform, partially mature stand of lawn is established free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects.

2. This will culminate after an approximate 60-day period with average temperatures above 40°F of maintenance including watering, protection, repair, mowing, core aerating, weed control, and fertilizing as noted above.

3. Grass roots shall have matured to a minimum of 1½" depth as determined by the Contracting Officer or designated representative when core samples are taken.

D. Lawn areas shall not have more than 10% dead/bare spots.

E. The Contracting Officer or designated representative will prepare a written punch list of items that need correction prior to final acceptance.

3.6 STANDARDS FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF LAWNS

A. Review to determine final acceptance of lawns will be made by the Contracting Officer or designated representative, upon request.

1. Provide notification at least five (5) working days before requested review date.

B. Lawn areas will be acceptable provided requirements, including maintenance, have been complied with.

1. A healthy, vigorous, uniform, full stand of lawn is established free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects.

2. Grass roots shall have matured to a minimum of 2" depth as determined by the Contracting Officer or designated representative when core samples are taken.

C. Any lawn which contains disease, more than 2% dead/bare spots, or any dead/bare area greater than one square foot shall be rejected and the unacceptable area(s) repaired as originally specified at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. In the event the Contractor fails to complete the punch list items within a 30-day period with average temperatures of 40°F after the time of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for any additional costs including those charged by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.7 CLEAN UP

A. During the contract and at intervals as directed by the Contracting Officer or designated representative and as lawn work is completed, clear the site of extraneous materials, rubbish, and debris.

B. Leave the site in a clean, safe, neat, well-draining condition.

END 02923.

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03300 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Primer for cement based underlayment topping slabs. b. Cement based underlayment topping slabs for existing concrete floors to

receive finishes. c. Reinforced concrete floor slabs. d. Patching existing terrazzo and concrete floor slabs. e. Concrete filled post holes and installation of pipe bollards. f. Grouting under all base plates. g. Formwork. h. Reinforcing. i. Surface finish and curing. j. Joint sealants. k. Forming and/or saw cutting and sealing of control joints and expansion joints. l. Assistance for testing of base course and concrete.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide footings and foundations as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide footings and foundations as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide concrete work for new patched floor slab areas as indicated for under slab sanitary sewer piping in the new Women’s Public Toilet, Optometry/Optical, south Food Concept Preparations areas, and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms behind the new Food Court.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified Elsewhere:

1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Division 2 – Site Work. 3. Section 03354 – Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement. 4. Section 03356 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish. 5. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 6. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 7. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 8. Division 15 – Mechanical. 9. Division 16 – Electrical.



1. Building related excavation, backfill and granular base course work is specified in Section 02300, Earthwork.

2. Site related excavation, backfill, grading and paving are specified in Division 2. 3. Joint sealants installed under this Section are specified in Section 07920, Building

& Paving Joint Sealers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including installation instructions for self-leveling underlayment and primer.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

1. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

2. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. 2. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

E. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Waterstops. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Vapor retarders. 8. Semirigid joint filler. 9. Joint-filler strips. 10. Repair materials.

F. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

G. Field quality-control reports.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following sections, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:


1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."

D. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CEMENT BASED UNDERLAYMENT/TOPPING

A. Self-leveling underlayment/topping and primer shall be as manufactured by Laticrete, One Laticrete Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423, (800) 243-4788

B. Existing floor slab primer shall be Laticrete NXT Primer:

1. Concentrated premium quality, water-based primer designed to be applied prior to the installation of underlayment/topping slabs.

2. Primer shall be designed to penetrate deeply into substrates and maximizes bond strength.

C. Self-Leveling Underlayment shall be Laticrete NXT Level:

1. Product shall be designed to mixed with water to produce a pumpable, fast setting, free flowing cementitious underlayment poured over existing prepared concrete floor slabs.

2. Underlayment shall be designed to be installed to a depth of ±1 1/2-inches thick to provide a level substrate for placement of new resilient tile, carpeting and ceramic tile floor finishes.

3. Properties:

a. 28 Day Compressive Strength (ASTM C1708.): >4000 psi (27.6 MPa). b. Tensile Bond Strength (ASTM C1583): >500 psi (3.5 MPa). c. Time To Foot Traffic: 1 – 4 Hours. d. Total VOC Content: < 0.05 mg/m3.

2.2 FORMWORK

A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301.

B. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces.

1. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 2. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

C. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

1. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.


1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave non-corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place.

1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire or plastic according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete.

2. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms and in bottom of trench or wall footing cuts use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

3. Provide supports with sand legs where subgrade will not support bar legs or where polyethylene vapor barrier sheets could be punctured.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. 2. At Contractor’s option, supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F. b. Maximum Content: No more than 15 percent.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.

1. Provide aggregates from a single source. 2. 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Fine aggregate free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures:

1. Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete.

2. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

a. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. b. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.


c. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. d. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. e. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/

C 494M, Type G. f. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: Multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick.

B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of nonmetallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents and capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 8000 psi in 28 days.

2.7 POLISHED CONCRETE CURING COMPOUND MATERIALS

A. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Membrane-forming curing compound for new polished building slabs exposed to view in final finish shall be a resin or waxed based product complying with the following:

1. ASTM C 309, Type 1, Classes A and B. 2. AASHTO M 148, Type 1, Classes A and B.

B. Acceptable Curing Compound Products: Use one of the following manufacturers and products for curing/sealing polished concrete slabs:

1. WR Meadows 1100 Clear, Resin Based. 2. WR Meadows 1300 Clear, Wax Based. 3. Euclid Kurez RC.

2.8 STANDARD CURING MATERIALS FOR UNPOLISHED CONCRETE

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.

B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated (4000 psi, minimum) at 28 days.


2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches

before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301.

a. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent.

C. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of Portland cement, which would otherwise be used and limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 15 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 CEMENT BASED UNDERLAYMENT/TOPPING INSTALLATION

A. Installation Instructions: All existing floor slab surface preparation, priming and installation of self-leveling underlayment products shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

B. Surface Preparation: Upon completion of demolition of existing ceramic, clay paver and ceramic tile floor finishes and associated setting bed mortar, clean and prepare surface to receive underlayment primer.

1. Existing concrete slab surface shall be prepared to a minimum ICRI concrete surface profile (CSP) of 3.

2. Surface profile shall be achieved using mechanical methods.

a. Do not use chemicals to remove contaminates or to create a surface profile.

3. Existing concrete shall be clean, free of oil, wax, grease, sealers, loose particles or any other contaminates that could act as bond breakers.

4. Prepared surface shall readily absorb water.

C. Priming Prepared Surface: All surfaces shall be primed prior to installation of self-leveling underlayment.

1. Primer shall be diluted with clean, potable water as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Carefully measure water to ensure proper dilution is achieved. 3. Apply primer using roller or spray application to ensure even coverage and in strict

compliance with manufacturer’s instructions for suction properties of surface.

a. Apply primer only when surface temperature is 40º F or above. b. Air temperature shall be maintained during application and drying time

between 50-90º F.


c. Protect surfaces from weather, water and direct sunlight.

4. Allow primer to completely dry to milky white to clear appearance for a time and within relative humidity ranges as recommended by manufacturer.

5. Protect primer application from traffic prior to installation of underlayment.

D. Self-Leveling Underlayment: Mix self-leveling underlayment with water in proportions recommended by manufacture.

1. Isolate perimeters of floor areas to walls and floor areas to protrusions, penetration and curbs using manufacturer’s perimeter isolation strips.

2. Install self-leveling underlayment by pumping or pouring blended material onto prepared substrate to depth indicated.

a. Install underlayment only when prepared substrate surface temperature is 40-90º F.

b. Air temperature shall be maintained within space between 50-90º F. c. Protect surfaces from direct sunlight.

3. Use gauge pins and gauge rakes to level materials and ensure that surface is completely level to the same tolerances specified for concrete floor flatness F(F) and floor levelness F(L).

4. Floors shall dry to a flatness that does not telegraph through specified thin resilient tile finishes satisfactory to the Contracting Officer and designated representative.

a. Where newly poured floor surfaces are defective or do not meet specified F(F) and F(L) tolerances, make repairs following underlayment manufacturer’s recommendations/

b. Where newly poured floor surface cannot be repaired, immediately remove and replace underlayment to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and designated representative.

3.2 FORMWORK

A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.

B. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.

1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder.


2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.

1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover.

2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging.

1. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. 2. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

Lace overlaps with wire. 3. Supply welded wire reinforcement in flat sheets only.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General:

1. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 2. Refer to special requirements for joint cutting as specified in Section 03356,

Polished Concrete Floor Finish.

B. Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade:

1. Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated.

2. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:

a. Grooved Joints:

1.) Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to a radius of 1/8 inch.

2.) Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. 3.) Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

b. Sawed Joints:

1.) Refer to special requirements for equipment to be used to produce sawed joints in polished concrete building slabs exposed to view as specified in Section 03356, Polished Concrete Floor Finish.

2.) Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades.

3.) Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints:


1. Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.

D. Cold weather placement of concrete shall comply with ACI 306R-88.

E. Hot weather placement of concrete shall comply with ACI 305R-99.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched.

1. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch. 2. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams.

1. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. 2. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch. 3. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or indicated to receive a rubbed

finish.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following rubbed finish, defined in ACI 301, to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-rubbed finish.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces:

1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.

2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces.

1. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.

1. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface.


2. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.

C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, paint or another thin film-finish coating system.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.

E. Nonslip Broom Finish:

1. Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete stoop slabs.

2. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

3.9 STRUCTURAL GROUTING

A. Coordinate grouting work with work of the structural steel erector and other subcontractors where grouting applications are necessary.

B. After steel base plates have been set and positioned to the approval of the Contracting Officer or designated representative, install non-shrink grout between supporting concrete or masonry and underside of steel plate.

C. Structural grout shall be mixed per manufacturer’s directions to provide a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 8000 psi.

1. Compact grout between surfaces to ensure that no voids are present when work is complete.

2. Finish edges of grout bed even with base plates and slightly taper sides to supporting structure so as not to interfere with continuation of unit masonry work.

3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General:

1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

2. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder:

1. Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations.

2. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.


C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D. Standard Curing Methods: Cure standard formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. d. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive

covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.

a. Cure for not less than seven days. b. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover

material and waterproof tape.

E. Polished Concrete Curing Methods: Cure concrete slabs to be polished for at least seven days by using one of the specified removable membrane forming curing compounds.

1. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. 3. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 4. Verification: Consult with final surface polishing installer to ensure new concrete

slabs to be polished meet requirements for final finishing as specified in Section 03356, Polished Concrete Floor Finish.

F. Protection: Protect concrete slabs-on-grade throughout construction until received by surface finish installer for application of final finishing.


A. Testing Agency: contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports to Contracting Officer or designated representative during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.

B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301.

1. Inspections at project site shall include the following:

a. Steel reinforcement placement. b. Headed bolts and studs. c. Verification of use of specified design mixture.

2. Testing at project site shall include the following:

a. Slump. b. Concrete temperature. c. Air content.


d. Compressive strength.

3. Record the following information on submitted test reports.

a. Date of placement. b. Location of Placement. c. Time of day. d. Outside air temperature (degrees F.). e. Slump (in inches). f. Concrete temperature (degrees F.). g. Air content (%). h. Date received in lab. i. Compressive strength with testing date, age in days and strength in psi.

4. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cubic yards but less than 25 cubic yards, plus one set for each additional 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof.

5. Within 24-hours after each pour measure floor slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E-1155.

3.12 REPAIRS

A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.

END 03300.

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03354 – INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT

INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR & JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT 03354-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide repair work to existing concrete slab scheduled to receive new polished surface finish including:

a. Joint filler removal and replacement, with or without metal keyway.

1.) Contractor is to provide unit price per linear foot, as indicated in Section 01026, Unit Prices, for joint filler removal and replacement based on the following formula:

a) Total Polished Area x 0.14 = Total Projected Linear Feet of Joint Filler Removal and Replacement to be Included and Broken Out in Bid.

b. Spalled joint repair or joint with metal keyway (less than ¾”).

1.) Contractor is to provide unit price per linear foot, as indicated in Section 01026, Unit Prices, for keyway segment removal and filler installation based on the following formula:

a) Total Polished Area x 0.08 = Total Projected Linear Feet of keyway segment removal to be Included and Broken Out in Bid.

c. Spalled joint repair, joint with metal keyway or self leveling compound removal (greater than ¾”)

1.) Contractor is to provide unit price per linear foot, as indicated in Section 01026, Unit Prices, for keyway segment and self leveling component removal and repair material installation based on the following formula:

a) Total Polished Area x 0.08 = Total Projected Square Feet of keyway segment and self leveling compound removal and repair material installation to be Included and Broken Out in Bid.

d. Crack repair.

1.) Contractor is to provide unit price per linear foot, as indicated in Section 01026, Unit Prices, for crack cleaning and filling based on the following formula:

a) Total Polished Area x 0.03 = Total Projected Linear Feet of Crack Repair to be Included and Broken Out in Bid.

e. Surface defect repair, including pop-outs, spalls and gouges.

1.) Contractor is to provide unit price per occurrence, as indicated in Section 01026, Unit Prices, for pop-out and spall repair based on the following formula.


a) Total Polished Area x 0.025 = Total Projected Occurrences of ¾” to 1 ½” Diameter x ½” Deep Pop-Outs or Spalls to be Included and Broken Out in the Bid.

b) Total Polished Area x 0.025 = Total Projected Occurrences of 1 ½” to 3” Diameter x ½” Deep Pop-Outs or Spalls to be Included and Broken Out in the Bid.

f. Surface embed repair including cleanouts, in-floor electrical outlets and Walker Duct access holes.

1.) Contractor is to provide unit price per occurrence, as indicated in Section 01026, Unit Prices, for over-coring cleanouts, in-floor electrical outlets and Walker Duct access holes based on the following formula:

a) Total Polished Area x 0.001 = Total Projected Occurrences of 4” average diameter x ½” Deep Pop-Outs or Spalls to be Included and Broken Out in the Bid.

g. Large area surface repair, existing underlayment removal/replacement and delamination repair.

1.) Contractor is to provide unit price per square foot, as indicated in Section 01026, Unit Prices, for large area surface repair of rough surface, or removal and replacement of existing underlayments > 3/8” in thickness.

a) 3/8” Minimum Thick Polished Overlay Topping shall be included as a Unit Cost.

h. Grout coat surface enhancement, including air voids, micro-pin holes, pitting and other shallow surface deficiencies.

1.) Contractor is to provide unit price per square foot, as indicated in Section 01026, Unit Prices, for grout coat surface enhancement based on the following formula:

a) Total Polished Area x 0.10 = Total Projected Square Feet of Grout Coat to be Included and Broken Out in Bid.

i. Full grind, densify and polish portions of the project not currently indicated on the drawings.

1.) Contractor is to provide unit price per square foot, as indicated in Section 01026, Unit Prices, to provide a Full Grind, Densify and Polish for portions of the project not currently indicated on the drawings.

a) Full Grind, Densify and Polish to be Included as a Unit Cost.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide repair work to existing concrete slab scheduled to receive new polished surface finish as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK



1. Section 01026 – Unit Prices. 2. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities & Controls. 3. Section 01710 – Cleaning. 4. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 5. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 6. Section 03356 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish. 7. Division 15 – Mechanical. 8. Division 16 – Electrical.


1. New concrete building slabs exposed in final finish are specified in Section 03300. 2. Joint sealant installation, coloration with dye, surface finishing and polishing of

existing and new concrete slabs exposed to view are specified in Section 03356. 3. Standard joint sealants are specified in Section 07920, Building and Paving Joint

Sealers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01340 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide scaled layout drawing of all existing control and expansion joints.

a. Minimum Scale: 1/8” = 1’-0” b. Indicate expansion or control joint type. c. Indicate perimeter and condition of unforeseen patches in existing floor slab. d. In phased construction, estimate probable locations for joints that are covered

by finish materials and update drawing as project progresses. e. Resubmit for review with each phased update.

2. Show walls, columns and other elements in dimensional relationship to control and expansion joints.

C. Joint Filler Installer Qualification Certification:

1. Company branch or regional office shall provide a list of five projects.

a. Successful completion shall have been within the last three years for projects of similar type, size and complexity as this contract.

b. Provide project names, addresses, contact names and phone numbers for each project.

c. General Contractor shall validate the abilities of the subcontractor prior to submitting a bid for this project.

2. Submit letter of certification, identifying specific individuals that are currently certified installers of the specified materials and are familiar with proper procedures and installation methods as required by the specified product manufacturers.

D. Product data: All products used for repair of existing concrete slab defects.


A. AAFES reserves the right to engage the services of a Concrete Consultant to review, observe and inspect the work in progress.


1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Limit and control damage from excessive dust caused by demolition, preparation, and installation of all Work.

B. Limit and control damage from moisture.

C. All replaced concrete shall be cured a minimum of 21 calendar days prior to joint filler installation.

D. Concrete repair area shall be closed to traffic during preparation and repair for a time as recommended by manufacturer.

2 PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Polyurea Joint Filler: Rapid setting, two-component polyurea polymer liquid of 100% solids content, Shore hardness 60-65, compatible with construction materials in contact:

1. Products shall be provided in a complementary color to match Polished Concrete finish after polishing.

2. Colors shall be reviewed and approved by AAFES Project Manager or AAFES Concrete Consultant in Mock-up.

3. Acceptable products:

a. SL/60 Polyurea, VersaFlex Incorporated. b. RS65 Polyurea, Metzger/McGuire. c. HT-PE65 Polyurea, Hi-Tech Systems.

B. Joint Filler Stain Preventing Film:

1. SPF, Metzger/McGuire.

C. Low Viscosity Crack and Spall Repair:

1. Products shall be provided in a complementary color to match Polished Concrete finish after polishing.

2. Colors shall be reviewed and approved by AAFES Project Manager or AAFES Concrete Consultant in Mock-up.


a. Quick-Mender, VersaFlex Incorporated. b. Rapid ReFloor, Metzger/McGuire.

D. Wide Area Surface Repair:

1. Color shall be reviewed and approved by AAFES Project Manager or AAFES Concrete Consultant in Mock-up.


a. PC-5614 Polishable Overlay, Diamatic. b. UltraTop PC, Mapei. c. No Substitutions.

E. Pin Hole and Surface Pitting Grout Coat:


1. Color shall be reviewed and approved by AAFES Project Manager or AAFES Concrete Consultant in Mock-up.


a. RSG, Diamatic Inc. b. GM 3000, Husqvarna Construction Products. c. Spall TX3, Hi-Tech. d. Versa-Grout, Versaflex. e. Pit-Grout, Metzger McGuire.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Dust extraction system for grinding/sawing:

1. HEPA filtration vacuum, designed for use with all hand tools when grinding or sawing concrete (minimum 125CFM air flow).

2. Provide one of the following:

a. 80ID, HTC. b. S36, Pullman-Ermator. c. Bull 50, SASE Company, Inc. d. Approved equal.

B. Joint Filler Removal, Crack Repair and Preparation:

1. The Mongoose, Egrave-a-Crete. 2. Humpback Cutter Complete, Joe Due. 3. Dust Buggy, U.S. Saws. 4. Approved equal.

C. Surface Grinder:

1. Handheld 4”-7” electric surface grinder with dustless shroud/housing. 2. Acceptable equipment:

a. Dust Avenger, Joe Due. b. SawTec Grinder Vac, U.S. Saws. c. Approved equal.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. An evaluation of the existing floor slab shall be conducted, identifying all defects.

1. Scope of repairs shall be confirmed by the AAFES Project Manager, Architect of Record, or AAFES Concrete Consultant prior to commencement of work.

2. Identify scope of work on Floor Polishing Plan as required by Section 03356, Polished Concrete Floor Finish.

B. Repairs shall not be conducted until Unit Price in attached Worksheet has been reviewed and approved by the AAFES Contracting Officer.

C. Repairs exceeding the Estimated Scope of Repairs developed in the attached Worksheet and included in the Base Bid must be approved by the AAFES Contracting Officer prior to executing the work in any new Phase.

3.2 PREPARATION


A. Protect surface of slab immediately adjacent to defect under repair.

3.3 JOINT MILLING AND CAP FILLER REPLACEMENT (Refer to Associated Detail on Drawings)

A. If existing joint filler is sound and resting on top of saw cut shelf, mill top 1/2" of material and refill with specified Polyurea joint filler.

B. Re-saw the joint to a minimum depth of 1/2” with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized blade.

1. The blade width should be sufficient to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment.

2. Produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint.

C. Refill with Polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles per manufacturer’s recommendation.

D. Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface, prior to grinding process.

E. Ensure that after grinding, the joint is cut smooth and flush with the finish floor surface, without concave or intermittent, darkened profile.

3.4 FULL DEPTH JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT (Refer to Associated Detail on Drawings)

A. If existing joint filler is loose, easily removed, or able to be forced downward with a hand tool, remove all filler material from joint and refill.

B. Re-saw joint full depth with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized blade.

1. The blade width should be sufficient to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment.

2. Produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint.

3. Remove all filler material, debris, and laitance.

C. Refill with Polyurea joint filler material from the bottom up, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles per manufacturer’s recommendation.

D. Slightly overfill and shave flush to the surface prior to grinding process.

E. Ensure that after grinding, the joint is cut smooth and flush with the finish floor surface, without concave or intermittent, darkened profile.

3.5 NARROW SPALLED JOINT REPAIR OR JOINT WITH METAL KEYWAY (LESS THAN ¾”) (Refer to Associated Detail on Drawings)

A. For joints that are spalled, are constructed with metal keys, or have radius tooled edges not exceeding ¾” in width at slab surface.


1. Re-saw the joint edge to a minimum depth of ¾” with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw allowing removal of the widest spall (or top of radius) along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint.

2. Clean joint of loose concrete, metal key fragments, joint filler, laitance, dirt, debris, backer rod, etc.

3. Joints must be free of all visible moisture. 4. Ensure filler penetrates the irregular aggregate interlock portion of the sawn

contraction joint as indicated on drawing detail, re-establishing the aggregate interlock that may have been lost due to shrinkage, curling, and lack of reinforcement.

B. Fill joint cavity with specified Polyurea joint filler per manufacturer’s instructions, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles.

C. Overfill joint slightly and shave flush to slab surface after the grinding process has been completed.

3.6 WIDE SPALLED JOINT REPAIR (GREATER THAN ¾”) (Refer to Associated Detail on Drawings)

A. For joints that are spalled, contain metal key or self-leveling floor material that exceeds ¾” in width at slab surface.

B. Re-saw the joint edge to a minimum depth of 1/2” with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped shaver/leveler allowing removal of the widest spall or non-linear keyway along a given joint segment.

1. Produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint.

2. Maintain consistent width of repair to within 1/2 inch in 10 feet.

C. Overfill repair cavity with overlay material per manufacturer’s instructions and grind flush to slab surface.

D. After repair has cured, and prior to any traffic on patched surface, re-saw original slab joint(s) 1/2” in depth to honor joint and fill full depth with Polyurea joint filler per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.7 CRACK REPAIR (Refer to Associated Detail on Drawings)

A. Crack width less than 1/32” without surface spalling.

1. Do not repair. 2. Grout coat may be used to fill thin hairline deficiencies.

B. Cracks from 1/32” to 1/4” in width.

1. Clean crack cavity.

a. Remove loose concrete, dirt and debris from crack with a wire brush or hand grinder with twisted wire wheel attachment, 1/2'” minimum depth, ensuring crack sidewall is clean.

b. Remove any loose segments, including islands formed by crack, with sharp tool.

c. Use methods that will not widen existing crack.


d. Vacuum crack to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance.

2. Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill. 3. Choose material color that closely matches the adjacent floor. 4. Install low viscosity crack and spall repair material in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Repeat until all voids are filled and material crowns slab surface.

a. Do not flood area around crack. b. Watch for bubble formation and out gassing. c. Do not allow material to gel before adding additional material.

6. Shave or grind material flush to surface as stipulated by manufacturer.

3.8 SURFACE SPALLING REPAIR (Refer to Associated Detail on Drawings)

A. For slab surface that is chipped and spalled, where the deficiency is ½” in length or width up to 3” in length or width, by ½” in depth.

1. Route edge of spall to provide 1/8” deep square edge or 30° edge (consult manufacturer’s data sheet for specific surface preparation instructions).

a. Use small hand grinder with maximum 5” diameter dry diamond blade and vacuum system attachment.

b. Do not overcut slots into existing slab surface.

B. Clean and prep spalled cavity.

1. Wire brush spalled surface to remove all dirt and laitance. 2. Mask slab at perimeter of spall with tape.

C. Install low viscosity crack and spall repair material.

D. Polish over repair area with diamond disks to blend surface.

1. Feather filler material into the adjacent concrete floor surface. 2. With 2000 grit disk and firm pressure, add a few burn marks to mottle surface to

blend with adjacent floor surface.

E. NOTE:

1. For inconsistent, varying spalled joints that comply with the measurements in this Section, a form material may be needed to temporarily form and support the vertical face of spalled joint edge.

2. Ensure that the repair material will not adhere to the form and the rigid repair material does not fuse the joint together.

F. For cleanouts, in-floor electric outlets and Walker Duct access plates:

1. Over-core around perimeter of existing embed by ½” in width and depth. 2. Install low viscosity crack and spall repair materials.

3.9 BOLT HOLE/CONDUIT REPAIR

A. For slab surfaces containing surface or sub-surface bolts, bolt-hole voids, conduit or subsurface conduit.

1. Recess steel bolt or conduit a minimum of ½” below finish floor by either punching or cutting.


a. Verify with General Contractor prior to cutting into active electrical or communication conduit.

B. For spall fractured edges less than 30 degrees, square edge to a minimum 1/8” depth with either a drill bit, chisel or edge grinder.

1. Clean cavity of all debris and laitance with drill activated, brass wire wheel. 2. Vacuum hole to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance. 3. Dispense low viscosity crack and spall repair at moderate pace using steady

pressure. 4. Dispense material into void, refilling as necessary to produce slight crown. 5. Grind material flush to slab surface per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.10 LARGE SURFACE REPAIR, UNDERLAYMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

A. For slab surfaces containing wide-area irregular rough surfaces greater than 3” in width and length such as irregular coarse aggregate surfaces or surfaces with existing tile or carpet underlayments > 1/2” in thickness or surface paste delaminations.

1. Define edge perimeter with diamond masonry wheel or shaver/leveler to produce sharp edge, at least 1/2” deep.

a. Follow manufacturers recommendations for specific depth.

2. For delaminations test to determine the extent of the delaminated area.

a. From the current edge extend repair 6” in all directions. b. Define a square or rectangular repair area and create an edge perimeter. c. Do not overcut into surrounding surface.

3. Roughen base surface using shaver/leveler to ICRI CSP Level 3 and vacuum clean.

4. Wire brush to remove any small loose material and vacuum again.

B. Mix and install overlay material in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Place repair material in floor surface defect, float level or leave slightly proud of existing floor.

2. Grind, color and densify and polish to match adjacent concrete.

C. Re-establish original concrete slab joints by sawing completely through patch and re-filling with Polyurea joint filler prior to exposure to traffic.

D. For large areas over 50 square feet with existing fill where the depth after removal is greater than 1”, the following manufacturer approved process shall be used in conjunction with #16-20 dry sand to fill depressions to 1/2” below final floor level.

1. The standard mix and installation shall occur above this sub-base fill. 2. Mix the cementous overlay topping according to the technical data sheet.

a. The drill should be equipped with a box style paddle and should run at a minimum speed of 800-1200 RPM.

b. The material shall be mixed for a minimum time of 3 – 3.5 minutes. c. The sand fill may be added up to 30% by volume or 25 pounds per bag

maximum.

3. Sands may be pre-wetted to reduce the water demand. 4. Be sure that a calibrated container is used for measuring the mix water.


a. Using 4.5 to 5.0 quarts. b. The water amount will vary based on the amount of sand added.

5. Using a screed or rake spread the material over the primed surface.

a. Be sure to fill any holes or low areas in the surface during the installation. b. This material after mixed will not exhibit self-leveling properties. c. The material may be smoothed using a standard overlay stainless smoothing

tool or trowel.

6. Any smoothing or finishing should be done within 15 minutes of the application.

a. After 20 minutes the surface should not be touched.

7. Allow the material to dry for a minimum of 24 hours before installing the second primer application.

8. The Sub Base fill layer must be primed before the application of the overlay system.

a. Refer to the manufacturer polishing specification for installation details.

9. Large Batch Mixing:

a. For large batch mixing, place the measured amount of water in the mixer for all of the bags first.

b. Hold back a small amount of the water to add during mixing. c. Add all of the bags to the mixer and the sand with the mixer running. d. Add the retained water during mixing. e. The material should mix for 6-7 minutes until a smooth and even consistency

has been reached. f. Discharge the hopper directly into the pump for placement.

3.11 SMALL SURFACE PITTING, PINHOLE REPAIR, GROUT COAT (Refer to Associated Detail on Drawings)

A. For surfaces consisting of micro-deficiencies, pin holes, hairline cracks and other surface clutter that impedes the achievement of the specified overall gloss values.

1. Clean pitted sections with 90-degree angle grinder equipped with wire wheel to remove all dirt/laitance.

2. Wheel should be run over defect in multiple directions to ensure proper cleaning. 3. Vacuum prepared pitted sections.

B. Install and disperse grout coat using approved product in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.

1. Ensure a thin, uniform layer of repair material covers the pitted areas. 2. Refill any low spots as needed.

C. Grind or polish flush with metal or resin-bond diamonds, ensuring repair material is flush with slab surface.

D. Repeat repairs in areas as required if repair material pulls out of defects.

E. Apply required applications and polish smooth to meet specified overall gloss values.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Protect surfaces of finished floor.

B. Prohibit traffic until floor repairs have received final approval by Owner.


WORKSHEET

INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB REPAIRS AND JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT (To Be Turned in with Sub-Contractor’s Bid Behind Form 4450-024, Page 2)

ENTER TOTAL AREA TO BE POLISHED: SQUARE FEET

ITEM AREA FROM

ABOVE MULTIPLIER

TOTAL FROM MULTIPLIER

UNIT RATE INCLUDED IN

BID

TOTAL COST INCLUDED IN

BID

…..SAMPLE CALCULATION…..NOT PART OF BID…..

Joint Filler Removal and Replacement

36,000 0.14 5014 LF $2.75 / LF $13,788.50

…..DO NOT INCLUDE SAMPLE CALCULATION COST IN BID….. 1. Joint Filler Removal and Replacement

__________ 0.14 _________LF $ _______ /LF $ _________

2. Spalled joint repair or joint with metal keyway (less than ¾”)

__________ 0.08 _________LF $ _______ /LF $ _________

3. Spalled joint repair, joint with metal keyway or self-leveling compound removal (greater than ¾”)

$ _______ /LF

4. Crack repair __________ 0.03 _________LF $ _______ /LF $ _________

5a. Surface defect repair, including pop-outs, spalls, and gouges ¾” – 1 ½” DIA

__________ 0.025 _____ UNITS $ _______ /EA $ _________

5b. Surface defect repair, including pop-outs, spalls, and gouges 1 ½” – 3” DIA

__________ 0.025 _____ UNITS $ _______ /EA $ _________

6. Surface embed repair, including cleanouts, in-floor electrical outlets and Walker Duct access holes

__________ 0.001 _____ UNITS $ _______ /EA $ _________

7. Large surface repair, existing underlayment removal and replacement with 1/2” Polished Overlay

$ _______ /SF


8. Grout coat surface enhancement, including micro-pin holes, pitting and other shallow surface deficiencies

__________ 0.10 _________SF $ _______ /SF $ _________

9. Full Grind, Densify, Dye and Polish portions of the project not currently indicated on the drawings

$ _______ /SF

10. Add all relevant columns to create an estimated total for projected repairs

Totals for columns 1, 2, 4, 5a, 5b, 6 & 8 $ _________

END 03354

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03356 – POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH

POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 03356-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Final preparation of existing and new concrete surface including removal of original floor finish materials.

b. Removal of curing compounds, wax, sealers and other protective surface treatments to facilitate final surface finishing and polishing.

c. Installation of polished concrete floor system for existing and new interior concrete floors by dry grinding.

1.) Application of concrete densifier. 2.) Polishing with various size grit metal-bonded and resin-bonded

diamonds to the scheduled specified minimum local and overall gloss values.

3.) Application of chemical dye at Exchange logo. 4.) Application of final stain guard sealer.

d. Installation of joint sealants.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide polished concrete floor finish as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01340 – Submittals. 2. Section 01440 – Testing Laboratory Services. 3. Section 01550 – Temporary Facilities & Controls. 4. Section 01740 – Cleaning. 5. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 6. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 7. Section 03354 – Interior Concrete Slab Repair & Joint Filler Replacement. 8. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 9. Division 9 – Finishes. 10. Division 15 – Mechanical. 11. Division 16 – Electrical.


1. New concrete building slabs, not exposed in final finish, are specified in Section 03300 and will not require work under this Section.

2. Designated new concrete floor slabs exposed to view are specified in Section 03300 and will receive polish and final finish under this Section.

3. Designated new concrete floor slabs exposed to view are specified in Section 03300 and will receive concrete floor sealer specified in Section 09900, Painting.


4. Joint sealants are specified in this Section and Section 07920, Building and Paving Joint Sealers for installation under this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFSI – Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of hard surface flooring, including polished concrete, by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

B. ASTM D 523 – Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

C. ACI 310 “A Guide to Decorative Concrete”.

D. NFSI - National Floor Safety Institute; Test Method 101A; current edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Product Data:

1. Provide manufacturer's product data for polishing equipment including, but not limited to:

a. Planetary grinder polishing equipment. b. Planetary grinder HEPA dust collection equipment. c. Hand tools. d. Hand tool dust collection equipment. e. Diamond tooling. f. High speed propane burnisher. g. Polyurea pump. h. Joint cutting saw.

2. Provide manufacturer’s chemical and product data sheets including, but not limited to:

a. Liquid reactive surface densifier. b. Liquid stain guard treatment. c. Joint filler. d. Crack and spall repair product. e. Polishable overlay product. f. Grout coat, pin hole and small defect surface treatment. g. Acrylic sealer if required.

C. Installer’s Certification:

1. Provide list of 5 projects performed with last three years of similar type, size and complexity.

a. Submit project names, addresses, contacts and phone numbers for each project.

b. Contractor shall validate references and polisher’s capabilities prior to submitting proposal to AAFES.

D. Applicator Qualifications: Submit letter of certification from each of the following manufacturers of all products and equipment specified herein, stating that the applicator is a certified applicator of the system and is familiar with proper procedures and installation methods as required by the manufacturer.


1. Planetary grinder system. 2. Liquid reactive surface densifier and stain guard treatment. 3. Joint filler, crack and spall repair products.

E. Maintenance Manual: Submit installer’s maintenance manual, including maintenance and cleaning instructions for polished concrete floor system in Operation and Maintenance Manuals upon Final Completion of work.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAGs) for Buildings and Facilities; Final Guidelines, revisions, and updates for static coefficient of friction for walkway surfaces.

2. Environmental Requirements:

a. Comply with current Federal and local toxicity and air quality regulations and with Federal requirements on content of lead, mercury, and other heavy metals.

b. Do not use solvents in floor polish products that contribute to air pollution or impact food quality.

B. Pre-installation Meeting:

1. Contractor shall schedule and convene a pre-installation meeting at the project site before start of installation of polished concrete floor system.

a. Meeting to occur only after review and approval of required Sub-contractor submittals and completion of test panel mock-up including specified grinding, polishing and dye, joint filling, spall and crack repairs and specified overall gloss values are achieved.

b. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including:

1.) AAFES Project Manager. 2.) AAFES Store Manager or Assistant Manager. 3.) Architect-Engineer. 4.) AAFES’ Polishing Consultant. 5.) General Contractor. 6.) Polishing Subcontractor including Project Manager and Foreman.

2. Meeting agenda to include, but not limited to:

a. Review of existing conditions. b. Surface preparation. c. System installations. d. Field quality control. e. Protection. f. Environmental requirements. g. Coordination with other work. h. Controls to limit damage from dust. i. Field quality control methods and reporting.

1.6 MOCK-UP


A. Provide polished concrete floor finish mock-up, 250 square foot minimum size, illustrating completed finish including dye, all specified liquid surface treatments and specified gloss levels.

B. Mock-up will include properly installed joint treatment per Section 03354 in any color for the purpose of judging workmanship.

1. The specific joint color to be used on the project will be selected based on the color of the completed polished concrete sample.

C. Half of the sample area should include completed stain protection application and half should be without stain protection for testing purposes.

D. The sample should also be placed along a wall to allow sample to include edge finishing treatments for the purpose of review per specifications.

E. Locate mock-up where directed by AAFES Project Manager or designated representative.

F. Accepted mock-up will serve as standard to judge quality and workmanship of completed polished concrete floor finish.

G. Accepted mock-up of existing concrete slab may remain as part of finished floor system subject to compliance with specified requirements and approval.

H. Mock-up shall be approved by AAFES Contracting Officer or designated representative and AAFES Concrete Finish Consultant.

I. Non-compliant work shall be corrected and approved before Contractor continues with work.


A. Sequence application of concrete polishing after completion of other construction activities that would be damaging to completed polished finish.

B. Close areas to traffic during and after floor application for time period recommended in writing by manufacturer.

C. Polished Concrete should be sequenced to complete after final lighting is in operation to allow for a proper installation.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRE-CERTIFIED INSTALLERS

A. All bidding Contractors shall have completed AAFES in-house certification for this Project.

Company Name Phone Number

1. American Concrete Inc. 877.775.0030 2. Budget Maintenance Concrete 610.323.7702 3. Diama-Shield 888.730.4075 4. Industrial Restoration & Coatings 801.866.9896


5. Jeffco Concrete Contractors 800.226.2668 6. K & J Concrete Polishing 865.971.1760 7. Pacific Decorative Concrete 916.725.9269 8. Perfect Polish Inc 877.917.4463 9. Preferred Global 800.317.2450 10. Premier Concrete Construction 603.654.2471

B. Refer to specifications Division 1 for substitution qualifications.

1. Substitutions must be submitted to Contracting Officer in writing a minimum of 10-days prior to Solicitation closing date.

2.2 EQUIPMENT TO BE USED FOR INSTALLATION

A. Floor Grinder:

1. Manufacturers:

a. HTC. b. SASE. c. Concrete Polishing Solutions. d. Diamatic. e. PrepMaster.

2. Type: Multi-orbital, planetary-action, opposing-rotational, 3 or 4 diamond-headed floor grinders.

3. Weight: 850 pounds or more. 4. Grinding Pressure: 600 pounds minimum.

B. Dust Extraction System and pre-separator for grinding/polishing: Heavy-duty industrial HEPA filtration vacuum system, suitable for extracting and containing large quantities of fine concrete dust (minimum 350 CFM air flow) in conjunction with manufacturer recommended pre-separator:

1. HTC 80ID. 2. Pullman-Ermator S36. 3. SASE Bull 50. 4. Equal approved in advance.

C. Diamond Tooling for Coating Removal, Initial Grinding, and Preparing Floor for Polishing: Tooling manufacturer subject to submittal review prior to approval.

1. Metal Bonded Diamonds:

a. Grit Size: 40, 80 and 150.

1.) Reference paragraph 3.3, C of this Section.

D. Diamond Tooling for Polishing Concrete:

1. Resin Bonded, Phenolic Diamonds:

a. Grit Size: 100, 200, 400, 800 and 1500 or equivalent.

E. Grinding / Polishing Pads for Edges:

1. Grit Size: 80, 100, 120, 200, 400, 800, 1500 and 3000.

F. Hand Grinder with dust extraction attachment and pads.

G. Joint Cutting Saw with dust extraction attachment:

1. Hump Back, Joe Due.


2. Dust Buggy, US Saws. 3. The Mongoose, Engrave-a-Crete. 4. Equal approved in advance.

H. Self-propelled Shaver/Leveler for slab surface demolition and leveling:

1. SuperShaver, CPS. 2. BMC 335 Shaver, Diamatic. 3. Equal approved in advance.

I. High speed propane burnisher:

1. Minimum 27 inch head generating pad speeds of 2,500 RPM or higher.

J. Diamond Impregnated Burnisher Pads in 800 grit size only:

1. Twister Diamond Cleaning System Pads, HTC. 2. Diamond Polishing Pads, Norton. 3. SpinFlex Diamond Polishing Pads, CPS. 4. Equal approved in advance.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Penetrating Hardener/Densifier: Clear liquid reactive lithium-silicate based:

1. Consolideck LS, Prosoco. 2. RetroPlate 99, Advanced Floor Products. 3. Flor-Sil, Diamatic. 4. FGS Permashine, L & M Construction Chemicals. 5. 3DHS Densifier, Ameripolish. 6. Equal approved in advance.

B. Protective Surface Treatment (Stain Guard):

1. Consolideck LS Guard, Prosoco. 2. RetroGuard, Advanced Floor Products. 3. Flor-Finish, Diamatic. 4. FGS Stain Protection, L & M Construction Chemicals. 5. SR2 Stain Protector, Ameripolish. 6. No substitutions will be accepted.

C. Solvent Based Dye: Where needed for repairs or as indicated on plans.

1. AmeriPolish Acetone Solvent Based Dye 2. Prosoco GemTone Dye

a. Applied with Acetone only.

3. No substitutions will be accepted.

D. Joint Filler: Products shall be provided in a complementary color to match Polished Concrete finish after polishing.

1. SL/65 Polyurea, VersaFlex Incorporated. 2. RS65 Polyurea, Metzger McGuire. 3. HT-PE65 Polyurea, Hi-Tech Systems. 4. Colors shall be matched as closely as possible using Sherwin-Williams paint color

chart.

a. Manufacturer shall produce product to match this color selection.


E. Low Viscosity Crack and Spall Repair: Products shall be provided in a complementary color to match Polished Concrete finish after polishing.

1. Quick-Mender, VersaFlex Incorporated. 2. Rapid Refloor, Metzger McGuire. 3. Equal approved in advance. 4. Colors shall be reviewed and approved by Contracting Officer or designated

representative in Mock-up.

F. Wide Area Surface Repairs:

1. PC-5614 Polishable Overlay, Diamatic. 2. UltraTop PC, Mapei. 3. Colors shall be reviewed and approved by Contracting Officer or designated


G. Pin Hole and Surface Pitting Grout Coat:

1. GM 3000, Husqvarna Construction Products. 2. RSG, Diamatic. 3. Versa-Grout, Versaflex. 4. Spall TX3, Hi-Tech. 5. Pit-Grout, Metzger McGuire. 6. Equal approved in advance. 7. Colors shall be reviewed and approved by Contracting Officer or designated


H. Acrylic Sealer (where required):

1. CSS Emulsion (25% solids), Elite Crete. 2. H&C Clear Solvent Based Acrylic (25% solids), Sherwin Williams. 3. Equal approved in advance.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine floor to receive polished concrete floor system.

B. Notify the Contracting Officer of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use prior to commencement of polishing.

C. Do not begin surface preparation or installation until conditions are corrected and approved.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from the following:

1. Minimal accumulation of dust from grinding and polishing. 2. Contact with overspray of penetrating hardener / densifier. 3. Contact with overspray of protective surface treatment (stain guard). 4. Contact with joint filler, crack or spall repair materials.

B. On existing concrete floors, completely remove existing flooring, mastics, adhesives, self-leveling underlayment fillers and other foreign matter.


C. On existing concrete floors, remove the top half of an inch of existing joint material and replace with approved joint filler and crack repair products.

D. Completely remove cure/seal compounds on new concrete floor slabs installed under Section 03300.

E. Clean Surfaces: Remove dirt, dust, debris, oil, grease, curing agents, bond breakers, paint, coatings, and other surface contaminants that could adversely affect installation of polished concrete floor system.

F. Fill concrete joints in accordance with Section 07920.

G. Repair all slab defects and joints in accordance with Section 03354.

H. For areas to be prepped and sealed per plans perform one 40 grit grind to remove all glue, mastic or underlayment’s on the surface.

1. Clean the surface well prior to installation of sealer.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install polished concrete floor system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Aggregate Exposure:

1. Fine Aggregate: Mottled salt-and-pepper aggregate exposure.

C. Polished Concrete Floor System

1. Open Slab Surface:

a. As required to provide a uniform final polish or removal of existing floor coatings:

1.) Begin grinding with 40 or 80-grit metal bond. 2.) For new concrete floor slabs, open up concrete by grinding with 80-

grit metal-bonded diamonds. 3.) Expose coarse concrete aggregate only when required to level low

spots within floor surface.

b. Review condition of floor with AAFES Project Manager.

1.) Obtain approval from AAFES Project Manager if large coarse aggregate is required to be exposed to remove existing coatings, floor underlayment or slab deficiencies.

2.) Variations to the precise grinding, densifying, polishing and stain guard application are anticipated, but shall be discussed and approved in writing by the AAFES Project Manager prior to executing the work.

c. Progressive edge grinding will be necessary to within ½” of all vertical abutments, including walls, cases, columns, posts and racking systems.

d. Joint filler and spall repairs shall be flush with surface after grinding and polishing steps.

e. Additional passes along curled joints may be necessary to even the surfaces and remove joint filler chatter.


2. Remove metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with progressively finer metal-bonded diamonds up to metal bond 150-grit.

3. Apply densifier to the point of rejection to ensure complete acceptance of the densifier product at the recommended step per manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. Floor Polishing:

a. Remove 150-grit metal-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with a transitional diamond per manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. Remove transitional resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 100-grit resin-bonded diamonds.

c. Remove 100-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 200-grit resin-bonded diamonds.

d. Remove 200-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 400-grit resin-bonded diamonds.

e. Remove 400-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 800-grit resin-bonded diamonds.

f. Remove 800-grit resin-bonded diamond scratches by grinding with 1500-grit resin-bonded diamonds.

5. Apply Stain Guard:

a. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions. b. Apply first coat per manufacturer’s recommendation (DO NOT OVER

APPLY). c. Use applicator pad, pre-wetted with stain guard, to pull material out to create

a thin film prior to drying. d. Remove product completely from areas of over application, as evidenced by

surface streaking, and replace with unused stain guard. e. Apply second coat of stain guard at all areas per manufacturer’s instructions.

6. High speed burnish:

a. After each application of stain guard is dry, burnish surface. b. Burnish using approved pads at a slow movement pace using high-speed

machine with 800 grit diamond impregnated pads as required to achieve specified gloss requirements.

c. Burnish with several passes.

1.) Make each progressive pass at 90 degrees from previous pass.

d. Burnishing, pad type, and pace of forward movement shall combine to develop a minimum floor surface temperature of 91-degrees F directly below the burnishing pad as continuously measured by the operator during installation.

7. Clean & Seal: In areas designated per plans to be clean and seal only:

a. Remove all surface glue, mastics and any underlayment’s. b. Fill joints and then seal the floor using two coats of an acrylic solvent based

sealer with 25% solids. c. Insure that there are no roller marks are patterns in the sealer placement.

D. Penetrating Dye:

1. Mix dye in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for use in blending and matching patches.

2. Apply dye in locations indicated and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


E. Exchange Logo:

1. Where indicated on drawings install a dyed Exchange logo. 2. Colors are to be as follows:

a. DYE-1: AmeriPolish Classic Patriot Blue b. DYE-2: AmeriPolish Classic Sepia c. DYE-3:

1.) First coat is 20% strength AmeriPolish Classic Black. 2.) The second coat is 100% strength AmeriPolish Classic Sepia.

3. The logo is to be laid out using a stencil to allow for color change without the use of decorative score lines.

a. Approved stencil manufacturer: FloorMap Stencil Design.

4. All color transitions are to be installed with clean lines and no bleed.


A. Inspect completed polished concrete floor system with the AAFES Concrete Consultant, Contracting Officer or designated representative, Contractor and Installer.

B. Review procedures with Contracting Officer or designated representative to correct unacceptable areas of completed polished concrete floor system.

C. Specular Gloss/Reflectance, ASTM D 523:

1. Perform polishing and burnishing work necessary to produce a Specified Overall Gloss Value (SOGV) ≥ 50 prior to applying protective surface treatment, SOGV ≥ 60 after applying protective surface treatment and Minimum Local Gloss Value (MLGV) ≥ 40 after applying protective surface treatment as measured using a Horiba IG-320, 60 Degree Gloss Checker.

2. Gloss shall be considered as a quantitative value that expresses the degree of reflection when light hits the concrete floor surface.

3. Gloss measurements will be taken independent of ambient lighting and will be taken within a sealed measurement window located beneath the test unit.

4. A minimum of 12 readings will be collected.

a. High and low measurements will be discarded and the remaining measurements averaged.

b. Average calculated value shall exceed specified SOGV. c. No single measurement value less than the specified MLGV will be accepted.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect completed polished concrete floor system from damage until Substantial Completion.

1. Do not allow vehicle and pedestrian traffic on unprotected floor. 2. Do not allow construction materials, equipment, and tools on unprotected floor. 3. Prohibit parking of vehicles on concrete slab. 4. If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper components that

might drip oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquids. 5. No tire embedments (rocks, nails, screws, etc.) that will scratch or pit slab surface. 6. Prohibit pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab. 7. Prohibit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slab.


8. Prohibit acids and acidic detergents from contacting concrete surfaces. 9. Cover concrete floors with drop cloths or use breathable drop cloths during

painting. 10. If paint is spilled on concrete floor, remove paint immediately. 11. Protect slab surface from moisture for 72 hours to prevent re-emulsification of

surface treatment prior to cure.

B. Immediately remove mortar splatter, spilled liquids, oil, grease, paint, coatings, and other surface contaminants, which could adversely affect completed polished concrete floor system.

C. Repair damaged areas of completed polished concrete floor system to satisfaction of Contracting Officer.

END 03356.

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY Section 04200 – UNIT MASONRY

UNIT MASONRY 04200-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Normal weight concrete unit masonry. b. Lightweight concrete unit masonry. c. Clay brick masonry for toothing and patching walls. d. Clay brick masonry for closing building openings. e. Masonry wall ties. f. All accessories indicated and required for a complete and proper installation

of the masonry construction.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide Architectural concrete unit masonry as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.

a. Architectural ground-faced concrete unit masonry. b. Special architectural ground-faced concrete unit masonry shapes.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide Architectural concrete unit masonry as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

a. Architectural ground-faced concrete unit masonry. b. Special architectural ground-faced concrete unit masonry shapes.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 4. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers 6. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall.

B. Installed but furnished elsewhere:

1. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. (Lintels, sunshade/canopy brackets, anchors, inserts.)

2. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers.


A. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics from one manufacturer for each related area.

2. Products required for toothed/patched area shall be obtained based on performance criteria, color and texture characteristics necessary to match existing.


3. Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color and texture to match existing for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate.

B. Regulatory requirements:

1. Building Code: The International Building Code (2015) governs the work. 2. Perform masonry work in accord with ANSI A41.1 – Building Code Requirements

for Masonry, unless in conflict with building code specified above or as indicated otherwise in this Section.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Cited references, or specified portions thereof, current at date of Bidding Documents unless otherwise specified, govern the work.

1. If conflict between cited standards and project specifications do not proceed with any work:

a. Contractor shall consult with Contracting Officer for determination of governing standard.

b. Contracting Officer will issue written clarification.

2. Proceed with work based on determination after receipt of written clarification.

B. Standards:

1. ASTM C150 – Specified for Portland Cement. 2. ASTM C216 – Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay

or Shale). 3. ASTM C62 – Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay

or Shale). 4. ASTM C5 – Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes. 5. ASTM C207 – Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 6. ASTM C144 – Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 7. ASTM C90 – Specification Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 8. ASTM C145 – Specification for Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 9. ASTM C129 – Specification for Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 10. ASTM C55 – Specification for Concrete Building Brick. 11. ASTM C476 – Specification for Grout for Reinforced and Non-Reinforced Masonry. 12. ASTM C270 – Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 13. ASTM A123 – Specification for Zinc (hot-dip) Galvanized Coating Iron or Steel

Products. 14. ASTM A153 – Specification for Zinc (hot-dip) Galvanized Coating Iron or Steel

Hardware. 15. ASTM C140: minimum compressive strength. 16. ASTM C426: drying shrinkage requirements. 17. ASTM A116: Class 3; galvanized wire. 18. ASTM A82: wall ties. 19. ASTM A305: deformed bars. 20. ASTM A615: bar steel. 21. ASTM C404: coarse aggregate.

C. Manufacturer’s Catalogs: Manufacturers catalogs, current at the date of Bidding Documents, are incorporated by reference to the same force and effect as if repeated herein at length.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with Section 01340:

1. Prior to delivery, submit manufacturer’s certificates attesting to compliance with applicable specifications for brick masonry units.

2. Submit manufacturer’s published product data attesting to compliance with applicable specifications for:

a. Standard and light weight unit masonry. b. Colored ground-faced concrete unit masonry. c. Clay unit masonry. d. Concrete unit masonry. e. Anchors and ties. f. Horizontal joint reinforcing g. Mortar, flashing materials and other specified accessories.

3. Submit Unit Masonry Shop Drawings for:

a. Special shaped, colored ground-faced concrete unit masonry. b. Reinforcing for concrete masonry walls.

B. Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit to Architect Manufacturer’s certificates attesting compliance with the project specifications for grades, types, and row classes included in these specifications.

C. Samples for selection purposes:

1. Preliminary Brick Masonry Samples:

a. The intent of this work is to provide new clay masonry units for patching that exactly match existing building face brick estimated to have been completed in 1979.

1.) New clay unit masonry shall match existing in color, texture and performance characteristics.

2.) All new masonry submitted to match existing will be subject to approval of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and MacDill AFB BCE.

3.) Furnish manufacturer’s sample panels for new clay unit masonry. 4.) Each panel shall fully define color, range and texture of product.

b. Panels will be used for selection purposes and in determining suitability of new clay unit masonry for purpose intended.

c. Mortar Samples: Furnish mortar samples, mixed for color and aggregate texture to match existing for approval by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2. Architectural Ground Face Unit Masonry:

a. Architectural ground face unit masonry samples in hand panels or sample boxes showing full extent of colors available for exposed masonry required.

b. Contractor shall submit three (3) samples of colored ground-faced concrete masonry units in manufacturer’s full range of colors.

c. Architect-Engineer will review samples with Contracting Officer and MacDill AFB to make final selection of masonry colors to be used in construction.


1.) If reviewed samples result in rejection of any samples furnished by Contractor the Architect-Engineer will make recommendations on sources for additional samples.

2.) Contractor shall obtain additional samples until a satisfactory color is approved by Contracting Officer and MacDill AFB.

3. Special Shape Unit Masonry:

a. Special shape unit masonry samples in actual size, shape and finish as proposed for use.

b. Contractor shall submit one (1) sample of colored ground-faced Architectural concrete masonry units for each special shape required including jamb units, L-corners, wash cap units and other special units indicated.

4. Mortar:

a. Provide three (3) sample boxes of mortar colors, showing example of finished mortar joint colors available, for selection of tinted mortar.

D. In accord with 01720: Submit Project Record Documents.

1. Include all authorized changes in drawings and specifications. 2. Include accurate account of actual areas patched or repaired if different than

shown on Solicitation Documents. 3. Include location of all utility lines and other items passing through masonry work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver all materials in sufficient quantity and time to maintain approved construction schedule.

B. Store all packaged materials in manufacturer’s original containers, with all labels and markings intact and legible.

C. Remove materials and damaged containers immediately from the site.

D. Protection:

1. Store masonry units off ground on level platforms or pallets that allow air circulation under stacked units and prevent absorption of moisture.

2. Cover and protect against contamination by mud, dust, materials likely to cause staining or wetting prior to use.

3. Store cement, lime, gypsum and air setting mortar in watertight sheds with elevated floors.

4. Protect anchors and ties from the elements. 5. Handle materials on pallets or flat bed barrows. 6. Do not permit free discharge from conveyer units or transporting mortar trays.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Cold Weather Protection:

1. Preparation:

a. Remove snow or ice formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to touch.

b. Remove frozen or damaged masonry. c. Sprinkle brick with heated water when suction exceeds 20 grams per minute

per brick (30 square inches) until rate of absorption (suction) falls below 20 grams per minute.


1.) When units are above 32°F: heat water above 70°F. 2.) When units are below 32°F: heat water above 130°F.

d. Use dry masonry units. e. Do not lay frozen units.

2. Protection while masonry units are being laid:

a. At all times when daily air temperature is below 40°F., mortar mixing water and aggregate shall be heated to a minimum of 70°F., and a maximum of 160°F.

b. Additional protection measures as enumerated below shall be taken as the temperature falls.

1.) Temperature 40°F. to 32°F.: Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours.

2.) Temperature 32°F. to 25°F.: Completely cover masonry for 24 hours. 3.) Temperature 25°F. to 20°F.:

a) Heat both sides of walls under construction. b) Provide windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph.

4.) Temperature 20°F. and below:

a) Provide complete enclosures and heat to maintain air temperature above 32°F.

b) Minimum temperature of units when laid shall be 32°F.

B. Hot Weather Protection: Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in an ambient air temperature of 99°F in the shade with relative humidity less than 50%.

C. Protection of completed masonry:

1. Protect as follows for Mean daily air temperature within specified ranges:

a. Temperature 40°F. to 32°F.: Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with non-staining weather-resistive membrane.

b. Temperature 32°F. to 25°F.: Completely cover masonry with non-staining weather-resistive membrane for 24 hours.

c. Temperature 25°F. to 20°F.: Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 24 hours.

d. Temperature 20°F. and below: Maintain masonry temperature above 32°F. for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps or other acceptable methods.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in this Section applicable to each material indicated.

B. Provide brick unit masonry and banding, where exposed, to match existing brick units.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. General: Comply with requirements indicate below applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required.


B. Concrete Block Units: Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for grade, type, face size, exposed face and weight classification.

1. Hollow load bearing units shall comply with ASTM C90, Type I, Grade N. 2. Solid load bearing units shall comply with ASTM C145, Type I, Grade U. 3. Hollow non-load bearing units shall comply with ASTM C129, Type I. 4. Nominal face dimensions of all units shall be 8 inches by 16 inches. 5. Exposed faces shall be furnished in manufacturer’s standard color and texture as

indicated. 6. Thickness of units shall be as indicated on drawings. 7. Provide lightweight aggregate units for all above grade work and normal weight for

use below building slab reference elevation 100’-0” or any conditions below grade, unless noted otherwise on drawings.

8. Pressure steam cure all units at a minimum steam temperature of 350F., minimum steam pressure of 125 PSI for the required time period necessary to complete hydrothermal reaction of lime and silicenous ingredients, or cure and dry all units with CO2 system whereby the kiln atmosphere will contain over 5 percent CO2 and be circulated at 180F. to complete hydrothermal reaction of lime and silicenous ingredient and at 200F to remove moisture and reduce shrinkage to comply with ASTM C90.

9. Maximum drying shrinkage for units shall be .02 percent for normal weight and .03 percent for lightweight units as determined by ASTM C426.

10. Moisture content at time of delivery shall not exceed 35 percent of total absorption capacity.

C. Concrete Building Brick: Provide units with characteristics indicated below for grade, type, size and weight.

1. Concrete building brick shall comply with ASTM C55, Type I, Grade N, normal weight.

2. Nominal modular size dimensions of: 2-2/3 in. x 8 in. x 4 in. thick. 3. Use only for concealed work.

2.3 CLAY MASONRY UNITS

A. Clay Masonry Units shall be equal to units as manufactured by the following acceptable manufacturers and subject to compliance with all criteria established in the Section:

1. Glen-Gery Corporation, Wyomissing, PA. 2. The Belden Brick Company, Canton, OH. 3. Endicott Clay Products Company, Fairbury, NE 4. Other manufacturers subject to compliance with this Section that meet criteria for

exactly matching existing brick masonry units.

B. Comply with the following requirements applicable to each form of brick required:

1. Provide special molded shapes where necessary to match existing shapes. 2. Provide units without cores or frogs and with all exposed surfaces finished.

C. Face Brick Standard: ASTM C-216 and as follows:

1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units of grade and minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below:

a. Grade SW. b. 3000 p.s.i. minimum.

2. Type FBS.


3. Size: Provide bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions within the tolerances specified in ASTM C216:

a. Building Brick:

1.) Modular Brick: 3 5/8 inches thick by 2 ¼” inches high by 7 5/8 inches long.

2.) Standard Brick: 3 5/8 inches thick by 2 ¼ inches high by 8 inches long.

3.) Brick Selection: Select clay masonry units in size to match existing units based upon one of the sizes above.

4. Color and Texture:

a. As selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from preliminary brick panels submitted by Contractor.

b. Selection will be based on specified performance properties and dimensional/aesthetic characteristics to match existing units.

2.4 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer:

1. Single Source: All Architectural concrete masonry units shall be the product of a single manufacturer as indicated.

2. Product: Trendstone Masonry Units. 3. Manufacturer:

Northfield Block Company (Old Castle) One Hunt Court Mundelein, Illinois 60060 Phone: 847.816.9000/Fax: 847.816.9027

4. All high-density pre-finished concrete masonry units shall be fabricated in compliance with manufacturer’s published literature and the “Standard Specification for Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units” (Current Edition).

a. All units shall and conform to ASTM C90-97. b. Units shall be furnished in sizes and textures as indicated.

B. Acceptable Products:

1. Architectural Ground-Faced Units (GFMU-1): Provide manufacturer's standard pre-finished modular ground-faced texture pre-cast concrete units without cores.

a. Size: Custom Stretcher 4FE with height ground to actual 7 9/16” (3 9/16” x 7 9/16” x 15 9/16” actual).

b. Special Shapes:

1.) Furnish special “L” corner shapes to maintain running bond pattern at inside and outside corners, 7 9/16” high x 3 9/16” thick x 15 9/16” wide with 7 9/16” return that can be used interchangeably for inside and outside installations.

2.) Furnish special sill wash shaped stretchers at top course intersection with EIFS finish, 7 9/16” high x 3 9/16” thick x 15 9/16” wide with top surface level from back to front for 1/4” and the remainder ground to a sloped surface 1/2” lower at outside face of unit.

3.) Furnish sill wash outside and inside corner units matching requirements for “L” shaped units.


C. Provide additional special shapes where indicated and as follows:

1. For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions.

2. Plant shaped outside return corner units shall be furnished for concrete masonry where indicated.

D. Integral Water Repellent for Exposed Concrete Masonry:

1. Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength.

2. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen.

3. Provide manufacturer’s standard water repellant admixture equal to products manufactured by one of the following:

a. Block Plus W-10; Addiment Inc. b. Dry-Block; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division. c. Rheopel; Master Builders.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, grade 60, deformed billet steel bars; uncoated finish.

B. Horizontal reinforcing for single wythe walls:

1. Single wythe wall horizontal reinforcing: Truss type; plain steel; galvanized finish; 3/16 in. or No. 9 ga. side rods with 9 ga. cross ties as indicated or, if not indicated, provide No. 9 ga. side rods as standard.


MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION CATALOG NO.

a. A.A. Wire Products Co. Blok-Truss AA600 6100 E. New England Ave. Chicago, IL 60638 (312) 586-6700 b. Homann & Bernard Inc. Truss-Mesh No. 120 30 Rasons Court P. O. Box 270 Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 234-0600 c. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. Truss Type WB 302 of America P. O. Box 240146 400 Round Tree Road Charlotte, NC 28244 (704) 525-5554

C. Horizontal reinforcing for multiple wythe walls:

1. Multiple wythe wall horizontal reinforcing: Truss type; plain steel; galvanized finish, 3/16 in. or No. 9 ga. side rods with 9 ga. cross ties as indicated or, if not indicated, provide No. 9 ga. side rods as standard; and receptor for adjustable “U” shaped anchor and wire tie.



MANUFACTURER NO. DESCRIPTION CATALOG

a. A.A. Wire Products Co. Blok-Truss AA680 6100 E. New England Ave. Chicago, IL 60638 (312) 586-6700 b. Homann & Bernard Inc. Truss-Box Mesh No. 165 30 Rasons Court P. O. Box 270 Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 234-0600 c. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. Adjustable WB 700-C of America Truss Tab P. O. Box 240146 400 Round Tree Road Charlotte, NC 28244 (704) 525-5554

D. Adjustable masonry veneer anchors:

1. Provide two-piece assemblies allowing vertical and/or horizontal differential movement between masonry wythe and substrate, parallel to plane of substrate, but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it.

a. Assemblies shall be capable of withstanding 110 l.b.f. load in either tension or compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.

b. Attachment:

1.) Steel stud walls: Zinc coated hex head screws, self-drilling, self-tapping, #10 TEK screws by 2 ¼” minimum length.

2.) Concrete or solid grouted masonry: Self-tapping, hex head, epoxy coated, #10 TEK screw by 2 ¼” long.

2. Tie and Anchor Units:

a. Wire tie shall be triangular, hot dip galvanized, 3/16” diameter and in lengths as required to extend 3 inches into masonry wythe of face veneer.

b. Anchor section shall be 12-gauge mill galvanized sheet metal stiffened strap stamped to provide slot between strap and plate for connection of wire tie.

1.) Nominal ¾-inch wide by 9 inches long by 3/8-inch offset. 2.) 1” stand-off legs to prevent compression of insulated sheathing.

c. Foam seal shall be polyethylene foam supplied in 1/8” x 3” rolls conforming to ASTM D 3575.


MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION CATALOG NO.

a. Homann & Bernard, Inc. Screw Anchor X-seal 1” with 30 Rasons Court “VeeTie” and Foam Seal P. O. Box 270

Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 234-0600

2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS AND SEALANTS

A. Flexible Copper Fabric Flashing: Laminated flexible sheet flashings comprised of copper sheet bonded under pressure with a ductile asphalt between two layers of asphalt saturated woven fabric, black in color and of weight indicated below:


1. Weight: 2 oz./ Sq.Ft. 2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

B. Adhesive for Flashing: Of type recommended by manufacture of flashing material for use indicated.

C. Flashing Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Flexible Copper Fabric Flashing:

a. “AFCO Copper Fabric”; Afco Products Inc. b. “Copper Fabric”; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. “York Copper Fabric”; York Manufacturing Inc. d. “Copper Fabric”; Advanced Building Products.

D. Cavity Mat: Provide continuous trapezoidal shaped mesh fabric cavity mat at base of wall over in-wall flashing to suspend mortar droppings permanently above flashing.

1. Mortar Net. 2. CavClear.

E. Weep Joint Material: 90% open weave polyester mesh head joint weep material for modular veneer masonry applications designed to reduce mold and allow moisture to migrate from wall, used in conjunction with cavity mat, and furnished in color as selected by Architect-Engineer from manufacturer’s standard colors.

1. Mortar Net. 2. CavClear.

F. Sealant Products: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants that are compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates and other related materials and comply with requirements specified in Section 07920.

2.7 CLEANING AGENTS

A. Use only the following cleaning agents for new masonry as indicated:

1. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid any unnecessary deposits of mortar on the face of the masonry units.

2. Initial Cleaning:

a. Soak surface area to be cleaned with potable water. b. Work from top to bottom of area to be cleaned using stiff brush before the

mortar has had a chance to cure and rigidly bond itself to the masonry units.

3. Alternate Cleaning if Initial Cleaning is unsuccessful:

a. Soak surface area to be cleaned with potable water. b. Work from top to bottom of area to be cleaned using only the following:

1.) Weak solution of water and common laundry detergent mixed at a rate of ½ cup detergent per 5-gallon bucket.

2.) Use stiff brush to apply solution and rinse thoroughly with clean, potable water.

B. For stains or mortar removal that cannot be removed using above methods contact masonry unit manufacturer for specific written recommendations of materials and methods.


C. Do not use commercial masonry cleaning solutions under any circumstances without express written consent of Contracting Officer.

2.8 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type IA.

1. Gray for all mortar used for laying unexposed masonry units. 2. Pigmented mortar shall be used for all exposed masonry units.

B. Hydrated lime shall comply with ASTM C207, Type S.

C. Quicklime: in accordance with ASTM C5.

D. Sand shall conform to ASTM C144.

E. Water shall be clean and potable.

F. Coarse aggregate for masonry grout shall conform to ASTM C404; maximum size 3/8 inch.

G. Masonry Cement: Not allowed.

H. Colored Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in type N mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C979.

1. Pigment requirements shall meet or surpass those set forth by ASTM C79, “Pigments for Integrally Colored Mortar/Concrete”.

2. Pigments shall have been successfully tested in accordance with specifications detailed in ASTM C91 and ASTM C270.

3. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar used to lay similar masonry units and as acceptable to masonry unit manufacturer.

2.9 MORTAR MIXING AND PROPORTIONING

A. All mortar and grout materials shall comply with requirements of ASTM C270.

B. Mortar types and locations:

1. Provide Type S mortar for all below grade regular weight concrete masonry walls and for above grade light weight structurally reinforced concrete masonry walls.

2. Provide Type N mortar for all clay brick masonry and glazed concrete masonry veneer walls.

C. Proportions of materials for mortar shall be by volume for unit masonry and shall meet the following mix requirements:

1. Type S mortar proportions, 2,000 psi, minimum 28-day compressive strength:

a. 1-part Portland cement. b. 1/2-part hydrated lime or lime putty. c. Not less than 2 1/4-parts and not more than 3-parts, damp loose aggregate.

2. Type N mortar proportions, 1,500 psi, minimum 28-day compressive strength:

a. 1-part Portland cement. b. 1-part hydrated lime or lime putty. c. Not less than 2 1/4-parts and not more than 3-parts, damp loose aggregate.


3. Enhance mortar to improve durability and water resistance for Architectural concrete masonry units only in compliance with manufacturer's written recommendations for water based mortar additives.

D. Volume of aggregate for all mortar proportions shall be not less than 2-1/4 times nor more than 3 times the sum of volume of cement and lime used.

1. Weights per cubic foot of materials in mortar are:

MATERIAL WEIGHT PER CUBIC FOOT

Portland Cement 94 lbs. Hydrated Lime 40 lbs. Sand (Damp & Loose) One cubic foot contains 80 lbs. dry sand.

2. Measurement of volume of mortar ingredients shall be by barrow, buggy, manufacturer’s package, or other containers of known capacity, or by approved batching device so that specified proportions will be consistently maintained.

E. All mortar shall be thoroughly mixed in a mechanical mixer for a minimum of 5 minutes.

1. Mixer shall be completely emptied and thoroughly cleaned by hosing down or other acceptable means between batches.

2. Mortar consistency shall be adjusted to satisfaction of mason, but as much water shall be added as is compatible with convenience in using mortar.

3. If mortar begins to stiffen from evaporation or absorption of a part of mixing water, mortar shall be retempered by adding water and remixing.

F. All mortar shall be discarded if not used within 2-1/2 hours of initial mixing or after it has begun to set.

G. Materials that are frozen, caked, or lumpy shall not be used for mortar.

2.10 GROUT

A. Provide coarse grout in accordance with ASTM C476.

B. Grout shall be proportioned as specified for mortar above except as follows:

1. Coarse aggregate shall be substituted for a portion, not to exceed 50 percent, of the sand.

2. Water shall be added to produce a consistency for pouring without segregation of materials.

3. Minimum compressive strength of grout shall be 2000 p.s.i.

C. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use.

1. Place grout within 1-1/2 hours from introducing water to the mixture and prior to initial set.

2. Retempered grout is not allowed.

D. Do not antifreeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.

E. Do not introduce admixtures to grout.

2.11 CONCRETE

A. Concrete for bond beams: Provide concrete with 3000 PSI compressive strength at 28 days; 3-inch maximum slump; conforming to the following requirements:


1. Cement: ASTM C150, Normal – Type I. 2. Coarse aggregate: Maximum 3/8 in. size; graded in compliance with ASTM C33. 3. Fine aggregate: Graded in compliance with ASTM C33.

2.12 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER STRIPS

A. Strips shall be factory-molded product of rubber conforming to ASTM D375, Grade R-805, with compressive neoprene compound edge conforming to ASTM D375, Grade SC-310C, durometer hardness of 30.

B. All strips shall be wide flange type with shear lugs, resistant to oil and solvents and shall meet requirements of ASTM D736 after being exposed to a temperature of minus 40 degrees F.

C. Width of strips shall be as required by wall masonry thickness.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Inspect bearing surfaces to assure surface to support masonry work at proper elevation, free of dirt and other deleterious materials and all surfaces not properly prepared have been satisfactorily corrected.

B. Remove all dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from anchors, ties and reinforcement prior to installation.

C. Do not lay masonry when temperature of outside air is below 40F., unless suitable means are provided to heat materials.

1. Protect work from cold and frost and insure that mortar will harden without freezing.

2. No antifreeze ingredients shall be used in mortar.

D. Before closing up any pipe, duct or similar inaccessible spaces or shafts with masonry, remove all rubbish and sweep out the area to be enclosed.

E. Where fresh masonry joins masonry that is partially set or totally set, or existing masonry, clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and wet lightly so as to obtain best possible bond with new work.

1. Remove all loose masonry mortar. 2. If it is necessary to “Stop Off” a horizontal run of masonry, this shall be done by

racking back one-half unit length in each course. 3. Toothing will not be permitted in new wall infill wall and Architectural concrete

masonry wall construction.


F. Consult other trades and make provisions that will permit installation of their work in a manner to avoid unnecessary cutting and patching and build in work specified under other sections, as work progresses.

G. Set steel lintels with 8-inch minimum bearing each end in beds of mortar and build in wood thermal breaks for windows as indicated.

H. When cutting is necessary for unit masonry, use motor driven masonry saw to produce clean, cut edges.

1. Do all necessary cutting to accommodate installation of miscellaneous built-in items such as electrical boxes, sleeves, anchors, grounds and other built-in items.

2. Do not cut ends of unit masonry exposed to view.

I. Chases and recesses shall be built into walls at time walls are built so structural stability and weather resistance of wall is maintained.

J. Bond each course of all units at corners by lapping alternate courses.

1. Laps shall generally be one-half unit length where possible, but in no case less than 4 inches.

2. Intersecting and butting walls shall be bonded together by interlocking alternate courses.

K. Masonry wall reinforcing shall be installed in horizontal joints of all masonry walls as follows:

1. Foundation walls: 16 inches on center with one additional continuously reinforced course directly below bond beams.

2. Running bond walls: 16 inches o.c. and in bed joint on top courses. 3. All reinforcement shall be continuous except it shall not pass through vertical

expansion joints in walls.

a. Splices in reinforcement shall be lapped to interlock a minimum of 6 inches to assure continuity of reinforcement.

b. Use prefabricated corners throughout.

L. All unit masonry shall be built to the following tolerances:

1. Maximum variation from plumb:

a. In vertical lines and surfaces of walls and arises:

1.) 1/4 inch in 10 feet (1/480). 2.) 3/8 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum (1/640). 3.) 1/2 inch in 40 feet (1/960).

b. For external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines:

1.) 1/4 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum (1/960). 2.) 1/2 inch in 40 feet (1/960).

2. Maximum variation from level or grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines:

a. 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 feet (1/960). b. 3/4 inch in 40 feet (1/960).

3. Maximum variation of linear building line from an established position in plan and related portions of walls:


a. 1/2 inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum (1/480). b. 3/4 inch in 40 feet (1/640).

M. Lay Masonry units plumb, true to line and with level courses accurately spaced within allowable tolerances.

1. Adjust units to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. 2. If units are displaced after mortar has stiffened, remove, clean joints and units of

mortar and relay with fresh mortar.

N. Set all anchors and anchor bolts required as masonry work progresses and fill all space around built-in items solid with mortar, if in joints, or grout if in voids of masonry units.

O. Flashings:

1. Install through-wall and in-wall flashings. 2. Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections that might puncture or

otherwise damage flashing material. 3. Place through-wall and in-wall flashings on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. 4. In-wall flashing shall be installed at locations as indicated or minimum as follows:

a. At heads and sills of masonry openings. b. In coursing directly above grade in exterior walls.

5. Splices required in flashings shall be lapped 3 inches and sealed with mastic. 6. In-wall flashings above openings shall extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond

jambs. 7. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or plug weep

holes. 8. Flashing membrane shall be trimmed so that outside edge of material does not

project visibly beyond face of mortar joint.

P. All equipment used in mixing, transporting and storing mortar shall be thoroughly cleaned at end of each day of work.

3.3 LAYING CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

A. Lay only dry masonry units.

B. Mortar bed:

1. Hollow units:

a. Lay with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. b. Provide full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells and webs

in all courses of the following:

1.) Starting courses on footing and solid foundation walls. 2.) Where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout or concrete.

C. Joints:

1. Layout vertical coursing on story poles before starting and maintain joint thickness thus established.

2. Provide sufficient line blocks to maintain level bed joints within established tolerances.

3. Vertical face joints under Base Bid materials shall be approximately 3/8” thick. 4. Construct uniform joints. 5. Shove vertical joints tight. 6. All joints shall be cut flush.


a. When joints in foundation masonry and masonry not exposed to view are thumbprint hard, they shall be tooled with a 5/8-inch diameter round tool to form a concave joint.

1.) Tooling shall compact the mortar firmly against masonry units on both sides of joint.

2.) Head joints shall be tooled first.

b. When joints in decorative faced masonry units exposed to view are thumbprint hard, they shall be tooled to form a concave joint matching existing jointing.

c. Nominal width of these joints shall be approximately 5/16 inch.

7. Remove mortar protruding into cells of cavities to be reinforced or filled. 8. Control joints shall be kept clean of all mortar and debris prior to sealing.

D. Bond facing and backing of single and multiple wythe walls with horizontal joint reinforcement.

E. Avoid unnecessary cutting and patching around built in items.

1. Install bolts, anchors, nailing blocks, inserts, frames, flashings, conduits, boxes, sleeves and other items as work progresses.

2. Solidly grout spaces around built-in items. 3. Provide sealant joints, 1/4 inch wide by 3/4 inch deep, at all intersections with

dissimilar materials.

F. Exposed decorative faced masonry block walls shall be carefully laid up to produce a smooth, uniformly textured wall surface free from cracks, spalls, broken corners, chips and unevenness.

G. Any uneven, out-of-plane, cracked, broken, chipped or spalled units shall be removed from the wall and replaced with a sound unit.

3.4 LAYING BRICK

A. Reduce absorption of brick to less than 20 grams per minute per brick (30 square inches) by thoroughly wetting bricks with clean water 24 hours before placing.

B. Do not install cracked, broken or chipped units exceeding ASTM allowances.

1. Use masonry saws to cut and fit exposed units.

C. Mortar beds:

1. Lay brick with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints in all courses. 2. Provide sufficient mortar on ends of brick to fill head joints. 3. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against 2 adjacent bricks in place. 4. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after setting in place. 5. Where adjustment to corners or jambs must be made after mortar has started to

set, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar.

D. Joints:

1. Lay out vertical coursing on story poles before starting and maintain joint thickness thus established.

2. Provide sufficient line blocks to maintain level bed joints within established tolerances.

3. Brick shall be laid in coursing heights to match existing coursing of original building.


4. All infill and patching transitions shall be toothed into existing brick masonry coursing as indicated.

5. Vertical face joints (head joints) shall be approximately 3/8 inch thick. 6. Shove vertical (head) joints tight. 7. Construct uniform joints. 8. All joints shall be cut flush and when joints are thumbprint hard, they shall be

tooled with a 5/8-inch diameter round tool to form a concave joint.

a. Tooling shall compact the mortar firmly against masonry units on both sides of joint.

b. Head joints shall be tooled first.

9. Expansion joints shall be kept clean of all mortar and debris.

E. Weepholes:

1. Install polyester mesh weep joint material in head joints of brick at all in-wall flashings:

a. Base of all walls at grade. b. Heads of all openings in exterior walls.

2. Weep joints shall be spaced as indicated on drawings or, if not indicated:

a. 24 inches on center at flashings above floor level. b. 24 inches on center at bottom of all exterior walls in first course above grade.

3. Keep weep joints and area above flashings free of mortar droppings by installing cavity mat as indicated.

F. Provide sealant joints, 1/4 inch wide by 3/4 inch deep, for backer rod and sealant, around outside perimeters of exterior window frames and other wall openings.

3.5 FLASHING

A. Install all through-wall and in-wall flashings.

B. Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections that might puncture or otherwise damage flashing materials.

C. Place through-wall and in-wall flashing on: bed of mortar and over with mortar.

D. In-wall flashing shall be installed at heads of openings, under sills and at grade line in exterior walls and at other locations noted on drawings.

E. Splices required in flashings shall be lapped 3 inches or per manufacturer’s instructions and sealed with mastic.

F. In-wall flashings above and below openings shall extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond jambs.

3.6 LINTELS

A. Install loose steel where scheduled on drawings.

B. Maintain minimum 8-inch lintel bearing on each side of opening or as called for on drawings.


C. Grout hollow CMU cells solid for a minimum of two courses below lintel bearing, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

D. Set steel lintels in bed of mortar.

3.7 GROUTED COMPONENTS

A. Grout reinforce bond beams and walls vertically as indicated on drawings.

B. Lap splices minimum 48 bar diameters.

C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position.

D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

E. Vertical grouting requirements:

1. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening.

2. At all vertical reinforcing grout block cells solid. 3. Grouting shall be installed in lifts not to exceed 4’-0” maximum before continuing

with wall construction.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.

B. Form control joints by cutting existing brick masonry units for placement of backer rod and sealant.

C. Locate control joints at all locations shown on drawings and maintain existing control joints to remain when patching occurs at these locations.

D. Control joints shall be sized for sealant performance in accord with Section 07 90 00.

3.9 POINTING AND CLEANING

A. All masonry surfaces shall be dry and brushed with stiff bristles (not metal) brushes after mortar has set at end of each day’s work and after final pointing of holes and joints.

B. Point all holes in exposed masonry joints to match surrounding work with mortar and tool.

C. Clean all masonry from top down.

D. Final cleaning of masonry shall remove all mortar spots, stains, dirt, grease and oil.

1. Cleaning procedures shall be terminated as soon as satisfactory results are obtained.

2. Final cleaning operations shall not be started until mortar has thoroughly set and cured.

E. Protect all glass, metal and other finish materials, subject to damage from cleaning agents, from contact with cleaning agents.


F. In addition to normal daily dry brush cleaning, all concrete unit masonry shall be cleaned as follows if required for satisfactory appearance.

1. Large particles or spots of mortar on face of block shall be removed with a wooden paddle or scraper.

2. Wet surface of exposed masonry surfaces as indicated. 3. Masonry surfaces shall be vigorously scrubbed with a wet, stiff bristled fiber brush. 4. Leave surface clean and uniformly textured to blend with surrounding work.

G. Leave entire work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings and broken masonry.

3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect sills, ledges and offsets from mortar droppings or other damage during construction.

B. Remove misplaced mortar or grout immediately.

C. Protect face materials against staining.

D. Protect door jambs and corners from damage during construction.

E. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities.

END 04200.

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05120 – STRUCTURAL STEEL

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base bid:


a. Structural steel channel header and channel end supports. b. Structural steel blast resistant header and columns at exterior doors. c. Structural steel channel header and columns at interior rolling grilles. d. All base plates, anchor bolts and high strength bolts. e. Adhesive and expansion type anchor bolts. f. All miscellaneous steel and accessories necessary to complete the structural

framing system. g. Provisions for attaching cold-formed metal framing and wood blocking to

structural steel by punching holes. h. Erection of structural steel components. i. Assistance for testing welded and bolted connections.

B. Option Proposals 1 & 2:


a. All structural steel columns and beams. b. All cross-bracing for lateral support of new structural system. c. All roof deck channel plates and roof deck perimeter angles. d. All lateral bracing from new structure to existing. e. All base plates, anchor bolts and high strength bolts. f. All new and retro-fit connection plates and weld tabs. g. All miscellaneous steel and accessories necessary to complete the structural

framing system. h. Provisions for attaching cold-formed metal framing and wood blocking to

structural steel by punching holes. i. Erection of structural steel components. j. Assistance for inspection of steel erection tolerances, welded and bolted

connections.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02750 – Site Concrete Work. 3. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 4. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 5. Section 04200 – Unit Masonry. 6. Section 05310 – Steel Deck. 7. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 8. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 9. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 10. Section 06300 – Fire Retardant Wood Treatment.


B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Demolition of existing building elements in preparation for new construction is indicated in Section 02070, Selective Demolition and shall be coordinated with work of this Section prior to removal.

2. Structural grouting under base plates shall be performed by Contractor as specified in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.

3. Miscellaneous steel angles for roof deck support and steel fabrications for structural support of roof deck patching are specified in section 05500, Metal Fabrications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS AND PERFORMANCE

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.

B. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified structural engineer, licensed in the State of Florida, to prepare structural analysis data for structural steel connections.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field

welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. 5. Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, professional engineer and testing agency.

E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements:

1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies.

F. Source quality-control test reports.

G. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations, performed by structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of Florida, for all structural steel connections and welds.



A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel erection similar in design and extent, including retro-fitting existing structural components, to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," AISC 303-10. 2. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," AISC 360-10. 3. AISC’s “Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings,” Including Supplement

No. 1, AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 5. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members." 6. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.

B. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers.

C. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.

1. Store fasteners in a protected place. 2. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion,

damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. 4. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work.

B. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.


D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:

1. ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy hex head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.

2.3 FABRICATION

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 3. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting

shop-priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting:

1. Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 2. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 2. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 3. Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch base plate holes perpendicular to

steel surfaces.

2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS


A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Joint Type: Pretensioned.

2.6 PRIMER AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing for Ferrous Metal to Receive Field Painted Finish:

1. Galvanizing for Ferrous Metal: All ferrous metal indicated to be galvanized shall receive coatings by hot dipped process in compliance with ASTM A-123, Standard Specifications for Zinc Coatings (Hot Dipped Galvanized) on Iron and Steel Products.

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.

3. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s fast-curing, solvent based, polyamide or polyamine epoxy primer selected for:

a. Good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion. b. Compatibility with finish paint systems indicated. c. Capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite

prolonged exposure.

B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s fast-curing, solvent based, polyamide or polyamine epoxy primer selected for:

1. Good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion. 2. Compatibility with finish paint systems indicated. 3. Capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite

prolonged exposure.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint-12 except containing no asbestos fibers.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads.

B. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.


3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."

B. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base plates.

C. Clean bottom surface of base plates.

1. Set base plates for structural members on steel wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and

plumbed. 4. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base

plate before packing with grout. 5. Coordinate with Contractor to promptly pack grout solidly between bearing

surfaces and base plates so no voids remain as specified in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.

D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

E. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening.

1. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members.

2. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

3. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 4. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

F. Splice members only where indicated.

G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins but ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Field install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.



A. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, all field welds at newly braced frames will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld.

1.) Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

B. Bolted Connections: Field bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts", Section 9 as follows:

1. Snug-Tightened Joints:

a. Visually confirm that all plies of connection are in firm contact. b. Visually confirm that washer are provide at all nuts.

2. Pre-tensioned Joints:

a. “Turn-of-Nut” pre-tensioning method shall be used and verified by routine observation ensuring proper rotation of the nut relative to the bolt.

b. Nut shall be turned relative to bolt as prescribed in Table 8.2 of the referenced specification.

c. “Twist-off-Type Tension-Control Bolt Pre-tensioning” or “Direct-Tension Indicator Pre-tensioning” will not be required.

C. Correct deficiencies in Work that inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

END 05120.

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05310 – STEEL DECK

STEEL DECK 05310-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Base bid:

a. All primed steel roof deck units for patching existing roof deck. b. All deck attachment including TEK screws and/or welding washers. c. All deck accessories including closure channels and filler sheets. d. All deck reinforcing at openings in excess of 6” diameter/square. e. Installation of complete steel deck system to provide a structural diaphragm

and surface for the installation of specified roofing system.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide steel deck as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide steel deck as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 05120 – Structural Steel. 4. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 6. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 7. Section 07270 – Firestopping. 8. Section 07536 – Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only). 9. Section 07540 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO). 10. Section 08305 – Access Doors. 11. Division 15 – Mechanical. 12. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Steel reinforcing angles for mechanical equipment, roof access door and other miscellaneous openings are specified in Section 05500, Metal Fabrications and shall be installed in coordination with work of this Section.


A. Manufacturer: Regularly engaged in the production of metal decking.

B. Qualifications of Erector:

1. Firm with minimum of 5 years documented experience in successful completion of steel roof deck projects similar in size and complexity to this project.

2. Use qualified welding processes and welding operators in accordance with “Welder Qualification” procedures of AWS.

STEEL DECK 05310-2

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise indicated:

1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), “Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”.

2. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.3 “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel”. 3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), “Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and

Roof Decks”.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 Specification Sections.

1. Product data: including manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories.

2. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck units, anchorage details, and conditions requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cat strips, cut openings, special jointing and other accessories.

B. Manufacturer’s Catalogs: Specified manufacturers’ catalogs are incorporated by reference to same force and effect as if repeated herein in full.

C. Manufacturer’s Literature: Recommend installation instructions.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver products to site in accord with 01600.

B. Metal Decking:

1. Store decking in accord with: 01620 on wood sleepers with slope for positive drainage.

2. Do not bend or mar decking. 3. Store off ground with one end elevated for drainage. 4. Cover deck with waterproof materials. 5. Vent to prevent condensation.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

1. Bowman Metal Roof Deck Chicago, IL 2. Nucor Corporation, Vulcraft Div. Charlotte, NC 3. Wheeling – Pittsburgh Steel Corp. Wheeling, WV

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel for Primed Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 446, grade as required to comply with SDI specifications.

B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36.

C. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526; commercial quality, galvanized.

D. Primer: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 minimum, shop primed with manufacturer’s standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer and complying with performance requirements indicated.

E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.

STEEL DECK 05310-3

F. Cell Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, profiled to decking.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Form deck units in lengths as indicated with interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width as indicated.

B. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI “Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck”.

1. Provide galvanized, primed Type 1.5 B steel deck for all building locations unless otherwise indicated.

C. Roof Sump Pans: Fabricate from single piece of 0.071-inch min. (14 gauge) galvanized sheet steel with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to drain.

1. Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3 inches wide.

2. Recess pans not less than 1 1/2 inches below roof deck surface unless otherwise shown or required by deck configuration.

3. Holes for drains will be cut in the field.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect supporting members for correct layout and alignment.

B. Verify that surfaces to receive roof deck are free of debris.

C. Do not proceed with installation until defects are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Erect metal decking in accord with SDI Design Manual for:

1. Roof Decks. 2. Form Decks. 3. Provide welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

B. On steel support members provide 1-1/2 in. minimum bearing.

C. Align and level deck units on supports.

D. Fasten all roof deck panels to steel supporting members with mechanical fasteners as indicated.

1. TEK screws: #10. 2. Spacing: As indicated.

E. Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of ½ of the span or as indicated, and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, #12 carbon-steel TEK screws.

F. Cut and fit roof deck units and accessories around openings through roof.

1. Cut openings in roof deck true to dimensions using metal saws or drills. 2. Make cuts neat, square and trim.

STEEL DECK 05310-4

G. Reinforce deck openings from 6 to 18 in. in size with 2 x 2 x 1/4 in. steel angles.

1. Place angles perpendicular to flutes. 2. Extend minimum two flutes each side of opening and weld to deck.

H. Place roof sump pans over drain openings in roof deck and weld to top decking surface.

1. Space TEK screws not more than 12 inches o.c., with at least 1 screw to top decking surface.

2. Cut opening in bottom of roof sump pan to accommodate drain.

I. Install metal closure strips at all open, uncovered ends and edges of top surface of roof decking, in voids between decking and other construction, and for support of roof insulation where rib openings in top surface occur adjacent to edges and openings.

1. Lap closure strips minimum of 3 inches. 2. Weld closure strips into position at 12-inch centers.

J. Install flexible closure strips where rib openings in bottom surface bear on perimeter walls, beams and at bearings areas, after touch-up painting is complete.

3.3 TOUCH-UP PAINTING

A. Wire brush, clean and paint all scarred areas and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members.

1. Spots in exposed areas, requiring touch-up shall be feather-edged by sanding or grinding before applying touch-up finish.

2. Touch-up surfaces with primer applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Do not use deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured in position.

B. Assure that construction loads do not exceed carrying capacity of deck.

C. Properly protect previously placed materials from damage; especially weld splatter or burns.

3.5 CLEAN-UP

A. At completion of installation, deck and surrounding area shall be cleaned of dirt and debris and deck surfaces left in a condition ready for installation of work by others.


A. Visual inspection of existing steel roof deck during roof materials demolition to determine damaged roof deck units or areas that are structurally deteriorated and require replacement.

1. Document deteriorated areas photographically with description of precise location of area determined to be unsound.

2. Confirm measurements of area to be replaced with Contractor for confirmation of quantity to be paid in accordance with Section 01026, Unit Prices.

3. Submit photos and report to Contracting Officer and designated representative for review and approval of quantities.

B. Visual inspection installation for fastener placement and spacing.

C. Inspect galvanized surfaces and touch-up any defects in galvanized coating.

END 05310

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05400 – COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All exterior wall framing. b. Interior primary wall framing wider than 6”. c. Exterior and interior header framing. d. All related fabricated steel framing accessories. e. All related anchors clips and fasteners. f. All related anchor bolts. g. All miscellaneous rough hardware items needed for proper installation of non-

load bearing metal framing. h. All labor to complete installation of cold-formed metal framing system.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide cold-formed metal framing at walls, fascia and roof as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide cold-formed metal framing at walls, fascia, roof and at new entry door and sidelite as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 05120 – Structural Steel. 4. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 07210 – Building Insulation. 7. Section 07270 – Firestopping. 8. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 9. Section 08305 – Access Doors. 10. Section 08380 – Double Acting Doors. 11. Section 08410 – Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts. 12. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall.


1. Coordinate wood blocking and other requirements for installation of millwork, casework and specialty items with work specified in Sections 06100, Rough Carpentry; 06200, Finish Carpentry and 06400, Architectural Woodwork.

2. Coordinate wood blocking and other requirements for installation of storefront materials specified in Section 08410, Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts.


3. Related light gauge steel stud framing, gypsum board and insulation work is specified in Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definition below is based on description of delivered minimum thickness in AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness:

1. Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed framing delivered to the Project Site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold-formed framing design.

2. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming.

C. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and galvanized-coating thickness.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

E. AISI Specifications:

1. Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" or "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and the following for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing.

2. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining Work.


C. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products:

1. Power-actuated anchors. 2. Mechanical fasteners. 3. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wall Framing Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Clark Dietrich Building Systems. 2. Consolidated Fabricators Corporation (CONFAB). 3. Craco Manufacturing, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 33 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch and less; 50, Class 1 or 2 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch and greater.

2. Coating: G90.

2.3 WALL FRAMING

A. Exterior Steel Framing: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel stud/joists of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0598 inch (16 gauge). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Return: ½ inch.

B. Miscellaneous Exterior Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0598 inch (16 gauge). 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.


C. Primary Interior Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel stud/joists of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0478 inch (18 gauge). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Return: ½ inch.

D. Primary Interior Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, un-punched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0598 inch (16 gauge). 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.

E. Steel Deflection Track: Manufacturer’s standard U-shaped slotted steel deflection control track of web depths indicated, capable of allowing up to 1” vertical movement complying with the requirements of ASTM E 119 and ASTM E 814 for hose stream testing and seismic cycling standards found in UL2079 and ASTM E 1966 and as follows:

1. Minimum Design Thickness; 0.0566 (16 gauge). 2. Flange Width: 2 ½ inches with ¼ inch wide x 1 ½ inch long vertical slots spaced 1”

on center.

F. Steel Headers: Manufacturer’s standard C-shaped steel stud/joists of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0598 inch (16 gauge) unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Return: ½ inch. 4. Tracks: Provide manufacturer’s standard U-shaped steel track, compatible with

wall and header framing, in design thickness to match header sections.

G. Steel Blocking: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel stud/joists of web depths indicated or as required to support or retain fasteners for items being attached, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0713 inch (14 gauge) or 0.1017 inch (12 gauge).

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Return: ½ inch.

2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. End clips. 5. Foundation clips. 6. Gusset plates.

2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS


A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.

1. Head Type:

a. Low-profile head beneath sheathing. b. Manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

E. High Strength Bolts: Install high strength bolts according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts” for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

B. Cement Grout:

1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. 2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water

required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as

standard with fabricator. 4. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.


5. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses and lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.

2. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints.

2. Maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels shall not exceed 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as

standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.


E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed.

G. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

H. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.

1. Independently frame both sides of joints.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.

2. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.3 WALL FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs.

1. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends.

B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks.

1. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. 2. Space studs as indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

E. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing.

1. Locate headers above openings as indicated. 2. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to

supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

3. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings.

4. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

F. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.


2. Provide coordination between this work and that of carpentry Prime Contractor so that wood blocking is installed properly to fasten finish work.

G. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches or the dimension indicated on Shop Drawings apart.

1. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

2. Fasten at each stud intersection.

H. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, shear wall bracing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.4 ROOF FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous rim joist and ledger track sections, sized to match roof joist framing members, to supporting structure as indicated.

1. Provide track members at ends of all roof joist framing. 2. Align rim joist and ledger track sections level and accurately aligned to elevations

indicated.

B. Install metal framing components including cold-formed metal clip angles fastened to rim joist or ledger by mechanical attachment as indicated and required by approved Shop Drawings.

C. Squarely seat cold-formed steel roof joist framing members against webs of tracks and against outstanding leg of clip angle connections.

1. Fasten both flanges of roof joists to top and bottom flanges of tracks. 2. Fasten webs of roof joists to clip angle.

D. Space roof joist framing as indicated but not to exceed 16-inch centers.

E. Set joists uniformly and to plane of roof with web of joists plumb and flanges level.

F. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in joist framing as required by approved Shop Drawings or as necessary to support fixtures, equipment curbs, services and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with joist manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

2. Provide continuous full-depth blocking between joists anchored securely to webs at all locations where joists run continuously over structural supports.

3. Provide coordination between this work and that of Rough Carpentry and Finish Carpentry so that wood blocking is installed properly to fasten other structural components, aluminum storefront systems and finish work.

4. Provide coordination with Prime Heating & Ventilating Contractor for blocking under roof top mounted mechanical units as required by Division 15.

G. Install horizontal bridging in joist system, spaced 48 inches or the dimension indicated on Shop Drawings apart.

3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period.

C. Ensure that cold-formed metal framing will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering for work by other trades.

END 05400.

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05500 – METAL FABRICATIONS

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Galvanized steel lintels at exterior masonry openings. b. Galvanized steel pipe bollards. c. Miscellaneous steel angles, roof deck support angles, plates, bearing plates,

brackets and inserts for mounting and/or fastening items to structural support. d. Erection of metal fabrications. e. Anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts. f. Expansion anchors and screw type masonry fasteners. g. Rough hardware. h. Miscellaneous bolts, nuts, washers, screws and fasteners.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all metal fabrications as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.

a. Fabricated pre-finished aluminum plate sunshade and canopy brackets including coordination with sunshade and canopy manufacturer.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all metal fabrications as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

a. Fabricated pre-finished aluminum plate sunshade and canopy brackets including coordination with sunshade and canopy manufacturer.

D. Definition: Metal fabrications include items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, rods, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems specified elsewhere.

1. All fasteners, bolts and anchorage devices necessary for complete installation of items.

2. Galvanized coatings necessary for protection of metal fabrication items exposed to the exterior shall be included under this work.

E. Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on drawings and in specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02750 – Site Concrete Work. 3. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4. Section 04200 – Unit Masonry. 5. Section 05120 – Structural Steel. 6. Section 05310 – Steel Deck. 7. Section 07240 – Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB.


8. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 9. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 10. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 11. Section 09900 – Painting. 12. Section 10711 – Fixed Sunshades & Canopies.

B. Furnished elsewhere:

1. Concrete for footings and filling of steel pipe bollards furnished under this Section is specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Sealants for use with metal fabrications are specified in Section 07920, Building Joint Sealants and shall be provided wherever joints between metal fabrications and dissimilar materials occurs to ensure weather tightness.

3. Fixed sunshade and canopy structures related to aluminum brackets furnished under this Section are specified in Section 10711, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies and may be fabricated here or under that Section by sunshade and canopy structure manufacturer.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AA ADM-1 "Aluminum Design Manual", 2010 Edition.

B. Aluminum Specifications:

1. ASTM B-209 "Aluminum Sheeting and Plating". 2. ASTM B-210 "Drawn Seamless Tubing". 3. ASTM B-211 "Aluminum Bar, Rod and Wire". 4. ASTM B-221 "Extruded Aluminum Bars, Rods, Wires and Tubes". 5. ASTM B-241 "Seamless Aluminum Pipe". 6. ASTM B-247 "Aluminum Die Forgings". 7. ASTM B-233 "Allowed Levels of Impurities in Aluminum and its Alloys". 8. ASTM B-308 "Aluminum 6061 Standard Structural Profiles".

C. AISC “Manual of Steel Construction”, Fourteenth Edition.

D. ASTM A-36 “Specifications for Structural Steel”, latest edition.

E. ASTM A-53 “Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless”, latest edition.

F. ASTM A-123 “Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized Coating of Iron and Steel Products”, latest edition.

G. ASTM A-500 “Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes”, latest edition.

H. ASTM A-513 “Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing”, latest edition.

I. ASTM A-569 “Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality”, 1991.

J. ASTM A-780 “Specification for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings”, latest edition.

K. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel”, latest edition.


L. AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel”, latest edition.

M. Military Specification MIL-PRF 24712, Coatings, Powder.

N. AAMA 605.2 "Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings On Architectural Extrusions And Panels", 1992.


A. Provide structural assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses without permanent deformation of assembly or components including loads due to:

1. Dead load. 2. Gravity and lateral live loads, as specified in the International Building Code (IBC),

2015 Edition for:

a. Snow. b. Wind. c. Seismic.

3. Vibration due to thermal and structural movement and wind. 4. Weakening of fasteners, attachments, welds and other components.

B. Provide assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from a maximum change in ambient and surface temperature of 120 degrees F. and designed to prevent:

1. Buckling. 2. Opening of joints. 3. Overstressing of components:

a. Thermal stresses. b. Framing member transferred stresses resulting from:

1.) Thermal movement. 2.) Structural movement.

4. Other detrimental effects on building support structure or metal fabrications.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01340.

1. Product Data: Fabricators technical and descriptive data for products used in metal fabrications, including:

a. Galvanized finishes. b. Painting procedures and finishes.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings illustrating the following:

a. Overall plan showing location of each metal fabrication component, 1/4" per foot minimum scale.

b. Dimensioned plans, elevations and sections of each fabrication, 1/2" per foot minimum scale.

c. Large scale details drawn at 1 1/2" per foot minimum scale illustrating:

1.) Dimensioned profiles of components including primary and secondary members.

2.) Dimensioned supporting components as assembled and mechanically fastened to join metal fabrications to building support systems.


3.) Indicated connection requirements at supporting building structures including breaks required to prevent electrolysis between ferrous and non-ferrous metals.

d. Provide unit dimensions relating metal fabrications to supporting and adjoining structures and other construction.

e. Illustrate fabrication and erection techniques to be implemented for each metal fabrication assembly indicated.

3. Samples:

a. Fabricator's color charts showing full range of colors available for shop finishing metal fabrications for initial selection process.

b. Actual components representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

B. Structural Calculations:

1. Submit a comprehensive analysis of design loads including dead, live and thermal movement on fabricated structural metal fabrication assemblies.

a. Contractor shall obtain design loads and shop drawings from manufactured sunshade and canopy structures for use by fabricator to design aluminum plate structural support brackets.

b. Refer to Section 10711, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies for additional submittals requirements for sunshade and canopy structures.

2. Structural analysis and design calculations for structural components and metal fabrication assemblies shall be sealed and signed by a professional structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of Florida.


A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. NOMMA “Guideline 1 – Joint Finishes”, December 1994.

C. AWS “Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification”, 1994.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A386 – Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Assembled Steel Products.

E. SSPC “Steel Structures Painting Manual”, Volume 11, Sixth Edition.

F. Shop Prime Coating:

1. Zinc Dust Zinc Oxide for galvanized surfaces. 2. Paint, Oil; Iron Oxide, ready mixed, red and brown.

G. Powder Coating: Powder coating applications for exterior galvanized and primed steel components shall comply with applicable requirements established in Military Specification MIL-PRF-24712, Coatings, Powder for the Type, and performance characteristics Class of coating indicated.


H. High Performance Organic Coating: High performance coatings for exterior aluminum components and fabrications shall comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 605.2 "Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings On Architectural Extrusions And Panels", 1992 for cleaning, preparation and finishing.

I. Aluminum Design Manual, The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA), 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006 (latest edition).

J. Specifications for Aluminum Structures, The Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA), 900 19th Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006 (latest edition).

K. Manual of Steel Construction, American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700, Chicago, IL 60601-1802


A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of existing structure and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.

B. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements.

2. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions and allow for trimming and fitting.


A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.

1. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. 2. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 3. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use. 4. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or

damage to members or supporting structures. 5. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty in accordance with Section 01700, Project Closeout.

B. Provide a written warranty, signed by the fabricator, agreeing to repair or replace paint finishes found to be defective.

1. Paint finish defects are defined as peeling, chipping, chalking, fading, abnormal aging or deterioration.

2. Warranty period for paint finishes shall be 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes.


1. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

2. Do not use steel sheet with variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.

B. Steel Plates and Shapes: ASTM A-36; galvanized coating for exterior applications.

C. Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A-500; or hot-rolled, ASTM A-501; galvanized coating for exterior applications.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:

1. Black finish, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless

otherwise indicated.

E. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported members, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A-47, or cast steel, ASTM A-27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A-153.

G. Steel Anchor Bolts: Threaded end with standard ACI hook, ASTM A-307, Grade A, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A-153.

2.2 NON-FERROUS METALS

A. Structural Aluminum Properties: Provide extruded structural aluminum shapes as indicated meeting ASTM 6061-T6/T651.

B. Aluminum Plate: Bare aluminum complying with AMS-QQ-A 250/11, ASTM B-209 and the following properties:

1. Ultimate tensile strength: 45,000 psi. 2. Minimum yield strength: 40,000 psi. 3. Modulus of elasticity: 10 x 106.

C. Aluminum Tubes: Square edge square or rectangular aluminum complying with ASTM B-221, alloy 6061-T6 and the following properties:


D. Aluminum Pipe: Nominal diameter indicated complying with ASTM B-241, alloy 6061-T6 and the following properties:


E. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B-209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

F. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B-26, alloy 319.


2.3 FASTENERS

A. Provide the same basic metal and alloy being fastened or 300 series stainless steel unless otherwise indicated and required by design loading.

1. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 2. Use types and sizes as indicated and to suit installation conditions. 3. Provide flat head Phillips, Torx or Allen type screws in matching color for exposed

fasteners unless otherwise indicated for joining fabricated components. 4. Provide zinc-coated or stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use or where built into

exterior walls.

B. Select fasteners for the type, grade, class required and as indicated.

C. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A-307, Grade A.

D. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.

E. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.

F. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-11.

G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.

H. Drill-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, (non-drilling), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.

I. Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt or threaded rod stud anchors.

J. Screw Type Masonry/Concrete Anchors: High carbon or stainless-steel screws designed to fasten by self-tapping into pre-drilled holes shall be used for fastening medium-duty installations into solid or hollow masonry or concrete.

K. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required.

L. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.

M. Fixed Sunshade Bracket Bolts: 5/8" diameter, stainless steel hollo-bolt with washer by Lindapter.

2.4 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Nonshrink Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, ferrous aggregate grout complying with CE CRD-C 621, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy duty loading applications of type specified in this section.

B. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section.

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:


1. Nonshrink Metallic Grouts:

a. “Metox RM”; Chem-Masters Corp. b. “Hi Mod Grout”; Euclid Chemical Co. c. “Embeco 885 and 636”; Master Builders. d. “Stonecrete MGI”; Stonhard, Inc.

2. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts:

a. “Euco N-S Grout”; Euclid Chemical Co. b. “Kemset”; Chem-Masters Corp. c. “Masterflow 713”; Master Builders. d. “Sealtight 588 Grout”; W.R. Meadows, Inc.

2.5 GALVANIZING, PRIMING AND PAINT

A. Ferrous Metals:

1. Galvanizing for Ferrous Metal: All ferrous metal indicated to be galvanized shall receive coatings by hot dipped process in compliance with ASTM A-123, Standard Specifications for Zinc Coatings (Hot Dipped Galvanized) on Iron and Steel Products.

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.

3. Shop Primer for Concealed Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645 and selected for:


prolonged exposure.

4. Shop Primer for Exposed Ferrous Metal to Receive Field Finishes: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s fast-curing, solvent based, polyamide or polyamine epoxy primer selected for:


prolonged exposure.

5. Finish Paint for Ferrous Metal: Refer to Section 09900, Painting for high performance coatings on exposed exterior steel fabrications.

6. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint-12 except containing no asbestos fibers.

B. Non-ferrous Metals:

1. Shop Primer for Non-ferrous Metal: Fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645 and selected for:

a. Superior resistance to atmospheric corrosion. b. Compatibility with finish paint systems indicated. c. Compatibility to provide a sound foundation for shop applied topcoats despite

prolonged exposure.


2. Finish Paint for Non-ferrous Metal: Provide high performance organic coating for aluminum fabrications, connections and components used for construction of the sunshade and canopy brackets and awning framing structures complying with AAMA 605.2.

a. AA-C12C42R1X chemical finish cleaned with inhibited chemicals or acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating.

b. Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Provide clear fluorocarbon topcoat with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight per AAMA 605.2.

d. Color shall be as selected by Architect-Engineer from manufacturer’s custom range of colors and gloss to match prefinished dark bronze anodized aluminum fixed sunshade fascia outriggers and fascia.

3. Fabricator shall furnish non-conductive separation products as recommended to prevent electrolysis at connection joints between ferrous and non-ferrous metals.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Construct metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated.

1. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support.

2. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and over stressing of welds and fasteners.

1. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

2. Temperature Change (Range): 100 F (55.5 C).

D. Shear and punch metals cleanly, accurately and remove burrs.

1. Perform thermal cutting by machine. 2. Cut, drill or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated and form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

G. Weld connections, corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following:

1. Plane thermally cut ends and edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Steel and AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum.


2. Fabricate connections by welding members as indicated and in compliance with AWS D1.2 welding procedure tolerances for appearance and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

a. Joint type: Pre-tensioned.

3. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing.

4. Contour of welded surface shall match those adjacent.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible.

1. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat head (countersunk) screws or bolts.

2. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated:

1. Coordinate with supporting structure. 2. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended

use.

J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.7 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, rods, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and anchoring metal or wood to concrete, masonry, steel, or other structures.

B. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

C. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required.

D. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, furnish steel washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections or steel connections.

2.8 STEEL LINTEL ANGLES

A. Fabricate structural steel lintel and ledger angles from steel angle of size indicated.

B. Provide holes for anchorage of blocking or other items as indicated.

C. Galvanize all exterior steel lintel angles by hot-dip method after fabrication and shop prime per specifications.


2.9 PIPE BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate pipe bollards from 6” outside diameter Schedule 80 steel pipe.

B. Cap bottom of bollards with 1/4-inch steel base plate.

C. Galvanize exterior steel bollards including pipe, fittings, brackets, fasteners and other ferrous components by hot-dip method.

2.10 ALUMINUM SUNSHADE AND CANOPY BRACKETS

A. Bracket materials:

1. Bracket flanges shall be fabricated from aluminum plate material in thickness and sizes indicated, in the following configurations, to support manufactured sunshades and canopies furnished under Section 10711, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies:

a. T-shaped brackets used as intermediate support for pairs of manufactured outrigger members indicated.

b. L-shaped brackets used as end support for single member manufactured outriggers indicated.

2. Brackets shall be fabricated with flanges at right angles to each other, whether T-shaped or L-shaped, with joints welded per AWS requirements using weld types and sizes indicated.

3. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces in preparation for finish coating.

4. Materials shall be selected to comply with requirements to meet specified building Code loading criteria.

5. Accurately fabricate aluminum bracket components for field anchorage to supporting building elements and for attaching manufactured aluminum outriggers.

6. Space brackets on supporting building elements according to manufactured outrigger spacing and in compliance with specified performance criteria and as indicated.

B. Bracket attachments:

1. Provide 6-bolt hole pattern as indicated for mechanically attaching brackets to supporting building elements.

a. Punch or drill bolt holes in back flange of bracket to receive stainless steel mounting bolts indicated allowing 1/16" clearance between bolt and sides of hole (1/8" overall diameter larger than bolt diameter).

b. Ensure bolt holes are free of burrs and roughness to allow easy field marking, drilling and installation of bolts to supporting building elements.

c. Furnish bond breaker material between aluminum back flange of bracket and ferrous metal supporting elements.

2. Provide 4-bolt hole pattern as indicated for mechanically attaching aluminum outriggers manufactured under Section 10711 to the outstanding leg of brackets.

a. Punch or drill bolt holes in outstanding flange leg of bracket to receive stainless steel outrigger mounting bolts indicated allowing 1/16" clearance between bolt and sides of hole (1/8" overall diameter larger than bolt diameter).

b. Ensure bolt holes are free of burrs and roughness to allow easy field marking, drilling and installation of bolts to supporting building elements.


C. Furnish specified stainless-steel bolts and washers with each fabrication for use in field tapping and attachment of brackets to structural steel supports.

D. Clean, prepare and provide high performance organic coating on all components complying with AAMA 605.2.

E. Package finished sunshade and canopy bracket fabrications for shipping to prevent damage to finishes and repair or replace damaged finishes immediately upon receipt at job site to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND ACCESSORIES

A. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges.

C. Use concealed field splices wherever possible.

D. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

C. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by the hot-dip process compliance with the following requirements:

1. ASTM A-153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A-123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel

products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP3 “Commercial Blast Cleaning.” 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 “Power Tool Cleaning.”

E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 “Paint Application Specification No. 1” for shop painting.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including sleeve anchors, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.

B. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site so that progress of work can be maintained without delay.

C. Drill holes where required in concrete or masonry for anchorages as indicated or as recommended by anchor manufacturer for application and to resist applied forces.


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction.

B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement:

1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications.

2. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

2. Do no weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL ANGLE LINTELS

A. Coordinate work of this Section closely with that of Section 04200 for proper field measurements and alignment in masonry walls.

B. Locate lintel angle assemblies as indicated and centered over new masonry openings.

1. Provide sound, level bearing surfaces on masonry walls in lengths as indicated or if not indicated, provide a minimum of 8 inches of bearing.

2. Embed lintel assembly bearing surfaces on mortar bed at coursing elevation and

level assembly over opening(s). 3. Adjustments shall be made to ensure that lintel support angle is directly under

wythe of masonry to be supported.


4. Cut masonry units to fit neatly around legs of angles so that final assembly sets in wall with vertical alignment on coursing bed joint.

C. Coat surfaces of steel at field modifications or welds and wherever shop coating has been damaged in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Exterior: Touch-up galvanizing repair paint complying with ASTM A-780 2. Interior: Touch-up shop primer.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPE BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards in concrete by means of direct embedment into concrete filled post holes at drive-up islands.

1. After bollards have been inserted, plumb units. 2. Fill annular space between bollard and posthole solid with concrete and integral

with island pour.

B. After concrete has cured fill open ended pipes with lean concrete, striking off top approximately level with end and provide a 1/4-inch chamfer at circumference using edging tool.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF SUNSHADE AND CANOPY BRACKETS

A. Contractor shall obtain shop drawings for manufactured sunshades and canopies early in Project so that outrigger locations and spacing to coordinate bracket placement locations with respect to building supporting elements.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for field verification of all dimensions to determine bracket placement and connections to supporting elements.

2. Carefully mark field verified dimensions for outrigger centerlines on each supporting element.

3. Temporarily place brackets in precise vertical and horizontal alignment at previously determined locations and use bracket back plate as template to transfer bolt hole locations onto supporting elements and prick punch centerline of each bolt hole.

B. Once bolt holes are marked and verified for accuracy, drill holes in supporting elements.

1. Confirm bolt sizes and ensure that holes are accurately drilled, perpendicular to the face of the supporting element for bolt diameters to be used for connections.

a. Drill holes into structural steel elements for stainless steel bolts furnished with brackets.

2. After drilling, carefully tap structural steel supporting elements to proper thread type for stainless steel bolts.

C. Mount sunshade and canopy support brackets as indicated:

1. Install manufacturer's recommended non-conduction bond breaker separation between back side of bracket back flange and structural steel or concrete masonry to prevent electrolytic reactions between dissimilar materials.

2. Mount all bracket plates to structural support elements and ensure that bolts and nuts are torqued to optimum capacity to resist specified loading.

D. Fit bracket connections properly aligned and positioned for proper projection of outstanding flange past face of brick masonry exterior wall finishes and to accurately attached outriggers specified under Section 10711.


E. Inspect and protect completed assemblies, including prefinished brackets, for installation of other work and until final acceptance.

3.6 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS ANGLES

A. Coordinate work of this Section closely with that of other Section for proper field measurements and opening sizes.

1. Refer to Division 15, Mechanical for equipment curb sizes and openings in roof deck that are to be reinforced with steel angle framing.

2. Refer to Section 08305, Access Doors, for roof hatch opening that will require steel angle roof deck support.

B. Locate loose angles and/or angles assemblies as indicated and centered under roof curbs of about roof openings.

1. Provide sound, level bearing surfaces on bar joists. 2. Cope legs of angles to clear outstanding leg of joist angles. 3. Adjustments shall be made to ensure that support angle is directly under roof curb

or equipment to be supported.

C. Coat surfaces of steel at field modifications or welds and wherever shop coating has been damaged with touch-up primer in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 2. Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned and prepared to receive finishes as specified.

B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A-780.

END 05500

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 –ROUGH CARPENTRY

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All performance rated and non-rated wood construction panels. b. All wood backup for anchoring wall hung/supported fixtures and accessories. c. All wood blocking, nailers, grounds and supports. d. Rough hardware needed for proper installation of all carpentry. e. All labor to complete installation of normal rough carpentry items furnished

under this and other Sections of the Specifications.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all rough carpentry as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all rough carpentry as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all rough carpentry as indicated for additional site paving between the original 1972 Commissary Building and the original 1978 Exchange Building in the east-west direction and from the intersection of Royal Tern Avenue and Blackbird Street to the south side of base bid work at the new Furniture Receiving and the south side of the existing 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all rough carpentry for new patched floor slab areas as indicated for under slab sanitary sewer piping in the new Women’s Public Toilet, Optometry/Optical, south Food Concept Preparations areas, and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms behind the new Food Court.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 01017 – AAFES Furnished & Installed Equipment. 3. Section 01018 – AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment. 4. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 5. Division 5 – Metals. 6. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 7. Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork. 8. Section 07270 – Firestopping. 9. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 10. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 11. Section 08380 – Double Acting Doors.


12. Section 08410 – Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts. 13. Section 08460 – Automatic Entrance Doors. 14. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 15. Division 10 – Specialties. 16. Section 11400 – Food Service Equipment.

B. Installed but furnished and specified elsewhere:

1. Blocking and backing for AF/AI and AF/CI shelving, menu boards and other equipment and accessory items indicated on drawings shall be installed under this Section.

2. Sill sealer specified and furnished in Section 07210, Insulation shall be installed under this Section at top of face brick and bottom of wood blocking transition at roof edge conditions.

3. Other items related to Rough Carpentry, including solid blocking and plywood backing for attachment of items to construction, are specified in Divisions 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10.


A. Lumber grading rules and wood species to conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70; Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished under this section.

1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer's Association, Inc.(NELMA). 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 5. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer's Association (NHPMA).

B. Plywood grading rules:

1. Softwood Plywood - Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PSI-66.

C. Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade marks:

1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

a. S-GRN: Unseasoned. b. S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content. c. MC-15 or KD: Maximum of 15% moisture content. d. Dense.

2. Softwood Plywood - Appropriate grade trademark of the American Plywood Association.

a. Type, grade, class and identification index. b. Inspection and testing agency mark.


A. Deliver materials with grade marks and labels intact and legible.

B. Store materials under cover and in dry location in accord with Section 01620.

1. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.


2. Stack lumber and plywood to provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.

3. Store rigid foam core insulated sheathing panels flat in weatherproof storage shed. 4. Take special precautions to place spacers between each bundle of lumber and

plywood that has been pressure treated with waterborne chemicals to facilitate air circulation.

1.5 WORKMANSHIP QUALITY

A. Workmanship for rough carpentry shall be in accordance with requirements of National Lumber Manufacturer's Association.

1. Cut members square on bearings and fit closely. 2. Set accurately to lines, levels and plumb. 3. Secure rigidly in place at bearings and connections. 4. Provide expansion anchors, sleeve anchors and masonry screw anchors for

fastening into concrete or masonry substrates.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Lumber:

1. Dimensions:

a. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal. b. Actual dimensions conform to industry standards established by American

Lumber Standards Committee and rules writing agencies.

2. Moisture Content: Kiln dried to 15% maximum at time of installation. 3. Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S) unless specified otherwise. 4. All framing lumber and blocking, 2 inches to 4 inches thick, 2 inches to 12 inches

wide, Douglas Fir/Larch or Southern Pine:

a. Economy grade shall not be used. b. Plates, blocking, bracing, bulk heads, nailers, and general utility purposes:

Construction grade or better. c. Strength of materials:

1.) Light framing/blocking, “Construction” grade, 2” to 4” thick, 2” to 4” wide.

a) Allowable extreme fiber stress in bending (Fb): 1250 psi. b) Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,500,000 psi. c) Compression to grain (Fc): 1300 psi.

2.) Structural framing, “No. 2” grade, 2” to 4” thick, 5” and wider.

a) Allowable extreme fiber stress in bending (Fb): 1500 psi. b) Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,600,000 psi. c) Compression to grain (Fc): 1200 psi.

B. Plywood:

1. Concealed APA performance rated wall sheathing construction panels at exterior face of walls:

a. Thickness: 15/32”. b. Exposure durability classification: EXPOSURE 1. c. Span rating: 32/16.


d. Edge configuration: Square.

2. Concealed APA performance rated construction panels to support shelving, menu boards and other equipment and accessory items:

a. Thickness: 23/32”. b. Exposure durability classification: EXPOSURE 1. c. Span rating: 48/24. d. Edge configuration: Square.

3. Exposed construction panels for backing, APA rated (C/D) plugged and painted:

a. Thickness: 23/32”. b. Exposure durability classification: EXTERIOR. c. Span rating: 48/24. d. Edge configuration: Square.

C. Oriented Strand board (OSB) at Contractor’s option:

1. Concealed APA performance rated wall sheathing construction panels at exterior face of walls:

a. Thickness: 15/32”. b. Exposure durability classification: EXPOSURE 1. c. Span rating: 32/16. d. Edge configuration: Square.

2.2 BOARDS

A. Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following:

1. Moisture Content: 15 percent maximum, (S-DRY or KD-15). 2. Provide Western Red Cedar, “C Select/A all Heart” grade per WWPA rules for all

exposed installations.

B. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide the following:

1. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum, (S-DRY or KD-19). 2. Provide the following species and grades:

a. Redwood “Construction Common” per RIS rules. b. Southern Pine “No. 2 Boards” per SPIB rules. c. Any species graded “Construction Boards” or “No. 3 Common” per WCLIB or

WWPA rules. d. Redwood “Merchantable” per RIS rules. e. Southern Pine “No. 2 Boards” per SPIB rules. f. Any species graded “Standard” or “No. 3 Common Boards” per WCLIB or

WWPA rules.

C. Board Sizes: Provide nominal or actual sizes as indicated.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND HARDWARE

A. Rough hardware needed for proper installation of all carpentry items shall be provided.

B. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Hot-dipped galvanized, stainless steel or aluminum for exterior locations and high humidity locations; size and type to suit application; staples shall not be used for fastening wood structurally.


C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Medium carbon-steel; sized to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations and high humidity locations.

D. Expansion Type Anchors: Plastic or non-ferrous metal type plug inserts designed to expand when screw and lag bolt type anchors are secured shall be used for fastening light-duty installations to solid or hollow masonry or concrete.

E. Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt or threaded rod stud anchors.

F. Screw Type Masonry/Concrete Anchors: High carbon or stainless-steel screws designed to fasten by self-tapping into pre-drilled holes shall be used for fastening medium-duty installations into solid or hollow masonry or concrete.

G. Expansion Sleeve Type Anchors: High carbon or stainless-steel wedge type expansion core anchor with nut and washer designed to fasten into concrete and conforming to Federal Specification FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1 shall be used for fastening heavy-duty installations into concrete substrates.

H. Construction Panel Clips: Provide 20 gauge, galvanized sheathing clips with 40/20 span rating, designed to support edges of roof sheathing, sized to specified panel thickness.

3 EXECUTION


A. Blocking and all other carpentry items shall be laid out as called for by drawings and shall be cut and fitted as necessitated by conditions encountered.

B. All work shall be plumbed, leveled and braced with sufficient nails, spikes, bolts, etc., to ensure rigidity.

1. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.

2. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

C. Use galvanized wire nails, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side with be exposed.

2. Make tight connections between members. 3. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required.

D. All pieces of wood or other carpentry material with a defect or defects that prevent it from serving its intended purpose satisfactorily, including crooked, warped, bowed, or otherwise defective material, even if within the limits of grade specified, will be rejected and shall be replaced with an acceptable piece.

E. Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exact requirements, dimensions and as detailed since installation of rough carpentry materials constitutes acceptance of surface conditions.

F. Frame wood members to a close fit.


1. Set accurately to required lines and levels and secure rigidly in place in accordance with details.

2. Cut and fit framing, blocking, and furring to accommodate other work as required.

G. Coordinate requirements for connecting wood blocking and framing with structural steel fabricator to ensure the holes are properly punched at designated or adequate spacing to support and attach rough carpentry items.

H. Coordinate requirements for connecting wood blocking and plating with requirements for setting anchor bolts specified under Section 05500, Metal Fabrications and installed under Sections 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, PLATES, NAILERS, GROUNDS AND SUPPORTS

A. Blocking shall be sizes and shapes indicated on details and as required by conditions encountered.

B. Install wood blocking, plates, nailers, grounds and supports where shown and where required for attachment of other work.

1. Provide and form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached.

2. Coordinate location with other work involved in systems.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading.

1. Countersink screw anchors, bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Hooked anchor bolts shall be used as indicated to attach wood plates to concrete or masonry structure.

3. Provide wedge type sleeve anchors only where indicated or to attach miscellaneous blocking and plating to concrete or masonry.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30, “APA Design/Construction Guide – Residential & Commercial,” for types of construction panels and application indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Parapet and Fascia Wall Sheathing: #10 TEK screws to steel framing and blocking.

a. 12-inch centers in field of panels. b. 12-inch centers at all panel edges.

2. Backing Panels: #10 TEK screws to steel framing.

a. Provide wood or light gauge steel angle support for backing panels securely fastened to sides of light gauge metal framing with screws to allow backing panels to nest between studs.

b. Fasten backer panels to support at edges using screws at maximum spacing of 8” centers or as necessary to support applied loads.

3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Remove from site all rubbish, debris and packaging produced by operations and leave site in a "broom-clean" condition.

B. Adjust all working items to fit snugly yet work freely.


C. Confirm blocking heights and locations and make adjustments as required for proper installation of other items of work.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed items of other trades from damage during construction.

B. Protect completed work from damage until project is completed and accepted.

END 06100.

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06200 – FINISH CARPENTRY

FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All solid surface interior window stools. b. Installation of AAFES furnished wood wall cladding and trim. c. Miscellaneous finish wood items and trim indicated. d. Installation of Contractor furnished casework items indicated. e. Installation of AAFES furnished casework items indicated. f. Installation of all items associated with finish carpentry. g. Rough hardware and adhesives needed for proper installation of finish

carpentry items.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork. 5. Division 8 – Doors & Windows. 6. Division 9 – Finishes. 7. Division 10 – Specialties.


1. AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed items and requirements are specified in Section 01018 and indicated on Drawings.

2. Casework items to be installed under finish carpentry are specified in Section 06400, Architectural Woodwork.

3. Other items normally associated with finish carpentry installation are specified in Divisions 8, 9 and 10.


A. Lumber grading rules and wood species shall conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70: Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished.

1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (NELMA). 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 5. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS). 6. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer’s Association (NHPMA).

B. Hardwood lumber to comply with: National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) Rules.

C. Plywood Grading Rules:

1. Softwood Plywood – Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PS 1/ANSI A199.1.

2. Hardwood Plywood: Product Standard PS 51.


D. Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark:

1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

a. S-GRN: Unseasoned. b. S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content. c. MC-15 or KD: Maximum 15% moisture content. d. Dense.

2. Softwood Plywood: Appropriate grade-mark of the American Plywood Association. 3. Hardwood Plywood: Appropriate grademark of qualified inspection, testing or

grading agency.

E. Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) shall apply and by reference are hereby made a part of this specification.

1. Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy, in this specification shall be as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.

2. Any item not given a specific quality grade in this specification shall be Custom Grade as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.

F. Finish wood item manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work.

1. Regularly and actively engaged in manufacture of this type of work for a period of 10 years.

2. Woodwork manufacturer shall, in addition have fabricated work of a similar character and magnitude, and which has been in satisfactory use for at least 7 years.

G. Finish Carpentry item manufacturer shall be responsible for all details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all millwork profiles required.

H. Contractor and Finish Carpentry item manufacturer shall coordinate to establish and maintain field dimensions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with 01340:

1. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each product and process specified as work of this Section and/or incorporated into finish carpentry items including:

a. Solid surfacing materials. b. Plastic Laminate surfacing materials. c. Wood species, grade and moisture content. d. Fabrication techniques as related to AWI standards. e. Finishing techniques. f. Installation procedures. g. Hardware items.

2. Certifications: Submit manufacturer’s/fabricator’s certification stating that fabricated wood items comply with quality grades and AWI requirements indicated.

3. Shop drawings:


a. Solid surface window stool trim profile and quantities. b. Miscellaneous trim profiles and quantities. c. Other miscellaneous custom fabricated finish carpentry items indicated.

4. Samples:

a. Solid Surface Plastics:

1.) Submit 12-inch long samples of trim profile to match profiles and color indicated.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store products in accord with Sections 01600 and 01620.

B. Protect finish carpentry items during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

C. Do not deliver finish carpentry items until taping, wet work, grinding and similar operations that could damage, soil or deteriorate items have been completed.

D. Finish carpentry items shall only be stored in installation areas or areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Conditioning: Finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer and installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for installation of finish carpentry items.

1. Requirements shall be identical for storage areas if items are stored prior to installation.

2. Do not install finish carpentry items until required temperature and relative humidity can be established, stabilized and maintained in installation areas.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed finish carpentry within 1 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content.

1. Maintain from date of installation through remainder of construction period. 2. Contractor shall require finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer to provide written

documentation of optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas.

B. Fabrication: Fabricate wood finish carpentry items to dimensions, profiles and details indicated with openings and mortises precut, where applicable, to receive hardware and other items and work.


C. Finish Edges: Unless indicated otherwise, ease edges of all solid wood finish carpentry items as follows:

1. 1/16-inch radius for corners and edges of solid wood or plastic members 1 1/8-inch actual thickness or less.

2. 1/8-inch radius for edges of solid wood, plastic and similar members over 1 1/8-inch actual thickness.

D. Assembly: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware mortising/fitting and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible.

1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for field scribing,

trimming and fitting.

E. Pre-cut Openings: Fabricate wood finish carpentry items with pre-cut openings, where possible, to receive hardware, appliances, fixtures, electrical work and similar items.

1. Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams as furnished by the Contractor for proper size and shape.

2. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in potentially damp locations, seal edges of cutouts with water resistant coating.

F. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of finish wood items required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as necessary for accurate fit.

2.2 SOLID SURFACE WINDOW STOOLS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300 as applicable to solid surface materials.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers of Solid Surface Materials:

1. Corian, “Canvas”.

2.3 WOOD WALL CLADDING

A. AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Arby's wall cladding:

1. APA Color Graphics – 1x5 Pine Tongue & Groove Wall Plank, AR-Planks with "L10", "L20", "M10", "M20", "D10" and "D20" Stain.

a. Stagger installation of multi-tone wood planks.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD TRIM ITEMS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section applicable to item indicated.

B. Comply with the following requirements:

1. AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Arby's corner trim & wood wall cladding edge trim:

a. Grade: Custom. b. Lumber Species: Pine. c. Size: 1"x1" d. Finish: Medium stain to match wood wall cladding.

2. Miscellaneous areas:

a. Grade: Custom.


b. Lumber Species: Birch. c. Finish: Field Painted.

2.5 FASTENERS, ANCHORS AND REINFORCEMENT

A. Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use.

1. Comply with FS FF-S-0111 for applicable requirements. 2. Trim head type screws shall be used where exposed.

B. Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage.

1. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at installations subject to moisture for corrosion resistance.

2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 3. Furnish inserts and anchors, as applicable, to be set into concrete or masonry

work for subsequent anchorage of finish carpentry items.

D. Adhesives: Products as recommended by wood finish carpentry manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that surfaces to receive finish carpentry materials are prepared to exact levels and dimensions.

B. Application or installation of materials constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Condition wood finish carpentry items to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.

D. Prior to installation examine shop fabricated work for completion, finish, back priming and removal of all packaging.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install wood finish carpentry items to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section.

B. Install wood finish carpentry items plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.

1. Shim as required using concealed shims. 2. Install to a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level and with no

variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.

C. Scribe and cut finish carpentry items to fit adjoining work.

1. Repair damaged wood surfaces at cuts. 2. Coordinate installations with installation specified in other Sections of the

specifications.

a. Fit and protect wood finish carpentry items prior to installation of adjacent work and equipment.


b. Remove protection from wood items after completion of work by other trades that might damage finishes or installation.

D. Anchor wood items to blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates.

1. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.

2. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with wood finish surface to match final factory applied transparent finish.

E. Trim shall be installed with minimum number of joints possible, using full length pieces from maximum length of finish wood available.

1. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. 2. Cope at returns, miter at corners and comply with referenced Quality Standards for

joinery.

F. Install all miscellaneous trim and mouldings required and all related finish carpentry items indicated for a complete job.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry items where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually.

1. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 2. Where repair does not produce visual or functional deficiencies, replace finish

carpentry items.

B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware.

C. Clean all finish carpentry items on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.

D. Touch-up finishes at field fabricated joints and wood filler at fastener heads using finish materials as recommended by finish carpentry woodwork manufacturer to produce final finish that matches factory finish in every respect.

E. Buff and polish exposed surfaces of solid surface plastic items to remove superficial scratches and apply liquid sealer to provide a smooth, scratch resistant finish.

F. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures finish carpentry items to remain, without damage or deterioration, until final acceptance by Contracting Officer.

3.4 CLEANING UP

A. Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends, and debris.

B. Sweeping:

1. At the end of each working day, and more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep surfaces where refuse from this portion of the work has settled.

2. Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its disposal. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the work, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces.

END 06200.

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06253 – SLATWALL PANEL SYSTEMS

SLATWALL PANEL SYSTEMS 06253-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Prefinished slatwall panel system. b. Metal channel groove inserts. c. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for

complete installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealants. 6. Division 8 – Doors & Windows. 7. Division 9 – Finishes. 8. Division 10 – Specialties. 9. Division 13 – Special Construction. 10. Division 15 – Mechanical. 11. Division 16 – Electrical.


1. Coordinate blocking and backing required for supporting work of this Section with requirements specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

2. Coordinate work of this Section with work of Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems.

3. Other items and devices normally associated with slatwall installation are specified in Divisions 8, 9, 10, 11, 13 and 16.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1. Required Rating – Class C.

B. Architectural Woodwork Standards as published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute, the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, and the Woodwork Institute.

1. Architectural Woodwork Standards - Edition 1.


A. Installer Qualifications: Employ only installers with a minimum of 3 to 5 years experience in installation of slatwall systems.


B. Manufacturer shall be responsible for all details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall indicate all profiles required on shop drawings.

C. Contractor shall coordinate to establish and maintain field dimensions.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each product specified as work of this Section including:

a. Preparation instructions and recommendations. b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. c. Installation methods. d. Manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for panels and

adhesives. e. Maintenance Instructions.

2. Shop drawings: Submit elevations and sections of each wall showing location of paneling and trim members with respect to all discontinuities in the wall elevation.

3. Samples: Submit sample for each component and for each exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below complete with exposed molding and trim samples.

a. Sample to indicate type, finish, and color specified. b. Submit 6” by 10” section of panel for each panel selected indicating the color,

texture and pattern required.



B. Examine containers for damage, inspect contents and reorder any damaged components immediately.

C. Maintain plastic or other protective wrap in place until ready for installation.

1. Keep panels clean and do not stack panels after removal of protection.


A. Conditioning: Manufacturer and installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for installation of slatwall system.


2. Do not install slatwall system until required temperature and relative humidity can be established, stabilized and maintained in installation areas.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed slatwall system within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results.

1. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

2. Maintain from date of installation through final acceptance by AAFES. 3. Contractor shall require slatwall manufacturer to provide written documentation of

optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions.


1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's standard warranty.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers:

1. Marlite 202 Hager Street Dover, OH 44622 (800) 377-1221

2. Wind Mill Slatwall Products 200 Balsam Road Sheboygan Falls, WI 53085 (800) 548-7528

3. Slatwall Systems 3645 North 40th Avenue Phoenix, Arizona 85019 (888) 454-1233

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Panel Configuration:

1. Panel thickness: 3/4” (19mm) thick. 2. Panel face dimensions: 4'-0” (1.22m) by 8'-0” (2.44m) as indicated. 3. Engineered groove machined into wood composite substrate.

a. Depth: Nominal 1/2” (13mm) deep slotted grove. b. Spacing: Machined on 3” (76mm) centers. c. Format: Horizontal panel format with grooves on 8'-0" length.

B. High Internal Bond Wood Composite Substrate:

1. Slatwall panels shall have formaldehyde emissions of 0.3 PPM or less and shall comply with HUD 24 CFR Part 3280 Standards set fourth for particleboard panels.

2. Medium density wood fiberboard conforming to ANSI A208.2, industrial-grade MDF or other wood fiber substrates.

3. Board properties: 48 lb. (769 kgs) density with an internal bond strength of 110 lbs (758 kgs) per square inch.

C. Panel Finish:

1. High Pressure Laminate: Vertical grade 0.030” (0.762mm) thick high-pressure plastic laminate adhered to wood fiber substrate by cold pressing polyvinyl acetate (PVA) type II, water resistant adhesives.

a. Wilsonart: 1573-60 Frosty White.

D. Groove Treatment: Factory installed mill finished aluminum insert.

E. Panel Trim:

1. Outside/Inside Corner: 1" x 1" x height indicated mill finished aluminum trim. 2. Edge: 1/2" x 3/4" x height indicated mill finished aluminum trim.


3. Accessory Trim: Other profiles, shapes and sizes of accessory trim as recommended by manufacturer for special installation conditions.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. All framing, panels, hardware and accessories shall be factory finished and ready to install except for field fabrication required by perimeter and corner conditions.

B. Refinish field cut panel edges in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction before installation.

C. Fabrication Tolerances for panels:

1. Dimensional: ± 0.0625” 2. Square: ± 0.125” across diagonals 3. Thickness: ± 0.008” 4. Grooving: ± 0.031” (groove width and spacing between grooves)

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to be performed.

1. Verify that surfaces to receive materials are prepared to exact levels and dimensions.

2. Verify that walls are primed before installation begins. 3. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building service and/or items affecting work of

this section are placed and ready to receive this work.

B. Submit written notification to Architect and system manufacturer if such conditions are unacceptable.

C. Application or installation of materials constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

D. Conditioning: Panels must be allowed to acclimate to a balanced environment in the installation location for 72 hours prior to installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install all materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions with hardware straight, plumb, and level.

1. Anchor units rigidly and securely in place. 2. Cut sheets to meet existing supports.

B. Fasten initial bottom panel to the wall with #6 or #7 bugle head drywall screws.

1. Install a minimum of one screw every third slot (or 9" (228mm)) vertically and every stud horizontally, typically every 16" (40.64cm) on centers horizontally (maximum 24" (600mm) on centers horizontally).

2. Each 4' x 8' panel shall have minimum of 42 screws secured to studs or furring. 3. Where screws do not hit the studs, fasten with adhesive in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Screws must be installed thru the panel grooves. 5. Slatwall panels without inserts do not require pre-drilling.


6. Slatwall panels with inserts require 5/32" pre-drilling of holes thru the insert and panel before fastening.

C. Avoid contamination of the panel faces with adhesives, solvents or cleaners during installation.

3.3 CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean and remove dust and other foreign matter form panel and framing surfaces.

B. Clean finishes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures slatwall system to remain, without damage or deterioration, until final acceptance by Contracting Officer.

END 06253.

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06300 – FIRE RETARDANT WOOD TREATMENT

FIRE RETARDANT WOOD TREATMENT 06300-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Fire retardant pressure treatment for all dimension lumber. b. Fire retardant pressure treatment for all plywood indicated.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

2. ASTM A653 / A653M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

3. ASTM D3201 Standard Test Method for Hygroscopic Properties of Fire-Retardant Wood and Wood-Base Products.

4. ASTM D5516 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Flexural Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Softwood Plywood Exposed to Elevated Temperatures.

5. ASTM D5664 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire-Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber.

6. ASTM D6305 Standard Practice for Calculating Bending Strength Design Adjustment Factors for Fire retardant Treated Plywood Roof Sheathing.

7. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. American Wood-Protection Association (AWPA):

1. AWPA E12 Standard method of determining the corrosion of metal in contact with wood.

2. AWPA P17 Fire Retardant Formulations. 3. AWPA P23 Standard for Chromated Copper Arsenate Type C (CCA-C). 4. AWPA P25 - Standard for Inorganic Boron (SBX). 5. AWPA P26 - Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type A (ACQ-A). 6. AWPA P27 - Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type B (ACQ-B). 7. AWPA P28 Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type C (ACQ-C). 8. AWPA P29 Standard for Alkaline Copper Quat Type D (ACQ-D). 9. AWPA P47 - Standard for DCOI/Imidacloprid/Stabilizer, Waterborne (EL2). 10. AWPA P50 Standard for Fire Retardant FR-2 (FR-2). 11. AWPA T1 - Use Category System: Processing and Treatment Standard. 12. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood.


C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 255 Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 723 Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's instructions for use, including requirements for storage, cutting, and finishing.

C. Fire-Retardant Treatment Certification: Treating plant's certification of compliance with specified requirements.


A. Wood Treatment Plant Qualifications: Wood treatment plant experienced in performing work of this section.

1. Provide current licensing documentation from nationally recognized company. 2. Provide written certification of plant’s qualifications and quality control procedures.

B. Source Quality: Obtain treated wood products from a single approved source.

C. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Mark each piece of plywood and lumber to show compliance with specified standards.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Provide fire retardant treatment which complies with the following regulatory requirements:

1. International Building Code (IBC). 2. International Code Council Evaluation Service ICC-ES ESR 2645.

E. Independent Third Party Inspection:

1. Provide written documentation of regular plant inspections by third party laboratory or responsible party.

F. Kiln Dry after Treatment (KDAT): Provide kiln dry material as indicated or required.

1. Kiln dry after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content for lumber in accordance with AWPA T1, Section 7 - Drying After Treatment (lumber).

2. Kiln dry after treatment to 15 percent for plywood in accordance with AWPA T1, Section F: Pressure treated composites (3c) kiln drying after treatment.


A. Store and protect wood products in accordance with Section 01620.

B. Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional changes, in accordance with instructions from treating plant.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard 40-year transferable limited warranty for pressure-treated wood.


B. Warranty shall not restrict AAFES from exercising rights under this Contract and shall protect AAFES against defects in fire retardant treatment of wood products including, but not limited to:

1. Deterioration of plywood used in conjunction with roofing materials subjected to normal heat and weather conditions common to the location of this Project.

2. Deterioration of fasteners, cold-formed metal framing or other ferrous metals that come into contact with products furnished under this Section.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer:

Viance 200 E. Woodlawn Rd. Suite 350 Charlotte, NC 28217 Phone: 800-421-8661 Email: [email protected]

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Dimension Lumber: As specified in Section 06100.

B. Construction Panels: As specified in Section 06100.

C. Fasteners In Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Use only code approved fasteners as specified in ICC-ES ESR 2645.

2.3 FIRE RETARDANT PRESSURE TREATMENT OF LUMBER AND PLYWOOD

A. Fire retardant treatment for wood blocking, sheathing and finish paneling:

1. Lumber: Comply with AWPA U1 UCFA, Type A or ICC-ES ESR 2645. 2. Plywood: Comply with AWPA U1, UCFA, Type A or ICC-ES ESR 2645. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: UL FR-S rating; or flame spread and smoke

developed ratings of 25 or less in a test of 30 minutes' duration in accordance with IBC section 2303.2.

4. Treatment: D-Blaze FRT as manufactured by Viance. 5. Kiln dry after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content for lumber and 15

percent for plywood. 6. Treat wood used for the following applications:

a. Roof edge and other miscellaneous blocking. b. Wall sheathing at existing structural ornamental arched trusses indicated and

other locations. c. Wall paneling used as finish in areas indicated d. Concealed and exposed backing panels for attaching finish items, fixtures,

accessories and equipment to walls.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wood Blocking: Comply with installation requirements in Section 06100.

B. Construction Panels: Comply with installation requirements in Section 06100.


C. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood:

1. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation.

2. End cuts and drilling are permitted. 3. Do not rip or mill lumber after fire-retardant treatment.

3.2 COMPLETION

A. All field cuts and holes in fire retardant treated materials shall be field treated with two brush coats of same preservative used in pressure treatment.

B. Remove from site all extra materials, rubbish, debris and packaging.

END 06300.

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06400 – ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Shop fabricated solid surface serving counter, nosing and counter frontal system at food concepts.

b. Shop fabricated plastic laminate architectural casework. c. Shop fabricated plastic laminate countertops, nosings and splash. d. Shop fabricated plastic laminate shelving, supports and standards. e. Shop fabricated Commodity and Services entry portals. f. Rough and finish hardware items for casework. g. Manufactured standards and brackets for casework. h. Miscellaneous wood finish items and trim indicated in drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Division 9 – Finishes. 6. Division 16 – Electrical.


1. Coordinate blocking and backing required for supporting work of this Section with requirements specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

2. Trim, moldings and installation of Architectural Woodwork items are specified in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.

3. Coordinate work of this Section with work of Section 09300, Tile for field installation of ceramic tile on and tile transition under Food Concept serving counter frontal systems.

4. Coordinate work of this Section with work of Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems.

C. AAFES furnished/Contractor installed items are listed in Section 01018 and indicated on Drawings.


A. Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work.

1. Regularly and actively engaged in manufacture of this type of work for a period of 10 years.

2. Woodwork manufacturer shall, in addition have fabricated work of a similar character and magnitude, and which has been in satisfactory use for at least 7 years.


B. Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall provide single-source responsibility to assume undivided responsibility for architectural woodwork and finish specified in this Section including:

1. Fabrication. 2. Finishing. 3. Field installation.

C. Architectural Woodwork manufacturer shall be responsible for all details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall show on Shop Drawings all millwork profiles required.

D. Contractor and Custom Woodwork manufacturer shall:

1. Coordinate and cooperate to establish and maintain field dimensions. 2. Coordinate with Contracting Officer or designated representative for fabrication

and installation of equipment.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Lumber grading rules and wood species shall conform to Voluntary Product Standard PS 20-70: Grading rules of the following associations apply to materials furnished.

1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (NELMA). 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 5. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS). 6. Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturer’s Association (NHPMA).

B. Hardwood lumber to comply with: National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) Rules.

C. Plywood Grading Rules:

1. Softwood Plywood – Construction and Industrial: Product Standard PS 1/ANSI A199.1.

2. Hardwood Plywood: Product Standard PS 51.

D. Grade Marks: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark:

1. Lumber: Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded, where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.

a. S-GRN: Unseasoned. b. S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content. c. MC-15 or KD: Maximum 15% moisture content. d. Dense.

2. Softwood Plywood: Appropriate grade-mark of the American Plywood Association. 3. Hardwood Plywood: Appropriate grademark of qualified inspection, testing or

grading agency.

E. Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) shall apply and by reference are hereby made a part of this specification.

1. Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy, in this specification shall be as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.


2. Any item not given a specific quality grade in this specification shall be Custom Grade as defined in the latest edition of AWI “Quality Standards”.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each product and process specified as work of this Section and/or incorporated into finish carpentry items including:

a. Substrate wood grade and moisture content. b. Solid surface plastics. c. Plastic laminate grades. d. Fabrication techniques as related to AWI standards. e. Installation procedures.

2. Certifications: Submit manufacturer’s/fabricator’s certification stating that fabricated wood items comply with quality grades and AWI requirements indicated.

3. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings illustrating the following:

a. Location of each item. b. Dimensioned plans and elevations. c. Large scale details illustrating:

1.) Construction of item. 2.) Relationship of attached components. 3.) Relationship to other finish components of construction including

walls, floors, soffits and equipment. 4.) Built-in electrical components.

d. Rough openings for AAFES and/or Vendor furnished fixtures and accessories indicated.

e. Internal and external attachment devices. f. Finish hardware. g. Other miscellaneous components.

4. Samples:

a. Solid Surface Plastics:

1.) Solid surface manufacturer’s sample for color verification purposes. 2.) 8 inch by 12 inch piece of each color selection indicated.

b. High Pressure (HP) plastic laminate:

1.) Plastic laminate manufacturer’s standard sample chain for preliminary selection.

2.) 8 inch by 12 inch piece of final laminate selection for each type, color, pattern and surface finish selected.

c. Low Pressure (LP) laminate: 8 inch by 12 inch piece finished with laminate proposed for semi-exposed surfaces.

d. Metal paneled surfaces: 8 inch by 12 inch piece of color selection indicated. e. Cabinet hardware: (1) unit of each type and finish of exposed cabinet

hardware.




B. Protect woodwork items during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

C. Do not deliver woodwork items until taping, wet work, grinding and similar operations that could damage, soil or deteriorate items have been completed.

D. Woodwork items shall only be stored in installation areas or areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Conditioning: Woodwork manufacturer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for installation of woodwork.


2. Do not install woodwork until required temperature and relative humidity can be established, stabilized and maintained in installation areas.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed finish carpentry within 1 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content.

1. Maintain from date of installation through remainder of construction period. 2. Contractor shall require woodwork manufacturer to provide written documentation

of optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Solid Surface Plastics: Subject to compliance with requirements provide solid surface plastic products of the following manufacturers for specific applications as indicated:

1. Charley’s: Corian. 2. Arby's: AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed - Corian. 3. Taco Bell: Wilsonart. 4. Boston Market: Formica. 5. Lavatories: Corian (See Plumbing).

B. Plastic Laminate: Subject to compliance with requirements provide high pressure decorative laminate products of the following manufacturers for specific applications as indicated:

1. Charley’s: Wilsonart. 2. Barber Shop Storage, Break Room, Office: Wilsonart. 3. Optical Lab: Pionite and Formica. 4. Optometry: Wilsonart.

C. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Panels: Subject to compliance with requirements set forth in Section 09986, provide FRP products for use in woodwork fabrications of the following manufacturer for specific applications:

1. Arby’s, Boston Market and Taco Bell: Marlite.

D. Ceramic Tile and Grout: Subject to compliance with requirements set forth in Section 09300, provide ceramic tile products for use in woodwork fabrications of the following manufacturer for specific applications except as noted otherwise:


1. Charley's: Alfalux. 2. Arby's: Crossville. 3. Boston Market: Kaiser Tile.

E. Tongue and Groove Hardwood Paneling: Subject to compliance with requirements provide tongue and groove hardwood paneling of the following manufacturer for specific applications as indicated:

1. Mall Entry Portals: Armstrong.

F. Miscellaneous Accessory Products: Subject to compliance with requirements furnish miscellaneous accessory products of the following manufacturers for specific applications:

1. Stainless Steel Panels: Refer to Section 11400 – Food Service Equipment. 2. Taco Bell Corrugated Metal Panels: Atas. 3. Charley’s Counter Edge Strip Light: (See Electrical) 4. Taco Bell Counter Edge Strip Light: (See Electrical) 5. Stainless Steel Base: Custom. 6. Corner Key Metal Trim: Fry Reglet.

G. Cabinet Hardware: Subject to compliance with requirements provide cabinet hardware of as manufactured by the following for the various products specified:

1. Blum. 2. Grant Hardware. 3. Grass America. 4. Hafele. 5. Knape & Vogt. 6. Stanley. 7. Soss.

H. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Brackets: Subject to compliance with requirements provide adjustable shelf standards of the following manufacturer:

1. Knape & Vogt.

2.2 SHOP FABRICATED CASEWORK ITEMS AND FINISH PRODUCTS

A. Food Court Frontal Systems:

1. Charley’s Steakery Serving:

a. Ceramic Tile: Alfalux, Timberstone – Love Wood, Wenge "Naturale Rettificato", 6" x 24" with Mapei #47 "Charcoal" grout.

b. Plastic Laminate: Wilsonart 7110K-78 – “Montana Walnut”. c. Back Panels: Stainless Steel Panel.

2. Arby's Serving:

a. Ceramic Tile: Crossville, Color by Numbers, WT02, "Tea for Two" in gloss, 4" x 8" with Mapei #47 "Charcoal" grout.

b. Back Panels: Marlite, Standard Pebbled Surface, P100, "White".

3. Taco Bell Serving:

a. Metal Panels: Atas Corrugated Metal Panel, .032 Aluminum, "Clear Anodized Aluminum".



4. Boston Market Serving:

a. Ceramic Tile: Kaiser Tile, KT Species, “Alley Maple”, 6” x 24” with Mapei #47 "Charcoal" grout.


B. Base and Wall Cabinets:


a. Plastic Laminate: Wilsonart 7110K-78 – “Montana Walnut”.

2. Break Room, OPS Office and Barber Shop Storage:

a. Plastic Laminate: Wilsonart 4878-38 – "Pewter Mesh".

3. Optical Lab:

a. Plastic Laminate: Formica Colorcore 2 7223C-58 – “New White”.

4. Optometry:

a. Plastic Laminate:

1.) Cabinets: Wilsonart D354-60 – “Designer White”. 2.) Base Trim: Wilsonart 4830K-18 – “Satin Stainless”.

C. Countertops:


a. Solid Surface: Corian, “Designer White”.

2. Arby's:

a. Solid Surface: AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed - Corian, "Arctic Ice".

3. Taco Bell:

a. Solid Surface: Wilsonart 9175ML, "Avalanche Melange".

4. Boston Market:

a. Solid Surface: Formica Signatures 742, “Blanco Terrazzo”.

5. Break Room, OPS Office and Barber Shop Storage:

a. Plastic Laminate: Wilsonart 4811-60 – “Silicon EV”.

6. Optical Lab:

a. Plastic Laminate: Pionite SB006 – “Indigo Blue”.

7. Optometry:

a. Plastic Laminate: Wilsonart 7945K-18 – “Xanadu”.

8. Lavatories:

a. Solid Surface: Corian, “Silt” with integral sink in “Bisque”.

D. Mall Entry Portals:

1. Tongue and Groove Hardwood Paneling: Armstrong Century Farm 5 Ply, GCH452TMLG – Hickory, “Tumbleweed”, ½” x 5”.

2. Stainless Steel Base: 16 gauge, 6-inch stainless steel base, brushed finish. 3. Metal Trim:

a. Corner Key: Fry Reglet clear anodized aluminum profile number PCM-75-75.


b. J Molding: Fry Reglet clear anodized aluminum profile number JPM-75.

2.3 GENERAL

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas.

B. Fabrication: Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles and details indicated with openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items and work.

C. Assembly: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware mortising/fitting and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible.

1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for field scribing,

trimming and fitting.

D. Pre-cut Openings: Fabricate woodwork with pre-cut openings, where possible, to receive hardware, appliances, fixtures, electrical work and similar items.

1. Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams as furnished by the Contractor for proper size and shape.

2. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in potentially damp locations, seal edges of cutouts with water resistant coating.

E. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of wood finish carpentry items required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as necessary for accurate fit.

2.4 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS, LAMINATE CLAD

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and Division 400B, “Laminate Clad Cabinets”.

B. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Cabinet Construction Type: Flush overlay. 3. Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the

following requirements:

a. Colors, patterns and finishes shall be as selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer’s standard “Solid Colors” or “Pattern Colors” products category.

b. Laminate grade for exposed surfaces shall comply with the following requirements for type of surface and grade:

1.) Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops: GP-50 (0.050” nominal thickness).

2.) Vertical Surfaces: GP-28 (0.028” nominal thickness). 3.) Edges: GP-28 (0.028” nominal thickness).

4. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Provide manufacturer’s standard low pressure laminate surface material in solid neutral color.

5. Provide dust panels of ¼ inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments, except where located directly under tops.


2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIAL

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with custom built architectural cabinets.

B. Hardware Standard: Comply with ANSI/BBMA A156.9 “American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware” for items indicated by reference to BBMA number or referenced to this standard.

C. Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA 1301 for finishes indicated by BHMA Code Numbers or if not otherwise indicated, provide finishes as follows:

1. For exposed hardware comply with requirements BMHA 626 Satin Chrome plated finish over brass or bronze base.

2. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer’s standard finish that complies with product class requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.9.

D. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Schedule shall be standard with the manufacturer but shall meet the following minimum criteria.

1. Hinges: Concealed, steel, horizontal and vertical adjustment, 120 degree opening, mortised in door, self-closing.

a. Acceptable Cabinet Hinge Products:

1.) Stanley #1511. 2.) Hafele H-series.

2. Catches: Cabinet door catches shall be magnetic pressure release type, self-aligning.

3. Pulls: Door and drawer pulls shall be through-bolted from backside, 5/16-inch diameter, 4-inch screw hole spacing, wire pulls.

4. Adjustable Shelf Standards: Cradle type to support specified wire shelving. 5. Drawer Guides: Full extension slide, side mounting type.

a. Cold rolled steel, zinc plated, clear chromate. b. Nylon rollers and steel ball bearing action. c. 100 pound per pair load capacity.

2.6 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET TOPS

A. Quality Standards: Comply with AWI Section 400 and Divisions 400B and 400C.

B. Type 1: High Pressure Decorative Laminate.

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface:

a. Colors, patterns and finishes shall be as indicated or selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer’s standard “Solid Colors” or “Pattern Colors” products category.

b. Laminate grade shall comply with NEMA LD 3, GP-50 (0.050” nominal thickness).

3. Edge and Splash Treatment: Comply with the following requirements:

a. Edge or nosing treatment on all plastic laminate countertops shall be plastic laminate or solid hardwood as indicated.


b. Splash Treatment shall be ¾ inch by 4 inch standard size unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

C. Type 2: Solid Surface Plastic.

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Solid Material for Horizontal Surface:

a. Thickness: ½” minimum.

3. Edge Treatment:

a. Nosing: Provide solid plastic material in thickness and color to match countertop.

b. Edges: As indicated and, if not indicated, provide pencil edge radius.

4. Fabricate and install in strict compliance with solid surface manufacture’s written instructions.

2.7 WALL MOUNTED SHELVES AND STANDARDS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 600.

B. Type: High Pressure Decorative Laminate.

1. Grade: Custom 2. Laminate Cladding for Top Surface:

a. Colors, patterns and finishes shall be as selected by Contracting Officer from manufacturer’s standard “Solid Colors” products category.

b. Laminate grade shall comply with NEMA LD 3, GP-50 (0.050” nominal thickness).

C. Thickness of shelving shall be 3/4 inch minimum and as indicated to span between adjustable shelf standards or finish wood wall cleats.

D. Cover underside and edges of shelf surfaces with solid color, grade GP-28 (0.028” nominal thickness) high pressure plastic laminate.

E. At full height shelving construct bottom fixed shelf on 4-inch toe space base attached to wall and/or floor construction as indicated.

F. Adjustable Shelf Standards:

1. Standards: Minimum 12 gauge steel, electro zinc-plated, and clear lacquered cold rolled steel, 7/8 inch by 11/16 inch with 2” slot adjustment.

2. Acceptable Standard Product:

a. Knape & Vogt #87.

G. Adjustable Shelf Brackets:

1. Brackets: Minimum 12 gauge steel by 5 1/16 inch high by 16 inch deep, electro zink-plated, and clear lacquered cold rolled steel.

2. Acceptable Bracket Product:

a. Knape & Vogt #187.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use.


1. Comply with FS FF-S-0111 for applicable requirements. 2. Trim head type screws shall be used where exposed.

B. Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage.

1. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at installations subject to moisture for corrosion resistance.

2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 3. Furnish inserts and anchors, as applicable, to be set into concrete or masonry

work for subsequent anchorage of finish carpentry items.

D. Adhesives: Products as recommended by wood finish carpentry manufacturer.

E. Refer to Sections 05500, Metal Fabrications and 06100, Rough Carpentry for other fasteners, anchors and reinforcement necessary for a complete, durable installation.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that surfaces to receive architectural woodwork items are prepared to exact levels and dimensions.

B. Application or installation of materials constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Condition architectural woodwork items to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.

D. Prior to installation examine shop fabricated work for completion, finish, back priming and removal of all packaging.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install wood finish carpentry items to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section.

B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.

1. Shim as required using concealed shims. 2. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level and with no variations

in flushness of adjoining surfaces.

C. Scribe and cut woodwork items to fit adjoining work.

1. Refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.

D. Anchor wood items to blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates.

1. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.

2. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with wood finish surface to match final factory applied transparent finish.


E. Install cabinets without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned.

1. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.

2. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

F. Anchor countertops securely to base units and other support systems indicated.

G. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this Section, to whatever extent not completed at shop or prior to installation of woodwork.

H. Install all miscellaneous trim and mouldings required and all related woodwork items indicated for a complete job.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork items where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually.

1. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 2. Where repair does not produce visual or functional deficiencies, replace finish

carpentry items.

B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware.

C. Clean all finish carpentry items on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.

D. Touch-up all shop applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled work.

E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer and that ensures woodwork items to remain, without damage or deterioration, until final acceptance by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.4 CLEANING UP

A. Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends, and debris.

B. Sweeping:

1. At the end of each working day, and more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep surfaces where refuse from this portion of the work has settled.

2. Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its disposal. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the work, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces.

END 06400.

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07210 – BUILDING INSULATION

BUILDING INSULATION 07210-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Unfaced fiberglass batt wall insulation indicated. b. Polyethylene sheet vapor barrier in attic space and exterior walls indicated. c. Miscellaneous accessories including joint tape, adhesives and fastenings.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all building insulation as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all building insulation as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 4. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 07270 – Firestopping. 7. Section 08410 – Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts. 8. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall.

B. Specified elsewhere but directly related to work of this Section:

1. Fiberglass reinforced gypsum wall sheathing is specified and installed under provisions of Section 07240, Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB.

C. Specified but provided and installed by others:

1. Roof insulation for patching is specified in Section 07536, Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only).


A. R-Value designation is thermal resistance of insulation only, not including alleged air spaces or other factors assumed to result in higher R-values.

B. Provide insulation materials that are identical to those whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, or by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136.


1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data:

a. Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each type of insulation stating brand names, R-value and composition.

2. Installation Instructions:

a. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for installation of each type of insulation.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. In accord Section 01620.

B. Clearly identify manufacturer, contents, brand name, applicable standard, and R-value.

C. Protect insulations and vapor barrier from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled or covered with ice or snow.

D. Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements set forth, provide products of one of the following.

B. Provide products of one of the following manufacturers of medium density fiberglass insulation:

1. CertainTeed Corporation Post Office Box 860

Valley Forge, PA 19482 (800) 523-7844

2. Owens Corning One Owens Corning Parkway

Toledo, OH 43659 (800) 438-7465

3. Johns Manville International, Inc. Post Office Box 5108

Denver, CO 80217 (800) 654-3103

2.2 UNFACED FIBERGLASS FILL INSULATION

A. Unfaced glass fiber thermal insulation complying with ASTM C-665, Type I and ASTM E-136.

B. Performance Characteristics:

1. Walls:

a. Thickness: 8-inches as indicated to insulate spaces that will be concealed after completion of framing and building closure.


1.) Width: 16 inches and 24 inches. 2.) Batt Length: 48 inches. 3.) Density: 1.5 pounds per cubic foot. 4.) R-value: 25.0 when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 5.) Overall Length: As indicated for complete coverage

b. Thickness: 6-inches to insulate interior walls furred with 6” metal studs and other locations indicated.

1.) Width: 16 inches and 24 inches. 2.) Batt Length: 48 inches. 3.) Density: 1.5 pounds per cubic foot. 4.) R-value: 19.0 when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 5.) Overall Length: As indicated for complete coverage

2. Ceiling Cavities and Cold-formed Framed Roofs:

a. Thickness: 8 inches as required to insulate ceiling cavity and roof spaces that will be concealed after completion of framing and building closure.

b. Width: 16 inches and 24 inches. c. Batt Length: 48 inches. d. Density: 1.5 pounds per cubic foot. e. R-value: 25.0 when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. f. Length: As indicated for complete coverage.

3. Beams and Miscellaneous:

a. Thickness: 3 ½ inches. b. Width: 16 or 24 inches. c. Length: As indicated or required for complete insulation of beam webs and

other spaces. d. Density: 1.5 pounds per cubic foot. e. R-value: 13.0 when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.

C. Surface Burning Characteristics:

1. Maximum flame spread; 10, in compliance with ICBO requirements. 2. Maximum smoke developed; 10, in compliance with ICBO requirements.

D. Dimensional Stability shall be inherent in product with linear shrinkage less that 0.1 percent.

E. Provide continuous 6-mil, low density, polyethylene film stud wall vapor barrier, adhesives, anchors and joint sealant tape equal to products manufactured by Tex-Trude, Post Office Box 58, Channelview, TX 77530, (281) 452-5961.

2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Adhesive for bonding insulation shall be type recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with the requirements for fire performance characteristics.

B. Where building construction will not support insulation, or where insulation must be temporarily supported prior to installation of other supporting materials, provide permanent and temporary support straps.

1. ¾” wide fiberglass reinforced strapping stretched between and perpendicular structural supports.

2. Stretch strapping tight and anchor to supporting structure using nails, staples or other methods suitable to attachment of strapping material to substrate.


3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas scheduled to receive insulation to insure protection against inclement weather and other hazards and verify that work of preceding trades is completed.

B. Examine space allocated for insulation for proper width and depth to receive material.

C. Proceed with installation when conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove projections unnecessary to permanent construction that may damage or prevent proper installation.

B. Insulate all cavities or spaces that will be permanently closed when actual insulation work begins as other work progresses.

1. Corners and jambs where stud framing is doubled. 2. Headers where access after framing is completed will be limited.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BATT INSULATION

A. Install continuous vapor barrier on exterior face of new exterior wall framing adjacent to conditioned interior spaces.

B. Unfaced medium density fiberglass wall insulation shall be installed where indicated on drawings and if not indicated:

1. Install in all newly furred exterior walls. 2. Split batts to fit into furred spaces that are less than 3 1/2-inches deep.

C. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for particular conditions of installation.

D. At wall areas friction fit insulation between framing members after fiberglass reinforced gypsum sheathing cover has been installed on one side of the cavity.

E. Install adhesive or mechanical fasteners as supplementary support to hold the product in place until finish surface is applied where insulation will not remain in place by friction.

F. Install unfaced medium density fiberglass insulation on both sides of structural steel beams and other locations where full depth wall insulation cannot be used.

1. Fill internal spaces of headers, corners and other spaces that cannot be accessed after completion of framing.

2. Pack insulation in joints between metal framing and exterior penetrations such as door and window openings to prevent thermal gaps and/or thermal bridges in the overall thermal insulation system.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from harmful weather exposure and from physical abuses and where possible by immediate installation of concealing work or where that is not possible by temporarily covering.

B. Remove and dispose of excess materials, litter and debris, leave work areas in clean condition.

END 07210.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB

EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM – CLASS PB 07240-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Fiberglass faced gypsum substrate/sheathing panels over metal stud framing systems.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide exterior insulation and finish system as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


b. Prefinished continuous aluminum soffit vents. c. Exterior insulation and finish system including the following:

1.) Air/weather barrier system. 2.) Base coat and adhesive, including trowel applied drainage plane. 3.) Expanded polystyrene insulation board. 4.) Expanded polystyrene shapes and features for detailing indicated. 5.) Back wrapping of all polystyrene insulation board edges where

meeting dissimilar materials. 6.) 2-layer fiber reinforcing mesh. 7.) Exterior finish. 8.) Accessory components, drainage strips, sealants, control joints and

other items necessary for complete installation of the exterior insulation and finish system.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide exterior insulation and finish system as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.


b. Prefinished continuous aluminum soffit vents. c. Exterior insulation and finish system including the following:

1.) Air/weather barrier system. 2.) Base coat and adhesive, including trowel applied drainage plane. 3.) Expanded polystyrene insulation board. 4.) Expanded polystyrene shapes and features for detailing indicated. 5.) Back wrapping of all polystyrene insulation board edges where

meeting dissimilar materials. 6.) 2-layer fiber reinforcing mesh. 7.) Exterior finish.


8.) Accessory components, drainage strips, sealants, control joints and other items necessary for complete installation of the exterior insulation and finish system.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 07210 – Building Insulation. 4. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 5. Section 07920 – Building & Pavement Joint Sealers. 6. Section 08410 – Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors. 7. Section 09250 – Gypsum Board Systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exterior insulation and finish systems refer to exterior assemblies composed of the following:

1. Approved substrate. 2. Moisture and air protection barrier. 3. Trowel applied drainage plane adhesive under layer of rigid board insulation. 4. Outer layer composed of a glass-fiber-mesh-reinforced base coat applied directly

to board insulation. 5. Textured protective finish coat.

B. These assemblies are applied to supporting substrates of construction indicated.

C. Designation PB for class of exterior insulation and finish systems specified in this Section is based on the classification developed by the Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association (EIMA).

D. System in this Section refers to Class PB exterior insulation and finish systems.

E. System manufacturer refers to the manufacturer of exterior insulation and finish systems.

F. An R-value that represents the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value) designates thermal resistivity of the insulation board.

1. Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick.

2. Thermal resistivity (R-value) is expressed by the temperature difference between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through 1 square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide system complying with the following performance requirements:

1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions.


2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of system and assemblies behind system including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish.

3. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84.

b. Identity materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacturing products for system indicated and with at least 8 years successful experience in applications similar to that required for this project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer that is certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified for installation of systems indicated.

C. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Obtain materials for system from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system components.

2. System selected shall be compatible with intended design and performance characteristics.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for each component of exterior insulation and finish system and related products specified under this Section.

2. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of system including elevation(s), section(s), details of components including back wrapping, flashing tape and drainage strips, joint locations between system and construction and attachments to construction behind system.

3. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes:

a. E.I.F.S. manufacturer's standard color charts and small-scale samples indicating textural choices available, three (3) originals.

b. Fiberglass faced gypsum sheathing/substrate, 6-inch by 12-inch panel. c. Drainage strip, 6-inch long piece. d. Color selection guide for prefinished aluminum soffit vents.

4. Samples for Verification Purposes: Three (3) Samples, 2-foot square, for each finish, color, and texture selected.

a. Prepare verification samples using same tools and techniques intended for actual work.

b. Incorporate within each sample a typical edge joint filled with sealant of color as selected by Architect and a typical back wrapped edge.


B. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.

1. Product test reports for system prepared by a qualified independent testing laboratory within the last 3 years certifying and interpreting test results relative to system's compliance with requirements for fire performance characteristics, bond integrity, and material properties.

2. Sealant compatibility and test report from sealant manufacturer certifying that materials forming joint substrates of system have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

a. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of results relative to sealant performance.

b. Provide recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.


A. In accordance with Section 01620 and other requirements below.

B. Deliver products in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels identifying products legible and intact.

C. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, damage from construction traffic and other causes.

D. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.


A. Environmental Conditions:

1. Do not install system when ambient outdoor temperatures are 40 degrees F or below or when overnight temperatures are scheduled to fall below that limit.

2. Temporary protection and heat may by provided to sustain a temperature above 40 degrees F. if temperatures are 40 degrees F. and falling.

B. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees (4 degrees C.) during installation of wet materials and for 24 hours after installation or longer to allow them to become thoroughly dry and weather resistant.

1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence installation of system with related work specified in other sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including joint sealers, are protected against damage from weather, aging, corrosion, or other causes.

B. Install finish materials in coordination with installation of elastomeric coating system for continuity of finishes.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer: Furnish a written manufacturer's warranty for a period of seven (7) years for defects in materials.


B. Repairs or replacement shall be done at no cost to AAFES or the Government.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Class PB System of one of the following:

1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. P.O. Box 1014 West Warwick, RI 02893 (800) 556-7752 2. Senergy Inc. 1367 Elmwood Ave. Cranston, RI 02910 (800) 221-9255 3. Sto Industries P.O. Box 44609 Atlanta, GA 30336 (800) 221-2397

2.2 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS:

Manufacturer PRODUCT

Dryvit “Outsulation Plus" Senergy “Senerflex X-tra Stop" Sto “Classic Next System"

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide substrate, board insulation, reinforcing fabric, base and finish coat materials, adhesives, anchors, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by system manufacturer.

B. Fiberglass faced gypsum substrate/sheathing panels: Paperless, mold-resistant, inorganic, exterior gypsum panel sheathing designed as substrate behind permanent building cladding systems.

1. Product: DensGlass Gold as manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corporation or equal as approved by system manufacturer.

2. Size: 1/2-inch and 5/8-inch thick as indicated x 4 feet wide x 8, 9 or 10 feet in length.

C. Air/weather barrier: 100 percent acrylic product designed to mix with Portland cement including accessory items as recommended and approved by the system manufacturer:

1. Fiberglass mesh tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. 2. Polyethylene backed flashing tape with rubberized asphalt adhesive. 3. Water-based flashing tape surface conditioner. 4. Accessory adhesives. 5. Corrugated plastic drainage strip. 6. Other miscellaneous accessories required by manufacturer for complete substrate

preparation.


D. Adhesive for Application of Insulation:

1. System manufacturer’s standard formulation designed for indicated use and compatible with substrate.

2. Adhesive shall be job-mixed formulation of Portland cement complying with ASTM C-150, Type 1 and compatible with polymer based adhesive specified for base coat.

E. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation:

1. Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C-578 for Type 1.

2. Insulation shall be approved by system manufacturer for material qualities including corner squareness, other dimensional tolerances and the following:

a. Age insulation in block form prior to cutting and shipping by air drying for not less than 6 weeks or by another method approved by system manufacturer that produces equivalent results.

b. Provide insulation in boards not less than 2 feet x 4 feet and in thickness indicated, but not less that that allowed by system manufacturer.

c. Provide accurately cut polystyrene shapes and features for detailing indicated.

F. Reinforcing Fabric: System shall be constructed with single layer of balanced, alkali-resistant open-weave glass fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other system materials, made from continuous multi-end strands with tensile strength of not less than 145 lbs. and 150 lbs. in warp and fill directions, respectively, per ASTM D-1682 and complying with ASTM D-578, and of the following minimum weight:

1. First layer: Intermediate duty reinforcing mesh, 12.0 oz. per sq. yd. minimum. 2. Detailing mesh: Standard duty reinforcing mesh (short rolls), 4.30 oz. per sq. yd.

G. Base Coat Materials:

1. System manufacturer's standard, job mixed formulation of Portland cement complying with ASTM C-150, Type I.

2. Cement shall be of natural color and combined with system manufacturer’s standard polymer-based adhesive designed for use indicated.

H. Finish Coat Materials:

1. System manufacturer's standard factory mixed formulation of polymer emulsion admixture, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles and fillers.

2. Provide color and texture of protective coating to comply with the following requirements:

a. Provide selection made by Contracting Officer from manufacturer's full range of standard colors and textures available for type of finish coat indicated.

b. Texture shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard sand texture finishes.

I. Water: Clean and potable.

J. Supplemental Anchorage:

1. Where recommended provide system manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fastener assemblies, complete with system manufacturer's standard washer attachments, selected for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of application indicated, capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulation board.


2. Fasteners shall be designed for attachment to metal studs complying with ASTM C 954.

2.4 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. Sealant Product: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is listed and recommended by system manufacturer for use indicated.

1. Joint sealant shall be compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials.

2. Sealant shall be a multi-part, non-sag urethane composition complying with requirements of Section 07920, Building & Paving Joint Sealers.

B. Sealant Color: Provide color selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.5 MIXING

A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials.

B. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved by system manufacturer.

C. Mix materials in clean containers.

D. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer or discard.

2.6 PREFINISHED ALUMINUM SOFFIT VENTS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Fry Reglet Corporation, Alpharetta, GA 30005, (800) 237-9773.

B. Product: Soffit vent extrusion DRM-625-V-400 fabricated in extruded aluminum, hat-shaped, with extended fastening flanges both sides for setting over bottom face of fiberglass reinforced sheathing and fastening through sheathing into support framing.

C. Finish: Finish Paint for Non-ferrous Metal: Provide high performance organic coating for aluminum fabrications, connections and components used for construction of the sunshade and canopy brackets and awning framing structures complying with AAMA 2605.

1. AA-C12C42R1X chemical finish cleaned with inhibited chemicals or acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating.

2. Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Provide clear fluorocarbon topcoat with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight per AAMA 605.2.

4. Color shall be as selected by Architect-Engineer from manufacturer’s custom range of colors and gloss to prefinished dark bronze anodized aluminum fixed sunshade fascia outriggers and fascia.


3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine sheathing and framed sub-substrates, with installer present, to determine if they are in satisfactory condition for installation of system.

B. Do not proceed with installation of system until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from application of systems.

B. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coatings on other work.

C. Attach approved fiberglass reinforced gypsum sheathing substrate products over framing as indicated.

D. Install aluminum soffit vent extrusions as indicated on three (3) sides of exposed soffits in straight, continuous lines to form vented reveal in soffit.

E. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with system manufacturer’s requirements to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.

3.3 E.I.F.S. INSTALLATION

A. Comply with system manufacturer’s current published instructions for installation of system as applicable to type of substrate indicated.

B. Apply system manufacturer’s air/weather barrier system over approved substrate in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Adhesively attach insulation to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Treat exposed edges of insulation board, including those forming substrates of sealed joints within system or between system and other work, by encapsulation with base coat, reinforcing fabric and finish coat.

a. All edges of insulation that adjoin dissimilar materials or that are discontinuous shall be factory back wrapped with detail mesh and embedded in adhesive.

b. At Contractor’s option, edges may be field back wrapped prior to adhering to substrate as follows:

1.) Detail mesh and adhesive shall be extended a minimum of 2 inches continuously along back surface of board.

2.) Spread adhesive on edge of board and embed detail mesh allowing free edge of mesh to drape over face of insulation.

3.) Edges shall receive coat of finish during finishing process or, if not accessible during finish process, prior to adhesion of insulation board to substrate.


c. Detail fabric shall be completely embedded and covered with adhesive. d. No exposed mesh or insulation shall be allowed. e. Exposed mesh or insulation board shall be grounds for rejection of entire

system.

2. Apply adhesive vertically to insulation by notched towel method in manner that results in adhesive coating entire surface of gypsum sheathing after insulation is placed against sheathing, unless system manufacturer instructions specify use of surface sealer in combination with ribbon and dab method.

3. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally beginning first course from a level base line and working upwards.

4. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern and offset joints of insulation from joints in sheathing.

5. Interlock ends at internal and external corners where applicable. 6. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,

continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between insulation boards.

a. If gaps occur or cannot be avoided, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly. b. Insert insulation filler into gap without use of adhesive.

7. Install drainage strips and bottom edges where indicated or as required by manufacturer to ensure unobstructed pathway for unintended moisture to drain from behind system.

8. Where required and recommended install supplemental mechanical fasteners to ensure that insulation board is securely retained as follows:

a. Secure mechanical fasteners to framing members behind sheathed substrates so that they penetrate framing members 5/8 inch or more and recess flush with exterior surface of insulation board.

b. Space fasteners horizontally in line with framing members at approximately 16” to 24” centers and vertically not more that 16” on center.

9. Allow adhered, mechanically attached insulation to remain undisturbed for period prescribed by system manufacturer by not less that 24 hours, prior to beginning rasping and sanding insulation or application of base coat and reinforcing fabric.

10. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/32 inch from surface of insulation and yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch.

11. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes conforming to details indicated.

a. Coordinate detailed flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating.

b. Metal flashings are specified in Section 07600.

12. Interrupt insulation where expansion joints are indicated or required by system manufacturer.

13. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps of width needed between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces that produce joint widths indicated after encapsulation of joint substrates with base coat, reinforcing fabric and finish coat.

a. Embed strips of standard duty mesh in adhesive on sheathing or masonry surface at each joint leaving approximately 6 inches of strip hanging loose.


b. After application of insulation and during installation of base coat and initial layer of mesh, wrap loose ends of strips around edges of insulation to protect sides of joint.

14. Cut grooves, drips, rabbets, slopes and other features in outside face of insulation using hot wire knife and do not reduce insulation thickness at features to less than one half the insulation thickness or 1/2 inch.

D. Apply base coat to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness specified by system manufacturer.

E. Fully embed base layer of reinforcing fabric of type indicated in wet base coat to produce wrinkle free installation with fabric continuous at corners and lapped or otherwise treated at joints to comply with system manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. After initial base coat has cured apply a second base coat and subsequent layer of reinforcing fabric, of type indicated, in same manner as first application.

G. Apply finish coat over cured base coat in thickness specified by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of texture and color matching approved verification sample.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT

A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements of Division 7, Section 07920.

B. In addition to requirements of Section 07920, comply with "EIMA Joint Sealant Specification for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems."


A. Promptly remove protective coatings from window and doorframes and any other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive protective coating.

B. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering and soiling of new exterior insulation and finish system.

C. Maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to installer and system manufacturer that ensures systems being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END 07240.

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07270 – FIRESTOPPING

FIRESTOPPING 07270-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide coordination of firestopping penetrations on entire project. 2. Each subcontractor provide:

a. Firestopping of own penetrations through rated wall assemblies. b. Firestopping of own penetrations through rated ceiling assemblies.

3. Coordinate all work related to this Section with the Fire Marshall’s Office prior to construction of fire resistive assemblies and installation of firestopping products.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03300 – Concrete Work. 3. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 4. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 6. Section 08305 – Access Doors. 7. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 8. Division 15 – Mechanical. 9. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for construction and sealing perimeters of and penetrations through fire rated wall assemblies and fire rated ceiling assemblies as indicated herein and specified in Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall.


A. Provide Firestopping systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified under paragraph for Performance Requirements.

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified, testing and inspection agency such as UL or other agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Firestopping products shall bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.

B. Engage an experienced installer who is certified, licensed or otherwise qualified by the Firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install firestop products per specified requirements.

C. Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration or joint opening and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer.

1.4 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Fire Test Requirements:

1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):


a. ANSI/UL 1479, “Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops”. b. ANSI/UL 2079, “Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems”. c. ANSI/UL 263, “Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials”. d. ANSI/UL 723, “Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”.

2. America Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM E-814, “Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops”. b. ASTM E-1966, “Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems”. c. ASTM E-119, “Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials”. d. ASTM E-84, “Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”.

B. References:

1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL “Fire Resistance Directory”.

a. Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) b. Joint Systems (XHBN) c. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW) d. Firestop Devices (XHJI) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) f. Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV)

2. All major building codes:

a. National Building Code published by BOCA. b. International Building Code published by ICC.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of Quincy, MA “NFPA 101: Life Safety Code”.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) of Quincy, MA “NFPA 70: National Electrical Code”.

C. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. Provide products that upon curing, do not re-emulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown or otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes, ponding water or other forms of moisture characteristic during and after construction.

2. Provide firestop sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate motion such as pipe vibration, water hammer, thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to the seal.

3. Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away or otherwise interrupted through wall or floor openings and provide products appropriately tested for the thickness and type of insulation utilized.

4. Openings within walls and floors designed to accommodate communication and data cabling shall be provided with re-enterable products specifically designed for retrofit.

5. Penetrants passing through fire-resistance rated ceiling assemblies contained within chase wall assemblies shall be protected.

a. Provide products tested by being fully exposed to the fire outside of the chase wall.

b. Systems within the UL Fire Resistance Directory that meet this criterion are identified with the words “Chase Wall Optional”.

6. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate movement such as thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to the seal.


7. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate a specific range of movement and tested for this purpose in accordance with a cyclic movement test criteria as outlined in Standards, ASTM E-1399, ASTM E-1966 or ANSI/ UL 2079.

8. Provide fire-resistive joint systems subjected to an air leakage test conducted in accordance with Standard, ANSI/UL2079 with published L-Ratings for ambient and elevated temperatures as evidence of the ability of the fire-resistive joint system to restrict the movement of smoke.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of firestopping product indicated.

B. System Drawings: Submit documentation from a qualified third-party testing agency that is applicable to each firestopping system configuration for construction, joint opening width and/or penetrating items.

C. Product Certificates: Certificate of conformance signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that products comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.

A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturer’s labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture and the following in accord with 01600 and 01620:

1. Lot number. 2. Shelf life, where applicable. 3. Qualified testing and inspection agency’s classification marking. 4. Mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials for firestopping products to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants or other causes.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping products that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping products manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials.

C. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.


A. Subject to compliance with through-penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) and/or joint systems (XHBN) listed in Volume 2 of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) Somerville, New Jersey (800) 992-1180

2. Other manufacturers listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory – Volume 2.


2.3 MATERIALS

A. General: Use only firestopping products that have been tested for specific fire-resistance-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type or joint opening width and movement capabilities, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.

B. Latex Sealants: Single component latex formulations that upon cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSS Intumescent Sealant. 2. (STI) SpecSeal Series LCI Intumescent Sealant. 3. (STI) SpecSeal Series LC Endothermic Sealant. 4. (STI) SpecSeal Series AS Elastomeric Spray. 5. (STI) SpecSeal Series ES Elastomeric Sealant.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled steel collars lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific outside diameter of penetrating item, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSC Firestop Collars. 2. (STI) SpecSeal Series LCC Firestop Collars.

D. Wall Opening Protective Materials: Intumescent, non-curing pads or inserts for protection of electrical switch and receptacle boxes to reduce horizontal separation to less than 24”, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty Pads. 2. (STI) SpecSeal Series EP PowerShield Insert Pads.

E. Firestop Putty: Intumescent, non-hardening, water resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers or silicone compounds, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty.

F. Firestop Pillows: Re-enterable, non-curing, mineral fiber core encapsulated with an intumescent coating contained in a flame retardant poly bag, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSB Firestop Pillows.

G. Mortar: Portland cement based dry-mix product formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a non-shrinking, water-resistant, homogenous mortar, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSM Firestop Mortar.

H. Silicone Sealants: Moisture curing, single component, silicone elastomeric sealant for horizontal surfaces (pourable or non-sag) or vertical surface (non-sag), the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) Pensil 300 Silicone Sealant. 2. (STI) Pensil 300 SL Self-Leveling Silicone Sealant.

I. Silicone Foam: Multi-component, silicone-based liquid elastomers, that when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam, the following products are acceptable:

1. (STI) Pensil 200 Silicone Foam.


3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examination of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

B. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, scale, laitance, rust, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may inhibit optimum adhesion.

C. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials.

D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FIRESTOPPING INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in accordance with “Performance Criteria” Article and in accordance with the conditions of testing and classification as specified in the published design.

B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of firestopping products.

1. Seal all openings or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal.

2. Consult with appropriate subcontractor prior to installation of through-penetration firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.

3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 4. Apply a suitable bond-breaker to prevent three-sided adhesion in applications

where this condition might occur such as the intersection of a gypsum wallboard/steel stud wall to floor or roof assembly where the joint is backed by a steel ceiling runner or track.

5. Where joint application is exposed to the elements, fire-resistive joint sealant must be approved by manufacturer for use in exterior applications and shall comply with ASTM C-920, “Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants”.


A. Inspections: Contractor shall inspect or, at Architect’s direction as an additional cost, engage a qualified independent inspection agency to inspect through-penetration firestop systems.

B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or firestopping products so they comply with requirements.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.

B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed openings to be free of excess firestopping materials and soiling as work progresses.

END 07270.

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07470 – CEMENTITIOUS REINFORCED PANELS

CEMENTITIOUS REINFORCED PANELS 07470-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base bid:


a. 2 1/2” thick cementitious wood fiber roof deck to infill abandoned roof curb openings where equipment is scheduled to be demolished.

b. Bulb-tees. c. All accessories, cementitious grout, fasteners and related materials required

for a complete installation. d. Provide cleaning of dirt, dust and debris resulting from demolition in

concealed attic spaces.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 05120 – Structural Steel. 4. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 6. Section 07270 – Firestopping. 7. Section 07536 – Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only). 8. Section 07540 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO). 9. Division 15 – Mechanical.

B. INSTALLED BUT SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

1. Structural opening support angles for patching existing roof deck openings indicated to be closed are specified in Section 05500, Metal Fabrications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 Specification Sections.

1. Product data including manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories.

2. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck units, anchorage details, supplementary framing, cut openings, special jointing and other accessories.

3. Moisture test results as specified under Quality Assurance. 4. 12” square sample of each wood fiber deck unit required.

B. Manufacturer’s Catalogs: Specified manufacturers’ catalogs are incorporated by reference to same force and effect as if repeated herein in full.

C. Manufacturer’s Literature: Recommend installation instructions.


A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Regularly engaged in the production of similar cementitious wood fiber decking.


2. Erector: Firm with minimum of 5 years documented experience in successful completion of cementitious wood fiber decking projects similar in size and complexity to this project.

B. Deck units shall be formed and cured in a continuous process using heat for curing.

1. Moisture content of units shall not exceed 12 percent at the time of delivery. 2. Contractor shall test a minimum of 5 percent of the delivered material for moisture

content and submit test results to Architect/Engineer.

C. Deck failing to comply with these moisture requirements shall be replaced upon direction of the Architect/Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. For mechanical deck to structure connections, comply with the recommendations of manufacturer including ICBO Evaluation Report Number 1116 with recommended diaphragm values over steel structural members for screw fasteners and adhesive meeting the requirement of AFG-01.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver materials in original, unopened, protective packaging, with manufacturer’s labels indicating brand name, deck style, size and thickness legible and intact.

B. Store materials in accord with requirements of Section 01620 in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting.

C. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Martin Fireproofing Georgia Inc., Elberton, GA. – Fibroplank Roof Deck.

B. Tectum, Inc., Newark, OH. – Tectum I Roof Deck.

C. United States Gypsum, Chicago, IL – Span-Rock Gypsum Roof Planks.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Precast textured planks composed of chemically processed wood fibers pressure bonded with an inorganic hydraulic cement.

B. Planks shall be formed in a continuous process under heat and pressure.

C. Attachment:

1. New deck for patching shall be mechanically attached at ends to new angles attached to existing structural system per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Provide supplemental bulb-tees. 3. Provide manufacturer’s standard attachment clips, 18 gauge, galvanized. 4. Stainless steel self-tapping screw anchors in quantity and size as recommended

by deck manufacturer. 5. Construction adhesive as recommended by manufacturer and complying with

requirement of AFG-01.

D. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, galvanized.

E. Galvanizing:


1. ASTM A 525, G60. 2. Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in

accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780.

F. Grout: Manufacturer’s standard cementitious grout mixture designed for placement between Cementitious Wood Fiber Deck edges and supporting steel members.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Form deck plank units with rabbeted edges and square ends as indicated to nest into existing bulb-tees:

a. Length: Furnish in lengths for field cutting and to butt ends of prepared poured gypsum deck at structural support.

b. Width: Nominal 32 inches. c. Thickness: Nominal 2 inches.

B. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations that match existing bulb-tee and structural roof system to remain in every respect, capable of spanning existing structural members at ± 32” on center.

1. Planks shall be designed to resist a superimposed gravity load of 35 pounds per square foot plus weight of decking.

2. Maximum allowable deflection shall be limited to l/240. 3. Net uplift loading shall be 15 pounds per square foot.

C. Finish: Provide deck units in standard natural unpainted finish, resistant to moisture and classified as fire resistive construction per Underwriters’ Laboratories Design Number P 253; 1 ½ hour rating.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect supporting members for correct layout and alignment.

B. Verify that surfaces to receive roof deck are free of unevenness, irregularities, debris and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

C. Clean concealed attic spaces of dust, dirt and debris resulting from demolition before commencing with installation of decking materials.

D. Do not proceed with installation until defects are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Erect decking in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions, governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements and industry standards applicable to work.

B. Place planks with edges nested into existing bulb-tee units and square cut ends butted tightly together; centered over structural existing supports or pairs of 2 x 2 x ¼” angles.

1. Stagger end joints of adjacent planks ±8’-0”. 2. End joints shall bear a minimum of 1 1/2” onto steel support structure.

C. Secure deck units to supporting steel members with stainless steel self-tapping screws and adhesive of type, size and spacing as recommended by the plank manufacturer for specified loading.


D. Cut and fit roof deck units and accessories:

1. Around openings through roof:

a. Cut openings in roof deck true to dimensions using saws or drills. b. Make cuts neat, square and trim. c. Reinforce deck openings from 6 to 18 in. in size.

1.) Provide minimum 3 1/2 x 3 1/2 x 1/4 in. steel angles. 2.) Place angles perpendicular to span and extend a minimum of 6

inches each side of opening and bolt to structure.

2. Use full lengths of deck as minimum length for patching. 3. Cut stock lengths of deck material in field for infilling oversized roof-top equipment

openings. 4. Supplement supporting bulb-tee system as necessary to limit spans to within

manufacturer’s recommended lengths. 5. In no case shall spans of deck material exceed manufacturer’s recommendations

and span tables for single span application.

3.3 GROUTING

A. Inspect joints to receive grout.

1. Remove dirt and debris from side joints adjacent to existing bulb-tees. 2. Make adjustments as necessary to assure full depth grouting of units.

B. Mix grout with clean, potable water per manufacturers written instructions and in quantities to be used in 30 minutes or less.

1. Do not add additional dry material to original recommended mix proportions. 2. Do not re-temper grout material that has started to set.

C. Pour mixed grout into void between edges of deck and bulb-tees, completely filling around bulb-tee and screed to a flush joint.

3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. At completion of installation, deck and surrounding area shall be cleaned of dirt and debris and deck surfaces left in a condition ready for installation of work by others.

B. Remove work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Do not use deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured in position.

B. Assure that construction loads do not exceed carrying capacity of deck.

C. Properly protect previously placed materials from damage, especially weld splatter or burns.

END 07470.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07536 – MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING (PATCHING ONLY)

MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING (PATCHING ONLY) 07536-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Built-up roofing, modified bitumen cap sheet and flashing system for patching existing multi-ply built-up roofing.

b. Roof insulation for patching existing multi-ply built-up roofing.

2. Coordinate work with MacDill AFB CE.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide modified bitumen roofing and flashing system from existing roof to wall on roof side of new construction as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide modified bitumen roofing and flashing system from existing roof to wall on roof side of new construction as indicated at the at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01010 – Project Summary. 2. Section 01060 – Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples. 4. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 5. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 6. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 7. Division 15 – Mechanical. 8. Division 16 – Electrical.

1.3 DEFINITIONS Roofing Systems Manufacturer: Any of the manufacturers whose systems are specified under "Acceptable Roofing System Manufacturers", and herein called "manufacturer".

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Cited Standards and specified manufacturer's catalogs, current at the date of bidding documents, unless otherwise specified, are incorporated herein by reference and govern the work.

1. If conflict is discovered between referenced Standards or catalogs and the project specifications, request written clarification from the A/E.

2. Do not proceed with the work until receiving clarification.

B. Standards:


1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM). 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 4. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA). 5. Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA). 6. Federal Specifications (Fed Spec).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accord with the Standard Documents for Construction and Section 01340 of this Project Manual.

B. Endorsement of Roofing Firm: Within 15 days of receiving the Notice of Award, submit the manufacturer's endorsement of the installing firm.

C. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's specifications for roofing system, 2 sets. 2. Roof insulation specifications, 2 sets. 3. HVAC equipment, power exhaust, gravity vent and pipe portal curb specification

and product data. 4. Sheet metal components: Refer to Section 07600, Flashing and Sheet Metal.


A. Per roofing manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Deliver materials requiring fire resistant classifications packaged with labels intact and legible.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Existing Construction:

1. Total thickness of the existing roofing system is ±2 ¾ inches with approximately 1/4 inch per foot slope built into structural system.

a. Existing BUR system consists of the following components from surface to deck:

1.) Granular surfaced modified bitumen cap sheet. 2.) Multi-layer built-up roofing system of roof felts mopped to insulation

system. 3.) 2-layer flat roof insulation estimated at 3 ½ inch thickness.

2. Penetrations include:

a. Various plumbing vents. b. Natural gas piping. c. Curb mounted gravity vents. d. Curb mounted power exhaust fans. e. Curb mounted pipe portals. f. Curb mounted HVAC units (RTU’s). g. Curb mounted make-up air units (MAU’s) h. Equipment support mounted condensers. i. Lightning protection system air terminals.


B. Environmental Conditions:

1. Install roofing and insulation only in dry weather. 2. Comply with manufacturer’s climatic restrictions.

C. Protection:

1. Protect roof membrane, building surfaces, paving, and landscaping from traffic and roofing equipment.

2. Restore or replace all work or materials damaged by the roofing operation. 3. Remove protection materials upon completion of the work. 4. Restrict foot traffic on completed roofing work.

D. Sequencing, Scheduling and Coordination:

1. Sequence and coordinated scheduling of work in accord with Section 01520. 2. Coordinate major categories of work of other trades so that foot traffic of any kind

is prohibited on completed roofing.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Contractor: Two (2) years on patched work only.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Use materials either manufactured by or certified as compatible by one of the specified roofing system manufacturers.

B. Other associated products included in the work such as prefabricated and field fabricated flashings and other related components shall be as recommended and certified as compatible by the specified roofing manufacturers.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

CODE BRAND NAME MANUFACTURER

A. GAF Ruberoid GAF Building Materials Corp., Wayne, NJ

B. CER Flintlastic Certainteed Com.Roofing, VForge,PA

C. MAN DynaLastic 250 Johns Manville Corp., Denver, Co

D. SIP Siplast Siplast, Irving, TX

E. FIR Firestone Firestone Building Products, Carmel, IN

2.3 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS

A. Torch application NOT permitted by CDB.

B. The following system specifications are for use with non-nailable, insulated deck indicated:

CODE SPEC. NO BOTTOM PLY 2ND PLY CAP SHEET FLASHING

1. GAF I-2-1-MGP GAFGLAS IV GAFGLAS IV Rubr. Mop+ Flashing 2. CER GMS-C-B3 Glasbase Flintglas IV GMS Prem. GMS 3. MAN 3PID Glas-Ply IV Glas-Ply IV Dynalas.250 DynaFlex 4. SIP Parad.20/30I Parad. 20HT -0- Parad. 30 Parafor LT 5. FIR I-FF-M Type IV F/G Type IV F/G SBS Prem. SBS Prem.


2.4 ROOF INSULATION PATCHING

A. The Contractor shall select a brand acceptable to the roofing manufacturer.

B. TYPE ASTM FED SPEC. "R"/INCH

1. 1/2" H.D. Fiberboard C208 LLL-1-535B 1.39@1/2" 2. Polyisocyanurate C1289 HH-I-1972 5.56 (Aged)

2.5 INSULATION FILLER AND ATTACHMENT:

A. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints and filling voids.

B. Hot Mopping Insulation Attachment: Asphalt, ASTM D312, Type III or Type IV installed to provide system equivalent to one tested and approved for I-120 uplift rating.

2.6 ASPHALT

A. Interply and Flood Coat: ASTM D312.

1. Type II or Type III for slopes up to 1". 2. Type III for slopes 1" to 3".

B. Flashings:

1. ASTM D312, Type III or Type IV. 2. ASTM 4568, Cold applied flashing cement.

C. Concrete primer: As recommended by the roofing manufacturer.

D. Plastic Cement: ASTM 4586, Type II, as recommended by the roofing manufacturer.

2.7 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Cants:

1. Heavy duty wood fiber, ASTM C-208-C, Federal Specification LLL-1-535-B Class C, UL listed and approved for FM Class 1 construction; 1-1/2" x 4", 45 face at all walls as indicated.

2. Solid treated wood dimension lumber as specified in Section 06100; 1-1/2” x 4”, 45 face at equipment curbs and roof control joints as indicated.

B. Termination Bars: Required on all concrete wall terminations. (Attach 6" o.c.)

1. 1/8" x 1-1/4" aluminum bar with a 45 sealant pocket at all other locations. 2. 1/8" x 1" aluminum bar under counterflashing or other restricted spaces.

C. Acrylic Patching Cement: Provide trowel grade underlayment patching compound product of one of the following acceptable manufacturers as necessary to patch/level low areas in existing concrete roof deck.

1. Thoro System Products; Thoro Underlayment. 2. Master Builders, Inc.; Underlayment 110. 3. Dayton Superior Corp.; LevelLayer II.

D. Vapor Retarder: After priming mop down one (1) layer of roofing system manufacturer’s glass fiber base sheet to act as temporary roof and to provide a vapor barrier.


2.8 RELATED ROOFING MATERIALS

A. Roof Curbs and Equipment Supports:

1. Provide manufactured insulated roof curbs and equipment supports as designed for flange mounting on roof deck surface for new mechanical equipment.

a. Construction shall be minimum .064” aluminum face sheet with 1 1/2”, 3 pound density insulation.

b. The top edge of the curb shall have an integral pressure treated wood nailer at perimeter of top edge for nailing roofing base sheets.

c. The curbs and supports shall be constructed to seismically contain the rooftop equipment.

1.) Furnish with anchorage preapproval “R” from OSHPD in the state of California.

2.) Approval shall attest to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings.

2. Contractor shall install field fabricated cant strips as specified at all curbs and supports.

a. Taper cants where applicable to provide 4” exposed face. b. Position to allow for a smooth transition of roofing membrane from horizontal

to vertical plane and as acceptable to roofing manufacturer.

3. Height of curb shall be a minimum of 18” above existing roof deck for a minimum net height of 8” above top edge of cant strip.

B. Plumbing Vent and Pipe Flashing:

1. Provide spun aluminum flashing base with 14” minimum O.D. flashing flange for anchorage to substrate as approved by roof system manufacturer.

a. The pipe flashing base shall have an 8” diameter center hole flashing collar, 4” high.

b. The flashing flange shall extend from the collar a minimum of 4” horizontally onto roofing.

2. Provide pre-molded EPDM synthetic rubber step boot with adjustable stainless-steel clamp.

a. Boot shall be furnished in appropriate size to tightly fit over vent piping and seal by tightening stainless steel clamp.

b. Bottom edge of boot shall seal into receptor around top edge of elevated base.

2.9 METAL FLASHINGS

A. Refer to Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal for sheet metal fabrications and counter flashings.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Remove existing roofing only in dry weather.

B. Install new roofing only in dry weather.


C. Comply with the manufacturer's climatic restrictions.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Examine all surfaces for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture, unevenness, or other conditions that could prevent the best quality installation and longevity of the roofing, flashing, and accessory components.

B. Notify the Contracting Officer or designated representative of all deficiencies.

C. Do not proceed with the work until all deficiencies have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Install treated wood blocking and cant strips specified in Section 06100.

1. Install as indicated and coordinate with thickness of new insulation. 2. Wood blocking and cant strip attachment to existing concrete substrates shall be

with sleeve anchors and concrete screw anchors of size and spacing indicated on drawing details.

3. Install heavy-duty fiber board cant strips per manufacturers recommendations and written instructions.

B. Ensure that all surfaces are clean and dry before starting and during performance of work.

C. Verify that all work of subcontractors which penetrates the roof deck or requires men and equipment to traverse the roof deck has been completed before proceeding with roofing system installation.

3.4 ROOFING SYSTEM AREA PATCHING

A. Prime existing roof deck including all patched areas and mop down one (1) base layer of roofing system manufacturer’s fiberglass reinforced base sheet.

1. Mop at rates and temperature as recommended by roofing system manufacturer to attain adhesion that will produce the equivalent of an I-90 wind uplift rating.

2. Install a continuous “glaze coat” of asphalt free of pinholes, skips or voids over top of base sheet.

3. Base sheet shall act as a temporary roof and a vapor barrier for the new system.

B. Install the roof insulation with end joints staggered at mid-point in each layer.

1. Offset all joints between layers a minimum of 6 inches. 2. Hot Asphalt Attached Insulation directly to surface of previously installed base

sheet.

a. Solid mop with a minimum of 23 pounds per 100 square feet. b. Increase quantities as recommended by roofing manufacturer to attain the

equivalent of an I-90 wind uplift rating. c. Kettle temperature shall not exceed 500 degrees F. maximum.

3. Attach subsequent layers with hot asphalt.

C. Asphalt temperature at the point of embedding fiberglass ply sheets and modified bitumen membranes shall be at equiviscous temperature (EVT) but no less than 400 F.


D. Asphalt to be applied no more than 5 seconds ahead of modified bitumen membrane installation.

E. Install all roofing and flashing systems and all accessory components in accord with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

F. Install the BOTTOM PLY, 2ND PLY in shingle fashion and install CAP SHEET during the same day.

G. Apply cap sheet asphalt so that a small amount is visible the full length of each lap.

H. Install the BOTTOM PLY, 2ND PLY and CAP SHEET all in the same day. (NO PHASING OF ROOF PLY INSTALLATION WILL BE ALLOWED.)

I. Attach termination bars with fasteners 6" maximum on center.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF RELATED ROOFING MATERIALS

A. Install new roof curbs and equipment supports with anchorage into metal roof deck.

1. Use anchorage system approved by the curb and support manufacturer. 2. Align and anchor field fabricated cant strips so that bottom edge is even with base

ply and extend roof flashing plies vertically to top of treated wood nailer per roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions.

3. Nail off flashings to treated wood nailer. 4. Install new or reinstall equipment, power exhaust fans, gravity vent and pipe portal

terminations complete with counter flashings.

B. Install new plumbing vent and pipe flashings where indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions and with roofing manufacturer’s written instructions for flashing.

1. Extend existing plumbing vent piping with neoprene couplers and schedule 40 PVC piping to a minimum height of 12” above surface of new roof cap sheet.

2. Set flange of flashing base on solid substrate over top of base ply, anchor securely and strip flash into roofing with subsequent ply and cap sheet.

3. Install EPDM synthetic rubber step boot over plumbing vent or plumbing vent extension and seat into receptor of elevated aluminum base.

4. Install stainless steel clamping ring and tighten around piping.

C. Install all other roof related items, accessories, sheet metal counter flashings and miscellaneous items required to complete the roof system.

3.6 ADJUST, CLEAN AND PROTECT

A. Carefully inspect all completed work and correct all defects.

B. Remove from the job site and legally dispose of all debris.

C. Clean up bitumen and mastic spills and spattering.

D. Remove all surplus materials, tools, and equipment.

E. Prevent storage of materials and equipment on the completed roof.

F. Protect completed work from damage by other trades and make repairs or replace damaged work at no additional cost to AAFES or MacDill AFB.

END 07536.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07540 – THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING (TPO)

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING (TPO) 07540-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Option Proposals 1 & 2:


a. Single-ply, fully adhered TPO membrane roofing, flashing system as indicated for new entry portal roofs indicated below.


1. Subject to Option Proposal requirements Contractor provide new TPO roofing and flashing system for new entry portal roof surfaces as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


1. Subject to requirements herein Contractor provide new TPO roofing and flashing system for new entry portal roof surfaces as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

D. Install new construction including, but not limited to:

1. Mechanically fastened underlayment layer directly over new steel roof deck. 2. Adhered glass mat-face iso overlay board. 3. Fully adhered TPO membrane system with welded joints at new roof areas. 4. Roof edge flashings. 5. Termination bars and sealant. 6. Strip flashings and seam sealant. 7. Miscellaneous accessory items necessary to complete the weather tight, FM

recognized, warranted roofing system indicated in full compliance with Miami Dade County requirements and specified building codes for resistance to uplift.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Section 01010 – Summary of Work. 2. Section 01015 – Option Proposals. 3. Section 01026 – Unit Prices. 4. Section 01045 – Cutting & Patching. 5. Section 01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. 6. Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls. 7. Section 01600 – Material & Equipment. 8. Section 01620 – Storage & Protection. 9. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 10. Section 05310 – Steel Deck. 11. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 12. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 13. Section 07240 – Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB. 14. Section 07536 – Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only). 15. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal.


B. Installed but specified elsewhere:

1. Wood blocking and fasteners at all locations indicated is specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

2. Base flashing of new construction into existing multi-ply modified bitumen roofing system shall be coordinated with this work and is specified in Section 07536, Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only).

3. Shop fabricated sheet metal items related to new roof are specified in Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet Metal.

4. Sealants used for sealing joints in sheet metal and other locations not furnished by the roofing system manufacturer are specified in Section 07920, Building & Paving Joint Sealers.


A. Roofing Subcontractor Qualifications:

1. The installing subcontractor shall be approved or franchised by the roofing system manufacturer.

2. The job foreman shall be trained by the manufacturer in the installation of the specified system.

B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Any of the manufacturers whose systems are specified under "Acceptable Roofing System Manufacturers" in this Section shall be deemed as qualified Roofing System Manufacturers under this Contract subject to strict compliance with the Contract Documents.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Cited Standards and specified manufacturers' catalogs, current at the date of bidding documents, unless otherwise specified, are incorporated herein by reference and govern the work.

1. If conflict is discovered between referenced Standards or catalogs and the project specifications, request written clarification from the A/E.

2. Do not proceed with the work until receiving clarification.

B. Standards:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Cool Roof Ratings Council. 3. EPA – Energy Star Roof Products. 4. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM). 5. Federal Specifications (FS). 6. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (NRCA). 7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accord with Section 01340.

B. Additional submittals directly related to work by Contractor NOT directly specified in this Section shall be coordinated with roofing system and submitted as specified under the requirements in those respective Sections.

C. Endorsement of Roofing Firm: Contractor shall, within l5 days of receiving the Notice of Award, submit the manufacturer's endorsement of the installing firm.


D. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings to the manufacturer for review and comment.

a. Indicate mechanical fastener pattern for underlayment to new steel roof deck, including any additional requirements at perimeter in order to meet specified uplift requirements.

b. Confirm adhesive requirements for adhering overlay board. c. Indicate adhesive requirements for roofing membrane, flashings and other

components to meet specified uplift resistance.

2. Submit only manufacturer approved shop drawings for review. 3. Minimum Scale for Roof Plan: 1/8" = 1' 0". 4. Minimum Scale for Details: 1 1/2" = 1' 0. 5. Submit the following:

a. Roof plans including mechanical fastener pattern for roof board underlayment and requirements for vapor retarder membrane and include:

1.) Roof insulation plans with adhesion requirements.

b. Details illustrating installation and fastenings of the following:

1.) Perimeter membrane termination. 2.) Base flashing and membrane termination including counter flashings. 3.) Strip flashings and seam sealant.

E. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturers data, specifications and cut sheets for all major roof components and accessory items specified herein including:

a. Underlayment specifications. b. Glass mat-face iso overlay board. c. Manufacturer's specifications for roofing system. d. Overlay board adhesive specifications. e. Membrane adhesive. f. Termination bars and fasteners.

F. Samples:

1. Underlayment, 8” x 10”, 2 pieces. 2. Underlayment fasteners, 2 of each type. 3. Glass mat-faced polyisocyanurate cover board, 8” x 10”, 2 pieces. 4. TPO membrane, 4" x 6", 3 pieces. 5. Sheet Metal: Refer to Section 07600.


A. Uplift Criteria: The specified roofing assembly must have been successfully tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the design uplift pressures calculated according to American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE 7) for components and cladding and after multiplying the results with a safety factor of 1.25 or greater in accord with Miami Dade County requirements.

B. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.



A. Per roofing manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Deliver materials requiring fire resistant classifications packaged with labels intact and legible.

1.8 JOB CONDITIONS

A. New Construction:

1. New roof structure consists of cold-formed metal C-S/J members spaced as indicated and supported on structural steel framing or cold formed metal stud system.

2. No slope will be built into the structure. 3. New roof deck consists 1 ½ inch primed steel roof deck.

B. Environmental Conditions:

1. Install roofing and insulation only in dry weather. 2. Comply with manufacturer's climatic restrictions.

C. Protection:

1. Contractor shall provide substantial water-tight tie-offs at the end of each work day to ensure that storm water cannot infiltrate into existing occupied building.

2. Protect roof membrane, building surfaces, paving and landscaping from traffic and roofing equipment.

3. Restore or replace all work or materials damaged by the roofing operation. 4. Remove protection materials upon completion of work. 5. Avoid traffic on completed roofing work.

D. Sequencing, Scheduling and Coordination:

1. In accord with Section 01320, Construction Progress Schedule. 2. Comply with all regulations imposed by MacDill AFB BCE, the AAFES Contracting

Officer, AAFES General Manager and AAFES Store Manager at the Project site.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer: Execute Roofing System Manufacturer's Total System Warranty covering both labor and material with no dollar limitation.

1. Warranty shall cover all roofing components including insulation attachment. 2. Maximum wind speed coverage shall be peak gusts of 90 mph measured at 10

meters above ground level. 3. Warranty shall be from membrane manufacturer.

a. No dual source warranties will be accepted b. Pro-rated system warranties will not be accepted.

4. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years.


2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide all adhesives, sealants, pre-molded and field fabricated flashings, fasteners, and other related components for the entire roofing system as manufactured or recommended by the selected manufacturer.

B. Use only materials and components manufactured or recommended by the selected manufacturer throughout the project.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE ROOFING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

CODE BRAND NAME MANUFACTURER

A. CAR Carlisle Carlisle SynTec Systems, Carlisle, PA

B. FIR Firestone Firestone Bldg. Products Co., Carmel, IN

C. VER Versico Versico Inc., Akron, OH

2.3 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS

A. Fully Adhered .060 thick TPO (Thermoplastic Polyolefin) membrane as follows:

1. CAR – Sure-Weld TPO 2. FIR – UltraPly TPO 3. VER – VersiWeld.

B. Minimum membrane thickness over reinforcing scrim shall be nominal .015” thick (15 mil).

C. Membrane and related flashing components shall be white in color.

2.4 UNDERLAYMENT LAYER

A. Provide 1” water resistant, fire retardant, panels designed for exterior installation as a thermal barrier substrate underlayment for adhesion of subsequent roof insulation equal to Georgia Pacific Corporation, “Dens-Deck/Dens-Deck Prime”.

1. Maximum width: 4’. 2. Maximum length: 8’.

B. Provide screw-type mechanical fasteners with plates as recommended by the underlayment and the roofing system manufacturer for application indicated.

2.5 COVER BOARD

A. Select a brand of high-density, closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core laminated to coated glass fiber mat facer acceptable to the roofing system manufacturer as follows:

TYPE ASTM R-VALUE

1. Cover Board:

a. ½” Glass Mat-Faced ISO C1289-11 2.50 @ ½” (LTTR)


2.6 COVERBOARD ATTACHMENT

A. Coverboard attachment shall be by two components, heated, insulation type adhesive as manufactured or approved by the roofing system manufacturer with the following properties:

1. 150% elongation. 2. No more than 25% MDI content.

B. Heated adhesive shall be designed to be applied using one of the following methods as approved by roofing system manufacturer:

1. Full coverage spray application. 2. High pressure extrusion process at a minimum pressure of 500 psi with

attachment rows spaced at a maximum of 4” on center.

C. No cold applied products or asphalt will be allowed.

D. Adhesive shall be manufactured or approved by the roofing system manufacturer and certified by roof system manufacturer to provide specified uplift requirements when used for adhesion of multiple layers of insulation and related roofing materials.

2.7 AUXILIARY INSULATION AND SUBSTRATE MATERIALS

A. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by underlayment and coverboard manufacturers for bonding edge joints and filling voids.

B. Miscellaneous Sealants: Cut-edge sealant, water cut-off mastic, universal single-ply sealant and pourable sealer as recommended and approved by the roofing system manufacturer for various applications.

C. TPO Membrane Cleaner: Use to prepare membrane that has been exposed to the elements prior to hear welding or to remove dirt from membrane surfaces.

D. Flashings: .060 TPO flashing and edge fasteners as recommended and approved by the roofing system manufacturer.

E. Membrane Termination Bars:

1. 1/8” x 1 ¼” aluminum bar with a 45° sealant pocket at all locations indicated and where required by roofing system manufacturer to terminate membrane.

2. Fasten all termination bars to solid substrate with appropriate fasteners at spacing not to exceed 6” centers.

3. EXECUTION


A. Install roofing only in dry weather.

B. Comply with manufacturer's climatic restrictions.

1. Provide 48 hour advanced notifications to AAFES General Manager and AAFES Store Manager prior to disconnecting any existing exhaust fans, make-up air and supply air units or other equipment necessary to accomplish routine daily operations.


2. Cooperate with AAFES General Manager and AAFES Store Manager to make arrangements for suitable shutdown times for equipment and accessories and coordinate work schedule accordingly to avoid unnecessary down time for AAFES operations.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Examine all surfaces and components for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture, unevenness or other conditions that could prevent the best quality and longevity of roofing, flashing and accessory components.

1. Inspect steel roof deck to determine damaged or structurally impaired areas that may need to be replaced and notify Contracting Officer and designated representative in writing immediately upon discovery of such conditions.

a. Identify any low areas or uneven deck conditions that could inhibit the flow of water to roof edge spill-out scuppers.

b. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative of all deficiencies.

2. Verify that other related construction including wood blocking, underlayment and overly components are securely installed to resist specified wind uplift ratings and per prefabricated sheet metal component manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Do not proceed with the work until all deficiencies have been corrected to the satisfaction of the roof system manufacturer and the Contracting Officer.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that all surfaces are clean and dry before starting and during performance of work.

B. Verify that all other work of subcontractors that requires men and equipment to traverse the roof deck has been completed before proceeding with roofing system installation.

3.4 SUBSTRATE UNDERLAYMENT AND OVERLAY BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install thermal barrier substrate underlayment per manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Ends and sides of adjacent sheets shall butt tightly together to provide a continuous solid and secure substrate for adhesive application of subsequent layers of insulation.

2. Space mechanical fasteners at ends, sides and in the field of the sheet per roofing system manufacturer’s recommendations for specified uplift rating.

B. Install the overlay board with end joints staggered at midpoint and joints butted tightly together with no joints or gaps greater that ¼ inch.

1. Position sheets to accommodate irregularities substrate to avoid bucking water. 2. Adhesive attach overlay board directly to surface of previously installed thermal

barrier substrate underlayment.

3.5 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND ATTACHMENT

A. Install the roofing and flashing system and all accessory items in accord with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Position membrane over manufacturer approved substrate by folding sheet back lengthwise so half the underside of the membrane is exposed.


C. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions, to the exposed underside of the membrane and the corresponding substrate area.

1. Do not apply bonding adhesive along the splice edge of the membrane to be hot air welded over the adjoining sheet.

2. Allow the adhesive to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch.

3. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding wrinkles. 4. Brush down the bonded section of the membrane sheet immediately after rolling

the membrane into the adhesive with a soft bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact.

5. Fold back un-bonded half of the sheet lengthwise and repeat the bonding procedures.

D. Position adjoining sheets to allow a minimum overlap of 2” and hot air weld the membrane sheets as set forth below and in accordance with the manufacturer’s hot air welding procedures.

1. Pull the un-bonded adjoining membrane back along the welded splice so the entire underside of the membrane is exposed one the hot air weld has been completed.

2. Apply adhesive to the exposed underside of the membrane sheet and substrate and allow to dry until tacky as specified above.

3. Roll the membrane onto the substrate and brush down the bonded section with a bristle broom following the procedures specified above.

E. Continue to install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges a minimum of 2” and complete the bonding procedures set forth above.

3.6 MEMBRANE SPLICING/NOT AIR WELDING PROCEDURES

A. Hot air weld membrane using an automatic hot air welding machine in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s specifications.

1. At all splice intersections, toll the seam with a silicone roller to ensure a continuous hot air welded seam.

2. All splice intersections shall be overlaid with non-reinforced flashing.

B. Probe all seams after the hot air weld have thoroughly cooled (approximately 30-minutes) and repair all seam deficiencies immediately after they are discovered.

C. Apply cut edge sealant on all cut edges of reinforced membrane where scrim reinforcement is exposed after seam probing is complete.

3.7 FLASHING

A. Flash roof edges and other parts of the roof using reinforced membrane flashings.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s standard flashing procedures for all wall flashing including manufactured sheet metal fascia system.


A. The Contracting Officer or designated representative will provide on-site observation during installation.


B. The roofing manufacturer will provide on-site observation and instruction as the manufacturer deems necessary to effect issuance of Total System Warranty.


A. Carefully inspect all completed work and correct all defects.

B. Remove from job site and legally dispose of rubbish and debris.

C. Remove tools, equipment and construction aids.

D. Prevent storage of material or equipment on the completed roof.

E. Prior to manufacturer’s inspection for warranty, the Contractor shall perform a pre-inspection to review all work and to verify that all flashing has been properly placed and sealant application has been completed.

F. Contractor shall accompany the manufacturer's Technical Inspector during inspection and assist with equipment and workmen if necessary to provide access to the roof.

G. Correct all defects noted during inspection.

END 07540.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07600 – FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Prefinished shop fabricated counter flashings. b. Prefinished shop fabricated window head flashings. c. Miscellaneous sheet metal items and accessories related to exterior closure.


1. Subject to requirements Contractor provide all flashing and sheet metal as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.

a. Prefinished manufactured fascia system. b. Prefinished manufactured spill-out scuppers. c. Prefinished shop fabricated counter flashings. d. Prefinished shop fabricated window head flashings. e. Miscellaneous sheet metal items and accessories related to exterior closure.


1. Subject to requirements Contractor provide all flashing and sheet metal as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

a. Prefinished manufactured fascia system. b. Prefinished manufactured spill-out scuppers. c. Prefinished shop fabricated counter flashings. d. Prefinished shop fabricated window head flashings. e. Miscellaneous sheet metal items and accessories related to exterior closure.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 1. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 07536 – Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only). 4. Section 07540 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO). 5. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers.

B. Installation of all sheet metal items related to membrane roofing shall be coordinated with work performed under Section 07536 – Modified Bitumen Roofing (Patching Only) and Section 07540 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO).

C. Sheet metal flashing between inboard side of fixed metal awning and wall panel system is specified and shall be furnished under work of Section 10711, Fixed Sunshades & Canopies.



A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Codes, Regulations and Recommendations:

1. Comply with pertinent codes and regulations. 2. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in current edition of

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).

C. Substitution of shop fabricated sheet metal items will not be allowed where manufactured items are specifically called for under this Section.

D. Manufacturer’s systems and anchorage furnished under this Section shall be rated and warranted to resist design uplift pressures without failure calculated according to American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE 7) for components and cladding and after multiplying the results with a safety factor of 1.25 or greater and shall include corresponding current Miami Dade County Notice of Acceptance.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01340 and in coordination with Sections 07536 and 08100.

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the

specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, that after review by the

Contracting Officer or designated representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.

B. Detailed Shop drawings illustrating the following:

1. Gauge and finish of stock material. 2. Fabrication techniques. 3. Installation drawings including techniques and anchorage. 4. Interface of work of this Section with work of adjacent trades.

a. Coordinate shop drawings with those of other manufactured items related to this work to illustrate interrelationship between components.

b. Show all blocking and substrates to which sheet metal components will be attached.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging with all labels intact and legible.

B. Store materials on raised platforms and protect with coverings at outdoor locations and in a manner to prevent damage, in a secure place, out of the way of construction operations.

C. Materials furnished under this Section that may be installed by other trades shall be delivered to the site in time to avoid delays to construction progress.

D. Handle all material in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Contractor:

1. Two-year warranty on all sheet metal items specified herein. 2. Provide written warranty, on Contractor’s letterhead, to Contracting Officer or

designated representative at time of Project Close-out in accord with Section 01770.

B. Manufacturer: Provide manufacturer’s standard 20-year performance warranty against blow-off.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metal:

1. Aluminum:

a. ASTM B209-76, alloy 3003, temper H14. b. Minimum thickness subject to performance requirements of AAMA 1402-86:

1.) Cleats: .040”. 2.) Counter flashing: .040”. 3.) Door head drip flashing: .040”. 4.) Miscellaneous sheet metal items not specifically designated: .032”.

B. Aluminum Finish:

1. Exposed metal finish shall be high performance organic coating as follows:

a. AA-C12C42R1X chemical finish cleaned with inhibited chemicals or acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating.

b. Prepare, pretreat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Fluoropolymer 2-coat coating system, thermocured, composed of specially formulated primer and fluoroplymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.

2. Items not directly exposed to view such as cleats, reglets and anchor clips may be fabricated from mill finish aluminum or manufacturers standard sheet metal material.

C. Fasteners:

1. Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.

2. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Sealant: Type I as specified in Section 07920.

B. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

C. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, cleats, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work.


1. Accessories shall match or be compatible with material being installed. 2. Materials shall be non-corrosive. 3. Size and gage as required for specified performance.

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Prefabricate system in manufacturer’s plant to greatest extent possible.

B. Miter and weld joints in tops and faces of end caps and weld joint in top and inside corner.

1. Continuously weld all joints. 2. Perform welding prior to finishing.

C. Pop rivets, interlocking discontinuities and other fasteners exposed in finish work are unacceptable.

2.4 SHOP FABRICATED UNITS

A. General Metal Fabrication:

1. Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible.

a. Fabricate for waterproof and weather resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of work.

b. Form work to fit substrates. c. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil canning, buckling, and

tool marks; true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Comply with drawing details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices.

3. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for forming material.

B. Seams:

1. Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. 2. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 3. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for strength where

required.

C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1-inch deep, filled with mastic sealant concealed within joints.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards.

E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer or fabricator.


2.5 ALUMINUM FASCIA SYSTEMS

A. Use only the specified products of the following manufacturers for stock items indicated:

MANUFACTURER FASCIA PRODUCT

1. Metal-Era, Inc., Anchor-Tite Standard Fascia 1600 Airport Road Waukesha, WI 53188

(800) 558-2162

2. Petersen Aluminum Pac-Tite WT Fascia BUM 1005 Tonne Road Elk Grove Village, IL 60007 (800) 722-2523

3. OMG Edge Systems TerminEdge EX MB Fascia 153 Bowles Road Agawam, MA 01001 (800) 633-3800

B. Characteristics:

1. Material: Smooth surfaced formed aluminum alloy in thickness as determined by manufacturer to comply with indicated performance but not less than .050 inch.

2. Roll-Forming: Front and back drip legs shall be factory roll-formed. 3. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating system. 4. Face Height: 6 3/4 inch minimum as indicated. 5. Lengths: 12’-0” minimum or as long as practical to minimize joints. 6. Joints: Concealed splice plates in accordance with manufacturer’s product data.

C. Accessories:

1. Splice Plates: Minimum .032 inch thick aluminum sheet, 6 inch minimum length, continuous with front and rear legs and with extruded butyl seal for concealed installation in finish to match fascia.

2. Anchor Plate: Galvanized steel of manufacturer’s FM approved standard design. 3. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be as provided or recommended by fascia system

manufacturer. 4. Prefabricated sections: Factory assembled, continuously welded, mitered corners

and continuously welded transitions shall match fascias in design and finish. 5. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally

free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

2.6 DRIP FLASHINGS

A. Aluminum Window and Door Head Drip Flashings:

1. Provide sheet metal drip flashing at all aluminum curtain wall windows, entry doors, automatic entry doors and dissimilar construction.

a. Form drip flashing with horizontal leg to fit below wall framing prior to installation of window and shim blocking as indicated.

1.) A vertical flange shall be provided wherever possible to extend a minimum of 1 ¼” up the wall and be anchored to wall construction.

2.) Horizontal flange shall be bent down to form a sealant pocket as indicated and finished with a ½” minimum hemmed drip.


b. Coordinate fabrication with requirements of Sections 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames, 08410 – Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts and 08460 – Automatic Entrance Doors.

B. Form flashings in 10-foot lengths except where shorter pieces are required and finish in clear anodized aluminum to match aluminum frames.

C. Provide backer rod and sealant per requirements of Section 07920.

2.7 COUNTER FLASHINGS

A. 2-Piece Counter Flashings:

1. Provide two-piece sheet metal counter flashings as indicated at all base flashing conditions where membrane roofing is flashed vertical wall.

a. Angle exposed end of horizontal flange down and out ¾ inch at 45 degrees and double back hem ¾ inch to form a reglet to receive flange of lower two-piece counter flashing.

b. Form second piece cover leg of counter flashing as indicated to extend down over base flashing.

1.) Break and fold over top edge of lower component ¾ inch at 45 degrees to insert into double back hem of reglet.

2.) Pop-rivet two-piece reglet and lower component flange together to form a solid unit capable of future removal by drilling out rivets.

3.) Provide break in face of lower component to ensure compression against base flashing and fold bottom edge of vertical flange out ½ inch at a 45-degree angle to form a hemmed drip.

c. Face height of counter flashing shall cover built-up roofing base flashing a minimum of 4 inches plus the drip.

2. Form counter flashings in 10-foot lengths except where shorter pieces are required and provide shop fabricated closures at ends of counter flashing runs to return to face of wall.

3. Provide sealant per requirements of Section 07920.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.

1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. 2. Do not proceed with flashing or sheet metal work until unsatisfactory conditions

are corrected.

B. Verify that sawcut reglet, blocking and sheathing to receive sheet metal items are installed properly and free of excess moisture, debris or defects.

C. Coordinate items to be shop fabricated with related items to ensure dimensional compatibility and clearances.

3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION

A. Before ordering sheet metal, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered by making and recording all necessary field measurements.


B. Determine lengths of runs and other required dimensions to avoid delays in production and installation.

C. Ensure that all substrates are properly prepared, free of distortions that could affect finished sheet metal appearance and that all ice and water dam membrane installations are complete before commencing with flashing and sheet metal work.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP

A. Screws, bolts and similar fastenings required for proper installation and anchorage of work shall be type best suited for application, intended purpose and shall be non-corrosive.

B. Keep work straight during erection.

1. Free from buckles, dents, twists, warps, waves or unfinished edges. 2. Without fastening stresses or distortions. 3. Reinforce all edges and anchoring points if required to maintain alignment.

C. Patching of work will not be permitted and if damage occurs, entire piece shall be removed and replaced with new material.

D. Do not allow ferrous and non-ferrous metals to come into contact with each other.

1. Aluminum in direct contact with concrete, steel or other dissimilar metals shall receive a protective coating of bituminous paint.

2. Provide minimum of 7.5 mil. Thickness on each contact surface.

3.4 SEAMING

A. Field joints in aluminum .040-inch and thinner shall be made mechanically.

B. All seams and joints shall be lapped in direction of water flow.

3.5 GENERAL FLASHING

A. Sheet metal flashings indicated shall be provided as required to produce a watertight installation.

B. Joints shall be lapped, riveted, welded, locked or sealed as conditions warrant.

C. Provide all accessories as required for proper installation.

3.6 PREFABRICATED FASCIA INSTALLATION

A. Install fascia and fascia systems in accord with manufacturer’s product data and approved shop drawings.

B. Install anchor plates with concealed fasteners at spacing as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install concealed splice plates at fascia intersections.

D. Snap fascia covers into place over anchor plates and splice plates, with minimum ¼ inch wide joints over splice plate intersections.

E. Set fascia cover over splice plates with extruded butyl tape, ½ inch from intersection edges.


F. Provide weather-tight fit, allowing for expansion and contraction.

3.7 WINDOW AND DOOR HEAD DRIP FLASHING

A. Coordinate installation of window and door head drip flashing with installation of units, soffit panels and metal wall panel system work.

B. Sheet metal head flashings shall be installed prior to installation of window and door frames with horizontal flange fastened securely to window header.

C. Cut flashing to exact length of head members.

1. Where head member length is greater than flashing length provide sufficient overlap of aluminum flashing to prevent water infiltration.

2. Align joints symmetrically about centerline of head frame and minimize number of splices.

D. Install sealant components as specified in Section 07920 after installation of window frames keeping flashing straight and in proper alignment with head frames.

3.8 COUNTER FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashings in coordination with roofing requirements.

B. Provide shop formed inside and outside corners and concealed splice plates at all joints.

C. Install metal receptor portion of two-piece counter flashings at locations and to profile indicated on drawings.

1. Where counter flashing terminates in reglet joint in wall, horizontal bent flange shall extend into sawcut joint a minimum of 1 ½ -inch.

a. Complete installation in joint by inserting lead wedges for tight, solid fit. b. Fill joint with continuous backer rod and sealant of color to match adjacent

concrete.

2. Securely anchor receptor by nailing where counter flashing terminates on equipment curb as indicated.

D. Insert vertical face flanges of two-piece counter flashings into receptor hems and pop rivet at 8-inch centers.

1. Counter flashing shall provide spring action against base flashing when installation is complete.

2. Seal pop rivet holes with sealant as specified in Section 07920.

3.9 ADJUST & CLEANING

A. Examine completed work for damage and conformance with contract documents.

B. Remove damaged pieces and replace with new, materials meeting requirements of the specification.

C. Completed work shall be cleaned as in accordance with sheet metal manufacturer's instructions and left free of stains, discoloration and sharp edges.

D. Remove all scrap and debris and dispose of off site and leave all work areas clean.

END 07600.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07920 – BUILDING & PAVING JOINT SEALERS

BUILDING & PAVING JOINT SEALERS 07920-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All sealing and caulking of building joints. b. All sealing of paving joints. c. All joint fillers and accessories indicated and herein specified.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all building and paving joint sealers as required at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all building and paving joint sealers as required at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all building and paving joint sealers as required for additional site paving between the original 1972 Commissary Building and the original 1978 Exchange Building in the east-west direction and from the intersection of Royal Tern Avenue and Blackbird Street to the south side of base bid work at the new Furniture Receiving and the south side of the existing 1983/1988 Pharmacy Addition.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all building and paving joint sealers as required for new patched floor slab areas for under slab sanitary sewer piping in the new Women’s Public Toilet, Optometry/Optical, south Food Concept Preparations areas, and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms behind the new Food Court.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. All Sections of the Specifications.


A. Qualifications of installers: Employ only experienced craftsmen, skilled in the installation of specified products.

B. Contractor shall select one manufacturer for all exposed sealants and caulking.

1. Coordinate purchase of sealants and caulking with individual subcontractors so that each trade will furnish compatible products of the selected manufacturer.

2. Coordinate installation with individual subcontractors so that methods and colors for all exposed sealants and caulking will match.


C. Color(s) will be selected by Architect from standard range of colors available from manufacturer selected by Contractor.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Industry standards as set forth by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

B. Manufacturer's Catalogs: The acceptable manufacturer's catalogs, current at date of bidding documents, are incorporated by reference to the same force and effect as if repeated herein at length.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340 and applicable technical Sections.

B. Product data:

1. Materials description. 2. Manufacturer's current printed installation instructions for each product.

C. Samples: Each compound and joint filler for color selection.


A. Deliver all products in manufacturer's original containers, with seals unbroken, labels, product and manufacturer's names intact and legible.

B. Store all products in a manner to prevent damage, in a secure place, out of way of construction operations and provide protection until ready for use.

C. Handle in accord with manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Environmental conditions:

1. Weather: Do not install products during adverse weather conditions. 2. Temperature: Ensure that surface and ambient temperatures are within the range

recommended by the manufacturer.


A. Schedule work to coincide with work of other subcontractors.

B. Perform work of this Section as soon as possible after permanent installation of products requiring joint sealants.

1.9 WARRANTY

B. Two-year warranty on all sealants, caulk, joint fillers and related accessories.

C. Contractor provide written warranty for work furnished, on Contractor’s letterhead, to Architect at time of Project Close-out in accord with Section 01700.

2. PRODUCTS


2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES

A. Use only the specified products of the following manufacturers:

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. BASF BASF Construction Chemicals Beachwood, OH

2. DOW DOW Chemical Co. Midland, MI

3. GE GE Silicones Waterford, NY

4. MEAD W.R. Meadows, In.c Elgin, IL

5. PECO Pecora Chemical Corp. Harleysville, PA

6. TREM Tremco Manufacturing Co. Cleveland, OH

7. WIL Williams Products Inc. Troy, MI

2.2 SEALANTS

A. Generic description and use:

1. S-1: One component urethane, non-sag, gun grade elastomeric sealant.

a. Use in all joints one-inch wide or less wherever movement may occur, at contraction and expansion joints.

b. Designed for joints in metal to metal, sheet metal to masonry or concrete, E.I.F.S. to E.I.F.S. and E.I.F.S to masonry or concrete wherever E.I.F.S. manufacturer recommends use.

2. S-2: Two component urethane, non-sag, gun grade elastomeric sealant for use in all joints wherever movement may occur in locations indicated for S-1 sealant.

3. S-3: One component acetoxy silicone sealant, gun grade for use in glazing joints wherever glazing manufacturer recommends use.

a. Do not use this sealant for masonry or other applications.

4. S-4: One component urethane, pour grade, self-leveling elastomeric sealant.

a. Use in exterior and interior contraction and expansion joints in sidewalk and pavement.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with subcontractors for selection of one of the following specified sealants for use on entire Project.

C. Acceptable products:

MFGR/TYPE S-1 S-2 S-3 S-4

1. BASF MasterSeal NP1 MasterSeal NP2 MasterSeal SL1 2. DOW 791 Silicone 3. GE SCS2000 4. MEAD Pourthane NS 5. PECO Dynatrol I Dynatrol II 895 Silicone NR201 6. TREM Dymonic Dymeric THC-900


D. Color: Provide color as selected by Contracting Officer for specific locations and to match adjacent materials.

2.3 CAULKS

A. Provide caulking materials as specified for interior use only.

B. Generic description:

1. C-1: One part butyl gun grade. 2. C-2: One part acrylic gun grade.


MFGR/TYPE C-1 C-2

1. PECO Butyl BC 158 AC20 acrylic latex 2. TREM Butyl sealant 400/500 Acrylic latex calk

2.4 JOINT FILLERS

A. Generic description and use:

1. JF-1: Backer rod for elastomeric sealants.

a. Extruded closed-cell polyethylene foam or polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam.

b. Non-bleeding, non-staining, oversized 30 to 50 percent.

2. JF-2: Preformed fiber joint filler, asphalt impregnated.

B. Acceptable products:

MFGR/TYPE JF-1 JF-2

1. BASF MasterSeal 920 2. DOW Ethafoam 3. MEAD Backer Rod Fiber E.J. 4. WIL Expand-O-Foam

2.5 JOINT CLEANER

A. Joint Cleaner: Type recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing compound for the specific joint surface and condition.

2.6 BOND BREAKER

A. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene tape; pressure sensitive recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application where join depth is limited and backer rod cannot be used.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Thoroughly inspect all existing construction and the conditions under which the work will be performed and report to the Architect all conditions that would adversely affect installation of the work.


B. Verify that all joint dimensions are in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of construction and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare and size joints in accord with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Remove all loose materials and foreign matter using compressed air. 2. Proof areas to ensure that joint is free of all materials that might impair adhesion of

sealant or caulking.

B. Prior to installing sealants in horizontal joints where asphalt impregnated expansion joint fillers or other non-polyethylene joint fillers have already been placed, cut filler to 1 inch below surface of concrete and install polyethylene tape directly over the cut edge.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Install bond breaker tape wherever recommended by manufacturer to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly.

C. Install sealants and caulking in uniform, continuous ribbons, without gaps or air pockets.

1. Ensure complete "wetting" of the joints. 2. Bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. 3. Fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces.

D. Install sealants to depths indicated or when not indicated, within the following limitations:

1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75 percent of joint width, but not more than 3/4” deep or less than 3/8” deep.

2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to depth equal to 50 percent of joint width but not more than 1/2” deep or less than 1/4” deep.

3. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints to a depth in the range of 75 percent to 125 percent of joint width.

E. Spillage:

1. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces. 2. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining

surfaces.

3.4 CURING

A. Cure sealant compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.

3.5 ADJUST & CLEAN

A. Upon completion, carefully examine all sealant and caulking work.

1. Remove all damaged and defective work. 2. Replace defective work with new materials.


B. Clean up and remove all surplus products, containers and rubbish and dispose of off site.

C. Remove all spilled or spattered materials from all surfaces.

1. When adjacent surfaces or other work has been damaged or stained as a result of sealing work, repair all damage.

2. Remove all stains to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work during remainder of construction period.

B. Ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal wear or weathering) at substantial completion.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Sealants:

1. Use for all exterior applications where joint filling is required such as:

a. Between masonry and door and window frames. b. Between masonry to masonry joints. c. Between metal to metal joints. d. Between metal and door and window frame head flashings. e. Between metals and other dissimilar materials. f. Between EIFS to EIFS and EIFS to Masonry. g. Between dissimilar finish materials.

2. Bed all thresholds. 3. At contraction and expansion joints. 4. At other locations noted on drawings or where joint filling is required to provide a

weather tight seal between materials.

B. Caulking:

1. At all interior joints.

a. Between countertops and walls. b. Between dissimilar finish materials.

2. At other locations noted on drawings or where joint filling is required to provide neat appearance and transition between materials.

END 07920.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08100 – METAL DOORS & FRAMES

METAL DOORS & FRAMES 08100-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor Provide:

a. Items of hollow metal work and accessories indicated including:

1.) Hollow metal frames. 2.) Special stainless-steel frames. 3.) Exterior hollow metal doors. 4.) Anchors, strike boxes, mortar guards and accessories required for

proper installation of frames. 5.) Stops required for proper installation of glazing in doors. 6.) Reinforcement for finish hardware. 7.) Solid grouting of all hollow metal frames.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 07270 – Firestopping. 6. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 7. Section 08710 – Finish Hardware. 8. Section 08800 – Glass & Glazing. 9. Division 9 – Finishes.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with provisions of the “Americans with Disabilities Act” (ADA) and the “Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards” (UFAS).

2. National Fire Protection Agency, “NFPA Standard No. 80” for fire-rated doors and frames.

B. References:

1. Steel Door Institute (SDI), “Standard Steel Doors and Frames Fact File”, S.D.I. 100 series of Standards.

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), “A250” series of Standards. 3. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) Division of the National

Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers Association (NAAMA), “The Hollow Metal Manual”, HMMA-800 series Standards.

4. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), for rolled steel sheet and zinc-coating.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Shop drawings shall indicate item type, size and location, dimensional elevations, materials and thickness, reinforcements, methods of securing items to adjoining construction, jointing details, methods of assembly and hardware locations.

2. All hollow metal doors and frames furnished for project shall be products of one manufacturer and shall be compatible with each other for hardware locations and reinforcements.


A. In accord with Section 01620.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Amweld.

B. Ceco.

C. Steelcraft.

D. Pioneer Industries.

E. Republic.

F. Curries.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Hardware locations: Mounting heights for hardware shall be in accord with Table V of Steel Door Institute “Technical Data Series” S.D.I. 100-80, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Doors shall be made of commercial quality; level cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A-366 and free of scale, pitting or other surface defects.

1. Face sheets for all doors shall be not less than 16 gauge. 2. All doors shall have zinc coating of not less than 0.30 ounces per square foot. 3. All doors shall be factory primed to receive field finish. 4. All exterior doors shall be provided with core insulation material filling entire cavity

and chemically bonded to all interior surfaces.

C. Stainless steel frames for all openings shall be fabricated from AISI type 302/304 in hardest workable temper.

1. Stainless steel interior frames:

a. Frames shall be 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel. b. Frames shall receive No. 4 brushed directional finish polish.

D. Hollow metal frames for all openings shall be made of commercial grade cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM Designation A366.

1. Exterior frames:

a. Frames shall be 14-gauge. b. Frames shall have zinc coating of not less than 0.30 ounces per square foot. c. Frames shall be factory primed to receive field finish. d. Frames shall receive factory coated on inside with asphalt emulsion paint to

receive grouting.

2. Interior frames:

a. Frames shall be 16-gauge. b. Frames shall have zinc coating of not less than 0.30 ounces per square foot.


c. Frames shall be factory primed to receive field finish. d. Frames shall receive factory coated on inside with asphalt emulsion paint to

receive grouting.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Doors:

1. Doors shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance, free from warpage or buckles. 2. Corner bends shall be true and straight, of minimum radius for gauge of metal

used. 3. Doors shall be types and sizes shown on reviewed and approved Shop Drawings

with no visible seams or joints on faces or vertical edges. 4. Minimum door thickness shall be 1-3/4 inches. 5. Face sheets shall be stiffened by 22 gauge formed steel sections continuously

spanning full thickness of door, spaced 6 inches on center and spot welded to both faces at 5 inches on center or kraft paper honey-comb core laminated to both faces or foamed polyurethane core bonded to both faces.

a. Spaces between steel stiffeners shall be sound deadened and insulated full height with an inorganic non-combustible material.

b. At exterior locations, core insulating material shall be polyurethane foam providing the following thermal characteristics:

1.) U Factor: 0.067. 2.) R Value: 14.97.

6. Door faces shall be joined at vertical edges by spot weld or mechanical interlock extending full height and all seams shall be ground, filled and dressed smooth to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface.

7. Top and bottom edges of all doors shall be closed with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending full width of door and spot welded to bottom face and adhesive bonded and/or mechanically interlocked to top face.

a. Exterior doors shall have an additional flush steel closing channel at top edge.

b. Openings shall be provided in bottom closure of exterior doors to permit escape of entrapped moisture.

8. Vertical edges of doors shall be beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 9. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully templated

hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware manufacturer.

a. Hinge reinforcements shall be not less than 8 gauge plates securely welded to reinforcing grid.

b. Mortise lock, cylinder lock, head and foot bolt reinforcements shall be not less than 14 gauge plates securely welded to reinforcement grid.

c. Door closer reinforcements shall be not less than 12 gauge plates. d. Reinforcements for push/pull surface mounted hardware and panic devices

shall be not less than 14 gauge plates. e. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, doors shall have

reinforcing plates only with all drilling and tapping done by others.

10. Where specified or shown, doors shall be provided with hollow metal moldings to secure glazing.


a. Fixed stops shall occur on outside of exterior doors and secure side of interior doors.

b. Loose stops shall be not less than 20-gauge with butt corner joints.

11. Doors shall be provided with manufacturer’s standard 18” x 18” louver in lower portion of door where indicated for ventilation of interior room.

12. After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be dressed, filled and sanded as required to make all faces and vertical edges smooth, level and free of all irregularities.

a. All doors shall have zinc coating of not less than 0.30 ounces per square foot. b. All doors shall then be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion. c. Coat all doors on all exposed surfaces with a rust-inhibitive primer that is fully

cured before shipment.

B. Standard Frames:

1. Frames shall be welded units with integral trim, of sizes and shapes shown on reviewed shop drawings.

a. Knocked-down frames will not be accepted. b. Furnish integral sidelight frames at doors indicated on drawings.

2. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects, warp or buckle.

3. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their length.

4. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends shall be as scheduled by Contracting Officer or designated representative and shown on reviewed shop drawings.

5. Corner joints shall have all contact edges closed tight, with trim faces mitered, and continuously welded and stops butted.

a. Gussets will not be permitted.

6. Minimum depth of stops shall be 5/8 inch. 7. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully

templated mortised hardware only, in accord with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware contractor.

a. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only; all drilling and tapping shall be done by others.

b. Hinge reinforcement plates shall be not less than 8 gauge or equivalent number of threads, 1-1/4 inches by 10 inches or 1-1/2 inches by 9 inches, securely welded to frame.

c. Closer reinforcement plates not less than 12 gauge, securely welded to frame.

d. Strike and flush bolt reinforcements not less than 16 gauge, securely welded to frame.

e. Reinforcements for all other surface mounted hardware shall be not less than 12 gauge, securely welded to frame.

8. Floor anchors shall be securely welded inside each jamb with two holes provided at each jamb for floor anchorage.

a. Floor anchors shall be designed to extend under threshold at exterior doors or otherwise provide access for installation in existing walls.


b. If access is provided, permanently close openings in field and patch so that access panel is inconspicuous and completely hidden upon completion of finishes.

9. Jamb Anchors:

a. Frames for installation in masonry walls shall be provided with standard masonry “T” anchors.

b. Frames for installation in metal stud partitions shall be provided with standard metal stud anchors.

c. Provide 3 anchors for each jamb on frames up to 7 feet 6 inches high and 4 anchors for taller frames.

10. Dust cover boxes (or mortar guards) of not thinner than 26 gauge steel shall be provided at all hardware mortises on frames.

11. All frames shall be provided with steel spreader temporarily attached to feet of both jambs to serve as brace during shipping and handling.

12. Loose glazing stops shall be of cold rolled steel, not less than 20 gauge thickness, butted at corner joints and secured to interior side of frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws.

13. After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be removed and exposed faces of all welded joints shall be dressed smooth.

a. All frames shall have zinc coating of not less than 0.30 ounces per square foot on all surfaces.

b. All frames shall be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion. c. All frames shall then be chemically coated on all surfaces with a rust-

inhibitive primer that is fully cured before shipment. d. Prime inside surfaces of all loose stops, as well as frame area covered by

stops.

14. All frames shall be coated on inside with an approved asphalt emulsion paint prior to erection, minimum dry film thickness of 10 mils.

C. Stainless Steel Frames:

1. Provide 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel door frames at locations indicated. 2. Frames shall be one-piece welded units of sizes and shapes shown on reviewed

shop drawings. 3. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free

of defects, warp or buckle. 4. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their

length. 5. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends shall be as scheduled and shown on

reviewed shop drawings. 6. Corner joints shall have all contact edges closed tight, with trim faces mitered, and

continuously welded. 7. Frames shall be formed without stops. 8. Floor anchors shall be securely welded inside each jamb with two holes provided

at each jamb for floor anchorage. 9. Jamb Anchors: Provide jamb anchors for installation to steel stub framing systems

indicated.

a. Provide 3 anchors for each jamb on frames up to 7 feet 6 inches high and 4 anchors for taller frames.


10. All frames shall be provided with steel spreader temporarily attached to feet of both jambs to serve as brace during shipping and handling.

11. After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be removed and exposed faces of all welded joints shall be dressed smooth.

2.4 SHOP PAINTING

A. Thoroughly clean all galvanized metal surfaces of loose scale, shavings, filings, dirt and other deleterious materials by use of wire brushes or other effective means.

1. Remove grease and oil by solvent cleaning.

B. Chemically treat all surfaces to assure maximum paint adherence.

1. Apply zinc chromate primer baked on in shop; brush coat touch-up in field. 2. Cover all surfaces without runs, smears or bare spots.

C. Paint inside surfaces of all removable stops, as well as frame area covered by stops.

2.5 DOOR SILENCERS

A. Furnish grey rubber door silencers for all hollow metal frames, three for each single door and two for each double door without a mullion.

B. Apply to jamb stop strip for single doors, three per door, and to header stop strip for double doors, one per door.

2.6 CLEARANCES

A. Edge clearances shall be provided as follows:

1. Between doors and frames at head and jambs, not more than 1/8 inch. 2. Between door and floor, 3/4 inch. 3. Between meeting edges of pairs of doors, not more than 1/4 inch except fire doors

not more than 1/8 inch.

B. Provide all interior door jambs in depths to allow a minimum ½ inch return of frame to finish material on either side of door opening.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that door frames are of type required for door and are installed as required for proper installation of doors.

B. Do not install doors in frames that would hinder operation of doors.

C. Prior to installation, verify that all frames have been coated on the inside with asphalt emulsion paint as stipulated in this Section.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. Set hollow metal frames accurately in location; in alignment, plumb, straight and true.

B. Brace frames as required to prevent displacement.

1. Provide spread at mid-height where height of frame dictates. 2. Shim frames plumb in existing concrete openings.

C. Adjust frame placement in interior wall installations to ensure the specified ½ inch return to finish materials on either side of opening.

D. Anchor door frames, through bottom angle, to floor with bolts or power fasteners.


E. Install frame anchors at 2 feet 6 inches maximum spacing but not less than 3 anchors per jamb.

1. Frame anchors shall be flat head expansion type sleeve anchors, in diameter and length required for solid, permanent anchorage to substrate.

2. Head of anchor shall seat into countersunk hole in frame, slightly below surface.

F. Coordinate installation of jamb anchors as required with other trades for proper installation with their work.

G. Prior to installation, verify that all frames have been coated on the inside with asphalt emulsion paint as stipulated.

H. Grout all frames solid during installation as anchors are installed in new wall construction.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. Install hollow metal doors in frames after walls are finished and chance of construction damage is minimal.

B. Apply necessary hardware for hanging doors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Drill and tap for machine screws as required. 2. Do not use self-tapping sheet metal screws. 3. Install reinforcing plates as required for proper installation of hardware items.

C. Remove and replace doors that are found to be warped, bowed or otherwise damaged or which cannot be properly fitted in frames.

D. Adjust doors to provide uniform clearances at heads, jambs and floor as indicated below and to contact stops uniformly.

1. Head clearance – 1/16 inch. 2. Lock jamb clearance – 1/8 inch. 3. Hinge jamb clearance – 1/16 inch. 4. Floor clearance – 3/4 inch.

E. At completion of installation, doors shall be undamaged and at all surfaces shall be in satisfactory condition for finishing.


A. Replace and rehang doors that are hinge-bound and do not swing or operate freely.

B. Refinish or replace job finished doors damaged during installation.

C. Fill Anchorage and Grout Holes:

1. Plug and fill all holes for grouting, sand smooth and spot prime ready for final finishes.

2. Filled areas shall not be visible to the naked eye.

D. Protect doors and frames from damage before, during and after finishing.

END 08100.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08211 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Non-rated flush wood doors with factory installed transparent finish. b. Stops required for proper installation of glazing in doors. c. Factory preparation of all doors to receive finish hardware. d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 4. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 5. Section 08710 – Finish Hardware. 6. Section 08800 – Glass & Glazing. 7. Section 09300 – Tile. 8. Section 09650 – Resilient Tile Flooring. 9. Section 09680 – Carpet. 10. Section 09900 – Painting.

B. Related hollow metal frames shall be furnished per Section 08100 and installed by Contractor.

C. Related door finish hardware shall be furnished and installed on factory prepared and finished doors by Contractor per Section 08710, Finish Hardware.

D. Related door lites shall be furnished per Section 08800, Glass & Glazing.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Extent and location of each type of wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules.

B. Factory finishing of wood doors is included in this Section.

C. Factory preparation for hardware and factory pre-machining for hardware for wood doors is included in this Section.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Flush Wood Doors:

1. WDMA I.S. 1A – Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA). 2. AWI – Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). 3. ASTM E90-90 – Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building

Partitions.


4. FSC – Forest Stewardship Council guidelines for environmentally certified wood doors.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including:

1. Details of core and edge construction. 2. Details of trim for openings. 3. Manufacturer’s data sheets, completely describing door construction, WDMA I.S. 1A

and AWI Classification.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating:

1. Location of each door. 2. Elevation of each kind of door illustrating type and size. 3. Details of construction including location and extent of hardware blocking. 4. Requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. 5. For factory pre-machined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for

locksets and other cutouts adjacent to lite openings.

C. Verification Samples: Submit samples for verification purposes as indicated for the following:

1. Transparent finish: Submit standard finished wood samples for preliminary selection, 6” square, in available stains for wood species indicated.

D. Final Samples: Submit samples based upon selection and approval of verification samples by Contracting Officer or designated representative as follows:

1. Furnish 6” square samples of factory finished transparent wood doors selected to be used for the Project.


A. Company specializing in manufacturing products specified with minimum of five years documented experience.

B. All doors shall be obtained from one manufacturer.

C. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards:

1. Flush Wood Doors: WDMA Standard I.S. 1A (Window and Door Manufacturers Association).

2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"; including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors" of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

B. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of WDMA’s Appendix Section “Care and Installation at Job Site” as well as with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Store doors flat and off the floor on a level surface in a dry, well ventilated building.


a. Do not store on edge. b. Protect doors from dirt, water and abuse.

2. Protect finish surfaces from exposure to light after delivery. 3. Do not subject doors to extremes in either heat or humidity and follow manufacturer’s

recommendations for temperature and humidity limitations.

C. Identify each door with individual opening numbers that correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's geographical location:

1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100 S-3 "Moisture Content".

1.9 WARRANTY

A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights AAFES may have under the Contract Documents.

B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards.

1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging.

2. Warranty shall be in effect during and following period of time after date of Substantial Completion.

3. Solid Core interior doors shall be warranted for the life of original installation.

C. General Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Solid Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces:

a. Masonite Architectural – Aspiro Series. b. VT Industries. c. Eggers Industries: Architectural Door Division.

2.2 INTERIOR SOLID CORE DOORS

A. Solid Core Doors:

1. Comply with the following requirements:


a. Faces:

1.) Transparent Finish: Rotary Sliced Select White Birch. 2.) Opaque Painted Finish: Medium density overlay (MDO).

b. AWI Grade: Premium. c. Construction: PC-5 (Particleboard core, 5-ply).

2. Light Frames: Door manufacturer's standard solid wood beads compatible with face veneer for light sizes indicated.

3. Louvers: Door manufacturer’s standard metal louver in finish as selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Select veneers for transparent finish to match in finish appearance with minimal variation in wood color from sap wood to heart wood.

1. No “Barber Poling” will be accepted on faces of doors.

B. Fabricate to produce doors complying with following requirements:

1. Factory pre-fit and pre-machine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels:

a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for pre-fitting.

1.) Bevel doors 3 degrees to suit frame size indicated, 3/16” pre-fit in width to within + 0” to -1/32” tolerance.

2.) Prefit top of door 1/8” to within +1/16” to –0” tolerance. 3.) Under cut door as indicated or as determined by floor finishes.

b. Comply with final hardware schedules and doorframe shop drawings and with hardware templates.

2. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in wood and aluminum frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory pre-machining.

C. Openings: Cut and trim opening through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required.

1. Profiles and installation shall be per manufacturer’s standards. 2. Cutting and trimming for lights and louvers shall be in conjunction with manufacturer’s

requirements to maintain door warranty.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General transparent finish requirements:

1. Comply with referenced AWI quality standard including Section 1500 "Factory Finishing".

2. Pre-finish wood doors at factory. 3. Architect shall select finish from manufacturer's standard transparent natural finishes

with a clear penetrating stain for species of veneer indicated.

B. Painted finish requirements:

1. For painted finish requirements see Section 09900, Painting.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


A. Examine installed frame prior to hanging door:

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation see Section 08710, Finish Hardware.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and referenced AWI standard and as indicated.

C. Factory finish shall be restored before installation where fitting or machining is required at the job site.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION

A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Reparations: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.

C. Protection: Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END 08211.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08305 – ACCESS DOORS

ACCESS DOORS 08305-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Non-rated access doors. b. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 07270 – Firestopping. 5. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 6. Section 08710 – Finish Hardware. 7. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 8. Section 09900 – Painting. 9. Division 15 – Mechanical. 10. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Refer to Section 08710, Finish Hardware access door cylinders.

C. Install firestopping materials for maintaining fire rated assembly as specified in Section 07270, Firestopping.

D. Refer to Division 15, Mechanical and Division 16, Electrical for related information pertaining to access doors for accessing valves, dampers and other controls in otherwise non-accessible spaces such as above gypsum board ceilings.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire Project from one source and by a single manufacturer.

B. AA – Aluminum Association.

C. ASTM B 209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Make submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product Data:

1. For each type of access door assembly specified including:

a. Details of construction relative to adjacent construction framing and finishes.


b. Individual components. c. Profiles and finishes. d. Fire-protection ratings.

2. Include complete schedule illustrating types, general locations, sizes wall and ceiling construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

C. Shop drawings:

1. Indicate exact location of each access door on plan and in schedule. 2. Show fabrication and installation of access doors and frames. 3. Details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, anchorage, and

accessory items. 4. Relationship of access door frame and anchorage to actual adjacent construction.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Verification: Prior to submission of proposal, Contractor shall review controls, valve and equipment locations for access door locations not specifically indicated on drawings with other trades to determine locations sizes and quantities of access doors needed to gain access.

B. Proposal: Contractor shall base proposal upon furnishing all incidental access doors required by these other trades to access controls, valves and equipment that are installed in otherwise inaccessible spaces.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Standard Access Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers of access doors:

1. Karp Associates, Inc. – Model KDW. 2. Milcor, Inc. – Model DW. 3. Nystrom, Inc. – Model NW.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum:

1. Mill finish, sheet aluminum, Alloy 5005-H34 to comply with ASTM B209. 2. Mill finish, extrusions, Alloy 6063-T6 to comply with ASTM B221.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A-366/A-366M commercial-quality, cold-rolled steel sheet with baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.

C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A-591/A-591M, Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet with Class C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting.

2.3 STANDARD ACCESS DOORS

A. Miscellaneous Access Doors: Standard self-latching units consisting of frame, trim, door and hardware, including automatic closer and interior latch release on personnel doors, and complying with the following requirements:


1. Frame with Exposed Trim: Perimeter frame with integral drywall trim complying with the following requirements:

a. Metal: 16 gauge thick galvanized bonderized steel. b. Trim: Manufacturer’s standard flange overlapping gypsum board surfaces

surrounding door frame.

2. Door: 14 gauge thick galvanized bonderized steel, welded pan type. 3. Door Size:

a. 24” by 24” (nominal) for personnel access. b. 22” by 22” (nominal) for access to manual rolling grilles. c. 12” by 12” (nominal) for access to valves and controls.

4. Hinges: Continuous type, 16 gauge with stainless steel pin. 5. Latches: Key operated cylinder lock for keyed access from outside the door.

B. Provide units that comply with the requirements for access to Mechanical or Electrical system controls, valves or equipment as specified in Divisions 15 and 16.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.

B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction.

1. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 2. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access

panels to types of supports indicated. 3. Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25.4 to 38.1 mm) wide around

perimeter of frame. 4. Furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board.

C. Latching Devices: Furnish number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Advise Installers of other related work about specific requirements relating to access door and roof hatch installation.

1. Confirm that opening openings in wall and in roof deck are properly framed and supported.

2. Ensure that curb blocking has been properly placed and anchored for leveling and anchoring roof hatch curb.

B. Include sizes of rough openings to receive access doors and roof hatch, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.

1. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other construction.

2. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installing access doors.


B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Install perimeter fire stop materials as recommended by manufacturer and specified in Section 07270.


A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged.

END 08305.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08331 – OVERHEAD ROLLING GRILLE

OVERHEAD ROLLING GRILLE 08331-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Factory finished aluminum, manually operated, push-up rolling grill. b. Factory finished aluminum guides. c. Structural steel HSS supports at jambs with steel header beam. d. Inserts, anchoring devices and accessories for complete installation of rolling

grill in construction indicated.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork. 6. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 7. Section 08710 – Finish Hardware. 8. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 9. Section 09300 – Tile.

B. Refer to Section 08710, Finish Hardware for coordination of lock cylinder and keying requirements.


A. Rolling grille curtain shall be designed to withstand a minimum 250-pound concentrated load applied to any point in the overall grille span without failure.

B. Rolling grilles shall be standard cycle design.

1. 0 to 25 cycles per day. 2. Overall maximum of 50,000 operating cycles for the life of the door.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accord with 01340.

B. Product data and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead rolling grille.

1. Provide operating instructions and maintenance information.

C. Shop drawings:

1. Fabrication and installation details. 2. Guide and head mounting and anchorage details. 3. Door elevation and dimensions. 4. Hardware and accessory items. 5. Special components and installation requirements.



A. Package, handle, deliver and store at the site in a manner that will prevent damage in accord with 01620.

B. Coordinate delivery with finish material installation to avoid project delays.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Standard manufacturer's warranty.

2. PRODUCTS


A. The Cookson Company, Inc., 1901 South Litchfield Road, Goodyear, AZ 85338; telephone: (800) 294-4358.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. Open design, aluminum push-up rolling grille:

1. Model: 5015.

B. Curtain:

1. Horizontal Rods: Solid 5/16-inch diameter, horizontal aluminum rods with 1/2-inch tube spacers on 1 1/2-inch centers with 3/16-inch thick aluminum hinged vertical connecting links 9-inches on center.

C. Bottom Bar: 4-inches x 1 3/4-inch extruded aluminum tubular section.

D. Finish on the grille curtain and all other exposed parts shall be manufacturer’s standard dark bronze anodized aluminum.

E. Guides shall be constructed of 1/4-inch thick continuous aluminum wall angles connected to 1 1/2-inch x 2 1/2-inch x 1/8” thick continuous extruded aluminum guide section.

1. Continuous nylon wear strips shall be inserted on both sides of the guide to eliminate metal-to-metal contact.

2. Finish of mounting flat and guides shall match door curtain.

F. Brackets shall be constructed of steel not less than ¼ inch thick finished with one (1) coat of bronze rust-inhibiting paint.

G. The barrel shall be steel tubing of not less than 6” in diameter.

1. Oil tempered adjustable torsion springs shall be capable of correctly counter balancing the weight of the curtain.

2. The barrel shall be designed to limit the maximum deflection to .03” per foot of opening width.

3. Barrel finish shall be one (1) coat of bronze rust-inhibiting primer.

H. No hood will be required at installations where barrel is concealed above finished construction including wall and ceiling finishes.


2.3 OPERATION

A. Push-up operated grille shall open and close with a maximum of 30-pounds of effort.

B. Operation shall be controlled by pulling up or down on the grille itself.

1. Provide pole with hook.

C. Push-up operated grilles shall be secured by means of a cylinder lock at both jambs in the bottom bar as specified in Section 08710, Finish Hardware.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of all units, hardware, operators and other compartment parts.

B. Coordinate and install HSS 3 x 3 x 1/4" jamb support framing and W 12 x 14 header during framing conducted under work of Section 05400, Cold-Formed Metal Framing and Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall Systems.

1. Anchor jamb support base plates, concealed by stud track, to concrete slab-on-grade construction using epoxy anchors and bolt top connections to header beam with 3/4", A-325 bolts with nuts and washers.

2. Supporting structure, barrel assembly and hood shall be concealed behind finishes as indicated.

3. Align channels on either side of jamb opening to provide support for barrel and hood and to provide solid grounding for screw attachment of guides.

4. Install exposed guides over face of gypsum wall board and through 5/8” plywood spacer blocking and machine screw into supporting channel per manufacturer’s requirements for anchorage.

C. Hood of unit shall be mounted so that bottom of hood is flush with finish plane of gypsum board ceiling.

1. Hood and operating mechanism shall be fully concealed above ceiling with slotted opening, trimmed with metal “LC” casing bead (USG # 200), left for extension of bottom bar rail when curtain is in coiled position.

2. Coordinate location of standard 22” x 22” access panel with control mechanism on coiling door so that mechanism and torsion springs can be accessed for adjustment.

D. Set components plumb, level, and true to line without warp or rack and anchor all supporting structure, guides and hood assembly solidly to surrounding construction to prevent misalignment or distortion.

E. Coordinate installation of threshold with floor finishes for proper height and alignment with top surface of floor tile.

1. Align threshold to center on guide jambs and so that bottom door rail in closed position is centered over threshold unit.

2. Anchor threshold into position using concealed fasteners to retain proper permanent alignment with door assembly.



A. Adjust movable units to operate smoothly and to be weathertight when closed.

B. Lubricate hardware and all moving parts.

C. Remove all packaging and debris and dispose of off site.

D. Remove protective coverings and clean all surfaces immediately before final inspection of project.

END 08331

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08380 – DOUBLE ACTING DOORS

DOUBLE ACTING DOORS 08380-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Double acting traffic door assemblies including:

1.) Frame. 2.) Factory glazed view lites. 3.) Hinges and all required hardware specified in this Section.

b. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for complete installation.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 4. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 6. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 7. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 8. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 9. Section 09900 – Painting.


A. Regulatory requirements:

1. Compliance with provisions of the “Americans with Disabilities Act” (ADA) and the “Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards” (UFAS).

B. Doors shall meet or exceed requirements established by the United States Postal Service for interior, non-secure doors.

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain doors for entire Project from one source and by a single manufacturer.

D. Installer:

1. Shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the installation of similar doors. 2. Shall be familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper

performance of the work of this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Make submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product Data:

1. For each type of access door assembly specified including:


a. Details of construction relative to materials. b. Individual components. c. Profiles and finishes. d. Fire-protection ratings.

2. Include complete schedule illustrating types, general locations, sizes wall and ceiling construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

C. Shop drawings:

1. Show fabrication and installation of access doors and frames. 2. Details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, anchorage, and

accessory items. 3. Relationship of access door frame and anchorage to actual adjacent construction.

D. Samples: Submit actual sample chain of available colors of polyethylene skin material for selection of door color by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.5 COODINATION

A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed spaces and equipment.

B. Indicate exact location on schedule specified under “Submittals” Article.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Chase Industries, Inc. – Durulite Industrial Traffic Door. 2. Rite-Hite Holding Corporation – Model 4800 Impact Door. 3. Bondor Manufacturing Company – Poly-Kor Door.

2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. General: Furnish double acting traffic door assembly manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts and ready for installation.

B. Frame: Frame shall be hollow metal fabrication, 14-gauge welded steel assembly.

1. Jamb and head profiles shall be 2 inch face width with 6 ¾ inch overall depth including 7/16 inch returns to drywall on each side.

2. Reinforce frame with ¼ inch x 5 inch x jamb height flat steel plate welded to inside face of jamb profile.

3. Provide welded angle anchors at top and bottom of jamb section for attachment to floor slab and header framing.

C. Door Cladding: High-impact cross linked polyethylene outer skin forming monolithic one-piece hollow shell.

1. Physical Properties: Shell shall maintain physical properties to –40 degrees F. 2. Minimum Thickness: ¼ inch with overall door thickness of 1 7/8 inch. 3. Finish: Textured as selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative

from manufacturer’s standard colors.


4. Edge Treatment:

a. Bottom, leading and back edges shall be bull-nosed with a 15/16 inch radius. b. All other edges shall have a 1/8 inch radius.

5. View Lites: View lite openings and gasket keys shall be molded into the door.

D. Door Core: Foamed-in-place urethane core with an R-factor of 14.58, reinforced with a 1 inch x .120 inch square steel tube frame.

E. Glazing: Factory glazed view windows shall be 20 inches x 22 inches x 1/8 inch thick polycarbonate scratch resistant sheet.

F. Seals: Provide manufacturer’s standard 40 to 60 durometer hardness, extruded black neoprene gaskets.

G. Hardware: Provide manufacturer’s standard double-acting hinge assembly with top and bottom hinge guards.

H. Bumpers: Provide full-width x 36 inch high black spring polyethylene bumpers on both faces of doors.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 DELIVERY AND INSPECTION

A. Doors shall be shipped complete, ready for mounting, with all necessary hardware and instructions for installation.

B. Inspect steel frames prior to installation for required throat dimension for wall thickness and for proper height.

1. Obtain installer’s written report listing any conditions detrimental to satisfactory installation as indicated.

2. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installing double acting doors.

B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supporting structure.


A. Adjust hardware after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace door components that are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged.

END 08380.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08410 – ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS 08410-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Non-thermally broken interior door and sidelite/view window framing. b. Thermally broken/improved, blast resistant aluminum door and sidelite

framing. c. Thermally broken/improved blast resistant entrance door. d. Hardware items related to aluminum entrance doors. e. Other related accessory items such as flashings, fasteners, clips and other

items of installation to complete each system.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide thermally broken/improved, self-supporting aluminum curtain wall system as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Division 3 – Concrete Work. 3. Section 05120 – Structural Steel. 4. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications. 6. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 7. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 8. Section 07210 – Building Insulation. 9. Section 07240 – Exterior Insulation & Finish System-Class PB. 10. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 11. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 12. Section 08460 – Automatic Entrance Doors. 13. Section 08710 – Finish Hardware. 14. Section 08800 – Glass & Glazing. 15. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 16. Section 09900 – Painting.

B. Lock cylinders for aluminum entrance swing doors are specified in Section 08710, Finish Hardware.

C. Glazing requirements for aluminum curtain walls and entrance doors are specified in Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.


1.3 REFERENCES

A. Cited standards and manufacturer's catalog, current at the date of Solicitation Document, unless otherwise specified, are incorporated herein by reference and govern the work.

B. Standards:

1. IBC – International Building Code, 2015. 2. ASCE 7-10 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,

American Society of Civil Engineers, third printing. 3. FBC – Florida Building Code, 2014:

a. HVHZ Requirements. b. Non-HVHZ Requirements.

4. UFC – Uniform Facility Criteria:

a. UFC 3-301-01, Structural Engineering. b. UFC 4-010-01, 9 February 2012 with Change 1, 1 October 2013.

C. Regulatory Agencies:

1. IHPA – International Hurricane Protection Association:

a. Recommendations. b. Guidelines. c. Certifications.

2. AAMA – American Architectural Manufacturers Association, Current Edition.

D. Testing Agencies:

1. ASTM – ASTM International:

a. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes, 2015.

b. ASTM E330 – Standard Test method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differences.

c. ASTM E1886 – Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.

d. ASTM E1996 – Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide curtain wall systems capable of withstanding loads and thermal and

structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

1. Failure includes the following:

a. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits. b. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal

and structural movement, to glazing units.

1.) Glass breakage.


2.) Exterior fixed window frames. 3.) Exterior entry door units.

B. Performance: Provide aluminum curtain wall assemblies that comply with specified performance characteristics.

1. Each system shall be tested by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in accordance with specified test methods.

2. Provide certified test results.

C. Thermal Movement: Provide systems capable of withstanding thermal movements resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F. (67 deg. C.), that could cause a metal surface temperature range of 180 deg. F. (100 deg. C.) within the framing system.

D. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.

E. Structural-Support Movement: Provide entrance and curtain wall systems that accommodate structural movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection.

F. Dead Loads: Provide aluminum curtain wall system members that do not deflect an amount that will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.

1. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch (3.18-mm) clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below.

2. Provide a minimum 1/16-inch (1.59-mm) clearance between members and operable doors.

G. Exterior System Live Loads: Provide aluminum curtain wall systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.

H. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.

I. Fixed Framing Transmission Characteristics: Provide self-supporting and buttressed aluminum curtain wall framing system that complies with requirements indicated for transmission characteristics after glazing:

1. Air Infiltration: Provide framing system with an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 – 84 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 psf.

2. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no water penetration as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 – 86 at an inward test pressure differential of 15.0 psf.

a. Water leakage is defined as follows:

1.) Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing on systems normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation.

2.) Water controlled by flashing and gutters that are drained back to the exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage.


3. Condensation Resistance: Where framing systems are "thermal-break/improved" construction, provide units tested for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1502.7 showing condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 70.

1.5 WIND PRESSURE LOADING CRITERIA

A. Wind Pressures:

1. Wind pressures used in the strength design of the building components and cladding shall be based on ASCE 7-10 and IBC 2012.

2. Wind load constants as follows:

a. Basic Wind Speed: 159 mph. b. Exposure: C. c. Internal Pressure Coefficient: ± 0.18. d. Risk Category: II e. Base Pressure Pnet: 54.0 psf.

B. Projectile/Debris Design: Shall be tested in accordance with specified ASTM test procedures.

1. ASTM E1886 – Wind borne debris with static pressure differentials. 2. ASTM E1996 – Large and small missile tests.

1.6 BLAST PRESSURE LOADING CRITERIA

A. Force Protection: Aluminum self-supporting curtain wall systems shall perform, in conjunction with other door and frame components, in compliance with UFC 4-010-01, 9 February 2012 with Change 1, 1 October 2013 and the following loading criteria:

1. Blast pressures for the design of the aluminum curtain wall and entrance door components shall be based on the UFC 4-010-01 listed above and Technical Report PDC-TR 10-02, 19 April 2012.

a. Building Category: Primary Gathering/Controlled Perimeter. b. Standoff Distance: 67'-6 3/4". c. Applicable Explosive Weight: Level II, Table B-1, UFC 4-010-01. d. Blast Pressure: 63.0 psf, 3-second duration equivalent, ASTM F 2248 and

PDC-TR 10-02 applied as required by UFC 4-010-01 and referenced documents.

B. Blast Test: Shall be tested in accordance with DoD, GSA and ASTM test proceeds.

1. Three (3) test units 96” x 96” made up of a 3’ x 7’ door, 5’ x 6’ sidelite, 5’ x 2’ sidelite and transom passed:

a. 4.4 psi. b. 32 psi – msec impulse. c. 19 msec duration. d. DoD response – High and medium. e. GSA response – Condition 1 and 2. f. ASTM response – No hazard and minimal hazard.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01340.

1. Product data for each type of glazed aluminum curtain wall required, including:


a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods. b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories. c. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.

2. Shop drawings for each glazed aluminum curtain wall required, including:

a. Layout and installation details including: actual relationship to adjacent work. b. Elevations at ½” equals 1’-0” scale. c. Detail sections of typical composite members. d. Anchors and reinforcement. e. Provisions for expansion and contraction. f. Glazing details.

3. Samples for Finish Selections:

a. Submit pairs of samples of each specified finish on 12-inch-long sections of extrusions or formed shapes.

b. Where normal finish variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of variations.

4. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Contracting Officer or designated representative reserves the right to require additional samples, that show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories.

5. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing that glazed aluminum curtain wall systems have been tested in accordance with specified test procedures and comply with performance characteristics indicated.

B. Force Protection: Submit documentation that aluminum curtain wall and entry door systems, in conjunction with related components, have been engineered to provide “Blast Resistant” protection are supplied and installed in equivalent conformance with UFC 4-010-01, 09 February 2012, Change 1, 01 October 2013 as indicated herein.


A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work; show measurements on final shop drawings.

1. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the work.

2. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabricate tolerances to ensure proper fit.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls produced by a single manufacturer experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls fabricated by a firm experienced in producing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project.

1. Demonstrate a successful record of installation in-service performance. 2. The fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity to produce components

required without causing delay in progress of the Work.

D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain glazed aluminum curtain walls from one source and from a single manufacturer.


E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional requirements of glazed aluminum curtain wall work required and are based on the specific types and models indicated.


A. Deliver aluminum curtain wall and entrance door components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging in accord with Section 01620.

B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete.

1. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air.

2. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage.


A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work.

1. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. 2. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the

work. 3. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and

coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, installer and manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units (including glazing) that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.

B. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration.

2. Faulty operation. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

C. Warranty Period: 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion.

D. The warranty shall not deprive AAFES of other rights or remedies AAFES may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL & INTERIOR FRAMING MANUFACTURER

A. Subject to compliance with requirements provide thermally broken aluminum curtain wall and window systems manufactured by the following:


1. Kawneer Company, Inc.: 1600 Wall System 1 Curtain Wall, Outside Glazed, 2 1/2" x 7 1/2".

B. Subject to compliance with requirements provide exterior aluminum entrance door systems manufactured by the following:

1. Kawneer Company, Inc.: 350/500 IR Entrance System (Blast Mitigation).

C. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide non-thermally broken aluminum interior storefront system manufactured by the following:

1. Kawneer Company, Inc.: Trifab VG 450 Framing Systems, Center Glazed, 1 3/4" x 4 1/2".

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire.

B. Major portions of extrusion sections shall have 0.125 inch minimum thickness.

C. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components.

1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts.

2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware.

3. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat-head machine screws that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened.

D. Concealed Flashings: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead-soft stainless steel or: 0.026-inch-thick minimum aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components.

E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.

F. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hit-dip galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A123.

G. Exterior Entry Door Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287.

H. Panning and trim components and buttress strut receiving angles shall be square edge extrusions of aluminum alloy 6063-T52 with sharp corners in 3/16” and ¼” thickness as indicated.


I. Head flashing shall be custom shop fabricated aluminum, .040” thick, in profile indicated and color to match frames as specified in Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet Metal.

J. Glass and Glazing Materials: Glass and glazing materials shall comply with requirements of Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.

2.3 HARDWARE

A. General: Refer to finish hardware schedule in Section 08710, Finish Hardware for required hardware items on each door.

B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number and type recommended by manufacturer for service required, in finish to match door.

1. Offset Pivot sets: Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.

a. Provide exposed part of cast aluminum alloy. b. Provide minimum of two (2) intermediate pivots for doors.

2. Provide continuous hinge in #40 dark bronze finish to match door at exterior doors. 3. Surface Mounted Overhead Closers: Modern type with metal cover, for parallel

arm type mounting installation, finish to match door.

a. Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. b. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for size of closer depending

on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. c. Comply with all requirements for pull resistance and delayed action closing

for handicap accessibility per the ADA and UFAS standards.

4. Overhead Door Stop: Concealed equal to Glynn Johnson No. 104S, finish to match door.

5. Exterior Entrance Door Panic Hardware: Concealed rod “Paneline II” panic exit devices activated by full width push panel mounted into cross rail in door as indicated in finish to match door with black insert and clear letters.

6. Exterior and Interior Door Pull Handles: Provide contemporary styled 1” round bent bar offset pull with 9” centerlines in #40 dark bronze finish to match door.

7. Interior Cross Bar: Provide contemporary styled 1” round push bar, style CPII, on interior face of door in #40 dark bronze finish to match door.

8. Interior Lock: Adams Rite MS-1850 deadlock with thumb-turn coordinated with keyed cylinder and interchangeable core system for keying into the building system as specified under Section 08710, Finish Hardware.

9. Exterior Threshold: Extruded aluminum full saddle threshold equal to National Guard Products 425, 5” wide x ½” high (maximum), mill finish aluminum, complete with anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots, panic strike and floor/sidewalk finish.

10. Exterior Door Sweep/Weatherstrip: Nylon brush gasket, 45-degree, bottom channel concealed surface mount, dark bronze anodized aluminum equal to National A626A.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. Curtain Wall Framing: Provide curtain wall framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated.


1. Provide for outside glazed curtain wall installed from the exterior. 2. Shop-fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. 3. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams. 4. Provide 6” x 1 1/4” safety rail with stand off anchor bars and standard end caps.

a. Mounting height to match existing.

B. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront window framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated.

1. Provide for center glazed storefront installed from the exterior. 2. Shop-fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. 3. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams.

C. Entrance Door Frames:

1. Provide tubular and channel frame entrance door frame assemblies, as indicated, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer’s standards.

2. Reinforce as necessary to support required loads.

D. Stile and Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts.

1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of stiles and rails.

a. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops. b. Exterior stops shall be anchored for non-removal.

2. Design: Provide 1 ¾” thick doors of design indicated.

a. Wide stile: 3 1/2” width. b. Head rail: 3 1/2” width. c. Intermediate Paneline Exit Device Rail at Exterior: 8 ¼” width. d. Intermediate rail at Interior: 3 1/2” width. e. Bottom rail: 6 ½” width.

E. Include sub-frames and other reinforcing members of the type indicated.

F. Furnish trim components and sill flashing as indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.

1. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. 2. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions

required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. 3. Fabricate storefront window framing system with an integrally concealed, low-

conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and exposed interior members to eliminate direct metal-to-metal contact.

4. Use manufacturer's standard construction that has been in use for similar projects for period of not less than 3 years.

B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site.


1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

a. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces.

b. Complete these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes.

2. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site.

C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations.

1. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides and restore mechanical finish.

2. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface.

D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance rigidity.

E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, a suitable sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces.

F. Do not use coatings containing lead.

G. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members.

H. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.

I. Weather stripping:

1. For exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping against fixed stops. 2. Provide EPDM or vinyl blade gasket weather stripping in bottom door rail,

adjustable for contact with threshold. 3. At interior doors and other location without weather stripping, provide neoprene

silencers to prevent contact between metal and doors.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designation of finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by “AA” conform to system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. Exterior and Interior Finishes:

1. Exterior Frames: Provide Class I anodic coating conforming to AA-M12C22A42/44, Dark Bronze Anodized Finish.

a. Mechanical finish: As fabricated, non-specular. b. Chemical finish: Etched, medium matte. c. Anodic coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.7 mil complying

with AAMA 607.1.

2. Interior Doors and Frames: Provide Class I anodic Coating conforming to AA-M12C22A42/44, Dark Bronze Anodized Finish.



with AAMA 607.1.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts.

B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the installation.

C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation including anchorage to structure in compliance with specified system performance requirements.

B. Coordinate and install sheet metal head and sill flashings specified in Section 07600 as indicated to provide proper sealing of head frame conditions and path for water to escape at sill conditions.

C. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors or panels.

1. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and elevations indicated.

2. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.

D. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum storefront windows to comply with the following tolerances:

1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or 1/4 inch in any total length.

2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch.

3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch.

4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out-of-plane offset of framing at corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch.

E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication.

2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum. 3. Paint unexposed aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other

masonry with alkali resistant coating.


4. Paint unexposed wood and similar absorptive material in contact with aluminum and exposed to the elements or otherwise subject to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint.

5. Seal joints between the materials with sealant.

F. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface mounted hardware items.

1. Comply with hardware manufacturer’s instructions and template requirements. 2. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible.

G. Set and secure sub-sill flashing onto wood blocking in bed of sealant.

1. After placement of sub-sill flashing provide sash cord weeps at minimum of 12” centers extending 8” parallel to back flange of flashing and extending out and over sill.

2. Set sub-sill member in bed of sealant making certain that sash cord weeps are clear to drain any water from window frame assembly.

H. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction.

I. Sealants, fillers and gaskets are specified in Section 07900, Building & Pavement Joint Sealers.

J. Installation of glass indicated to be glazed into framing is specified in Section 08800, Glass & Glazing.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust framing to fit neatly together, with hairline joints and other requirements of this Section.

B. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, for weather tight closure and to comply with the requirements of the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS).

C. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings.

D. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in Section 08800 for cleaning and maintenance.

E. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.

END 08410.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08460 – AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS

AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Option Proposal 2:

1. Impact rated electro-mechanically operated aluminum sliding door units. 2. Aluminum jamb framing, head frame with operating mechanism and motion

sensors. 3. Manually activated full breakout of all panels for exiting building. 4. Specialty hardware items related to automatic entrance doors. 5. Other related accessory items such as flashings, fasteners, clips and other items

of installation to complete automatic entrance door systems.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 - General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 5. Section 08410 – Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts. 6. Section 08710 – Finish Hardware. 7. Section 08800 – Glass and Glazing.

B. Lock cylinders for sliding doors are specified in Section 08710, Finish Hardware.

C. Glazing requirements for automatic entrance doors and side lights are specified in Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.

1.3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND CODE STANDARDS

A. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM).

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 607.1 - Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 2. AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 3. AAMA 701 Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable

Fenestration Weatherseals.

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Builders’ Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA):

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.10: Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.5: Standard for Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products.

D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1. ASCE 7-10 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, American Society of Civil Engineers, third printing.

E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.


2. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

3. ASTM E330 – Standard Test method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differences.

4. ASTM E1886 – Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.

5. ASTAM E1996 – Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.

a. Systems shall meet requirements for missiles A and B in Table 2 per referenced UFC 4-010-01.

F. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS A5.10/A5.10M - Specification for Bare Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Welding Electrodes and Rods.

G. International Code Council (ICC):

1. IBC: International Building Code, 2015.

H. International Hurricane Protection Association IHPA:

1. Recommendations. 2. Guidelines. 3. Certifications.

I. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

1. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems

J. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.

K. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code. 2. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code.

L. Puerto Rico Building Code (PRBC), Current Edition.

M. Florida Building Code (FBC), 2014 Edition.

1. HVHZ Requirements. 2. Non-HVHZ Requirements.

N. Uniform Facilities Criteria (UFC):

1. UFC 3-301-01, Structural Engineering. 2. UFC 4-010-01, 9 February 2012 with Change 1, 1 October 2013.

O. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL 325 – Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


A. Provide automatic entrance door assemblies capable of withstanding structural loads and thermal movements based on testing manufacturer's units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Automatic entrance doors consist of the manufacturer’s assembled automatic entrance door units including:

1. Entrance doors and frames. 2. Side lights and frames. 3. Door operator controls. 4. Powered door operators 5. Accessories.

C. Automatic entrance doors must be provided with full breakout door operation for emergency exiting in compliance with NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, 2012.

D. Opening-Force Requirements for Egress Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required to manually set door in motion if power fails, and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to open door to minimum required width.

E. Closing-Force Requirements: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) required to prevent door from closing.

F. Operating Range: Minus 30 deg F (Minus 34 deg C) to 130 deg F (54 deg C).

G. Thermal Movements: Provide automatic entrance doors that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

H. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.

I. Structural-Support Movement: Provide automatic door systems that accommodate structural movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection.

J. Dead Loads: Provide aluminum curtain wall system members that do not deflect an amount that will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.

1. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch (3.18-mm) clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below.

2. Provide a minimum 1/16-inch (1.59-mm) clearance between members and operable doors.

K. Exterior System Live Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.

1.5 WIND PRESSURE LOADING CRITERIA

A. Wind Pressures:


1. Wind pressures used in the strength design of the building components and cladding shall be based on ASCE 7-10 and IBC 2012.

2. Wind load constants as follows:

a. Basic Wind Speed: 159 mph. b. Exposure: C. c. Internal Pressure Coefficient: ± 0.18. d. Risk Category: II e. Base Pressure Pnet: 54.0 psf.

B. Projectile/Debris Design: Shall be tested in accordance with specified ASTM test procedures.

1. ASTM E1886 – Wind borne debris with static pressure differentials. 2. ASTM E1996 – Large and small missile tests.

1.6 BLAST PRESSURE LOADING CRITERIA

A. Force Protection: Aluminum self-supporting curtain wall systems shall perform, in conjunction with other door and frame components, in compliance with UFC 4-010-01, 9 February 2012 with Change 1, 1 October 2013 and the following loading criteria:

1. Blast pressures for the design of the aluminum curtain wall and entrance door components shall be based on the UFC 4-010-01 listed above and Technical Report PDC-TR 10-02, 19 April 2012.

a. Building Category: Primary Gathering/Controlled Perimeter. b. Standoff Distance: 67'-6 3/4". c. Applicable Explosive Weight: Level II, Table B-1, UFC 4-010-01. d. Blast Pressure: 63.0 psf, 3-second duration equivalent, ASTM F 2248 and

PDC-TR 10-02 applied as required by UFC 4-010-01 and referenced documents.

B. Blast Test: Shall be tested in accordance with DoD, GSA and ASTM test proceeds.

1. Three (3) test units 96” x 96” made up of a 3’ x 7’ door, 5’ x 6’ sidelite, 5’ x 2’ sidelite and transom passed:

a. 4.4 psi. b. 32 psi – msec impulse. c. 19 msec duration. d. DoD response – High and medium. e. GSA response – Condition 1 and 2. f. ASTM response – No hazard and minimal hazard.


A. Installer Qualifications: For installation of the automatic entrance doors, engage an experienced Installer who is an authorized representative of the manufacturer for both the installation and maintenance of the type of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Provide automatic entrance doors produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.

C. BHMA Standard: Provide automatic entrance door units that comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A156.10 (BHMA 1601), Power Operated Pedestrian Door Standard.


D. UL Standard: Provide powered door operators that comply with UL 325.

E. Design Criteria:

1. The drawings indicate the size, profile and dimensional requirements of automatic entrance doors required and are based on the specific types and models indicated.

2. Automatic entrance doors by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

F. Emergency Exit Doors:

1. Automatic entrance doors shall serve as a required means of egress shall be provided with full breakout capabilities in compliance requirements of NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, 2012 and by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide manufacturer’s certification that doors comply with these requirements.

G. Certifications: Automatic sliding door systems shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet performance design criteria in accordance with the following standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 2. NFPA 101. 3. Underwriter’s Laboratories 325 (UL) listed. 4. IBC.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. In accord with: 01340.

B. Product data for each automatic entrance required, including the manufacturer’s details and fabrication methods and the following:

1. Data on: operators, hardware, and accessories. 2. Roughing-in diagrams. 3. Parts lists. 4. Data on: finishes and recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior

surfaces.

C. Shop drawings for each automatic entrance required, including:

1. Layout and installation details, including relationship to: adjacent work. 2. Elevations at: 1/4-inch scale. 3. Detail sections of: typical composite members. 4. Anchors and reinforcement. 5. Hardware mounting heights. 6. Provisions for: expansion and contraction. 7. Glazing details.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power operator, signal, and control systems differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.

E. Hardware Schedule:

1. Submit complete hardware schedule for automatic entrance doors organized into sets based on hardware specified.

2. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish.

3. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrance doors with hardware required for the rest of the Project.


4. Include name of the item and the manufacturer and complete designations of every item required for each entrance.

F. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s maintenance and service data for door operators and control system including name, address and telephone number of the nearest authorized service representative.


A. In accord with: Sections 01600 and 01620.


A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings.

1. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the Work.

2. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace components of the automatic entrance door system that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.

B. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to:

1. Structural failures including:

a. Excessive deflection. b. Excessive leakage. c. Excessive air infiltration.

2. Faulty operation of: operators and hardware. 3. Deterioration of components including:

a. Metals and metal finishes. b. Other materials beyond normal weathering.

C. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard warranty period.

D. The warranty shall not deprive AAFES of other rights or remedies that AAFES may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and is in addition to, and runs concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Stanley Magic-Door, Division of the Stanley Works, Route 6 & Hyde Road, Farmington, CT 06032; telephone (800) 232-3663.

1. Option Proposal 2 - Food Court Entry:

a. Dura-Storm 3000 Series impact rated sliding automatic entrances with panic release hardware.


b. Dura-Storm 3000 Series door units shall be designed to resist both hurricane loading and an equivalent blast loading based on force protection standoff distance provided.

c. Dura-Storm 3000 Series door units shall be designed to provide clear opening breakout width capabilities, including operable panels and sidelites, in compliance with specified code requirements for exiting.

d. Dura-Storm 3000 Series door jambs shall be furnished in optional 6" depth to match head depth.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Members:

1. Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish.

2. Comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions; ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet of plate; and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods, and wire.

3. Provide main extrusions of not less than 0.125-inch wall thickness.

B. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.

1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125-inch thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.

2. Exposed Fasteners:

a. Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware. b. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat-head machine screws that match

the finish of member or hardware being fastened.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements:

1. Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements. 2. Where use of aluminum is not feasible, provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-

dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.

D. Sliding Weather-stripping:

1. Manufacturer’s standard replaceable weather-stripping of wool, polypropylene or nylon woven pile with nylon fabric and aluminum strip backing.

2. Sliding weather-stripping includes stripping at jamb rails, head rails and meeting rails, wherever there is no stop or lap to receive compression weather stripping.

E. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section “Glass and Glazing” of these specifications for gaskets and sealants required for glass installation at the project site.

2.3 HARDWARE

A. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled or required for operation of each entrance door, including the following items of size, number, and type recommended by the manufacturer for the service required.

B. Finish hardware items to match finish of the door.

C. Coordinate hardware requirements with Section 08710, Finish Hardware.


2.4 DOOR OPERATORS

A. Capacity: Provide operators of the size recommended by the manufacturer for:

1. Door size, weight and movement. 2. Condition of exposure. 3. For long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for the type of

occupancy indicated.

B. Exposed Housing:

1. Provide extruded or formed aluminum housing for operators of 0.062-inch minimum thickness with fasteners concealed when door is in the closed position.

2. Provide access for maintenance.

C. Adjustment Features:

1. Operators shall be fully adjustable without removal of the doors. 2. Provide adjustment for opening, closing, and checking speeds, as well as length of

time door remains open.

D. Electro-Mechanical Operators for Sliding Doors: Provide self-contained, concealed, overhead electro-mechanical belt drive unit and a microprocessor control box with power opening and either power or spring closing, and checking for both opening and closing cycles.

1. Include connections for power and control wiring. 2. Provide safety release clutch for obstructed closing. 3. Provide for easy manual sliding when power is off. 4. Provide operator action as indicated. 5. Provide emergency breakaway swing feature for exiting the building in

compliance with NFPA 101 and the authority having jurisdiction.

2.5 DOOR CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. Microwave Scanner Motion-Detecting Control System: Provide a self-contained, motion-detecting control system composed of a microwave scanner sensing device to activate door operator and threshold sensor to prevent door from closing until door is clear of traffic.

1. Sensing device shall be adjustable to provide detection patterns and sensitivity equivalent to those required for mats.

2. Provide housing for sensing device finished to match finish of doors and frames. 3. Install scanners on both interior and exterior of each automatic sliding entrance

door.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Sill Configuration at Sliding Entrance Doors:

1. Provide sill members and bottom guide system of configuration indicated. 2. Provide surface-mounted roller guide track system at sidelights and no threshold

across the door opening.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate automatic entrance door system components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.


B. Prefabrication: Provide automatic entrance doors as prefabricated packaged units complete with doors, frames, sidelights, transoms where indicated, door operators and related components, hardware, and accessories.

1. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware applications and other work before shipment to Project site.

2. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site.

3. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work in manner which prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces.

4. For hardware, perform these operations prior to application of finishes.

C. Welding:

1. Comply with AWS recommendations. 2. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. 3. Restore mechanical finish. 4. Perform welding behind finished surfaces in such a manner as to minimize

distortion and discoloration on the finished surface.

D. Reinforce the work as necessary for performance requirements and for support to the structure. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with nonmetallic separators to prevent “freeze-up” of joints.

E. Dissimilar Metals:

1. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, a suitable sealant, nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces.

2. Do not use coatings containing lead.

F. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.

G. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of contacting members.

H. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.

I. Aluminum Door, Sidelight and Transom Framing: Fabricate tubular and channel frame assembled in configuration indicated with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer’s standards.

1. Provide concealed fasteners. 2. Reinforce internally with steel shapes as indicated, or as necessary, to support the

required loads. 3. Provide glazing systems for frames to receive lights and for replacement of glass. 4. Provide for non-removal of glass from the exterior. 5. Provide type and profile of glazing system indicated to receive glazing materials

indicated.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designation of finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by “AA” conform to system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. Exterior and Interior Finishes:


1. Exterior Frames: Provide Class I anodic coating conforming to AA-M12C22A42/44, Dark Bronze Anodized Finish.


with AAMA 607.1.

2. Interior Doors and Frames: Provide Class I anodic Coating conforming to AA-M12C22A42/44, Dark Bronze Anodized Finish.


with AAMA 607.1.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.

B. Set tracks, header assemblies, operating brackets, rails and guides level and true to location with adequate anchorage’ for permanent support.

C. Set units plumb, level, and true to line without warp or rack of frames or doors.

1. Anchor securely in place. 2. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion

or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3. Align top of bottom guide section in coordination with concrete floor finishes and

building edge elevation of exterior stoop slab.

D. Install complete door operator system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, including piping, controls, control wiring, and remote power units.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. After repeated operation of completed installation, equivalent to 3 days use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles), readjust door operators and controls for optimum operating condition and safety and for a weathertight closure.

B. Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation.

B. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances.

C. Exercise care to avoid damage to coatings.

D. Comply with requirements contained in Division 8 Section “Glass and Glazing” for cleaning and maintenance of glass.

3.4 PROTECTION


A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that automatic entrance doors will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at the time of acceptance.

END 08460.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08710 – FINISH HARDWARE

FINISH HARDWARE 08710-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All finish hardware shown and indicated. b. Coordination of new hardware item templates with door and frame

manufacturers/suppliers. c. Coordination of keying with Contracting Officer, AAFES General Manager

and MacDill AFB BCE. d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for

complete installation. e. Cleaning.


1. Hardware for Door MA-05C shall be identical to that specified for Base Bid Door MA-05B (DO NOT DUPLICATE).


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide finish hardware at automatic entrance doors as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 3. Section 08211 – Flush Wood Doors. 4. Section 08305 – Access Doors. 5. Section 08331 – Overhead Rolling Grilles. 6. Section 08410 – Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts. 7. Section 08460 – Automatic Entrance Doors.


A. Supplier: Minimum ten (10) years experience in the distribution of finish hardware.

B. Supplier shall employ a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to supervise and prepare all schedules, details and services for project.

C. Reference and Standards: Where cited, and except as modified by Project Specifications, applicable standards of following organizations apply.

1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA). 4. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

D. Provide only locksets, deadlocks and cylinders that will receive Best interchangeable core systems.


1. Contractor shall retain a hardware supplier capable of supplying specified system acceptable to MacDill AFB and the Contracting Officer or designated representative and submit the following:

a. Schedule of doors, grilles and access doors requiring interchangeable cores and the number of cores per door opening.

b. Schedule shall be prepared by the acceptable hardware supplier as specified above.

c. Contractor shall check the keying schedule to ensure that no locks have been omitted prior to submittal to the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

2. The Contracting Officer or designated representative will review submittal and forward a copy of this schedule to MacDill AFB BCE for coordination of exterior mechanical and electrical room keying requirements.

3. The Contracting Officer or designated representative and AAFES General Manager will then review the schedule with the Contractor and provide information to establish desired keying arrangement for Project and approve keying schedule.

a. All locks, except those designated to be keyed separately that are controlled by MacDill AFB, are to be master keyed in one or more sets and keyed individually.

b. All keying shall be coordinated with AAFES General Manager.

4. Contractor shall purchase the interchangeable cores and keys based on the approved keying schedule and shall cause all permanent keys and interchangeable cores to be shipped to the AAFES General Manager via “Certified Mail”.

a. Shipping package shall be marked with AAFES Project Number. b. Package shall be shipped to the following address:

James E. Clark, General Manager Army and Air Force Exchange Service 3108 N. Boundary Blvd., Building 926 MacDill AFB, FL 33608

5. Contractor shall provide temporary construction cores to secure door openings until such time as the Contracting Officer or designated representative authorizes the Contractor to install permanent cores.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item of hardware.

1. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with specified requirements.

2. Include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finishes.

C. Hardware Schedule: submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated herein and coordinate hardware with doors, frames and other related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware products.

1. Submit hardware schedule based of finish hardware indicated, organized into hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door opening including:


a. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on

floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes and other data contained in

the schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information.

2. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date as acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the project construction schedule and include:

a. Product data, samples and shop drawings of other work affected by finish hardware.

b. Other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule.

D. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to fabricator of doors and frames to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware.

1. If necessary, check shop drawings of other work for compliance with this Section. 2. Confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of

hardware.


A. Accept all new materials at site and provide personnel to unload, handle and store materials.

B. Storage shall be in accordance with 01620.

C. Hardware supplier shall package and label each item of hardware separately.

1. Tag each item in accordance with approved hardware schedule. 2. Each package shall contain appropriate fastenings, instructions and installation

templates.

D. Should markings on any item become separated from item after delivery, Contractor shall return item to supplier for remarking before attempting to install.

E. Supplier shall deliver a final schedule to Contracting Officer and Contractor when hardware is delivered.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Various items specified for this Project will require coordination between manufacturers of those products, the hardware supplier and the Contractor including:

1. Factory preparation of non-rated hollow metal frames specified in Section 08100, Metal Doors & Frames.

2. Factory preparation of non-rated wood doors specified in Section 08211, Flush Wood Doors.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with hardware supplier and all other suppliers listed above shall cooperate to ensure that hardware items are provided and installed as indicated.


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall warrant installation to be free from defects due to faulty workmanship or materials for a period of 2 years.

B. All such defects shall be repaired or replaced immediately after written notice.

C. Hardware manufacturer shall provide a written 10-year warranty for door closers.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED HARDWARE

A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware is indicated in the Finish Hardware Data Sheet and Hardware Schedule at the end of this Section.

B. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of one or more manufacturers for each hardware type required.

2.2 MATERIAL AND FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Door Handing:

a. Drawings show direction of swing or hand of each door leaf. b. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door

movement as shown.

2. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable to Contracting Officer or designated representative.

a. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. b. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method

indicated.

1.) Use manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness.

2.) In no case use metals of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI A156 series standard for each type hardware item and with ANSI A156.18 for finish designations indicated.

c. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated.

3. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation.

a. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws except as specifically indicated.

4. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item.

a. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. b. Finish screws exposed under any condition to match hardware finish or, if

exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as possible.

c. Include items "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish.


5. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners.

a. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work.

b. In such cases, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.

6. Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of finish hardware.

2.3 HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOTS

A. Templates: Provide only template-produced units.

B. Screws: Except as otherwise indicated provide screws as follows:

1. Furnish Phillips flat-head machine screws for installation of units to metal. 2. Furnish Phillips flat-head wood screws for installation of units into wood. 3. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.

C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:

1. Steel Hinges: Steel pins. 2. Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. 3. Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. 4. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 5. Number of hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated.

a. Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 84” or less in height. b. One additional hinge for all doors greater than 84” in height.

6. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.

2.4 LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS

A. Locks and Latches: Heavy duty mortise type, anti-friction latch bolts with lever handle.

1. All locksets, latchsets and cylinders shall be the product of one manufacturer. 2. Certifications: ANSI A156.13, 1987, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 3 Security. 3. Backset: 2 3/4 inches. 4. All locksets and cylinders shall have 7 Pin removable core cylinders furnished with

construction cores.

B. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set.

1. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold conditions require the use of non-recessed strike for bolt.

C. Lock Throw:

1. Provide ¾ " minimum throw of latch and 1” minimum throw of deadbolts unless designated otherwise.

2. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.


2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: All new cylinders and mortised locks shall have 7-pin Best interchangeable core systems as indicated with temporary construction cores and keying furnished.

B. Coordination:

1. Contractor shall coordinate with the Contracting Officer or designated representative, MacDill AFB BCE and the hardware supplier for cylinder keyway requirements as indicated in Paragraph 1.3 above.

2. Contractor shall coordinate with the Contracting Officer, AAFES General Manager and AAFES Store Manager and the hardware supplier for keying requirements.

3. Prior to occupancy, Contractor shall deliver all permanent interchangeable cores and keys from factory to AAFES General Manager as set forth in Paragraph 1.3, D., 4. above.

a. Contractor shall submit typewritten confirmation of shipping transmittal to Contracting Officer and designated representative.

b. Include scheduled dates and times when permanent cylinders and interchangeable cores will be installed at the Project Site.

c. Contractor shall coordinate dates for installation of permanent cores with the Contracting Officer or designated representative, AAFES General Manager and AAFES Store Manager.

4. Contractor shall remove temporary construction cores and install the permanent interchangeable cores at the coordinated dates and times arranged above.

C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver.

D. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.

E. Key Quantity and Inscription:

1. Furnish three (3) change keys for each lock. 2. Five (5) master keys for each master system. 3. Stamp keys with change number and the inscription “U.S. Property-Do Not

Duplicate”.

2.6 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES

A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard sex nut and bolt fastener for closer installation.

B. Size of Units:

1. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use.

2. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard arms.

2.7 DOOR TRIM UNITS

A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws.

B. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1 1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated.

1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage), beveled three sides.


2.8 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Finish of all hardware shall be:

1. Aluminum Entrances shall receive hardware finished to match aluminum door finish including hinges, closers, overhead stops, panic devices, pulls, metal components of weather stripping and thresholds.

2. All other doors shall receive hardware finished in BMHA 626 (US26D), Satin Chrome for all items unless indicated otherwise.

B. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated.

1. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening.

2. In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set for color and texture.

C. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI A156.18 "Materials & Finishes Standard", including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.

2.9 MANUFACTURER

A. Catalog numbers of manufacturers listed in Columns 1, 2 and 3 have been used to establish quality required.

1. Only manufacturers listed are approved. 2. Other manufacturers seeking approval shall do so in writing per General

Requirements and shall list exact catalog numbers and description of items proposed to furnish.

ITEM 1 2 3 Hinges Hager Lawrence Stanley Locks Corbin-Russwin Sargent Schlage Cylinders Best ------------- ------------- Exit Devices Corbin/ Russwin Sargent Von Duprin Closers Corbin/Russwin LCN Sargent Door Operators Stanley ------------- ------------- Flush Bolt Baldwin Glynn-Johnson Ives Overhead Stops Arch. Bldrs. Glynn-Johnson Sargent Wall Stops Baldwin Glynn-Johnson Ives Push/Pulls Ives Hager Rockwood Kick-plates Baldwin Hager Rockwood Threshold National Pemko Reese Weatherstrips National Pemko Reese Paddlelocks Corbin/Russwin Schlage Sargent Peepholes Baldwin Rockwood Ives

B. Designations: Following abbreviations identify listed manufacturers.

ABH Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. Elk Grove Village, IL BAL Baldwin Hardware Mfg. Corp., Reading, PA BES Stanley/Best Access Solutions Indianapolis, IN


COR Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Berlin, CT 06037 GJ Glynn-Johnson, Div. of Dayton-Walter Corp., Chicago, IL 60640 HAG Hager Hinge Co. St. Louis, MO 63104 IVE Ives, Div. Of Leigh Products, New Haven, CT 06508 LAW Lawrence Brothers, Inc. Sterling, IL 61081 LCN LCN Closer Princeton, IL 61356 NAT National Guard Products, Memphis, TN 38107 PEM Pemko Ventura, CA 93003 REE Reese Enterprises, Inc. Rosemount, MN 55068 ROC Rockwood Manufacturing Company Rockwood, PA 15557 SAR Sargent, Div. Of Kidde, New Haven, CT 06511 SCH Schlage Lock Company Barrington, IL 60010 STA Stanley Hardware New Britain, CT 06050 VON Von Duprin Indianapolis, IN 46225

2.10 PRODUCTS

A. Hinges:

1. Hinges: Non-ferrous, stainless steel pin, ball bearing, full mortise, non-removable pin, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) HAG – BB 1191. 2.) LAW – LH191BB. 3.) STA – RPFBB191.

2. Hinges: Steel, steel pin, ball bearing, full mortise, 4-1/2” x 4-1/2”, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) HAG – BB1279. 2.) LAW – LH179BB. 3.) STA – RPFBB179.

B. Locks:

1. Lockset: Mortised, extra heavy-duty, office function F04, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ML2051 x LSR. 2.) SCH – L9050 x 03L. 3.) SAR – 8205 x LE2J.


2. Lockset: Mortised, extra heavy-duty, classroom lock function F05, BMHA 626, (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ML 2055 x LSR. 2.) SCH – L9070 x 03L. 3.) SAR – 8237 x LE2J.

3. Lockset: Mortised, extra heavy-duty, privacy function F19, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ML2060 x LSR. 2.) SCH – L9040 x 03L. 3.) SAR – 8265 x LE2J.

4. Lockset: Mortised, extra heavy-duty, storeroom lock function F07, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ML 2057 x LSR. 2.) SCH – L9080 x 03L. 3.) SAR – 8204 x LE3/4J.

5. Latchset: Mortised, extra heavy-duty, passage function F01, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ML 2017 x LSB. 2.) SCH – L9010 x 03. 3.) SAR – 8215 x LNJ.

C. Cylinders:

1. Cylinder: Mortise type, BMHA 626 (US26D) with Aluminum Cylinder Scalps to match Doors.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) BES – 1E Series.

2. Cylinder: Mortise type, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:


3. Cylinder: Mortise type, BMHA 626 (US26D) with Aluminum Cylinder Scalps to match Doors and thumb turn release.

a. Manufacturers:


D. Exit Devices:

1. Exit Device: Rim exit device, key and lever operation, mortised strike, entrance/classroom lock function F08, satin chrome finish.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ED 5000 Series, ED5200 x L9M. 2.) SAR – 80 Series, 8813 x ETJ. 3.) VON – 98 Series, 98L x 03.


2. Exit Device: Rim exit device, lever operation, mortised strike, passage lock function F14, satin chrome finish.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ED 5000 Series, ED5200L x L9M. 2.) SAR – 80 Series, 8815 x ETJ. 3.) VON – 98 Series x 98L x 03.

3. Exit Device: Mortise lock exit device, key and lever operation, outside trim operation in alarm mode, 9-volt battery powered internal alarm horn and keyed alarm activation switch with indicator lamp, low battery indicator, entrance/classroom lock function F08, satin chrome finish.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – ED 5000 Series, ED5600L x M61 x L9M. 2.) SAR – 80 Series, 8913 x AL x ETJ. 3.) VON – 98 Series x 9875L x ALK x 03.

E. Closers:

1. Closer: Non-sized, parallel arm, metal cover, BMHA 626 (US26S).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – DC6210. 2.) LCN – 4110N. 3.) SAR – 1430/1431.

F. Door Operators:

1. Door Operator: Automatic, low energy self-contained unit with 6-inch header case in dark bronze anodized finish and 4 1/2-inch square wall-mounted push plate activation device.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) STA – Magic-Force Series.

G. Stops:

1. Doorstop: Overhead, concealed mounted, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) ABH – 1000 Series – 1023. 2.) GJ – 100 Series – 104S. 3.) SAR – 690 Series – 698S.

2. Doorstop: Wall mount, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) BAL – 4293. 2.) ROC – 404. 3.) IVE – WS402.

H. Push/Pulls:

1. Push: Wrought, .050” thick, beveled edges, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) IVE – 8200 – 3 ½” x 15” Push. 2.) HAG – 30S – 3 ½” x 15” Push. 3.) ROC – 70B – 3 ½” x 15” Push.


2. Pull: 1” diameter offset, cast, BMHA 626 (US26D)

a. Manufacturers:

1.) IVE – 8190HD – 1”ø x 2 ¾” x 3” Offset x 10”. 2.) HAG – 12J – 1” ø x 2 ¾” x 3” Offset x 10”. 3.) ROC – BF157 – 1” ø x 2 ¾” x 3” Offset x 10”.

I. Kickplates:

1. Kickplate: Bronze, .050” thick, beveled three sides, 10” high x 2” less door width, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) BAL – 2001. 2.) HAG – 193S. 3.) ROC – K1050.

2. Kickplate: Bronze, .050” thick, beveled three sides, 36” high x 2” less door width, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) BAL – 2001. 2.) HAG – 193S. 3.) ROC – K1050.

J. Threshold:

1. Threshold: Flat saddle, aluminum, 5” wide x ½” high, mill finish aluminum.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) NAT – 425E. 2.) PEM – 171A. 3.) REE – S205A.

2. Threshold: Flat half-saddle, aluminum, 5” wide x ½” high, mill finish aluminum.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) NAT – 350. 2.) PEM – 255A. 3.) REE – S245A.

K. Weatherstrip:

1. Weatherstrip Sill Protection: Nylon brush gasket, 45-degree, bottom channel surface mount, clear anodized aluminum.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) NAT – A626A. 2.) PEM – 45062NB. 3.) REE – 970C.

2. Weatherstrip Jamb Protection: Head and jambs, surface mount, clear anodized aluminum, neoprene insert.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) NAT – 127NA. 2.) PEM – 305R. 3.) REE – DS70C.


3. Weatherstrip Door Edge Astragal: Meeting stile, surface mount, clear anodized aluminum, vinyl insert.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) NAT – 158VA. 2.) PEM – 355CV. 3.) REE – 276C.

L. Flush Bolt:

1. Flush, recessed, inactive leaf, top and bottom, extruded brass, 12 inch long rod, dustproof floor strike, BMHA 626 (US26D).

a. Manufacturers:

1.) BAL – 0600-XXX 2.) GJ – FB9 3.) IVE – 457

M. Paddlelock:

1. Heavy duty, interchangeable core, solid brass with hardened steel shackle.

a. Manufacturers:

1.) COR – PL5090. 2.) SCH – PL4000. 3.) SAR – 63758.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine all doors, frames and hardware for damage, defects, and suitability for intended use.

B. Restore all parts or items found damaged, defective, or inadequate, or replace with good material before installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Heights given are centerline heights up from finish floor unless stated:

1. Heights given “Number to Number” indicate that all shall be at one height within limits given.

2. Where heights of items are not listed, mount in accord with recommendations of the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).

a. Bottom Hinge – 10 to 13 inches. b. Top Hinge – 6 to 8 inches down from head. c. Intermediate Hinges – Equally spaced. d. Door Lever – 36 to 40-5/16 inches.

B. Fitting: Fit all hardware accurately and properly.

1. Remove exposed parts until after painter’s finishing is completed, then reinstall. 2. Securely fasten all fixed parts. 3. Fit faces of mortised parts snug and flush. 4. Make sure operating parts move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking or

excessive clearance.


C. Adjusting and Finishing: After work has been otherwise completed, examine all hardware for complete and proper installation.

1. Lubricate bearing surfaces of moving parts. 2. Adjust latching and holding devices to proper function. 3. Adjust door control devices to proper speed and power. 4. Test keys for conformance to approved keying system. 5. Clean all exposed surfaces, check for surface damage and polish.

D. Thresholds:

1. Install in one continuous piece, full width of opening. 2. Set exterior thresholds in full bed of mastic and fasten with matching countersunk

anchors at 6 inches on center. 3. Adhere interior thresholds to concrete slab with construction adhesive and fasten

with matching countersunk anchors at 6 inches on center.

3.3 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Where hardware is found defective in materials or installation; rework, restore or replace or otherwise correct as directed.

B. Following will be considered as defective materials:

1. Unauthorized substitutes. 2. Items delivered with missing, broken, damaged or defaced parts. 3. Items of incorrect hand or function.

C. Following will be considered as defective installation:

1. Items broken, damaged or defaced: after delivery. 2. Items incomplete, misaligned or incorrectly located.

3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Where a pair of doors is installed, items listed shall be provided for both leafs, except lockset or exit device on inactive leaf as indicated and flush bolt on adjacent active leaf.

B. SEE SECTION 08410, ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS & ENTRANCE DOORS, AND SECTION 08460, AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS, FOR ADDITIONAL DOOR HARDWARE BY ALUMINUM DOOR SUPPLIER.

C. Base Bid:

GROUP 1: Door FC-33 (WD x HM)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2. Exit Device: #1. Cylinder: #2. Closer: #1. Stop: #2. Kickplate: #1 (Outside Face) #2 (Inside Face).






GROUP 4: Door FC-16 & FC-17 (Pair HM x HM)

Hinges: 3 pr., #1. Lock: #4 (Active Leaf). Closer: #1 (Each Leaf). Stop: #1 (Each Leaf). Kickplate: #1 (Each Leaf). Threshold: #1. Weatherstrip: #1 & #2 Weatherstrip: #3 (Active Leaf). Flush Bolt: #1.

GROUP 5: Door FC-20 & MA-28B (Pair HM x HM)

Hinges: 3 pr. #1. Exit Device: #3. (Active Leaf) Cylinder: #2 (Active Leaf). Closer: #1 (Each Leaf). Stop: #1 (Each Leaf). Kickplate: #2 (Each Leaf). Threshold: #2. Weatherstrip: #1 & #2. Weatherstrip: #3 (Active Leaf). Flush Bolt: #1.

GROUP 6: Door FC-21B, FC-43A, MA-25, MA-26 & MA-43A (HM x HM)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #1. Lock: #1. Closer: #1. Stop: #1. Threshold: #1. Weatherstrip: #1 & #2.

GROUP 7: Door FC-22, FC-25, FC-28, MA-14 & MA-39 (WD x HM)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2. Lock: #4. Closer: #1. Stop: #2. Kickplate: #1 (Each Face).

GROUP 8: Door FC-23, FC-29, FC-30, MA-13 & MA-17 (WD x HM)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2. Push/Pull: #1 & #2. Closer: #1. Stop: #2. Kickplate: #1 (Each Face).


GROUP 9: Door FC-26 & FC-27 (WD x HM)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2. Lock: #3. Closer: #1. Stop: #2. Kickplate: #1.

GROUP 10: Door FC-31, FC-32 & FC-43B (WD x HM)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2. Lock: #2. Closer: #1. Stop: #2. Kickplate: #1 (Each Face).

GROUP 11: Door FC-42 (HM x WD)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2. Lock: #5. Closer: #1. Stop: #2. Kickplate: #1 (Inside Face) #2 (Outside Face).

GROUP 12: Door MA-02, MA-08, MA-22A, MA-24A & MA-43B (AL x AL Rolling Grille)

Cylinder: #1 (2 per Opening).

GROUP 13: Door MA-03, MA-09, MA-12A, MA-12B, MA-20 & MA-22B (WD x HM)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2. Lock: #5. Closer: #1. Stop: #1.

GROUP 14: Door MA-05A, MA-10, MA-11, MA-21, MA-23, MA-30, MA-38 & MA-41A (AL x AL)

Cylinder: #3.

GROUP 15: Door MA-05B (AL x AL)

Cylinder: #1.

GROUP 16: Door MA-19 (WD x HM)


GROUP 17: Door MA-27 & MA-33 (WD x HM)


GROUP 18: Door MA-31, MA-34, MA-35 & MA-37 (WD x HM)



GROUP 19: MA-11 (AL x AL)

Cylinder: #3. Door Operator: #1.

GROUP 20: Door FC-21A (WD x HM)

Hinges: 1 ½ pr., #2. Lock: #2. (Keyed inside FC-21) Closer: #1. Stop: #1. Kickplate: #1 (Each Face).

D. Dumpster Enclosure:

Paddelocks: #1 (Each Leaf).


1. Contractor shall provide the same hardware specified in Section 08410, Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts and the same hardware group specified herein (GROUP 15) for both Base Bid Door MA-05B and Option Proposal 1 door MA-05C (DO NOT DUPLICATE).

F. Option Proposal 2:

GROUP 15: Door FC-01C (AL x AL)

Cylinder: #1. END 08710.

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08800 – GLASS & GLAZING

GLASS & GLAZING 08800-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Glazing for exterior aluminum storefront doors and sidelites. b. Interior glazing for aluminum storefront doors, sidelites and transoms. c. Glazing for interior aluminum storefront view windows. d. Glazing for view lites in doors. e. Protection of glazing at all aluminum storefront doors, sidelites and transoms

scheduled to remain during construction. f. All other related accessory items such as fasteners, clips, setting blocks,

glazing beads and other items of installation to complete glazing work for the Project.

g. Glass Cleaning.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor shall provide protection for exterior door, sidelight and transom glazing at existing and new entrances related to work under this Option.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide exterior glazing for door, sidelight and transoms at automatic entrance doors as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 4. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 5. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 6. Section 08211 – Flush Wood Doors. 7. Section 08410 – Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts. 8. Section 08460 – Automatic Entrance Doors. 9. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems.


A. Safety Glass:

1. Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201 for Category II materials.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety units permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


B. Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations as follows:

1. FGMA Publications: “FGMA Glazing Manual”. 2. SIGMA Publications: TM-3000, “Vertical Glazing Guidelines”.

C. Fire Resistive Glazing Products for Door Assemblies:

1. Products identical to those tested per ASTM E152. 2. Fire resistive glazing units shall be listed and labeled by UL or other testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Insulating Glass Certification: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either in spacers or at least on component lite of units with appropriate certification label of one of the following inspecting and testing agencies:

1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). 2. Associated Laboratories (ALI). 3. National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL).

E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated:

1. Primary glass of each type and class indicated per ASTM C 1036. 2. Heat-treated glass of each condition indicated per ASTM C 1048. 3. Insulating glass of each construction indicated.

F. Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General:

1. Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading without failure.

2. Included in these requirements are loss or glass breakage attributable to the following:

a. Defective manufacturer fabrication. b. Installation defects. c. Failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight. d. Deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in glazing installation.

B. Glass Design:

1. Glass thicknesses are indicated or, where not indicated, shall be the minimum thickness required for installation.

2. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions.

C. Provide glass lites for the various size opening in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to meet or exceed the following:

1. Minimum nominal glass thickness of lites in exterior opening shall be ¼ inch. 2. Minimum nominal glass thickness of lites, whether compose of annealed or heat-

treated glass, are selected so the worst case probability of failure does not exceed:

a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind loading.

b. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300.


c. For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass per glass manufacturer’s standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 base on types of glass.

D. Thermal Movement:

1. Design glazing based on normal thermal movement results in ambient and surface temperatures acting of glass, framing members and glazing components for temperature change range as follows:

a. 120 degrees F, ambient. b. 180 degrees F, material surfaces.

2. Base engineering calculations on actual material surface temperature due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s Data, Glass:

1. Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each type of glass required.

2. Include test data substantiating that glass complies with specified requirements.

B. Manufacturer’s Data, Glazing Materials:

1. Submit manufacturer’s specifications, and installation instructions for each type of glazing sealant and compound, gasket and associated miscellaneous material.

2. Include manufacturer’s published data, or letter of certification, or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies with the project specifications and is suitable for the applications shown.

C. Samples, Glass:

1. Submit 4-inch minimum square samples of each type of glass specified. 2. Insulating glass need not be hermetically sealed but edge construction shall be

included.

D. Samples, Glazing Materials:

1. Submit 4-inch minimum long samples of each color specified (except black) for each type of glazing sealant or gasket exposed to view.

2. Install sample between two strips of material similar to or representative of channel surfaces where sealant or gasket will be used, held apart to represent typical joint widths.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Temperature Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of liquid sealants when temperatures are below or above manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation.

B. Maintain security of buildings prior to installation of glazing products.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the owner may have under the Contact Documents.


B. Provide manufacturer’s ten (10) year warranty against seal separation for all insulated glass products used on project.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass that complies with ASTM C 1036 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, class, quality, form, finish and pattern, where applicable.

B. Clear Float Glass:

1. Type I: Transparent glass, flat. 2. Class 1: Clear. 3. Quality: q3 glazing select.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. Pilkington Building Products. 3. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Oldcastle.

2.2 TEMPERED GLASS

A. Tempered glass: ¼ inch thick, clear, meeting Federal Standards 16 CFR 1201 Category I or II.

1. Applications:

a. Interior aluminum storefront doors, sidelites and transoms. b. Interior aluminum storefront view windows. c. Interior door lites.

B. Acceptable products:

1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. 3. Pilkington Building Products 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Oldcastle.

2.3 LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS

A. Laminated glass: Nominal ¼ inch thick, clear lite panels complying with the Consumer Product Safety commission 16 CFR 1201 and the requirements of ANSI Z-97.1.

B. Laminated glass shall be constructed in a three layer system:

1. Outboard and inboard pane bonded together by a tough, durable polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer, .030” thick.

C. Laminated glass shall be used for construction of insulating glass units specified below.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.


3. Pilkington Building Products. 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Viracon, Inc. 6. Oldcastle.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Construct nominal 1-inch units of two panes of ¼-inch laminated glass with air space between.

1. Exterior Automatic Doors, Sidelites and Transoms:

a. Subject to regulatory requirements:

1.) Exterior pane: ¼” tempered (Light Bronze Tint). 2.) Interior pane: ¼” laminated (1/8” Coated Clear Low E-Surface 5,

0.030 Clear PVB, 1/8” Clear).

2. Exterior Entry Doors and Sidelights:

a. Subject to regulatory requirements:

1.) Exterior pane: ¼” tempered (Light Bronze Tint). 2.) Interior pane: ¼” laminated (1/8” Coated Clear Low E-Surface 5,

0.030 Clear PVB, 1/8” Clear).

B. Minimum performance characteristics:

1. Thermal:

a. U-factor (summer daytime): 0.34. b. U-factor (winter nighttime): 0.34. c. Shading Coefficient: 0.56. d. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.48. e. Visible light transmittance (Vtc): 50 percent. f. Outdoor reflectance: 10 percent.

2. Optical:

a. Visible light transmittance (Vtc): 50 percent. b. Outdoor reflectance: 10 percent. c. Indoor reflectance: 15 percent. d. Total solar transmittance: 35 percent. e. Outside total solar reflectance: 9 percent. f. Ultraviolet transmittance: < 1 percent.


1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. 2. Pilkington Building Products 3. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Guardian Industries Corp. 5. Curtain wall and automatic door manufacturer’s standard glazing suppliers will be

considered acceptable manufacturers after providing written certification of compliance with requirements set forth herein.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS/COMPOUNDS

A. Provide color selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer’s standard colors.


B. Provide only compounds that are proven to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted.

C. Silicone Base Sealant:

1. Silicone base, single component, chemical curing; capable of withstanding movement of up to 50 percent of joint width and satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 to 80 F.

2. Shore A hardness of maximum 50 durometers. 3. Non-staining color with color selected by Contracting Officer or designated

representative from manufacturer’s standard. 4. Acceptable manufacturers and products:

a. General Electric “Silpruf”. b. General Electric “Silglaze 2400”. c. Woodmont Products “Chem-Caul 1000”. d. Dow Corning “790”. e. Pecora “863”.

5. Refer also to Type S-3 Sealants specified in Section 07920 for silicone sealant products used for field glazing.

D. Preformed Butyl Rubber Glazing Sealant:

1. Tape or ribbon (coiled on release paper) of polymerized butyl, of mixture of butyl and polyisobutylene, compounded with inert fillers and pigments, solvent based with minimum of 95% solids, with thread of fabric reinforcement, tack-free within 24 hours, paintable, non-staining.

2. Provide combination tape and encased continuos rubber shim, of approximately 50 durometer hardness.

2.6 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Provide glazing gaskets recommended by manufacturer.

B. Molded Neoprene Glazing Gaskets:

1. Molded or extruded neoprene gaskets of profile and hardness shown for watertight construction; comply with ASTM D 2000 designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 620, black.

C. Polyvinyl Chloride Glazing Gaskets:

1. Extruded, flexible PVC gaskets of the profile and hardness shown for watertight construction; comply with ASTM D 2287.

D. Vinyl Foam Glazing Tape:

1. Closed cell, flexible, self adhesive, non-extruding, polyvinyl chloride foam tape; recommended by manufacturer for exterior, exposed, watertight, installation of glass, with only nominal pressure in the glazing channel, comply with ASTM D 1667.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 79-90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used.

B. Spacers: Neoprene 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used.


C. Compressible Filler Rod: Closed cell or waterproof, jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 510 psi compression strength for 25% deflection.

D. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing, removal stop design, and the conditions under which the glazing will be performed.

B. Ensure that all existing glazing components, face covers and glazing stops in existing aluminum storefront frames are prepared and ready to accept new glazing installation.

C. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing of all conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

D. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3.2 JOB REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide secure and airtight installation of each piece of glass.

B. Each installation shall withstand normal temperature changes, loading, impact loading (for operation doors) without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain secure and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.

C. Protect glass from edge damage at all time during handling, installation and operation of the building.

D. Glazing channel dimensions indicated provide for a minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Be responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and dimensions established.

E. Comply with combined recommendation of glass manufacturer and manufacture of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where manufacturer’s technical representative direct otherwise.

F. Comply with “Glazing Manual” by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by the manufacturer of the glass and glazing materials.

G. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation and eliminate all that have observable edge damage or face imperfections.

H. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces.


3.3 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING

A. Clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing.

1. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. 2. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomeric sealants are used.

B. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.4 GLAZING

A. Comply with ANSI Standard Z97.1- (Current Edition) Safety Glazing Code.

B. Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. Set blocks in thin course of the heel bead compound.

C. Glazing shall be set with equal bearing for entire width.

D. Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing.

E. Provide 1/8 in. minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

F. Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compounded by forming voids or installing filler rods in the channel at the heel of jambs and heads (do not leave voids in the sill channels) except as otherwise indicated, depending on light size, thickness and type of glass, and complying with manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass that is chemically strengthened, tempered, or heat strengthened.

H. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete “wetting” or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

1. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial “wash” away from the glass.

2. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.

3. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation and eliminate stains and discolorations.

I. Wedge shaped gaskets:

1. Where driven into one side of the channel to pressurize the sealant or gasket on the opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not “walk” out when subjected to dynamic movement.

2. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesive, including embedment of gasket tail in cured heel bead.


3.5 CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.

B. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers to framing held away from glass and do not apply markers of any type to surfaces of glass.

C. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

D. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute (by washoff) to the deterioration of glazing materials and other work.

E. Wash and polish both faces of glass not more than four days prior to Contracting Officer or designated representative’s acceptance of the work in each area.

1. Comply with glass manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Washing shall be performed by a professional firm.

END 08800.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09250 – GYPSUM DRYWALL

GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All heavy duty drywall stud framing for interior partitions. b. All miscellaneous light gauge steel framing for ceilings and soffits. c. All gypsum board ceiling suspension systems and related light gauge metal

framing members. d. All gypsum fire-rated and fire-rated/water resistant gypsum drywall for

ceilings, interior soffits, walls and partitions systems. e. All cementitious backer board for low walls in food concepts and back-of-

house areas. f. All fasteners, beads, trim, control joints and related accessory items

necessary to complete the work of this Section.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide light gauge metal framing for ceiling as indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide heavy duty drywall stud framing for interior partitions, light gauge metal framing for ceiling and soffit, and fire-rated gypsum drywall as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork. 6. Section 07210 – Building Insulation. 7. Section 07270 – Firestopping. 8. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 9. Division 8 – Doors & Windows. 10. Division 9 – Finishes. 11. Division 10 – Specialties. 12. Division 15 – Mechanical. 13. Division 16 – Electrical.


A. Installation: Installation and application of materials specified shall be in accord with latest printed directions and specifications of manufacturers.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings:


1. Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File No's. in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals in accordance with provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Complete manufacturers’ product data for each product installed under work of this Section including:

1. Gypsum drywall products. 2. Gypsum drywall accessories. 3. Gypsum drywall framing and suspension systems.

C. Certification and Instructions:

1. Manufacturers’ certification stating that materials furnished comply with standards set forth in these specifications.

2. Manufacturer’s printed instruction for installation.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes.

C. Neatly stack gypsum board panels flat to prevent sagging.

D. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.

E. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.


A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Minimum Room Temperatures:

1. For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C).

2. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete.


C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials.

D. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Steel Framing and Furring:

a. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems. b. Consolidated Fabricators Corporation (CONFAB). c. Craco Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products:

a. Georgia Pacific Building Products. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. United States Gypsum Co.

2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

A. Ceiling suspension systems may be used, at Contractor’s option, to furr down gypsum drywall ceilings in lieu of using heavy duty gypsum drywall stud sections.

B. General: Provide components, which comply with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

D. Grid Suspension System: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members which interlock to form a modular supporting network.

E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following fire rated products:

Manufacturer Product

1. Chicago Metallic Corp. 650 Furring System 2. United States Gypsum Co. Wall-to-Wall-Heavy Duty 3. Armstrong World Industries Drywall Grid System-Heavy Duty

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS

A. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645, of profile, size, and base metal thickness required to produce assemblies complying with structural performance requirements, with sectional properties computed to conform with AISI "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

1. Steel Studs, Perimeter Wall Furring and Runners: 33 ksi heavy duty drywall stud with 1 1/4” wide flange with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:

a. Thickness: 30 mil (nominal).


b. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch. c. Depth: 1 5/8", 2 1/2", 3 5/8”, 4" and 6” or as otherwise indicated.

2. Miscellaneous Framing: 50 ksi, standard duty drywall stud with 1 1/4” wide flange with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:

a. Thickness: 19 mil (nominal). b. Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0200 inch. c. Depth: 1 5/8", 2 1/2”, 3 5/8” or as otherwise indicated.

3. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped furring members with slotted or non-slotted web, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M) for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and as follows:

a. Thickness: 25 gauge unless otherwise indicated. b. Face flange: 1 1/4”. c. Wall-attachment flange: 3/4”. d. Depth: 1”, 1 1/2” unless indicated otherwise on drawings or required to fit

conditions of construction.

B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated.

2.4 GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end joints.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, and as follows:

1. Type: Type “X” for all assemblies. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 5/8” or as indicated. 4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

products for Type “X” gypsum wallboard:

a. "ToughRock FireGuard”; Georgia Pacific Building Products. b. "Gold Bond Fire-Shield"; National Gypsum Co. c. "Sheetrock Brand Firecode Gypsum Panels "; United States Gypsum Co.

5. Provide water resistant, fire resistant core gypsum drywall, subject to requirements listed above, at all locations to receive ceramic tile and fiberglass reinforced wall panels (FRP).

C. Backer Board: Cementitious, water durable, board; surfaced with fiberglass reinforcing mesh on front and back; long edges wrapped; and complying with ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1325

1. Type: Cementitious Tile Backer Board, Edges: Tapered. 2. Thickness: 5/8” or as indicated. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

products for cementitious backer board:

a. “DensShield Tile Backer”; Georgia Pacific Building Products.


b. “PermaBase Cement Board”; National Gypsum Co. c. “DUROCK Cement Board”; United States Gypsum Co.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction that comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board.

B. Corner-bead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:

1. Material: Formed metal complying with the following requirement:

a. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process.

2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047:

a. "LC" or “L” Bead (USG #200A), unless otherwise indicated.

3. One-Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047, with slot opening covered with removable strip.

C. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002.

2.6 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated.

B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape.

C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-prepackaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.

1. Ready-Mix Formulation: Factory-premixed product. 2. Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. 3. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners

and flanges of corner beads and edge trim. 4. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 5. All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset wood and hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction.


3.2 PREPARATION


A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceiling.

B. Verify that all installations are level, plumb and within specified tolerances to receive installations specified for this Project.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work, at unsupported edges of structural exterior wall sheathing and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co.

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details shown on Drawings:

1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters or penetration of structural elements.

2. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.

D. Anchor framing tracks so that they do not bridge building expansion and control joints by anchoring tracks to one side only for all runs.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR FURRED AND SUSPENDED CEILINGS

A. Drywall Stud Furring: Contractor may use heavy duty drywall stud framing for furring ceilings in lieu of using grid suspension systems.

1. Frame ceilings for finish ceiling heights indicated. 2. Follow similar procedures for installation of drywall stud framing used to furr

ceilings as specified below for installation of steel framing for partitions.

B. Grid Suspension System: At Contractor’s option, suspension system may be used to furr ceilings by attaching perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces.

C. Joining: Mechanically join main beam and cross furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS

A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction.

1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall.

B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surface do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing.


C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings.

D. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceilings to provide support for gypsum board.

E. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard.

F. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be installed in the direction opposite to that of the flange.

G. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.

H. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on doorframes; install runner track section (for cripple studs) and header at head and secure to jamb studs.

1. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.

2. Provide continuous wood blocking attached to steel framing as indicated for fastening finish wood and other materials.

I. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated, or if none indicated, in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CEMENT BACKER BOARD

A. Install backer board from floor to 2’-0” above finish floor in areas indicated in compliance with ASTM C 1280, GA-253 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten backer board to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install backer boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction

abuts structural elements. 3. Install backer boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar

materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Horizontal Installation: Abut ends of backer boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing.

1. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 2. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch

from edges and ends of boards.

C. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

3.7 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install boards with end joints staggered over studs in manner that minimizes the number of end-butt joints or avoid them entirely where possible.

1. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls as possible.


2. Stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board.

C. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner that minimizes the number of end-butt joints.

1. Avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. 2. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches.

D. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out.

1. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. 2. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16

inch open space between boards. 3. Do not force into place.

E. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints.

1. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends.

2. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. 3. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.

F. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first.

G. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts.

H. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.

I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls that are braced internally.

1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. area, and may be limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage.

2. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments.

1. Provide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. 2. Seal joints with acoustical sealant.

K. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.

3.8 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION

A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows:

1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible.

2. On partitions/walls or walls furred with resilient channels apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths that will minimize end joints.

3. On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints.


4. On z-furring members apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods:

1. Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: 2. Fasten with screws.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports or otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install corner beads at external corners.

C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed.

D. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound.

1. Install "LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.

2. Install "L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed.

3. Install “F” molding where new gypsum board edge abuts aluminum curtain wall door jambs and door head at interior side of existing wall construction.

E. Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings and locations required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by the Contracting Officer or designated representative for visual effect.

3.10 FINISHING OF DRYWALL

A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required; to prepare work for decoration.

B. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated.

C. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats and sand between coats and after last coat:

1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or taping compound.

2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound. 3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound.

D. Finish concealed gypsum board panels used to patch plaster ceiling by fire taping to maintain the equivalent of a new 1-hour rated system equal to UL design L512.

E. Finish cementitious backer board by taping and skim-coating surfaces to smooth and match surface of gypsum board above so that texture does not telegraph through finishes.



A. Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or replace any defective items with new, acceptable products.

1. Fasteners:

a. When face paper is punctured, drive new screw approximately 1 ½” from defective fastener and remove original screw.

b. Fill damaged surface with joint taping compound and repair facer surface with joint tape.

B. Remove excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally, leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition ready for work by other trades.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer.

B. Ensure gypsum drywall construction to be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END 09250.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09300 – Tile

TILE 09300-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All interior ceramic floor tile and base. b. All interior ceramic wall tile. c. All bond coat mortar, additives, grout, expansion joints and miscellaneous

materials for a complete installation. d. Metal termination and control joint strips. e. Slip resistive floor tile surface treatment. f. Coordination between tile installer and concrete subcontractor for surface

preparation of tile beds. g. Clean up.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide ceramic wall tile as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide ceramic floor tile for new patched floor slab areas as indicated for under slab sanitary sewer piping in the new Women’s Public Toilet, Optometry/Optical, south Food Concept Preparations areas, and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms behind the new Food Court.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 4. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 5. Section 08211 – Flush Wood Doors. 6. Division 9 – Finishes. 7. Division 11 – Equipment.

B. Concrete, vapor barrier and concrete finishing is specified in Section 03300 and is critical to the ceramic tile installations specified herein.

1. Refer to Section 03300 for concrete surface finishing and ensure specified finishing of surfaces will result in proper installation of ceramic tile flooring systems.

2. Refer to Section 03300 for curing materials and methods to ensure specified options of curing concrete will result in proper installation of ceramic tile floor finishes.

C. Coordinate tile installation with clearance undercuts for doors specified in Section 08100, Metal Doors & Frames; Section 08211, Flush Wood Doors.

D. Coordinate tile installation with threshold heights and setting specified in Section 08710, Finish Hardware.

TILE 09300-2


A. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Obtain tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

2. Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious

and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project.

C. All tile shall comply with applicable portions of ANSI A137.1 – 1988 standards.

D. Bond coat setting bed shall conform to ANSI A118.4 - 1992.

E. Grout shall conform to ANSI A118.6 - 1992 for type specified.

F. Workmanship shall comply to the following:

1. Tile installation shall conform to ANSI A118.5 – 1992. 2. Grout installation shall conform to ANSI A118.10 – 1992.

G. Expansion joint sealant shall comply with ASTM C920.

1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. The Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA), “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” (2011 Edition).

1. Exterior Applications: Method F102. 2. Interior Applications: Method F113.

B. ANSI A137.1 – 1988, Ceramic Tile.

C. ANSI A118.5 – 1992, Mortar Bed.

D. ANSI A118.10 – 1992, Grout.


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, product shall demonstrate a minimum static coefficient of friction of 0.6 when tested per ASTM C-1028.

B. Floor Tile Installation: Floor tile installation shall perform to the referenced standards specified above.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accord with Section 01340.

B. Product data:

1. Product data for each type of product specified including:

a. Master Grade Certificate for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

TILE 09300-3

b. Tile manufacturer’s Product Certificate of compliance with specified standards including slip resistance of surface.

c. Tile Manufacturer’s printed instructions for installation including references to ANSI standards for specific applications.

1.) Exterior method of thin setting tile using latex-Portland cement mortar.

2.) Interior method for thin setting tile on concrete substrate using latex-Portland cement mortar.

d. Setting bed mortar, grout and additives. e. Expansion requirements and methods of installation.

C. Shop drawings:

1. Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. 2. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation

joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

a. Exact locations of expansion joints shall be conveyed to Contractor for coordination with concrete subcontractor for preparation of substrate.

b. Base locations from actual field dimensions of walls during construction and before exterior concrete entrance slab and frost walls are poured.

D. Samples:

1. Initial Selection:

a. For each type of tile and grout indicated. b. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

2. Verification:

a. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

b. Units of each type of trim and accessory.


A. General: Deliver and store in accord with Section 01620.

B. Packaged Materials:

1. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

2. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

C. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

E. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

F. Temporary Protective Coatings:

1. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units.

TILE 09300-4

2. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Confirm that tile pattern and expansion joint layout are accurately coordinated with expansion and control joints in concrete substrates.

B. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.

C. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup.

D. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated.

B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting.

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearances characteristics, provide specific products or materials or equal as approved in advance by Architect per Section 01630, Substitutions & Product Options.

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Interior Ceramic Floor Tile:

1. Serving Areas, Prep. Areas and Back-of-House Areas:

a. Floor: Crossville – Cross-Colors with Cross-Dot Texture, Color Number A790, "Burgundy Smoke", 8” x 8”.

b. Base: Dal-Tile – Semi-Gloss Flat Top (A-3601) and Sanitary Cove Round Top (S-3619T) Profiles, Color Number K111, "Black", 6” x 6”.

2. Men's and Women's Toilets:

a. Floor: Dal-Tile – Fabrique Series, Color Number P690, "Gris Linen", 12” x 12”. b. Base: Dal-Tile – Semi-Gloss Flat Top (A-3601) Profile, Color Number K175,

"Biscuit", 6” x 6”.

3. Men's Locker and Women's Locker:

TILE 09300-5

a. Floor: Dal-Tile – Fabrique Series, Color Number P690, "Gris Linen", 12” x 12”. b. Base: Dal-Tile – Semi-Gloss Sanitary Cove Round Top (S-3619T) Profile, Color

Number K175, "Biscuit", 6” x 6”.

4. Mall Vestibules:

a. Floor: Dal-Tile – Fabrique Series, Color Number P690, "Gris Linen", 12” x 12”.

5. Travel:

a. Floor: Match existing tile in manufacturer, color, style and size as indicated.

B. Interior Ceramic Wall Tile:

1. Back-of-House Areas and Taco Bell Prep:

a. Field Tile: Dal-Tile – Semi-Gloss Series, Color Number 0100, "White", 6” x 6”.

2. Mall Men’s and Women’s Toilets:

a. Field Tile: Dal-Tile – Rittenhouse Square Semi-Gloss Series, Color Number K175, "Biscuit", 3” x 6”.

3. Back-of-House Men's and Women's Toilets:

a. Field Tile: Dal-Tile – Rittenhouse Square Semi-Gloss Series, Color Number K175, "Biscuit", 3” x 6”.

b. Accent Band: Dal-Tile – Semi-Gloss Series, Color Number K175, "Biscuit", 2” x 6” bullnose.

4. Charley’s:

a. Wainscot Tile: Dal-Tile – Elevare Series, Color Number EL47, "Matte Lunar", 6” x 18”.

5. Taco Bell:

a. Wainscot Tile: Dal-Tile - Fabrique Series, Color Number P687, "Soleil Linen", 12" x 24".

6. Boston Market:

a. Field Tile at Soffit: Facings of America – Trikeenan Boneyard Brick Series, Color "BYB Strawberry", Modular.

1.) Provide Modular Edge Cap at corners.

b. Field Tile at Walls: Creative Materials Corporation – Omni Bone Bright, 3”x6”.

7. Arby’s:

a. Field Tile: Crossville – Color by Numbers Series, Color Number WT02, “Tea for Two” Gloss, 4” x 8”.

8. Subway:

a. Accent Wall Tile: Crossville – Nest Series, Color Number AV353, “Blissfull Oak-Honey”, 6” x 36”.

9. Mall Pilasters and Food Court Column Enclosures:

a. Dal-Tile – Slimlite Panels Terra Collection, Color Number TP42, "Vapor", 12" x 20".

C. Refer to schedules on drawings for scheduled finishes and interior elevations for patterns.

TILE 09300-6

D. Mortars and Grouts:

1. Provide Mapei “Kerabond” premium premixed thinset mortar for all floor and wall tile installations.

2. Provide Mapei “Keracolor” premium sanded grout for all wall tile installations. 3. Provide Mapei “Kerapoxy” stain-free epoxy grout for all glass wall tile, floor tile and

base installations. 4. Provide Mapei “Keralastic” water emulsion latex additive, serving as replacement for

part or all of gaging water, or type specifically recommended by manufacturer for use with field-mixed Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.

E. Provide manufacturer’s standard membrane product for crack suppression and waterproofing that complies with ANSI A118.10.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Wall Tile Metal Corner and Edge Trim:

1. Product shall be as manufactured by Schluter.

a. Back-of-House Areas, Serving Areas, Men's and Women's Toilets: ECK-E profile in brushed stainless steel (304) (EB) finish.

b. Charley's and Taco Bell: Jolly profile in brushed stainless steel (304) (EB) finish. c. Mall Pilasters and Food Court Column Enclosures: Quadec profile, Q45AE, in

satin anodized aluminum finish.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications, half-hard exposed-edge material.

1. Install at all transitions between tile and dissimilar flooring materials and at control joints.

2. Product shall be as manufactured by Schluter.

a. Reno-Ramp profile in satin anodized aluminum finish. b. Reno-Ramp-K profile in satin anodized aluminum finish. c. Reno-V profile in brushed stainless steel (304) (EB) finish. d. Reno-T profile in brushed stainless steel (304) (EB) finish.

D. Metal Expansion Joint Strips: “U”-shape movement profile with edge protection, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications where expansion/contraction is necessary, half-hard exposed metal edge.

1. Install at all transitions between tile and tile expansion/contraction joints. 2. Strips shall provide a movement zone made of soft synthetic rubber. 3. Product shall be as manufactured by Schluter, Dilex-KS profile in stainless steel (304)

#5 finish.

E. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation, 112 North Alfred St., Alexandria, VA 22134 or Ceramic Tile Institute, 700 N. Virgil Ave., Los Angeles, CA 90029.

TILE 09300-7

F. Slip Resistive Sealer: Provide natural look, colorless penetrating protective sealer equal to Miracle Sealants Company, “511 Inpregnator”.

1. Sealer shall provide water, stain and slip resistance. 2. Sealer shall be as approved by tile and grout manufacturers for use on specified

products.

2.4 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in, or behind, tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that control and expansion joints in exterior concrete slab are exactly in alignment with tile pattern layout for alignment of tile expansion joints.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.

B. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated.

B. TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCNA installation methods indicated.

TILE 09300-8

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown.

D. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

E. Accurately form intersections and returns.

1. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. 2. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight

aligned joints. 3. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that

plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

F. Jointing Pattern:

1. Lay tile to grid pattern indicated on drawings. 2. Align joints when adjoining tile on floor and base when units are same size. 3. Provide factory formed inside and outside corners at base installations where corners

must be turned. 4. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall

area. 5. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. 6. Provide uniform joint widths of 1/8-inch unless otherwise shown.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including isolation joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile.

1. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. 2. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above expansion joints in concrete substrates. 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Section 07920,

Building & Pavement Joint Sealers.

H. Control Joints: Locate control joints at sawcut or construction joints as indicated by installing specified metal edge strips.

I. Install penetrating sealer to unpolished floor tile per manufacturer’s printed instructions.

1. Allow to penetrate surface 3 to 5 minutes and remove ALL excess by buffing surface with a clean dry towel.

2. Allow penetrating sealer to cure for a minimum of 12 to 24 hours before proceeding with grout installation.

J. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the installation standards.

1. Apply penetrating sealer to all grout joints using paint brush. 2. Wipe excess sealer off surface of tile with a clean dry towel before it dries.

3.4 FLOOR AND WALL INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Ceramic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated for setting bed methods and TCNA installation methods related to types of sub-floor construction, wall substrate and grout types.

B. Metal Reducer Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets dissimilar flooring materials such as at doors.

TILE 09300-9

C. Metal Edge Floor-mat Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpeted mat insert and finish flush with top of floor finish.

D. Setting Pattern:

1. Dal-Tile – Fabrique floor tile shall be set in an alternating 90-degree pattern. 2. All other floor tile shall be set in a conventional non-directional pattern.


A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

a. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation.

b. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.

2. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.

B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, un-bonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer to ensure that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile base and floors. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

END 09300.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09400 – BONDED TERRAZZO

BONDED TERRAZZO 09400-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Portland cement terrazzo, bonded installation with divider and accessory strips. b. Coordination between terrazzo installer and concrete subcontractor for surface

preparation of concrete subfloor. c. Clean up.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 4. Division 9 – Finishes. 5. Division 11 – Equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NTMA: National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc.


A. Acceptable Suppliers: A firm experienced in manufacturing products in accordance with NTMA standards and with a record of successful in-service performance as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required materials.

B. Acceptable Terrazzo Contractor: A Contractor Member of NTMA whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Installer shall have completed terrazzo installations within the past 5 years of scale and complexity similar to the proposed installation.

C. Terrazzo Standards: Terrazzo Contractor shall furnish materials and install terrazzo according to NTMA's “Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide” and with written recommendations for terrazzo type indicated unless more stringent requirements are specified.

D. Source Limitations for Aggregates: Terrazzo Contractor shall obtain each color, grade, type, and variety of granular materials from sources capable of providing materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

E. Mockups: Terrazzo Contractor shall construct mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS


A. Pre-installation Conference: The General Contractor shall conduct a conference at Project site before Terrazzo Contractor begins installation.

1. The General Contractor shall invite Terrazzo Contractor, the Architect, and Contracting Officer or Designated Representative.

2. Review methods and procedures related to terrazzo including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

b. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

c. Review terrazzo mixes and patterns. d. Review custom terrazzo mixes, designs, and patterns. e. Coordination with the Work of other Installers.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accord with Section 01340.

B. Product data:

1. Product data for each type of product required for installation including:

a. Strip materials. b. Sealer. c. Cement.

C. Shop drawings:

1. Show location and layout of terrazzo flooring including divider strips, expansion-joint materials, accessory strips and abrasive strips.

D. Samples:

1. Initial Selection:

a. NTMA "Color Palette Brochure" showing full range of colors and patterns available for each terrazzo type.

2. Verification:

a. Prepare samples for each type, material, color and pattern of terrazzo and accessory required showing the full range of color, texture and pattern.

1.) Terrazzo: 12 inch by 12 inch. 2.) Accessories: 6 inch long of each type and kind of exposed strip item

required.

E. Qualification Data:

1. Submit qualification data for Installer including:

a. Include list of projects indicating name and location of project, name of Owner, name and contact information for General Contractor, and name and contact information for Architect.

b. Include letter from NTMA with the name of the Project and name of member, stating current member status.



A. General: Deliver and store in accord with Section 01620.

B. Materials shall be delivered to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers, labeled with source or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if any.

C. Materials shall be stored in their original, undamaged packages and containers.


A. Provide sufficient water, temporary heat and light, and adequate electric power with suitable outlets connected and distributed for use within 100 feet of any working space.

B. Provide temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to protect adjacent spaces from damage during installation.

1. Maintain ambient temperatures in the area to receive terrazzo at not less than 50 deg. F.

2. Maintain adequate ventilation in the area to receive terrazzo.

C. Protect other adjacent work from water and dust generated by grinding operations.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. One year from date of completion of terrazzo installation.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, match existing.

B. Water: Potable.

C. Sand: ASTM C 33/C33M, clean, washed, and locally available.

D. Marble Chips:

1. Size: Conform with NTMA gradation standards 2. Abrasion and Impact Resistance: Not more than 40 percent loss when tested in

accordance with ASTM C 131. 3. Chips shall contain no deleterious or foreign matter.

E. Divider Strips:

1. Material: Match existing. 2. Strip Thickness: 16 gauge. 3. Heavy Top Strips:

a. Material: Match existing with zinc galvanized leg. b. Thickness: Match existing.

4. Depth for Standard Topping: 1-1/4 inches.

F. Colorants: Alkali-resistant color stable pigments.

G. Steel Reinforcing: ASTM A 185, galvanized welded wire mesh, 2 by 2 by 16 ga.


H. Curing Materials: Water or polyethylene sheeting.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

A. Sealer: Terrazzo Contractor shall provide a non-ambering, clear sealer that is chemically neutral; does not impair terrazzo aesthetics or physical properties; is recommended by terrazzo matrix manufacturer.

1. Sealers shall comply with the following:

a. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. b. Surface Friction: Not less than 0.6 (ADA) according to ASTM D 2047. c. Water Based Sealer Propoerties: With pH factor between 7 and 10. d. Solvent Based Sealer Properties: Flashpoint at 80 deg. F according to ASTM D

56.

2.3 MIXES

A. Provide terrazzo mix(es) according to the following:

1. Type: Standard. 2. Custom Mix Color and Pattern: Match existing.

B. Proportion materials for underbed and topping mixes as follows:

1. Underbed: One part portland cement to four parts sand and sufficient water to provide workability at as low a slump as possible.

2. Terrazzo Topping: One 94-lb. bag of portland cement per 150 lb. of marble chips, color pigment, and sufficient potable water to produce a workable mix.

C. Mix underbed and topping as follows:

1. Underbed:

a. Charge and mix sand and portland cement. b. Add water and mix.

2. Terrazzo Topping:

a. Charge and mix marble chips, portland cement and color pigment if required. b. Add water and mix to a uniform workable consistency.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and areas where terrazzo will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed terrazzo.

1. Verify that concrete surfaces to receive bonded terrazzo flooring are sound, free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil and other contaminants incompatible with terrazzo flooring materials.

2. Concrete shall have a troweled finish.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Broom clean area to receive terrazzo to remove loose chips and all foreign matter.


3.3 POURED-IN-PLACE TERRAZZO INSTALLATION

A. Place underbed as follows:

1. Thoroughly saturate concrete subfloor with water, slush and broom with neat cement paste.

2. Place underbed mix. 3. Screed underbed to elevation of 1/2 inch below finished floor elevation or slope and

firmly compact. 4. Install divider strips as shown on drawings in semi-plastic underbed and trowel firmly

along edges. 5. Install control joint strips back to back precisely above subfloor joints taking care that

control joint is full depth of underbed.

B. Install strip materials as follows:

1. Divider and Control-Joint Strips:

a. Locate divider strips in locations indicated. b. Install control-joint strips back to back in locations indicated. c. Install strips in semi-plastic underbed.

2. Accessory Strips: Install as required to provide a complete installation.

C. Place the terrazzo topping as follows:

1. Dampen underbed with water. 2. Place terrazzo mixture in panels formed by divider strips and trowel mixture to top of

strips. 3. Seeding of additional marble chips is optional. 4. Roll and compact surface until all excess cement and water has been extracted. 5. Trowel to a dense uniform flat surface disclosing lines of divider strips.

D. Cure the terrazzo topping as follows:

1. After completing placement of terrazzo and composition has sufficiently set, cover with water or polyethylene sheeting.

2. Cure until topping develops sufficient strength to prevent lifting or pulling of terrazzo chips during grinding.

E. Finish the terrazzo topping as follows:

1. Rough Grinding: Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond plates. 2. Grouting:

a. Cleanse floor with clean water and rinse. b. Remove excess rinse water and machine or hand apply grout, taking care to fill

voids.

3. Cure Grout:

a. After grouting, cover with polyethylene sheeting. b. Cure until grout is ready for grinding.

4. Fine Grinding/Polishing: Grind with 120 grit or with comparable diamond abrasives until all grout is removed from surface.

F. Clean finished terrazzo as follows:

1. Remove grinding residue from terrazzo surface. 2. Wash terrazzo surfaces immediately after final grinding of terrazzo flooring with water

and allow surfaces to dry thoroughly.


G. Seal terrazzo according to sealer manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.4 REPAIR

A. Repair terrazzo areas that evidence lack of bond between topping and underbed according to NTMA’s written recommendations.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. After application of the sealer, the Work shall be ready for final inspection and acceptance by the Contracting Officer and/or Designated Representative.

B. Protect the finished floor after completion of final grinding and application of sealer to terrazzo surfaces.

END 09400.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09510 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09510-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All non-rated acoustical panel ceilings. b. All vinyl faced panel ceilings. c. 15/16” grid and suspension system. d. Perimeter reveal edge moldings and standard wall angles. e. Miscellaneous accessory items for complete and proper installation.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide acoustical panel ceilings as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Division 9 – Finishes. 5. Division 15 – Mechanical. 6. Division 16 – Electrical.


A. Installation of acoustical ceilings shall be by workmen with a minimum experience of 3 project installations of comparable extent as proposed project.

B. Performance:

1. Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices supporting light fixtures, ceiling grids and acoustical units shall permit a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span.

2. Finished acoustical ceiling system shall be level with 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 3. Panels shall have edges in alignment.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

D. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-alarm system components, security system components and partition system.


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers complete printed product data:

1. Acoustical tile ceiling pads. 2. Vinyl faced ceiling pads. 3. Acoustical tile ceiling suspension system. 4. Accessory items including reveal edge trim.

C. Samples:

1. Samples, 12” square, of each type acoustical tile or vinyl faced gypsum panel. 2. Samples, 12” long, of exposed grid tee and reveal edge shadow line perimeter wall

angle.


A. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Sections 01600 and 01620.

B. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

C. Store acoustical ceiling units to comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for temperature and humidity.

D. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Complete installation of roofing materials and wall/ceiling perimeter painting before beginning work.

2. Maintain humidity of 65%-70% in area where acoustical materials are to be installed, during and 24 hours before and after installation.

3. Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. prior to and during installation of materials.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

B. Acoustical ceiling units: furnish minimum of two extra cartons of units or 2% of the amount installed, whichever is greater.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Use only specified products of the following manufacturers of grid systems and perimeter reveal.


CODE MANUFACTURER

1. USG USG Interiors, Inc. 101 S. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606; (312) 321-4000

B. Use only specified products of the following manufactures of ceiling pads.

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. USG USG Interiors, Inc. 101 S. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606; (312) 321-4000 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Suspension systems shall be intermediate duty grid with all exposed surfaces having a painted finish in color to be selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1. Acceptable products for 15/16” standard grid:

MANUFACTURE NON-RATED SYSTEM

a. USG “DX System”

B. Hanger wire for grid system shall be minimum of No. 12 gauge galvanized soft annealed, mild steel wire.

C. Shadowline molding: Perimeter edge reveal shall be minimum, .020 inch steel channel, 3/4 inch x 3/4 inch Shadowline molding shape compatible with grid system specified above and painted to match exposed 15/16” tees.

D. Wall angle: Perimeter edge, 7/8” wall angle molding shape compatible with grid system specified above at areas indicated.

E. Acoustical panels shall conform to Federal Specifications SS-S-118a, Type III, Class 25 and shall meet the requirements of sound absorption described in the Acoustical Association Bulletin.

F. Products: Refer to drawing schedule and reflected ceiling plan for location of products.

1. Standard acoustical lay-in panels as indicated shall be a mineral fiberboard, 24 inches by 48 inches by 5/8 inch thick, fissured design, square edge with a factory applied white vinyl latex paint finish, USG product number 562.

2. Standard vinyl faced lay-in panels as indicated shall be mineral fiberboard, 24 inches by 48 inches by 5/8 inch thick, square edge with a factory applied white vinyl stippled finish, USG Clean Room, ClimaPlus Vinyl, product number 56091.

3. Match existing acoustical panels and grid in manufacturer, color, style and size at Travel MA-18 and Passage FC-08 as indicated.

4. Standard vinyl faced lay-in panels as indicated shall be mineral fiberboard, 24 inches by 24 inches by 5/8 inch thick, square edge with a factory applied white vinyl stippled finish, USG Clean Room, ClimaPlus Vinyl, product number 56099.

5. Standard vinyl faced lay-in panels as indicated shall be fiberglass basemat, 24 inches by 24 inches by 5/8 inch thick, square edge with factory applied white vinyl stippled finish, USG Premier Hi-Lite, ClimaPlus Vinyl, product number 7050G.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION


A. Examine surfaces to receive suspended acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall coordinate work with subcontractors to assure that light fixture layouts and all grills are located in accordance with drawings.

B. Suspension system shall be supported by 12 gauge hanger wires, nominally 48 inches on center.

1. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member and at light fixtures, 6 inches from vertical surface.

2. Wrap wire a minimum of 3 times horizontally, turning ends upward.

C. Main runners shall be spaced as required for panel size and shall be level and square to adjacent walls.

1. Space cross runners as required by panel size. 2. All joints shall meet perfectly.

D. Install reveal edge perimeter shadow line and angle wall moulding at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces at areas indicated; miter corners where wall mouldings intersect.

E. Acoustical units shall be installed to bear all around on suspension members; width of border units shall generally be a minimum of one-half unit dimension.

F. Joints in acoustical units around pipes, ducts, conduit, grilles, fixtures and hangers shall be cut fit neatly and where necessary.

1. Provide a plated escutcheon cover to trim out unit.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled or discolored tile, touch-up scratches, voids and other defects in painted surfaces.

B. Tile that is defective or improperly installed shall be replaced.

C. Remove all excess materials and debris from site and dispose of properly; leave area clean.

1. Deliver extra acoustical lay-in panels packaged with protective covering to AAFES Store Manager for storage.

2. Identify extra materials with appropriate labels identifying acoustical panel type.

D. Protect installation from damage until acceptance by Contracting Officer.

END 09510.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09650 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09650-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Preparatory work where required. b. Vinyl composition tile. c. Luxury vinyl tile. d. Vinyl reducer strips and transitions. e. Rubber cove base. f. Adhesives, accessories and anchorage as required. g. Cleaning and wax.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide rubber cove base as indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide resilient floor tile and base for new patched floor slab areas as indicated for under slab sanitary sewer piping in the new Women’s Public Toilet, Optometry/Optical, south Food Concept Preparations areas, and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms behind the new Food Court.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 5. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 6. Section 08211 – Flush Wood Doors. 7. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 8. Section 09680 – Carpet. 9. Section 09986 – Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels (FRP).


A. Provide resilient flooring and related materials that comply with the following fire test performance criteria determined by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Critical Radiant Flux – not less than 0.45 watts per sq. cm. per ASTM E648 or NFPR 253.

2. Flame Spread – 0-25 per ASTM E84. 3. Smoke Developed – 0-450 per ASTM E84. 4. Smoke Density – 0-450 per ASTM E662.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01340.

B. Product Data:

1. Material descriptions. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for each project. 3. Manufacturer’s recommended maintenance methods, procedures and products.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Floor Plan(s): Indicate vinyl tile layout.

D. Samples:

1. Contracting Officer or designated representative will make final selections for type, style and design specified.

2. Provide for selection purposes:

a. Manufacturer's current color samples for standard vinyl tile. b. Manufacturer’s current standard chain of color samples for resilient base. c. Manufacturer’s current standard chain of color samples for vinyl reducer

strips.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver and store products in accordance with provisions of Sections 01600 and 01620.

B. Deliver products to Project in manufacturer’s original unopened cartons and store in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage.

C. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for temperature and humidity limitations for storage.


A. Maintain temperature in space to receive flooring between 70 degrees F., and 90 degrees F., for not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation.

B. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F., after flooring is installed except as specified in Paragraph 1.5A.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Use only the products of the following manufacturers of vinyl composition floor tile.

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. ARM Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2300 East Devon Ave., Suite 103 Des Plaines, IL 60018 (312) 298-7755

A. Use only the products of the following manufacturer of luxury vinyl tile:

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. MAN Mannington Commercial P.O. Box 12281 Calhoun, GA 30703-7004 (800) 241-2262


B. Use only the products of the following manufacturers of rubber cove base and vinyl transition strips.

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. JON Johnsonite Flooring 16910 Munn Road Chagrin Falls, OH 44023 (800) 899-8916

2.2 FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS

A. Reinforced vinyl composition tile flooring for use throughout shall be provided as indicated on drawings.

1. Storage FC-25, Break Room FC-30, OPS Office FC-31, Manager Office FC-32, Communications MA-19, Receiving MA-28 and Mall Storage MA-39 as indicated:

a. Thickness: 1/8 inch. b. Size: 12 inches by 12 inches. c. Product: ARM – Standard Excelon Imperial Texture Series. d. Color: 51929 – Sandy Beach.

2. Laundry/Dry Cleaning MA-43 as indicated:

a. Thickness: 1/8 inch. b. Size: 12 inches by 12 inches. c. Product: ARM – Migrations Series.

1.) Color: T3526 – Blue Waters.

d. Product: ARM – Chromaspin Series.

1.) Color: 54827 – Cerulean.

3. Passage FC-08 as indicated:

a. Thickness: 1/8 inch. b. Size: 12 inches by 12 inches. c. Product: Match existing. d. Color: Match existing.

B. Luxury vinyl tile flooring for use throughout shall be provided as indicated on drawings.

1. Barber Shop MA-11, Storage MA-12A and Storage MA-12B as indicated:

a. Thickness: .096 inch. b. Size: 9 inches by 36 inches. c. Product: MAN – Amtico Wood Plank. d. Color: AR0W7970 – Manor Oak.

2. Optical Lab MA-31, Pre-Test MA-33, Exam 1 MA-34, Contact Lens MA-35, Exam 2 MA-36, Storage MA-37 and Reception MA-38 as indicated:

a. Thickness: .096 inch. b. Size: 9 inches by 36 inches. c. Product: MAN – Amtico Wood Plank. d. Color: AR0W8050 – Quill Kohl.

3. Storage MA-20, Tactical MA-21, Car Rental MA-22A and Storage MA-22B as indicated:

a. Thickness: .096 inch. b. Size: 9 inches by 36 inches.


c. Product: MAN – Amtico Wood Plank. d. Color: AR0W7800 – Shibori Jasmine.

C. Resilient Base: Rubber cove base shall be furnished as indicated.

1. Rubber cove base (with toe) shall be provided at all carpet and hard surface flooring requiring base as indicated.

2. All rubber base moldings shall be .125 minimum gauge, in continuous rolls as long as practical to minimize butt joints.

3. All inside and outside corners shall be factory preformed. 4. Acceptable rubber base products:

a. All rubber base used in Mall and Food Court as indicated shall be:

1.) Manufacturer: JON 2.) Type: Rubber Cove Base. 3.) Size: 6 inch. 4.) Color: 179 "Steel".

b. All rubber base used in Commodities, Break Room and Offices as indicated shall be:

1.) Manufacturer: JON 2.) Type: Rubber Cove Base. 3.) Size: 4 inch. 4.) Color: 179 "Steel".

c. All rubber base used in Storage, Receiving, Mechanical, Electrical and Janitor as indicated shall be:

1.) Manufacturer: JON 2.) Type: Rubber Cove Base. 3.) Size: 4 inch. 4.) Color: 48 "Gray".

d. All rubber base used for patching existing in Beauty Shop, Travel, UPS, GNC, Frame Shop, Passage FC-08 and I.T. Office FC-21 as indicated shall be:

1.) Manufacturer: JON 2.) Type: Rubber Cove Base. 3.) Size: 4 inch. 4.) Color: Match existing.

e. All rubber base used in Barber Shop as indicated shall be:

1.) Manufacturer: JON 2.) Type: Rubber Cove Base. 3.) Size: 4 inch. 4.) Color: 31 “Zephyr”.

f. All rubber base used in Optical and Optometry as indicated shall be:

1.) Manufacturer: JON 2.) Type: Rubber Cove Base. 3.) Size: 4 inch. 4.) Color: 139 "Glacier".

g. All rubber base used in Laundry/Dry Cleaner as indicated shall be:

1.) Manufacturer: JON 2.) Type: Rubber Cove Base.


3.) Size: 4 inch. 4.) Color: 143 "Marine".

D. Reducer strips and transitions shall be provided as indicated in drawings and as appropriate at all transitions between dissimilar flooring finishes.

1. Material: Vinyl. 2. Color:

a. At areas with 179 "Steel" base, color shall be 29 "Moon Rock". b. At all other areas, color shall match specified cove base for area and shall

blend as closely as possible to surrounding materials.

3. Moldings shall be furnished in appropriate shapes from acceptable manufacturer’s standard product selections.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesives, primer and other materials required shall be waterproof of type recommended by flooring manufacturer.

B. Latex type trowelable underlayment per resilient flooring manufacturer’s recommendations shall be provided at all locations where patch leveling is required before installation of new floor surfaces.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION OF SURFACES

A. Examine substrates for excessive moisture and unevenness that would prevent execution and quality of resilient flooring specified.

B. Notify Contracting Officer in writing of all unacceptable conditions observed.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove dirt, oil, grease of other foreign matter from surfaces to receive resilient floor finishes.

B. Prime surfaces if recommended by manufacturer.

C. Prime and paint surfaces of walls prior to installation of base materials.

D. Refer to ASTM F710, "Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring" for preparation of concrete floor slab prior to installation of resilient flooring.

E. Patch lower end of gypsum drywall and sand surfaces prior to installation of resilient base to ensure smooth installation over existing and new wall finishes.

3.3 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES

A. Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.

B. Apply adhesives uniformly over surface, covering only that amount of areas that can be covered by flooring material within the recommended working time of the adhesive.


C. Apply adhesives with notched trowel or other suitable tool.

1. Do not soil walls, bases or adjacent areas with adhesives. 2. Promptly remove any spillage.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Resilient flooring materials and base shall be installed using installation and workmanship conforming to printed specifications of manufacturer whose flooring is being used.

B. Vinyl reducer strips and transitions shall be glued to surfaces thoroughly and neatly with adhesive recommended by manufacturer.

3.5 SPECIAL MANNINGTON-AMTICO LVT INSTALLATION PROVISIONS

A. General.

1. Maintain temperatures during and after installation within the following limits:

a. Minimum: 13˚C/ 55˚F during its service life. b. Maximum: 27˚C/81˚F surface temperature.

2. Tiles, adhesive and sub-floor must be allowed to stabilize to a consistent temperature for a period of 48 hours before, during and after installation.

a. Stabilization temperature limits: 18˚C/64˚F and 27˚C/81˚F. b. Humidity levels: 50% +/- 10% RH. c. Storage limitations: Tiles must be stored flat.

3. Following installation, Amtico should be protected from heavy traffic for 24 hours and must not be washed for 48 hours.

4. Follow other manufacturers’ recommendations when using their proprietary materials for sub-floor preparation.

5. Consult Amtico Technical Manual regarding further installation recommendations.

B. Sub-floor.

1. Careful sub-floor preparation is vital for an excellent floor appearance and good tile adhesion.

a. The sub-floor must be hard, smooth, clean, dry, free from defects and fit for purpose.

b. A suitable leveling compound should be used to ensure that no irregularities show through to the surface of the finished floor.

2. The sub-floor must be sufficiently dry and the relative humidity (RH) checked to ensure it is not greater than 75% RH by using a suitable moisture test method.

a. Internal RH readings above 80% require a moisture suppressant system.

3. New concrete must be allowed sufficient time to dry thoroughly as it will contain a high percentage of residual moisture without additives, curing compounds, hardeners or surface treatments that may prevent proper bonding of the flooring materials.

4. Apply leveling compound as recommended by tile manufacturer.

C. Installation and Adhesives.

1. Recommended adhesives: Only the recommended adhesives shall be used as follows:


a. SF Adhesive: A water-based acrylic adhesive recommended for all areas except those subject to heat or moisture.

b. PS Adhesive: A single-part, water-based adhesive that can be used to install over porous and non-porous subfloors.

c. Universal 2-Part Adhesive: An entirely solvent-free and 2-component polyurethane adhesive with very low VOC emissions.

1.) Shall be used for bonding Amtico in wet areas such as toilets. 2.) May be used for areas subject to some heat variations, such as

conservatories and adjacent to sunny windows.

2. Usage of Adhesives.

a. Follow the instructions on the packaging.

1.) Spread adhesive evenly using a trowel with V notch sized according to manufacturer's recommendations.

2.) Do not use worn trowels.

b. Only spread sufficient adhesive that can be covered within the recommended open time.

c. Amtico tiles should be rolled with a 100 pound 3-section roller as soon as conditions permit after laying and before the adhesive sets without tiles sliding or adhesive bleeding to the surface.

1.) Roll floor again 90 degrees to the first within 1 hour.

d. Always clean away excess adhesive before it is allowed to dry using a soft cloth moistened with manufacturer's recommended adhesive remover.

e. Dried adhesive may be removed by using a clean cloth moistened with mineral spirits.

1.) Universal 2-Part Adhesive allowed to dry on the tile surface may not be removable.

2.) Do not use mineral spirits or solvents on Amtico Stratica tile.

3. Cleaning.

a. Wait 24 hours before allowing normal foot traffic and 48 hours before allowing point and rolling loads after installation.

b. Wait 5 days before lightly damp mopping finished floor.

3.6 FINISHING AND CLEANING

A. Upon completion of floor covering, flooring subcontractor shall remove all equipment, debris and excess materials resulting from work and leave all floors broom clean.

B. Clean surfaces of floor coverings of all excess cement, dirt and markings.

C. After all other work is completed and just before initial occupancy, Contractor shall clean all floor coverings, removing all dirt, soil and stains or other foreign substances.

1. Apply 1 coat of non-slip wax or other finish as recommended by floor covering manufacturer and buff to a uniform sheen.

2. Protect finished flooring from damage or deterioration until final acceptance by Contracting Officer.

END 09650.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09680 – CARPET

CARPET 09680-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Carpet tile. b. Adhesives, accessories and anchorage for carpet tile. c. Clean up.

B. Option Proposal 4: Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide carpet for new patched floor slab areas as indicated for under slab sanitary sewer piping in the new Women’s Public Toilet, Optometry/Optical, south Food Concept Preparations areas, and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms behind the new Food Court.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03356 – Polished Concrete Floor Finish. 3. Division 9 – Finishes. 4. Division 16 – Electrical.

B. Installed but specified elsewhere: Vinyl transition strips and rubber base are specified in Section 09650, Resilient Tile Flooring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Commercial Carpet: Carpet tile intended for use in commercial and public spaces.

B. Provide carpet tile with construction, fire ratings, static control and appearance appropriate for this use.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of carpeting material, adhesive and accessory required.

1. Include methods of installation for each type of substrate. 2. Submit written data on physical characteristics durability, resistance to fading and

flame resistance characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing carpet tile layout, clearly indicating carpet direction, and types of edge strips.

1. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls and partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tile.

2. Show installation details at any special conditions.

C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following:

1. 12" square sample of each type of carpet material. 2. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the work.

CARPET 09680-2


A. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in carpet and carpet tile installation with experience similar to that required for this project.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide installation materials produced by a single manufacturer.

C. Compatibility: Installation materials and adhesives shall be as approved by carpet tile manufacturer for use in installing carpet tile type provided over substrates indicated in the Project.

1.6 TESTING

A. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports evidencing compliance with requirements for the following:

1. Fire performance characteristics. 2. Physical properties indicated.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide carpeting that is identical to that tested for the following fire performance requirements, according to test method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Flammability:

a. ASTM E648 flooring radiant panel: Class 1. b. ASTM E662 NBS smoke chamber: less than 450.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics:

a. Flame Spread: Not more than 75. b. Smoke Developed: Not more than 100. c. Test Method: ASTM E 84.

3. Critical Radiant Flux:

a. Rating: Not less than 0.45 watts per sq. centimeter. b. Test Method: ASTM E 648.

C. Physical Properties: Provide carpeting that is identical to that tested for the following physical properties, according to the test method indicated.

1. Sound Absorption Characteristics:

a. Rating: Passing sound absorption coefficient level. b. Test Method: ASTM C 423.

2. Fade Resistance:

a. Rating: Maximum gray scale factor of 40 hours. b. Test Method: AATCC 16E.

3. Static Resistance:

a. Rating: 3.5 KV when tested at 20% R.H/70 deg. F. b. Test Method: ASTCC 134.

D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certificate stating that materials furnished comply with or exceed specified requirements.

CARPET 09680-3

E. Include supporting certified laboratory testing data indicating that material meets specified test requirements.


A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, fire hazard classification, and lot number.

B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping.

C. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 degrees F.

D. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage and handling requirements.


A. Sequence carpet installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.

B. Do not schedule carpeting while wet work, such as gypsum drywall taping or initial prime and first coats of painting, is being performed.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's standard warranty.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions.

B. Include precautions against materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance.

C. Replacement Materials:

1. After completion of work, deliver not less than 2% of each type, color and pattern of carpeting, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation.

a. Furnish accessory components as necessary for repairs. b. Furnish replacement materials from same production run as materials installed.

2. Package replacement materials with: protective covering, identified with appropriate labels.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

CARPET 09680-4

1. J+J Invision, a brand of J&J Industries 818 J & J Drive P.O. Box 1287 Dalton, GA 30722-2128 (800) 241-4585

2. Tandus Centiva 311 Smith Idustrial Boulevard P.O. Box 1147 Dalton, GA 30722-144 (800) 248-2878

B. Product:

1. Carpet Tile:

a. Furniture and Office as indicated on drawings:

1.) Style Name: J+J Invision, "Broken Slate Modular", Number 7950M. 2.) Color: 338 Pyrite. 3.) Physical properties as follows:

a) Construction type: Textured Pattern loop. b) Standard Size: 24 inches x 24 inches. c) Face Yarn: Ultron Nylon BCF. d) Dye method: Beck dyed. e) Pitch (Gauge): 1/12 inch. f) Stitches: 11 per inch. g) Face weight: 35 ounces per square yard. h) Pile density: 8,400 ounces per square yard. i) Primary Backing: Nexus modular.

4.) Installation Method: Quarter Turn.

a) Carpet tiles will have arrows embossed or printed on the module backing to show pile direction.

b. Optical as indicated on drawings:

1.) Style Name: Tandus Centiva, "Passport", Number 03352. 2.) Color: 11512 Whirlpool. 3.) Physical properties as follows:

a) Construction type: Textured Pattern loop. b) Standard Size: 24 inches x 24 inches. c) Face Yarn: TDX Nylon. d) Dye method: 100% Solution dyed. e) Pitch (Gauge): 5/64 inch. f) Stitches: 12.5 per inch. g) Face weight: 15 ounces per square yard. h) Primary Backing: Non-woven synthetic fiber.

4.) Installation Method: Quarter Turn.

a) Carpet tiles will have arrows embossed or printed on the module backing to show pile direction.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

CARPET 09680-5

A. Installation Adhesive:

1. Water-resistant, non-staining as recommended by carpet manufacturer, which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet.

B. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer, for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and preventing pile loss at seams.

C. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet and other carpeting products selected by Installer to meet project circumstances and requirements.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed.

B. Notify Contracting Officer or designated representative in writing of major conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions and rough areas using material recommended by carpet tile or adhesive manufacturer.

B. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to receive carpeting; vacuum clean immediately before installation.

C. Check concrete surfaces to ensure no dusting through installed carpet tile; apply sealer where required to prevent dusting.


A. Install carpet tile in strict accordance with the finish drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and CRI Carpet Installation Standard.

1. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104.

B. Follow seaming diagram as submitted and approved.

C. Extend carpet tile under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space.

D. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges properly where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.

E. Expansion Joints: Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpeting and allow for movement.

3.4 GLUE-DOWN INSTALLATION

A. Fit sections of carpet tile into each space prior to application of adhesive.

CARPET 09680-6

B. Trim edges and butt cuts with seaming cement.

C. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Roll entire carpet tile area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. 2. Remove any adhesive promptly from face of carpet tile by method that will not

damage carpet tile face.

D. To ensure proper alignment, check spacing every ten modules.

1. Measure ten modules; proper spacing should be within ¼ inch. 2. Continue to check spacing every ten modules throughout the entire installation.


A. Remove and legally dispose of all excess materials, scraps and debris from site

B. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

C. Remove spots and replace carpet tile where spots cannot be removed.

D. Remove any protruding face yarn using sharp scissors.

E. Provide protection methods and materials needed to ensure that carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion.

END 09680

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09900 – PAINTING

PAINTING 09900-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Surface preparation for all items to be field finished. b. Priming and finish coating indicated for interior and exterior finishes. c. Color coding and finishing of exposed, unfinished interior and exterior piping,

ducts and related mechanical and electrical system components. d. Preparation and touch-up of factory finished items. e. Preparation and sealing of exposed concrete floor slabs. f. Protection of finished construction. g. Cleaning.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all painting work indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide all painting work indicated to finish gypsum drywall walls and soffit at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 05400 – Metal Fabrications. 4. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 5. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 6. Section 08305 – Access Doors. 7. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 8. Section 09950 – Wall Coverings. 9. Division 15 – Mechanical. 10. Division 16 – Electrical.


A. Included on label of containers:

1. Manufacturer’s name and stock numbers. 2. Type of paint. 3. Color. 4. Label analysis.

B. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Provide primers, under coatings and finish paint products from one manufacturer. 2. Provide stain and stain products produced by one manufacturer.

PAINTING 09900-2

3. Where field touch-up is required on factory finishes, and is acceptable to the Contracting Officer, provide touch-up materials matching those used by the manufacturer of the product needing touch-up work.

C. Fungus Control: Coatings shall show no fungus growth when tested as specified in Federal Test Method Standard No. 141, Method 6271.1.

D. Field Quality Control: Request review of first finished room, space or item of each color scheme required for color, texture and workmanship.

E. Work shall be done by skilled craftsmen: all paints shall be smoothly and evenly spread on or flowed on and shall be free from runs, sags, crawls, holidays or other defects.

1. All painting shall be done under favorable weather conditions, or conditions suitable for production of good, durable work.

2. No succeeding coats shall be applied until preceding coat is thoroughly dry. 3. No paint is to be applied to a metal surface in temperatures below 50 degrees F.

F. Painter will receive surfaces to be painted or otherwise treated by him, free from foreign matter such as concrete, taping compound and grease caused by other crafts and shall be required to do normal sandpapering and cleaning before proceeding with his work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical information, label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use.

1. List each material and cross reference the specific coating and finish system and application.

2. Identify each material by the manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer’s color charts, after which, Contracting Officer will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.

D. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.

1. Define each separate coat. 2. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. 3. Resubmit until required sheen, color and texture are achieved. 4. Submit samples on the following substrates for Contracting Officer’s review of

color and texture:

a. Painted Gypsum Board: Provide 12” x 12” samples of each color and material on hardboard.

b. Stained or Natural Wood for Touch-up: Provide 4” x 8” samples of natural and stained wood finish on actual wood surfaces.

c. Ferrous Metal: Provide 4” x 4” samples of sheet and solid metal for each color and finish.


PAINTING 09900-3

A. Deliver and store products and materials in accordance with provisions of Sections 01600 and 01620.

B. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable. 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number.

C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) and maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. 2. Keep storage area neat and orderly. 3. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 4. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected

from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.


A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied.

B. Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other crafts and surfaces not being painted concurrently or not to be painted.

C. Do not apply paint in areas where dust is being generated.

D. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

E. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).

F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Use only the specified products of the following paint manufacturer:

MANUFACTURER CODE

1. Sherwin Williams SHE

PAINTING 09900-4

B. Use floor sealer as manufactured by Dayon Superior Specialty Chemical corp, 4226 Kansas Avenue, Kansas City, KS 66016, (913) 233-1750.

C. Materials selected for coating systems shall be from a single manufacturer.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Paint Materials List:

1. Exterior Metal Primer:

a. SHE: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.

2. Exterior Metal Finish:

a. SHE: Pro-Industrial DTM Acrylic Gloss.

3. Exterior Unit Masonry Primer/Sealer:

a. SHE: Pro Industrial Heavy Duty Blockfiller.

4. Exterior Unit Masonry Finish.

a. SHE: Pro-Industrial DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

5. Interior Metal Primer:

a. SHE: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.

6. Interior Metal Finish:

a. SHE: Pro-Industrial DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

7. Interior Unit Masonry Primer/Sealer:

a. SHE: Pro Industrial Heavy Duty Blockfiller.

8. Interior Unit Masonry Finish:

a. SHE: Pro-Mar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss.

9. Interior Wood Primer:

a. SHE: Premium Wall & Wood Interior Latex Primer.

10. Interior Wood Finish:

a. SHE: Solo 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

11. Gypsum Board Ceiling Primer.

a. SHE: Pro-Mar 200 Zero VOC Latex Wall Primer.

12. Gypsum Board Ceiling Finish:

a. SHE: Pro-Mar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat.

13. Gypsum Board Wall Primer:

a. SHE: Pro-Mar 200 Zero VOC Latex Wall Primer.

14. Gypsum Board Wall Finish:

a. SHE: Pro-Mar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel.

B. Concrete Floor Sealer: Concrete finish floor sealer shall be Dayton Sure Hard Densifier (J17), single component transparent liquid sealer developed specifically for concrete floor surfaces.

PAINTING 09900-5

1. Liquid sealer shall be a solvent based methyl methacrylate formulation designed with advanced and VOC compliant solvents to meet local jurisdiction VOC requirements.

2. Sealer shall be resistant to oil and grease. 3. Sealer shall form a durable, glossy film finish.

2.3 MIXING AND TINTING COLORS

A. Colors shall be as indicated on drawings.

B. Tint primer per manufacturer's recommendation for best topcoat color development.

C. Paints and enamels shall be store tinted and mixed.

1. Fungicidal agent shall be: incorporated into paint by manufacturer. 2. No materials are to be reduced or changed except as specified by manufacturer.

D. Job mixing and job tinting will not be permitted.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into acceptable condition through preparatory work.

B. Call adverse conditions to attention of Contracting Officer for direction on responsibility for rectifying conditions.

C. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable.

3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. All puttying of cracks, open joints and other defects shall be done after primer or first coat is dry and before second coat is applied.

1. Putty is to be spackling or a similar non-shrinking compound.

B. Underwriters or Factory Mutual rated door and frame labels:

1. Do not remove factory applied label ratings from doors or frames. 2. Mask labels to protect legibility.

C. All metal surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned with benzine or mineral spirits before any paint is applied.

D. Rust on metal surfaces shall be removed by sanding, wire brushing, or application of navel jelly, as appropriate for surface and area being cleaned and shall be left clean and ready to receive finish coat.

E. Feather edge sound paint around chipped areas by grinding or sanding prior to touch-up of shop primer coats so following coats will blend in smoothly without photographing.

F. Existing Surfaces:

PAINTING 09900-6

1. Existing work to be repainted shall be sanded and put in condition to provide good adhesion to receive specified finish.

2. Surface shall be free of any foreign material that will adversely affect adhesion or appearance of applied finish before finish is applied.

G. Consult manufacturers of factory primed or finished items for written instructions on touch-up of primer or finish where touch-up of items is acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitation recommended by paint manufacturer.

1. Test surface with a moisture meter.

B. Apply paint coatings with suitable brushes, rollers, or airless spray equipment.

C. Rate of application shall not exceed paint manufacturer’s recommendation for surface involved and shall be not less than wet mil thickness indicated in 3.5 for various products and surfaces.

D. Keep brushes, rollers and spray equipment clean, dry and free from contaminants and suitable for finish required.

E. Drying time between succeeding coats shall be as recommended by manufacturer of coating.

F. Slightly vary color between succeeding coats.

1. Sand and dust as required between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 3 feet.

2. No runs, blisters, glue spots, checking, crazing or cracking will be allowed.

G. Finish coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, roller fibers, streaks, runs, laps or pile up of paints, and skipped or missed areas.

H. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping.

I. Refinish entire wall where portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable.

J. Back prime all trim that has not been pre-finished at factory before installation.

K. Shop coat and prime coat touch-up on metal shall be done while metal surface is bright and clean.

L. Mouldings or ornaments that are painted shall be left clean and true to details with no undue amount of paint in corners and depressions.

M. Final coat of interior finish shall not be applied until all other crafts, except floor covering, are finished with their work, their materials and debris removed and premises turned over in broom clean condition.

N. Existing surfaces that are being painted or refinished shall be refinished in entirety; walls from floor to ceiling and corner to corner.

PAINTING 09900-7

3.4 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Exterior metal surfaces that have been previously painted shall receive preparatory cleaning, sanding and surfaces painted as follows:

1. Primer: 1 coat of exterior metal primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of exterior metal finish or more as required to achieve

desired color.

B. Exterior Ferrous Metals (Including but not limited to Factory Primed Hollow Metal, Metal Fabrications and Lintel Angles): Full-gloss finish.

1. Primer: 1 coat of exterior metal primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of exterior metal finish or more as required to achieve

desired color.

C. All exterior metal components including wall panels, soffit panels, copings, trim and accessory items shall be factory finished and will not require field coating.

D. All non-ferrous items including aluminum storefront system shall be factory finished and will not require field coating.

E. Exterior Unit Masonry Primer/Sealer: Semi-gloss finish.

1. Primer: 1 coat of interior unit masonry primer/sealer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of interior unit masonry finish or more as required to

achieve desired color. 3. Unit Masonry surfaces that have been previously painted shall receive

recommended preparatory cleaning prior to finishes above.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Interior metal surfaces that have been previously painted shall receive preparatory cleaning, sanding and surfaces painted as follows:

1. Primer: 1 coat of interior metal primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of interior metal finish or more as required to achieve

desired color.

B. Interior Ferrous Metals (Including Factory Primed Hollow Metal): Semi gloss finish.


desired color.

C. Miscellaneous interior metal surfaces such as exposed ducts, conduit, hangers, etc., shall receive preparatory cleaning and surfaces painted as follows:


desired color.

a. Finish in same color as surface on which it is mounted.

D. Interior Unit Masonry Primer/Sealer: Semi-gloss finish.

1. Primer: 1 coat of interior unit masonry primer/sealer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of interior unit masonry finish or more as required to

achieve desired color.

E. Interior Wood: Semi-gloss finish.

1. Primer: 1 coat of wood primer.

PAINTING 09900-8

2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of wood finish or more as required to achieve desired color.

F. Gypsum Drywall Ceilings: Flat finish.

1. Primer: 1 coat of gypsum board ceiling primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of gypsum board ceiling finish or more as required to


G. Gypsum Drywall Walls: Eg-shel finish.

1. Primer: 1 coat of gypsum board wall primer. 2. Finish: 2 coats minimum of gypsum board wall finish or more as required to


3.6 PAINT THICKNESS

A. Wet thicknesses for various products shall be as recommended by paint manufacturer or as follows, whichever is greater:

1. Concrete Masonry Undercoating – 2.0 mils. 2. Concrete Masonry Finish – 3.2 mils. 3. Metal Primer – 2.3 mils. 4. Metal Finish – 3.5 mils. 5. Gypsum Primer – 1.6 mils. 6. Gypsum Finish – 2.1 mils.

3.7 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER APPLICATION

A. Clean floor surfaces free of all foreign materials, stains, construction dust and thoroughly inspect for structural soundness of surface.

1. Concrete floor slabs shall be allowed to cure for 28-days minimum prior to application of sealer.

2. Avoid application in direct sunlight or to hot surfaces.

B. Apply floor sealer per manufacturers written instructions using spray, brush or roller equipment.

1. Apply product at a rate of approximately 250 square feet per gallon. 2. Maintain a wet edge while applying. 3. Do not roll or brush excessively or when material begins to become tacky. 4. Avoid runs, bubbles and puddling and remove excess material with a brush or

roller before surface becomes tacky.

C. Apply two separate thin applications of sealer allowing the first coat to cure for 2-4 hours before installation of the second application.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades and surfaces not being painted.

B. Protect completed work from damage by other trades.

3.9 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP

A. At conclusion of work, remove all empty containers, rags, drop clothes, excess materials and debris from project site.

B. Remove drops, splatters and runs from surfaces not scheduled to receive paint.

C. Touch up or repaint any skips, holidays, mars or thin spots.

END 09900.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09950 – WALL COVERINGS

WALL COVERINGS 09950-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Surface preparation and priming of walls. b. Installation of AAFES furnished graphic wall coverings. c. Installation of AAFES furnished mural graphics. d. Protection of finished construction. e. Clean-up.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 3. Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork. 4. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 5. Division 9 – Finishes. 6. Section 10265 – Wall Surface Protection Systems. 7. Division 15 – Mechanical. 8. Division 16 – Electrical.


A. Fire hazard classifications for all materials shall be equal to or less than:

1. Flamespread – 25 or less. 2. Fuel Contributed – 10. 3. Smoke Developed – 20.

B. Fire hazard classification shall be determined by: ASTM D84 and NFPA 255.

C. Materials shall be delivered to job in sealed packages with testing laboratory certification of fire hazard classification on each package.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Furnish manufacturer’s certificates attesting to compliance with specifications for types, classes and grades of:

a. Wall coverings. b. Adhesives. c. Primer or sizing.

2. Samples: 12 inches by 12 inches, showing full color range of patterns and colors proposed.

3. Manufacturer’s printed instructions for adhesive application.


B. Furnish Contracting Officer a copy of manufacturer’s recommended cleaning methods and materials including precautions in use of materials that may be detrimental to wall coverings.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver and store products in accordance with provisions of Sections 01600 and 01620.


A. Store materials in a dry area at not less than 70ºF., for at least 24 hours before installation.

B. Maintain temperature of at least 70ºF., in area receiving installation for 24 hours before, during and after installation; thereafter maintain minimum temperature of 55ºF., or above at all times.

C. Provide adequate ventilation when using contact adhesives.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Mall and Food Court Murals: AAFES provided vinyl wall fabric products shall be as manufactured by Koroseal Interior Products, RJF International Corporation, 3875 Embassy Parkway, Fairlawn, OH 44333.

2. Charley's Grilled Subs: AAFES provided vinyl wall fabric products shall be as manufactured by OMNOVA Solutions Inc., 175 Ghent Road, Fairlawn, OH 44333.

3. Subway: AAFES provided vinyl wall fabric products shall be as manufactured by Sunglo Fabrics, Inc. 850 Washington Ave., Carlstadt, NJ 07072.

B. Products:

1. AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Vinyl Wallcovering:

a. Mall and Food Court Murals: Koroseal Korographics Abaco Beach, custom murals.

1.) Mall - "Wall of Honor".

b. Charley's Grilled Subs: OMNOVA Solutions custom mural. c. Subway:

1.) E-349 Heavy Cord, 92456 Brand Light Green, by Sunglo Fabrics. 2.) Chevron, Blotch – SW7029 Agreeable Grey, by Sunglo Fabrics.

2.2 PRIMER, SIZING AND ADHESIVE

A. Primer or sizing shall be applied to surface as preparation for application of all wall coverings.

1. Primer or sizing shall be as specifically recommended by the manufacturer for use with proposed adhesive and wall covering material.

2. Primer or sizing shall be smoothly applied to substrate to allow release of adhesive and wall covering material without causing damage to substrate surface.

3. Primer or sizing shall be tinted to match primary background color of vinyl wall covering.


B. Adhesive shall be furnished as recommended by manufacturer for securing wall covering panels to prepared substrate surfaces.

C. Adhesive shall contain a mildew inhibitor.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine all substrate surfaces for defects that would affect final appearance and service of wallcoverings.

1. Do not proceed until all such defects have been satisfactorily corrected. 2. Remove existing trim in areas of existing building that receives wall covering prior

to installing; reinstall existing trim after installation of new wall covering.

B. Remove all dust, dirt, grease, mortar spots, or loose chips before beginning installation.

C. Prime or size substrate in accordance with the wall covering manufacturer’s recommendations for type of substrate.

D. Provide a surface sealer to gypsum drywall that will permit subsequent removal of wall covering without damage to paper facings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate patterns in rooms scheduled on drawings.

B. Mix and apply adhesives as directed by manufacturer’s printed instructions.

C. Set wall covering panels in accord with manufacturer’s instructions keeping joints straight, plumb and in plane of walls.

D. Wall covering shall extend floor to ceiling and shall return to window and doorframes and to backs of recesses.

E. Install AAFES furnished graphic wall coverings and wall murals in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and as indicated.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP

A. All seams shall be closely and neatly butted, air pockets and bubbles eliminated and a firm bond established between walls and wallcovering.

B. Seams must be four inches or more from inside and outside corners; horizontal seams will not be accepted.

C. Hang wallcovering to match pattern, where applicable.

D. Clean surfaces as work progresses and remove all adhesive residue.

E. Hang non-matched patterns by overlapping edges and cutting through both thicknesses at once, using a metal straight edge.

F. Place wall covering before installation of fixtures, casings, bases and cabinets.


G. Perimeter lines shall be straight, plumb, level and in plane of walls.

H. Joints shall be symmetrically balanced.

3.4 CLEAN UP

A. Remove all excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of; leave work areas in a clean, safe condition.

B. Inspect installation for defective materials and workmanship and promptly repair or replace any defective items with new, acceptable materials.

C. Clean all wall covering panels in accord with manufacturer’s printed instructions and leave installation in clean condition, ready for inspection.

END 09950.

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09986 – FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS 09986-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. General Contractor provide:

a. Fiberglass reinforced panels. b. Edge and joint mouldings and accessories. c. Adhesives. d. Panel joint sealants. e. Fasteners.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 3. Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork. 4. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 5. Section 08100 – Metal Doors & Frames. 6. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 7. Section 09300 – Tile. 8. Section 09900 – Painting. 9. Section 10265 – Wall Surface Protection Systems.

B. Corner guards for wall protection to replace panel manufacturer’s standard corner trim are specified in Section 10265, Wall Surface Protection Systems.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacturing products for system indicated and with at least 5 years successful experience in applications similar to that required for this project.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system components.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for each material and component part with specified requirements.

B. Samples: Submit full range of color samples for each type of panel, trim and accessory required.

1. Provide 3” square samples of sheet materials and 3” lengths of trim members for color verification after selections have been made.


C. Certificate of Compliance: Submit manufacturer’s certification that all materials furnished for project comply with requirements specified herein.


A. Panels and accessories shall be sorted so as not to scratch or damage the surface.

B. Panels shall be stored inside on a flat dry surface.

C. Panels shall be preconditioned for at least 24 hours in temperature and humidity conditions of areas of installation.

2. PRODUCT


A. Use products as manufactured by Marlite, 202 Hager Street, Dover, OH 44622, (800) 377-1221.

B. Products and Locations:

1. Fiberglass Reinforced Panels (FRP):

a. Subway: Marlite “Induro” series FRP panels, color Wilsonart 4943-38 “Classic Linen”.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. FRP Technical Data:

1. Flexural Strength: 14 x 103 psi per ASTM D790. 2. Tensile Strength: 7 x 103 psi per ASTM D638. 3. Barcol Hardness: 45 per ASTM D2583. 4. Izod Impact: 4.0 ft-lb/in2 per ASTM D256. 5. Water Absorption: 0.16% (24 hrs at 77° F.)/0.16% (24 hrs at 25° F.) per ASTM

D570. 6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E84.

a. Flame spread < 25. b. Smoke developed < 450.

B. FRP Panel Size:

1. Nominal Thickness: 0.09” 2. Nominal Weight: 0.73 lb/ft2 3. Width: 4’-0” 4. Height: 10’-0” to eliminate horizontal joints between floor and ceiling. 5. Grid Pattern: None. 6. Finish: Clear "Sani-Coat" sealer.

C. Components: Provide adhesives, sealants, moldings, fasteners and other components for complete system as made by manufacturer of panel product or recommended in writing by such manufacturer as best suited for purpose intended.

1. Moldings:

a. Induro FRP: Aluminum moldings, Functional Gray (Sherwin Williams 7024) finish, as recommended by manufacturer for each particular condition.


2. Sealant: Super Silicone Adhesive, SS-W (white) for white panels, SS-C (clear) for colored panels.

3. Adhesive: Moisture-retardant Type I material designed for securement of FRP panels to gypsum drywall.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces to receive liner panels for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply fully with recommendations of manufacturer and final shop drawings.

B. Conform to USDA Requirements.

C. Install units in configurations as shown and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Keep vertical lines straight and plumb. 2. Provide all grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim,

and accessories for complete installation.

D. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, secure panels with adhesive directly to gypsum drywall backer panels.

1. Comply with panel manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Provide supplemental mechanical fasteners only if required by conditions, and as

indicated on final shop drawings.

E. Provide appropriate moldings at all panel joints:

1. Internal corners, at intersections with other construction, elsewhere as required. 2. Cut face of moldings to fit at top of new vinyl base to ensure that base seals

against face of panel. 3. Exterior corners shall receive corner guards as specified in Section 10265, Wall

Surface Protection Systems.

F. Seal panels at moldings full length, at edges of cutouts for piping and the like, at tops and bottoms of panels, and at all other intersections with other construction.

G. Coordinate installation with that of trades providing studs and other concealed supports.

H. Locate all fasteners only over centers of concealed supports, including properly located and installed nailers or support plates between studs where required.

3.3 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT, INSTRUCTIONS

A. Verify that accessories required for each unit are properly installed.

B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Provide instructions to AAFES maintenance staff on care of panel surfaces.

END 09986.

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10155 – TOILET COMPARTMENTS

TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. All floor-mounted overhead braced solid plastic toilet partitions. b. All wall mounted solid plastic urinal screens. c. Toilet partition and urinal screen accessory items as furnished by

manufacturer. d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 6. Section 09300 – Tile. 7. Section 10800 – Toilet Accessories. 8. Division 15 – Mechanical.

B. Backup blocking for urinal screens is specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry and shall be provided in coordination with items specified herein.


A. Installer Qualifications: Employ only mechanics with a minimum of 3 to 5 years experience in installation of toilet partitions.

B. Completed work to comply with “Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards” (UFAS).


A. Fire Resistance: Partition materials shall comply with the following requirements, when tested in accordance with the ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials:

1. Smoke Developed Index: Not to exceed 450. 2. Flame Spread Index: Not to exceed 75. 3. Material Fire Ratings:

a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Class B. b. International Code Council (ICC): Class B.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



1. Shop drawings. 2. Manufacturer’s; product data sheets. 3. Manufacturer’s: installation instructions. 4. Replacement parts information. 5. Color sample.


A. Deliver and store products in accordance with provisions of 01600 and 01620.

B. Examine containers for damage, inspect contents and reorder any damaged components immediately.

C. Reseal cartons and store until spaces are completed and ready for installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's warranty against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal conditions for 25 years from the date of receipt by the owner.

1. If materials are found to be defective during that period for reasons listed above, the materials will be replaced.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Scranton Products Inc., 801 East Corey Street, Scranton, PA 18505: (800) 445-5148.

2.2 TYPES

A. Toilet Compartments:

1. Overhead braced, floor supported toilet enclosures with pilasters extending from floor to headrails.

2. Style: Flush partitions and doors. 3. Doors: In-swinging, except accessible units. 4. Doors to physically handicapped compartments: 34 inches wide minimum, out-

swinging. 5. Headrails: Anti-grip style.

B. Urinal Screen:

1. Wall hung screen panel with wall mounting brackets. 2. Style: Flush screen panel.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Solid high density polyethylene (HDPE) resins with homogeneous color throughout.

2. Partitions shall be fabricated for polymer resins compounded under high pressure, forming a single component which is waterproof, nonabsorbent and has a self-lubricating surface that resists marks.

3. All plastic components shall be covered with a protective plastic masking.

B. Finish:


1. Color: Charcoal Grey. 2. Texture: Orange Peel. 3. Thickness: 1 inch. 4. Edges:

a. Solid material. b. Rounded to a radius.

C. Door Hardware:

1. Hinges, Door Strike/Keeper and Latch:

a. Fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with bright dip anodized finish.

b. Fastened with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt.

2. Each door shall be supplied with one coat hook/bumper and door pull made of chrome plated zamak.

D. Stile Shoes: 20-gauge type 304 stainless steel, 3 inches high in satin finish.

1. Top shall have 90 degree return to stile. 2. Fastened with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt.

E. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer’s standard design for attaching panels to walls, and pilasters.

1. Fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with bright dip anodized finish.

2. Fastened with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt.

F. Headrails:

1. Fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with clear anodized finish.

2. Fastened with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt. 3. Headrail brackets:

a. 20 gauge stainless steel with a satin finish. b. Secured to wall with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head screws.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system.

B. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.

C. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 28-inch wide in-swinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 34 inch wide (clear opening) out-swinging doors for stalls equipped for accessibility.

D. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Furnish stainless steel supports and leveling bolts at pilasters as recommended by manufacturer to suit floor conditions.

1. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous, extruded, aluminum, anti-grip, overhead bracing at top of each pilaster.

2. Provide shoe at each pilaster to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.


E. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with ANSI A117.1 for handicapped accessibility and as follows:

1. Hinges: Cutout insert type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90. Provide gravity type, spring-action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type to suit manufacturer’s standards.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer’s standard surface-mounted latch unit, designed for handicapped accessibility, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer’s standard unit, combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door hitting mounted accessories.

4. Door Pull:

a. Manufacturer’s standard unit for out-swinging doors. b. Provide pulls on both faces of handicapped compartment doors.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Check areas to receive toilet partitions and urinal screens for correct height and spacing of support structures and plumbing fixtures that may affect quality and execution of work.

B. Commence installation of urinal screens when all checks have been made.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Anchor partitions, pilasters, headrails, and urinal screens to walls with brackets.

B. Anchor pilasters to floor with adjustable leveling type, corrosion resistant anchor plates and jack screws.

C. Install hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Conceal evidence of drilling in walls in finished work.

E. Adjust pilaster shoes to fit flush with finished floors.


A. Adjust brackets to provide uniform clearances not exceeding:

1. Pilaster in wall: 1 inch. 2. Panels and wall: 1 inch. 3. Pilaster and panels: 1/2 inch. 4. Pilaster and doors: 3/16 inch.

B. Adjust hardware for proper operation.

C. Set hinges to hold doors evenly ajar when not latched.

D. After completion of installation, clean and polish exposed screen surfaces and touch-up minor scratches.

END 10155

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10265 – WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Surface mounted corner guard retainers and pedestals. b. Surface mounted stainless-steel corner guards and channel guard. c. Floor mounted bumper guards. d. Continuous wall guard retainers and pedestals. e. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Division 3 – Concrete. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall. 6. Section 09300 – Tile. 7. Section 09900 – Painting. 8. Section 09950 – Wall Coverings 9. Section 09986 – Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels (FRP).

B. Backup blocking to wall surface protection systems is specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry and shall be provided in coordination with items specified in this Section.


A. References:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) 5. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 6. International Building Code (IBC)

B. Rigid Vinyl Fire Performance Characteristics:

1. Vinyl cover shall be UL classified and conform with NFPA Class A fire rating. 2. Surface burning characteristics as determined by UL-723 (ASTM E-84) shall be as

follows:

a. Flame spread of 10. b. Smoke development of 350-450.

3. Vinyl shall have a UL-94 V-0 fire rating.


C. Self-Extinguishing: Vinyl shall have a CC1 classification, as tested in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-635-74, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics as referenced by UBC 52-4-1988.

D. Impact Strength:

1. Rigid vinyl profile materials shall have impact strength of 30.2 ft-lbs/inch of thickness as tested in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-256-90b, Impact Resistance of Plastics.

2. Rigid vinyl sheet shall have impact strength of 30.4 ft-lbs/inch of thickness as tested in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-256-90b, Impact Resistance of Plastics.

E. System Impact Resistance: Corner guards with retainers shall resist an impact of 153.9 ft-lbs while producing no visual blemishes upon the vinyl cover surface and no deformations in the aluminum retainers, as tested in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM F 476-84, paragraph 18, Impact Test.

F. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Rigid vinyl or high-density polyethylene shall show resistance to stain when tested in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM D-543.

G. Fungal and Bacterial Resistance: Rigid vinyl or high-density polyethylene shall not support fungal or bacterial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G-21 and ASTM G-22.

H. Color Consistency: Thermoplastic components shall be matched in accordance with SAE J-1545 - (Delta E) with a color difference no greater than 1.0 units using CIE Lab, CIE CMC, CIE LCh, Hunter Lab or similar color space scale systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals in accord with 01340.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer’s printed product literature and data. 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide Shop Drawings indicating location for each corner guard. 2. Provide Shop Drawings indicating location for each wall guard. 3. Provide mounting details with appropriate fasteners for each product and substrate

indicated.

D. Samples:

1. Provide samples for verification purposes of corner guard covers, 8 inches long x full profile of unit.

2. Provide samples for verification purposes of wall guard covers, 8 inches long x full profile of unit.



A. Make deliveries and store in accordance with requirements of Sections 01600 and 01620.

B. Store so that corner guards and retainers are not bent and covers are not damaged.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS

A. Surface mounted vinyl corner guards with 2" legs, 1/4" radiused cover and continuous aluminum retainer as manufactured by Construction Specialties/Acrovyn, 6696 State Route 405, Muncy, PA 17756, (800) 233-8493:

1. Mall, Food Court Dining, Concessionaires and Retail:

a. Model:

1.) 90° Corner Guard: SSM-20AN. 2.) Variable° Corner Guard: SM-20MN.

b. Ends: Color matched end caps with concealed fasteners. c. Color: 378 Brushed Nickel. d. Finish: Shadowgrain. e. Height: 4'-0" from top of base, unless noted otherwise.

B. Surface mounted stainless-steel corner guards as manufactured by Construction Specialties/Acrovyn, 6696 State Route 405, Muncy, PA 17756, (800) 233-8493:

1. Boston Market and Taco Bell Serving:

a. Model: SCO-8 with 2" legs for end wall condition. b. Finish: #4 satin finish. c. Corner guard shall be one continuous piece without seams or joints.

1.) Provide welded miter joints at 90° corners.

2. Food Concepts and FRP Wall Finish:

a. Model: CO-8 with 2" legs. b. Finish: #4 satin finish. c. Corner guard shall be one continuous piece without seams or joints.

C. Surface mounted crash rails as manufactured by Construction Specialties/Acrovyn, 6696 State Route 405, Muncy, PA 17756, (800) 233-8493:

1. Food Court Dining and Mall:

a. Surface mounted crash rail consisting of continuous aluminum retainer with snap-on Acrovyn 4000 cover and integral shock absorbing cushions:

1.) Model: SCR-40N with full aluminum retainer.

a) Ends: Color matched end caps with concealed fasteners. b) Material: Chemical and stain resistant polyvinyl chloride with the

addition of impact modifiers. c) Color: 378 Brushed Nickel. d) Finish: Suede.

D. Floor mounted crash rails as manufactured by McCue Corporation, 35 Congress Street, Salem, MA 01970, (800) 800-8503:

1. Mall:


a. BoxRail with the low connector leg.

1.) Ends: Domed end caps. 2.) Material: Galvanized steel rail with cast aluminum components. 3.) Color: Natural finish.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Snap on covers of .080-inch thickness shall be extruded from chemical and stain resistant polyvinyl chloride with the addition of impact modifiers.

B. Continuous aluminum retainer of .070-inch thickness shall be fabricated from 6063-T5 aluminum with a mill finish.

C. Surface Mounted Corner Guards:

1. At areas where walls are finished with sanitary panels provide full height corner guards as specified herein in lieu of panel manufacturer’s outside trim:

a. At outside corners run from top of base to bottom of ceiling wall angle. b. At door openings run from top of base to bottom of header/soffit.

2. At outside corner transitions between dissimilar materials provide full height corner guards from top of base to bottom of ceiling wall angle.

3. Corner guards shall be continuous in length, no joints will be accepted. 4. Horizontal corner guards shall be full length of wall.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Check areas to receive corner guards for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Commence installation when all checks have been made.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate corner and wall guards as indicated, using mounting methods as indicated on reviewed shop drawings for the substrate and in compliance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. Install corner and wall guards plumb with surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

3.3 CLEAN UP

A. Remove all excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally, leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition.


C. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

END 10265.

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10440 – SPECIALTY SIGNS

SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Entry door accessibility identifications. b. Interior room identification signage. c. Interior accessibility identifications. d. Fire extinguisher identification signage. e. Installation of interior AAFES furnished signage, menu boards and graphics

indicated. f. Accessories for installing signage and graphics.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide installation of salvaged exterior building signage indicated at the North Retail Entry of the 1978 Exchange Building.


1. Subject to Base Bid requirements Contractor provide installation of salvaged and new exterior building signage indicated at new Food Court Entry (original Furniture Store Entry) of the original 1972 Commissary Building.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 4. Division 9 – Finishes.

B. Various sign products are indicated to be furnished by AAFES and installed by Contractor.

1. This Section establishes a quality standard for installation of signage furnished by AAFES to the same degree as for signage furnished under this Section.

2. Contractor shall coordinate, receive, store and install AAFES furnished signage products with identical standards as those set forth below for signage furnished by Contractor.


A. Uniformity of Manufacturer: For each sign form and graphic image process indicated furnish products of a single manufacturer.

B. Where manufacturers or supplier/installers are specified, equal manufacturers, suppliers and installers will be considered prior to Bidding and subject to compliance with the provisions set forth in Section 01030, Substitution Procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of sign required.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of specialty signs.

1. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale details of sign wording and lettering layout.

2. Show anchorages and accessory items. 3. Furnish location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent

construction.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each sign form and material showing finishes, colors, surface textures and qualities of manufacturer and design of each sign component including custom and stock graphics.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers of interior plastic room identification signage identification signage indicated and not provided by AAFES:

1. Best Sign Systems 1202 North Park Avenue Montrose, Colorado 81402 (800) 235-2378

2. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 8181 Jetstar Drive, Suite 100 Irving, TX 75063 Phone: 800-274-7732

3. Mohawk Sign Systems P.O. Box 966 Schenectady, NY 12301-0966 Phone: 518-370-3433

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Interior plastic room identification and symbol of accessibility signage shall be fabricated from manufacturers extruded and molded plastic as indicated, for engraved sign faces, inserts and frames in color(s) as selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer’s standard range of available colors.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are non-corrosive to either the sign material or the mounting surface.

C. Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.

1. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 2. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into site paving work.

2.3 FABRICATION OF INTERIOR SIGNAGE

A. Room Identification Signage:

1. Acrylic plastic framed panel signs shall be manufacturer's standard photomechanical, monolithic, tactile plague sign construction.


2. Signage shall comply with ADA regulations and requirements indicated for materials, thickness, finish, contrast, shapes, sizes and details of construction. Installed dimensional tolerances to be: plus/minus 1/16".

a. Tactile Copy: 1/32" raised capital letters, Helvetica Regular, 1" high. b. Braille: grade 2 Braille including 189 part-word or whole word contradictions

in addition to grade 1 Braille 63 characters. c. Symbol: Tactile. d. Layout: Text and Braille centered with Braille below text. e. Frame: Radius corners. f. Size: Height and length as required by copy and symbol. g. Color: As selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative.

3. Room identification shall be as scheduled at the end of this Section for text and quantity.

4. Do not engrave room numbers on signage.

B. International Symbol of Accessibility:

1. Provide pressure sensitive vinyl decal with International Symbol of Accessibility.

a. Size: 4" x 4". b. Color: White image on blue background. c. Quantity: Provide seven (7). d. Decal shall be adhered to glazing in doors or sidelight at primary building

entrances MA-01A, MA-05B, MA-06A, MA-29A, MA-42A, FC-01A and FC-01B.

2. Provide building plaque signs with International Symbol of Accessibility.

a. Size: 6" x 6". b. Color: White image on blue background. c. Quantity: Provide two (2). d. Plaques shall be mounted to strike side or inactive leaf side of doors at

employee building entrances MA-28B and FC-20.

C. Fire Extinguisher Identification Signage:

1. Provide two sided 3D tent sign complying with NFPA 10.

a. Layout: Graphic arrow with "Fire Extinguisher". b. Size: 4" x 18". c. Color: Red image on white background. d. Quantity:

1.) Provide one (1) for each fire extinguisher located on a wall as indicated on drawings.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that require selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Contracting Officer from the manufacturer's standards.

B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and applications recommendations.

3 EXECUTION


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate sign units and accessories indicated or scheduled, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Interior Graphics/Signage (AF/CI): Receive from AAFES and mount graphics or signage in locations indicated using written instructions provided with each graphic or sign.

1. Where graphics or signage instructions are not furnished or require clarification Contractor shall obtain additional information from Contracting Officer or designated representative prior to installation.

2. Do not proceed with installation of graphics or banner signage without written instructions and/or confirmation of location and intended installation techniques to be used.

C. Interior Signage: Install interior sign units and accessories as indicated or scheduled, using mounting methods of the type described and in conjunction with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

1. Install 60" above finish floor to baseline of highest tactile copy on wall adjacent to latch side of door.

a. At double doors with one active leaf locate sign on inactive leaf. b. At double doors with two active leafs locate sign to the right of the right-hand

door.

2. Use double-sided foam tape, of the thickness recommended by manufacturer, to mount signs to smooth, non-porous surfaces.

D. Miscellaneous Signage: Install no smoking signs, symbol of accessibility signs at building entrances indicated and install other miscellaneous adhesive backed signs or other signage using concealed fasteners to complete signage installation for entire building and site.


A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

3.3 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGN SCHEDULE

A. Base Bid:

Area Room Name or Text Quantity

MA-13 @ MA-14 WOMEN (WITH SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY & FEMALE PICTOGRAM) 1

MA-17 @ MA-16 MEN (WITH SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY & MALE PICTOGRAM) 1

MA-27 @ MA-24 OFFICE 1

MA-28 @ MA-24 EMPLOYEES ONLY 1

MA-28 @ EXT EMPLOYEES ONLY 1

MA-31 @ MA-30 EMPLOYEES ONLY 1


MA-33 @ MA-35 PRETESTING 1

MA-34 @ MA-35 EXAM ROOM 2 1

MA-36 @ MA-35 EXAM ROOM 1 1

MA-43 @ EXT EMPLOYEES ONLY 1

FC-08 @ FC-02 EMPLOYEES ONLY 1


FC-20 @ EXT EMPLOYEES ONLY 1


FC-21 @ FC-20 I.T. OFFICE 1

FC-23 @ FC-24 MEN'S LOCKER ROOM & TOILET (WITH SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY & MALE PICTOGRAM) 1

FC-26 @ FC-23 MEN (WITH SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY & MALE PICTOGRAM) 1

FC-26 @ FC-26 EMPLOYEES MUST WASH HANDS BEFORE RETURNING TO WORK 1

FC-27 @ FC-29 WOMEN (WITH SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY & FEMALE PICTOGRAM) 1

FC-27 @ FC-27 EMPLOYEES MUST WASH HANDS BEFORE RETURNING TO WORK 1

FC-29 @ FC-24 WOMEN'S LOCKER ROOM & TOILET (WITH SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY & FEMALE PICTOGRAM) 1

FC-30 @ FC-24 EMPLOYEE LOUNGE 1

FC-31 @ FC-12 OPS OFFICE 1

FC-32 @ FC-12 MANAGER’S OFFICE 1




END 10440.

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10500 – METAL LOCKERS

METAL LOCKERS 10500-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Multi-person metal locker wardrobe assemblies. b. Trim and accessories. c. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 4. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 5. Section 09300 – Tile. 6. Section 09900 – Painting.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01340:

1. Shop drawings detailing layout of work, anchoring methods, hardware sizes and head, jamb and base conditions.

a. Catalog sheets and descriptive literature. b. Installation instructions. c. Color samples for Contracting Officer’s color selection.


A. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01620.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Lyon Metal Products: Inc., P.O. Box 671, Aurora, IL 60507; telephone (800) 323-0096.

B. Penco Products, P.O. Box 378, Oaks, PA 19456; telephone (800) 562-1000.

C. Republic Storage Systems, 1038 Belden Ave., N.E., Canton, OH 44705; telephone (800) 477-1255.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Base Bid:

1. Men's and Women's Locker:

a. 50-person multi-compartment units:


1.) (7) 6-tier side lockers with 12” wide x 18” deep x 12” high compartments.

2.) (2) 4-door horizontal sections with 11 1/4” wide x 18” deep x 12” high compartments.

3.) Overall nominal size:

a) 6’-0” high without legs. b) 14’-6” wide with (2) 3’-9” wide hanging spaces.

B. Material: Cold-rolled sheet metal.

1. Frames: 16 gauge formed into deep 1” face channel with continuous vertical door strike.

2. Doors: 14 gauge one piece with ventilating louvers. 3. Body: 16 gauge, sides, tops, bottoms and shelves. 4. Backs: 18 gauge. 5. Tops: Sloped tops. 6. Legs: Not required. 7. Painted finish: Prime coat plus baked on enamel: Color as selected by Contracting

Officer or designated representative.

2.3 HARDWARE

A. Lock: Built-up hasp for padlock.

B. Hinge: Five-knuckle type with tight pin.

C. Handle: Die-cast with polished, plated finish.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Number plates: Satin finish aluminum. Number sequence as selected.

B. Metal trim: 18-gauge.

C. Coat rod: Manufacturer’s standard coat rod fixed under horizontal section to inside uprights.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Check areas to receive locker units for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Commence installation of locker units when all checks have been made.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble and install lockers, trim and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. All connections shall be tight and in same plane on both sides of joint.

C. Keep lockers straight, plumb and level.



A. Adjust doors and hardware for proper operation.

B. After completion of installation, clean and polish locker surfaces and touch-up minor scratches.

END 10500

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10522 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES 10522-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Fire extinguishers. b. Brackets. c. Cabinets. d. Accessory items. e. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 07270 – Firestopping. 6. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 7. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 8. Section 09900 – Painting.

B. Backup blocking to fire extinguisher brackets is specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry and shall be provided in coordination with items specified in this Section.


A. All fire extinguishers and accessories furnished shall be the product of one manufacturer.

B. All fire extinguishers shall comply with requirements of this specification and with requirements set forth in NFPA-10.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer’s: printed product literature and data. 2. Manufacturer’s: installation instructions. 3. Drawings showing details of rough openings, recess requirements, head, jamb and

sill details.


A. Make deliveries and store in accordance with requirements of Sections 01600 and 01620.


B. Store fire extinguisher so that valves and operating mechanisms are not damaged.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Standard Fire Extinguishers indicated on Drawings as F.E. or F.E.C. shall meet the following requirements:

1. Fire extinguishers shall be multi-purpose dry chemical, pressurized, capable of extinguishing Class A, B and C fires and shall comply with Underwriters Standard 299.

2. Capacity:

a. Extinguishers (F.E.) wall mounted and installed on heavy duty vehicle brackets, indicated on drawings, shall be 10-pound capacity.

b. Extinguishers mounted in cabinets (F.E.C.) shall be 10-pound capacity.

3. All fire extinguishers shall have heavy-duty steel cylinders, metal valve and siphon tube, replaceable molded valve stem seals, visual pressure gauges and high test UL rated hoses.

4. Red finish to comply with: OSHA requirements. 5. All fire extinguishers shall bear UL label.

B. B.O.H. Fire Extinguishers indicated on Drawings shall be mounted in semi-recessed cabinets and as follows:

1. UL rated/labeled K Extinguisher, 2.5 gallon capacity wet chemical type.

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER WALL BRACKETS

A. Construction:

1. Brackets for wall mounted (F.E.) units shall be optional brackets constructed of heavy gauge steel capable of supporting extinguisher size.

a. Provide bracket with bottom support for extinguisher. b. Bracket shall be provided with strap ties to hold extinguisher in place.

2. Brackets for cabinet mounted (F.E.C.) extinguishers shall be standard bracket furnished with extinguisher cable of supporting extinguisher size.

B. Finish: Baked enamel.

C. Hardware: Anchors as required to secure bracket to wall surface.

D. Size: To fit specified extinguisher as indicated.

2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Recessed cabinets for standard fire extinguishers indicated on Drawings as F.E.C.:

1. Door: Aluminum backed textured obscure acrylic, 3/16” minimum thickness; vertical white silk-screened “FIRE EXTINGUISHER” lettering on black background; continuous piano hinge of material and color to match trim; cylinder lock and break glass insert.

2. Trim: Flat trim, aluminum, mitered corners; clear anodized finish. 3. Tub: Minimum 20 gauge cold-rolled steel, white epoxy finish.


4. Size: To fit 10 pound capacity multi-purpose dry chemical extinguisher.

B. Semi-recessed cabinets for B.O.H. fire extinguishers indicated on Drawings as F.E.C.K:

1. Door: Aluminum backed textured obscure acrylic, 3/16” minimum thickness; vertical white silk-screened “FIRE EXTINGUISHER” lettering on black background; continuous piano hinge of material and color to match trim; cylinder lock and break glass insert.

2. Trim: Rolled edge, aluminum, mitered corners; clear anodized finish. 3. Tub: Minimum 20 gauge cold-rolled steel, white epoxy finish. 4. Size: To fit UL rated/labeled K extinguisher, 2.5 gallon capacity wet chemical type.


CODE MANUFACTURER

1. JLI J.L. Industries Bloomington, MN (800) 554-6077

2. LMC Larsen’s Mfg. Co. Minneapolis, MN (763) 571-1181

3. MMP Modern Metal Products Owatonna, MN (800) 435-5544

2.5 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. Recessed cabinets for standard fire extinguishers indicated on Drawings as F.E.C.:

1. JLI - Panorama 1025 Q40. 2. LMC - Gemini G2409 R2. 3. MMP - Tonna T1026R1 WB.

B. Semi-recessed cabinets for B.O.H. fire extinguishers indicated on Drawings as F.E.C.K:

1. JLI - Panorama 1027 Q40. 2. LMC - Gemini G2712-RL. 3. MMP - Tonna T104SR3 WB.

C. Surface mounted brackets for standard fire extinguishers indicated on Drawings as F.E.:

1. JLI - MB Series (MB846) brackets. 2. LMC - B Series (B-2) brackets. 3. MMP - Z Series (Z-10) brackets.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Check areas to receive fire extinguishers for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Commence installation when all checks have been made.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install cabinets, fire extinguishers and brackets in locations shown on drawings in accord with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

1. Securely anchor brackets to structure, square and plumb.

B. After completion of installation, clean and polish cabinets; brackets.

C. Install fire extinguishers on all brackets or in cabinets after finish painting is complete, immediately prior to final inspection of building.

1. All fire extinguishers shall be fully charged, tagged and operable when installed.

3.3 CLEAN UP

A. Remove all excess materials and debris resulting from work and dispose of legally, leaving work areas in a clean, safe condition.


END 10522.

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10711 – FIXED SUNSHADES & CANOPIES

FIXED SUNSHADES & CANOPIES 10711-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Option Proposals 1 and 2:


a. Fixed cantilevered aluminum canopy fascia at new entry portals. b. Aluminum structural components, trim, flashing and accessories. c. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for


1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05120 – Structural Steel. 3. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 4. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications (Brackets). 5. Section 07600 – Flashing & Sheet Metal. 6. Section 07920 – Building Joint Sealers.

B. Installed but furnished elsewhere:

1. Work furnished under this Section shall be carefully coordinated with work furnished under Section 05500, Metal Fabrications:

a. Bolted tee and angle connection brackets shall be exactly mounted to supporting structure at locations in precise coordination with shop drawings for fixed sunshades and canopies.

b. Drilling and taping of HSS tubes to secure tee and angle connection brackets shall be performed in field by Contractor in precise coordination with shop drawings for fixed canopies.

c. Tee and angle connection brackets shall be mounted in place prior to completion of unit masonry installation and coordinated with masonry head joints.

2. Backer rod and sealant to seal end-to-end outriggers of canopies and to seal back of awning to face of wall are specified in Section 07920, Building Joint Sealers.


A. Provide exterior fascia and canopy assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses without permanent deformation of assembly or components including loads due to:

1. Dead load. 2. Gravity and lateral live loads, as specified in referenced building codes.

a. Snow. b. Wind. c. Seismic.

B. Provide assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from a maximum change in ambient and surface temperature of 120 degrees F. and designed to prevent:


1. Buckling. 2. Opening of joints. 3. Overstressing of components. 4. Other detrimental effects.

C. Deflection of assemblies shall be limited to l/480 under live load conditions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01340.

1. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical and descriptive data on canopy components and assemblies.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings illustrating the following:

a. Overall plan showing location of each item. b. Dimensioned plans, elevations and sections. c. Large scale details illustrating:

1.) Dimensioned profiles of components including outriggers, nosing, primary tee and angle bracket connections.

2.) Dimensioned supporting components as assembled. 3.) Indicate breaks required to prevent electrolysis between ferrous and

non-ferrous metals. 4.) Indicate connection requirements at supporting structure.

d. Provide unit dimensions related to supporting and adjoining structures and other construction.

3. Samples:

a. Provide one (1) set of manufacturer’s high performance fluoropolymer coating color chips on actual metal illustrating the full range of colors indicated for awning components and assemblies.

b. Provide two (2) 3-inch long finished samples of each visible component including nosing and outriggers.

c. Provide two (2) bolts of the type and design intended for use in connecting tee brackets to HSS tube supports sections.

B. Structural Calculations:

1. Submit a comprehensive analysis of design loads including dead, live and thermal movement.

a. Results of structural analysis shall be provided by Contractor for use to develop shop drawings for awning and canopy support brackets.

b. Coordination of various fabricators and manufacturers shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Structural analysis and design calculations shall be sealed and signed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the State of Florida.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s 5-year warranty covering structural integrity of assemblies against excessive deflection under design loading, excessive joint movement under thermal loading and against manufacturing defects.


B. Provide manufacturer’s 20-year warranty covering high performance fluoropolymer coating system covering color retention, adhesion and weather resistance to chalking and fading.


A. Verify actual supporting and adjoining construction by field measurements prior to fabrication.

B. Coordinate supporting and adjoining construction to ensure that sunshade and awning assemblies fit properly and are structurally supported as designed.

C. Schedule delivery to avoid delays in construction progress.

1. Where field dimensions cannot be made without delaying work provide guaranteed dimensions and proceed with fabrication of assemblies.

2. Coordinate related and supporting construction to ensure that assemblies fit properly and are structurally supported as designed using established dimensions.


A. Provide materials in accordance with Section 01600.

B. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01620.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements provide products as manufactured by the following approved manufacturers:

1. All-Lite Architectural Products 5101 Blue Mound Road Fort Worth, TX 76106 (817) 509-2300

2. AGS Inc. 9950 W. 190th Street Mokena, IL 60448 (708) 479-9458

3. Perfection Architectural Systems, Inc 2310 Mercator Drive Orlando Fl. 32807 (407) 671-6225

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-TB or T2.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, ally 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26 M, alloy 319.

D. Fasteners: Same as basic metal and alloy being fastened or 300 series stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.


1. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 2. Use types and sizes as indicated and to suit installation conditions. 3. Provide flat head Phillips, Torx or Allen type screws in matching color for exposed

fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

E. Bolts: 300 series stainless steel in size as required by design loading.

F. Drill-In Adhesive Anchor Systems: Hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water designed for fast curing in a wide range of solid base material temperatures from 104º F. to 23º F. developed as a system in conjunction with various bolt or threaded rod stud anchors.

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

H. Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity and product safety in order to meet the finished installation requirements.

2.3 FABRICATION GENERAL

A. Assemble canopy assemblies in factory to minimize field splicing and field assembly.

1. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation at job site.

B. Assemblies shall only be assembled in field under strict compliance with manufacturers written recommendations and instructions.

C. Maintain equal blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames to produce a uniform appearance.

D. Include supports, anchorage and accessories required for complete assembly.

2.4 FIXED ALUMINUM CANOPY FASCIA

A. Units shall be horizontal, fixed, extruded aluminum assemblies as indicated, designed to provide aesthetic appeal at new building entry portals, and complying with the following design characteristics:

1. Nosing: 12-inch deep rectangular aluminum tube. 2. Outriggers: Flat bar. 3. Connections: Semi-concealed aluminum tee and angle sections.

B. Units shall be designed to cantilever from face of exposed and concealed HSS tube steel headers as indicated using tee and angle shaped aluminum brackets bolted into drilled and tapped header sections.

1. Aluminum tee brackets shall be located as indicated. 2. Provide aluminum angle brackets at ends of assemblies to fit in vertical clearance

joint provided in building materials.

C. Assemblies shall be modular with end outriggers of adjacent units sandwiching the aluminum bracket and through bolted to secure canopy assembly to bracket.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Provide high performance fluoropolymer coating complying with AAMA 2605.


B. Prepare, pre-treat and apply coatings to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers written instructions.

C. All exposed components of assemblies shall be finished in dark bronze color to match dark bronze anodized aluminum finish specified in Section 08410 for aluminum entrances and storefront systems.

1. Final color will be selected by Contracting Officer or designated representative from manufacturer's full bronze color selection range of high performance fluoropolymer coatings.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION & COORDINATION

A. Inspect areas to receive canopy fascia assemblies for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work.

B. Coordinate Shop Drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions for:

1. Drilling and tapping HSS tube steel headers for receiving bracket anchor bolts.

C. Commence installation of assemblies only when all inspections have been made and it is verified that assemblies can be mounted as designed without binding or deformation of components.

D. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place cantilever fascia assemblies level and plumb, in strict compliance with approved Shop Drawings, and in alignment with adjacent construction.

B. Provide concealed and semi-concealed anchorages wherever possible.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding.

1. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. 2. Replace items that cannot be finished in the field to the satisfaction of the

Contracting Officer or designated representative.

E. Protect non-ferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coat of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, structural steel or dissimilar metals.


A. Protect assemblies from damage during construction with temporary protective coverings as approved by the sunshade/awning manufacturer.

B. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of assemblies that are not protected by temporary coverings to remove fingerprints and soil during installation.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and clean sunshade, fascia and awning assemblies in accordance with manufacturer’s written instruction.


D. Just prior to Substantial Completion perform final cleaning and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating furnished by the manufacturer to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

END 10711.

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10800 – TOILET ACCESSORIES

TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Toilet accessories and framed mirrors. b. Installation of AAFES furnished toilet accessories. c. Brackets, fastener plates, escutcheons and other miscellaneous trim items

furnished by toilet accessory manufacturer. d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for

complete installation. e. Rough hardware items needed for proper installation of work.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 6. Section 09300 – Tile. 7. Section 09900 – Painting. 8. Division 15 – Mechanical.

B. Backup blocking for toilet accessories is specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry and shall be provided in coordination with items specified in this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Comply with provisions of the “Americans with Disabilities Act” and the “Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards”.

B. ANSI specifications for toilet and bath accessories indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop drawings. 2. Product data. 3. Maintenance: data and operating instructions.


A. Deliver materials in accord with 01600.

B. Storage of materials shall be in accord with 01620.

2 PRODUCTS



A. Use only the specified products of the following manufacturers as indicated:

CODE MANUFACTURER

1. BOB Bobrick Washroom Equipment 2. GPAC Georgia-Pacific Professional 3. DYS Dyson

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel:

1. Type: 302/304, ASTM A 167. 2. Finish: No. 4, Satin.

B. Steel:

1. Cold rolled sheet: ASTM A 366, commercial quality. 2. Zinc-coated: ASTM A 123. 3. Chromium plating: ASTM B 456, Type SC 2.

C. Aluminum:

1. Extruded: 64-63-T5 alloy, anodized finish. 2. Sheet stock: 5005-H14.

D. Brass: Cast or forged quality alloy, FS WW-P-541.

E. Mounting Devices: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 386.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Locking units: Key alike for all accessories.

B. Weld corners, leaving no open miters.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect openings scheduled to receive recessed units for correct dimensions, plumbness of blocking or frames, preparation that would affect installation of accessories.

B. Inspect areas to receive surface-mounted units for conditions that would affect installation of accessories.

C. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures and toilet partitions that affect installation of accessories.

D. Do not begin installation of accessories until openings and surfaces are acceptable.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Drill holes to correct size and application so that they are concealed by item.


B. Mount accessories in accord with manufacturer’s instructions.


A. After completion of installation, clean and polish all exposed surfaces.

B. Deliver keys and instruction sheets to User.

3.4 SCHEDULE

A. Provide from one of the acceptable manufacturers the following products:

1. Straight Grab Bars: 18 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, 1-1/2” O.D., concealed mounting with 1/8” x 2” x 3 1/8 type 304 stainless steel mounting flange and 3 ¼” diameter, 22 gauge escutcheons, satin finish.

a. BOB: No. B-6806 x 36”.

2. Straight Grab Bars: 18 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, 1-1/2” O.D., concealed mounting with 1/8” x 2” x 3 1/8 type 304 stainless steel mounting flange and 3 ¼” diameter, 22 gauge escutcheons, satin finish.

a. BOB: No. B-6806 x 42”.

3. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Surface mounted, 18-8 S, type 304 heavy gauge stainless steel cabinet, 22-gauge stainless steel door secured to cabinet with piano-hinge and equipped with tumbler lock, 18-8 S, type 304 22-gauge disposal panel secured to door with spring-loaded piano hinge and displaying international graphic symbol, all furnished in satin finish with a removable leak-proof rigid molded polyethylene waste receptacle.

a. BOB: No. B-254.

4. Automatic hand dryer: Surface mounted, polycarbonate-ABS casing with antimicrobial molded additive in facia and blades, galvanized steel back plate and mounting bracket, mounted at height recommended for accessibility.

a. DYS: No. AB14 Gray.

5. Trash Receptacle: Recessed, 4” depth, 12-gallon removable trash receptacle, mounted at height recommended for accessibility.

a. BOB: No. B-3644.

6. Framed Mirror: Wall mounted, type 430 stainless steel, ½” x ½” x 3/8” channel with ¼” return at rear, bright polished finish, one-piece frame with 90 degree mitered corners, 20-gauge galvanized steel back, concealed mounting brackets and ¼” select float glass, triple silvered, electro-copper plated, guaranteed 10 years.

a. BOB: No. B-165 1836.

7. Baby Changing Table: Wall mounted, 35” wide x 20” high density polyethylene horizontal mount changing station, concave changing area with nylon safety straps, universal instruction graphics and multi-language safety message plus Braille, pneumatic cylinder control, mounted at height recommended for accessibility.

a. BOB (Koala Kare): No. KB200-01.


8. Utility Shelf and Mop Holder: 18-gauge, type 304 stainless steel shelf, satin finish, 34” long x 13” high with four (4) stainless steel hooks and three (3) spring-loaded rubber cam anti-slip mop holders.

a. BOB: No. B-239.

B. Provide installation of the following AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment (AF/CI):

1. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Surface mounted vertical double roll coreless dispenser with automatic drop-down feature.

a. GPAC: No. 56790.

2. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: Surface mounted 1/2-fold seat cover dispensing system.

a. GPAC: No. 57710.

3. Automatic Paper Towel Dispenser: Surface mounted automatic touchless towel dispenser, mounted at height recommended for accessibility.

a. GPAC: No. 59462.

4. Soap Dispenser: Surface mounted touch free dispenser by Ecolab.

C. Provide toilet accessories in areas listed below, at locations and mounting heights indicated and in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act.

1. Base bid:

a. Women’s MA-13

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

1.) Straight Grab Bar – 36” 1 2.) Straight Grab Bar – 42” 3 3.) Sanitary Napkin Disposal 7 4.) Automatic Hand Dryer 1 5.) Trash Receptacle 1 6.) Framed Mirror - 18"x36" 5 7.) Baby Changing Station 1 8.) Toilet Tissue Dispenser (AF/CI) 7 9.) Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser (AF/CI) 7 10.) Soap Dispenser (AF/CI) 4

b. Men’s MA-17


1.) Straight Grab Bar – 36” 1 2.) Straight Grab Bar – 42” 3 3.) Automatic Hand Dryer 1 4.) Trash Receptacle 1 5.) Framed Mirror - 18"x36" 4 6.) Baby Changing Station 1 7.) Toilet Tissue Dispenser (AF/CI) 4 8.) Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser (AF/CI) 4 9.) Soap Dispenser (AF/CI) 3


c. Men’s FC-26


1.) Straight Grab Bar – 36” 1 2.) Straight Grab Bar – 42” 1 3.) Trash Receptacle 1 4.) Framed Mirror - 18"x36" 1 5.) Toilet Tissue Dispenser (AF/CI) 1 6.) Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser (AF/CI) 1 7.) Automatic Paper Towel Dispenser (AF/CI) 1 8.) Soap Dispenser (AF/CI) 1

d. Women’s FC-27


1.) Straight Grab Bar – 36” 1 2.) Straight Grab Bar – 42” 1 3.) Sanitary Napkin Disposal 1 4.) Trash Receptacle 1 5.) Framed Mirror - 18"x36" 1 6.) Toilet Tissue Dispenser (AF/CI) 1 7.) Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser (AF/CI) 1 8.) Automatic Paper Towel Dispenser (AF/CI) 1 9.) Soap Dispenser (AF/CI) 1

e. Janitor FC-28


1.) Utility Shelf and Mop Holder 1 END 10800.

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 11400 – FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Complete installation of food service equipment to be Contractor Furnished and Contractor Installed (CF/CI).

b. Installation of all food service equipment indicated to be AAFES Furnished and Contractor Installed as scheduled (AF/CI).

c. Installation of all food service equipment indicated to be Vendor Furnished and Contractor Installed as scheduled (VF/CI).

d. Installation coordination of all food service equipment indicated to be AAFES Furnished and AAFES Installed as scheduled (AF/AI).

e. Installation of all food service equipment indicated to be furnished by any Concessionaire and Contractor Installed as scheduled.

f. Installation coordination of all food service equipment indicated to be furnished and installed by any Concessionaire.

g. Work related to AF/AI walk-in refrigeration systems including coordination with AAFES installer and provision of sprinkler systems, roof curbs and pipe/power portals in conjuction with other work for this Project.

h. Rough-in work for ALL food service equipment. i. Final connections between rough-ins and equipment for ALL hard-piped and

hard-wired food service equipment. j. Stainless steel wall panels with concealed fasteners not furnished with hoods

or as indicated to cover finished walls. k. Preliminary start-up, testing and calibration of equipment for ALL food service

equipment. l. Coordination of final equipment start-up and training conducted by AAFES.

2. Contractor provide all related equipment, accessories and labor including:

a. Plumbing work and connections to equipment:

1.) Final hard-piped connections to all equipment 2.) Fittings that are not an integral part of equipment. 3.) Drains. 4.) Natural gas lines, control valves and fittings. 5.) Water and waste lines including connections. 6.) Refrigerant lines including connections. 7.) Coordination of work with fire suppression system. 8.) All other work necessary to make equipment operational in

preparation for start-up.

b. Electrical work and connections to equipment:

1.) Final hard-wired connections to all equipment. 2.) Overload protection requirements. 3.) Wiring to starters. 4.) Panelboard rough-in and wiring for refrigerators and freezers. 5.) Interwiring for walk-in refrigerators and freezers. 6.) Lighting fixtures for walk-in refrigerators and freezers.


7.) All conduit, wiring, junction boxes. 8.) Coordination of fire suppression system with other work. 9.) All other work necessary to make equipment operational in

preparation for start-up.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included:

1. Food Service Equipment required for this work is indicated on the Drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:

a. Furnish all labor, materials and services necessary to complete the work of this Section.

b. Installation of all new Food Service equipment and appliances indicated Contractor Furnished/Contractor Installed, AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed, Vendor Furnished/Contractor Installed and Concessionaire Furnished/ Contractor Installed.

1.3 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 02070 – Selective Demolition. 3. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4. Section 05400 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 5. Division 6 – Wood & Plastics. 6. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 7. Division 9 – Finishes. 8. Section 11410 – Used Cooking Oil Equipment. 9. Division 15 – Mechanical. 10. Division 16 – Electrical.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, the following standards are applicable to the manufacture, fabrication, delivery and installation of equipment and other work covered in this section.

1. NSF Standards: Comply with National Sanitation Foundation standards and criteria, and provide NSF "Seal of Approval" on each manufactured item and on major items of custom-fabricated work.

2. U.L. Standards: For electrical components and assemblies, provide either U.L. labeled products or where no labeling service is available, "recognized markings" to indicate listing in the U.L. Recognized Component Index.

B. Food Service Equipment: All equipment, casework, shelving adn accessories intended for use here shall be provided per specified manufacture and will bear applicable seals of approval as outlined above.

C. Exhaust Elements: Refer to Division 15, Mechanical for provisions pertaining to exhaust hoods and related equipment.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. AAFES Provided Shop Drawings and Cut Sheets: AAFES or their Vendors will furnish Shop Drawings of the various Drink Station and Bag-in-Box equipment items furnished by them to be installed in the Project.

B. Contractor Provided Shop Drawings: Prior to commencement of installation the Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings indicating the following:

1. Floor plan(s) showing detailed dimensions for utility lines and equipment to a scale of ½-inch equals 1'-0".

a. These dimensions shall be taken from finished walls and columns and include all electrical and plumbing floor "stub-up", "out of wall" and "branch to connection (BTC)" notations for use in the field.

2. Floor plans, showing detailed dimensions for elevated bases, wall openings, locations of partitions and wall reinforcing as related to equipment supplied under this Section, to a scale of ½-inch equals 1'-0".

3. Dimensioned Equipment Construction Drawings indicating reinforcement, anchorage and other work required for completion and installation of equipment under this Section to a scale of 1-inch equals 1'-0".

4. Manufacturer's standard catalog cut sheets shall be submitted in a covered, bound booklet preceded by a corresponding cover sheet.

a. Each cover sheet shall include the item number, model number, manufacturer's name, required utilities, and all options and accessories specified.

b. Three (3) booklets shall be submitted for review.

5. Schedule of Equipment and Connections: A schedule similar to that shown on Drawings, including all remarks and general notes, shall be submitted as part of the electrical rough-in, mechanical rough-in, HVAC and base drawings.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Protection:

1. Protect metal finishes from damage during storage, handling, installation and construction of other work in the same spaces.

2. Wrap and crate each item of equipment as needed for protection from damage.

B. Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with self-adhesive protective paper, of a type recommended by the metal manufacturer, and do not remove until work is installed and ready for cleaning and start-up.

C. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Contracting Officer and at no additional cost to AAFES.

1.7 QUALIFICATION

A. To be considered eligible to work on this project, the Sub-Contractor for the work of this Section of the Specifications must:

1. Be a fully recognized Food Service Equipment Sub-Contractor currently engaged in the installation of standard manufactured and custom fabricated commercial Food Service Equipment for a period of five (5) years prior to submitting proposal.

2. Have successfully completed similar projects of the same Food Service Equipment dollar value and design scope within the last two (2) years.


2. PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Stainless steel: AISI type 302/304, hardest workable temper, No. 4 directional polish.

B. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 526, except ASTM A 527 for extensive forming; ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment. Where painted finish is indicated, provide mill phosphatized treatment in lieu of chemical treatment.

C. Steel sheet: ASTM A 569 hot-rolled carbon steel.

D. Galvanized steel pipe: ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 120, welded or seamless, schedule 40, galvanized.

E. Steel structural members: Hot rolled or cold formed, carbon steel unless stainless steel is indicated.

F. Galvanized finish: ASTM A 123 hot-dipped zinc coating, applied after fabrication.

G. Aluminum: ASTM B209/B221 sheet, plate and extrusions (as indicated); alloy, temper and finish as determined by manufacturer/fabricator, except 0.40 mill natural anodized finish on exposed work unless another finish is indicated.

H. CPVP Piping: Per requirements set forth in Section 15050.

2.2 FABRICATED PRODUCTS

A. Fabrication: All custom fabricated items shall be designed and constructed in consideration of stringent security requirements.

B. All details of construction will require items to be seamless with welded joints ground down and polished.

C. No loose or accessible fasteners such as nuts or bolts will be acceptable.

D. Wall Panels: All wall panels indicated shall be 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel finished with a 1/2" edge on exposed sides and shall be turned back to form 1/2" channel shape.

1. Edges shall be free from burrs and any excess material. 2. Corners shall be rounded. 3. Panels shall be cross-broke where required to prevent oil canning. 4. Provide concealed clips for attachment to wall surfaces and seal edges to wall

surface.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Equipment listed under "Schedules” of equipment shall match in every respect all mechanical and electrical requirements indicated.

B. The installation of all equipment shall be performed in strict accordance with the specifications and the approved printed directions of the Manufacturer.


C. Dimensions given herein are approximate only, and in all cases where equipment is intended to occupy fixed locations and spaces, the physical conditions of the building are to control the absolute sizes.

D. All penetrations in any work table or serving counter tops required to run mechanical services to any equipment items located on same shall be fitted with rubber grommets to protect these service lines.

E. Contractor to coordinate with all applicable trades.

3.2 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Inspection: Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

B. Discrepancies:

1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Contracting Officer. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such

discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. The installation of all food service equipment shall be performed under the supervision of an approved representative of the kitchen equipment sub-contractor and in strict accordance with the specifications and the approved printed directions of the manufacturer.

B. The installation of the galvanized steel duct for routing syrup lines from the Bag-in-Box to the two Drink Station locations shall be performed by or under the supervision of a sub-contractor familiar with installation and hanging of ductwork.

C. Cutting and Patching of Construction: Lay out the work in advance to prevent damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment.

D. Setting and Connecting:

1. Install equipment and chase piping plumb and level. 2. Except for mobile and adjustable-leg equipment, securely anchor and attach items

and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless steel bolts. 3. Seal around equipment flashing and flanges, at walls, floor, and ceiling in

accordance with security standards listed in Section 07920, Building & Paving Joint Sealers.

4. Contact fillers shall be continuous, without opening. 5. Provide escutcheons at locations where CPVC chase piping penetrates ceilings

and is visible and provide backer rod and sealant around penetrations through all party walls.

6. Provide 12" x 12" access panel frames (without doors) with drywall taping flanges where CPVC chase pipes terminate above floor behind or adjacent to Drink Stations to allow access for pulling syrup lines from Bag-in-Box to Drink Station locations.

E. Jointing and Anchoring:


1. Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place, leveled and adjusted to correct height.

2. Anchor to supporting surfaces where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation.

3. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. 4. Adjust surfaces to a level tolerance of 1/16" (maximum offset and plus-or-minus on

dimension and maximum variation of 2'-0" run from level or indicated slope). 5. Complete field assembly joints in the field (joints which cannot be completed in the

shop) by welding, grinding and polishing. 6. Treat enclosed spaces (inaccessible after equipment installation) by covering

horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at a rate of 4 oz. per square foot. 7. Install closure plates and strips where required with joints coordinated with units of

equipment. 8. Install sealants and gaskets around all penetrations to make joints air-tight, water-

proof, vermin-proof and sanitary for cleaning purposes.

a. In general, make sealed joints not less than 1/8" wide and stuff with backer rods to shape sealant bead properly at 1/4" depth.

b. Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave with edges flush with faces of materials at joint.

c. At internal corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cove, of not less than 3/8" joint width; metal closure strips for wider joints, with sealant application on each side of strip.

d. Anchor gaskets mechanically or with adhesives to prevent displacement.

F. Cleaning and Adjusting; Test and adjust equipment for proper operation.

1. Test rotating components and motors for proper rotation. 2. Lubricate moving parts if suggested by manufacturer's literature. 3. Prior to acceptance of the project, clean and sanitize equipment both inside and

outside.

3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. For the period during which other trades shall be on or near equipment and/or work covered by this Contract, this contractor shall cover and protect the exposed surfaces of such equipment.

1. Preclude injury to the finish by absorption of oil, grease, chemicals, etc., contact from tools and machinery, and from all other causes which may be incidental to operation performed in the area.

2. Should Contractor fail to protect his work in the specified manner, he shall absorb all expenses for such work.

3.5 CLEANING

A. When all the work covered by this Contract, together with the work of other trades has been completed, the Contractor shall clean each and every item of equipment so that all traces of grease, stains, protective coatings, abrasive dust, markings, scratches, and other foreign matter are completely removed.

B. The cleaning process shall be one which shall eliminate any further cleaning on the part of AAFES with the exception of that which would ordinarily be undertaken daily to maintain accepted standards of sanitation and appearance.


3.6 PRELIMINARY START-UP AND TESTING

A. Contractor shall perform preliminary start-up and testing of all equipment prior to turning equipment over to AAFES.

B. All defects disclosed by the tests shall be eliminated to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and the corrected areas retested.

C. Provide necessary technicians, materials, and equipment required to conduct these tests.

D. A statement shall be furnished by the Contractor showing the schedule of testing, date, and results.

3.7 START-UP, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall make arrangements for a representative of AAFES to be present at a start-up, testing and adjustment of the various systems unless other arrangements are made with AAFES for CF/CI and AF/CI equipment in accordance with provisions of Section 01650, Systems Start-up.

B. AAFES will make provisions for properly trained authorized personnel to demonstrate to the operators the operation of all equipment including refrigeration systems.

1. Contractor shall provide a sign-up sheet for start-up training sessions signed by all in attendance.

a. Sheet shall be dated and include description/purpose of session. b. Following information shall be recorded:

1.) Name of each person in attendance and receiving training. 2.) Title or responsibility of each person in attendance. 3.) Name of organization each person is representing. 4.) Business telephone and e-mail contact information for each person in

attendance.

c. Submit copy of sign-up sheet in each set of bound manuals submitted at Project Close-out per requirements of Section 01770.

2. Contractor shall record minutes of all training sessions and submit in manuals along with sign-up sheets.

C. In addition, four (4) complete printed copies of equipment cut sheets, shop drawings and other technical data shall be furnished to AAFES with O & M manuals covering the operation and maintenance of all equipment.

1. A covered, bound booklet containing Manufacturer's current printed Installation/Operation/Maintenance/Parts manuals for all equipment hereinafter specified (including all accessories, components, faucets, etc.).

2. Each manual shall be clearly labeled with their respective item number designation as hereinafter specified.

3. Booklet shall include a Table of Contents listing each equipment item included within the booklet, complete with corresponding item number, quantity and description as hereinafter specified.

END 11400.

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 11410 – USED COOKING OIL EQUIPMENT

USED COOKING OIL EQUIPMENT 11410 -1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Double walled used cooking oil storage tank with secondary containment. b. Caddy transport system. c. Direct plumbed fryer manifolds and piping. d. Control panel, branch circuiting and wiring connections to equipment. e. Through wall sleeve, connectors, hoses, piping and all accessory items

necessary to install and operate a used cooking oil collection system with exterior vendor collection capability.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 04200 – Unit Masonry. 3. Section 07920 – Building & Paving Joint Sealers. 4. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall Systems. 5. Section 09300 – Tile. 6. Section 11400 – Food Service Equipment. 7. Division 15 – Plumbing. 8. Division 16 – Electrical.


A. Manufacturer’s of used cooking oil collection system equipment shall be currently UL approved for the design, manufacturing, assembly, distribution, marketing, sales, customer and technical support of systems and equipment for industrial and commercial applications.

B. Supplier of all equipment shall have successfully completed not less than five (5) similar projects of size, dollar value and design scope within the past three (3) years.

C. Installer of equipment shall be certified by the equipment manufacturer for installation, servicing and testing of equipment specified under this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data on each item of new equipment furnished:

a. Manufacturer’s standard cut-sheets indicating specific product, model number, accessories and other pertinent information.

b. Technical information sheets indicating physical size, delivery volumes and maximum capacity of system.

c. Control wiring, piping requirements and other pertinent requirements. d. Installation and operating instructions.


2. Shop drawings indicating the following:

a. Floor plan showing detailed dimension and sizes or requirements for discharge lines, electrical connections and equipment to a scale of ¼” = 1’-0”.

1.) Floor plan shall provide exact dimensional information from existing and new walls for equipment and electrical rough-ins including stub-up, out-of-wall and branch to connection notations for use in field layout and construction.

2.) Floor plan shall be coordinated with other equipment, including Food Service Equipment not furnished under this section to determine fryer connection points and avoid conflicts with operation of all equipment.

3.) Indicate detailed dimensions for wall opening requirements related to equipment supplied under this Section.

b. Dimensioned equipment construction drawings indicating anchorage and other work required for completion and installation of equipment furnished under this Section.

c. Provide a detailed schedule of equipment, accessory items included, piping and electrical requirements including all remarks and general notes required for plumbing and electrical rough-ins.

3. Samples for selection purposes for standard finishes of products and accessories furnished under this Section where variations are available from manufacturers.


A. Deliver and store equipment items and accessories in accord with Section 01620.

B. Protect equipment finishes from damage during shipping, receiving, storage, handling, installation and construction of other work.

1. Wrap and crate each item of equipment as necessary for protection from damage prior to installation.

C. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Contracting Officer or designated representative.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide a written warranty for defects in system, including oil pumps, related to manufacturing for a period of one (1) year after date of Substantial Completion.

B. Defects shall be repaired or faulty equipment replaced immediately during the warranty period after written notice at no cost to the Government.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the following provide complete double walled used cooking oil tank, collection and caddy transport system as manufactured by Frontline International, Inc., 95 16th Street SW, Barberton, OH 44203.

B. Double Walled Storage Tank:

1. Provide Frontline model number 4280-DCI-NA-DP double walled tank with secondary containment.


a. Storage tank shall be double walled with secondary containment built into the tank with 115 percent secondary containment of used oil products in compliance with all environmental, fire protection and health laws, rules and regulations set forth by Federal, State and local enforcement agencies.

b. Tank shall be free standing and have heavy gauge aluminum exterior.

1.) Outside diameter: 42-inches. 2.) Height: 80-inches.

2. Tank storage capacity shall be 2,378 pounds/317 gallons. 3. Tank shall be equipped with an energy-saving immersion heater system and

remote located control panel with dual-level sensor, power loss indicator and other features to ensure safe operation.

C. Grease Caddy:

1. Provide Frontline model number 10SS-NA grease caddy with 1/2 horse power motorized pump rated at 5 gallons per minute capacity.

a. Caddy shall be heavy duty stainless steel construction designed for safe and convenient transfer of used cooking oil products from fryer equipment to storage tank.

1.) Width: 12-inches. 2.) Length: 30-inches. 3.) Height: 9 ½-inches.

b. Caddy shall be designed in compliance with all environmental, fire protection and health laws, rules and regulations set forth by Federal, State and local enforcement agencies.

c. Caddy shall have heavy-duty, non-mark castors with swivel front castors and brakes, large crumb catcher basket, power switch and break away power cord, removable handle and lockable safety cover.

2. Grease caddy storage capacity shall be 75 pounds/10 gallons. 3. Grease caddy shall be equipped with a motor and durable pump with 5 gallon per

minute capacity. 4. Provide manufacturer’s standard quick-connectors for safe and easy transfer of

used cooking oil into storage tank.

D. Provide all other accessory items including, but not limited to:

1. Provide Frontline model number 10030018 direct plumbed manifold kits, (1) for each fryer.

a. Plumbing shall be furnished as indicated on Plumbing Drawings for remote pumping of used cooking oil from fryers to storage tank.

b. Provide all piping, fittings and other accessories necessary to complete piping system.

2. Provide Frontline model INS inside installation kit designed to pipe from the storage tank through the exterior wall as indicated for used grease pick up by independent vendor.

a. Provide piping from tank to exterior nozzle location indicated in wall adjacent to the Receiving entrance door as indicated.

b. Provide accessory items including through-wall sleeve, recessed escutcheon plates at wall penetration, cam fitting designed to be compatible for service vehicle hose connection and cam dust cap to hide nozzle when not in use.


c. Provide all piping, fittings and other accessories necessary to complete piping system.

E. Provide sealants as specified in Section 07920 to seal pipe penetration and prevent infiltration of air to interior of building.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect work of all other trades to which equipment is related for correct dimensions, plumbness, level and preparation that would affect installation.

1. Verify that all such work is complete to the point where installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that any variation in items of construction that would hinder or prohibit continuous and proper installation of equipment of this Section has been rectified.

B. Coordinate with masonry subcontractor for routing, sealing and trimming discharge pipe penetration through new concrete masonry infill.

C. Inspect areas to receive surface-mounted unit for conditions that would affect installation and proper use of system and accessories.

D. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies in other work, notify Contracting Officer or designated representative immediately in writing.

E. Do not proceed with installation of equipment in areas of variation or discrepancy until all such problems have been fully resolved.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. The installation and erection of the used cooking oil collection system equipment specified in this section shall be performed under the supervision of an approved representative of the equipment manufacturer and in strict accordance with the written instructions of that manufacturer and the approve Shop Drawings.

B. Cutting and Patching of Construction: Lay out the work in advance to prevent damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment.

C. Setting and Connecting: Install equipment plumb and level.

1. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or other surfaces with fasteners as recommended by equipment manufacturer for type of substrate.

2. Seal around equipment flanges at walls and floors in accordance with Section 07920 to prevent liquids from penetrating substrates.

3. Contact fillers shall be continuous, without opening.

D. Service Lines and Equipment Connections: Provide piping connections and wiring systems to standards specified in plumbing and electrical specifications for piping and electrical work including equipment connections.

1. Install piping connections and discharge outlets at equipment, with air gaps, vacuum breakers and similar provisions to comply with governing regulations, but not less than compliance with ANSI Standards A.40.4 and A.40.6 and the National Plumbing Code.


2. Provide escutcheons at exposed penetrations through interior and exterior wall assemblies and at ceilings.

3. Assemble electrical components of equipment in accordance with National Electric Code.

E. Jointing and Anchoring:

1. Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place, leveled and at correct height indicated on approved Shop Drawings.

2. Anchor to supporting surfaces where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation.

3. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. 4. Complete assembly joints in the field that cannot be completed in the shop. 5. Install closure plates and strips where required with joints coordinated with units of

equipment.

F. Cleaning and Adjusting; Test and adjust equipment for proper operation.

1. Test rotating components, motors and pumps for proper function. 2. Lubricate moving parts if suggested by manufacturer's literature. 3. Test valves, meters and gauges for accuracy and calibrate prior to Substantial

Completion of Project.

G. Prior to acceptance of the project, clean and sanitize equipment both inside and outside.

3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK:

A. For the period during which other trades are on or near equipment and/or work covered by this Section, Contractor shall:

1. Cover and protect the exposed surfaces of equipment. 2. Preclude injury to the finish by absorption of chemicals, contact from tools and

machinery, and from all other causes which may be incidental to operations performed in the area by other trades.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for repair or replacement of damaged equipment or systems specified in this Section.

3.4 CLEANING:

A. When work of this Section and work of other trades has been completed, Contractor shall clean equipment so that all traces of grease, stains, protective coatings, abrasive dust, markings, scratches, and other foreign matter are completely removed.

B. The cleaning process shall eliminate any further cleaning on the part of the Government with the exception of that which would ordinarily be undertaken daily to maintain accepted standards of cleanliness and appearance.

3.5 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION:

A. Contractor shall schedule testing and calibration of equipment

B. Testing and calibration of all equipment shall be performed by Contractor prior to demonstration of equipment operation and maintenance by AAFES personnel.

1. Provide necessary technicians, materials, and equipment required to conduct these tests and accurately calibrate equipment.


2. All defects disclosed by the tests shall be eliminated to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or designated representative and the corrected areas retested.

3. Furnish documentation of testing, date and results as part of submittal of Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified in Section 01720.

C. AAFES will demonstrate equipment operation and maintenance procedures to employees under direction and as coordinated by the Contractor and in accordance with Section 01650., attended by the following:

1. Authorized representative of manufacturer of equipment installed in the Project. 2. Authorized representatives of AAFES who’s responsibility will be to operate and/or

maintain the equipment. 3. Contracting Officer or designated representative. 4. Contractor and subcontractors performing work that could affect the operation and

maintenance of this equipment.

D. Contractor shall remedy any issues of operation by repairing or replacing defective equipment and workmanship to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer, designated representative and the AAFES Food Court Manager.

E. Contractor shall provide documentation to confirm demonstration of equipment operation and maintenance procedures in accordance with the requirements of Section 01650 and provide proof of satisfactory operations to be signed by:

1. AAFES Contracting Officer or representative. 2. Contractor. 3. Manufacturer’s representative.

END 11410.

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 12690 – FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12690-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:


a. Recessed aluminum base frames. b. Latex screed. c. Recessed rail and insert system. d. All equipment, fasteners, miscellaneous items and other means necessary for

complete installation. e. Rough hardware items needed for proper installation of work.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Division 3 – Concrete. 3. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 09300 – Tile.

B. Refer to related building slab concrete work for installation of mat and frame recesses during floor pouring as specified in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.

C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include frames for floor mats set in concrete floor slabs during placement of concrete work.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain floor mats and frames from one source from a single manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Section 01340.

B. Product data for each type of floor mat and frame specified including:

1. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. 2. Details of construction relative to materials. 3. Dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.

C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of floor mat and frames.

1. Show full-scale sections of typical installations, details of patterns or designs, anchors, and accessories.

2. Coordinate shop drawing submittal with concrete work shop drawings and show oversized recess for deferred installation of frames.

D. Samples for selection purposes:

1. Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of floor mat and frame materials.


2. Provide full range of colors, textures, finishes and patterns available for each type of floor mat and frame indicated.

E. Maintenance data in form of manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning and maintaining floor mats.


A. Layout: Exact dimensions shall be determined for floor mat frames to be placed in concrete prior to forming and pouring concrete floor slab.

1. Concrete floor slabs will be exposed in the final polished floor finish. 2. There will be zero tolerance for adjustment of dimension, distortion or orientation of

the floor mat recesses after exposed concrete is poured.

B. Field Measurements: Check actual depressed concrete openings for mats by accurate field measurements before fabrication.

1. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. 2. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 3. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee

opening dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field measurements. 4. Coordinate floor construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions and heights of

finish floor materials correspond to guaranteed dimensions.

2 PRODUCTS


A. Floor Mat and Frame Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

MANUFACTURER PRODUCTS

1. Construction Specialties, Inc. G4 Peditred P.O. Box 380 Muncy, PA 17756, (570) 546-5941

2. Use latex screed at recess in floor slab to receive entrance grid as manufactured by Mapei Corporation, 1144 E. Newport Center Drive, Deerfield Beach, Florida 33442.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide colors, patterns, and profiles of materials, including vinyl, rubber, metals and metal finishes, as indicated.

B. Aluminum - ASTM B 221, alloy 6105-T5 and 6105-T6 for extrusions.

C. Floor Mat:

1. Model: G4 Peditred shall be extruded 6105-T5 aluminum alloy tread rails joined by an EPDM hinge and cushion to compromise the overall grid length.

a. Rail finish to be clear anodized aluminum.

D. Mat Frame:

1. LB - Level Base Frame shall be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy with 1/4" exposed surface and a depth of 1".


a. Black EPDM filler trims shall be furnished as required when standard 1 1/2” tread spacing cannot be maintained.

b. Frame color shall be clear anodized aluminum.

E. Tread Inserts:

1. RR- Recycled Rubber ECO Surfaces® Recycled Rubber Insert:

a. High slip resistant rubber (SC of 90) insert. b. Manufactured with recycled rubber and EPDM - 26%-90% dependent on color

chosen. c. Color: 905 Granite Run.

F. Latex Screed: Latex screed shall be Ultraplan Renovation Screed, two-part smoothing/leveling compound.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop-fabricate units of floor mat work to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated.

B. Provide single unit for each mat installation designed for removal from recess for cleaning.

C. Where joints in mats and end filler strips are necessary, space symmetrically in recessed frame.

1. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.

2. Verify sizes by field measurements before shop fabrication.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install latex screed per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

1. Coordinate thickness with grid height to ensure top of grid is level with finished floor.

B. Install recessed frames and grids to comply with manufacturer's instructions, at locations indicated.

C. Top of frames and grids shall be installed in proper relationship to one another and to adjoining finished flooring.

D. Set grid at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action.

E. Coordinate top of grid surfaces with doors that swing across mats to provide under-door clearance.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Upon completion of frame installations and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses.

1. Cover frames with protective material. 2. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and project is near time of

Substantial Completion.

B. Defer installation of floor mats until near time of Substantial Completion for project.

END 12690